ANNUAL REPORT t

ON THE WORK OF THE

Biological Board of Canada

FOR THE YEAR 1929.30

OPERAtING UNDER THE CONTROL OF 1-ION. E. N. RHODES MINISTER OF FISHERIES

OTTAWA F. A. ACLAND PRINTER TO THE KING'S MOST EXCELLENT MAJESTY 1930

. . . • ; ; .‘

REPORT OF THE WORK OF THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA FOR 1929-30

The Bioloàical Board, which operates under the control of the minister and acts as the Scientific Division of the Fisheries Department, was créated in 1912 by an Act of Parliament. For ten years the membership of the board consisted entirely of scientists, and two stations for purely scientific and fundamental research were operated for a few months yearly. In 1923 the Act was amended with a view to bringing the board into closer contact with the department and the practical problems of the fishing industry. Under the amended Act the board now consists partly of scientific men, partly of departmental officers, and partly of men from the industry. With this new organization, the board now employs a permanent staff of scientists and operates five research stations. Three stations are principally concerned with the more purely scientific and fundamental problems, while the other two, which are, known as Fisheries Experimental Stations, deal with problems arising in connection with the handling and preservation of fish. Three of the stations are located on the Atlantic coast; the Biological Station at St. Andrews, N.B., the Eastern Passage Laborat,ory at the entrance to Halifax harbour, and the Atlantic Fisheries Experimental Station at Halifax, N.S.• Two are on the Pacific coast; the Pacific Biologi' cal Station at Nanaimo, B.C., and the Pacific Fisheries Experimental Station at Prince Rupert, B.C. In addition, a field station for the investigation of the sockeye salmon is maintained at Cultus lake, B.C., and by courtesy of the University of Mani- toba laboratory facilities are provided for carrying on investigations of the fisheries of the prairie lakes. The board during the year 1929-30 was composed of the following:— : Prof. J. P. McMurrich, Toronto, Chairman. J. J. Cowie, Ottawa, Secretary-'rreasurer. Prof. Philip Cox, Fredericton, N.B. Prof: A. T. Cameron, Winnipeg, Man. Prof. C. J. Connolly, Antigonish, N.S. John Dybhavn, Prince Rupert, B.C. • Prof. J. N. Gowanloch, Halifax, N.S. Prof. A. H. Hutchinson, Vancouver, B.C. - Prof. W. T. MacClement, Kingston, Ont. Prof. Marie-Vict&in, Montreal, P.Q. . . Prof'. H. G. F•erry, Wolfville, N.S. 'Prof. E. E. Prince, Ottawa, Ont. Prof. W. P. Thompson, Saskatoon, Sask. Dr: R. C. Wallace, Edmonton, Alta. A. Ilandfield Whitman, Halifax, N.S. Prof. A. Willey, Montreal, P.Q. • Prof. Alexandre Vachon, Quebec. • J. A. Rodd, Ottawa, Ont. 188fli ' — en nr4 4 THE ATLANTIC BIOLOGICAL STATION, ST. ANDREWS, N.B.

STAFF Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Director. Mr. H. B. Hachey, Assistant Hydrographer. Dr. R. H. M'Gonigle, Assistant Pathologist. Mr. A. W. Needler, Scientific Assistant in Marine Biology. Mr. R. A. McKenzie, Scientific Assistant in Limnobiology. Mr. H. C. White, Scientific Assistant in Aquiculture. Mr. M. W. Smith, Scientific Assistant in Limnobiology. Miss M. S. Rigby, Secretary. Mr. E. G. Rigby, Curator. Mr. C. A.. Young, Assistant to Curator. Mr. A. E. Calder, Master of Boat and Collector. The Atlantic Biological Station is situated in the midst of the most con- centrated shore fisheries of the Atlantic coast (and perhaps of the world); since no other similar stretch of that coast has anything like as great fisheries in either poundage or value as have the waters of Charlotte county, New Brunswick. IMPROVED FACILITIES During the year facilities for carrying on investigations at the Station have been bettered in a number of respects. For the first time accommoda- tibn has been provided for workers with families, who would not otherwise leave their homes to undertake work during prolonged periods. For these a double cottage with housekeeping arrangements has been erected. A large open tidal pool has been constructed on the foreshore in front of the laboratory to improve the salt water supply to the laboratory and for experimental pur- poses. A small cove, which drains at low tide, situated at the head of Passa- maquoddy Bay, has been dammed off to permit of the construction at reason- able cost of a series of enclosed tidal pools, in which can be studied the effects of varying tidal interchange and fresh-water inflow, which determine the suitability of inlets for oysters and other important forms living in estuaries. A small building, formerly used for pumping and power equipment has been enlarged and remodeled to make a two-storey- thirty-six feet by forty feet Fish Handling building. In this has been installed refrigerating equip- ment of new design, based upon the principles developed in the board's investi- gations of freezing and storage. An automatic, electrically driven, self-contained ammonia unit with a capacity of seven tons of refrigeration per day operates a trapped and jacketed cold storage space. Built in the jacket is a biine tank available for freezing at any time any quantity of fish per day up to the limit of the capacity of ammonia unit.

EXPERIMENTAL SALE OF ICE FILLETS During the year for the experiment in the Toronto market a fairly steady, but limited, supply of the new ice fillets has been put up with the simple. primitive .equipment, which alone has hitherto been available--hand machines for making the cakes, small ice and salt tanks for freezing, and a small, anti- quated experimental freezer for storage. An automatic machine for making the cakes has been developed and is now ready for final testing. An auto- matic freezer has been in process of development. Ice fillets of the following varieties have been put up for experimental trial—haddock, cod, pollock, hake, gray flounder, Canadian plaice, witch, and salmon. Small herring have been put up in cakes similar to the ice fillets, and sold as breakfast herring, in an effort to put the " sardines " on the lucrative fresh fish market. The sale of ice fillets in the Toronto market, although successful from the start in Janu- ary, 192g, is still being carefully followed as à most important sales experi- ment. Over fifty tons have been' sold at standard high prices through the very few channels properly equipped to handle the product. . On request an .effort ha,s been made to ensure the maintenance of a high quality through super- vising inspection.' Rapid expanSion of the sales ha s been held back • (1) by lack of a full and steady supply of the most desired varieties, (2) by the virtual absence of advertising, which the firms concerned could profitably undertake only when able to distribute to the ultimate consumer widely* and regularly, and (3) by the inadequacy of the present commercial methods and equipment for properly storing and distributing frozen fishery products. The mere demon- stration of the character and extent of this inadequacy; apart from the intro- duction of a new, product and the general stimulus to the fish trade, has made the experiment very well worth while.' - a- BIOLOGICAL SURVEYS ce er Perhaps the first function of the Stations is the making of a biological survey of the waters. In this field Prof. P. M. Bayne, of Acadia University, has' been studying and cornparing the life of the various parts of the Bay of Fundy and in 1929 examined into the conditions at the mouth of that bay on the Nova Scotian side, incidentally reporting upon thelbait situation in St. Mary bay. Miss V. M. Davidson, of the Toronto High School of Commerce, has now a- been able to demonstrate from studies lasting for some years' that the amount se of light from the suh, low at.the winter solstice and high at the summer solstice, a is almost the only thing to set a limit to the production of vegetable plankton (the - primary food for fishes) in Passamaquoddy bay and the adjacent part of ithe bay of Fundy, so fundamentally rich are these waters. Mr. C. L. Newcombe, r- a former graduate of Acadia University, has made a quantitative survey of the a- various kinds of life produced at different levels and on different kinds of bottom as exposed at low tide in the extensive foreshore of the district. A hydrographical ts and biological survey was made of the waters in the vicinity of Churchill, re Manitoba, by Mr. F. Johansen in connection with the general program for .s. studying conditions in Hudson bay and Strait.

,y WATER CLIMATE Surveys of the water climate or hydrography of the coast form also an important function of the Station. 'The hydrographer, Mr. H. B. Hachey, has a installed thermographs (for the continuous record of water temperatures) on two vessels of the Canadian National Steamships line from Halifax to Bermuda, it . and the West Indies, has established six stations for the regular recording of temperatures and weather observations at light houses and light ships from Grand Manan at the mouth of the bay of Fundy to Scatari island, Cape Breton, and has studied the source and distribution of the cold rich water at the mouth of Passamaquoddy bay and the tides of the latter in connection with the project to dam it for power purposes. Mr. J. M. Morton, the Assistant for Technical c. Processes, tested the sea water for the fertilizing phosphates, finding them ;s abundant where the deep •water was being brought to the surface and also in the shallow water at the heads of estuaries. Dr. R. 11. M'Gonigle, Pathologist, found that the purity of the water of the region, as judged by tests for sulphuretted 1- hydrogen, is uniformly quite high, and that there is no indication that industrial g plants affect the purity to any appreciable degree, owing to the strong tidal action. Professor A. B. Klugh, of Queen's University, was able to measure the amount of important ultraviolet light coming from the sun, and Mr. R. Sawyer, of McGill University, made determinations of the extent to which various rays of the sun's light can penetrate the sea water to bring about the growth of vegetable matter or to act injuriously on various forms of life. 18841-2 6

LIFE-HISTORIES OF FISHES Attention has been given to individual fishes in studies of their life-histories I (migrations, spawning habits, growth, etc.) Mr. A. W. H. Needler, of the 1 University of Toronto, has nearly completed his investigations of the haddock, ' in which he has been able to demonstrate the occurrence of three geographical stocks or races differing in their distribution, growth characters, and habits. Mr. G. W. Jeffers, of State Teachers College, Farmville, Virginia, has studied the capelin and the cod as they occur together in the strait of Belle Isle. Mr. R. B.i Kerr, of the University of Toronto, has begun work on the growth of the Canadian Atlantic salmon, in particular those of the St. John and Miramichi rivers. Miss H. Cameron and Miss H. Reid, of the University of New Bruns- wick, have been studying the distribution and growth of the white perch and sunfish, respectively. LIMITING FACTORS A number of investigators have been busied with experiments to determine the significance of certain physical conditions for aquatic life. Dr. K. E. Carpenter undertook an analysis of the water supply of the Station to determine vv-hether metals from the pipes were responsible for the death of trout and salmon fry. Dr. M'Gonigle has begun a general investigation of the factors that give trouble in attempts to rear fish in confinement for cultural purposes. Professor Klugh determined the effect of ultraviolet light from the sun on various marine forms, and also the ability of a number of kinds of sea plants to make use of the various rays in the sun's light for their growth, which deter- mines at what depths they can live below the surface of the water. Mr. M. H. Friedman, of McGill University, tested the ability of species of shrimp from different levels to withstand freezing temperatures.

DISEASES OF FISH The diseases of fish were given attention, Dr. M'Gonigle taking up the matter of a disease that has appeared among the salmon of Canada for the first time (so far as known) and from the St. Lawrence to the St. John. Miss A. Alley, of the University of Toronto, investigated a disease in the herring of the bay of Fundy, that threatened to develop to serious proportions.

PIIYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF FISH • Professor A. D. Ritchie, of Manchester University, studied the physiology of the muscular system of the giant scallop, and Prof. B. Babkin, of McGill University, and Dr. G. S. Eadie, of Johns Hopkins University, the physiology of the digestive system of various fishes. Miss B. MacDonald, of Dalhousie University, undertook a study of the structure and development of the muscle in fishes, this being the principal part that is used as food.

DECOMPOSITION OF FISH Miss A. Bennie, of Queen's University, isolated forty-six cultures of bacteria from the skin and gut of the haddock in order to determine their ability to grow at low temperatures such as occur in iced fish. Many of them were found to grow well at such low temperatures and should, therefore, be kept from infecting the fish. Mr. N. E. Gibbons, of Queen's University, investigated the effects of such baCteria in decomposing the flesh of the haddock. Mr. Morton investigated the effectiveness of disinfecting the surface of gutted and ungutted .fish with various strengths of formaldehyde and chlorine solutions, some of which were found to definitely delay decomposition although not allowed to act long enough to reach the flesh of the fish. 7

COOKING OF FISH • ies I Miss D. Dow, of the University of Toronto, tested a large number of recipes ;he 1 for the cooking of Ice Fillets and was able to recommend the majority of these ck, as satisfactory. She also investigated the effect of the heat of cooking on the cal consistency of the flesh of the haddock, finding that for a time at lower tempera- Ir. tures the flesh actually becomes firmer, though at high temperatures it softens ,he rapidly. B. FOOD VALUE OF MARINE PRODUCTS he chi Miss M. R. Butler began a study of the chemical composition of a number is- of kinds of algae with a view to determining their suitability for human food, nd particular attention being directed to iodine and carbo-hydrate content.

FISH CULTURE

ne Mr. H. C. White, aquiculturist, made a survey of the various sources of water in the district, principally from springs with regard to their suitability for E. an experimental hatchery. He also followed up conditions in the Chamcook ne lake system, including the hydrography and plankton of several of the lakes, nd the fate of planted salmon fry, and the migrations of young eels up from, and lat old eels down to the sea. A study of the food of young trout, salmon and stickle- es. backs in the waters of Prince Edward Island has been continued. Mr. M. W. on ;Smith, Limnobiologist, has studied in detail the physical and biological condi- tO tions in experimental stagnant ponds with and without fertilizers, with a view to their use in rearing fish fry. Mr. A. W. H. Needier, Marine Biologist, began an investigation of the oyster fisheries of Prince Edward Island with the object Of developing rational cultural practice. A survey was first made to determine the most suitable place for the principal experiments and the Bideford river ; was selected. Wire baskets containing clean mussel and oyster shells were dis- itributed systematically to determine the localities and depths for the principal he set of the oyster spat. Experimental beds were cleaned and planted with spat he and with large oysters, and investigations were made of the hydrography of iss Bideford river, of the possibility of restocking Savage harbour, of the distribution of of oysters of various sizes, and of the reported occurrence of disease in a bed of oysters. THE FISHERIES OF INLAND WATERS In Ontario Mr. E. S. Pentland began in November a study of certain fresh- water shrimps (Gammarus) with the object of developing means for their culture l as fish food. Fifteen localities were. examined. as to the. presence. . and• . abundance of the kinds and as to the physical conditions. Experimental work is proceed- gY je ing in the laboratories of the University of Toronto. le Dr. D. S. Rawson, of the University of Saskatchewan, has organized a survey of the principal lakes and streams in the Prince Albert National Park with a view to the conservation and improvement of the fisheries there. Mr. A. Bajkov has completed an extensive study of the whitefish of the Manitoban lakes. He estimates that the whitefish population of these lakes ja has remained fairly constant, that of lak.e Winnipeg at abbut 6,000,000 individ- lw uals, that of ldke Winnipegosis at 2,000,000 and that of lake Manitoba at about to 500,000. A quantitative estimate of the food supply available indicates that lg the lakes are capable of supporting a very much greater population of these fish, of but the mortality of the eggs spawned under natural conditions is exceedingly cd high. It is concluded that the productivity of the lakes can be considerably th increased by artificial fish culture, provided the fry are cared for over a period re of at least one month, the highest mortality being apparently just subsequent ,h to hatching. no considerable ■ The available evidence seems to indicate that 3 migration of whitefish takes place from one of these lakes to another. 18841-21 W • .1.1.1.â6Ine.

.8

Observations have also been made on the food, rate of growth, spawning, etc., of the pickerel in these lakes, the results of which will be presented in a later 'report. An examination of a number of pickerel" was made to determine the frequency of occurrence in them of the immature shape of a • tape-worni knbwn to infect human beings. In 300 fish from lake Winnipeg infection was found in 1 per cent, but in fish from lake Manitoba the infection was someivhat higher. The number of fish examined from the latter lake was, however, too J. few for definite results. It is hoped that. investigations now being carried on at the University of Manitoba and 'elsewhere will result in a knowledge of the complete life-history of the parasite and will give an indication of means that may be taken to counteract the infection. In connection with the planting of whitefish and cisco in the alkaline Quill lakes of Saskatchewan a small -experimental hatchery was set up and eggs of both species were fertilized in the alkaline water. About 90 per cent of the eggs- latched out vigorous and normal fry, and the experiment indicates that both :these species may complete their life-histories in the Quill lakes.. ' el! . . PAPERS PUBLISHED DURLNG 1929 The following papers on work done in connection with the Station have been published:— Battle, H. I.—A note on lethal temperature in connection with skate reflexes. Contr. Canad. Biology and Fisheries, NS., Vol. IV, No. 31. _Battle, H. I.—Temperature coefficients for the rate of death of the muscle in Raja erinacea LL (Mitchill) at high temperatures. Contr. Caned. Biol. and Fish., Na, Vol. IV; No. 32. Effects of extreme temperatures and salinities on the development of Enchelyopus cimbrius (L.), Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish. N.S., Vol. V, No. 6. Berrill, N. J.—The ‘-alidity of Lophius americanus Val, as a species distinct from L. pisca- torius Lion., with notes on the rate of development. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish. N.S. ol. IV, No. 12. Digestion in ascidians and the influence of temperature. Brit. Journ. Exper. Biol., •Vol. VI, No. 3. Burwash, Frances M.—The iodine content of the thyroid of two species of Elasmobranchs and one species of Teleost. Contr. Can. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 9._ Connolly, C. J.—A new copepod parasite Choniospaera cancrorum, gen. it. sp.n., represent- ing a new genus, and its larval development. Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond. 1929. Coulthard, H. S.—Growth of the sea mussel. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 10. Duff, G. L.—Factors involved in the• production of annual zones in the scales of the cod (Gadus callarias Linnaeus) Contr. Gonad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 21. Harvey, J. M.—The action of light on Calanus finmarchicus (Gunner) as determined by its effect on the heart rate. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. V, No. 4, Hayes, F. R.—Contributions to the study of marine Gastropods. III. Development, growth, and behaviour of Littorina. Contra. Canad. Biol. and Fish., NS., Vol. IV, No. 26. Henderson, J. T.—Lethal temperatures of Lamellibranchiata. Contra. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No, 25. Huntsman, A. G.—Frozen fish the freshest. Institute Bull. May, 1929. Koch, L. W.—Notes on Canadian Rotifera, Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S.,-Vol. IV, No. 5, . Klugh, A. B.—The effect of the ultra-violet cOmponent of sunlight on certain marine • organisms. Can. Journ. of Res., Vol. I, No. 1. McKay, M. E.—The digestive sy-stem of the eel pout (Zoarces anguillaris). Biol. Bull. Vol. LVI, No. 1. Note on the bile in different fishes. Biol. Bull. Vol. LVI, No. 1. • Needler, A. W. H.—Studies on the life history of the haddock (Melanogrammus aeglifinus • Linnaeus). Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 20. Rankin, G. P.—The nutritional physiology of Cladocera. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S. No. S. Reed, Guildford B., Rice, Christine E., & Sinclair, R. G.—A comparative study of auto- lysis and bacterial decomposition in haddock, lobster and clam muscle. Contr. Canad. • Biol.' and Fish, N.S. Vol. IV, No. 18. • • Reed, Guildford B., and Spence, C. Marion.—The intestinal and slime flora of the had- dock. 'A preliminary report. Contr.' Canad. Biol. - and Fish. 7 N.S .1 Vol.- • Vf No • 19 • ' 9

Reid, M. E.—The distribution and development of the Cunner (Tautogolabrus adsPersus a Walbaum) along the eastern coast of Canada. ' Contr. Canad. Biot. and Fish, N.S., Vol. IV, Ni. 27. ne Rice, C, E.—The decomposition of clam muscle in acid solutions. Contr. Canad. Biol. and .ni Fish., N.S. No. 7. 'as Scott, W. C. M.—A note on the effect of temperature and salinity on ,the hatching of the eggs of the winter flounder (Pseudo-pleuronectes americanus Walbaum) Contr. Canad. oo Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 11. Sparks, M. E.—The spawning and development of mackerel on the outer coast of Nova at Scotia. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., ,Vol. IV, No. 28. • he Willey, 'Arthur—Notes on 'the distribution of free-living Copepôds in Canadian waters. at 'Part II. Some intertidal Harpacticoids from SU Andrews, ' New' Brunswick, Contr. ' Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 33. Wilton, M. H. and II. I. Wilton—Conditions affecting, the growth of the softshell' clam, ill 1 Mya arenaria L. Contr. Caned. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 6. ' • of The following is a list of papers published in connection with work on inland lakes:— Bajkov, Alexander—Reports of the Jasper Park lakes investigations, 1925-26, VII. A th study of the plankton. Contr. Gamut. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 24. . Bere, Ruby—Reports of the Jasper Park lakes investigations, 1925-26. ' III. The leeches. • Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S. Vol. IV, No. 14. N'eave, Ferris—Reports of the Jasper 'Park lakes investigations, 1925-26. II. Plecoptera, • Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 13. IV. Aquatic insects. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish., N.S., Vol. IV, No. 15. ve Neave, F and A. Bajkov—Reports of the Jasper Park lakes investigations, 1925-26, V. Food and growth of Jasper Park fishes. Contr. Canad. Biol. and Fish. NS., Vol. IV, 7d. • No. 16. _ Wallis, J. B.—RepoTts. of the Jasper Park lakes investigations, 1925-26, VI. The beetles. .ea Contr. Caliad. Biol. and Fish, NS., Vol. IV, No. 17. 32. ■11.4 . FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (ATLANTIC), HALIFAX, N.S. . STAFF sh. - The following constituted the staff of the Station during the year 1929-30:—. Dr. A. H. Leim, Director. Dr. J. R. Sandborn, Chief Bacteriologist (from May 13. 1929). ehs Mr. Ernest Hess, Assistant Bacteriologist (on leave of absence from Sept. 5, 1929). Dr. J. H. Mennie, Chief Chemist (from July 3, 1929). at- Dr. H. R. Chipman, Scientific Assistant in Chemistry. Mr. S. A. Beatty, Associate Biochemist (from May 10, 1929). Miss A. M. Wilson, Technical Assistant in Chemistry. - Mr: F. Watson, Fishery Demonstrator (resigned June 1, 1929). Mr. E. F. Mitchell, Mechanician (resigned July 31, 1929). od Mr. M. J. Murphy, Mechanician from Aug. 8, 1929. Miss M. M. McPhee, Secretary until August 6, 1929. Office Assistant until Nov. 30, by 1929 (resigned). Miss J. J. Barnstead, Secretary (from August 6. 1929). • ' nt, • Miss E. C. Alexander, Office Assistant (resigned Sept. 11, 1929): rV, Mrs. Esther Stevens, Office Assistant (from Jan. 6, 1930). Mr. C. K. Darrach, Factor. ortcl Mr. Erlyn Harrigan, Caretaker at Eastern Passage Laboratory during season and .•' retained as as.4L4an4 at Halifax (from June 17, 1929). - [V, • TEMPORARY STAFF lue ,•(1) Scientific Assistants- Mr. A. S. Cook (July 1-September 16, 1929). ull. Mr. D. LeB. Cooper (July 2-September 14, 1929). Mr. G. O. Langstroth (July 2-September 24, 1929). (2) Assistant for Technical Processes—' • Mr. W. W. Stewart (May 20-September 30, 1929). r1123 ' (3) Inspectors of Ice Fillets- Mr. M. H. Friedman (resigned May 13, 1929). Mr. A. S. McFarlane. to- • . Mr. II. L. A. Tarr (migned September 19, 1929). ad. • Since these names were not naentioned in the report for 1928-29; it may be ad- recorded that they comrnenced work with the Board on March 27, 26 and 28, 1929, respectively. - - ' ' 10

(4) Laboratory Assistants- Barnstead (May 6-September 7, 1929). s: Mr. E. W. Laboratory. Mr. H. B. Robertson (June 28-August 31, 1929) at Eastern Passage t. The following were special instructors during the Course for Fishermen 0 (January 22-March 4, 1930) :— t. Mr. Carl Johnson, Motor Engines. Prof. R. Maxwell, Natural Resources. Captain H. M. O'Hara, Navigation. Mr. Joel Smith, Preparation of Dried and Boneless Fish. By courtesy of the Department of Marine and Fisheries Mr. George Earl d and Mr. Robert Gray gave courses in the Preparation of Dried and Boneless Fish and in the Preparation of Pickled Fish, respectively. Similarly by courtesy o of the Department of Natural Resources of Nova Scotia Dr. M. Cumming and il Prof. W. V. Longley gave courses in Natural Resources. These four petons received no remuneration from the Biological Board. In addition to the above there were a number of persons tried out as laboratory and office assistants for periods not exceeding two weeks. For various reasons their employment did not continue.

INVESTIGATIONS 1. RefrigeTatiOn.—The main investigations of the Station continued to be directed at problems in connection with refrigeration. The problems were attacked from a number of angles, viz: a (a) The determination of the heat conductivity of fish muscle, frozen and unfrozen. A formula was developed for predicting the time of freezing if the conductivity, thickness of fish and temperature of the refrigerat- ing medium are known. The conductivity was determined for cod, haddock, herring, mackerel and salmon. t: (b) Investigations on effect of storage temperature on frozen 'fish. A continuation and elaboration of experiments commenced in 1928. After storage for one year for cod it was shown that storage at –20°C. (-4°F.) was satisfactory, while at -5°C. (23°F.) spoilage was very marked. Intermediate temperatures gave graded results. The changes in expres- sible fluid were measured and attempts made to work out a better method of measuring the amount of this fluid. The bacteria and moulds which were in part responsible for the spoilage were investigated. An attempt was made to analyze some of the chemical changes in the frozen material under storage. Similar storage experiments at -20°C. were begun using haddock, and a new series of cod. These were stored with protection from the atmosphere of the storage roorn, and without complete protection to determine whether odours from other fish, etc., affected the flavour. This series is in progress. , (c) An improved type of tank for holding fish previous to processing was built and experiments continued on this method of holding fish at a lower temperature than can be obtained with ice. The additional use of chlorine solutions was tried, but no positive benefit could be demon- strated from treatment of the fish with chlorine in various ways. - (d) Improvements were made in the jacketed cold storage room in the demonstration building whereby the air circulation was under better control. Tests conducted afterwards proved the value of this room for storage in that evaporation from exposed surfaces was reduced to from one-fifth to one-sixth of what it was in an ordinary type of room at an equivalent temperature. (e) The freezing point for lobster rneat was determined.to be 28.5°F. 11 2. Smoking.—The investigations of the fundamental constitution of wood smoke were continued and as in previous years were particularly concerned with the formaldehyde content. Technical difficulties are involved in the estimation of this substance, and the work has been largely exploratory. As a means of speeding up the smoking process for fish electrical precipita- tion was attempted with promising results. The desired colour could be obtained in as short a time as fifteen minutes using this method. With a view to making the smoking of fish independent of the weather, laboratory experiments were carried out using conditioned air for the preliminary drying of the fish. As there was some question of untreated smoke being suited for• introduction into chambers through ducts and fans owing to the deposition of tar and subsequent clogging of these parts, «smoke was de-tarred by electrical means and found to be satisfactory in producing c,olour and flavour in the fish exposed to it. The larger, semi-commercial experiment could not be undertaken until the demonstration building was completed. 3. Salting and Drying.—The fundamental investigations of the relation between water, salt and protein were continued. A report for publication dealing with these investigations was nearly complete at the end of the year. Practical tests were carried out on the salting of fish with seven different commercial salts. The product was tested with regard to colour and keeping qualities. This test was carried through tveice using different quantities of salt. In the first series an unexpected result was obtained -which indicated that an 85 per cent saturated solution was not sufficient to prevent the growth of bacteria and moulds which caused spoilage. The second series indicated that the solar salts gave a whiter fish than the mined salts. The routine analysis of commercinl fishery salts was continued. 4. Canning.—Spring mackerel were brine frozen, stored for a time, and then canned in one-pound cans, following a procedure adopted the year previcus with fall mackerel. They were compared in flavour with the fall mackerel similarly treated and with spring mackerel which had been canned without freezing. The product was considered to be satisfactory in every way. Plans were drawn up for a model lobster cannery and also for an inexpensive exhaust box. These plans are available for those interested. The canning of scallops was investigated with a view to preventing the troublesome disintegration of the muscle. Mr. Hess made use of facilities at the Atlantic Biological Station, St. Andrews, N.B., to carry out this work. He was unable to find a satisfactory solution of the problem and recommended that refrigeration was a more suitable means bf handling this product. Experiments were carried out in an attempt to explain the presence of small crystals in lobster cans and also a slimy condition frequently observed. Preliminary reports have been submitted but final examination of the cans has not been completed. 5. Fish Oils.—The effect of freezing of fish livers on the production of oil was further investigated. It was found that freezing of the livers increased the yield of oil when cooking was resorted to. It was fourid that livers could be frozen, ground up and pressed after thawing, but without cooking, and that they would yield a higher amount of number one oil than could be obtained by cooking. It was subsequently found that a very similar process was patented in the United States. The relative merits of centrifuges and presses for removing oil from liver chum were inve,stigated. • 6. Fish Mea/.—Routine analyses of samples of fish meal provided by the trade were carried out. Certain lobster meals proved difficult in that some

12 of fifteen per cent of the material could not be accounted •for. 'Determinations total 'carbon and total nitrogen have been made in a numf,er of ways with a view to finding the error. A considerable portion remains unaccounted for. Fish made and analyzed using specific portions of• different kinds of fish. meals. were, . Investigations.—Determinations were made of the 1 : 7. Other Laboratory ; quantity of heat 'produced during rigor and subsequently in fish muscle. This is important in the holding of unfrozen fish after death. A ystematic study of the bacteria of sea water and in partiCular of those 1 ' found on and in fish was begun, and the effect of temperature on- certain i organisms responsible for spoilage was investigated. * fish proteins were carried on. I ( . General investigations on the nature of 1 .. , Several methods of measuring spoilage in fish after death were investigated ' . chiefly one involving the estimation of trimethylamine oxide, and one dealing with the estimation of amino acids by ninhydrin. None of these tests proved I I c ta be of sufficient delicacy to detect the early changes which are important commercially. • - • - • •, The problem of migration of water in fish muscle particularly under condi- tions when frozen was investigated. ' 1

. • • . . Two storey's were added to the Demonstration building, which adds four rooms each 18 feet by 32 feet to this building: , A contract was let in September for the construction. of a permanent building. ICE FILLETS , . . - During the fiscal year 1929-30 the following quantities of Ice Filets were I I r manufactured at the Station and shipped for sale in Toronto:— I . lbs. Haddock ' 4,317 23,408 C Halibut , 936 Russet Flounder 1 ,464 C . Gray Flounder.. ' 3, 300 ( Mackerel 528 . Swordfish • 168 I 1 • . Cusk • 240 , In- addition small quantities were disposed of in Halifax, Ottawa and Montreal.' . • , E .By means of the ice fillets insPectors the production of the ice fillets by the 1

Lunenburg Sea Products Co., Ltd., and the Lockeport ' Company, Ltd.Y was supervised during the year.

EDUCATIONAL WORK ,l. Courses for Fishery Officers.—The first course for fishery officers which was in progress when the fiscal year began continued until April 16, 1929. A second course to another group began on April 17 and closed on May 28, 1929. The first course was attended by three Inspectors, seventeen Overseers and five officials from Quebec; and the second course by nineteen Overseers and five' officials from Quebec,. Each course included instruction in biology,• chemistry, and physics, bacteriology, motor engines, navigation, natural res.ources, prepara- tion of dried and boneless fish, preparation of pickled fish. An examination was held at the termination of the course.

7 ` 2: Course for Fishermen.--So far three schools of instruction have been held.' The first .took place in January-February, 1928, at whicb there was an 13 , • . . . attendance of nineteen; the second tOok -place -in JanuarY-February, - 1929, at which there was an attendance of twenty - five; thé third took place from January 22 to March 4 of the present year', at which there was an attendance of twenty. The board, from. its funds, offered to pay to each. fisherman who attends the six weeks course his double railway fare between Halifax 'and' the railway station nearest his home, in addition to &grant of $45.towa.rd his maintenance when in* Halifax at the school. The school was .macle 'available only to bona fide fishermen between the ages of seventeen to thirty-five; and who had reached à Certain educational grade in the loWer schools. • • - , The instruction at the school for the present year was giVen in the form of six , separate 'courses; each 'course .vas .in the hands of a highly .qualified instructor. • The • classes began at nine' a.m. each morning. ' Four classes of fifty minutes each constituted the Morning session and three classes of fifty minutes each the afternoon one. The subjects of the various Courses were, , as follows:— (1) Preparation of Dried and Boneless .Fish.—This comprised practical instruction in heading, splitting:washing, salting - and drying fish,, also in the preparation of-boneless fish, drying and boxing: -Each man prepared one thirtry* pound box of boneless fish and a quantity of dried fish.; Discussicins-were held on the 'problems . applicable to the - various' districts from Which the 'fishermen came. • -; • , (2) Prepara tion of Pickled Fish and the. Coopering of Barre/s.=Practical instruction in ripping; scraping, .washing, • packing and grading herring.' The testing of .barrels. • Each man was', required to prepare and pack , a quantity of herring:in each of the. various-ways taught.. ; • .. J. , • , r St (3) .11.rotor Engines.--Tins-co.mplised work in dissembling asséràbling . and repairing gasOline engines, theory Of 'gasoline. 'engines, two and. four cycle, car, buretors,- lubrication, electrical equipment, valves, crude oil . engines. - , • (4) Navigation.—This comprised lectures and .demonstrations and practical chart work, shaping courses and measuring distances, charts, effect on engine on compass; magnetic compass, niaeletic poles, latitude and longitude, Mercator's chart. finding magnetic' courses, nautical astronomy, true chart meridian alti- tudes, turning true courses into magnetic ones, the sextant, fixing ship's position, longitude and time. • ' (5) Science.—This comprised lectures, with demonstrations whenever pos- sible, some of the experiments and microscopic examinations being carried out by the students themselves. The subjectS taught under this heading were:— (à) Chemistry and Physics, which included molecules and atoms, heat and . temperature. Measurement of heat and temperature. Thermometers: Specific heat and latent heat. Gases, pressure, volume and tempera- - ture..,;Atmospheric pressure. Barometers. Solutions. Saturation of solutions. Density and specific wavity. Hydrometer's. Osmosis: Theory of fish *salting. . Salt and its constituents. Vapour preSsure. :Evaporation, and 1;oiling. .' Condensation and liquefaction of, gases. Composition of atmosphere. Humidity. Properties of oxygen, hydrci - • gen, carbon dioxide. Respiration of plants and aniinals. The Water cycle. Ice and steam. (b) Biology and Conditions in' the Sea, which» included most important fishes methods , Of fishing,• location' of fish. • Migrations. Life-histories of cod, haddock, herring, mackerel and-lobsters. Food, rates of growth. Reproduction. Habits and distribution., 'Seasons in the water. Effect of ice. Effect of tides: • Drift.bottles. ; Circulation. of water. Effect of physical conditions on distribution of animals. - • 18841-3 e la,T, • ‘,7, "N.8Q,C,00

14

(c) Bacteriology, which included micro-organisms and plant and animal diseases, fermentation and spoilage of food. Shapes and forms of bacteria. Examinations of bacteria and their distribution in nature. dal Bacteria of sea water and fresh fish. Factors influencing bacteria in twc fish. Bacteriology of cured fish, .chilling, freezing, drying, smoking, spe pickling, salting and canning. for (d) Refrigeration, which included Composition and structure of fish muscle. Freezing of sait solutions. Effect of freezing on tissues. Effects of vin storage. Rapid freezing of bait. Type of freezing tanks. Salt pene- rep tration. Types of commercial freezers. (e) Fish Oils, which included sources of oils, whale oil, menhaden and We herring oil, other fish oils, liver oils. Methods of preparation, includ- Lou ing actual preparation of cod liver oil by steaming. for (f) Food Chemistry, which included the chemistry of fish when used as fOod. up Nutritive value of food fishes. car (6) Natural Reiources.—This comprised instruction in goods, wealth, pro- Be duction, division of labour, exchange, theory of value, demand and supply, value and cost of production. Organization, stocks and bonds, trusts, holding com-

panies, banking operations. Co-operation, co - operative marketing, its history, weaknesses, agencies and types. Market information. Cultivation of soil, potato growing, gardening, vegetable growing, and a general talk on the market- at • ing of fish. wet Under miscellaneous classes there was given instruction in methods of fish fist handling, also discussions on the methods of fishing in various sections of the coast. A few illustrated lectures were given in the evenings on such subjects as " Life in the Sea ", " Methods of Fishing ", " All Flesh is Grass", "The Nature of Sound ", and a series of motion picture films dealing with commer- wa1 ical and sport fishing on the Atlantic and Pacific coasts was shown fo the class. a r The school continued for six weeks. On the closing day written examina- tions of one hour's duration were held in each of the six major subjects of the Th course, in order to test the extent to which the instruction was absorbed by the students. In the subject of Preparation thr of Dried and Boneless Fish ten ques- for tions were set. In the subject of Preparation of Pickled Fish and Coopering of Barrels seventeen questions were set. There were ten questions on the sub- we] ject of Motor Engines. In Navigation there were sixteen questions. In Science there were seven questions. In Natural Resources there were eight d at questions. Mi To secure honours the examiners decided that an average of over seventy- Mi: five marks for the six subjects, and not less than forty in any one subject, would be necessary. For a pass, however, an average of forty in the six sub- Mi jects, with no minimum for any one subject, was considered sufficient. Four of the twenty students passed with honours, one obtained an average AIL of ninety for the six subjects, his lowest in any subject being eighty-one. Four- teen passed, and two failed to make the pass standard. Mi: 3. Dalhous. ie Course for B.Sc. in Fisheries.---The portions of this course given by the board commenced on September 30, 1929. There is one student taking all five courses and there are three taking three courses. The courses as - given are:— du (1) General Fisheries: Dr. A. H. Leim. (2) Physics and Chemistry of Fish Curing: Dr. J. H. Mennie. (3) Fish Culture: Dr. A. H. Leim. He (4) Bacteriology of Fish Curing: Dr. J. R. Sanborn. . (5) Biochemistry of Fish Curing: Mr. S. A. Beatty. 15

FIELD WORK At the request of the Department of Fisheries Mr. Hess visited the Mag- dalen Islands, Quebec, from June 12 to 24. He reported on conditions in some twelve lobster canneries and gave demonstrations at each of the importance of speed and cleanliness in the cannery procedure. While there he put up a pack for his experiments on crystals and slime in lobster cans. The Station conducted an exhibit of brine freezing methods at the Pro- vincial Exhibition at Halifax during the last week in August. This was repeated at the Exhibition in Lunenburg in September 16 to 21. Dr. Chipman installed recording thermographs on two boats rimning to the West Indies, the Lady Drake and the Lady Hawkins and subsequently kept in touch with their operation. This was in connection with hydrographie work for the Atlantic Biological Station. He also visited Sambro Island to check up on records there in a similar connection. Further investigation of the water supply at the Windsor hatchery was carried out for the St. Andrews Station during the summer of 1929 by Messrs. Beatty, Chipman and Leim.

PLANKTONIC AND HYDROGRAPHIC INVESTIGATIONS Regular observations of temperature and collections of plankton wf,re made at two stations situated in Halifax Harbour (weekly) and Bedford Basin (bi- weekly) during the year. Observations at less frequent intervals during the• fishing season were made at a station at the entrance to the harbour.

EASTERN PASSAGE LABORATORY During the year the laboratory was fitted up with tables, tanks for salt water, pumps, running fresh and salt water and gas machine. A well was dug, a road constructed on the property and a wharf built. The station was open for scientific work only during the summer months. The Scientific Director was Professor J. N. GowanloCh. Dalhousie University, through Professor Gowanloch, conducted a summer, course in marine bioltgy for two students taking the fisheries course. So far as the work coming directly under the Board was coneérned there were five volunteer investigators at the laboratory. Their names, universities, dates of attendance and problems follow:— Miss Eleanor M. L. Chesley, Dalhousie University, June 25-August 27, "Light reactions and schooling activities in fishes (e.g. pipefish and Gasterosteus)". Miss Elizabeth G. Frame, Dalhousie University:July, 5-August 4, August 11-31, "Studies on the Blood of Fishes: Haematopoesis". Miss K. K. Holman, Dalhousie University and University of Toronto, June 17-August 15. "Origin of pattern in the alimentary tract of Fishes .". Miss I. Irvine, Dalhousie University, July 4-August 31. "The effect of feeding mackerel gibbs to lobster. Age Studies on Haddock ". Miss A. J. Macauley, Dalhousie University, June 24-August 23. "Thermolethal points of Crustacea from surface and deep waters".

PUBLICATIONS The following publications .dealing with the work of the station appeared during the year:— Wynne, A. M.—" The tryptic hydrolysis of haddock muscle.—Preliminary rePort". Con- trib. to Can. Biol. and Fish. NS. Vol. 4, pp. 317-341, 1929. Hess, Ernest.—" The Fishing Industry discovers how Smoke Preserves". Food Industries, February, 1929. . "The amount of Dry Meat in Canned Lobster in Relation to Exhausting and to the age of the Can." Contrib. to Can. Biol. and Fish. N.S. Vol. 5, pp. 93-105, 1929. 188:1-31 !:=1,

.16

The following Manuscript Reports of the Experimental Stations were issued from Halifax:— che] No. 20. Langstroth, G. 0.—" Heat capacity of fish muscle;" latent and specific heats". fres No. 21. Wyman, H. R.—" The effect of temperature of cold storage on the expressible j oui fluids in fish muscle ". _ No 22, Langstroth, G. 0.—" Preliminary work on the specific conductivity, of fish muscle'. No. 23. Ross, R. F.—"A preliminary study of the shrinkage of. crustacean and fish muscle when exposed to changes in salt concentration and temperature ". No 24. MacFayden, D. A.—" The Investigation of Drip and Juice available for drip in One 'Frozen Fish." The No. 25.—Branion, 11. B.—" Some observations on the Manufacture and Vitamine Content and of Cod Liver Oil and Allied Oils ''. 26;Langstroth, G. 0.—", On' the,rate of freezing; of fish muscle. 11 ". eacl Reports received during the Period:— ecor Stewart W. %V.—" The relation between storage and the amount of expressible juices Dor from sardine waste ". fun( Rice, Christine E., and Hess, Ernest.—" The effect 'of temperature upon' the rate of decom- ocea - ,position of .haddock muscle", .•• Hess, Ernest.---"Autolytic and bacterial decomposition of haddock muscle at low tempera- ocea tures above freezing". Hess, Ernest.—" The Canning of brine frozen mackerel ' Cooper, D. LeB.—" Further experiments on wood smoke in connection with the fish smok- ing industry. Part II.» • • MacFayden, D. A.—" Report of the summer 1927. The investigation of Drip and Juice available for Drip ".• • , Hess, Ernest.—" The influence of storage temperature on the quality of canned lobster ". Hess, Ernest.—"Report on an inquiry among the lobster canners of the Maritime Provinces with regard to 'Exhausting '". • . Hess, Ernest.—"Seme preliminary Notes on the Canning of Scallop ". Hess, Ernest.—" The amount of Dry Meat in Canned Lobster in relation to Exhausting, and to the age of the CanP. • - • 1 Hess, Ernest.—" Report on a survey of the lobster canneries and canning conditions on the Mag,dalen islands (P.Q.)". ' Branion, Hugh.—" Some -observations on the manufacture and Vitamine content of Cod Liver Oil and Allied Oils , . • Hess, Ernest.—" Preliminary. Report, on an Investigation regarding Crystal Formation in Canned Lobster ". ' • - Tair,-11,. L. A.—" Some data secured during short trip on. Trawler 'Lemberg ' operated by 3 • 'National Fish Company, Halifax". • Hess, Ernest.—" The preservation of scallops'". . Hess, Ernest—" Preliminary Note.s, on the Action of Formaldehyde on the bacterial flora of haddock." Langstroth, G. 0.—" On the rate of freeling of fish muscle ".• Langstroth, G. 0.—" Rate of Heating of Cylinder 1 Langstroth, G. 0.—"A note on the .heat change in haddock muscle during, rigor mortis". 1 Langstroth, G. 0.—" Preliminary Note on the Rate of Decay of Fish Muscle". Hess, Ernest.—" Examination of Lobster Cans ". Hess, Ernest.—" Canning of Brine Frozen Mackerel ". Hess, Ernest.—" The principles involved in the smoke curing of fish ". Mennie, J. II.—" Investigation of Lob4,er Meal ". Cook, A. Stanley.—" Trimethylamine Oxide in Fish Muscle ". • 1 Chipman, H. R.—" Report on Accuracy of Winkler Method for Oxygen". Chipman. H. R.—" Report on Course for Fishermen, 1930". • Cooper, D. LeB.—" Report to the Biological Board of Canada. • Being the Result of Work carried out at the Fisheries Experimental Station (Atlantic) during the summer of 1929, Section 1—The estimation of formaldehyde in wood smoke distillates. Section II- Preliminary experiments on an apparatus for shortening the time necessary for smoking fish ". PACIFIC BIOLOGICAL STATION, NANAIMO, B.C. The Station now consists of two laboratories, biological and chemical, a residence building for the accommodation of scientific workers, a bungalow for the director, and a caretaker's cottage. It possesses a sixty-foot motor boat, two thirty-four-foot fishing boats, a small open launch and several row- boats. The laboratories are equipped with apparatus for general biological,

17 chemical and oceanographical investigations and are provided with running fresh and salt water, gas and electricity. There is a working library of books, journals, and separates. , , . • • t , INVESTIGATORS • . . . • - The research *program is being çairied• forward by two greuPs of workers. One is the permanent Staff which is 'engaged » directly upon fishery problems. The other-is .a groiip of members' of the staffs of the Universities of Canada' and certain advanced graduate students. These workers spend sei"-eral months each summer. upon various problems, which may or may not have immediate ' economic bearings. In this way many of the best trained scientists of the Dominion contribute to ' the • advancement of the research program along fundamental lines and they carry back,to the Universities an interest in general oceanographical research and the training of younger persons in fisheries, oceanographical and limnobiological research .is thereby stimulated.

Dr. W. A. Clemens, Director. Dr.. R. E. Foerster, Associate Biologist. Dr. J. L. Hart, Assistant Biologist. . , • - Dr. A. L. Pritchard, Scientific Assistant. , Mr. C. It. Elsey, Scientific Assistant. . Mr. G. H. Wailes, Temporary Assistant Pilchard Investigation_ Mr. C. AIcO. Mottley, Temporary Assistant Trout Investigation. Mr. L. L. Bolton, Temporary Assistant Sahnon Tagging. Dr. W. W. Simpson, Temporary As.sistant Salmon Tagging. . Mr. Ross Whittaker, Temporary. Assistant Salmon Tagging. Mr. D. Beall, Temporary Assistant Salmon Tagging. Mr. H. J. Alexander, Temporary Assistant Salmon Tagging. Mr. R. Wilson, Temporary Assistant Salmon Tagging. Mr. L. McHugh, Temporary Assistant• Salmon Tagging. Mr. II. G. Glover, Temporary Assistant Salmon Tagging. Mr. T. C. Wheeler, Temporary Assistant Salmon Tagging,. Mr. J. II. Stannard, Temporary Assistant Salmon Tagging. Miss E. Keighley, Secretary and Librarian. - -- Miss E. Robinson, Temporary Typist. Mr. Fred Groth, Captain A. P. Knight." , Mr. J. A. Randle, Engineer "A. P. Knight." Mr. Edgar Black, Deckhand "A. P. Knight " (s-ummer). Mr. Thos. Russell, Caretaker. Mr. Sherman Deno. Groundsman. Miss E. Edwards, Housekeeper (summer). Mrs. E. Riches, Cook. Miss Winnie Riches, MaicL Miss Hazel .Neen, Maid (summer)). Miss Violet Foster, Maid (summer). Voluntary Investigators- Miss A. Berkeley, University of Toronto. ' Mr. C. Berkeley, Nanaimo. Mrs. C. Berkeley, Nanaimo. Miss M. H. Campbell, University' of .. Miss M. Crawford, University of Toronto. Miss J. F. L. Hart, University of British Columbia. Dr. A. H. Hutchinson, University of British Columbia.' Mr. C. C. Lucas, Brandon College. Miss V. Z. Lucas, University of British Columbia. . Mr. M. MacPhail, University of British Columbia. „ Mr. J. A. Munro, Okanag,an Landing. • , • Miss Jean Panton, University of Toronto. , Prof. R. A. Wardle, University of Manitoba. Mr. G. V. Wilby, North Dakota Agricultural College. 77,

18

INVESTIGATIONS 11 1. Propagation of Sockeye Salmon. a o A. Relative Efficiencies of Natural and Artificial—Dr. R. E. Foerster con- tinued his studies at Cultus lake. It will be recalled that the program was planned to determine the efficiency of artificial propagation as compared with fi natural. Fences were installed in the outlet from Cultus lake so that adult fish coming to the lake and seaward migrating young leaving the lake could d be counted. In the years of natural propagation the sockeye returning to Cultus lake are stopped by a picket weir below the lake, trapped, numbers of o each sex determined, and then released from the traps to proceed to the spawning beds. In such years a count of male and female adults alone is II necessary. Since each female contains, on the average, 4,500 eggs, the total Immber of eggs which should be deposited in the spawning nests can be com- -puted and the subsequent counts, eighteen months later, of the seaward migrat- ing young resulting from the spawning will determine the percentage of efficiency of natural propagation to this stage. Two methods of artificial propagation are in use at the present time. In one, the eggs are hatched in the hatcheries and the fry liberated into lakes and streams. In the other, the eggs are held only SI until they reach what is called the "eyed9 stage when they are planted by CI means of a planting box in the gravel bars of streams. These two rnethods sl .e.re being tested at Cultus lake, where there is a hatchery. In the years when , eggs are being taken for fry or egg planting, no sockeye are allowed to spawn naturally in the lake. The seaward migrants resulting from the above methods ,of Artificial propagation are counted and the percentage of efficiency determined. it In the spring of 1929, the yearling seaward migrants of the natural spawn- ing in the fall of 1927 were counted. They totalled 2,453,634. In the fall of the same year all the fish, 15,000, were stopped at the weir and the eggs collected. Approximately 3,000,000 were subsequently planted in the gravel of the streams tributary to the lake and the remainder transferred to other areas. The following shows the results at Cultus lake to date:—

1928 Year 1925 • 1926 Fry 1927 Egg 1929 Fry Planting Method propagation. Natural Artificial Natural Artificial Artificial Total males. 1,540 3,122 25,659 3,878 1,244 Total females 3,883 1,949 55,569 11,461 3,079 Total eggs contained in all females 17,473,500 8,770,500 250,060,500 51,700,571 13,855,500 Total eggs collected 6, 487, 000 32, 656, 624 10, 800, 000 Per cent of total eggs. 74 63•2 76 Downstream Migrants; Fry 12,568 116,977 Per cent of total eggs. 0.07 0 • 05 Yearlings 183,272 336,257 2, 453, 634 Per cent of total eggs. 1.05 . 3-83 0 • 98 2-year-old. , 1,722 10,972 Per cent of total eggs - 0.01 0 • 13 Total migrants 197,562 347,229 Y' Per cent of total eggs. 1.13 3 • 96 a. e: B. Transference of Eggs from One Area to Another.—In order to test the success of transplanting sockeye from the lower Fraser area to the upper, 500,000 eggs were taken from Cultus lake in the fall of 1928 to Taft, on Eagle river, ci where they were hatched and the fry placed in retaining ponds. The fry were held until the fall of 1929 a: when they were marked by means of clipping the fins O: and then released into Eagle river. A fence for intercepting any return will be installed in the river. st

•=rM.M. 19 C. Efficiency of Pond System in Artificial Propagation.--It is planned to hold sockeye fry in ponds at Cultus lake for approximately six and 12 months and by marking the young fish at the time of release to determine the percentage of survival for each period of retention by counting the seaward migrants. D. Hybridization.—In the fall of 1927 the presence of individuals of the five epecies of Pacific salmon at Cultus lake offered an opportunity to carry out experiments in the crossing of the several species of Pacific salmon in order to determine the possibility of such a phenomenon in natural spawning, and the probable effect. At the same time some attention was given ta the possibility of investigating the effect of selective breeding. Comparatively good success was attained with the following crosses and the individuals resulting are now 'being retained in ponds at Smith Falls hatchery:— Female Male Female Male . Spring. .. Pink Sockeye .. Chum Spring. .. Coho Sockeye Spring Pink .. Sockeye Sockeye .. Pink Pink .. Chum Coho •.. Pink Pink .. .. Spring Chum .. Spring It would seem, therefore, that, as far as the power of fertilization and successful hatch are concerned, the above crosses are quite possible under natural conditions. Whether the adults resulting from such crosses would be fertile or sterile remains to be seen. From an examination of the growth and relative condition of the various hybrid salmon it would seem that the Sockeye female x Chum male, Sockeye female x Pink male, and Pink female x Sockeye male groups would prove most interesting crosses to rear and study from the viewpoint of selective breeding. 2. Pink and Chum Salmon Investigation.--Studies are being carried out by Dr. A. L. Pritchard along three lines:— (a) General life-histories.—First, attention has been given to the Queen Charlotte Islands area where practically every stream and lake has been surveyed. Observations have been made of the principal pink and chum salmon runs, of the spawning habits, of the seaward migration of fry and of local races. (b) Propagation.—Careful observations of natural propagation have been made and plans are being developed for installing counting fences in a stream in order to obtain accurate data as to the success of natural spawning of pink salmon. In 1931 in attempt will be made to establish . a run in the "off" year. (c) Statistical.—The statistics of the pink and chum salmon runs in various areas along the coast are being worked up. 3. Salmon. Tagging.—In 1925 an extensive salmon tagging program was commenced in British Columbia for the purpose of securing accurate information concerning the migration routes of all the five species of Pacific salmon. In each year for the past five years, operations have been carried out at various locations along the coast and there,is rapidly being obtained a body of information of exceptional value from the scientific and administrative points of view, and of great general interest. In carrying out the work, there are certain difficulties associated with the nature of the salmon fishing. It has been found from one experiment that fish caught in g-ill nets are so weakened that only a very small percentage survive after release. Moreover, gill netting is generally carried on at and in the mouths of rivers, and the fish caught in the gill net areas are moving largely into the streams of those areas and their ocean migrations are practically at an end. r-,15,77

,20 In the.case of seine .fishing, it has been, found impassible to successfully tag on beard ihe - seine boats, chiefly. because of lack of space and of inconyenience fish eansed to -the fishermen.. In order' to,tag seine-caught fish, it ha S been necessary tho to stipply'the -taggers with boats-and small live boxes so that they can ,follow Col the seine boats`, -secure some Of the fish, and tag these out of the way of the seine bàfi'operations. r Tagging at traps offers few difficulties but at the present time f ro this 'type of gear is used at the south end of Vancouver. island only.' Systematie Fro tagginglaS not yet been attempted there as it seemed more 'important to obtain of the trap operation at de information elsewhere. Advantage was taken Wales 34 island .in _the north, in 1925.. The most successful tagging of spring and coho salmon has been done on board the trolling boats. Taggers have- accompanied Tes1 the trolling boats to sea, selected and fagged the fish as caught. ' 3. I - '1'erhaps the 'nest startling results have been obtained from the tagging of off the west coasts of and the Queen Charlotte spring salmon bec islands. A summary of the tagging of spring salmon during the years 1925, 1926 ■ and 1927 is given -herewith:— at • in 1. Ucluelet, 1925. . Th( From May 23 to June 25, 1925, 1,125 individuals ranging in weight from 5 to 58 pounds were tagged and there have been 122 recaptures (10 per cent). The returns are as follows:—

— 1925 1926 1927 (28 Barclay Sound area 1 7 (57 Cape Flattery area 1 2 , B.C. waters 5 2 Strait of Juan de Fuca, waters 2 3 4. 1 Puget Sound area 13 4 1 Coast of Washington ' 1 1 ried 42 25 7 Coast of Oregon 2 Th( Sacramento River, Cal • 2 • Unknown 1

• 73 42

Cla) • It will be seen that 25 per cent of these fish turned into the strait of Juan Bar( de Fuca, while Cap 65 per cent passed down the coasts of Washington, Oregon and Pug' California. The recaptures in the Columbia river amounted to 60 per cent Fra: of the total. Quel Cow Colt 2. Ucluelet, 1926 • Coir The tagging in 1925 was carried out over a period of one month only, and Unk so the operations of 1926 were de-signed to determine if the southward move- ment indicated by the 1925 operations extended throughout the whole fishing season. The work was therefore carried out from March to September and 1,353 fish were tagged. The returns have been 177 (13 per cent). agt • , — 1926 1927 1928 . arc Clayoquot . . Sound area. 2, 1 ' • 8 Barclay Sound area 4 Cape FlatterY area cer Strait 1 1 of Juan de Fuck, B.C. waters 9 pei Strait of Juan de Fuca, Washington waters - Puget Sound area • • 4 1 . gin Fraser river 26 2 2 Coast of Washington. 9 1 1 5. Columbia river . 1 ' 1 1 TJnknown 34 1 1 2 1 to 128 43 ha •

-- • The returns - are essentially similar to those from the 1925 tagging. The fish which turned into the strait of Juan de Fuca amounted to 31 per cent while thosé continuing on down the coast formed 62 per cent. The recaptures in the Columbia river amounted to 60 per cent of the total. Examination of the returns in the year 1926 shows that the distribution from each month of tagging was essentially similar to the total distribution.' From the April tagging, 41 per cent of the returns were from the strait of Juan de Fuca and 60 per cent from farther south; in May, 27 and 70 per cent; June, 34 and 59'per. cent; July, 15 and 77 per cent; August, 29 and 57 per cent , respectively. Quidsino, 1927' The destination of the spring salmon appearing farther up the coast then became a matter of enquiry and in 1927 tagging operations were commenced at in February 14 and continued until March 30. The fishing in this season was comparatively poor and only 54 individuals were tagged. There have been 7 recaptures (12 per cent) •as follows:— Barclay Sound area 1 Puget Sound area 2 Columbia river 4 While the returns are few, the percentages from the strait of Juan de Fuca (28 per cent), the coast of Washington (57 per cent), and the Columbia river (57 per cent), are similar to those obtained from the Ucluelet tagging. 4. Kyuquot, 1927 Following the failure of the fishing in the Quatsino area, tagging was car- ried out off from April 26 to July 16, when 517 fish were tagged. The returns to date have been 73 (14 per cent) as follows:

1927 1928

Clayoquot Sound area 1 Barclay Sound area 3 Cape Flattery area 4 Puget Sound area 4 1 Fraser river 1 Queen Charlotte Sound area 1 Coast of Washington 6 Columbia river 47 Coast of Oregon 2 Unknown. 2 1 69 4

There may be additional returns in 1929. At the present time the percent- ages cif fish 'going into the strait of Juan dé Fuca and do'cs-n the American coast are Nïéry different from those, of the other tagging records as. given above. Only 8 per cent: of the returns were from the strait of Juan de Fuca while 75 per cent Were from farther south. The percentage from the Columbia river, 64 per cent,,is practically in agreement with those from the other west coast tag- ging operations. 5. Hippa Island, TVest Coast Queen Charlotte Islands In 1925 tagging operationà were carried out at Hippa island from June 20 to July 25. • A total of 274 individuals were tagged and of these 37 (13 per cent), have been recaptured..

22

1925 1926

Skeena river 2 Noss river Prince of Wales Island, ... Barclay Sound area 2 Strait of Juan de Fuca, British Columbia waters 1 1 Puget Sound area 2 Fraser river 4 Coast of Washington 1 1 Columbia river 7 3 Coast of Oregon. 12 31 6

In the case of the returns from this tagging the percentages from the strait 2 of Juan de Fuca (19 per cent), and down the coast (65 per cent), are in fairly close agreement with the previously described tagging results but the percent- age from the Columbia is lower (27 per cent). The returns from the streams a of Oregon from the Nehalen river to Coos bay, were relatively numerous form- ing 32 per cent of the total returns. A summary of the percentages referred to above is given herewith:—

Americ.an — Strait of Coast, Columbia Juan de including River Fuca Columbia River 8 1. Ucluelet, 1925 25 65 60 2. Ucluelet, 1926 31 62 so 3. Quatsino, 1927 28 57 57 4. Kyuquot, 1927 8 75 64 5. flippa, 1925 19 65 27

It is probable that the majority of those which turned into the strait of Juan de Fuca were bound for the Fraser river. It is interesting to note the percentages of the returns obtained in each 3rear:—

— 1925 1926 1927 1928

ITcluelet, 1925 60% 35 5 Ucluelet, 1926 72 24 4 Kyuquot, 1927 95 5- Hippa island, 1925 84 16

The rates at which some of the fish travelled are remarkable as the follow- ing indicate:— Hippo, Island to Columbia river, 650 miles, 19 days, 34 miles per day. Ucluelet to Columbia river, 265 miles, 11 days, 24 miles per day. Ucluelet to Sooke, 105 miles, 7 days, 15 miles per day. Ucluelet to New Westminster, 141 miles, 14 days, 111 miles per day. Ucluelet to Sacramento river, 820 miles, 76 days, 11 miles per day. ' 23

THE TAGGING OF COHO SALMON The results from the tagging of coho salmon in the waters of British Col- umbia during the years 1925, 1926, 1927 and 1928 are here presented in very brief form:— 1. Ucluelet, 1925 During the months of May and June 51 individuals were tagged and 5 (10 percent), were recaptured. The returns were as follows:— Barclay Sound 1 Cape Flattery Sooke 1 Puget Sound 2 2. Ucluelet, 1926 The tagging period was more extended covering the months of April to September and 180 fish were tagged. The recaptures numbered 11 (6 per cent), and were as follows:— Alberni canal 1 Hesquiat 1 Cape Flattery 4 Grays harbour 1 Sooke 1 Dungeness 1 1 1 3. Kyuquot, 1927. • During the months of April to August, 135 individuals were tagged, and 8 (6%) were taken. The returns were as follows:— Kyuquot 1 1 Sooke 3 Fraser river 1 Columbia 2 While the returns from the West Coast tagging are few, they indicate a movement into the Strait of Juan de Fuca as well as down the coast as far as the Columbia river.

4. Deep Bay, 1927. There occur at practically all times of the year in the straits of Georgia large ,numbers of small coho salmon, frequently called by the fishermen, salmon trout, sea trout, bluebacks, etc. It was decided to tag a number of these small cohoes for the purpose of obtaining information concerning their movements, rates of growth, etc. From April 5 to June 15 there were tagged 357 individuals and 47 (13.5%) were subsequently recaptured. The returns were as follows:— Hornby-Comox-Lasqueti district 7 (15%) Cape Mudge area 8 (17%) Yuculta rapids. ... 2 Flower island 1 Half Moon bay t 1 1 Nanaimo district 4 (8%) Porlier pass 1 Duncan area . 1 Sooke - 3 Whidbey island 2 Lummi island to Point Roberts 6 (13%) Samish river 1 Nooksack river 2 Nicomekl river 3 Fraser river . 3 Capilano river 1

24 6. The results thus show a wide distribution. Seven were taken in the locality where tagged, eleven (23%) went northward and twenty-six (57%) ;travelled J. southWard. The periods' betWeen time Of tagdnig and time of recapture averaged tu 118 days or practically four rnonths. ,. . . Examination of representative samplings of scales showed that.the tagged fish were at the commencement of their third years. They had spent one year in fresh-water and one in the ocean. The average weight of the fish tagged in April was 21. pounds; from May 2 to 10 it was 3 pounds; from May 17 to 30 it was 4 pounds, and in early June, 4 pounds. During this period, therefore, the fish increased in weight, at the rate of about one pound per 'month:: Accepting 24 weights upon recapture as reasonably accurate, the average increase in weight during the tagged period amounted to about one-half pound per month. Upon the above basis, a coho w-eighing 24 pounds on April 15 will therefOre attain a weight.of about 6 pounds by September 15, possibly sooner. , .. • at 5. Nanaimo, 1928. - ' ' ' of The tagging of small coho salmon was continued in 1928 in the Nanaimo: ni region. From February 14 to July .11 a total of 1,609 fish were tagged and the in recaptures amounted to 163 (10%). The returns were as follows:— , 7. Nanaimo area 21 (13%) Qualicum 4 Hornby area 14 (9%) Sc Cape Mudge 12 (7%) 1 at Queen Charlotte sound • 3 . Porlier pass • 1 . . 1 Crof ton-Duncan area 3 ai Sooke 4 Swiftsure bank 1 Neah bay 2 bc Dungeness 2 Whidbey island 14 (9%) Lummi island to Point Roberts 23 (14%) Sam ish river 1 Skagit river 1 Nooksaak river 3 Nicomekl river 1 Serpentine river 1 Fraser river 41(23%) English bay 1 Capilano river 1 Gower point 2 Fender Harbour area 4 . Jervis inlet 2 It will be noted that the distribution of these fish was essentially the same as that of Deep Bay fish. Thirty-four (21%) of the fish went northward and ninety-nine (61%) went southward (Fraser river, English bay and Capilano river included). It is interesting to note that some individuals travelled at least to the entrance to the strait of Juan de Fuca. Twenty-five per cent of the returns were from the Fraser river and twenty-seVen per cent from American waters. The average perio: d .between capture and recapture was 145 days or nearly five months. Examination of scale samplings showed the fish to be at the beginning of their third years, having spent one year in fresh water and one year in the ocean. The average of the estimated weights of the fish tagged in each month were as follows: February 1-1 pounds; March 11 pounds; April 2 pounds; May 21 pounds, June 31 pounds. These weights are considerably lower than those of the fish caught in the Deep Bay region in 1927, but the difference may be due to the fact that in 1928 special small trolling tackle was employed. The average increase in weight during the tagged period was one-half pound per month.

25 . 6. Sooke, 1928. , • . • . . From .August 13 to 23, 99 coho salmon were tagged for us by Messrs. J. H. Todd and Sons, to whom we are grateful for this assistance. The recap- tures totalled 24 (24%) and the distribution was as follows:-- - • • Sooke - • • . 7(29%) Victoria vicinity 2 Mill Bay • ' 1 Cowichan area • 1 Active pass • - • • • • • 1 Dungeness 1 Dash Point (Tacoma) - • 1 Salmon bank • - - " ' ' -, 2 . Henry island • 1 , Deception Pass • Lummi Island to Point Roberts 1 • - . , 4. 07%) Fraser river - • . . . . . . , • ' - t • . . - - - . - " The 'general ' rnovèmeht ' of' 'these ' fish wh.S evidently. eastward ' and . north-. ward. . The origin- is unknown . , Since four fish tagged - in the Nahaimo. -area and three: *hi the Deep - Bay . area have ' been takep in the traps at . Sooke, • some of those tagged at thé trap may.have come froni the ... The sig- nificance 'of the .moVement westward M the Strait of Juan 'de .Fuca of cohoes in thé summer of their' maturity:is'not understood. ,..•• - ' . - • . - . : - '' ' • : 7. Queen Charlotte Sound, 1928. . , ..,. . , . • , , From July 21 to October 17,. 810 coho were tagged' in the Queen Charlotte Sound area, from 'Bate pais near- the. Wirth end • of - VanCouver island to. Deep Water bay in. :: The localities and the ninn— ber taggedlin.each are as follows:— . - . .. ,-. • . . •- .. •. : - - • Bate pass, 27, Christie passage, 142, Hardy: bay area; 36; Hanson island area, 578; Discovery passage, 27.- .The general distribution from these loCalities were similar and therefore the.returns are. cons. idered aS 'a whole. . There have been 77: (9.5%): recaptures, the distribution being as..follows:---7 .. . - ---. Queen Charlotte sound 6 (Wu) Seymour inlet 1 Stackhouse island 1 5 (6ô) Johnston strait 7 Lochborough inlet 4 Bute inlet 13 (17%) Toba inlet 8 (10%) Discovery passage 3 Puntledge river • 1 • Nanaimo area 2 Jervis inlet 2 Howe sound 3 • English bay 2 Fraser river 11(14 %) Serpentine river 1 Puget sound. , 3 Sooke 1 Port Renfrew ; 1 . Indian river 1 Unknown... 1 It is apparent' that the movement of these fisb was southward and the dis- tribution very extended. There is no 'évidence that the fish appearing in any of the tagging. areas were 'bound for single spaWning areas. If •they occurred in schodls bound for certain spawning areas, then in each locality there must have been a temporary association of many schools. . .

THE TAGGING OF SOCKEYE SALMON • . . There.is given herewith in very` brief form nrreport on the results of the tagging:Of sockeye 'salmon in British Columbia waters during the year's 1925

26

1. Haystack, Island, August, 1925. for tl From August 3 to 21, 659 sockeye were tagged and 135 or 20% were river recaptured. mc The fish were obtained from the trap of the Canadian Fishing Company. The returns were as follows:— of th 80 Observatory inlet 1 9 Wark inlet 3 Dundas inlet 1 13 Month Union passage 1 Two ir Alaskan waters 27 2-3 mi. Harlan in the Nass river and neighbouring waters. Mount The greatest number were caught Matsq One salmon was taken in Union passage, , 50 miles south of the Skeena. The table show's that Haystack island is a meeting point from which the salmon sort themselves out for different spawning grounds. The netting season for sockeye ended on August 21, at which time the catch of all kinds of salmon had greatly declined. There seems no doubt that the close of the netting opera- tions militated against a higher return of tagged fish. 2. Deepwater Bay, Seymour Narrows, 1925 Between Aug-ust 7 and 14, there were tagged 519 individuals, obtained in Deepwater bay from purse seines. About half the total number of tagged fish had the olfactory nerves severed before they were liberated, the purpose being to determine whether the olfactory se.nse organs influenced the fish in selecting tinue certain rivers and tributaries of rivers during the upstream spawning migration. taggE Of the tagged fish, 107 (20 per cent) were recaptured, 106 taken in British no n Columbia and 1 in United States waters. Of the 256 normal fish, 65 (24 per mout cent) were recaptured, and of the 259 operated fishes, 42 (16 per cent) were abov retaken. strea

Normal Operated knoll Locality fishes fishes to th thele Lower Fraser river 53 18 Birkenhead river 2 1 and Hell's Gate, Fraser river Point Grey 3 4 Whidbey island, Wash 1 unsu Agememnon channel 1 Deepwater bay 3 14 liber Toba inlet 1 2 Ramsay arm 1 1 Phillip's arm 1 prob Total • 65 42

The great majority of the returned fish, viz., 75, were taken in the Fraser Oct( river, and it is justifiable fo conclude that of the Sockeye in Deepwater bay, a considerable percentage were on their way to that river. The results from the pass operated individuals are not clear. A good percentage (45 per cent) were retaken Of t in the Fraser river or its tributaries, but at the same time 331 per cent were recaptured in the same area in which they were tagged. 3. Fraser River, 1928 . During the summer of 1928 a tagging experiment was undertaken on the . 'Fraser river, the purpose being to ascertain, by tagging daily in the lower river a representative number of Sockeye throughout the run, whether the fish bound pia(

27 for the spawning beds of the various tributary streams enter and pass up the river at different relative times during the season or whether the distribution is more or less uniform throughout the period of the runs. The fish were obtained from the traps at Point Roberts and the results of the experiment were:—

Location of Tagging Number Number tagged recaptured

Mouth • of river 11 Two miles above Ewen's cannery 20 2-3 miles above New Westminster bridge 61 7 Hammond 25 3 Mount Lehman 141 18 Matsqui 95 12 • 402 56

The distribution of recaptured fishes was:— Point Roberts 1 English bay, Vancouver 1 Mouth of Fraser river 8 Below New Westminster 21 New Westminster to Agassiz 19 Birkenhead river 6 56 The returns indicate a general disinclination on the part of the fish to con- tinue upstream from the point of their release. Of the 23 returns from fish tagged below or within 2 or 3 miles above the New Westminster bridge, 12 show no marked movement; 5 went upstream 4 downstream, and 2 tagged at the mouth of the river moved away from the river; 33 returns from fish released above this point show 6 fish taken close to the point of tagging, 20 taken down- stream and 7 reported from higher upstream. The conclusions derived from the experiment, while adding little to the knowledge of the periods during which the various " races " of sockeye 'bound to the several spawning grounds of the Fraser river enter the river, are, never- theless, of importance. They show:— 1. That the fish normally transfer from salt water to fresh in a gradual and rather leisurely manner. . 2. That any attempt to hasten this transfer is, in general, likely to be unsuccessful, the fish tending either to return towards the sea or remaining where liberated for some time before proceeding up:stream. 3. That the normal rate of movement upstream is slow, the average being probably in the vicinity of four miles a day. • THE TAGGING OF PINK SALMON, 1928 A summary of the results of tagging pink salmon in August, September and October, 1928, is given herewith. . During these months 207 individuals Were tagged in the region of Discovery passage, Johnston and Broughton straits, from Bate's passage to Robson's bight. Of this number, tveenty-two or 10.6 per cent were recaptured as follows:-- Knight inlet 1 Ramsay and Phillips arm 3 Johnston straits 14 Bear river 3 Robson's bight .t 1 No recaptures were made in exactly the same locality where tagging took place. This would seem to indicate that the pinks were not tarrying in these 28 were moving toward spawning rivers. The greatest distance traversed areas but ri was from Hardy bay to Ramsay arm, about 100 miles. This journey was made at a minimum rate of three miles per day. Evidence that the fish moved from one place to another in•small groups at least, if not in schools, is afforded by the fact that of »eighteen tags affixed in Robson's bight twelve were later obtained at Salmon river. - - _ - Conclusions SI 1. The principal migration of pinks in the Johnston and Broughton strait region took place in an east and southerly. direction. -. 2. After they had collected in spawning schools they did not travel »far but went chiefly to local streams. This condition was shown to be true for those in Alaskan waters (Gilbert and Rich, 1926). 3. Returns reported seem to indicate that pink salmon taken in Robson's Al bight are largely made up of fish on their way to Salmon river to spawn. SI 4. Failure to capture any tagged pinks south of Discovery passage indi- Sc cates that pinks of Johnstone and Broughton straits did not contribute to Fraser Fi river runs this year (1928).. Pt

THE . TAGGING OF CHUM SALMON, 1928 01 The results from tagging of chum salmon in British Columbia waters during 1928 follow in brief form. Of the 1,031 tags affixed, 148 or 14.4 per cent were returned as listed below. 1. Tagged in Bates passage. Returned- 2, TaggeettroIrsonn nnight (Johnstone straits). - Returned- Squamish, Howe sound • ' 1 . Point Roberts Nanaimo 3. Tagged in Discovery pass, Chatham point, to Deep water bay. 1.11 Returned- . . Alert bay ". 1 ' Bute inlet ' Granite bay H Deep Water bay 24 H Deep bay, Vancouver island , • 2 . , Malaspina inlet ■ 1 Powell River region - - 2 t Comox-Union Bay 5 Qualicum - Nanaimo • • . " , Myrtle point - I ' Jervis inlet ' Howe sound Fraser river , 48 Puget sound . .66 . • • The records of three individuals going northward, one to Granite bay, one to Alert bay and one to Bute inlet, are of interes.t since - only three out of all those retaken were caught in localities farther north than where they were tagged. The relatively large returns from Qualicum and the Fraser river may be somewhat exiggerated. due to concentration of the commercial fiShery- at these points.. • The greatest distance travelled was from Deep water bay to Discovery bay, Puget sound, about 170 miles. This was accomplished most quickly of any journey; namely, at a minimum rate of 21 miles per day... Conclusions: . 1. Chums travelled much farther than pinks after they appeared in John- stone and Broughton straits. 2. They apparently chose two main routes, 'both of - which were -sOuth- erly, viz., lower mainland- and Vancouver island.. - • '

29

3. The mainland run was the: larger and went - mainly to the Fraser river, although a few did go to the inlets en route ,and a few southward into American waters. -The Vancouver island run went chiefly -to-2 Qualieum but several -were recaptured at Nanaimo.

SPRING SALMON, CAPTURED AT NORTH ISLAND, QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS, 192g

• • • Number tagged, 404, Number returned, 51 (12%) •

Location of Rec.apture Number PerCentage

North island.. . 2 . 3-8 Alaska 1 1-9 Skeena, . . . 7.. .. ; ...... . .. 4 7.7 Rivers inlei 1.9 Sooke, B.C . 2 3-8 Fraser river . , 21 40-4 Puget sound 1 1-9 Washington 8 15-4 Columbia river 10 19.2 Oregon . 1 ,- 1 •9

.

SUMMARY OF PERCENTAGE RETURNS .FOR SPRING SALMON

Location of recapture • - • Location of Capture Year Coast of Colum- Fraser • Puget Coast United river Sound Wash- bia 01 ington river Oregon States

.. ; .7:-. - 1925 - 4.1 11 •5 60.7 1 •6 77.0 Ucluelet 1928 6 •2 17.0 1 •7 60-0 78.7 Kyuquot 1927 1-4 6•9 8.2 84.4 2.7 82.2 Quatsino 29.0 57-0 86.0 Hipps 1925 10.8 5.4 5.4 27-0 32-4 70.2 Hippa 1929 2b.0 17.1 2.8 14.3 20-0 54.2 North island 1929 40 •4 1.9 15.4 19•2 1-9 38 •4

PINK SAL310N, SOOKE, B.C., 1929

Number tagged, 185, Number returned 12 (6.5%) Location of recapture Number Sooke 1 r raser river - (58-0%) Point Roberts 3 Pilchuck creek, Washington, U.S.A • 1

PINK SAL/(10N, JOIINSTONE STRAITS, 1929 • .. . . . . . . . Number tagged, 468,"Number returned 33 (7.1%) ._.. _ tocation of recapture _..... Number Johnstc.ne straits 7 Kingoome inlet . 1 Loughboro inlet.. • 1 • Bute inlet I Deep water bay.. ' 1 • Vancouver island 1 Burrarcl inlet % . 1 Fraser river 19 (00%) Whidbey Island, U.S.A.. 1

'! 30

COHOES, NORTH COAST OF QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS, 1929 Number tagged 723, Number returned 26 (3.6%) vi CC lo Location of recapture Number Percentage

•4 North coast 4 15 Alaska 4 15•4 Nass River area 3 11•5 Skeena area 26-9 Gardner Cannery 1 . 3•8 . 3•8 %race channel 3 11•5 1 3•8 Toba in (et 1 3-8 Puget sound 1 3-8

COHOES, GOOSE ISLANDS AND MILLBANK SOl7ND, 1229 Number tagged 315, Number returned 22, or 7%

Location of recapture Number Percent,age th

Dean channel 3 13-6 B: Roscoe inlet 1 4.5 gt Burke channel 6 212 Rivers inlet 4 18•2 re 1 4.5 Seymour inlet 1 4.5 6. Loughboro 1 4-5 Toba inlet 2 9•1 Johnstone sÉraits 2 9.1 th Fraser river 1 4.5 in Vf in SPRING SALMON, 'WEST COAST, QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLAN DS, 1929—COMPARED WITH PERCENTAGE RETCRNS OF 1925 Number tagged, 1919,375. Number returned, 1929, 35 (9%)

Percentage Location of recapture Number 1929 1225

North island 21 5.7 Alaska 2.7 Skeena river 21 5.7 5.4 Nass river 2.7 Barclay sound 2 5.7 5.4 Straits of Juan de Fuca 3 8.6 2, 7 Puget sound 6 17.1 5.4 Fraser river 7 20-0 10 •8 Washington 1 2 •8 5.7 0 Columbia river.. 14.3 27.0 Oregon 7 20.0 32.4

4. Annual Study of Sockeye Salmon Run,s.—Dr. and Mrs. W. A. Clemens studied the collection of sockeye salmon scales and data of 1929 collected by the Provincial Fisheries Department from the Nass, Skeena and Fraser rivers and from Rivers inlet. This series of annual reports constitutes one of the most comprehensive and continuous records of any fishery. 5. Pilchard-Herring Investigations.—Under the joint auspices of the Pro- vincial Department of Fisheries and the Biological Board, 11,1r. J. L. Hart has commenced a comprehensive study of the pilchards and herring along the fol- lowing lines:— (a) Practically complete statistics of the catches of pilchards from the beginning of the fishery have been obtained from the companies and the basis established for determining the relationship of catch per :unit of effort. (b) Basis established for the sampling of catches. (c) Basis establishecL for the annual statistical analyses of the catches with regard to length and weight. (d) System being developed for the accurate annual record of the spawn- ing of herring in all important areas. (e) Program being developed for the study of the life histories in relation particularly to hydrographie and food factors. (f) Plans for the investigation of the alleged pollution of herring spawn- ing areas by reduction plants. The study of the distribution and abundance of the food organisms of the pilchard, commenced by Dr. H. C. Williamson, is being completed. During the month of March, Mr. J. A. Munro, Chief Federal Migratory Bird Officer for the Western Provinces, continued his study of the relation of gulls and ducks to the spawning of herring in the Departure Bay region. His report is now completed and ready for publication. 6. Shellfish (a) Oysters.—While no studies were carried out in British Columbia waters this year, Mr. C. R. Elsey spent two months at Willapa harbour, Washington, in association with Prof. T. Kincaid. The experience gained will be extremely valuable. The appointment of Mr. Elsey as full-time investigator will assure important progress in the investigations. It is planned during the coming year to carry out extensive studies along the following lines:— (1) To study intensively the life histories of the native oyster, the intro- duced eastern oyster and the introduced Japanese oyster. (2) To attempt to establish the Japanese oyster in areas where the native and eastern oyster do not appear to thrive. (3) To investigate the conditions under which the eastern oystern spawns and spats in British Columbia waters. (4) To study the possibility of improving the methods of production of all three species. Special attention will be given to the and Ladysmith Har- bour areas. (b) Shrimps.—Miss A. Berkeley continued her studies of the life histories of the commercial shrimps of British Columbia. The discovery that shrimps are all males for the first two years of their lives and then change to females is of particular interest. ' (c) Clams.—Dr. C. M. Fraser is completing a report on the razor clams of the Queen Charlotte islands. 7. The Trout of British Columbia.—Mr. C. McC. Mottley spent three months investigating the Kamloops trout in the Okanagan district. Prof. J. R. Dymond and Mr. Mottley will shortly issue a pOpular illustrated account of the trout of British Columbia, a technical report on raciarstudies, and a special report on the Kamloops trout. 22

8. Ling Cod.—Mr. G. V. Wilby has carried out a study of the lifellistory of the ling c,od, 'cOvering its spawning habits,- development,' rate of eowth, food, etc.-, and of the statistics of the catches in various aieas.•" ' 9. Fish Parasites.—(a) The external parasites of the fish of the strait of Georgia have been studied bY Miss Ruby Bere and a detailed report is prac- tically ready for publication., (b) The internal parasites of fish, especially of Salmon, are being studied by Prof. R. A. Wardle. ai 10. Oceanograi5hy.—Dr. A. H. Hutchinson, Mr. C. C. Lucas, Mr. M. Mac- Phail and Miss Campbell continued their studies of the physico-chemical con- Be ditions and of the plankton in the strait of Georgia, - extending the area of the Be investigation chiefly to the northward as far as Johnstons strait and Bute inlet. Special attention has been given to the inflow of freSh water and its relation to Ci plankton.' The distribution; fate and the development', and distribution of the CI influence of the Fraser river water has been studied in detail. ' The oceanographical data collected by Dr. H. C. Williamson on the west CI coast of Vancouver island during the past several years is being assembled. Cl 11. Faunal Studies.—The systematic study of the fauna of our waters was polychaet worms, by Miss J. F. L. Hart D: carried forward by Mrs. C. Berkeley on Fe on Cumacea, by Miss V. Z. Lucas on Ostracoda, by Miss M. H. Campbell on Copepoda, by Prof. J. R. Dymond on marine and freshwater fish, by Mr. G: H. Wailes on Protozoa and diatoms. 12. Biochemical and Physiological Researches.—(a) Mr. C. Berkeley has Fe worked out an interesting symbiotic relationship existing between .a polychaet worm and a flagellate. • Fe (b) Miss M. Crawford investigated the utilization of silica « by. *marine Fi diatoms. It was expected that the results of this study would have a' bearing upon the problem of silicosis. Fi Fi EDUCATION , A two-weeks' course of instruction was given at the University of 'British Columbia to the superintendents of hatcheries of the province. The instructors H were Dr. R. E. Foerster in fish culture and fish diseases, Mr. D. B. Finn in physics and chemistry, and Dr. W. A. Clemens in fish anatomy and physiology and the identification and life histories of the fresh water fishes of British Columbia. CONFERENCZ , The annual conference of the scientific staff and investigators of thé boar-CI 11 was held during- thé first week of September at the Nanaimo Station. Twenty- three investigators were in attendance and fifteen reports, on investigations were presented. Dr. C. M. Fraser gave an evening address on his visits to various biological stations of the world.

INTERNATIONAL PACIFIC SALMON FEDERATION

. A meeting of the Federation was held in April in Vancouver , where the Biological 1 Board was represented by Dr. R: E. Foerster, Mr. A. L. Pritchard, and Dr. W. A. Clemens. Reviews of the salmon investigations being carried out by the Biological Board were presented. j

f.33

L. CANADIAN. FISiIERIES 'ASSOCIATION . • At the convention of the association, held in August in Prince Rupert, Dr. W. A. Clemens gave a summary of the - work of the Pacific Biological Station. The eastern delegates later visited the station.

RECENT PUBLICATIONS FROM STATION

Som é twenty-six publications based upon woik done at the station have appeared during the past year. These are as follows:- Berkeley, A.-The Commercial Shrimps of British Columbia. Museum Notes, Vancouver, Oct., 1929. . . Berkeley, Edith.-Polychaetour Annelids from the Nanaimo District. Contrib. Can. Biol. and Fish., 1929. Campbell, M. B.-Preliminary Quantitative Study of the Zooplankton in the Strait of Georgia. Trans. Royal Soc. Can., 1929. Clemens, W. A. and Clemens, L. S.-Contributions to the Life History of the Sockeye I Salmon Paper No. 14) B.C. Fisheries Department, 1929. Clemens, W. A.-Investigations on the Pacific Salmon. Proc. Third Pan-Pacific Congress, Japan, 1926. Clemens, W. A.-Suggestions as to the Standardization of Plankton Methods. Proc. Third Pan-Pacific Science Congress, Japan, 1926. Dymond, J. R.-The Trout of British Columbia. Trans.-Amer. Fish. Soc., 1929. Foerster, R. E.-An Investigation of the Life History and Propagation of the Sockeye Salmon at Cultus . Lake, B.C. No. 1, Introduction and the Run of 1925. Contrib Can. Biol. and Fish, 1929. No. 2, The Run of 1926. Contrib. Can. Biot. and Fish., 1929. No. 3, The downstream migration of the young in 1926 and 1927. Contrib. Can. Biot. and Fish., 1929. Foerster, R. E.-Notes on the Relation of Tenàperature, Hydrogen-Ion Concentration and Oxygen to the Migration of Adult Sockeye Salmon. Can. Field. Nat., Vol. XLIII, 1929. Foerster, R. E.-Propagation's Part in the Conservation of Sockeye Salmon. Trans. Amer. Fish.' Soc., 1929. Fraser, C. M.-Marine Wood Borers of the Pacifie Coast of North America. Proc. Third Pan-Pacific Science Congress, Japan, 1926. Fraser, C. M.-International Co-operation in the Investigation of Pelagic Fish Eggs and Larvae. Proc. Third Pan-Pacific Science Congress, Japan, 1926. Fraser, C. M.-Rational Methods for the Protection of Useful Aquatic Animais and Plants of the Pacific. Proc. Third Pan-Pacifie Science Congress, Japan, 1926. Hunter, Andrew.-Further Observations on the Distribution of arg-nase in Fish. Jour. Biol. Chem., March, 1929. Hunter, Andrew.-The Creatine Content of the Muscles and some other tissues in Fishes. Journ. Biol. Chem., March, 1929. Hutchinson, A. H., Lucas, C. C. and MacPhail, M.--Seasonal Variations in the Chemical and Physical Properties of the Waters of the Strait of Georgia in Relation to Phyto- plankton. Trans. Royal Soc. Can., Vol. XXIII, 1929. Lucas, C. C.-Further Ocoanographical Studies of the Sea adjacent to the Fraser River mouth._ Trans. Royal Soc. Can., Jan., 1929. Lucas, C. C. and King, E. J.-Use of Picric Acid as an Artificial Standard in the Colori- metric Estimation of Silica. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1923. Mottley, C. McC.-Report on the Study of the Scales of Spring Salmon tagged in 1926 and 1927 off the West Coast of Vancouver Island. Contrib. Cari. Biol. and Fish., 1929. Quigley, J. P.-Observations on the Life Histpry and Physiological.Condition of the Pacific Dogfish. Biol. Bull., Dec., 1923. Simpson, W. WRelation of 'the Liver to Asphyxial Hyperglycaemia in Fishes. Quart. Journ. Exp. Physiology, Vol. XLX, 1928. Wailes, G. H.-Plant Life in the Open Sea. Museum • Notes, Vancouver, March, 1929. Wailes, G. H.-Marine Ciliates of the Genus Laboea from British Columbia. Ann Protis- tologie, 1929. White, F. D.-Studies on Marine Wood Borers. Contrib. Can. Biol. and Fish., 1929. White, F. D.-Reducing Substancés in the Blood of the Dogfish. Joum. Biol. Chem., 1923. Williamson, H. C.-Report on the Taggging Operations in 1926. Contrib. Can. Biol. and Fish., 1929. 34

FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (PACIFIC) PRINCE RUPERT, B.C. (2) owi STAFF effe Director, Mr. D. B. Finn. Biochemist (on leave), Dr. T. Inzvaldsen. pro Organic Chemist, Mr. H. N. Brocklesby. org Bacteriologist, Mr. R. H. Bedford. ma Mechanical Engineer, Mr. O. C. Young. 0•0 Assistant Chemist, Mr. L. F. Smith. Assistant Chemist, Mr. O. F. Denstedt. of Laboratory Assistant, Mr. Bruce Stevens. i ce Secretary, Miss R. Gillies. Factor, Mr. H. Richmond. - tha of Summer Workers, 1929 sur Bacteriologist, Prof. W. Sadler. Assoc. Bacteriologist, Mr. D. C. B. Duff. Scientific Assistant, Mr. P. Black.

BUILDINGS con stol The existing building has undergone but slight modification, the principal -20 changes being in the installation of a bacteriological laboratory on the ground f roi floor. . per for building No. 2, have been drawn up and Plans and specifications moi approved. Contracts have been let for the construction of the building with the exterior complete but with only the basement finished inside, the ground completion date. A mit and second floors being left for of the interiors at a later ing low temperature research laboratory is being constructed in the basement. The on May 31, 1930. ere( building contract will be complete dey

• EQUIPMENT The station now possesses well equipped biochemical, chemical and bac- teriological laboratories. It also has a small nutrition laboratory which is in need of extension in view of the work which should be undertaken upon fish meals and other edible marine products.

INVESTIGATIONS The investigations of this station are at present carried on under two main divisions: I. Preservation, which may include all investigations having to do car with the processing or marketing of fish and other marine products. II. By- tal products, under which are grouped those studies which deal with the utilization fisl of waste materials or of marine products which are not used primarily as food COI for human consumption. ye( Re Preservation • be( Discolouration of Halibut.—Following the work of Harrison and Sadler /31) who traced the discolouration of halibut in the holds of fishing vessels to a specific bacteria, experiments were conducted with appropriate germicides which would kill the causative organism but without injuring 501 the quality of the fish. pr( In this connection there are two factors of equal importance in disinfeetion to be considered:— ch, , na I. That of the water for ice making, ab II. The holds of the vessels. th

e Mt,ZZnre=t9'rM 35 • Two efficient germicides were considered: (1) Chlorine and its compounds, (2) Formaldehyde. The former was eliminated from serious consideration owing to (1) cost of installation for water sterilization, (2) possible harmful effect upon fish, (3) damage to vessel and gear. Formaldehyde combines germicidal and preservative properties. It has proved effective in the sterilization of ice and in killing large numbers of micro- organisms in the presence of considerable quantities of fish slime (28% organic matter). The concentrations required for this are of economic significance, 0 • 005% 1;eing required for the former and 2% for the latter. The practical applications of laboratory findings indicate that the control of discolouration by methods which involve the complete sterilization of the ice and vessels is impracticable. New methods for control of the organism are being developed. It is hoped that the elimination of discolouration may be brought about, not by elimination of the bacteria, but by producing conditions within the vessel and on the surface of the fish which will inhibit its growth.

REFRIGERATION A low temperature research laboratory has been designed and is being constructed in the basement of the new building. Its equipment will include storage rooms of controlled temperature having a temperature range from -20° F. upwards. Its freezing equipment will permit the use of temperatures from -40° F. to 32° F. The laboratory will be provided with automatic tem- perature control and its thermometric system will include both resistance ther- mometer and thermocouples. The chemical researches on the storage of frozen fish which have been initiated will be carried forward with these new facilities. A series of engineer- ing studies upon cold storage practice will also be made. These will include the erection of a demonstration Jacketed Cold Storage Room " which has been developed at Halifax. The investigations will include:— (I) An Examination of the Chemical and Physical Changes which Occur in Fish During Cold Storage. (II) A Chemical Sudy of "Rusting ". (III) A Study of Methods for Cooling Cold Storage Rooms.

SALMON SPOILAGE

With a view to improving the quality of salmon as they are landed at the canneries, a bacteriological investigation of salmon spoilage has been under- taken. This investigation includes a study of various methods of storage in fishing vessels. A preliminary study of the bacterial flora of salmon before its contamination has been made. The work will be çontinued during the coming year. A preliminary report entitled "The Bacterial Spoilage of Salmon with Reference to the Source of the OrganismQ. — Ruponsible for Putrefaction " has been issued. By-Products Fish Oils.—The production of fish oils on the Pacific coast has risen from 500,000 gallons in 1926 to 4,000,000 gallons in 1928 for which the increased production of pilchard oil has been mainly responsible. Its highly unsaturated character makes possible its use in certain types of paint. However in its natural state, it possesses certain chemical characteristics which make it undesir- able for this purpose. Very little is known of its chemical constitution or of the effect which various methods of manufacture may have upon its composi- • 36

Lion. With a view to correcting its defects as a paint oil, the station has under- A LIE taken an examination of its chemical and physical properties. In addition to this detailed studies of methods for its preparation are being conducted. During the course of experiments dealing with the bodying of pilchard oil (SP. with various catalysts it has been found that while the water resisting•proper- ties, the flexibility and the dry. ing times are satisfactory, the paint film is some..: H. what softer than that produced by linseed oil. Further investigation is neces- sary before this defect can be overcome.. The research includes:— upon XIII I. The preparation of. Pilchard Oil for use in Paints, . (a) The Bodying of Pilchard oil, by Catalysts. Putri (b) The Study of Paint films prepared from Pilchard Oil. Broc: II. The Chemical Constitution of Pilchard Oil, (a) The Unsaturated Fatty Acids. 1929: (b) The Polymerization of the Unsaturated Esters in Pilchard Oil. of Glues.—Various methods for the production of glues from the waste liquors of fish meal plants have been examined. From these methods those have been Oil, selected which will give a satisfactory glue from the point of view of strength tests and at the same time most nearly approach existing methods of fish meal manufacture. Large samples have been prepared in an industrial fish meal plant. These samples are now being examined in order to determine the limits of impurities which can be tolerated. These data will be used to determine fish the extent of factory modification necessary for the production of fish glues. The study includes:— Doe I. The Effect of the Salt content upon the Physical Properties of Fish Glues. tune of Fish II. The Preparation Glues in Commercial Meal Factories. lesby Part of this investigation is being conducted in co-operation with the Forest Products Laboratory, Vancouver, B.C. ism The Nutritive Value of Marine Products.—Together with the increased production of fish oils there 'has been a similar increase in the production of fish meal. These meals are being used as stock and poultry feeds. Since Pacific coast fish meals are made from oil containing fish and often contain appreciable quantities of unsaturated oils there have arisen many problems with regard to the proper use of these substances as feed stuffs. It has been found that methods of fish meal manufacture have a distinct bearing upon its nutritive value. Researches are in progress which have as their purpose the develop- ment of methods for the production of fish meal at its optimum value in nutri- tion. The problem of deterioration of the product on storage is also being looked into. A survey of the vitamine content of fish oils has also been undertaken. An assay for vitamines A. and D. has been made on the liver oil of the Dogfish (Squalus sucklii). The vitamine D. content of pilchard oil has been reported and a vitamine A assay on the same oil is in progress. The researches are being conducted as follows:— (1) The Effect of the Oil Content of Pilchard Meal upon its Digestibility and its Biological Value. (2) The Influence of Fish Meals on Growth. (3) The Vitamine A content of Pilchard Oil. (4) The Effect of Ingested Fish Oils upon the Nature of the Body Fat. (5) The Effect of Storage upon the Nutritive Value of Fish Meals.

rizem„.._gmeittPeenr..,, 37

A LIST OF PUBLICATIONS FROM THE FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (PACIFIC) Determination of Vitamine A Content in the Liver Oil of the Dogfish (Squalus sucklii). H. N. Brocklesby, Can. Chem. & Met. XI, 238; 1927. Vitamine D. Content of the Liver Oil of the Dog-fish (Squalus sucklâ). H. N Brocklesby, Can. Chem. & Met. XIII, 74, 1929. Fish Meals I. The Effect of the High Temperatures employed for drying upon the nitrogen partition in Fish Meals, T. Ingvaldsen, Can. Chem. & Met. XIII, 97, 1929. Fish Meals II. Comparative Analysis of Meals from Non-Éutrid and Putrid Materials. T. Ing-valdsen, Can. Chem. & Met. XIII, 129, 1929. Studies in Fish Oil. Some properties of commercial pilchard oil. H. N. Brocklesby, Can. Chem. & Met. XIII, 212, 1929. Discoloration of Halibut, F. C. Harrison, Can. Journal of Research, 1 201 1929. Discoloration of Halibut, F. C. Harrison and W. Sadler, Biological Board of Canada. Bulletin XII, 1929. The Nutritive Value of Marine Products, Vitamine D Content of Pilchard Oil, H. N. Brocklesby. (In Press.)

Manuscript Reports The Determination of the Vitamine A. Content of the Liver Oil of the Dog- fish (Squalus sucklii). II. N. Brocklesby, 1927. The Determination of the Vitamine D. Content of the Liver Oil of the Dogfish (Squalus sucklii). H. N. Brocklesby, 1928. An Investigation of the Circulation Induced by High Velocity Jets in Itec tangular Tanks of Water, I. M. Fraser, 1928. • A Chemical Study of the Oil in Salmon During Cold Storage. H. N. Brock- lesby, 1929. The Bacterial Spoilage of Salmon with reference to the Source of the Organ- ism Responsible for Putrefaction. D. C. B. Duff, 1929. ANNUAL REPORT

ON THE WORK OF THE Biological Board of Canada

FOR THE YEAR 1930

OPERATING UNDER THE CONTROL OF HON. E. N. RHODES MINISTER OF FISHERIES

OTTAWA 1931 ■ Fish the sciet

indu it w COIK Act

oper one are whil Nov prob fish.

built and in fi laboi Boai the 1 it ha

is ni •inve:

of cc Pro% carr3 is nc REPORT OF TIIE WORK OF THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA FOR 1930

The Biological Board, which operates under the control of the Minister of Fisheries, was created in 1912 by an Act of Parliament. For a number of years the Board was composed entirely of scientists, and two stations for purely scientific and fundamental research were operated for a few months yearly. In order to bring, the Board into closer contact with the work of the fishing industry and the practical problems which arise from time to time in the industry, it was decided to reorganize the Board by adding to its membership men directly concerned with the practical business of the industry. Consequently in 1923 the Act was amended for this purpose. The Board as reorganized now employs a permanent staff of scientists and operates four research stations. Two Stations, known as Biological Stations, one at St. Andrews, New Brunswick, and the other at Nanaimo, British Columbia, are mainly concerned with the more purely scientific and fundamental problems, while the other two, known as Fisheries Experimental Stations, one at Halifax, Nova Scotia, and the other at Prince Rupert, British Columbia, deal with practical problems arising in connection with the handling, preservation and marketing of fish. At Eastern Passage, near the entrance to Halifax Harbour, a laboratory was built three y-ears a,go by the Department of Marine and Fisheries for research and instruction in marine biology, mainly in connection with the scientific course in fishery matters established at Dalhousie University. The resources of the laboratory, however, are available to students of any Canadian university. The Board was asked to assume the responsibility- of supervising; and maintaining the laboratory and to use it for such purposes as may be necessary:, but so far it has not been of much direct use to the Board. In addition to these a field station for the investigation of sockeye salmon is maintained at Cultus Lake, British Columbia, and a sub-station for oyster •investigation has been established near Ellerslie, P.E.I. As a result of the handing over, to the 'Provincial Governments concerned, of complete control of the natural resources including the fisheries of the Prairie Provinces, no provision is now made by the Federal Government of funds to carry on scientific work in these provinces. Consequently the work- of the Board is flow confined to the Atlantic and Pacific Provinces. The Board during the year 1930 was composed of the following: Professor J. P. McMurrich, Toronto, Chairman. J. J. Cowie, Ottawa, Secretary-Trcasurer. • Professor R. S. Bean,JIalifax, Nova Scotia. Professor A. T. Cameron, Winnipeg, Manitoba. Professor Arthur F. Chaisson, Antigonish, Nova Scotia. • Professor Philip Cox, Fredericton, New Brunswick. John Dybhavn, Prince Rupert, British Columbia. Professor A. II. Hutchivson, Vancouver, British Columbia. Professor W. T. MacClement, Kingston, Ontario. Professor Marie-Victorin, Montreal, Quebec. Professor II. G.. Perry, Wolfville, Nova Scotia. ..•• • • - '

4 Professor E. E. Prince, Ottawa, Ontario. nl J. A. Rodd, Ottawa, Ontario. in Professor W. P. Thompson, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. I I n Doctor R. C. Wallace, Edmonton, Alberta. A. Handfield Whitman, Halifax, Nova Scotia. In Professor A. Willey, Montreal, Quebec._ w Professor Alexandre Vachon, Ouebec, Quebec. in 1 T SUMMARY REPORT OF ATLANTIC BIOLOGICAL STATION, ST. ANDREWS, N.B. 1930 The following constituted the staff of the Station during the year 1930: ai Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Director. Dr. R. H. .M'Gonigle, Assistant Pathologist. a Mr. H. B. Hachey, Assistant Hydrographer. di Dr. A. W. H. Needier, Assistant Zoologist. Mr. A. A. Blair, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). Mr. R. A. McKenzie, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). at Mr. M. W. Smith, Scientific Assistant (Limnobiology). 01 Mr. W. Templeman, Scientific Assistant (Zoolog,y). A Dr. V. D. Vladykov, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). Mr. H. C. White, Scientific Assistant (Aquiculture). St Mr. E. G. Rigby, Curator. ti

SEASONAL Ill Prof. P. M. Bayne, Scientific Assistant. Dr. K. E. Carpenter, Scientific Assistant. oi Prof. A. F. Chaisson, Scientific Assistant. Mr. R. B. Kerr, Scientific Assistant. di Mr. R. R. Langford, Scientific Assistant. hi Mr. J. M. Morton, Scientific Assistant. Mr. E. Pentland, Scientific Assistant. Dr. D. S. Rawson, Scientific Assistant. Mr. J. G. Rempel. di .Mr. H. P. Sherwood, Scientific Assistant. The Atlantic Biolo,g-ical Station is situated in proximity to the most concen- trated, varied and continuously active shore fishery, of which we have knowledge. tl At the same time it has a remarkably' central location for relations with the ten universities of eastern Canada, upon which the fisheries work must depend for hi much expert knowledge and assistance. The staff for the year has consisted of (1) five full-time investig-ators, (2) two employed for the year, but em a scholarship basis, one f rom Dalhousie, and the other from New Brunswick University, (3) six seasonal investigators, one from England, and one from each of the f ollowing universities: Acadia, Dalhousie, St. Francis Xavier, McGill, and Toronto; and (4) twenty-five volunteer investigators connected with the following universities: Acadia, 2; e: St. Francis Xavier, 1; New Brunswick, 1; McGill, 8; Queens, 2; Toronto; 9; tc and Western, 2. Of the employ-ed staff four were at the Station and nine were at different points on the coast. Of the volunteers three were elsewhere on the coast, and twenty-three were at the Station. During the autumn an additional investigator has been added to the employed staff, and two additional volunteers (graduate students at the University of Toronto) have undertaken the investi- gation of Canadian Atlantic problems. o INVESTIGATIONS OF PARTICULAR ECONOMIC SPECIES Sahnon.—Messrs. R. B. Kerr and A. A. Blair have begun a comparative study of the salmon population in three important, widely separated - rivers in the Maritimes, the St. John in southern New Brunswick,. the Miramichi in northern New Brunswick, and the Margaree in Cape Breton Island. A more intensive study is being made of the Miramichi fish in an effort to differentiate an early-run from a late-run type. Lobsters.—Prof. A. F. Chaisson and Mr. \V. Templeman made studies of the lobster population on several sections of the coast as the beginning of investi- gations designed to determine the validity of different regulations for the fishery in the different sections, and to lay the basis for a proper policy of conservation. They also tagged a considerable number of lobsters in order to ascertain the nature of their migrations. Oysters.—Mr. H. P. Sherwood, Dr. A. \V. H. Needier, Dr. A. B. Needier, and Mr. E. T. McEvoy prosecuted their investigations on the oyster from their base near Ellerslie, Prince Edward Island. Dr.A.W.H.Needier. has carried through a considerable variety of planting and transplantino- experiments with oysters of different sizes and in different places, and has also been determining the conditions of spawning and of settinef of spat in the Bideford river. Mr. Sherwood attempted tank culture of the oysters and three tanks were used, with the object of determining the conditions that favour spawnin,g and setting of the spat. Dr. A. B. Needier studied the rate of growth in the oyster and the proportions of the sexes in the various ages. Shad.—Prof. P. M. Bayne experimented with the hatching of the eggs of the shad on the Shubenacadie river in preparation for a large practical experiment next year. Capc/in.—Mr. G. \V. Jeffers continued his studies on the capelin in the strait of Belle Isle, finding out what temperatures and salinities are suitable for the development of the eggs, what the conditions are that determine spawning, and how rapidly the fish grow and mature. Herring.—Mr. \V. E. MacFarland lias begun a study of the herring of the Passamaquoddy region as to food, distribution of various sizes, possibility of distinct races, and temperatures for successful development of the eggs. Clain.—Mr. C. L. Newcombe has taken the clam as a type of the animals inhabiting the intertidal zone, and is attempting to disentangle the various factors that limit its distribution, abundance, and rate of growth. Round 1Vhelk.—Miss M. M. Melville . began an investigation of the life- history of this bait animal, which has been much sought after by the bank fisher- men under the name of "cockle".

OCEANOGRAPHY • Investigations in this field form a necessary basis for assistance to the industry in the proper prosecution of the various fisheries. Mr. II. B. Hachey took charge for the Department of Fisheries of an expedition to explore the resources of Hudson bay. There was complete failure to find any commercial deep sea fish in the bay. The hydrographical and biological material is being worked up by a number of specialists in order to determine what adverse conditions may: be responsible for this negative result. A start has just been made to definitely assess the resources of the bay of Fundy. The general investigations that have been carried on from the Station for a series of years have provided a fair understanding of the complicated series of factors that determine the nature of the variable fisheries of the region. Professor Bayne has been making a detailed comparison of the conditions at the mouth and head of the bay, -vhich exhibit a very great contrast, the reasons for which are not entirely clear. Dr. V. Vladykov has just begun an analysis of the. monthly fishery returns from the different districts for the last ten years in order to relate, if. possible, the actual takings with the conditions that have à.;;!•■••

6 been found to exist. This is to be checked up by direct enquiry of those engaged in the fisheries and by systematic fishery experiments. ca A full explanation is being sought of the extraordinary richness of the co fisheries of the Passamaquoddy region, owing to these being jeopardized by or projected power construction. Mr. Hachey has been investigating the mixing at the reversing falls of the St. John river in comparison with that at and near fis the mouth of Passamaquoddy bay. Dr. E. E. Watson has attempted to analyse va the complicated movements at the head of the bay by a novel method, involving an the use of depth drags to log the currents. Mr. J. M. Morton and Mr. Hachey have been determining the distribution of the phosphates throughout the region and throughout the year, as these are believed to be responsible for limiting the growth of the vegetable matter that forms the ultimate food of the fishes. fo Prof. A. Cameron has begun- a similar investigation of the silicates. Miss V. pr M. Davidson has continued her census of the diatoms, which are taken as typical co vegetable forms.to serve in the elucidation of the fluctuations in the ultimate fish fu food. • ha A number of basic studies are in progress, consistinu of ( 1 ) periodicity of spawning in shell-fish by Dr. H. 1. Battle, (2) effects of low temperatures on ha various marine animais by Mr. M. H. Friedman, (3) effects of various kinds of light on marine organisms, by Dr. A. 13. Klugh, and (4) the penetration of light th into sea water by Mr. W. R. Sawyer. pr th FISH DISEASES C1 Dr. M'Gonigle has had to deal with a considerable variety of diseases and ar death losses in fish, such as "white spot" in the salmon, ulcers in the flounder, various diseases in the trout, varied losses in the hatchery service largely attribut- ar able to unusual climatic conditions, and destruction of salmon through industrial be pollution. or Miss A. Alley has continued to investigate and f ollow the course of the protozoal infection of the young ('sardines') and old herring of the Passama- ac quoddy region, that has seriously affected the large industry based upon these ti( fish. th FISII PHYSIOLOGY

ai

WORK IN RELATION TO FISII AS FOOD A Experiments were conducted in an effort to determine the reasons for fi- deterioration, that had been observed to occur under certain conditions in the cold b; storage of rapidly frozen fish. Mr. Morton and Dr. D. J. Bowie were associated in this work. SE Mr. N. E. Gibbons continued his attempts to differentiate between autolysis al and bacterial action in the decomposition of fish, and Mr. A. S. Cook explored fl various fishes and marine animals as to the occurrence of trimethylamine oxide, '1 which is associated with the objectionable odour in decomposition. 7

Dr. Komarov compared haddock skin, haddock flesh, and beef in value for causin,g the secretion of the gastric juice in the dog, as an indication of their comparative value for man, and they were found to range in importance in the order given. Controversy in the fish industry as to the need of retaining the slime on fish has been responsible for the initiation of work on the biochemistry of the various kinds of slime on the skin in fishes, and in particular those of the haddock and of the slime-eel, by Messrs. J. Campbell and H. W. Lemon.

FISII CULTURE The Trout investigations by Mr. H. C. White have been continued along the following lines,—(1) natural food of larvae and later stages, (2) application of previous results in an effort to lessen the loss of fry in streams with limited control, (3) effect of character of feeding on egg production in fish held to furnish eggs for hatchery purposes, and (4) factors determining successful hatching in nature. The plans formulated for a thorough attack upon the fish cultural problem have been carried through the initial stages. A hatchery for varied experimental work has been erected on the property of the Station and is being utilized for the first time this winter. Considerable prelitninary study has been made of the problem of water supply. Dr. K. E. Carpenter has completed her enquiry into the reasons for the unfavourable character for fishes of the water from the Chamcook lakes as delivered at the Station, and remedial measures are being arranged. Local sources of water supply are being developed for alternative experiment on this most important matter in hatchery practice. Open troughs and pools for carrying and rearing fry have been constructed and some have been in operation durino- the season, in particular in experiments by Dr. M'Gonigle on the comparative value of different foods for fry. For the marine side of the fish cultural problem, a dam has been erected across Tidal cove, near its mouth, which brings into control an extensive area of tidal water for the location of reoulated tidal pools to serve in separating out the factors that determine successfulb culture of forms such as oysters and clams. The services of Dr. G. C. Embody of Cornell University were secured for a short period for consultation in connection with the general plans for fish cultural investigation. In Ontario, Mr. E. S. Pentland has conducted surveys and experimental work to serve as a basis for the development of a system of culture of fresh water shrimps (amphipods) for fish food..

LAKE SURVEYS A proper foundation for a rational system of fish planting is sadly lacking. Fundamental for this is a knowledge of the factors that mak-e lakes suitable for any given kind or quantity of fish. In Saskatchewan Dr. D. S. Rawson, with the assistance of Messrs. J. G. Rempel and R. R. Langford, has continued his work on the lakes of Prince Albert National Park, dealing this year with the fish food in Waskesiu lake and the fish and life conditions' in Sandy lake. Experimental introduction of black bass and speckled trout is projected and the way therefor has been prepared. In New Brunswick a comparative study is being made of the connected series of four lakes goine by the name of the largest—Chamcook. Conditions are being followed throueout the year by Mr. M. W. Smith, and an experimental fertilization of the second sri\allest (Gibson) with-sea mussels has been made. The principal food organisms for small fish are being studied by Mr. C. J. A. Hughes and Dr. K. E. Carpenter. Ce;11:1

8 Six experimental concrete ponds at the Station have been in continuous use ha in an analysis of the factors that may determine life conditions in relatively of quiet waters, such as that of lakes. Two of the ponds have been utilized to Ye determine the efficacy of a relatively small amount of herring, meal in increasing au the production of plant and animal life. This is to assist in formulating a policy an for the fertilization of lakes with fish meal, as projected for one in Jasper Park. of misCELLANEOUS ACTIVITIES 1 1 of fa Apart from the investigations that form the prime object of the Board's work-, the members of the staff are called upon to give assistance in various ways. to There is a steadily increasing number of requests (a large proportion coming sic through the Department of Fisheries) for information and for the examination of material of various kinds, and these can be handled but slowly owing to the exigencies of the main work. There has been a similar increase in the number of individuals - (chiefly from the fishing industry) soliciting interviews both El at St. Andrews and Toronto for the purpose of securing information at first en hand. There has been a marked accentuation in the demand for addresses and in. written articles in connection with the fisheries and the work of the Board, th and many important requests have had to be refused. • Only casual attention Lz has been given to this phase of the Board's work, which„ if properly handled, wi would be of most çonsiderable value. The time is ripe for it to receive special attention from the Board, which it has never had. stl Reference has already been made to the assistance given to the Department be in connection with fish mortality and the Hudson Bay expedition. In addition lai Dr. M'Gonigle's services have been utilized by the International Fact-finding all Commission in its investigation of the fisheries of lake Champlain, involving m; field work on both the winter and the spring fishery, and extensive laboratory work now in progress. se Reference should also be made to the fact that this Station accomplishes the bu Canadian portion of the work that is reviewed for cooperative purposes by the A North American Council on Fishery Investigations. This definitely links it with th the similar attack on the general fishery problem of the high seas that is being made by the United States, by Newfoundland (just being initiated), and by St France. is Apparatus in connection with fisheries investigation and fish handling, much of it consisting of specially constructed models, as well as samples of frozen fish, was furnished to form part of a fisheries exhibit by the Department, which ni was displayed on three different occasions, twice at - Montreal and once at Lunen- In burg. The museum and aquarium at the Station have been put into better condition. tF ir FISH FREEZING tc The completion of a satisfactory demonstration of the saleability- of froz—en fish (Ice Fillets) in the Toronto market, has removed the need for more than a limited amount of freezing, which has been largely confined to flounders and salmon, except for use in the Station residence. Progress lias been made with the testing out of the principles involved in the satisfactory operation of the h automatic freezer, and the success attained paves the way for the construction e: 'of a commercial model. si The experiment in the production and sale of Ice Fillets has revealed many o deficiencies in the current methods used by the industry in storing and handling S. frozen fish, and, in face of these, rapid freezing is in vain except for short storage. Damage in storage results more readily in fat fish such as herring, salmon, and mackerel, than in ground fish like cod and haddock. An attack li 9

has been made on this problem of ensuring adequate cold storage with a minimum of expense, but the factors involved in deterioration of the frozen fish have not yet been sufficiently clarified. It has not as yet been possible to operate the new automatic jacketed cold storage in proper fashion, owing to the lack of a steady and sufficient supply of electric current for automatic operation. In addition to following the sale of Ice Fillets and investigating the marketing of fish in Toronto, Mr. R. A. McKenzie has conducted experiments in the rate of defrosting of blocks of fish under various conditions, so as to provide definite facts connected with the handling of f rozen fish by retailers and consumers. Experiments in freezing oysters, clams, scallops and lobsters in cakes similar to Ice Fillets have been attended with complete success, which opens up a con- siderable field whenever proper conditions for storage and marketing are available.

IMPROVEMENTS A piece of property has been secured on a branch of Richmond bay, near Ellerslie, Prince Edward Island, and a small two-storey laboratory has been erected thereon. This establishes a permanent sub-station, primarily for oyster investigation, but also for the study of all the fisheries and conditions peculiar to the Magdalen shallows, as the shallow southern portion of the Gulf of St. Lawrence is called. Three oyster ponds have been constructed in connection with this laboratory. A hatchery has been erected and fry troughs in conneCtion therewith con- structed on the property of the Station at St. Andrews. A concrete tank has been built on the hillside above to receive local water for winter use in the laboratory- and for re-circulation in the hatchery, as a safeguard and an economic alternative to the regular water supply through a long surface pipe from the main of the Algonquin Hotel. Land bordering on Tidal cove at the head of Passamaquoddy bay has been secured, this also in connection with fish cultural investigation. A dam has been built cross the cove, preparatory to the construction of ponds with tidal control. A start has been made in the construction of pools to utilize the fresh-water of the brook at the head of the cove for rearing fish. A hot-water heating system has been installed in part of the laboratory in such a way as to make sufficient heated space available for the winter work that is being carried on and to permit of later extension to the whole building. Under the superintendence of the Curator and the Master of the "Edward E. Prince", a new boat, the "Zoarces", powered with a crude-oil engine and ninety feet in length, has been built at Shelburne, N.S., by the Fisheries Experi- mental.Station and is now in process of equipment. Owing to her small size, the "Edward E. Prince" has been inadequate for the work of deep sea fisheries investigation carried on by the Atlantic Biological Station and the "Zoarces" is to be made available for it.

PARASITES OF TIIE IIERRING BY

A. ALLEY, University of Toronto . From May till September records m.:ere made of the number and degrees of herring parasitized. In all 29 lots, with approximately 100 fish in each lot, were examined.. From each lot three herring were taken, one badly diseased, one slightly diseased, and one apparently free from parasites. Sections from each fish of the organs involved in the disease were prepared and put on slides, and blood smears were also made from these herring and the stomach contents inspected. For comparison sections were made of tissues f rom three flounders (two diseased), one skate, and one haddock. The records of the diseased fish are being worked over, and the slides stained and inspected. 10

FISH RESPIRATION AND DIGESTION BY B. P. BABKIN, McGill University 1. Investigation of the respiratory mechanism in skate, which was begun in collaboration with Dr. R. H. M'Gonigle during- the summer of 1929, was continued with him during the summer of 1930. It was demonstrated that the depression of the peripheral part of the reflex mechanism regulating the respiratory movements by cocaine, or its stimulation by mechanical irritation of the mucous membrane of the mouth, changes the reaction of the animal to the normal stimulus, that is, water. Besides the reflex mechanism the respiration of in skate is regulated by the automatic activity of the respiratory centre, which spr is incomplete, and weakly influenced by the changes in the blood circulation and tick oxygen supply. 'Therefore, the respiratory mechanism in skate is two-fold, being be due partly to the automaticity of the respiratory centre, and partly to reflex nev stimulation. terr ove 2. The effect of intravenous injection of histamine, acetyl-choline, choline wh, and adrenaline on the spontaneous pancreatic secretion in skate was studied. the pancreatic das, Histamine (Yi. to 50 mg.) produced hardly any effect on flow of the tha- juice, a slight acceleration of the secretion being noted in some cases, in other cases a slight inhibition. The usual eiTect of acetyl-choline (1 to 10 mg.) in tha these experiments was an inhibition of the spontaneous pancreatic secretion, ma and this probably because it greatly increased the blood pressure. Large doses ten of choline (from 100 mg. to 1 g.) did not produce any inhibition of the pancreatic spr secretion, as did acetyl-choline, and it is doubtful if it gave any increase. The dur conclusion which may be drawn from these experiments is that parasympathetico- mai mimetic drugs which activate the pancreatic secretion in mammalian animals do ané not stimulate the pancreas .in the skate. Intravenous injection of adrenaline tich ,(1 cc. 1/10,000; 1/1000) produced a marked inhibition of the spontaneous pan- spa ,creatic secretion. The action of adrenaline in this case may be explained in the same way as the analogous action of acetyl-choline, i.e., by vaso-constriction and diminished supply of blood to the gland. 3. Since it was known that the products of nitrogenous metabolism are eliminated in skate through the gills and with the bile (urea), it was interesting to determine whether they also pass into the gastric secretion. Conjointly with car Dr. S. A. Komarov I investigated the presence of urea in the gastric contents and in different fluids (water, 5% alcohol) introduced into the stomach and kept cat there for a certain period of time. eg Urea was found in all three materials. The maximal figure determined by fe■ us for the concentration of urea .in the alcoholic fluid (kept in the stomach for tha 3 hours) was 0.863 gm. %. Th general the higher the acidity of the fluid, the six greater was the concentration of urea in it. It may be presumed that urea is da: excreted into the stomach, but further experiments are necessary. ri% du TIIE SPAWNING OF CERTAIN COMMON BIVALVES BY H. I. BATTLE, University of Western Ontario ad tli Systematic examinations of the gonads of the following species were made: (a) Yoldia sapotilla (Gould)-7Dredged in 20-30 metres, St. Croix (Deep sea clam) Estuary, off Biological Station. July ap 14th-September 18th. ap (b) Mya arenaria L. —Mud flats at Biolocrical Station. June an (Soft shell clam) 17th-September 18th.b w;

11

(c) Mytilus cdulis L. —(i) Rocky ledges at Biological Station. (Mussel) June 18th-September 18th. (ii) Muddy gravel at Birch Cove. August 14th-September 18th. (d) Macoma baltica L. —(i) Mud flats at Biological Station. July 13th-September 18th. (ii) Mud flats at Birch Cove. August 2nd-September 18th. While the data from the preserved material are as yet incomplete the gonads of littoral forms (Mya, Macoma, Mytilus) seem to mature during the new rnoon • spring tides while the germ cells are discharged during the remainder of the tidal cycle (i.e. subsequent neap, full moon and neap tides). This may perhaps be correlated with the fact that during the summer months the low water of the new moon spring tides falls in the early morning or evening, in which case the temperature of the exposed littoral forms will only be raised a very few degrees over that of the water. Low water during the neap tides occurs nearer mid day when the air is heated by the sun. The temperature of the littoral forms on davs of strong sunlight may be raised as much as ten degrees Centigrade above tha't of the water covering them at high tide. It has been shown in the laboratory that an elevation of temperature favours the discharge of the germ cells from a mature gonad. This fact lends weight to the assumption that the increased temperature during the low 'water of the neap tides (following the new moon spring series) initiates a discharge of the germ cells which have been maturing during the previous new moon springs. The discharge of the ova and sper- matozoa once commenced usually reaches a peak- prior to the full moon springs and thence falls to a low level by the time of the succeeding new moon spring tides. Yoldia sapotilla, the deep water species, appears to have an incomplete spawning during both new and full moon spring- tides.

HATCHING SIIAD EGGS UNDER ARTIFICIAL CONDITIONS BY • P. M. BAYNE Actual hatching of shad eggs at Elmsdale on the Shubenacadie river was carried on May 23-June 24, 1930. Spawnino- must have commenced on or before May 13, 1930, at some point above Elmsdare. The percentage of dead eggs for catches of one hundred and over was not in direct proportion to the number of eggs caught. It is possible that the larger catches of eggs were spawned by fewer fish and before being caught may have been spawned for a shorter time than the smaller catches. The three largest catches of egos all occurred within six days af ter the only f reshet of the spawning season. During that time the daily maximum teinperatures of the river water ranged from 17°-21°C. The river temperature varied from a minimum of 8.5°C. to a maximum of 26.0°C. during the period of hatchino-. . _Attempts were made to Platch eight series of egos in salinities of 0.0%, 0.5%, 1.0%, and 1.5% at temperatures of 8°, 1.2°, 17°, and'n' 22°C. These temperatures actually worked out to be 741°, 11-15°, 16-19° and 21-22°C. respectively. Eggs, the appearance of which seemed doubtful, lived longer at 17°C. and a salinity of 0.5% than did apparently normal eggs at the same temperature and salinity. Eggs held at 22°C. were either attacked by Saprolcgnia species or all died at approximately the same time irrespective of the salinity-. The largest number of apparently normal larvae was'hatched at a temperature of 12°C. (11°-15°C.) and a salinity of 1.0%. Eggs collected when the temperature of the river water was 17°C. or more produced the most normal larvae. 12

INVESTIGATION OF THE ATLANTIC SALMON BY st A. A. BLAIR AND R. B. KERR in salmon during the summer of pr Investigations conducted upon the Atlantic bo 1930 consisted chiefly of the collecting of data and material (length, weight; sex, the Miramichi river, New Bruns- re: and a sample of the scales) f rom fish caught in ob wick, during June, the Margaree river, Cape Breton island, and the St. John About 400 fish were examined from each river, New Brunswick, during July. av locality. During August, September and October a trap-net was operated on Brunswick, for the purpose of obtaining be the North-west Miramichi river, New of material after the closing of the commercial season, and thus to f ollow the run throughout the whole season. Samples of smolts and parr were also obtained from the Miramichi river. Afrangements were made to have material collected and forwarded from Lake Shubenacadie, Nova Scotia, and from Loch Lomond, New Brunswick; this material being obtained from the so-called land-locked salmon of these lakes: This material is now being examined at the University of Toronto in an tri attempt to compare the fish from various localities in regard to length, weight, fo: length of time in fresh water, length of time in the sea, rate of growth, time of maturity, and the proportion of previously spawned fish. The material obtained th( from the Miramichi river will also be examined and analysed in an attempt to determine any differences in the fish throughout the season. is

HISTOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS OF FISII pn BY 'VI D. J. BOWIE, McGill University on 1. It was found that solutions or mixtures that require warming before injection are unsuitable for fish pancreas, since the necessary heat coagulates dis the tissues of fish. After many trials with various cold mixtures containing dis salts of bismuth opaque to X-rays, a suspension colloid was made up which would ph penetrate into the minute ducts without becoming diffused into the surroundinff By the use of this colloidal mixture followed by the Spalteholz oil-of-s tissue. rec wintergreen method of making tissues transparent and by subsequent radiographs, pn it was possible to make a comparative study of the duct system in the pancreas at of four species of skates. blt 2. Pancreatic tissues were obtained from many skates and after fixation col by various methods were pres'erved for subsequent examination of the islands of Langerhans and the system of ducts, by means of paraffin sections. pn 3. Tissues from the stomach of various species of skates were obtained for is subsequent study of the secretory cells forming its epithelial lining. 4. Tissues f rom the duodenum of various species of skates were obtained for subsequent study of certain large eosinophil cells observed near the pancreatic duct in tissue obtained by Dr. Babkin in 1929. 5. The blood supply of the pancreas of skates was found to be from two sources, namely (1) thé coeliac axis, and (2) the superior mesenteric artery. 011 6. A certain amount of time was spent in studying frozen sections of fish.. muscle, frozen and preserved in the refrigerator under various conditions. of su SILICATE CONTENT OF NATURAL WATERS ha BY a A. ,CAmERoN, University of New Brunswick An investigation was begun to determine the distribution of silicates in the ar waters of the St. Andrews region, using the methods developed by Atkins and 13

King, with whose determination direct comparison was possible by means of a standard sample, kindly supplied by Dr. King. A large number of determinations in Passamaquoddy bay and the St. Croix river showed s6 little order that the procedure was subjected to scrutiny. While weathered citrate of magnesia bottles had been reported as satisfactory, it was found that they could not be relied upon, giving diverse results with the same samples. The results previously obtained had to be discarded. Only by September was a satisfactory method of handling the water samples available; paraffined cardboard cans being used. Consistent results are now being obtained and some order is apparent. The most striking result is the finding of more than twice as much silica in the Chamcook lakes as in the salt water.

THE CHEMISTRY OF IIADDOCK SLIME BY J. CAMPBELL, University of Toronto For an analysis of the components of fish slime, haddock caught on the line trawl were kept alive in a tank of running water till desired to provide material for study; or slime was collected from haddock about to be taken to market. At fi rst the haddock were placed in tap water immediately after death and the copious loose slime then taken after 2 to 4 hours. Later, however, the slime was scraped from the fish immediately after death as some of the mucoprotein is apparently lost by solution in the tap water. Three definite fractions were found in the slime, (1) a mucoprotein, (2) a protein which is apparently a phosphoprotein, and (3) lipoid matter. An attempt was made to obtain mucoitin-sulphuric acid frorn the mucoprotein but the results on investigating the properties of the product were not definite. The method finally used was to extract the mucoprotein from the slime by distilled water, evaporating down and precipitating by- alcohol ; and the residue dissolved in 0.01% alkali and precipitated by acetic acid (repeated) gave the phosphoprotein. The presence of the mucoprotein has been positively shown by the strong reduction of Fehling's solution on hydrolysis in 5% sulphuric acid, and by the preparation of an osazone from the liquid which melted at 172°C, decomposing at 175°C (uncorrected). Dissolved in concentrated hydrocloric acid it gives a blue colour (Liebermann's reaction) which is believed to be the sanie as the blue colour produced when fish are preserved in carbon dioxide snow. An attempt to prepare purine bases, which show the presence of mucleo- protein, from the acetic acid precipitate was negative or very slight, and the latter is classed tentatively as phosphoprotein.

FRESII WATER INVESTIGATIONS BY K. E. CARPENTER A. Enquiry- into the causes. of the harmful action of the Station tap-water on fishes, and experiments in remedial treatment. Responsibility for the harmful action was definitely fixed upon the presence of metallic substances derived from the galvanized lining of the supply-pipe ; such action was found to be strongest in spring, when the rush of water (which has been turned off during the winter) causes old deposits to scale off, exposing a fresh surface of metal to the action of the soft moorland water. On the basis of experimeht and observation, the following recommendations are made. (1) The ideal 'course is to instal a cement-lined supply pipe. 14

(2) Failing this, there might be great improvement if the pipe could be kept of open throughout the year; this would involve burying the pipe, which bu at present is largely exposed at a sufficient depth to protect it f rom f reezing. ob. the zinc by absorption in a peat or ; moss- as (3) A third course is to remove bil filter and to ensure deposition of colloidal iron by the addition of a sand-filter. This method works well on the experimental scale, but necessitates careful supervision. B. Examination of the Cladoceran plankton of the Chamcook series of lakes. Sample-tows taken with the No. 5 net at f ortnightly intervals between May have been examined, taking nit and November, 1930, at depths 0-1 and 3-4 metres, Zo a count of each species and also a total. Cladoceran count, with a view, to the work is not vet am elucidation of seasonal and local variations in numbers. The pr( complete, as thé samples of the last two months were only received a week ago of (November 21st) and records of temperatures and dilutions are nbt yet to hand.

LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS OF 1930 BY A. F. .CHAISSON AND W. TEMPLEMAN The lobster investigations of 1930 were chiefly concerned with the collection san of information regarding the lobster sizes in those districts in which fishing was an( being carried on. of Sai I. A thorough survey was made of the eastérn shore of the Maritime ent provinces: (a) One series.of measurements of 45,000 lobsters from 59 key points along pro the shore began at the head of bay Chaleur, followed along. the New wa Brunswick coastline and the opposite shore of Prince Edward Island and thence along the Northumberland strait shore of Nova Scotia as Pr< far as the gut of Canso. From there the measurements were continued along the western coast of Cape Breton island to bay St. Lawrence. (b) A second series of measurements of 16,000 lobsters f Tom 22 localities hal began at bay- St. Lawrence, Cape Breton island, and followed the pos eastern shore of Cape Breton island to the Nova Scotia mainland, where it included Chedabucto bay, Canso and Dover. the H. In western Nova Scotia a series of measurements was made in Shel- 1?(:% burne, Yarmouth and Digby counties. The extent of the survey in this district was necessarily limited due to the closing of the season, but the measurements of 6,000 lobsters from 9 important centres were obtained. shc III. A size survey was also made in the Magdalen islands, 8,000 measure- me. ments from the 10 chief fishing centres beinc, obtained. The data obtained from approximately 75,000 measurements in ld localities were treated statistically irr( and the average size and standard deviation were determined for each distribution, mu thus proViding a basis for the comparison of local populations. Charts of the Maritime provinces and the Magdalen islands have been prepared for the graphic_ gro presentation of this information. The productivity of the different regions during the last three years is also shown graphically by charts. These charts also show the extent to which canning and the shipping of lobster for the market are carried on in different regions. A comparison of the female populations in northern N.B. and in western ice Cape Breton indicates that spawning occurs at a smaller size tua in the former region. "bc Tagging experiments were carried on in the Northumberland straits, a total 15 of 500 lobsters bein,g tagged there. Only 17 have been heard from to date, but greater returns are expected in the spring. With respect to the present season in the Northumberland straits, such observations as were made last summer indicate that it would not be advantageous as a whole to begin the heason earlier than its present opening date. The possi- bilities of a later, but shorter, season are discussed.

THE CHEMISTRY OF FISH MUSCLE BY A. S. COOK, University of Toronto Quantitative estimations of trimethylamine oxide were made on the aqueous muscle extracts of Salmo salar, Satin° salar sebago (Girard), 1113Prine glutinosa, Zoarces anguillaris, Amedusa, Asterias vulgaris, 111 ya arenaria, Homarus americanus, and on the roé of Raja erinacea. This work was a continuation of previous work done in the Department of Pathological Chemistry, University of Toronto.

DIATOM INVESTIGATIONS BY V. M. DAVIDSON, University of Toronto The determination of the species and the counting of the diatoms in uniform samples from the hauls with No. 18 net were completed for Prince stations 5 and 6 up to August 1, 1930. The graphs made previously to show the results of the counts for five successive years were extended to include the above. Samples from stations in Halifax harbour and Bedford basin are in process of enumeration as to diatom content. Two experiments were carried out to test the effect upon the growth properties of surface sea water of addin,g mud for a period of three days. The water, then poured off, ' vas used for culturing diatoms. Procedure. Mud from the shore and from depths of 10 and 40 metres was used. Half of the water with the mud was placed in bright sun-light, the other half in darkness, the temperature being kept as uniform as possible in the two positions. Phosphate determinations were made by Mr. Morton of the untreated water, the treated water, and the water at the end of the culture period. Results. 1. Phosphate increased in all the water in which the mud was placed. 2. The increase vas much the greatest in that which had contained the shore mud, and about equal in that which had had mud from 10 metres and 40 metres respectively. 3. The counts indicating, the rate and volume of growth were quite irregular in the pairs of jars in each set, and no general conclusion as to which mud was most productive could safely be drawn. 4. Remarkable decrease in the phos'phate took place as the result of the

,, rowth. EFFECTS OF LOW TEMPERATURES ON AMPHIPODS BY M. 1=1. FRIEDMAN', MCGill UniVerSiiy In numerous instances death by cold is associated with the formation of ice crystals in the cell and corisequent rupture of the cell wall. It is believed that these crystals are formed from the "free" water of the cell and that the "bound" water is not involved. • The experiments undertaken were to determine the following points: (a) The percentage of "free" water in the "active" liquid state that is converted into "inactive" ice crystals at the lethal temperature. (b) The amount of water an amphipod can lose by desiccating with cold Nel dry air currents up to the point of death. to o (c) The relationship, if any, between the amount of water converted into ice crystals and the amount of water removed by desiccating agents. (d) The amounts of total, free, and bound water in different species of amphipods and their relationships, if any, to the lethal temperature of each species. Opportunity afforded itself for the investigation of cardiac rhythm- temperature and respiratory rhythm-temperature relations of Gammarus locusta con( L., and also for the investigation of salinity limits of three species of amphipods. mac life, IIYDROGRAPIIICAL INVESTIGATIONS in BY H. B. HACHEY Ligl General Hydrography. cop( The periodic collection of water samples and the taking of temperatures at belo various stations was continued. Thrèe additional stations in the region of Passamaquoddy bay were organized for monthly attention in connection with an investigation with reference to the seasonal variation in phosphate content of certain waters. Records of surface temperatures and general weather conditions were obtained regularly from the various coast stations organized in 1929. fusc sub Special Investigations. perl In the early spring, the problem of the distribution of the mixed waters from the Passamaquoddy region was attacked from the following angle: The spring freshets are productive of much water which tends to form a the fresh and light surface water. Such a light f resh water would be expected to Lat.; gradually work down the coast of the bay of Fundy frotn the St. John river. resu The mixing region at the mouth of Passamaquoddy bay would be productive of foui a mixture that should be easily differentiated f rom this light surface water. The (1-1 problem of the distribution of this mixed water has always been complicated by beat the difficulty of followinc, it for any great distance. It is hoped that this latest chol work will be of considerableb value in solving the problem of distribution. Drift caw bottle work was carried on concurrently with the other investigations in this region. • The investigation consisted of the working of various hydrographie sections over an area extending from the mouth of the St. John river to the waters in the vicinity of Grand Manan. It has been planned to investigate various mixing mechanisms in the bay of tern] Fundy region. In the early part of June work was carried on in the region of succ the mouth of the St. John river, in order to determine the part played by the is a reversing- falls in supplyino- mixed waters' to the main waters of the bay of well Fundy. - Simultaneous work vas carried on at stations above and 'below the 7.55 falls. Various sections were also run to enable us to determine the general mechanism involved. Shortly after this, responsibility for the Hudson Bay mar Fisheries Expedition was assumed - and the hydrographie investigations as plannea were abandoned. Further Organization of Coast Stations. , Coast stations were organized at the following points: North point, P.E.I. beac Cape Gaspé, P.Q. tern 17

Entry island, P.Q. St. Mary's island, P.Q. It had been planned to organize two other stations, one at Port aux Basques, Newfoundland, and one at St. Paul's island, N.S. These will probably be attended to at a later date.

LAKE PLANKTON INVESTIGATIONS BY C. J. A. HuGHES, University of New Brunswick Assistance was given to Mr. Smith in collecting plankton, and in following conditions in the Chamcook series of lakes. Special collections of plankton were made to determine the effect of light on the vertical distribution of the forms of life, tows being made at three depths from surface to bottom at a standard point in Gibson lake, and under different conditions of weather and time of day. Light was found to be a very potent factor in the distribution of the special copepod (Diaptomus sp.) studied. A new species or variety of Cladoceran belonging to the genus Holopediunt was found.

TIIE ACTION OF IIORMONE-LIKE SUBSTANCES ON TIIE FISII IIEART BY M. E. HUNTSMAN, University of Toronto Procedure: The skate heart, removed from a spinal preparation, was per- fused with the aid of a Straub cannula. The drup,s,- or "hormone-like" substances, adrenaline, histamine, acetyl choline and atropine, were added to the perfusion fluid and the effect on the heart observed. Rcsuits: Small doses of adrenaline (a concentration of 1 in 1,000,000 in the perfusion fluid) causedattoentation m and acceleration of the heart beat. Larger doses caused inhibition. e'This inhibition may be due to the change in pH resulting from the addition of larger amounts of the drug. In most cases it was found that adrenaline given after atropine had no effect. Histamine in small doses (1-100 mg. in 2Y2 cc. of perfusion fluid).aucTmented b and accelerated the heart beat. With larger doses the amplitude of the beat was diminished. Acetyl choline caused inhibition of the heart beat. Atropine given after acetyl choline causes the heart beat to return to normal.

TIIE LIFE IIISTORY OF THE CAPELIN BY G. W. JEFFERS, State Teachers College, Farmville, Va. • In previous years I have hatched capelin eggs under different conditions of temperature, salinity, etcetera, and have shown that development is apparently successful at temperatures between 0°C. and 15°C. but that the latter temperature is a bit too high although 10°C. is favourable. As to salinity the eggs hatched well at all salinities from 7.5% 4,- to 3070,,, and there was an indication that 7.5700 is as favourable as higher salinities. Confirmatory experiments were carried through in 1930, and may be sum- marized briefly as follows : (1) Optimum temperatures: 0°C. to 12°C. (2) Optimum salinities: 5%,, or 6%„ to 30%„. (3) Approximate hatching time: 55 days at 0°C.; 30 days at 5°C.; 15 days at 10°C. Further observations on tlie habits of the fish show that spawning on the beaches does not occur until the water temperature is 6°C. and spawning terminates when the ternperature is about 10°C. At least, this is the condition 18

for the three years under observation at Raleigh. The duration of spawning on flesi the beach has varied from 3 days to 12 days. tim( After beach spawning is over the fish retire into deeper water in the vicinity was where spawning is continued. This, too, is in all probability determined by and temperature although it is difficult to find out accurately when they are last seen secr in the vicinity. the Further data on length-frequencies do not reveal the presence of more than vat a single y-ear group in the spawning school. The one-year fish are plentiful in corr early spring, at which time they measure around 4.5 cm. These show no indication is v of scales and we conclude that the first year is passed without scales. and The scales present peculiar difficulties, due first of all to their minute corn size, and secondly to the unreliability of the yearly checks. On most of the in tl spawning fish there is an indication of two checks and sometimes an imperfect third check. Providing no scales appear during the first year the bulk of the the spawning group at Raleigh are in their third year. extr rem, ACTION OF LIGHT ON CERTAIN AQUATIC ANIMALS amo BY bloc A. B. KLuoir, Queen's University prof During the summer of 1930 J continued the work on the effects of the lvsir ultraviolet radiation of the sun on aquatic animals to which I have given con- siderable attention for the past three years. The same apparatus which I used in previous years was employed, with the addition of a new Corning filter which entirely removes the low wave-light red from the ultraviolet filter. Experiments on young Asterias vulgaris showed that this species was not amo affected by ultraviolet radiation. surf The sperm of Echinaracluzius parma was found to be extremely sensitive to app( ultraviolet. vat( The nudibranch Eolis gyntnota proved to be sensitive to ultraviolet radiation. Yoldia sapotilla, a pelecypod which lives at depths of about 20 metres, was clesc found to be sensitive to the effects of ultraviolet. sepa Hyperia galba, a crustacean which lives in the jelly-fish Aurelio aurita \vas flavidula, was found to be resistant to the effects of ultraviolet radiation. amn the season of 1930 During also experiments were begun on the antagonistic slim effect of radiations of different wavelength upon animals. A special piece of apparatus was constructed under the writer's direction during the winter of hydi 1929-30, and during the past summer this apparatus was brought into use. *solu Experiments carried on with this apparatus showed a very- definite antagonistic rese effect in the case of the sperm of Echninarachnius parntaand of adults of the copepod Cala nus finntarchicus. resu of I

EXTRACTIVE SUBSTANCES FROM FIST! TISSUES AND THEIR EFFECTS ON THE ANIMAL ORGANISM BY • S. A. KOMAROV, McGill University 1. r A comparative study of the gastric secretion after ingestion of beef muscle, haddock's flesh and haddock's skin was performed. A dog with a two Pavlov pouch was used for the purpose. •It was observed that there is È 'slight hort difference between the beef meat and the fl esh of the haddock in ability to cause was gastric secretion, the latter being a little more active. The skin of the haddock in d • was found to be a much more powerful stimulant of gastric secretion than the either the flesh of the haddock or beef muscle. Absolutely fresh haddock, taken ohs( living from the tanks, then killed and prepared for eating, were used. Two sets • intr of experiments were performed. In one set equal weights of - haddock skin and and 19

flesh were boiled with equal amounts of water for exactly the same length of time, and then filtered, and the ability of these broths to stimulate gastric secretion was determined. In another set of experiménts equal amounts of fish flesh alone and of fish flesh and skin were boiled with a known amount of water and their secretagogue properties tested. In all the experiments the presence of skin in the food or of those substances which can be extracted from it by boiling with water, produced a gastric secretion f rom one-third to one-half greater than the corresponding preparations of fi sh flesh or beef muscle. Further investigation is very disirable. It is important to determine what substances in fish flesh and fish skin are responsible for the activation of the gastric secretibn. Is their concentration greater in the skin than in the meat, or are these different substances in the skin and in the flesh? 2. The action of the extractive substances from the skin of the skate on the blood pressure in skate was studied conjointly with Dr. MacKay. By extraction of skin with 80% alcohol a preparation was obtained, which, after removal of fats, lipoids and inorganic salts, was injected intravenously in an amount corresponding to 20-40, g. skin, and produced a tremendous increase in blood pressure of very long duration. Further fractionation showed that this property, as well as that of markedly inhibiting the heart beat, resides in the lvsine fraction.

CHEMISTRY OF THE SLIME OF THE HAG FISII, MYXINE BY H. W. LEmox, University of Toronto Myxine glutinosa, commonly called the hag fish, or slime eel, produces large amounts of slime from a double row of glands or "slime sacs" on the ventral surface of the body. As taken directly, from the slime sacs it has a milky appearance and is adhesive. It can be drawn out in threads. If diluted• with water, or as secreted into water, the slime forms a viscid and ropy mass. Using Reid's method, the granule substance and the thread substance, as described by him, were separated from the slime. A third fraction was also separated. This was dissolved out of the slime by- water or by dilute acids. It \vas precipitated by making the solution alkaline with sodium hydroxide or with ammonia. Besides these three fractions, lipoid material was extracted from the slime by hot alcohol, or by ether. The granule substance was thought to be a mucin, hence samples were hydrolized with sulphuric acid for ten minutes and tested with Fehling's *solution, which gave good reduction, contrary to Reid's findings. Also crystals resembling those of glucosazone in structure were prepared from the liquid resulting from hydrolysis. On hydrolysis of the thread substance, no reduction of Fehling's was obtained.

TIIE ACTION OF HORMONE-LIKE SUBSTANCES ON THE CIRCULATION OF TIIE SKATE BY M. E. MAcKAY, Horvdrd University The investigation comprised a study of the action of histamine as well as of two other hormone-like substances, choline and acetyl choline, and the two hormones, adrenalin and pltuitrin, on the circulation of the skate. Histamine was without effect on the circulation of the skate, even when given intravenously in doses 500 times as large as that required to produce a fall of blood pressure in the cat or dog. Furthermore, no vasodilator or skin reactions to injury could be observed in the skate, and exttacts of the skin of this animal when injected • intravenously were without a histamine-like effect. On the'other hand, choline and its derivatives, acetyl choline, had a parasympathetic action similar to that ; 20

observed in higher forms. Extracts of skate skin, while they had no histamine- like action, contained a substance very similar to acetyf choline in its —effect on I I los the blood pressure. • im A great difference was noted in the pressor action of adrenalin in skates from that observed in mammals, namely, the duration of its effect. In warm eit blooded animals adrenalin is destroyed quickly when injected into the blood of stream, but in skates its action does not wear off for several hours. Pituitrin was found to have a stimulating- effect on the smooth muscle of I I at skates similar to that observed in other animals. of SM INVESTIGATIONS WITII FROZEN F1SII

An investigation of the drying that takes place in material durincr storage St: was begun in May, one of the regular "freezers" of a wholesale fist; -firm in the Toronto being used. Cakes of "Ice Fillets" were used as material and protected an by various methods. During the first part of the experiment the temperature wit ranged from 2°F. to about 4°F., so far as it was possible to obtain records. The cakes were with and \vithout waxed paper wrapping, with and without a carton S t. covering, and within or not within a sealed corru„gated paper box, these being by part of the packing procedure for a high quality of frozen fish. For the period from May 9 to June 30 the results of weighings showed complex changes, ranging wil from an actual increase in weight of 1.38% for the uncovered cakes due to \ vit frosting to a loss in weight of 0.92% for cakes wrapped in waxed paper and me. sealed in corrugated paper box. Other conditions of covering showed inter- mediate changes. It appears that drying out in this freezer occurs only to a ..1t1 slight extent. one An experiment desig,ned to show the rate of defrosting of "Ice Fillets" f ro under different conditionse of wrapping, with different quantities and at different (,),u teinperatures was undertaken. Copper constantan thermocouples were used for Ver determination of temperature. Preliminary study of the results obtained shows cvi that at room temperature the use of a corrugated paper box increases the time dot of defrosting on the outside of the mass from 17% to 70% and at the centre t. S. from 20% to 72%. At refrigerator temperature the time is increased in the one lesi case from 22% to 64% and in the other 34% to 42%. In respect to differences api in the mass of the material it was found that at room temperature def rosting on p(m the outside occurred so rapidly that no very consistent results were obtained, although at the centre, where the time involved was greater, there was definitely reg an. increase in time with increase in mass. At refrigerator temperature riv quadrupling the volume increased the time 68% to 97% for unwrapped material, ye2 and 79% to 105% for material in a corrugated paper box. acc aci PATHOLOGICAL AND OTHER INVESTIGATIONS I I the BY R. H. • 1110 M'Gnucr..E _ an Pathology: Work was continued, preparing sections and slides for microscopic study of the pathological material collected during the season of val 1929: Suitable means and formulae for rapid, differential staining were investi- fisi gated. Among the diseased tissues so studied might be mentioned "white-spôt" f oc disease of salmon (Salmo salar) ; an ulcerous (protozoan) disease of flounder (Pseudo-pleuronectes americanus) ; an unknown disease of cod (Gadus cla morrhua) ; and also various types of disease of trout ( Salvelinus f ontinalis ) na from material collected in hatcheries. Of the material examined, the protozoan cei disease of the flounder has proved to be of the most immediate value, due to a po very similar disease occurring in herring. f r( 21

Visits were made to three hatcheries which had been reporting excessive losses in the fingerlings from some time in May, and at a time at which it was impossible (on account of other duties) to make the visits. The result was that when the visits were finally made all evidences of the troubles had disappeared, either by reason of death, or distribution, or both. This was true particularly of St. John, and of Florenceville; at Lake George, 'Yarmouth Countv, Nova Scotia, the trouble did not develop until later, and the visit was made while it was at its height:and the disease there was diagnosed as furunculosis, on the basis of the tremendous numbers of bacteria found in the blood. Suçh advice and suggestions for improvement of conditions, both temporarily and mord or les permanently, were made as was possible. Another hatchery (at Bedford) was not visited, but investigations were carried on from the Atlantic Experimental Station at Halifax, by Dr. Leim, who kept us informed of the conditions as they varied from week to week. The trouble there seemed to be associated with an exceptionally dry season, and a very low pH; probably very, closely associated \vith the dry season (low water) if not entirely due to it. An unusually heavy, mortality among the salmon in the retaining pond at St. John also occurred this year, and was investigated at some considerable length by us, with the assistance of the employees of the Department of Fisheries there, under the direction of Mr. J. Catt. Very interestino- results were obtained, which will be reported upon separately at an early' date. bThis seemed to be associated \vith an unusual tidal condition, combined with the unusual dry summer previously mentioned. From time to time during; the summer, pathological specimens arrived at the _\tlantic Biological Station from various sources, f rom Quebec, Nova Scotia, and one from the upper Ottawa. The fish submitted were perch (Perca flavescons) from Lake Memphramagog; trout (Salvelinus fontinalis) from a lake in (:),uebec; salmon (S. salar) heads from a stream in which "white-spot" had been very severe the previous year, collected .by request, for the observation of anv evidence of healin.---only one dubious case appeared to show a healed scar ; doré, or pickerel (Stizostedion vitreum) from the upper Ottawa river; salmon ( S. salar) heads and viscera from Saguenay Co., Quebec, which had no apparent lesion; and some pickled herrine from Bear river, N.S., with marks on the sides, apparently herring disease. Reports upon these were prepared as rapidly as possible, and submitted. Information to the Department of Fisheries from the inspectors of the region indicated that there was an excessive mortality, among the salmon of the river St. Croix, a greater run of which vas occurring this year, than for any year previously, for a considerable number of years. An investigation was accordingly made to determine what might be the unfavourable conditions, acidity and oxygen determinations being made. It seemed to be probable that the dry summer, previously mentioned in connection with other cases of excessive mortality (above), associated with pollution f rom certain manufacturing plants, and the tremendous number of dams on the river, might be the effective cause. Experimental: The major problem was the determination of the relative values of certain cheap, and easily secured', marine products, as food for hatchery fish (S. fontinalis), as comtiared with the expensive beef liver. None of the I. foods was in any respect comparable to beef liver as the only article of diet. The experimental work upon the respiratory, function of fish, as found in clasmobranchs (Raja spp.) ; which was begun in collaboration with Professor nabkin of McGill University in the season of 1929, was continued, employing certain drugs to serve as very 'delicate instruments to operate upon the various Portions of the respiratory mechanism. Much valuable information was secured from the few experiments it was possible to do. 22

An experiment to ascertain the effect of certain lead mine effluents or wastes vas carried out at the request of Dr. Leim, Director of the Atlantic Experimental Station. The material supplied by him was added to pure lake water, and then trout (S. fontinalis) were placed in the resulting solution—no ill effectS were observed under the conditions of the experiment, in fact, the experimental fish survived two control fishes. Miscellaneous: The chief problem under this heading was that of the investi- gation under the International Factfinding Commission in their study of the fisheries of Lake Champlain. This has fallen into three groups, viz: the winter fishery, studied at a base on South Hero Island, Vt., at a fishery ground called Cowbanks, chiefly upon smelt—but some perch, and cisco, carried out from February 10 to February 27; the spring fishery in Missisquoi bay, chiefly for doré or pickerel, from April 14 to May 14, from a base at Phillipsburg, Que.; and the vinter investigations of the stomach contents of the yellow perch (Perca flavescons), which is now in progress, at the University of Toronto. Two progress reports have been prepared and, submitted.

A STUDY OF THE BAY OF FUNDY IIERRING

BY . W. E. MACFARLAND, Yale University The vertebrae of herring f rom Whale cove, Seal cove and Navy island were counted. The small number of forty specimens failed to show conclusively any •variation in the number of vertebrae of fish from different localities although the data indicate that the average is lower in Navy island herring than in the Grand Manan fish. Sixty-five fish from Navy island and Grand Marian were studied for numbers of fin rays and no evidence was found for racial divisions. The study of the scales made it evident that accurate age determinations by means of the winters rings were impossible. In a few examples of young herring (two or three years old), the rings were quite distinct. This occurred in less than one per cent of the fish studied, but it may be a significant factor. The stomachs of four hundred and sixty specimens from various parts of the bay »f Fundy were examined and twelve different species were recognized in the food niasses. These results corroborated work done by former investi- g-ators as to the more general feeding habits of the herring and also added several hints to the movements of the herring- in this particular vicinity. - The lengths of over six thousand fish were measured in lots of two or three hundreds. These fish were taken chiefly from Passamaquoddy bay, but samples were obtained also from various parts of Grand Manan, from the New Brunswick shore of the bay of Fundy and from Westport on the Nova Scotia shore. The measurements showed that, of the immature fish, there were two distinct groups, namely, the larger fish (16 cms. in June) from the Grand Manan shores and the smaller fish (14 cms. in June) inside Passamaquoddy bay. These two grou0 tend to fuse into one in the intermediate area off the southern and eastern shores' of Deer and Campobello islands. A difference in the time of spawning .is the most logical explanation of the difference of two centimetres between the two groups, and the Modifications which take place in the fusion of these groups will no doubt have to be explained from certain hydrographical influences. The fish within Passamaquoddy bay must again be divided into various shoals, but the variation of these shoals is linked up with the degree of infection by the Sporozoan, an account of which will be found in Miss Alley's report; consequently- the "sardines" of Passamaquoddy bay may be regarded as one large homogeneous shoal which has broken up into smaller shoals for a period of time. 23

The experimental work consisted of hatching herring larvae at all the temperatures from zero Centigrade to thirty degrees which are multiples of five degrees. Two trips were made to Seal cove, Grand Manan, to collect spawn. The second attempt brought success insofar as time allowed. The eggs were incubated for about seventy-four hours and the development was nearly one hundred per cent normal at ten and fifteen degrees C. At zero and five degrees development was not apparent. At twenty, twenty-five and thirty degrees, development had begun rapidly but the mortality was one hundred per cent.

THE NATURAL IIISTORY OF POLYNICES HEROS BY M. M. MELVILLE, University of Western Ontario Polynices hcros—thé round whelk, or "cockle" as it is locally called, occurs in large numbers in the vicinity of St. Andrew's, N.B. It is used commercially as bait for cod, and also as food in.Europe. Specimens were obtained from Brandy cove, Joe's point, Navy island, Waweig and Birch cove from low water mark to seventeen fathoms, the greatest depth previously reported for that vicinity being ten fathoms. The heightli and width of each specimen were measured. By plotting the size against the frequency and comparing the peaks with lines on the shells, there was found to be a relationship between size and age. The type of food, method of eating, both in the natural habitat and in the laboratory, were studied, and the rate of locomotion on a smooth surface and in sand noted. Experiments on migration proved unsuccessful as even: when buried in the sand the whelk-s disappeared within 48 hours. Mating was observed in the laboratory and one specimen was observed making a sand collar. Embryoes in various stages of development were found in collars collected at low water. Their reaction to the outgoing tide, the temperatures to which they are exposed, their lethal temperature and their enemies were also observed.

COLD STORAGE EXPERIMENTS BY J. M..Mowrox An experiment was conducted to determine the effect of variations in cold storage temperature on the state of preservation of fish. Several samples of f resh brine frozen hake muscle were placed at different points in the cold storage plant where they would be subjected to different degrees of temperature variation throughout the dav. After a period of about two months the samples were examined and all ap-peared to have deteriorated to an equally marked degree. It waS hoped that the samples kept at a fairly constant temperature would be in a better condition than those which had received the greatest temperature variation, but no real difference could be detected.

PHOSPHATE CONTENT OF NATURAL WATERS BY J. M. MoRrox The phosphate content of water samples from five representative stations has been followed ai the surface and bottom throughout the year, the winter determinations being made by Mr. Hachey. Samples from the rivers flowin , into eassamaquoddy bay and the lakes in the vicinity show low values and are not a source of enrichment for the region. 24

A study was made of the distribution of the polluted water in Black's su harbour, and it was found to have a negligible effect in increasing the phosphate values beyond the mouth of the harbour. th The peculiar hydrographic conditions found at the head of Passamaquoddy sli bay• formed the subject of a special study at the time of spring tide in late th August. The phosphate values showed a decrease with spring,ing tides, with a minimum corresponding almost exactly to the day, of maximum tidal amplitude, th followed by an increase as the tidal amplitude decreased. lo su SEX REVERSAL AND RATE OF GROWTH IN THE EASTERN AMERICAN OYSTER, I th Ostrea virginica. I th BY A. B. NEEDLER • • tll Until recently it has been supposed that the sexes are quite distinct in tl Ostrea virginica, but recently it has been suggested that a change of sex takes - tv place during the life of the oyster. About 650 adult oysters Were examined and ai the age (as shown by rings on the shell) and sex were noted. In addition a5 over 300 oysters known to be in their second summer were examined for sexual products. ti A study of the adult oysters shows that there are very few female oysters in their second or third summers, about half as many females as males in the fourth summer, approximately the same number of each sex in the fi fth CZ summer and from that age on there are more females than males. This Cl suggested that a good proportion of the males undergo a change of sex at the end of the third summer and some in subsequent years. Examination of the young oysters in their second summer showed that 16% to 18% contained f( sexual products and of these 52 were male and 4 were female. This shows si that a few of the oysters are female from the beginning, but does not • explain o the sudden appearance of a number of females in the fourth summer. Finally fl three oysters were discovered that were definitely hermaphrodite, both ripe sperms and ripe ova being present at the same time. Self fertilization was successfully carried out in the laboratory with one of these oysters and two have been preserved for histological examination during the winter. a As another method of attacking the problem it seemed desirable to keep a. a number of oysters of known sex for a year or two and see whether any change took place. This is being tried. In connection with the investigation of the rate of growth some thousands* of measurements have been made of adult oysters from several different beds, of 1929 spat from various places and of this year's spat, but these measurements have not as yet been worked over. Il OYSTER INVESTIGATIONS, 1930 • BY a A. W. H. NEEDLER -Temperature and the spawning of oysters. Records have been kept of the proportion of oysters spawned out or partially so. Quantitative plankton samples have been taken for the larvae. Cultch has been placed in the water at different o times and examined in detail. - All of the data have not yet been examined in detail but the following points have appeared. The spawning and settino- of spat both lasted for about two months in 1930. Although it appears thabt no oysters spawned before the water reached a temperature of 20°C. or more they did not start spawning suddenly but rather seemed to spawn continually with , in the warmest spells. It is sug-gested that this state may have been increases exaggerated this year by the sudden rise in temperature as a result of which 25 suitable temperatures may have been reached before the majority of the ovsters were yet ready to spawn. These are, however, only tentative suggestions until the data from the various sources can be compared. The results do clearly show that the spawning is influenced by temperature but it may not always be the limiting factor. Depth of setting of spat. Placing of cultch at different levels has shown that the greatest abundance is in the uppermost two or three feet below an ordinary low tide. Above this a few spat are to be found as far as half tide. The- survive best here when shaded and apparently few.survive the winter. Below the optimum the abundance decreases gradually until it is about half that of the best at 15 feet. Time of setting of spat. The time of setting extends over about two months in 1930. Good sets were obtained on shells placed in the water for three weeks after the first good set. It would appear from the results these two years that it is best to place the cultch in the water afer setting has started and just 'before the first good sets as the first shells put ont did not collect as many spat as those slightly later. They were, however, bigger before winter. As in heavy sets too many are obtained for practical purposes there is a fortnight or more when quite satisfactory sets can be obtained. Kinds of cultch. The following kinds of cultch have been used: Shells (oyster, quahaug, and mussel) broadcast on the beds and in wire baskets, brush, cardboard partitions (like egg crate partitions) coated with a mixture of Erne cement and sand. It has been found that oysters and quahaug shells in baskets have collected good quantities of spat. The bags held a bushel and were cylindrical, three feet long and about a foot in diameter. They were piled two on two in piles of six with four slabs to prevent sinking in soft bottoms or stooked like sheaves of grain in stooks of six. Larger nutnbers became unwieldy or the pile too high for the depth of water. Equal results were obtained from the two methods. It lias been found that mussel shells cannot be used satisfactorily in baskets in Bideford river. With them the spat does not penetrate, due probably to the manner in which they fit closely into one another. Those on the surface collect as much spat as the other shells and they are good for broadcasting. The currents at Bideford are apparently much weaker. than in those localities where the vire baskets were developed by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries. Shells broadcast on beds cannot easily be transplanted, and if the beds are in deep water the quantity of spat is less than on the shells in baskets along the shore. But where the beds are shallow. and the spat can be left there to grow, it seems that this method may be better than the placing of shells in baskets. Trials in progress will throw light on this subject. Freshly, cut brush was placed in the water in faggots held down by stakes and by merely sticking the ends in the mud. These were put out in 1929 at the heads of the inlet. So few spat were visible on them late that summer that they were abandoned as unsatisfactory. Two of the faggots were recovered this summer and it was found that there'were a few 1929 Oysters on them with very good growth and an abundance of 1930 spat similarly well grown. The branches were so eaten by Teredo that the spat could be separated, most of them with ease. It is proposed to try brush seasoned before placin,g in the water and also to try leaving a large number of faggots two years. This may be a very valuable method of collecting spat as brush is cheap and easily handled and it is possible to use bottoms too soft for any other kind of cultch. The importance of placing clean cultch of some kind in the water is borne cut by observations that many times as many spat occur on clean shells placed

26

in the water a week or so before abundant spat may settle on clean shells when thc it is difficult to find a single spat on numerous shells lying about. ph: Planting of spat. There is little difficulty in obtaining large quantities of in spat in cultch placed at the heads of the inlets. But this is only the first stage. In the case of shells broadcast on the beds on which they are to grow there is, to of course, nothing more to be done than protect them from parasites and enemies of wherever possible. But the shells in baskets must be planted. It has been found tlic that almost all of these left in situ over winter are destroyed. The spat collected vei on shells in baskets this year were planted at different times to find out the best time to plant. Some were planted almost immediately after setting—or rather dis when setting vas still in progress and the oldest of the spat had settled only two sty weeks. Three more lots were planted at intervals cf about three weeks or a month, the last being towar- ds the end of October when the temperature had fallen to the neighbourhood of 5°C. and consequently growth must have almost ceased. The results of this experiment (which has been carried out both above Shipyard point and on Cooper bed) will, of course, not be available until next year. Transplanting. In the development of an area where there are very few . bel oysters on the beds, as is the case, for example, withh Malpeque bay, it is F/1 necessary to do some transplanting. It was planned to carry out experiments in with transplanting oysters both young and old at different times, but there is mm this year no stock available which would warrant the risk of loss. It is hoped to do. more next year. But in the course of the operations some transplanting afi of stages older than spat has been done. It has been f ound that all oysters oh introduced from the south shore of Prince Edward Island have been unsuccessful. di The hundred barrels f rom Hillsborough river planted on the Gillis point bed in Grand river and the young oysters from Percival river planted in the same place tu: have been mentioned above. Only a small percentage of each were alive the be second summer after planting. Before this was known the writer planted about sixty barrels in all on two beds in Bideford river. They came from Percival I I river and were intended for concentrations for spawning purposes. This autumn one of these two lots is almost- entirely dead, while quite a proportion. of the I I • other oysters is either dead or dying. They have shown the same symptoms as those in Grand river last year and which bear some similarity to those reported I I ca locally for the disease of 1914. The native Bideford oysters which have been planted in deeper waters will throw light on the effects of moving per se. In th Hillsborough river those transplanted from the channel to Mt. Stewart last year ra thr*ived and small quantities obtained in the upper reaches of Bideford river last autumn and planted on a bed near by have also thrived. It seeins, therefore, that oysters from the south shore of the island do not thrive in Malpeque bay, whereas oysters moved f rom one part of the river to another at Bideford or Mt. Stewart were_ . unharmed except for casualties due to falling upside down, etc. Specimens dying oysters have been preserved of the , for histological examination. sr Other subjects. Observations and data have been collected on food, enemies ol and other subjects bût have not yet been made to yield definite results. ir 11; A STUDY OF THE SOFT SHELL CLAM (MYA ARENARIA) r( BY C. L. NEWCOMBE, University of Toronto • ti During the summer of 1929, the writer made a preliminary study of the tl biotic communities in the vicinity of the Atlantic Biological Station. This t( problem involved a qualitative and quantitative analysis of community structure a involving a consideration of the reactions, being interpreted as the effects that h the community of organisms exerts upon its habitat and the changing conditions tl 27 therein upon the organisms. An effort was therefore made to evaluate the physical and chemical factors affecting community formation and development in the areas selected for intensive study. A continuation of this investigation during the summer of 1930 has brought to the fore the importance of Itrya arcnaria, which ranks commercially as one of the leading shellfish of the coast. Furthermore, its dominant position among the animals of the intertidal belt makes a study of its ecological relationships very pertinent at this time. The problem of growth, the influence of various physical factors governing distribution and the habitat pieference of the species are special phases of the study that the writer has investigated.

'THE INFLUENCE OF TEMPERATURE UPON DIGESTION IN FUNDULUS IIETEROCLITUS BY J. V. V. NICHOLLS, McGill University The purpose of this investigation was to show the relationship, if any-, between the rate of digestion in the duodenum and temperature. The fish, Fundulus heteroclitus, was chosen for study because of its hardiness and because in it the digestive processes are simple, there being no peptic glands. The experi- ments were conducted at temperatures ranging from 5.8°C. and 35.0°C. The fish were. fed with about 140 mg. of clam mantle each. At intervals after f eeding the contents of the stomach were aspirated and the quantity- obtained and the pH noted. In this way it was possible to tell when duodenal digestion had been completed. At 29.5°C. digestion required 3 hours ; at 12.8°C., 10 hours. At tempera- tores above the former figure and below the latter digestion became irregular; between 5° and 6°C. it completely ceased. The increase in the rate of digestion that accompanies a rise in temperature may be due to three possible causes :— (a) An increase in the secretion of digestive juices (this is hard to prove in so small a fish). (b) An increased action of the enzymes (this was shown to be actually the case). (c) Increased motility (it was shown that a rise in temperature increased the rate of the rhythmical contractions of the duodenum; thus, at 12.0°C. the rate was 1.1 per minute; at 29.0°C. it was 4.0 per minute).

A STUDY OF GAMMARUS FOR FISII FOOD BY E. S. PENTLAND All localities within reach of Toronto, f rom which Gamnzarus of either species had been reported were visited, and at each habitat analysis was made of the physical, chemical, and biological factors, which might exert a controlling influence on the distribution of Gammarus. Similar analyses were also made of habitats in which no Gammarus were taken. Waters in both the southern alkaline region and the more acid waters of the granite regions of Ontario were examined. The results of field work have shown that throughout southern Ontario the distribution of Gammarus is decidedly local. The chemical composition of the water does not seem to be a controlling factor, and there does not appear to be any reason why the■ introduction of Gammarus into trout waters in this area should not be feasible. Maximum temperature seems to be a definite con- trolling factor, but the maximum temperature of good trout waters is not above the maximum for Gammarus. 28 Pos. One of the objects of the field work was the establishment of experimental ponds, into which Gammarus might be introduced under controlled conditions. The ideal location which was sought, was one in which two spring-fed streams, inve one with hard, alkaline water and the other with soft, acid water, occurred in stre; close proximity. Such a location was not available, and for this reason experi- and ments on the introduction of Gammarus were not attempted in soft water. lake was made at the ponds of the Glen Major One experimental introduction , Major, Ontario. A previous attempt to stock these ponds mat Anglin.- Co. at Glen rap: with dantmarus had not been successful, but it was felt that this was due to the and relatively small number introduced, since no protection had been given them from of t] trout. the as t was quite Accordingly two cages were constructed of wire screening. One the large, roughly rectangular, with a total perimeter of forty feet, and consisted max of a screen fence around a clump of Chara. A few small trout were unavoidably and retained in this cage, but no large fish could gain entrance. • The second was temi much smaller, being eight by twelve inches in size. Both of these cages were trou September stocked with Gammarus on July 8, and they were alive and mating on que5 20. plen At is was clear that a successful stocking of the whole pond would require a qi a much greater number than could be obtained from convenient sources, a small spec pond was constructed to serve as a rearing pond. This pond was originally used as a nursery pond for trout, but had been drained for many years. The dam Fis!, was repaired and a temporary flume constructed to supply the pond with water. This pond has an area Of approximately fourteen hundred square feet and an exte average depth of two feet. It will be used when it comes into condition. obta lad( INVESTIGATION OF GAME FISH SITUATION IN PRINCE ALBERT SiI111 NATIONAL PARK OXY. BY faut D. S. RAWSON prei The survey was continued during the summer (June 2 to September 26) I f ocx ' with the assistance of Mr. T. G. Rempel and Mr. R. R. Langford. sc late Introduction of small - moutked black bass into Waskesiu lake. typ Although the actual introduction of bass was deferred, the opportunity was taken to further the project by collecting complete seasonal litnnologicaI data, especially temperatures, in the Narrows bay, the proposed site for artificial culture ponds. These data are such as to greatly strengthen out belief that bass might spawn in the lake.

Fish food in iVaskesiu lake. stuc on A large body of data has been collected relative to the question of fish food and particularly the variation in quantity of insect larvae which are the staples val of bottom feeding fish. During the season there were taken more than 200 trai dredgings, many quantitative shore collections, analyses of fish stomach contents,' sol collections of adult aquatic insects and general observations bearing on the we problem. The identification of materials and analysis of data is in progress and promises to throw light on several questions of food cycles and food supply for fish. bec "Weekly series of temperatures, dissolved oxygen and pH were taken at two stations in Waskesiu lake. Data on this subject ant are now fairly complete for sys. Waskesiu lake and will be made the subject of a special report at an early date. 29

Possible introduction of speckled trout. The MacLennan river was made the object of a two weeks expedition and investigation during late July and early August. This is the critical period for streams in the region since at this time the water is usually at its lowest level and the temperature at its summer maximum. Briefly, we find that a portion of the 'MacLennan river from Clearwater lake to its junction with Crean creek is some 25 miles in length, of which approxi- mately 75% might be described as a typical speckled trout stream. It has much rap:d water, bottom predominantly stone, gravelly or sandy, plenty of deep holes and logs to provide protection and an abundant supply of the food organisms of the speckled trout with aquatic plants to shelter them. Apparently the decision as to the advisability of introducing speckled trout rests on two questions. Is the maximum observed temperature 19.8°C. (probably close to the true maximum) too high for a speckled trout stream? Considering the rapid flow and the high content of dissolved oxygen observed, it would appear that this temperature is not necessarily a strong argument against the introduction of trout. The scarcity of small tributaries to the stream brings up the second question, will speckled trout spawn in the main stream provided that it contains plenty of clean, shallow gravel beds which appear to be suitable for spawning, a question which in the present state of our knowledge of the habits of the speckled trout no one seems ready, to answer. Fish and life conditions in Sandy lake. A total of three weeks was spent working on Sandy lake during the season extending the general survey begun in 1929. A rough analvsis of the data obtained shows that it is essentially similar to Kingsmere lake although the latter is about three times as great in area. The two lakes are remarkably similar in regard to depth, summer stratification, temperature changes and bottom oxyygen supply. As for the primary food supply, Sandy lake has a bottom fauna equal to and a plankton slightly greater than that of Kingsmere lake. Such similarity in the life conditions of the two lakes would certainly warrant the previously suggested introduction of ciscoes into Sandy lake as an intermediate food fish. The ciscoes would feed the pike (at present of poor quality due to a scanty and illsuited food supply), and the perch, and would prepare the way for later introduction either of the lake trout or of a game trout of the Kamloops type.

ABSORPTION OF LIbIIT BY WATER BY \V. R. SAWYER, McGill University The effect of suspended matter on the absorption of light by sea-water was studied and from a visual study of the plates there appears to be a greater effect on the transmission of the shorter wave-lengths than the longer. For the study of the biotic effects of light and the absorption of light by water a new artificial source in the f6rm of an incandescent lamp with a UV transmitting bulb was tried out and its spectrum compared with that of summer solar radiation. It was found to be the closest approach to solar radiation that we have been able to obtain so far, and should prove very useful for future work. A new method for integrating the intensity of sunlight from day to day has been tried and the results are promising. Work- on its improvement is in progress. In contrast to the work on animals the restilts of the experiments on antagonistic effects of radiation of different wave-lengths on photochemical systems were neither. definitely positive or negative so far.

30

OYSTER CULTURE WORK IN PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND to BY be H. P. SHERWOOD as factors on the spawninOE Experiments designed to test the influence of certain ■ and early stages of the oyster by the use of small tanks constructed for the V( on the shore of Bideford "river", resulted negatively on account of the purpose 2. failure of the oysters which were placed in the tanks to produce larvae. In•order to obtain larvae in the tanks the following expedients were resorted to, but without success :— th Ripe sperm was added to induce female oysters to spawn. an Partial renewal of the stock of oysters and of water was made. Embryos from artificial fertilizations were added. es A number of the oysters were warmed by exposure in shallow pans to full as sunlight to induce spawning. ea Covers -were put on the tanks nightly near the end of the season to prevent as chilling -of the water. PC There were no signs of unhealthy conditions in the tanks, nor was there any 0 mortality amongst spat transferred to the tanks from the "river" late in the dc season. Of the six tanks, each 15 feet by 12 feet originally planned, three only were fe built this year, on account of unsuitability of the available foreshore, and ef difficulties in construction due to small tides and delays in .obtaining materials. The three that vvere put up remained water-tight and the gravelled bottoms were th as Satisfactory as could be expected. They have been banked up on the outside, and the banks faced with boards to resist the action of waves and frost during nc the winter. Late in the summer conditions in the tanks were compared in their effect er on the growth of spat from the "river." Two tanks were covered at night, one th having. a lower salinity than the other, while the third, uncovered, served as a 3. control. During a month there was no significant difference observable in growth. Quantitative plankton samples taken daily (or nearly so) from the surface and hottom at two stations in the Bideford "river" were examined, and all oysters T in the "umbo stages" counted and measured. The record thus obtained indicates ri the duration and intensity of spaWning, and forms a basis for comparison with is subsequent seasons. The maximum number of larve were found on July 24th, it and did not exceed three per gallon.

FERTILIZATION OF LAKES AND ARTIFICIAL PONDS BY M. W. SMITH 1. Experiments and observations in experimental concrete ponds. (a) In Series A. In these three ponds a continuation of the observations made during the Fall 6f 1929 were carried out. Temperatures were taken twice daily, and determinations of the oxygen content and pH values were made at least once a week, usually at shorter intervals. Light penetration was observed by small tl Secchi's disc. Samples of the-plancton present were taken regularly at different levels.

(b) In Series B. « Experiments were made in this series of ponds to ascertain the effect 1 of artificial fertilization of the water on the production of planctonic forms. , Ponds B1 and B3 were drained, cleaned, and filled with water from the same source. Pond B1 was left unfertilized, but one pound of herring meal was added 31 to pond B3 on June 11. This was suspended in a coarse sack one-half a metre below the surface. In the other respects the ponds were treated as nearly alike as possible. The water in B2 was not drained out, and 20 pounds of live mussels edzilis) were added. The physical, chemical, and biological conditions were followed as for the preceding series. 2. Investigations of the Chamcook series of lakes. To follow up the scheme of fertilizing water for plancton production, approximately 14 tons of mussels were put into .Gibson lake from May 19 to the middle of October. These were dumped at the shoreline in shallow water and over a comparatively small area. In order to follow any possible effects of this procedure, stations were established in four of the lak-es of this series, namely, Welch, Gibson, Second, and Chamcook, in order from high to low level. Plancton tows of 15 minutes each were taken at the surface in No. 5 mesh and 'No. 18 mesh plancton nets, and also at a depth of 3-4 metres in these nets where the depth of the water permitted. Temperature was recorded at each station when tows were taken. Oxygen content, phosphate content, silicate content, and pH values were determined at irregular intervals. • Welch lak-e (one station) being above Gibson, would not be affected by the fertilization of the latter, and is expected to serve as a control for following the effects in the lower lakes of that fertilization. Gibson lake itself (three stations) vas at first expected to show a varying- effect of the fertilization depending upon the proximity of a particular station to the point of fertilization. However, it vas found that the wind circulated the waters to such an extent that there was no consistency in the quantity of plankton taken. (In the two lower lakes tows were primarily taken to find if the fertilization in Gibson lake would be potent enough to affect the production, or possibly keep the quantity of plankton greater throughout the season. 3. Temperature of springs. From the 1st of June until November 12th the temperature was taken in three springs at the head of Chamcook harbour. These were taken each week. The temperature of Chamcook outlet, as well as a small spring-fed strearP running into the harbour, was recorded at the same time. One of the springs is submerged under salt water at about three-quarters flood tide, and so at times it was impossible to record the temperature when taken at the other places.

WATER NIOVEMENTS IN PASSAMAOUODDY BAY Ihr E. E. WATSON, Queen's University During the summer of 1930 investigations were carried out in three regions: (1) The main portion of the bay lying- between St. Andrews and Deer island. A hydrographie section taken from Tongue shoal (Sand reef) to upper Green point, at half flood and at half ebb, showed interesting temperature effects. Below 20 metres the temperature changes very . little with tide or depth. On the flood tide the water belo‘e 10 metres has approximately the sanie changes rapidly. On the ebb tide the temperature, while that 'above 10 metres temperature changes take place at 20 metres instead of at 10 metres. At a station in the deep channel off Upper Green point the temperature curves at half flood and half ebb are almost identical. This station is so near Letite passage that the effect of mixine in the remote portions of the bay are not observable, at any rate noeuntil alater stage of the ebb tide. (2) Chamcook harbour. It was thought probable that Chamcook harbour, with its shallow entrances 32 at both ends, would be a likely trap for cold water. Observations show the contrary. The bottom water is much warmer than that at a corresponding level in the deep water between Kilmarnock head and Minister's island (Sta. 1019). The effect of the sloping bottom between Sta. 1019 and Sta. 1020 (in the entrance channel of the harbour) is very marked. The surfaces of equal density conform to the bottom when the tide is flooding. The heavy bottom water is carried up over the sill at Sta. 1020 and falls immediately to the deepest portion of the basin. Within the harbour fresh water streams and fa.vourable conditions produce warming and mixing, producing a surface outflow. By high water the equal density surfaces slope upwards from Sta. 1020 to Sta. 1019, remaining, until low water. In the outer basin the cyclonic circulation of the surface water, due to the earth's rotation, causes the heavier water to rise in the centre, producing a "bump". The water of the inner basin is lighter and warmer than that of the outer basin. More observations are necessary to give a true picture of conditions in the inner basin, which are further complicated by the flow of water over the Bar road. The motion of the water in the larger and more important outer basin seeems relatively clear. (3) Bocabec bay. The most striking feature of the results obtained here is the behaviour of the water at 5 metres depth, which in the eastern channel is still flowing outward at half flood. Here flood water runs most rapidly from the surface down to 3 metres, while in the southern channel it flows at all depths below 3 metres. At hall flood the surface water in the latter is flowing outward. The direction of the currents below 15 metres is due to the configuration of the bottom. In the eastern channel at half ebb the set of the 20-metre current towards the ENE means that the current is f ollowing the channel. On the other hand there is a decided set of surface water toward Dick island, starting at low water and reaching a maximum at 23/2 hours flood, which may be due to coastal mixing. Between the islands and shoals there is much mixing of the water by tidal streams. The surface water near the shore becomes heavier than that further out, producing a shoreward surface current at approximately 5 metres. The greatest variation in temperatures in this region was found to be at 5 metres.

SPECKLED TROUT INVESTIGATIONS, 1930 BY H. C. WHITE I. The food of trout in Forbes creek as shown by- stomach analyses. (1) Fry begin feeding before the yolk sac is completely absorbed. (2) Chironomid larvae form the principal food of very small fry-. (3) The food varies (a) with the size of the trout. (b) with the season. (c) with the location in the water system. (d) with individuals of the same size in sanie habitat (exceptional). (4) The spawning trout eat large numbers of trout eggs. (5) The adult trout are able to secure alevins before they have emerged f rom the gravel. (6) The principal foods of trout are: Immature aquatic insects, snails, fish (G. aculeatus, S. fontinalis), aquatic earthworms, and terrestrial insects: II. An experiment on planting fry in Forbes creek. Eighty rods of natural creek was used for this experiment. Fine screen 33

barriers were placed above and below the section. All fish, excepting minute le fry of G. aculeatus, were removed by seining. 5000 trout fry were planted in el this section, on July 1st. Fish-eating birds were frightened away or shot. The )• section was completely seined again the first part of October, and 1520 trout :e fingerlings were found in the section, a survival of 30.4%. rn LID III. Effect of feeding- on egg production of speckled trout. le Five similar compartments were constructed and supplied with running is water. Ten trout were placed in each compartment. Lot I. Was starved throughout the summer (Minimum of food). to- Lot II. About half fed. :e Lot III. Fully f ed. ie Lot IV. Starved untit July 30th, then fully, fed. id Lot V. Starved until Auo-ust 30th, then fully fed. re On November 30th, all in Lote' I had spawned. These yeilded relatively small numbers of small eggs, many of which turned white soon after spawning. 2T Some fish have spawned in Lots II, III, IV, but none in Lot V. Fish in Lots III, IV, V, have made good growth. IV. Artificial redds for natural spawning of trout. ir Two artificial gravel redds were constructed and supplied with an upward o current of water through the gravel. ce No. I. Supplied with spring water. No. II. Supplied with creek water. le Spawning males and females have entered No. I and have been working le over the gravel, but by November 30th, no trout had been observed in No. II. nt le V. Collecting data on egg production of trout. ig Numbers of female trout f rom Forbes creek and pond have been weighed and measured before spawning, their eggs counted and egg diameters determined. ie Results to date show' that small trout produce smaller numbers of eggs, and er generally produce small eggs. ly PUBLICATIONS at The following publications on work connected with the Station have appeared during the year: Battle, H. I.—Spawning periodicity and embryonic death rate of Enchelyopus cimbrius (L) in Passamaquoddy bay. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. (5) 11, 361-380. Bayliss, L. E., E. Boyland, and A. D. Ritchie.—The adductor mechanism of Peden. Proc. Roy Soc. Lond. B 106, 363-376. Bere, R.—The parasitic copepods of the fish of the Passamaquoddy bay region. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (13), 421-430. Chaisson, A. F.—The changes in the blood concentration of Raja crinacea produced by modification of the salinity of the external medium. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (18), 475-484. Duff, D. C. B.—Factors involved in the production of annual zones in the scales of the cod (Gadus callarias Linnaeus). Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (7), 193-202. Ellis, M. E.—Ichthyopholius hofcri, Plehn and Mulsow; a flounder parasite new to North American waters. Trans. N.S. Inst. Sci. 17 (3), 185-192. at Investigations, on the protozoan fis.h parasites of the St. Andrews region. Trans. N.S. Jus!. Sci. 17 (4), 268-275. • Gee, A. 11.—Bacteria concerned in the spoilage of haddock. 3. Further observations on the flora of live fish. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (14), 431-439. Hart, John tawson.—The spawning and early life-history of the whitefish, Corcgonus clupeaforinis (Mitchill) in the bay of Quinte, Ontario. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (7), s, 165-214. Henderson, J. T.—A new parasitic copepod (Scolccimorrha huntsrnani n. sp.). Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (8). 215-224. Huntsman, A. G.—Arctic ice on our eastern coast. Bull. 13, 1-12. 34

Attack on the fishery problem. Trans Amer. Fish. Soc. 60, 172-177. Jansen, Jan.—The brain of Myxine glutinosa. J. Comp. Neur. 49 (3), 359-507. Klugh, A. B.—An ultraviolet photometer for field use. Ecology. 11 (3), 518-522. The effect of the ultraviolet component of the sun's radiation upon some aquatic Organisms. Canad. J. Res. 2, 312-317. Studies on the photosynthesis of marine algae. No. 1: Photosynthetic rates of 1. R, Enteromorpha linza, Poryphora umbilicalis and Delesseria sinuosa in red, green and blue light. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (4), 41-63. The effect of ultraviolet component of sunlight •on certain aquatic organisms. Canad. J. Res. 3, 104-106. Klugh, A. B. and W. R. Sawyer.—Astrophysical data from eastern Canada. Canad. J. Res. 2, 396-402. Logan, J. F.—The soluble proteins of the muscle tissue of the haddock. Contr. Canad. Biol. cooki Fish. 6 (1), 1-11. be di Needier, A. W. H.—The migrations of haddock and the inter-relationships of haddock f roze populations in North American waters. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (10), 241-313. Pentland, E. S.—Controlling factors in the distribution of Gammarus. Trans. Amer. Fish. mont Soc. 60, 89-94. alter Reid, Helen.—A *study of Eupomotis gibbosus (L.) as occurring in the Cham000k lakes, N.B. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (16), 457-466. condi Shoemaker, C. R.—The amphipoda of the Cheticamp expedition of 1917. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (10), 219-359. White, H. C—Trout fry planting experiments in Forbes brook, P.E.I., in 1928. Contr. condi Canad. Biol. Fish. 5 (8). 203-211. and ( Some observations on the eastern Brook trout (S. fontinalis) of Prince Edward Island. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 60, 101-105. isolat

• SUMMARY REPORT or ex OF the u FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (ATLANTIC) IIALIFAX, N.S. 1930 The followino- constituted the staff of the Station during year the 1930: mph Dr. A. H. Leim, Director. Dr. J. R. Sanborn, Chief Bacteriologist (resigned May 12). lions Mr. Ernest Hess, Assistant Bacteriologist. consi Dr. T. 11. Mennie, Chief Chemist (resigned September 30). prelii Dr. H. R. Chipman, Scienti fic Assistant in Chemistry. on fc Mr. S. A. Beatty, Associate Biochemist. Miss A. M. Wilson, Technical Assistant in Chemistry. Mr. A. S. McFarlane, ■Curator. sEAsoNAL (1) Inspection of Lobster Canneries. Dr. G. B. Reed. (2) Scientific Assistants. Mr. A. S. Cook. Mr. W. \V. Johnston. Mr. D. Leb. Cooper. ,Dr. G. O. Langstroth. Mr. N. E. Gibbons. Mr. W. W. Stewart. (3) Instructors, Course for Fishermen. Mr. .Carl Johnson—Motor Engines. Professor R. Maxwell—Natural Resources. Capt. H. M. O'Hara—Navigation. - Mr. Joel Smith—Preparation of Dried and Boneless Fish. some By courtesy of the Department of Fisheries, Mr. George 'Earl and Mr. used Robert Gray gave courses in the Preparation of Dried and Boneless Fish and in are b the Preparation of Pickled Fish respectively. Similarly by courtesy of the Department Natural Resources of of Nova Scotia, Dr. M. Cumming and Pro- Delar fessor W. V. Longley gave courses in Natural Resources. chani 35

VOLUNTEER INVESTIGATORS Miss Margaret R. Butler, Dalhousie University, and Miss J. R. Panton, University of Toronto.

INVESTIGATIONS 1. Refrigeration. (a) Storage of Frozen Fish.—The effect of a sodium chloride dip on fillets before freezing with regard to the "drip" was investigated. (Mr. Beatty) Quickly frozen fish were stored at 0°F. and the keeping quality tested by cooking experiments. The general indication was that the f rozen haddock could be distinguished from fresh only after three months storage, and that fresh and frozen cod and halibut could not be readily distinguished at the end of five months. Complete protection from the air of the storage room did not materially alter the result. (Mr. Beatty) The denaturing of protein in frozen fish stored under various temperature conditions was. investigated. (Mr. Johnston) The bacterial flora of frozen fillets which had been stored under known conditions was investigated. Further lots of fish were frozen and bacterial counts and determinations made from time to time. The identification of the organisms isolated is being carried on at Yale University during the academic year: (Mr. Gibbons) Further work was done on a method of determining the amount of "drip" or expressible fluid in frozen fish. The most promising method was one involving the use of mercury for the pressure exerting mechanism. (Mr.' McFarlane) (b) Rate of Freezing.—Further investigations were carried out on the relation between temperature of brine, thickness of fish, kind of fish and rate of freezing, and an equation \vas developed embodying these • factors. ' (Dr. Langstroth) An equation was derived for the heat capacity of fish muscle, the constants employed being the freezing point and water content of the fish muscle. Assump- tions made in the derivation required to be tested for their validity, and it was considered -desirable to investigate a simpler system than fish muscle. As a preliminary, heat caPacity 'measurements were made on dilute salt solutions and on four gelatine gels of known concentration. (Dr. Mennie) The freezing point of lobster meat was determined to be —2.0°C. (28.5°E.) (Dr. Mennie) (c) Ice Fillets.—The following quantities of Ice Fillets were shipped to ' Toronto for sale between January 1 and December 10th, 1930: Cod 240 lbs. Haddock 8,373 lbs. Halibut 1,x0 lbs. Mackerel 576 lbs. . . Gray Flounder 1,336 lbs. Russet Flounder 840 lbs. _ 13,245 lbs. A small quantity of these ice fillets were reshipped to Winnipeg. The pro- duction at the Station has slightly exceeded the above amounts. There has been some local sale, certain shipments to Montreal and Calgary, and a quantity were used for exhibition purposes. In addition sonie 500 lbs. of mackerel ice fillets are being held at the Station. The mechanical cake màking machine developed by Dr. Huntsman and Delamere and Williams has been tested out at the Station. Certain mechanical changes have been introduced tô improve the action of the machine. (d) Miscellaneous. — A method of rapidly freezino- herring in quantity for bait by having brine sprayed on a series of'' superimposed trays was developed, but the results did not warrant its adoption in preference to the plate method of freezing the same fi sh. (Dr. Leim and Mr. ..1\1cFarlane) Attempts were made to brine freeze smelt. These could be frozen exposed to the brine in eight to -ten minutes with comparatively little salt penetration. A difficulty arose in washing off the adhering brine in that a relatively thick glaze formed which detracted from the appearance of the fish. It would seem preferable to use a method of indirect contact as has to be done with fillets. (Mr. McFarlane) 2. Smoking. A piece of apparatus for producing smoke f rom sawdust outside the smoke house was developed and utilized in the operation of an improved type of smoke house. A -small smoking compartment was built in the demonstration building and connected to air conditioning apparatus and the smoke producer. It proved possible to carry out the drying and smoking of fillets in from four to six hours. In the industry the period is usually nearly twenty-four hours in conjunction with dye. (Mr. Cooper and latterly Mr. McFarlane) The formaldehyde content of the smoke produced by the smoke producer was investigated. it was found that whereas the type of smoke producer used formerly gave a different kind of smoke at different stages of combustion of the sawdust, the new apparatus gave smoke of constant quality. This was attained by •controlling the flow of sawdust rather than that of the air. (Mr. Cooper) 3. Salting and Drying. Several lots of codfish salted late in 1929 with various commercial salts were f ollowed, and ultimately removed from pickle, and compared by the .Advisory Committee as to suitability for market. A short report was prepared on the experiment. (Dr. Leim, Mr. McFarlane, Mr. Darrach) The microbiological content of the pickle on the above mentioned fish was followed and the forms found were identified and listed (Dr. Sanborn). The general investigation of the effect of sodium chloride and impurities found in commercial salts on fish muscle was continued from the point of view of water and salt exchange. Attempts were made to treat Malacrash salt so as to reduce the amount of insoluble 'matter which adheres to the fishb when salted. (Dr. Chipman) Routine analyses have beeri- carried out on fishery salts and the moisture content of dried fish. (Miss Wilson) An experiment was set up to test the effect of using reduced quantities of salt in pickling mackerel with mined and solar salt. An explanation has been afforded of certain red mackerel found along the coast. The experimehts sup- ported the contention of the buyers that too little salt was used. (Mr. Beatty, Mr. McFarlane, and Mr. Robert Gray) 4. Canning. • • At the suggestion of Dr. G. B: Reed the problem of the effect of tanning dying lobsters on the quality of the pack was investigated. An attempt was made to determine the way in which sulphur is released during the process of dyine. The availability of sulphur is expected to have a relation to the blackening of the can. (Mr. Cook) While inspecting lobster canneries at Point du Chene, Mr. Hess packed several dozen cans of lobster with a view to testing the quality' of enamel on 37 the cans, the effect of acetic acid pickle on the enamel, and the effect of acid pickle on crystal formation in the cans. These cans are stored for observation at stated periods. Experimental packs of lobsters in various stages of low vitality subsequent to death were made, and these are stored for examination. (Mr. Hess and Mr. Cook) A four hundred pound lot of mackerel was brine frozen, after being gutted, and is being held for canning. An equation was developed for the time required for cans of fish to reach a given temperature during processing. This was tested experimentally. (Dr. Langstroth) 5. Fish Oils. Further investigations were made on the separation of fish liver oil from the chum by means of two types of centrifuge. It was not found possible to obtain more than 72 per cent of the available oil in the livers by this method. Claims have been made for a much higher yield. (Mr. Stewart) Following requests from the Advisory Committee and the Department of Fisheries, work was undertaken to place the staff in a position to co-operate in fish oil inspection. Methods of determining the iodine number, the amount of free _fatty acid, and certain physical characteristics of . the oils were look-ed into. • (Mr. Stewart) Monthly determinations of the percentage oil content of cod livers have been continued. The figures vary from 38 per cent in March to 69 per cent in November. Other factors than time of year are indicated in the results. (Miss Wilson) 6. Fish Meal. Apart from a small amount of work on herring meal (Mr. Stewart) the investigations on fish meal have been purely routine. One of the main difficulties in the way of making a satisfactory herring meal is the high oil content. Mr. Stewart tried a number of methods of cooking and pressing. By boiling twice with a relatively large amount of water he was able to remove enough oil so that the oil content of the resultant meal- was reduced 14.4 per cent. Although this is a very appreciable reduction further removal is probably necessary. Routine analysis of •28 samples of fish meal has been carried out for com- mercial firms (Miss Wilson). Most of these analyses have been complete for protein, fat, ash, moisture, sodium chldride and phosphate. Under the existing sysfem no charge is made for this work. With a view to the possible utilization of dogfish for fish meal the oil content of the muscle and livers of a representative lot of dogfish is being determined. (Miss Wilson, Mr. Beatty, and Mr. 'McFarlane) 7. Other Laboratory Investigations. Studies on the development of rigor in fish muscle and of the factors influencing the solubility of the soltrble proteins of the muscle have been con- tinued. (Mr. Beatty) An investigation of the bacterial flora of fish slime and sea water was continued. The influence of temperature on the physiological activities of selected proteolytic bacteria isolated from fish was begun. (Dr. Sanborn) Dr. Lanostroth attempted to determine the progress of decomposition in fish muscle bY measuring electrical conductivity, but was unable to demonstrate any marked changes. M.re..es',.erff ,e;

38

FIELD WORK 1. Lobster Cannery Inspection. At the request of the Department of Fisheries, the Station carried out an inspection and grading of lobster canneries in eastern Nova Scotia, New Bruns- wick, Prince Edward Island, and the Magdalen islands. The western portion of NoVa Scotia was not covered owing to inability to arrange for the services of a qualified man to grade factories there. The grading was carried out by Dr. Reed and Mr. Hess. The former was in the field from May 29th to June 25th, and the latter f rom May 31st to _July 8th, and from August 20th-30th. Dr. Reed graded 66 canneries and Mr. Hess graded 199. The grading was based on a modification of the "Knight" plan. The grading sheets have been submitted to the Department and a SUmmary report has been prepared by Mr. Hess.

EDUCATIO NAL WORK 1. Course for -Fishermen. January 22 to March 4, 1930. Attended by- twenty fishermen and two Fishery Overseers. The course included Science, Motor Engines, Navigation, Natural Resources, Preparation of Dried and Boneless Fish, and Preparation of Pickled Fish. An examination was held at the end of the Course. 2. Dalhousie Course for B.Sc. in Fislteries. - During the Academic term the following classes in this Course were given at the Station: 1. General Fisheries. Dr. A. H. Leim. Five hours per week. 2. Physics and Chenzistry of Fish Curing. Dr. J. H. Mennie. Five "'Ours per week. 3. Fish Culture. Dr. A. H. Leim. Five hours per week. 4. Bacteriology of Fish Curing. Dr. J. R. Sanborn and Mr. E. Hess. Seven hours per week. 5. Biocheniistry of Fish Curing. Mr. S. A. Beatty. Nine hours per week.

PUBLICATIONS The following publications dealing with the work of the Station appeared during the year :— Chipman, H. Ritchie and Langstroth, G. 0.—"Some measurements of the heat capacity of fish muscle." Proc. and Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. of Sc. 17, 1930, p.p. 175-184. Langstroth, G. 0.—"On the Tate of freezing in fish muscle." Proc. and Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. of Sc. 17, 1930, p.p. 206-212. Sanborn, J. R.—"Certain relationships of marine bacteria to the decomposition of fish." Jour. Bacter. 19, 1930, p.p. 375-382. The f ollowing Manuscript Reports of the Experimental Stations were issued from Halifax:— No. 26. Langstroth, G. 0.—"On the rate of freezing of fish-muscle." II. No. 27. C,00per, D. LeB.—"Further experiments on wood smoke in connection with the fish smoking industry." Part II. Reports received during this period were as follows :— Mennie, J. H.—"Investigation of -lobster meal." Cook, A. Stanley—"Trimethylamine oxide in fish muscle." Chipman, H. R.—"Report on accuracy of Winkler method for oxygen." Cooper, D. LeB.—"Report for 1929. Section I—"The estimation of formaldehyde in wood smoke distillates." Section II—"Preliminary experiments on an apparatus for shortening the time necessary for smoking fish." Chipman, H. R.—"An investigation into a method of removing or diminishing the insoluble. portion of fishery salt." Chipman, H. R.—"Notes on a salting experiment." • Chipman, H. R.—"A •further investigation into a method of diminishing the amount of the insoluble material in fishery salt." Sanborn, J. R.—"Certain relationships of marine ■bacteria to fish curing processes." 39

Stewart, W. W.—"New methods of obtaining cod liver oil from cod livers." Stewart, W. W.—"Notes on the preparation of fish meals with their chemical analyses." Hess, Ernest.—"Report on the grading of lobster canneries, June-July, 1930." LII Mennie, J. H.—"Heat capacity of gels." Preliminary investigation. s-. Langstroth, G. 0.—"Thermal investigations on fish muscle." Langstroth, G. 0.—"An attempt to determine the progress of decay in fish muscle by )f electrical methods." a Stewart, \V. W.—"Notes on the preparation of herring meal." Chipman, H. R.—"The effect of salt solutions on the weig-ht of fish muscle." rd Stewart, W. W.—"Method of determining the iodine number and acid value of cod liver oil." Preliminary report. Hess, Ernest—"Report on the grading of lobster canneries operating in the autumn season, a August 16 to October 15, 1930." to Cooper, D. LeB.—"Methods of fish smoking. An attempt to smoke salted undried fish with dried smoke." , Cooper, D. LeB.—"A preliminary study of the effect of varying individual conditions in the smoking of fish on a semi-commercial scale." Panton, Jean R.—"Tryptic hydrolysis of fresh and frozen fish muscle." Butler, Margaret R.—"Observations on the chemical composition of Laminaria digitata and ro Chondrus crishts." n, Johnston, W. W.—"The denaturing of fish muscle during storage." Cook, A. Stanley.—"The discolouration of canned lobster." Preliminary experiments. Beatty, S. A. and Leim, A. H.--"High acidity in water supplying Nova Scotia hatchery." Beatty, S. A.—"The reddening of salt mackerel." Fish Oils. A mimeographed outline of a method of preparing cod liver oil was revised and extended by Messrs. Chipman and Stewart with the assistance of Mr. R. rs Frank Eagar of Halifax. This is available for interested firms or individuals.

THE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF SEAWEEDS S. BY M. R. BUTLER k. I. The iodine content of Laminaria digitata is f ound to average 0.368% dry weight, and thus contains a percentage of iodine much greater than anv of eleven other species examined by the same method. II. Carbohydrate samples have been prepared from various seaweeds by D f extracting with water, precipitating with alcohol, and dehydrating through a series of absolute alcohol, and ether, with final drying in a vacuum an desiccator. The kinds have been: — Rhodymenicz palmata (dulse), Ascophyllum nodosunt (rockweed), Fucus vesiculous (rockweed), Gigartina lnamillosa, and Chcindrus crispus (Irish moss). :c1 III. An attempt was made to determine the composition of what is believed to be a comparatively pure sample of the polysaccharide prepared f rom Irish moss. The sulphur was determined by precipitation as barium he sulphate to be 8.22%; the calcium was determined as calcium oxalate to be 2.15%, or 3.44% when precipitated after oxidation. Dialysis in collodion bags reduced the ash content very little. A solution of the sample was found to be dextro-reatory, but a specific rotatiotr could not be obtained. . ry TRYPTIC HYDROLYSIS OF FRESH AND FROZEN FISII BY ■le . J. R. PANTON (Summarized .by S. A. BEATTY) To determine if f reezing, or storage while frozen, have any influence on the )f digestibility of fish muscle, muscle of cod, haddock, and mackerel fresh, recently frozen, and frozen stored for a considerable time were incubated at 37°C. in

F 40 the presence of pancreatin. The hydrolysis of the muscle was determined by the rate of formation of animo acids as measured by Foreman's modification of . Sorensen's method. 1 It was found that (1) haddock muscle, fresh, f rozen less than 24 hours 1 and frozen 6 months digested at approximately the same rate; (2) cod muscle, I fresh, was digested at a slightly faster rate than muscle stored 2 years at —20°C; and (3) mackerel muscle, fresh, was digested at the same rate as frozen muscle. Therefore, freezing or storing at —20°C. have little or no effect on the tryptic , digestion of fish muscle. 1

SODIUM CHLORIDE AS A PREVENTATIVE OF DRIP IN FROZEN FISH BY S. A. BEATTY The question of the cause of drip in thawed fish and meat has not been solved. The theory of cell rupture, due to the formation of ice crystals, is the most generally accepted. The rupture of cells is not the only factor and is possibly unimportant. The author has made a study of the water binding power of the proteins of live and dead fish muscle. It has been shown that the proteins retain all water present in the living rested muscle, and that a considerable amount of water is released early after the death of the muscle. Evidence has been found showing this release of water to be the result of the development of post- mortem acidity. This released water may all form drip after f reezing, and thawing. It may escape f rom the muscle in one or all of three ways. The ice cry:stals may puncture the cells and allow the water to escape, although the evidence for this is not strong. The high viscosity of the contents of the fibrils may tend to slow up crystal formation within the fibrils. The faster crystal growth in the interfibrillae spaces draws water f rom the fibrils and opens up the muscle tissue, allowing the water to escape more readily after thawing. The third factor is possibly the most important. All the water is held firmly by the resting muscle because sufficient protein is in solution to produce a large protein water interface binding all the water present. The release of water in the early post-mortem period is due to the partial isoelectric precipitation of the proteins. The f reezing of the water of the muscle results in an aggregation of the protein. This still further lessens the protein water interface and lessens the effect of capillary forces which might have retained a great part of this water. It is obvions that the greatest preventative of drip is a restoration of the proteins as nearly as possible to their original condition. It is impossible to do this for the whole muscle. It is possible, however, to redissolve a surface layer sufficient to form a semipermeable membrane round the muscle, through which the juices can diffuse only at a very slow rate. This may be done in two ways: the reaction of the surface of the muscle can be made sufficiently alkaline to redissolve the precipitated protein, or the salinity of the surface may be increased sufficiently to repeptize the precipitated globulins of the muscle. The former principle is used industrially at the present time. The latter principle is much to be preferred, if it is efficient, as sodium chloride can not be considered as objectionable as sodium hydroxide or strongly alkaline salts. A factor which has hindered a quantitative study of the problem of drip is the great amount of variation among fish receiving supposedly identical treatment. This difficulty has been overcome by treating one fillet of each fish and keeping its mate for a control. The experiment was done in the following manner,— Haddock were secured from the fishermen as soon as the trawls were hauled., and were brought immediately to the Station. They were dressed and filleted at once. One fillet was placed in a salt solution of definite strength for a definite time. Its mate was placed in tap water for the same period. The fillets were 41

wrapped in wax paper and brine frozen at the same rate. They were stored side by side in the refrigerator till defrosted. A small number of fillets were thawed after two months. As the effect of the salt was definite the rest were kept in storage six months in order to determine the effect of longer storage. No difference in the effect of the time of storage on the drip of dipped fillets was found. The results are given together to provide a better average. The defrosting was done as follows,—The wax paper was removed and the fillets were weighed in th& refrigerator. They . were hung in a sling of twine and allowed to dr:p 24 hours at 10°C. They were reweighed, the difference in weight indicating the

amount of . drip. Because of the great amount of variation among the individual fish, it is difficult to present the results in a form which shows properly the effect of the salt. The results of each series have been averaged. Each series represents • approximately ten fish. The effect of the salt solutions can be seen from the following summary: TABLE I

Loss of mreight on thawing Strength of NaCl. Bath Tinaein Bath Untreated Treated 5% 1 Min. 18.1 17.2 3 " 14.9 13.6 8 II 9.9 12.1 12 " 10.8 11.1 10% 1 " 11.2 10.8 3 " 11.1 3.7 6 " 14.3 7.2 10 " 13.1 3.6 15%" 1 " 16.1 8.0 . 20% . 34 " .16.7 6.0 2 " 14.7 4.4 . 4 " 12.3 3.5 In industrial work it is important to speed up processes as much as possible. It•would seem best, therefore, to utilize a very strong solution, about 20% NaCl., and dip a short period, about one minute.

THE DENATURING OF FISH MUSCLE ON STORAGE BY W. W. JOHNSTON

. It is generally known that muscle' if stored over extended periods becomes tough and fibrous on cooking. It has moreover been established from micro- scopical examinations, that this muscle which has been stored for long periods will not regain the appearance of fresh unfrozen muscle on thawing, as does that which has been held in the frozen condition for only short periods. Since both of the above phenomena bear similar time relationships, it was Suggested that there might have occurred a conversion of a portion of the soluble protein of the muscle into a metaprotein—a condition which it was believed would account for the above facts—hence the present investigation was undertaken. The method consisted in the extraction of about 10 gms. of finely minced muscle in 300 cc. of an approximately 4.5% solution of mono- and di-potassium phosphates, adjusted to a PH. of 7.2. Total and non-protein nitrogen 'deter- minations were made on the extract and in this manner the amount of protein nitrogen soluble in the salt solutions was obtajned. Extracts were made from fillets of cod, haddock and mackerel, and the nitrogen value based on a protein content of 19%, this figure being taken after a consideration of the moisture content of the fillets, and in the case of mackerel also of the fat content.

7! 42

In all fish no appreciable decrease in the amount of protein extracted by the phosphate solutions was observed until after a period of from 8 to 10 months, at which time the protein becomes more insoluble and after a period of 25 months storage has decreased to a value little greater than one-half of the original. In order to differentiate and determine whether the albumen or the globulin fraction was being denatured the more rapidly, aqueous extracts of cod muscle were made and the usual nitrogen determinations done. Although the results of this particular phase of the investigation can not be conclusive owing to the insufficient number of determinations made, they indicate that the amount of protein soluble in water before storage was about five-sixths of that extracted h by the phosphate solutions, but that this amount rapidly decreased during the a first 7-8 months, after which the rate of denaturation became slower.

This seems to indicate that in the early periods of storage, the albumen bears II the main burden of the denaturation processes, and since it is during this time h that the muscle becomes noticeably fibrous, the suggestion arises that this may a be due to the increasing insolubility of the albumen fraction.

BACTERIAL FLORA OF FROZEN FILLETS BY N. E. GIBBONS Frozen fillets were sampled and plated using the Weinzirl technique. The plates were incubated at 25°, 10° and 3° C., and counts made at each temperature, with isolations of representative species. After experimenting with several 11 kinds of media, a 1.5% salt-beef-extract agar was adopted for all work. Six haddock fillets, which had been stored at —18°C. for a year, when examined in this way showed great variation in the counts, not only between the fillets but in different samples f rom the same fillet. At 25° the numbers varied from a few thousand to hundreds of thousands, while at 3° the counts were at times only in the hundreds. If the fillets were allowed to thaw and stand overnight protected from con- tamination, the number of organisms increased considerably, often as much as ten times. In order to obtain some of the changes in the flora of the fillets a number. of fillets were put up in the usual manner, taking samples before and after freezing. One lot was stored at —18°C., the other at —5°C. Counts were first made on the fish in the holding tanks, and in both cases they were quite low, several being practically sterile. When sampled in the racks just before freezing the numbers were in the hundreds of thousands—indicating gross contamination in the handling proCess. After f reezing and 24 hours storage at —18°C., there is a considerable drop in numbers and there seems to be little variation up to the present limit of the data (six weeks). With those stored at —5°C. there is no appreciable drop in numbers. After two weeks there seems to be an increase. However, the present data is insufficient for definite conclusions. ,Some five cod fillets which had been stored at —10°C. for two years were, also ,examined. In these the bacterial counts were low when compared with the other samples. In most cases the 25° counts were little higher than the 3° counts. Moulds often predominated. 43

THERMAL INVESTIGATIONS ON FISH MUSCLE BY • G. O. LANGSTROTH (Summarized by DR. CHIPMAN) The time of freezing of various thicknesses of fish muscle was determined and compared with the times calculated by the equation, t (-2LP/2k (T – 0). Where t is the time of f reezing, (– is the thickness f rozen, e is the density, 'T is the temperature of the bath, 0 the freezing point of the fish and L and k the latent heat and conductivity respectively. Very good agreement was found, and this equation can therefore be used to find the freezing time of any fish whose constants are known and when one dimensional freezing is used. When the fish is removed from the f reezing bath an additional amount of muscle is frozen due to temperature redistribution. This amount increases with lowering bath temperature until it amounts to about one-quarter of the former amount at a temperature of —78.5°C.

HEAT CAPACITY OF GELS BY J. H. MENNIE (Summarized by D. CHIPMAN) It was thought that heat capacity measurements on gels might give infor- mation which could be applied to fish muscle. Gels made of gelatine of various concentrations were used and the heat capacities were determined in an adiabatic calorimeter. Measurements were made, from which were prepared curves showing the freezing of sodium chloride solution 1.7%, dry gelatine, and gels of 20%, 40%, and 60%. The gels all show breaks at the eutectic point corres- ponding to that shown by the sodium chloride. In the case of the 20% gel it vas found that the curves Were the same for it and for cod muscle above the freezing point. They were different below the freezing point. It is suggested that in the gel there is "bound" water which does not f reeze, but in the muscle very little water is "bound."

EXPERIMENTAL SMOKING OF FISH BY D. LEB. COOPER (Summarized by MR. BEATTY) An experimental smoke producer was designed to give intimate contact betwen sawdust and air in order to make a reproducible smoke, and it is capable of giving a smoke greater in volume in proportion to the amount of sawdust than any previously built. Smoke was produced which was low in acidity, low in phenols, low in tars,.but high in aldehydes. An experimental smoke house was built containing the following units: smoke house proper, smoke producer, and air conditioner. This enabled the control of three factors, the humidity and the temperature of the entering air, and, to some extent at least, The chemical nature of the smoke. Results indicated the possibility of controlling the degree of smoking and drying to suit the needs of different markets. It is recommended that the smoke density and the concentration of tar in the smoke be broUght under control. 44 Knig MUSCLE THE EFFECT OF SALT SOLUTIONS ON THE WEIGHT OF COD FISH in C; BY in E H. R. 'CHIPMAN 45 ni The muscle was soaked in solutions of different concentration, and of a 20% great variety of salts of sodium, potassium, lithium, etc. It was found that in gradi general there was an increase in weight with pure water. This increase became 75 ai smaller as the salt concentration was increased, until it passed through a minimum at about the isotonic point. A further increase in salt concentration caused a f rom Further greater increase in weight until a maximum was reached at about I N. intell concen- increases in concentration produced a lessened weight gain and, if the case tration were strong enough, there was a loss of weight. presc As an explanation of the -shape of the curves obtained with the salts, it is meth suggested that the osmotic effect of the salt 'solution caused a lowering in the weight from that due to soaking in pure water until the isotonic point was the 1 reached. A further increase in salt concentration produces a greater solubility remc of the protein causing, more water to be taken up by the fish, the two coinciding prod greater the at about I N. In support of this explanation it was found that the quesi in weight amount of soluble nitrogen in the fish, the greater would be the increase inve5. a weight at the maximum point. The decrease in the weight gain leading to the great increase in the loss with greater concentrations would be due to the lobst osmotic force over that due to the solubility of protein. Different salts gave different values for the weight change, but the curves were all similar. Varying the pH caused changes in the shape of the curve ; 2. 0 a pH below six showing only a straight osmotic effect, while a pH above five giving a curve with maximum and minimum points., linin, THE DISCOLORATION OF CANNED LOBSTER acid, BY a mni A. S. Cooic size Does any change affecting- the discoloration take place in the composition on tl of lobster muscle, during the gradual loss of vitality by the lobster but before crysl it is actually dead as judged by the practical method of producing? No significant very difference was found between the volatile sulphur given off by 10 minutes steam (aft distillation of 10 gms. of lobster tail meat at a pH of 5 between f reshly caught f ron vigorous lobsters and those which were at the point of death. Junc Since in canneries it is often impossible to deal with all the lobsters on hand without four hours, is it advisable to boil them and then hold them on ice N.B or is it better to attempt to keep them alive until they can be processed? Several pick canning experiments were conducted and the cans examined for discoloration acid as well as meat for voltaile sulphur content at the end of 3 weeks. Both pro- 4% ; cedures produced discolored cans. It was found that the process of autoclaving increases the volatile sulphur thar, content of the meat markedly. f orr inflt WORK ON LOBSTER CANNING mag BY E. HESS 1. Grading of Lobster Canneries: At the request of the Department 199 lobster canneries were graded during acet - June, July and August 1930, including all canneries in operation in New Bruns- lobs wick, Prince Edward Island and Cape Breton (Richmond, Cape Breton and by 1 Victoria Counties), according to a grading form somewhat modified from Dr. 45 Knight's original scheme. (Dr. G. B. Reed graded the remaining canneries in Cape Breton—Inverness county—the canneries on the Magdalen Islands and in Eastern Nova Scotia, 66 canneries in all). The grading, score varied from 45 marks to 110 marks, with an average mark of 72.9 for the whole Maritimes. 20% of the canneries are considered "poor", grading under 60; 34% are "fair", grading from 60 to 74, and 46% of the canneries are termed "good", grading 75 and higher. Modification of the present grading scheme, in the sense of a wider deviation from the original Knight scheme, is advocated to make the grading score more intelligible, by making 100 marks a "perfect" score, with deductions only (in case of inferior conditions in the canneries), but no bonus-additions, as in the present scheme. Sub-division of the• form into "Equipment" and "Operating methods" seems advisable. The weakest point in the lobster industry to-day (both in the canning and the live lobster trade) is the care of the live lobsters from the time they are removed from the trap until they are ready for packing. As it is impossible to produce canned lobsters of first quality from an inferior raw material, the question of delivery of live lobsters of prime quality at the canneries should be investigated especially in view of the enormous losses from dead lobsters, and the danger of poor quality canned lobsters (black discoloration) from packing lobsters of low vitality.

2. Canning Experiments: - (a) Crystal formation in canned lobsters. Cans packed commercially in various ways (enamel cans, plain cans, without lining, with lining, sea-water and fresh water pickle, acid pickle, 1.25% acetic acid, in all possible combinations), all showed formation of crystals of magnesium ammonium phosphate to a larger or smaller extent, in some cases of considerable size (2-3 mm. diam.), in other cases in the form of a very fine gritty layer on the lining or the meat. The cans packed with sea-water pickle showed most crystals on the whole, while the ones with acid pickle from fresh water showed very few crystals only in each can. The pH of the pickle on opening the cans (af ter 17 months' storage) was from 7.6 to 7.9 for the non-acid pickles and from 7.2 to 7.5 for the acid pickles, the lobsters being caught in the month of Tune at the Magdalen islands. A series of cans packed from lobsters caught in August at Point du Chene. N.B., showed after three months' storage no formation of crystals, whether in pickle without acid or in pickles containing increasing amounts of acid (0% acid: pH 7.1 to 7.6; Y2% acid: pH 6.8; 1 to 2% acid: pH 6.6; 3% acid; pH 6.3; 4% acid: pH 5.8) except in one can with a pickle of pH 7.6. These results agree with Harrison's that fall lobsters have more acid meat than spring caught lobsters, and seem to indicate that for that reason crystal formation in fall packed lobsters is not as frequent, as the crystal formation is influenced by the pH of the medium in which they grow, the crystals of magnesium ammonium ph6sphate being soluble in acid, but insoluble in water. (b) Pink slimy sediment in lobster cans. Experiments seem to indicate that the addition of increasing amounts of acetic acid to the pickle causes an increased removal of red pigment from the lobster meat and an increaséd red discoloration of the pickle, as demonstrated hy comparing the sedimentation remaining on filter papers after filtration of the pickle from the different cans. 46

IIIE USE OF CENTRIFUGAL EXTRACTORS TO RECOVER TII E OIL FROM COD-LIVERS BY W. W. STEWART In the "Fishing Gazette", May, 1929, Eric Loftier, Fisheries Engineer for the United States Bureau of Fisheries, reported that by using a centrifugal extractor he was able to recover all the oil that the raw livers contained, except about 4% which remained in the chum. In the pressing method about 28% of, the original oil is left in the chum, so by the centrifugal extractor Loftier increased' the yield of oil by 24%. The oil recovered by this method is a better grade of oil than is obtained by the pressing method because the oil is extracted from the chum while it is still hot before any spoiling action takes place. Fresh cod livers were used in all our experiments. A sample was taken and the oil content of the raw livers was determined by the ether extract method. The raw livers were cooked with live steam, following the commercial method as closely as our equipment permitted. The cooker was a type similar to those used by the industry, a cylinder with a conical bottom. The steam pipe extended almost to the apex of the cone. An autoclave was used as a steam boiler. The steam pressure during the cooking was kept at 15 lbs. per sq. in. The period - of cooking was 30 minutes. Then the chum was allowed to stand for 15 minutes so that the oil would rise to the surface of the chum. This oil was skimmed from the cooker, filtered through cheese cloth and cotton and then weighed, so as to obtain the yield. The chum was then run into a centrifuge. The oil from the centrifuge was filtered through cheese cloth and cotton and weighed. For each run about 25 to 30 pounds of ra.w livers were used. Results: 1=1, The results show the yield of oil, calculated as the per cent of the original oil' contained in the raw livers, that is recovered by these methods. Experiments 'using a Tolhurst centrifuge. % yields Oil content of the raw livers ' Centrifuged Skimmed oil Oil Total 1. 58.3% - 37.3 43.2 80.5 2. 58.3% 28.2 34.3 62.5 3. 57.7% 35.3 25.2 60.5 4. 67.7% 40.3 17.9 582 5. 66.0% 39.8 23.7 63:5

The livers used in 1. were f rozen livers, so this accounts for the increase yield of 20%. This would be expected from the work that has been done on the extraction of oil from frozen livers at this station. Experiment using a Fletcher centrifuge. % yields Oil content of the raw livers Centrifuged , Skimmed oil Oil Total 48.3 23.2 71.5

From the experiments it was found that about 5% of the original oil was lost due to the handling, filtering, etc. during- the process. In all cases the yields are lower than those reported by Loftier in 1929. He claimed to have recovered about 95% of the original oil as he only left about 4% of the original oil in the METITODS FOR TIIE DETERMINATION OF THE CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF COD LIVER OIL BY W. W. STEWART or The Hanus method and the Wijs method are the two methods that are ;al most generally used to determine the iodine value of an oil. They were pt compared and it was found that the Wijs method gives a higher value than the o Harms method for the iodine value ; iodine value for cod liver oil being 171.3 cd' (Wijs) and 170.0 (Hanus). The Wijs method only requires one and one half of hours for the reaction to be completed. The Hanus method has an advantage nn over the Wijs method in that the Hanus solution is easier to prepare. Value of Cod Liver Oil. en On the Acid The acid value of cod liver oil was determined in the usual way, namely od titrating the free fatty acids of the oil with O.I.N. NaOH, using phenolphthalein )se as an indicator, in a hot alcohol solution. In hot alcohol the end point for the ed titration is not very sharp--it was found by using a solvent of 1 part alcohol lie and 1 part of ether or benzene that the end point of the titration was very sharp. od Acid value of cod liver oil using different solvents as above, the alcohol tes being either pure or denatured and the benzene either C.P. or 90%, ranged Led from 9.8 to 9.87, giving agreement within the limit of experimental error. so )rn STUDIES ON RIGOR DEVELOPMENT IN FISH MUSCLE •kir BY S. A. BE.Arrv The work carried on at the Atlantic Biological Station during the summer nal of 1927 was continued at Halifax during the spring and summer of 1930. In the previous work it vas shown that the proteins of the resting muscle hold all the water, and that part of this water is released in the early post mortem period. The problem has been studied further in order to determine the cause of this release of water. Cod were killed, filleted and the muscle of, one fillet was ground and pressed as rapidly as possible. The reaction of the first drop cf press juice, and of the press juice that later welled up readily was measured. The second fillet was allowed to go into rigor. It was then ground and pressed and the reaction of the press juice was measured. The results are given in table J. • TABLE I The hydrogen ion concentration of the press juice of fish muscle before and during rigor ase" on Fish - Press juice first to appear Free welling press juice Press juice during rigor

Cod 1 p11 . 7 . 13 pH 6.72 pH 6.68 Cod 2 pH. 6.79 pH. 6.67 pH. 6.68 Cod 3 • pH. 7.03 pH. 6.94 pH. 6.85 Sea raven ntl. 6.92 p11.6.84 pH. 6.78

The findin.0- that the concentration of the proteins of the muscle is greater during rigor thban in the stage wherein the press juice wells up readily was vas confirmed. The suggestion was advanced that this increase in the solubility Ids Of the press juice was the result of a peptization of the Muscle globulin by an red increased salt coticentration in the muscle. This increased salt concentration the is probably- either lactate or orthophosphate. The lactate concentration of the free welling press juice and that of the press juice of rigor was determined. They were f ound to be aperoximately equal. The increase in the concentration of protein in the press juice during the onset of rigor is not due to an increase in lactate. Evidence has been f ound indicating the muscle globulin to be present in the tl anisotropic bands of the muscle. Fish muscle, (cod, haddock, flounder) was found strongly doubly refractive under a polarizing microscope. The double ref raction disappeared on the addition of a protein coagulant. The double o refraction did not disappear on soaking teased muscle in distilled water, si but it did disappear on soaking the teased muscle in sodium chloride solution, tl 5%-10%. These results are interpreted as follows :— d The globulin of the muscle is in a special molecular orientation in the anisotropic band. _ The addition of a protein coagulant precipitates the protein, tl disrupting its specific molecular orientation; the addition of salt results in a pronounced sWelling which disrupts also the specific molecular orientation. a A theory of rigor has been developed. This theory is based on the salt effect on the globulin of muscle. The presence of salt, probably orthophosphate, si increases the solubility of the globulin in the anisotropic segments. The globulin ti withdraws water from the isotropic segment causing a shortening of the muscle. Experiments have been made which show thé feasibility of this theory. Cunner were used in these experiments. They were killed by a blow on the head. They were kept immersed in water till the muscles did not react to a direct electric stimulus. It was believed that all nerve action was eliminated in this way. Distilled water, 1 cc. was injected into the muscle of one side in the region injected of the external anal orifice. The body immediately curved towards the a side. Sodium chloride solution 25%, 5-10 cc. were injected into the muscle of side and an equal volume of water in the opposite side. one The body •curved ci very sharply towards the side injected with distilled water. When injections of salt were reduced to 1 cc. or less the curvature was towards the side injected solution. with salt ci The fish were injected with varying amounts of hydrochloric acid in an con- o: attempt to reach the isoelectric points of the protein concerned. If the o traction be the result of a swelling process, a reaction close to the isoelectrie protein about pH 5.5 should prevent the contraction of rigor. No points of the si concentration of acid could be found which inhibited the contraction. In another series of experiments sodium hydroxide in various concentrations was injected into the muscles of one side and hydrochloric acid in the same concentration was injected into the muscles of the other side. The fish bodies curved invariably towards the alkaline side. After about ten minutes, the bodies curved towards the acid side. These experiments show that,—(1) salt solutions in low concentrations produce contraction, and in high concentration inhibit contraction. (2) Acids in' all concentrations produce contraction. (3) Alkalis in low concentration produce contraction more rapidly than acids, but when both are injected in the one fish the final contraction is always towards the acid side. The first conclusion fits in with the proposed scheme of the cause of rigor. Undoubtedly acids can produce a contraction, but the earlier work on rigor shows that it is extremely unlikely- that an increase in acidity has a direct bearing on the production of the rigor contraction. The last conclusion is very unexpected. It is explained as follows : The fish were on the verge of rigor at the time of the injection. The amount of protein in solution, and hence the amount of bound water is deter- mined by two factors, the hydrogen ion concentration and the salt concentration. In the pre rigor period, two processes are goino- on : lactic acid is being produced increasing the hydrogen ion concentration, and borthophosphate is being produced increasing the salt concentration. The former tends to lessen the solubility of the protein, and the latter increases it. Injection of alkali counteracts the former. If the rigor contraction be the result of increased solubility of the protein, the muscle should contract immediately on injection of the alkali. The increase in orthophosphate is due to increase in hydrogen ion concentration. Hence in the side injected with alkali the production of orthophosphate is inhibited, while in thé side injected with acid the producton of orthophosphate is increased. The diffusion of acid and alkali through the muscles will in a short time effect their neutralization. When this has taken place the. contraction will be determined by the amount of orthophosphate. Hence the body curves towards the side injected with acid. It would appear, therefore, that the rigor brought on by a small addition of acid is due to an increase in orthophosphate, and rigor brought on by a larger addition of acid is due to the direct action of the acid itself. These studies have been discontinued for the time being. They will be resumed some time during the summer of 1931.

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS OF MARINE BACTERIA TO FISH CURING PROCESSES BY J. A. SANBORN (Summarized by E. HEss) The following species were isolated f rom pickled fish: Sarcina subllava, Sarcina lutca, Staphylococcus albus, Micro coccus candicans, Microc.occus aurantiacus, actinomyces-like forms and torulae. The red organism (Serratia salinaria) vas isolated f rom sea salt. Under most favourable conditions for pickling actinomyces-like f orms and torulae predominated, the fish being in good condition; when putrefactive changes were under way, the micrococci and sarcinae were dominant, i.e. halophilic species of marine origin, which find favourable growth conditions in concentrations of salt as high as 10-20% NaCl. The different chemical constituents of different salts were found to have different influences on the changes in hydrogen ion concentration of the media with increasing salt concentrations. The possibility of inhibiting certain undesirable types by such means should be investigated, as well as the possibilities of brine inoculation with some harmless species in order to suppress the salt tolerant proteolytic types.

SUMMARY REPORT

OF PACIFIC BIOLOGIsCAL STATION NANAIMO, B.C. 1930

The following constituted the staff of the Station during the year 1930: Dr. W. A. Clemens, Director. - Dr. R. E. Foerster, Chief Biologist (Sockeye Salmon Propagation). Dr. J. I. Hart, Assistant Biologist (Pilchard and Herring Investigations). Dr. A. L. Pritchard—Scienti fic Assistant in Biology (Pink and Chum Salmon Investigations). Mr. C. R. Elsey, Scientific Assistant in Biology (Shellfish Investigations).. Dr. N. M. Carter, essociate Chemist (Oceanography, etc.) Mr. C. M. Mottley, Scientific Assistant in Biology (Trout Investigations). Mr. R. W. Whittaker, Scientific Assistant in Biology (Pilchard Investigation). Mr. D. C. G. MacKay, Scientific Assistant in Biology (Shellfish, Salmon, Herring Investi- gations). 50

SEASONAL

Mr H. J Alxander, Salmon Tagging Mr. D. Beall, Oceanography. Mr. E. C. Black, Oyster Culure Mr. L. L. Bolton, Oceanographical Apparatus Mr. G. Carl, Oyster Culture Mr. R. H. Fleming, Oceanogaphy Mr. G. Hem, Pilchard Investigation Mr. L. McHugh, Salmon Tagging. 1 Mr. T. Wheeler, Salmon Tagging. This has been the most active year of investigation in the history of this Station. Approximately fifty investigations have been carried forward during the year with about thirty-two workers involved. Problems calling for solutions are being brought fonvard to such an extent that it has been impossible to attempt to meet them all with the funds and workers available. However, this is a healthy situation and our concern should be for a sound, well-balanced develop- ment. The program now being followed gives major attention to those investi- gations deemed of fundamental importance to the conservation of the fishery resources and requiring continuity of observation, experiment and record over a 2 period of years. The progress in the work of the Station has been facilitated by the appointment of additional members to the permanent staff, by the additions to the equipment and by the extension of living accommodation. • The most important needs of the Station in the immediate future are: (a) Increased laboratory accommodation with offices or private laboratories for the members of the staff, (b) fireproof library and museum building,: (c) living accommodations for staff, (d) improvement in fresh water supply, (e) experimental fish hatchery and rearing ponds.

INVESTIGATIONS I. Sockeye Salmon Propctgation.—The study of the propagation of sockeye salmon has been continued under the direction of Dr. R. E. Foerster. In con- tinuation of the program at Cultus lake, all the adult fish arriving at the fences in 1929 were stripped, the eggs placed in the hatcheries and the fry liberated in the lake. The following statement covers the operations : Total sockeye females arriving at fence 3437 Average number of eggs per female 4545 Total eggs contained in all females 3437x4545— 15,621,165 Total eggs contained in females dead on fences 472x4545— 2,145,240— 13.7% Total eggs contained in females spawned 2965x4545— 13,475,925— 86.3% Total eggs collected 12,078,633— 77.3% Losses occurring in hatchery 2,434,515-15.6% of total eggs. —20.2% of eggs col- lected. Fry liberated 9,644,118-61_,7 of total eggs. —79.8% of eggs co.- , lected. Total eggs c,ontained in all females 15,621,165 Total eggs in females dead on fences 2,145,240— 13.7% Total eggs left in spawned females 1,397,292— 9.0% Total losses in hatcheries 2,434,515— 15.6% Total fry liberated • 9,644,118 61.7% 15,621,165 15,621,165-100.0% The run of 1930 is being allowed, after enumeration, to pass into the lake to spawn naturally. At Taft, in the area, approximately half a million young sockeye salmon were held until large enough for marking. They were marked 51

during the latter part of October and released in Eagle river. The eggs were collected in 1929 in Adams river, a tributary of Shuswap lake. This experiment is being carried out in order to obtain information for comparison with that of the experiment of the previous year when eggs were transplanted from Cultus lake. An experiment to test the efficiency of the pond system in artificial propa- gation is being carried out at Cultus lake. Half a million young sockeye are being retained in artificial ponds. Half the number were marked and liberated in the lake in the fall of 1930 and the remainder will be marked differently and liberated in the spring of 1931. The seaward migrants_ will be counted and the is percentage of survival determined. ng There were counted, in the spring of 1930, the seaward migrants resulting ns from the planting of two and a half million eggs in the small streams tributary Pt to Cultus lake. The total amounted to 38,000 yearlings. With these, 66,000 a two-year-old fish, part of the product of natural spawning in 1927, passed out P. to sea. ti- ry II. Pilchard and Herring.—These investigations are being carried out under a a joint arrangement with the Provincial Fisheries Department and under the direction of Dr. Hart. The pilchard studies have been conducted along much the same lines as in the preceeeding year. Dr. Hart was located at Nootka and le Mr. Whittaker at Kildonan. The catches have been sampled and analysed as to lengths, weights and sexes of the fish and it is hoped the results will indicate es signs of depletion, if any. The data show that the females average longer and heavier than the males, that the females are more numerous than the males, that there is a definite relationship between length and weight, that the condition of fatness may be recorded mathematically. A study has been made of the specific characters of the pilchard with the object of determining the movements and mingling of schools and of determining the relationship between the British Columbia pilchard and the California sardine. An attempt is being made to determine the ages of pilchards by the use of the otoliths, since the scales are not satisfactory. Material has been collected for a study of the food taken through- out the season. 1- The herring investigations this winter will be conducted along somewhat similar lines as those on the pilchards. An attempt will be made, to establish a system of annual inspection of spawning areas to serve as a possible basis for prediction of future supply. A study of the alleged pollution of herring spawning areas by effluents from reduction plants was commenced by Mr. H. B. Marshall. Samplings of sea water were taken in several linear and vertical series off two plants in , 70• before operation, sometime after commencement of operation, and toward the end of the season. Extensive analyses were made to determine the character, amount, direction of movement, extent of dilution, etc., of the effluents. III. Pink and Chum Salmon.—The study of pink salmon in Massett inlet has been continued by Dr. A. L. Pritchard. Fences were installed in McClinton creek for intercepting the runs of adult fish proceeding upstream and of seaward migrating fry. Approximately 66,000 pink salinon were counted through the fence in the fall of this year. In the spring of 1931, the fry resulting from the spawning of these fish will be counted as they move downstream and data thereby obtained regarding the production of seaward migrants from a known spawning information 0 escapement. Large numbers will be marked in order to obtain con- cerning the movements of the returning adults, the numbers returning to the parent stream, and,the extent of mortality during the growth period in the sea. Plans are *being developed for an experiffiental planting of pink salmon eggs or 3. fry in McClinton creek next year in the attempt to determine the possibility of obtaining a return from a transplantation. It may be mentioned that Massett --àk41.>_Latr.771.

52

inlet produces every other year a pack of pink salmo.n of the value of $300,000 or more. It is a resource that should be carefully conserved. Some work is being carried forward with the life-history of the chum salmon but this year it has been necessary to devote most attention to the pink salmon study. IV. Shellfish Investigation.—Intensive oyster investigations have been con- ducted in Boundary bay and Ladysmith harbour. In each of these districts there are now three species of oysters, namely, the native, the introduced Eastern and the introduced Japanese. A study of the physico-chemical conditions in relation to the spawning, spatting and growth of these species has been carried out in the two areas. Experiments were conducted with respect to determining the best methods for spat collection and some consideration was given to the question of dyking. Oyster cultivation along the British Columbia .coast is increasing and » accurate information concerning the suitability of the various species to condi- 1 tions prevailing in the various localities will be of much value. Mr. C. R. Elsey has been in charge of the investigations and has liad two assistants, Mr. E. C. 1 Black and Mr. G. C. Carl. A study of the distribution, reproduction and growth of crabs has been carried out in the Prince Rupert area by Mr. D. C. G. MacKay. For purposes of regu- lation of the fishery, information concerning the mating season has been sought particularly. V. Skeena River Investigation.—It has seemed important to make a com- prehensive and accurate study of salmon propagation on the Skeena river system with the object of developing working plans whereby this river system may be ( maintained at a maximum for salmon production. Such a study will involve a , detailed analysis of the catch statistics, a survey of the spawning areas, the 1 development of a comprehensive annual system of spawning bed reports, the possible development of measures for the assistance in natural propagation in ( addition to artificial methods. A commencement in the program has been made / this year by Mr. D. C: G. MacKay, who carried out a survey of certain streams in the district. He was assisted for a short period by Mr. H. J. Alexander. A camp was established near the mouth of Fifteen Mile creek on August 12th. As this stream represents one of the best spawning areas on this part of the Skeena river system, it was desired to make continuous observations / throughout the season. With the exception of one coho, which was first observed ( on October 8th, the only salmon to appear until the investigation was brought i to a close on October 12th were sockeyes. The stream was inspected throughout practically its entire length. In order to determine one aspect of the success of the spawning, several hundred dead female sockeye salmon were opened and the , number of remaining eggs determined. The average per fish was thus found to be 171. From this point of view the spawning was reasonably successful but the lowness of the water was an adverse factor. Other phases of the investigation included the measuring of 778 dead female nnd 484 dead male sockeye salmon, short trips to adjacent streams, the collecting of plankton and, in general, the accumulation of such data as might prove of present or future value. VI. Trout Investigation.—The trout investigation, which fôr the past four or five years has been dealing with the identity and systematic relationships of the trout of British Columbia, was continued by Mr. C. McC. Mottley in the Kootenay district. In order to estimate the success of Kamloops trout plantings in waters where native trout are also found it has been necessary to attempt to establish rigid recognition characters for this species under varying conditions of environment. Temperature seems to be the chief factor in determining the time of spawning, rate of development of the eggs, time of hatching, rate of growth, 53 the amount of available food, and hence many of the body characters of this trout. The effect of temperature on the early stages of Kamloops trout was carried out in the Dominion Hatchery at Nelson, B.C., by means of controlled conditions. Further experiments to determine the effect of transplanting Kam- loops trout, that is, the effects on later stages, were carried out by transferring 2,000 marked fry (1% inches long) to Cottonwood lake (five miles from Nelson and at an elevation of 2,865 feet) and to coastal conditions at the Pacific Bio- logical Station, Nanaimo. Field work consisted in the collection of samples from new localities not already listed in previous work and in a study of summer water, temperatures in the various streams tributary to . Collec- tions of fry from native environments were made for purposes of comparison with artificially reared fry and native fry. Owing to the importance of the Kokinee (land-locked sockeye) as a food for large trout and owing to its econoMic importance as a food for local residents when preserved, a study of the life-history of the Kokinee was commenced. Pre- liminary work consisted in the collection of 1,100 adults from the spawning run for a racial comparison with sockeye salmon. A planting of 85,000 eyed eggs from Kootenay lake was made in a stream near the Pacific Biological Station to determine the effects of changing the environment on this species. VII. Oceanography. The study of the oceanographic conditions in the Strait of Georgia was continued under the general direction of Dr. A. H. Hutch- inson. Particular attention was given to the question of silica, phosphate and nitrate production and distribution and its relation to the fertility of these waters. A special study was commenced on the conditions prevailing in three fiords. The coast of British Columbia is a series of very extensive fiords and it seemed im- portant to determine the conditions in several of these in relation to the fisheries. Dr. Hutchinson gave special attention to the phytoplankton and Miss M. H. Campbell to the zooplankton. The chemical analyses of the water samples were carried out by Mr. R. H. Fleming and Mr. D. Beall. Dr. C. M. Fraser com- menced an examination of the bottom fauna of the fiords. Mr. L. L. Bolton took up a special study of the relative efficiencies of various types of apparatus used in the collection of plankton, having in view the pos- sibility of standardization of methods. Dr. N. M. Carter has been appointed to the staff of the Station as chemist and it will now be possible to carry forward the oceanographical program through- out the year and to commence a program on the west coast of Vancouver island in relation to the salmon, pilchard and herring fisheries.

VIII. Salmon Tagging. — Spring and coho salmon were tagged in three local- ities, namely, around the northzwest end of the Queen Charlotte islands, in the vicinity of Porcher island, and in the Goose island area. Pink and chum salmon were tagged again in Queen Charlotte sound and . The ta.gging staff consisted of Messsrs. L. McHugh, H. J. Alexander and T. C. Wheeler. The results of all tagging work are now being published as bulletins in the series of the Board. All results from 1925 to 1928 inclusive have been or are now in the process of being published. The returns from the tagging of coho, pink and chum salmon in 1929 and 1930 are now being prepared for publication, but those from the spring salmon taggrng will be delayed because of the variation in the age of maturity ' of this species and the recaptures consequently being spread over several years. The data on record at the present time are as follows:

THE TAGGING OF SPRING SALMON

1 . Spring salmon, West coast of Queen Charlotte islands, 1929 From May 12 to May 31 and at intervals throughout June, July and August, 375 spring salmon were tagged on the west coast of the Queen Charlotte islands. Of these, 188 were taken in Rennel sound, 8 at Hippa island, 2 at Frederick island 54 and 177 slightly farther north at La Perouse rocks. Because of the similarity of the distribution of returns from all these areas, they have been taken together under the caption given above. The total recaptures to date have amounted to 40 (10.7 per cent.) distributed as noted below: • 1929 1930 North island, Queen Charlotte islands 2 2 Skeena river 2 Tofino, west coast Vancouver island 1 Ucluelet, west coast of Vancouver island 1 Straits of Juan de Fuca (B.C. waters) 3 Fraser river 7 Straits of Georgia and Puget sound (U.S. waters) 4 Coast of Washington 4 Columbia river. 6 Coast of Oregon 7 37 3 The distribution of returns is essentially similar to that reported previously for Hippa island for 1925. Fewer, however, were taken in the Columbia (15 per cent, as opposed to 27) and on the coast of Oregon (17.5 per cent. to 32.4), while slightly larger numbers were returned from the Fraser river, Puget sound and the coast of Washington. A total of 55 per cent. of the returns were from American waters. 2. Spring salmon, West coast of Queen Charlotte islands, 1930 In 1930, although more attention was paid to the north coast of the Queen Charlotte islands, nevertheless, 179 spring salmon were tagged on the west coast. These were distributed in the following manner : 115 at Rennel sound, 1 at Hippo island, 13 at Port Louis, 12 at Frederick island and 38 at La Perouse rocks, twenty or 11.2 per cent. have already been returned. 1930 Skeena river Milbank sound (St. John's harbour) 1 Fraser river 3 Straits of Georgia and Puget sound (U.S. waters) 2 Coast of Washington 2 Columbia river 9 Coast of Oregon 2 20

These returns are almost identical with those of 1929 from the same area, except that there is an increase in Columbia river recaptures to 45 per cent., accompanied by a slight decrease on the Oregon coast to give a percentage of 75 from American waters. 3. Spring salmon, North coast of Queen Charlotte islands, 1.929 It happens that the peak of the run of spring salmon on t-he north coast of the Queen Charlotte islands occurs after that of the west coast is passed. Ac in 1929, taggers were able to leave the latter early in June and work at-cordinglÿ North island in late June, July and August, examining almost the whole run. In all, 402 fish were tagged at North island. Some 41 others were tagged from Shag rock to Rose Spit, but since no returns have been forthcoming, these have not been considered. The returns amounted to 60 fish, or 14.9 per cent. of the total, as follows : • 1929 1930 Alaska 1 North island, Queen Charlotte islands 2 • Skeena river 5 Rivers inlet 1 Lennard island, off Clayquot

55

Of I I Straits of Juan de Fuca (B.C. waters) 2 ier Fraser river. _ . 17 2 to 1 1 Straits of Georgia and Puget sound (U.S. waters) 1 1 Coast of Washington 12 Columbia river 10 3 Coast of Oregon 2 i ii 53 7 '.. The localities from which these tags have been returned are almost the same as those in which the fish of the west coast were recaptured, but the number dis- tribution in these localities is radically different. The most striking differences are that the returns from the Fraser river were almost doubled (31.6 per cent, as opposed to 15.8), while the Columbia and the coast of Oregon recaptures fell off, the latter reaching the low figure of 3.3 per cent. The probable significance of this is discussed later in this paper. However, 48 per cent, of the returns were 3 I I from American waters, exclusive of Alaska. sly )er 4. Spring salmon, North coast of Queen Charlotte islands, 1930 Lile This year, when the numbers in the run off the mainland at the mouth of the he Skeena river were decreasing, attention was turned to the northern coast of the an Queen Charlotte islands. Throughout June, July, and August, 660 spring salmon were tagged between North island and Tow Hill in the following proportions:— North island, 472; Pillar bay and Jalun river, 60; Shag rock, 41; Virago sound, 18; Massett flats, off Massett inlet, 25; and Tow Hill, 44. As in previous cases, :en due to the similarity of returns, all are considered together. In all 84 recaptures, St. amounting to 12.7 per cent., have been made as follows: pa lty 1930 Alaska 1 30 North coast of Queen Charlotte islands 5 Qwadzleet anchorage, Stephens island 1 Skeena river 2 Burke channel 3 Rivers inlet 2 Tofino, west coast of Vancouver island 1 Kyuquot, a-est coast of Vancouver island 1 Swiftsure banks 2 Barkley sound 1 Straits of Juan de Fuca 3 Straits of Georgia (B.C. waters) 1 Fraser river 15 :pt Straits of Georgia and Puget sound (U.S., waters) 5 ed Coast of Washington 9 an I I Columbia river 21 Coast of Oregon 11 84 of In general, the recaptures noted above are similar to those of 1929 for the V- same area, with a slight decrease in return from the Fraser river (31.6 to 17.8 per at cent) and the coast of Washington (19.4 to 10.7 per cent). Since, however, the In. numbers from the coast of Oregon increased slightly, the returns from American )111 waters still constituted 54.7 per cent. .Ve .he 5. Spring salmon, Hecate straits off Banks and Stephens islands, 1930 30 This heading includes Bell passage, the waters around Porcher island, in- cluding those off Cape George, Edye pass and Chearnley pass, the northern end of Banks island including Bonilla island, and Northwest and White rocks. In April, May and August, 182 spring salmon were tagged of which 10 or 5.5 per cent were recaptured. 56 1930 Alaska 1 Naas river 1 Rivers inlet 1 Kyuquot, west coast of Vancouver island 1 Alberni canal, west coast of Vancouver island 1 Howe sound 1 Fraser river 1 Straits of Georgia and Puget sound (U.S. waters) 1 Coast of Washington 1 Columbia river 1 10 These returns differ radically from those for the areas on the Queen Char- lotte islands in the fact that they are widely spread over Canadian areas. Ten per cent were recaptured in Alaska and 30 in United States waters. This indi- t cates that these springs are bound chiefly for Canadian spawning rivers. 6. Spring salmon, 111illbank sound area, 1930 The destination of the spring salmon which have been taken in the vicinity of Millbank sound has long been a matter of conjecture. Accordingly in 1930 one boat was instructed to confine its operations as closely as possible to this region. In June, July and August, 207 fish were tagged in Milbank sound, chiefly near St. John's harbour, and 95 off Koeye river and Hakai channel in Fitzhugh sound, making a total of 302. Thirteen of these, or,4.3 per cent, have been returned to date. 1930 Fitzhugh or Burke channel 1 Rivers inlet 4 Robson's bight, Johnstone strait 1 Kingcome inlet 1 Straits of Juan de Fuca (B.C. waters) 1 Fraser river 3 Columbia river 2 13 In this case, the extreme of localization in distribution to Canadian territory is reached since only 15.4 per cent were apprehended in United States waters, viz., the Columbia river. The other returns are spread along the mainland and Vancouver island shores from Fitzhugh sound in the north to the Fraser river in the south, Rivers inlet having the largest number, 4 or 31 per cent. 7. Spring salmon, Hardy bay, 1930 As far as spring salmon were concerned, the area around Hardy bay, or the north-eastern end of Vancouver island, had heretofore been given only passing notice while work was being done on the other species of salmon. The numbers , handled at these times were not sufficiently large to warrant any definite con- clusions. In 1930, however, during April, May and June, 436 springs were tagged. Of these, 23 were taken along the shore from Hope island to Cape Scott, and 413 in the vicinity of Hardy bay. The total recaptures were 24 or 5.5 per cent, distributed as follows: 1930 Hardy bay _ , . 1 Bates' pass 1 Port John, 1 Bute inlet • « 2 Straits of Juan de Fuca (B.C. waters) 2 Cape Flattery 1 Fraser river 1 Straits of Georgia and Puget sound (U.S. waters) . . 7 Coast of Washington . 5 Columbia river 3 24

57

These returns are striking by comparison with those of the last two areas discussed in that there is only one fish or 4.2 per cent from the Fraser river, and 15 or 62.5 per cent from United States waters. This is similar to the results from the west coast of Vancouver island except that the percentage for the Columbia river is lower.

THE TAGGING OF COHO SALMON • 8.' Coho salmon, North coast of Queen Charlotte islands, 1929 During June, July, August and early September of this year, 728 cohoes were tagged on the north coast of the Queen Charlotte islands, over all the area from North island to , off Rose Spit, in the following proportions:— North island, 375; Shag rock, 20; Cape Naden, 2; Seven Mile point, 3; off Massett inlet, 213; and Hecate strait, northeast of Rose Spit, 115. Thirty-one returns (4.1 per cent) have been received to date. All regions are included in one table since the returns from each were similar and it was felt that no benefit would result from further subdivisions. ( 1929 1930 Alaska 4 1 Queen Charlotte islands (north shore and Massett inlet) 4 Bear river and Stewart 1 Naas river area (including Dundas island) 3 2 Skeena river 3 Porcher island 1 Banks' island 2 Kemano river 1 Gardner canal 1 Gribbell island 1 Burke channel 3 Rivers inlet 2 Toba inlet 1 Whidbey island, U.S.A. 1 27 4 The returns from this area indicate a westerly migration chiefly to the Y mainland north of Queen Charlotte sound. Two only went farther south. Four were recaptured in Alaska. One interesting return (not recorded in the table) was that of tag No. 14271, affixed in Hecate strait, northeast of Rose Spit, and 1 taken from the stomach of a seal in Hudson Bay pass. 9. Coho salmon, North coast of Queen Charlotte islands, 1930 In 1930, 983 cohoes were tagged along the whole north coast of the Queen Charlotte islands. The numbers were distributed as follows :—North island, 557; Pillar bay and Jalun river, 74; Shag rock, 101; Virago sound, including capes - Edenshaw and N-aden, 105; off Massett inlet, including Wiah point and McIntyre e bay, 137; and off Tow hill, 9. Of these tags 67 (6.8 per cent) have been returned to date. 1930 Alaska 16 Naas river - 4 Wales island 1 Queen Charlotte islands, north shore 9 Dundas island 1 Stephens island 1 Porcher island 1 Lawyer island light 1 1 Kennedy island Skeena river ■ 5 2 Banks island 1 Whale channel 1 1 58

Finlayson channel 1 Fisher channel 1 F Dean channel 2 Fitzhugh sound and Burke channel • 9 Queen Charlotte sound 1 Rivers inlet 4 Bute inlet 3 Big Qualicum river (Vancouver island) 1 67 If comparison is attempted with the results of tagging in this area in 1929, it will be evident that north of Queen Charlotte sound the distribution is similar. 1 Recapture in Alaskan waters of 16 or 23.9 per cent of the total is noteworthy. Only 4 or 6 per cent were retaken south of Queen Charlotte sound, and these from two localities, Bute inlet on the mainland and Qualicum river on Vancouver island. 13 10. Coho salmon, Banks island area, 1930 The following is a summary of the tagging carried on in April, May and August, 1930, in the areas included in the above heading:—Hecate strait, off Stephens island, 53; Bell passage, 1; Porcher island at Cape George, Edye pass and Chearnley pass, 44; McCauley islands, Beaver pass and Spicer islands, 13; the northern end of Banks island, Bonilla island, Northwest rocks and White rocks, 429; and Granville channel, at Camp point light, 6. Of this total of 546, il 32, or 5.9 per cent, have been retu rned. 1930 Wark canal 3 Naas river 1 1 , Qteen Charlotte islands 1 Stephens island 1 Porcher island 1 Banks island 4 McCauley island 2 Granville channel 4 11 Whale channel 1 Douglas channel 2 Millbank sound area 2 Fitzhugh sound and Burke channel 7 Rivers inlet 3

32 • These returns are slightly more localized than those of the Queen Charlotte islands. The largest number, 7, or 21.9 per cent, appeared in Fitzhugh sound or Burke channel. Seventeen (53.1 per cent) were taken off the stretch of coast between the Skeena river and the southern end of Fitzhugh sound. It is espe- cially noteworthy that one individual was recaught in Long Arm, Skidegate inlet, Queen Charlotte islands, and that none appeared in Alaska. 11. 'Coho salmon, Campania sound area, 1930 There is included under this heading the following areas:—Wright sound, around Gribbell island and Promise island, 30; Campania sound area, inclusive of , Otter and Squally channels, Passage island, Gil island, Surf islands, John point on Princess Royal island, 177; and Laredo sound including Aristaz- able, and -Swindle islands, Princess Royal island near Mount Alice and Surge narrows, 14; a total of 221. From this work, which was carried on during August and September, 1930, 10 fish, or 4.5 per cent, have been recovered. 1930 Low inlet • 1 Aristazable island 1 59

Gil island 1 1 Burke channel 3 Rivers inlet 3 10 These returns are purely local and merit no comment other than that 60 per cent were captured in Burke channel and Rivers inlet.

12. Coho salmon, Millbank sound area, 192.9 In August, 1929, 152 cohoes were tagged in Millbank sound. Nine (5.9 per cent) have been sent in. 1929 Burke channel 4 Dean channel 2 Fisher channel (Roscoe inlet) 1 Fraser river 1 Insufficient data 1 9 Seventy-eight per cent of the returns were recaught in the nearby area of Fisher, Burke and Dean channels. It is interesting that Millbank sound is the most northerly area on the mainland coast from which cohoes have appeared in the Fraser river.

13. Coho salmon, Milbank sound area, 1930 In 1930, during June, July and August, a comprehensive programme was carried out in Milbank sound, in the vicinity of Purple bluff, Sound point and St. Johns harbour. Four hundred and fifteen cohoes were tagged, from which number 36, or 8.7 per cent, have been returned. 1930 Alaska 1 Naas river 1 channel 1Seaforth Squally channel (Gil island) 1 Dean channel 3 Fisher channel 3 Fitzhugh sound and Burke channel. , 15 Rivers inlet 5 Smith's inlet 1 Yuculta_ rapids 1 Bute inlet 2 Toba inlet 1 Jervis inlet 1 Insufficient data 1 37

As in 1929, the majority (56.7 per cent) of cohoes from this area found their way to Fisher, Burke and Dean channels. More of the areas south of Queen Charlotte sound, e.g. Yuculta rapids, Bute inlet, etc., were amongst the localities of recapture. Only 4, or 10.8 per cent, were taken north of the tagging area, Indicating, in the main, the usual southerly migration.

14. Coho salmon, Goose islands, 192.9 In Augtist, 1929, operators were able to tag 367 cohoes off Goose islands and Gosling rocks in Queen's sound. Seventeen (4.6 per cent) are now at hand. 11‘, AM.

60

1929 1 Dean channel 1 Burke channel 1 Walker lake cannery 1 a Rivers inlet 4 c Seymour inlet 1 Belize inlet 1 . 1 /I Johnstone straits 2 J Toba inlet 2 E Bute inlet 2 L Denman island, off Vancouver island 1 1 17 r J These returns are widely spread to many inlets, all of which are south of the E centre of tagging. Rivers inlet received the largest number, 4, or 23.5 per cent. F r v 15. Coho salmon, Fitzhugh sound, 1930 • 1 Two hundred and ninety-eight cohoes were marked in this sound, off Koeye river and Hakai channel and the mouth of Burke channel, in the latter part of August, 1930. The largest return of all the coho tagging, 57, or 19.1 per cent, was received. t 1930 n Fitzhugh sound and Burke channel 48 d Rivers inlet 8 f Knights inlet 1 s 57 1 1 s It appears from the distribution of the returns given above, that the run in d out this area was mainly a local one. It should, perhaps, be pointed also, that F fishing was very heavy off Namu at this time. This probably would account for s part of the large return. d r_ 16. Coho salmon, Sooke, 1929 - t In September and October, 1929, Messrs. J. H. Todd and Son at Sooke, tagged 58 cohoes from their traps. We are deeply indebted to them for this 1 assistance. The eight returns (13.8 per cent) were widely distributed as follows: .

1929 ; Sooke ' 1 c James bay (vicinity of Victoria) 1 Cowichan bay and river 2 t Fraser river 1 Lummi island 1 5 Point Roberts 1 I Dungeness trap (Washington) 1 ( 1 8 As in the case of cohoes tagged in this area in 1928, the general migration is eastward. The small numbers preclude any further conclusions except that distribution is somewhat similar to that of the previous year.

THE TAGGING OF PINK SALMON In order to obtain as complete information as possible on the migrations of the pink salmon in British Columbia, it seemed desirable in 1929, the "on" year for the Fraser river, to make every effort to determine the routes of travel of this species in the waters of the southern portion of the province. Accordingly, tagging programmes were carried out in the Johnstone strait area and at Sooke in the strait of Juan de Fuca.

61 •

17. Pink salmon, Johnstone strait, 1929 In August and early September, 1929, 468 pinks were tagged in Johnstone and Broughton straits from Beaver cove to Adams river. Thirty-seven (7.9 per cent) of these have been returned to date, as follows:

1929 1930 Alert bay 2 Johnstone strait 4 Kingcombe inlet , 1 . Lockboro inlet 1 Deep Water bay 1 Sliammon river, near Powell river 1 Bute inlet 1 Jervis inlet 2 1 1 Fraser river 19 Puntlidge river, near Courtenay, Vancouver island 1 Whidbey island, U.S.A. 1 Insufficient data 1

• 36 1 These returns are very interesting in comparison with those from the 1928 tagging. The conclusions drawn from the latter were that,--"1. The principal migration of pinks in the Johnstone strait area took place in an east and southerly direction. 2. After they had collected in spawning schools, they did not travel far but veent chieily to local streams. 3. Failure to recapture any tagged pinks south of Discovery passage indicates that pinks of Johnstone and Broughton straits did not contribute to the Fraser river run this year." In 1929, although the route of travel was still in an "east and southerly direction," only six of the returns were local in their distribution and 19 (51.4 per cent) were recaptured in the Fraser. Six were taken in inlets on the mainland shore and one appeared on Vancouver island at Courtenay. These results demonstrate indubitably that in the "on" year for southern British Columbia, many pinks do reach the Fraser river from the north end of Vancouver island through the strait of Georgia.

18. Pink salmon, Sooke, 1929 We are greatly indebted to Messrs. J. H. Todd and Son for tagging during August and September, 1929, 185 adult pink salmon from their traps at Sooke on the strait of Juan de Fuca. Thirteen, or 7 per cent, have been returned from the following areas: 1929 Sooke 1 Fraser river - 7 Coast of Washington 4 Puget sound 1 13 • This experiment demonstrated.that pinks as well as springs, cohoes and sockeye, may also migrate 'to the Fraser river and neighbouring waters around the south end of Vancouver island through the strait of Juan de Fuca.

THE TAGGING OF CHUM SALMON 19. Chum salmon, R‘obson's bight, Johnstone strait, 1930 In September, 351 chums were tagged in Robson's bight. Of these, 20, or 5.7 per cent; have been returned. 1930 Alert bay and vicinity 3 Blinkinsop bay 1 Johnstone strait 1 mar Deep Water bay 8 grot Bute inlet 2 of f Jervis inlet 2 Ladysmith 1 Chemainus 2 20 This distribution of returns is somewhat similar to that of 1928 for fish outl tagged on the west coast of Quadra and Sonora islands. The general migration in il was in an easterly and southerly direction with one portion of the run reaching was Vancouver island and the other the mainland. Particularly noteworthy is the attu return of 8, or 40 per cent, from Deep Water bay. These fish evidently rest here ava during their southern migration. QUA 20. Chum salmon, Deep TVater and Granite bctys, 1930 During September and October, 1930, 531 chums were tagged in the vicinity of Deep Water and Granite bays. To date 46, or 8.7 per cent, have been returned. ticu 1930 amt Deep Water bay 2 this Deep bay, Vancouver island 1 whi Puntlidge river, near Courtenay, Vancouver island 1 Denman island, off Vancouver island 3 Comox, Vancouver island 2 BOT Qualicum rivers, Vancouver island 2 Chemainus river, Vancouver island 2 Sliammon river, near Powell river 2 Brit Toba inlet 2 stut Jervis inlet 10 Howe sound 3 the Fraser river 6 Deception pass, Puget sound 3 way Nooksack river, Washington 2 to t Insufficient data 5

46 These returns are very similar to those from the same area in 1928, in that there are again two main routes, one to the lower mainland and the other to incl Vancouver island. The mainland run is larger as it was in the previous year. A the striking difference is that this year the large number of 10, or 21.7 per cent, appeared in Jervis inlet, and 5, or 10.9 per cent, in American waters. OCE IX. Sockeye Salmon Statistics.—Drs. W. A. and L. S. Clemens continued phy their analyses of the data collected annually by the Provincial Fisheries Depart- tior ment on the sockeye salmon runs to the Fraser, Skeena and Naas rivers and to plai Rivers inlet. - TA X. Investigations by Voluntary TVorkers.—Eighteen voluntary investigators have been at the station during the year, carrying out studies, many of which haye direct economic bearings. The list of problems and investigators follows: use

SYMBIOSIS BETWEEN CERTAIN MARINE PLANTS AND ANIMALS.—MR. C. BERKELEY IDE In this study two interesting cases of close association between organisms have been brought to light. In the one case a green flagellate lives in the cells lining the alimentary tract of a polychaet worm, and in the other case a.wine- has coloured flagellate lives in the cells lining the digestive tract of a deep-water suc ctenophore. 63

SYSTEMATIC STUDY OF MARINE WORMS.—MRS. C. BERKELEY The work of this year brings to completion the systematic study of the marine worms occurring in the strait of Georgia. A detailed record of this group, which enters so largely into the general economy of the shoreward areas of the ocean, is now available.

STUDY OF PIPER'S LAGOON AS A POSSIBLE FISH-REARING POND.— MR. L. L. BOLTON 'Consideration has been given to the possibility of constructing a dam at the outlet of this body of water of some fifteen acres in extent in order to retain water in it at all times and thus create a rearing pond for salmon. The present study was undertaken for the purpose of determining the ranges in the water temper- atures during the summer months and the amount and character of food materials available for fish.

QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE DISTRIBUTION OF THE ZOOPLANKTON OF THE STRAIT OF GEORGIA; TAXONOMY AND LIFE-HISTORY OF COPEPODA.— MISS M. H. CAMPBELL it is generally recognised that certain areas in the Strait of Georgia are par- ticularly rich in food materials for fish. A study is being made of the character, amount and distribution of the zoo plankton and of the factors which influence this development. Particular attention has been given to the group Copepoda which is one of the most abundant and important constituents.

BOTTOM FAUNA OF FIORDS; RAZOR CLAMS OF GRAIIAM ISLAND.—DR. C. M. FRASER A study is being made of several of the fiords characteristic of the coast of British Columbia in relation to fish production. Dr. Fraser has undertaken the study in part at least of the animals living on the bottom in these inlets. A detailed report has already been made on the growth and reproduction of the razor clams of Graham island and the present study is a continuation in the way of examining collections sent in regularly by the Department of Fisheries to determine the variation in the spawning period over a series of years.

LIFE-HISTORIES OF CRABS—MISS J. F. L. IIART A study was commenced of the stages in the development of the local crabs, including the commercial species. The results of this study will make possible the identification of the various species at any stage of the life-history.

OCEANOGRAPHICAL STUDIES IN THE STRAIT OF GEORGIA.—DR. A. II. HUTCHINSON Special attention has been given to the occurrence and distribution of the phytoplankton which forms the basis of the food cycle in the waters. The rela- tion of the various physico-chemical factors to the production of the phyto- plankton has been studied.

TAXONOMY AND LIFE-HISTORIES OF THE FLOUNDERS OF THE STRAIT OF GEORGIA.— PROF. V. W. JACKSON. In this study a commencement was made in obtaining the necessary and useful information concerning this interesting- and important group of fish.

IDENTIFICATION OF DIATOMS AND THEIR IMPORTANCE IN THE FOOD OF COPEPODA AND SCIIIZOPODA.—PROF. C. W. LOWE Diatoms constitute the first link in the food chain in the waters and a study has been made of théir importance in the food of the larger animal planktonts such as Copepods and Schizopods which are so important as food for fish, espe- cially salmon.. LIFE-HISTORY OF THE DOGFISH.—MISS V. Z. LUCAS inve: The dogfish is known as a so-called "enemy" fish and as an important source Rup of oil and meal. Much-needed detailed information concerning the complete life- varie history will be provided through this investigation. and varie TAPEWORM PARASITES OF COTTID FISHES.—MISS E. M. LYONS This study formed part of a general study of the tapeworm parasites of our Prof. Wardle. inclu Pacific coast fishes carried out under the direction of TI.ei Prof RELATION OF SEA FOWL TO FISHES.—MR. J. A. MUNRO Bish • This 'investigation will supply detailed information concerning the extent Dr. to which sea fowl feeçl upon fish. Special attention has been given to the relation Torc of ducks and gulls to herring. Gub Mr. NITROGENOUS METABOLISM IN THE DOGFISH.—DR. E. W. OGDEN Van■ it is well known that the flesh of the dogfish has a relatively high urea Mr. content. The present investigation was undertaken to provide further infor- Scof mation concerning the nitrogen cycle in this fish. Urbi Seat PHYSIOLOGICAL AND PHARMACOLOGICAL STUDIES OF FISH GUT.—DR. M. J. OMEROD H. In this study the effects of various poisonous substances on the digestive tracts of fish were studied. Exp UNSAPONIFIABLE CONSTITUENTS OF THE LIVER OIL OF DOGFISH.— stati MR. E. G. V. PERCIVAL tend B. F This investigation was carried out in association with the Fisheries Experi- W. I Mental Station, Prince Rupert, and formed part of a larger investigation aiming to produce a commercial product from the liver oil of dogfish. was WATER MOLDS ATTACKING FISH EGGS.—MR. R. W. PILLSBURY • The A study of the molds attacking fish eggs was commenced with the object of fish discovering methods of control. werc Foe/ • NITROGEN METABOLISM IN RELATION TO CARDIO-TONUS IN DOGFISH.— R. 2' DR. W. W. SIMPSON • The This investigation, carried out in association with Dr. Ogden, was undertaken repr, to determine the relation of nitrogen in the body of the dogfish to heart action. Mot sent MARINE AND FRESHWATER INFUSORIA.—MR. G. H. WAILES .Assc Through this study information is made available concerning this group of small animals occurring commonly in the waters and forming part of the food supply of small fish. atte in A TAPEWORMS OF PACIFIC SALMON AND •TROUT.—PROF. R. A. WARDLE gres In this investigation identification of the parasites was madé and extent of of tl infection determined.

CREATINE AND CREATINE CONTENT OF FISH MUSCLE AND BODY FLUIDS.— Berk DR. F. D. WHITE Berk These two biochemical substances occurring in fish muscle were investigated in detail. Berk XI. Bolt■ Publicity.—A series of progress reports has been issued during the year Clerr These are being issued quarterly and côntain reports on the progress of various f • 65 investigations being carried out at the Fisheries Experimental Station, Prince Rupert, and the Pacific Biological Station, Nanaimo. Articles dealing with various phases of the work of the Station have appeared in certain newspapers and journals and lectures or addresses have been given from time to time by various members of the staff.

XII. Visitors.—A large number of persons has visited the Station museum, including the members of the Cowichan and Burrard Field Naturalists Clubs. eée have also been many scientific and official visitors to the Station, including: Professor J. H. Ashworth, Edinburgh; Mr. J. P. Babcock, Victoria; Dr. L. Bishop, California; Dr. R. H. Bonnor, Seattle; Dr. H. Brown, London, England; Dr. A. T. Cameron, Winnipeg; Mr. J. J. Cowie, Ottawa; Dr. J. G. Fitzgerald, Toronto; Mr. Miller Freeman, Seattle; Dr. H. H. Gran, Oslo, Nonvay; Dr. J. E. Guberlet, Seattle; Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Toronto; Dr. Frank Lillie, Chicago; Mr. D. MacKay, Ottawa; Dr. Max Mason, New York; Major J. A. Motherwell, Vancouver; Dr. D. Rawson, Saskatoon; Honourable E. N. Rhodes, Ottawa; Mr. E. Ricketts, Pacific Grove; Dr. L. G. Saunders, Saskatoon; Mr. \V. L. Scofield, San Pedro; Dr. W. A. Setchell, San Francisco; Dr. V. E. Shelford, Urbana, Ill.; Mr. R. P. Sherwood, Lowestoft, England; President L. M. Spencer, Seattle; Dr. W. P. Thompson, Saskatoon; Dr. W. F. Thompson, Seattle; Dr. H. B. Ward, Urbana, Ill.; Mr. A. J. Whitmore, Ottawa.

XIII. Conference.—The annual conference of the staffs of the Fisheries Experimental Station and the Pacific Biological Station was held at the latter station during the last week in August. Twenty-five investigators were in at- tendance and twenty papers were presented. Drs. C. M. Fraser, R. H. Clark, B. H. Eagles and D. C. B. Duff of the University of Britis.h Columbia, and Dr. \V. F. Thompson of the International Fisheries Commission attended the meetings XIV. Course for Hatchery officers.—From July 7 to 19, a course of instruction was given to the assistants to the superintendents of hatcheries in the province. The course consisted of elementary physics and chemistry, general biology and fish culture and was given at the University of British Columbia. Fifteen men were in attendance and the instructors were Dr. W. A. Clemens, Dr. R. E. Foerster and Mr. L. F. Smith. At a dinner at the close of the course, Professor R. A. Wardle gave a special address on the relation of research to fish culture. The following gentlemen were present also and spoke briefly: Dr. Hutchinson, representing the Biological Board and the University of British Columbia; Major Motherwell, representing the Department of Fisheries; Mr. Bell-Irving, repre- senting the fishing industry; Mr. .Maiden, representing the B.C. Fishermen's Association, and Mr. Sankey, representing the Anglers' Associations. XV. Pacific Salmon Federation.—Drs. Clemens, Foerster and Pritchard attended the annual meeting of the International Pacific Salmon Federation held in April at Stanford University, California. Papers were presented on the pro- gress of the various salmon investigations being carried out under- the auspices of the Biological Board. XVI. Publications durini the Year. Berkeley, A. A.—The post-embryonic development of the common pandalids of British Columbia. "Contributions." Berkeley, C.—Symbiosis of Beroe and a Flagellate. "Contributions." Berkeley, E.—Polychaetous annelids from the Nanaimo district, part 5. Ammocharidae to Myzostomidae, etc. Contributions." Bolton, L. L.—Sockeye tagging on the Fraser river in 1928. Bull. No. XVI, Biol. Board. Clemens, W. A.—Pacific Salmon Migration: The tagging of the Coho salmon on the east coast of Vancouver island in 1927 and 1928. Bull. No. XV, Biol. Board. • 66 Clemens, W. A. and Clemens, L. S.—Contributions to the life-history of the sockeye salmon L (Paper No. 15).. . Rept. B.C. Comm. Fish. Cornwall, I. E.—A barnacle (ScopeIlum columbionum) from Departure bay, B.C. "Contribu. tions." Fraser, C. M.—The Razor Clam, Siliqua pointa (Dixon) of Graham island, Queen Charlotte w group. Trans. Royal Soc. Canada. Hart, J. F. L.—Some Decapods from the south-eastern shores of Vancouver island. Can. Field. Y' Nat., vol. XLIV, no. 5. cl Hart, J. F. L.—Some Cumacea of the Vancouver island region. "Contributions." a Hutchinson, A. H., Lucas, C. C. and MacPhail, M.—An oceanographic survey of the Stra:t of Georgia. Contrib. Marine Biol.; Stanford Univ. B Pritchard, A. L.—The Pink salmon of British Columbia. Can. Fish., vol. XVII, no. 3. Pritchard, A. L.—A note on the occurrence of Ray's Bream (Brama raii Bloch) on the west coast of the Queen Charlotte islands, B.C. Copeia, no. 3. Pritchard, A. L.—Pacific Salmon Migration: The tagging of the pink salmon and the chue di salmon in British Columbia in 1928. Bull. No. XIV, Biol. Board. Wailes, G. 11.—Ampliipoda from British Columbia. Museum Notes. 7l Williamson, H. C.—Notes on the occurrence of Various Animals on the Fishing Grounds on the Coast of British Columbia. Can. Field-Nat. vol. XLIV, no. 7. Williamson, H. C.—Notes on the Food of Spring Salmon.' Can. Field-Nat., vol. XLIV, no. 9.

SUMMARY REPORT Ii OF di FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (PACIFIC) ai PRINCE RUPERT, B.C. tl- 1930 us The following constituted the staff of the Station during the year 1930: Director, D. B. Finn (resigned August 29, 1930). Associate Biochemist, Dr. T. Ingvaldsen (deceased). Associate Chemist—H. N. Brocklesby. Assistant Chemist—O. F. Denstedt. , Assistant Chemist—L. F. Smith. Associate.Bacteriologist—R. H. Bedford. Mechanical Engineer, 0. C. Young.

SEASOXAL Scientific Assistant, P. T. Black. Scientific Assistant, R. S. Tipson. Scientific Assistant, C. H. Vollum. Buildings Building No. 1 on the Government Wharf - has undergone practically no alterations during the past year.. The exterior of the new building has been completed and duly taken over from the contractors. The basement in this building has been completed and refrigeration machinery installed. The first and second storey and attic ha‘e been left unfinished. It is proposed to finish the second storey in the next fiscal year. Equipment - The Station now possesses well-equipped chemical, biochemical and bacter- iological laboratories. The nutritional laboratory requires redesigning and ai extending in view of intensive program in this field. ti The engineering laboratory is now equipped to carry on investigations involving temperatures as low as —40°F. The essential parts of this equipment fr consists of amrnonia compressors, brine storage tanks, cold storage rooms, and vs temperature controlling and recording devices. 67

Library The library has now about four hundred bound volumes on its shelves. The fields of chemistry, biochemistry, bacteriology, biology, and engineering are fairly well covered by these books. Between thirty and forty volumes are added per year to the shelves. All the more important journals covering chemistry, bio- chemistry, biology, bacteriology, and engineering are subscribed to. In addition a large number of fish and allied trade magazines are received by the Station. Boats The Station is at present without boats of any krnd. The launch "Sur- \ eyor," which was damaged by a severe storm during the winter of 1929, has been disposed of. Plans and specifications have been drawn up and tenders called for a new 75-foot schooner type halibut vessel for the Station. It is hoped that this boat will be ready for the opening of the 1931 fishing season when further commercial experiments will be carried on concerning the control of the discolouration of halibut. Investigations The investigations of this Station are at present carried on under two main divisions, preservative and by-products. "Preservation" includes all investigations having to do with the processing and marketing of fish and other marine products. Under the heading "By-products" are grouped those studies which deal with the utilization of waste material or marine products which may or may not be used primarily for human consumption. Preservation The investigations in this field can be listed as follows: Bacteriological: (1) Discoloration of halibut. (2) Marine bacteria and their relation to decomposition of fish. (3) Preservation of fresh salmon. (4) The packing of shrimps. Refrigeration: (1) An examination of the chemical and physical changes which occur in fish during cold storage. (2) A continuation of the chemical study of "Rusting". (Preliminary inves- tigation reported in Biological Board MSS. by H. N. Brocklesby, 1929). (3) The effect of cold storage on the bacterial decomposition of fish. (4) The desiccating effect in the jacketed type of cold storage room. (5) The relationship between the area of cooling coils and the temperature of the cooling medium.

TIIE CONTROL ,OF DISCOLORATION. OF IIALIBUT

Date commenced: — Summer, 1928. Investigator: Anticipated completion: End of 1931. Robt. H. Bedford. The halibut caught on the Pacific ocean along the coast of British Columbia and Alaska frequently become yellow on the white ventral surface between the time they are landed on the fishing vessel and their disposal to the consumer. This discoloration is> caused by a certain çhromogenic bacterium, living in the fresh water from which the ice is made, and utilized in preserving fish on the vessel. The problem was to eliminate this bacterium. 68

This was attempted by sterilizing the ice and fishing vessel. This Method proved unsuccessful because the organism gained access to the fish through un- tho controllable channels. This experiment, however, indicated that solution of of r the problem could only be attained by treating the halibut directly. This meant stor that the fish must be partially sterilized immediately they are caught. Partial sterilization of the fish was accomplished by using a solution of sodium soul chloride. It was found that when halibut were immersed in a 20 per cent solution app for 30 minutes, the majority of bacteria were killed and sufficient salt was held by the skin and surface to Inhibit the activity of the remaining bacteria, par- ticularly those in the ice and hold of the vessel. The practical application of this method proved successful in controlling discoloration and incidentally an efficient means of preserving fresh fish. The investigation is being continued to ascertain whether the concentration and time of immersion may be reduced and also the effect of lowering the tem- perature of the sodium chloride solution. fact

MARINE BACTERIA AND THEIR RELATION TO DECOMPOSITION OF FISH sho, Date commenced: December, 1929. Investigator: and Anticipated completion: • 1931. Robt. H. Bedford ster The part played by strictly marine bacteria in the decomposition of fish is is p not known. This information is desired as a foundation upon which to elaborate glas any bacteriological investigation regarding the decomposition of fresh fish, and beti the changes that take place in fish in cold storage. The problem involves a complete classification of the morphological, cultural, and biochemical characteristics of individual bacteria. A new form of water bottle was devised for the purpose of taking samples. Samples of sea water have been taken aspectically at different depths down to 200 fathoms. These samples were obtained at a sufficient distance away from shore so that there was no chance of contamination by soil, sewage or fresh-water t g forms. Thsa About 90 organisms have been isolated and are now being studied. awa At the present time the investigation is not sufficiently advanced to permit any conclusion being drawn but a preliminary report will be available next spring. corr star PRESERVATION OF FRESH SALT+ION brin Date commenced: 1931. Investigator: per Anticipated completion: 1932. D. C. B. Duff an The manner in which fresh caught salmon are handled from the time of catching to delivery at the cannery is one of the most important factors in their preservation. This has a marked influence on quality and is a determinative pre factor in grading. arra The problems to be investigated are: tem (1) The evisceration of salmon immediately they are caught,.or left in the the "round". a t1 (2) (i) Effect of icing, (ii) Effect of partial sterilization. spec the (3) Effect of stowage of salmon at different depths on cannery floor prior to grading. spe( (4) Disinfection of canneries. A few questions to be answered by the experiments are as follows: (1) and (2). When salmon are shipped in the "round", is decomposition taking place from the inside outwards, or if gutted, is spoilage more rapid because of the greater exposed surface to bacterial attack? Is autolysis in the alimentarY canal a factor in decomposition? What preservative effect has icing, and partial jacl sterilization by chemical means? 69

(3) The canneries suffer considerable losses from the more rapid spoilage of those salmon at the bottom of piles on the floors. What is the maximum height of piling desirable commensurate with loss, handling, and space required for storage? (4) There are certain strategic points in a cannery which might be possible sources of contamination: Storage pens, "iron chink", washing tanks. This applies particularly during heavy runs. , These experiments are designed to indicate probable causes of spoilage.

TIIE PACKING OF CANNED SIIRIMéS Date commenced: August, 1930. Investigator: Anticipated completion: 1931. R. H. Bedford. Considerable losses have been incurred by local packers owing to the putre- faction and blackening of shrimps. Some preliminary work has indicated that sterilization was incomplete. This information has enabled the plant to continue packing shrimps for short periods of storage. The company has not yet installed a pressure sterilizer, and consequently the time of cooking cannot be extended to ensure definite sterilization owing to the disintegration of the packed meat. The investigation is proceeding to establish the best conditions for processing shrimps packed in glass jars, i.e.: Temperature and time of preheating, and the interrelationship between pressure, temperature and time, for final sterilization. The problem of the blackening of shrimps will be attacked later.

TIIE REFRIGERATION PLANT Investigator: C. C. Young. In May, 1930, the building operations on the new station had reached the stage where the cold temperature equipment could be installed in the basement. The plans and specifications had been prepared previously and the contract awarded to the Linde Canadian Refrigeration Company. The plant installed is of the brine circulating type, employing two ammonia compressors with a combined capacity of about 73x2 tons of refrigeration at standard rating. Because of the low temperatures required, calcium chloride brine is used. Thus brine is contained in two tanks in order that different tem- peratures may be obtained, by mixing. There are two cold storage rooms and an anteroom; these as well as the brine tanks are insulated with eight inches of corkboard. The entire equipment was deàigned to operate automatically. The com- pressors are controlled thermostatically by the brine temperatures, being so arranged that either compressor may be connected to either tank. The room temperatures are controlled by thermostats as well. These thermostats control the brine entering the cooling coils, admitting either warm or cold brine through a three-way valve, depending upon the position of the regulating mechanism. Tests have been made on the compressors, but in none of them could the specified capacities be obtained, The Linde company is at present reviewing the test data in order to determine whether the installed machines must be speeded up or replaCed by larger ones.

THE JACKETED COLD STORAGE ROOM To commence: December, 1930. Investigator: Anticipated completion: August, 1931 C. C. Young The object of this experiment is to detérmine the desiccating effect in the jack-eted type of cold-storage room. This type of cold storage room is being developed in an attempt to overcome 70 desiccation vîhich proves so deleterious to stored fish. It is recognized that desiccation results from the presence of the cooling coils in the cold storage rooms Progr themselves or in bunkers, if the rooms are cooled by the circulation of cold air through them. Since heat is conducted from the outside inward, the cold air 1 circulating through the jacket surrounding the cold room will pick up this heat being transmitted through the insulation, before it reaches the room itself, hence no coils are necessary there. It is obvious that to prevent desiccation the air circulating through the jacket must not reach the interior of the room, because the t it comes in contact with cooling coils somewhere in its cycle and would serve as a if no moisture carrier just as in the ordinary cold storage room. Fish . This experiment is being done on a small scale. A room 4'x4'x6' high has 1 been constructed of flooring and entirely sheeted outside with tin to make it vapor proof. The do-or is gasketed to ensuie its being airtight. The room rests 2 on 2"x2" sleepers and has a two-inch air space surrounding it. Air is circulated Fish ■ through this space by a fan and is exhausted over cooling coils in a bunker above 1 the room. The exterior side of the air jacket is well insulated with corkboard. The room has a small antechamber to minimize temperature disturbances when 2 the door is opened. - 4

AN INVESTIGATION CONCERNING COOLING COILS To commence: January, 1931. Investigator: Anticipated completion: August, 1931. C. C. Young. Object.—To determine the relationship between the area of cooling coils and IC the temperature of the cooling medium and note the desiccating effect within the room. 11 Fish To cool a room to any temperature, almost any amount of cooling area could be used. For any fixed length of coil, however, there should be but one tem- Fer (il perature of cooling medium to give the required temperature in the room, once equilibrium has been established in it. Also for a fixed length of coil there will be a certain desiccating effect within the room, and it is quite likely this drying InveE effect will differ for different cooling areas. This experiment will be conducted on a small scale. A box has been con- structed 4'x4'x6' high, insulated with two inches of corkboard. To begin with, just one hank of ceiling coils will be used; and this will be added to from time to time. For each length of coil, the temperature of the brine will be obtained, after the same temperature conditions have been established in the chamber.. The desiccating effect for each case will be determined by suspending a weighed piece of ice in the room by means of a wire passing through the ceiling. In this way the loss in weight of the ice can be found from the outside without disturbing the conditions inside. During the year 1930, the following publications have been prepared by- the investigators in this field:— bioch DEPARTMENT OF BACTERIOLOGY

ORIGINAL ARTICLES "Sea Water Sampng Bottle", by R. H. Bedford, O. C. Young and D. B. Finn. Contributions to Canadain Biology and Fisheries. "The Bactericidal Effect of the 'Prince Rupert' Sea Water Bottle", by R. II. Bedford. Contributions to Canadian Biology and Fisheries. "The Control of Discolouration of Halibut", by R. H. Bedford. Contributions to Canadian Biology and Fisheries. and GENERAL ARTICLES as 1,1 men Progress Report No. 6—"Discolouration of Halibut", by Robert H. Bedford. defit Progress Report No. 7—"The Control of Discolouration of Halibut," by Robert H. Bedford. Pacific Fisherman, December, 1930, "Preservation of Fresh Fish." sent 71

ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT Progress Report No. 7: I—The Fisheries Experimental Station, Building No. 2. Il—The Refrigeration Installation. III—TwoProblems in Cold Temperature Research. BY-PRODUCTS This division is subdivided into investigations on fish meals, fish oils and the utilization of waste liquors as fish glues and fertilizer. The various researches, if not already published, aee discussed in the following pages under the titles:

Fish Meals: ' 1. The effect of the high temperature employed for drying, on the nitrogen partition in fi sh meals. By T. Ingvaldsen, Ph.D., Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, April, 1929. 2. Comparative analysis of meals made from non-putrid and putrid materials. By T. Ingvaldsen, Ph.D., Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, May, 1929. Fish Oils: 1. Some properties of commercial pilchard oil. By II. N. Brocklesby, Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, August, 1929. 2. The seasonal variation of commercial pilchard oil. 3. Composition of the mixed fatty acids of pilchard oil. 4. Polymerization and drying properties of component esters of pilchard oil and a comparison with those of other drying oils. 5. Pilchard oil as a protective coating. 6. Properties and composition of dogfish liver oil. (Complete, will be published shortly). 7. IIydroxylation of dogfish liver oil. S. Refining experiments on fish oils. 9. Hydrogenation of pilchard oil. 10. Unsaponifiable constituents of liver oil of dogfish. (Work done at Nanaimo Station through courtesy of Doctor Clemens.) 11. Miscellaneous. Fish Glues from Waste Liquor: The dialysis of fish glue and its industrial application. Fertilizer from Waste Liquor.

THE NUTRITIVE VALUE OF MARINE PRODUCTS Investigations completed: Vitamin A content of dogfish liver oil. By Horace N. Brocklesby, Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, September, 1927. Vitamin D content of dogfish liver oil. By Horace N. Brocklesby, Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, March, 1929. Vitamin D content of commercial pilchard oil. By H. N. Brocklesby, Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, January, 1930. Assisted by O. F. Denstedt. Vitamin A content of pilchard oil. By D. B. Finn (in press). Other investigations are being conducted as follows: 1. The effect of the oil content of pilchard meal upon its digestibility and its biological value. 2. The influence of fish meals on growth. 3. The vitam A content of pilchard meal (preliminary report in press). 4. The effect of ingested.fish oils on the nature of the body fat. 5. The effect of storage upon the nutritive value of fish meals. Note—Results obtained in investigations 1, 2, and 5 are to be left for interpretation by the biochemist who will succeed Dr. Ingvaldsen.

SEASONAL VARIATIONS OF COMMERCIAL PILCHARD OIL Time commenced: September, 1929. Investigators: Completed: October, 1919. II. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt. It has been variously reported in literature that the characteristics of oils and fats obtained from animals and fish vary according to various factors, such as the season of the year, sexual cycle, etc. It has also been reported by com- mercial firrns operating on the west coast of Vancouver island that there is a definite variation in the character of pilchard oil as the season advanced. A series of samples were therefore analysed to ascertain if this variation actually existed. It was impossible for the investigators to obtain these samples person- PI ally so the collections were made by a responsible person in charge of one of the largest reduction plants of the B.C. Packers. Samples were taken every two weeks and represented as far as possible the average of all the oil put through the plant within the 14-day period. The data recorded are as follows: Yield: This increased from 32 gallons per ton on July 2nd, 1929, to 50 October 7th, 1929. gallons per ton on ques Colour: Colour varied from light reddish brown to deep greenish brown and with no gradual variation noted. tecti Stearin per cent: This was undoubtedly higher at the very start of the obje season, being around 31 per cent, but after that it varied so much that no con- vary clusions could be drawn. oils, Refractive index: Varied in an irregular manner. of tl- Iodine value: The iodine value gradually rose from 172 to 182, showing a trea gradual increase to unsaturation as the season advanced. with then Saponification value: Varied irregularly. Corn Specific gravities: Steadily rose from 0.9140 (at 40°C.) to 0.9152 (at 40°C.) dryi It is recognized that it is unwise to rely upon samples submitted by commer- cial firms, but in the present instance there was no other alternative. The ethy results of this investigation will be reported in a MSS. in the near future. men A series of analyses will be made this winter upon samples which represent An each shipment made from Vancouver from the time the industry started in 1925 tech until November, 1930. It is hoped by this means to be able to ascertain in what in a respects the oil varies and within what limits. obta bein COMPOSITION OF THE MIXED FATTY ACIDS OF PILCHARD OIL clup Time commenced: July, 1929. Investigator: Anticipated completion: End of Dec., 1930. II. N. Brocklesby be n well- Researches into the commercial uses of pilchard oil have been hampered by the lack of exact information concerning the composition of this oil. The separ- of tl- ation of the mixed fatty acids of pilchard oil has therefore been undertaken. pild Two preliminary qualitative separations have been completed. These were coat undertaken in order to test out methods and to get a rough idea of amounts and a la] nature of the fatty acids present. A final quantitative separation is now being inve made. Briefly, the method of separation is to roughly separate the saturated fatty acids from the unsaturated fatty acids by the insolubility of the lead salts of the former in 95% alcohol. The unsaturated fatty acids obtained therefrom are further divided into a highly unsaturated fraction and a less highly unsaturated fraction by reason of the solubility of the lithium salts of the highly unsaturated fatty acids in 95% acetone. These three primary fractions are then methylated and the methyl esters subjected to fractional distillation in a vacuum of between \\le one and two millimeters. Each primary fraction yields about four fractions on toug the first distillation. These four fractions are then redistilled under a very high proo vacuum (approximately 5 microns), until every alternate fraction obtained is whic relatively pure from the standpoint of the carbon content of the acids. resu The results indicate that pilchard oil contains fatty acids ranging in carbon is se contents from C16 to C22 and that the unsaturation may vary from the mono esta] ethylenic to the penta ethylenic type. 'The distribution of the unsaturation the amongst the various series of fatty acids has not yet been completed. infoi The unsaponifiable matter from pilchard oil is a reddish brown wax-lik-e sub- ourii stance with a peculiarly pleasant odour. Though not enough of this subgtance usefi has been obtained for a complete examination', a few of its physical and chemical constants will be reported on. prop 73

PROPERTIES OF HIGHLY UNSATURATED FATTY ACIDS FROM FISH OIL WITH PARTICULAR REFERENCE TO THEIR POLYMERIZATION OF UNSATURATED FATTY ACIDS FROM OTHER SOURCES Time commenced: September, 1929. Investigator: Anticipated completion: September, 1931. H. N. Brocklesby. \t'hile studying the utilization of fish oils for protective coatings, many questions of a fundamental character arose which made it difficult to proceed w about investigating certain phenomena more thoroughly. To illustrate, pro- tective coatings such as paint, varnish, etc., made from -fish oil, have a very objectionable feature in that they are soft and inclined to become sticky with varying changes of weather. Since this defect is not shown in vegetable drying oils, it is necessary to ascertain whether this phenomenon was a peculiar property of the highly unsaturated fatty acids present in pilchard oil. Furthermore, heat treatments and treatments with catalytic driers did not give the same results with fish oils as they did when applied to vegetable drying oils. It was necessary, therefore, that a comparison should be made of the behaviour of the drying components of pilchard oil with the corresponding components from vegetable drying oils. A series of experiments on polymerization of mono, di, tri, tetra and penta- ethylenic fatty acids and their methyl glycol and glycerol esters has been com- menced. These acids represent the drying components of vegetable and fish oils. mono-ethylenic fatty acid, oleic acid, has been prepared from the impure A technical product on the market. A di-ethylenic (linolic) acid has been prepared in a pure state from poppy seed oil whilst a tri-ethylenic (linolenic) acid has been obtained from linseed oil. The tetra and penta ethylenic fatty acids are both being isolated from pilchard oil. Preliminary experiments on the polymerization of the methyl esters of clupanadonic acid obtained from pilchard oil has shown that this substance can be made to set to a hard resin-like mass and that the polymerization proceeds in well-defined steps which are entirely governed by the temperature employed. It is hoped that by studying the polymerization of glycol and glycerol esters of these five series of acids, sufficient data will be obtained to enable one to treat pilchard oil in such a manner that it will•be a valuable material for protective coatings. Since other investigations on the utilization of fish oils depend to such a large extent upon the properties of the constituent unsaturated acids, this investigation will also embrace some properties other than polymerization.

THE INDUSTRIAL USES OF PILCHARD OIL—PROGRAM OF DRYING RESEARCH Time commenced: November, 1929. Investigators: - Anticipated completion: September, 1930. II. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt. Pilchard oil, like other fish oils of its class, is notable for its drying properties: When exposed to air in a thin film, it dries as quickly as linseed oil to form a tough elastic "skin". The value of the oil for the manufacture of paints, water- proofing and other materials is as yet known to only the few industrial concerns which have taken the trouble to" investigate the product for themselves. The results of such investigations are, of course, not disclosed. Available information is seriously needed to provide a sound basis for the marketing of the oil, and to establish its importance as an industrial raw material. This has made imperative the investigation outlined below. The research aims not only at providing information regarding the drying properties of pilchard oil, but also at endeav- ouring to overcome certain defects common to drying fish oils which curtail their usefulness to the protective-coating industries. A preliminary investigation made at this station in 1928 on the general properties of pilchard and salmon oils has afforded much valuable information 74 as a starting point for the present program of research. Paints were made , using various combinations of these oils with linseed oils and two sets of panels were the exposed outdoors for over a y-ear, one set at Prince Rupert, B.C. and the other at conj Saksatoon, Sask. use brie (a) Refining of pilchard oil for use in pain! Pilchard oil, like other fish oils, contains a considerable proportion of non- drying constituents which at ordinary temperatures solidify and settle out in the form of a pale yellow grease commonly known as "stearine". These components if left in the oil not only retard its drying, but produce tacky, greasy and dull films. To determine the best method of removing the stearine, a number of refrigerating experiments were carried out at different temperatures and the solid matter separated by various methods. Refining experiments were also con- ducted for the purpose of removing colouring matter and other suspended sub- stances from the oil. These experiments are to be continued further in con- nection with the hydrogenation program to be commenced in the near future. of d - ciall (b) Bodying and blowing experiments din For certain purposes in the manufacture of paints and \Tarnishes, oils of pre: relatively high viscosity are required. Linseed and other oils are therefore of "bodied" or rendered more viscous by heating them in contact or out of contact with air. The same bodying is also produced by blowing air through the oil at fairly high temperatures. A number of bodying and blowing experiments were carried out with pilchard oil, varying the temperature and time of treatment. The changes in drying properties of the oil and characteristics of the resulting films, due to the various treatments, were noted by determining rates of oxygen absorption, drying times of films, and increase in viscosity as well as by studying in the surface characteristics of the films themselves. wer and (c) The effect of catalysts on the drying pro perties and film qualities rati • This part of the work is now in progress and consists in studying the influence mal of several metallic catalysts or "driers" on the drying and film properties of the fror oil, with the object of determining the combifiation and quantities of driers most effective in accelerating the rate of drying and producing the best films. - The elec work has been limited chiefly to the study of the effect of five common catalysts wer on oils subjected to various treatments. The study also takes into consideration the influence of different pigments on the action of the driers used. a o (d) Film studies ate The preceding two sections of the work involve a study of films frotn the ox) standpoint of surface characteristics such as tackiness, toughness and gloss. Having determined the most promising samples by surface tests, film "skins" •the are to be prepared and tested for tensile strength, elasticity, moisture penetration har and other qualities. fac (e) Natural and accelerated weathering tests fac The final section of the drying-research program deals with the testing of painted panels for weathering qualities by artificial and natural means. Pre- cor liminary tests are to be made by subjecting panels to relatively severe condi- tions of temperature, moisture, illumination and abrasion by artificial means in to an accelerated weathering device now being designed. Another set of panels no made from the more promising samples as indicated by artificial tests will be exposed to actual weather conditions outdoors for a period of several months. PR Finally, representative samples of paint will be made up by one of the large paint companies which has kindly offered its cooperation. The samples will then be distributed for use locally. In this way they may be subjected to a variety of conditions of application and exposure which cannot be anticipated, or achieved in the laboratory. 75

Although pilchard oil and other drying fish oils are used very extensively in the manufacture of heat-resistant paints and also to a considerable extent in conjunction with linseed oil, in the manufacture of general-purpose paints, their use in the latter connection is limited owing to certain characteristic defects briefly described as follows: 1. The paint surfaces when dry, "bloom" or turn whitish colour on exposure, thus masking the true colour of the pigment. 2. Dry fish oil films possess a tackiness which is intensified in moist atmos- pheres. 3. Fish oil films lose their gloss more quickly than linseed oil on exposure and when used in conjunction with the latter, often give a patchy appearance due to variations in the glossiness of the surface. 4. The volatile products evolved in the drying of fish oils are somewhat more unpleasant than those from linseed oil. On the other hand the combination of linseed oil with a liberal proportion of drying fish oil has been found to increase the durability of the product, espe- cially in damp briny climates where paints deteriorate quite rapidly. The elimination of the above-mentioned defects is one of the main objectives in the present program of research and experiments not referred to in the above outline of work are being carried on steadily in this connection.

DOGFISII LIVER OIL Investigator: H. N. Brocklesby. Although the properties of dogfish liver oil were investigated by the Station in 1926, no report has been issued owing to the fact that certain analytical data were in need of confirmation. This extra work has now almost been completed and a report will be prepared in the near future. It was found that the average ratio of the weight of the liver to the total body weight of the dogfish was, for mature individuals, from 10 to 15 per cent. The yield of oil recovered varied from 50 to 60 per cent of the weight of the liver. The oil was extracted in four ways, namely—cold extraction with solvents, electrolysis, cold pressing and by steaming. The second and the last methods were found to be most satisfactory. The colour of the oil corresponded to about 6-5 yellow Lovibond units, using a one-inch cell. Dogfish oil has an iodine value of 145 and is therefore not highly unsatur- ated. The oil, when exposed in thin films, absorbs 6-7 per cent of its weight of oxygen but does not set to a solid film. On hydrogenation, using a reduced nickel oxide catalyst, the fish odour of • the oil was first removed and after about eight hours' treatment the oil would harden when cooled to ordinary temperatures. The unsaponifiable ;natter varies in dogfish liver oil from 3-10 per cent. This fact makes it di fficult to dispose of the hydrogenated product to soap manu- facturers. On treating with sulphuric acid, a sulphonated product was obtained which compared favourably with Turkey red oil in emulsifying properties. The mixed fatty acids were partially separated. Palmitic acid was found to be the chief component of the saturated acids. The unsaturated fractions are now being re-investigated.

PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION INTO TIIE HYDROXYLATION OF DOGFISH LIVER OIL Time commenced: July, 1930. Investigators: Completed: August, 193Q. H. N. Brocklesby and R. S. Tipson. Several attempts to utilize the liver oil of dogfish have been only partially 76 successful. The oil has a number of characteristics which make it difficult for these any one industry to utilize it in large quantities. purpc Owing to the large and varying amount of unsaponifiable matter in this oil, its use, after hydrogenation, as soap stock has not been favourably received. Its A PRE drYing properties are such as to render it impossible for use as a paint vehicle. While potent in vitamin A, vitamin D is present only in very minute amounts and it has been shown that this vitamin D potency varies considerably. Sulfonated dogfish oil, whilst having valuable emulsifying properties, has not the physical appearance of the well-known emulsifying oil, turkey red oil. It was thought that a valuable lubricating oil might be made from this liver oil to view oil which is now used in various high-speed engines. appe take the place of castor ■ Castor oil is almost entirely the tri-glyceride of rincinoleic acid, which is in turn matt a mono hydroxyl fatty acid. It was thought that if part or all of the unsatur- ated bonds in the fatty acids of dogfish liver oil could be saturated with one imm( hydrogen and one hydroxyl group respectively, the resulting product should have one some properties similar to those of castor oil. Samples of hydroxylated dogfish yello' oil have been prepared by saturating:the oil with dry hydrogen bromide gas, thus adding on H.Br. to the unsaturated bond. A definite brominated product could Chen be obtained, containing some 26 per cent bromine. The removal of this bromine The by silver hydroxide was then attempted. The amount of bromine, however, f olloi could only be reduced to 20 per cent and this amount could not be removed on dichl treatment with various substances such as calcium oxide, silver oxide, lead ified oxide, etc. The rate of additions of hydrogen bromide to the oil and the gradual 500 ( •change in properties of the oil in such treatment have been recorded. some The hydroxylation of the oil was then attempted in another manner. The oil was heated at 1900 with a mixture of two parts hydrogen and one of oxygen in by F the presence of a nickel oxide catalyst. After eight hours the hydroxyl content and of the oil had increased 100 per cent and the viscosity had risen considerably mina It is believed if these methods were utilized with the addition of high pressure that the oil could be hydroxylated on a commercial scale. Experiments have treat not yet been completed but sufficient data have been obtained to warrant a yield preliminary publication which will shortly appear. and • HYDROGENATION OF PILCHARD OIL Investigator: whic II. N. Brocklesby. latio how( During a preliminary investigation into the properties and possible com- selac mercial uses of pilchard oil, this substance was subjected to the well-known hydrogenation process. Briefly, this consists in treating the heated oil with hydrogen court in the presence of a catalyst. the w Samples taken from time to time, as the hydrogenation proceeded, showed all ex that after the first half-hour the oil was decolorized and at the end of an hour practically all the fishy odour had been removed. As hydrogenation proceeded further, an increasing amount of àolid constituents was produced until after the eighth hour, the product was a white, hard solid fat. The melting point of this substance was in the neighbourhood of 65°C. This final product, when saponified, gave a white sodium soap which had excellent keeping qualities. The hardened fat was odourless and quite tasteless. These results indicated that by partial hydrogenation, a domestic salad oil fish might be produced, whilst by total hydrogenation, an excellent shortening could quai be obtained. appl Several important features in the hydrogenation process have to be studied: the the temperature and pressure are factors which affect the formation of solid "iso- acids." The preparation and life of various catalysts used for the hydrogenation twei of pilchard oil must be investigated. Preliminary refining treatments to remove diali catalytic poisons will also have to be investigated. An extensive program along glu 77 these lines has been outlined and, as an investigator has been engaged for this purpose, the work will be commenced in January, 1931.

A PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION OF THE UNSAPONIFIABLE CONSTITUENTS CONTAINED IN THE LIVER OIL OF THE PACIFIC COAST DOG-FISH (SQUALUS SUCKLII) Commenced: July, 1930. Investigator: Finished: September, 1930. E. V. G. Percival. Having regard to the interesting theoretical speculations involved and, in view of the possible industrial applications of Pacific Coast dogfish liver oil, it appeared to be of interest to determine the constitution of the unsaponifiable matter that it contains. The livers were obtained from freshly killed dogfish, and the gall bladders immediately removed. The livers were cut into small pieces and steamed for one hour. Filtration through glass wool and absorbent cotton gave a clear yellow oil. Yield about 50 per cent of the total weight of the livers. The unsaponifiable content was estimated by methods of the American Chemical Society (average 5%) and by that of Kerr and Sorber (average 5.6%). The preparation of larger amounts of unsaponifiable matter was carried out as follows: The cold saponification method of Marcus was employed, using ethylene dichloride as a solvent. The unsaponifiable matter recovered was again sapon- ified and re-extracted until no further amount of saponifiable matter was left; 500 cc. of oil yielded 15 gms. of a brownish viscous oil having a pleasant smell somewhat reminiscent of the lemon terpenes. It has /111 —1.5259. • Cholesterol was determined by the digitonin method of Windaus, modified by Fraser and Garner. The product was identified through its melting point and the melting points of its benzoate and acetate. The mean of three deter- minations gave 5.1 per cent of cholesterol in the unsaponifiable matter. Other oxygenated products (batyl, selachyl alcohols) were removed by treatment with phthalic anhydride as suggested by Heilbron and Owens. A yield of 10 per cent of the unsaponifiable constituents was obtained. The method for the isolation of these higher alcohols was modified, however, and these modifications have been outlined. The greater part of the unsaponifiable matter appears to consist of squalene which, however, was not obtained pure, because facilities for high vacuum distil- lation were not available. A yellow hydrochloride M.P. 107° was obtained, however, which is fairly good evidence that the residue from the cholesterol and selachyl alcohol separation was mainly squalene. (This research was carried out at the Pacific Biological Station at Nanaimo, through the courtesy of Doctor W. A. Clemens, at the request of the Fisheries Experimental Station. Whilst the mod: forms an integral part of the fish oil research programme of the Experimental Station, all expenses in connection with the investigation were borne by the Biological Station at Nanaimo.)

PROGRESS IN FISII GLUE RESEARCII December, 1929, to December, 1930. Time commenced: .May, 1927. Investigator: Anticipated completion: February, 1931. L. F. Smith. In a previous report it was shown that both dialysis and electro-dialysis of fish glue liquors remove the inorganic impurities and improve materially the quality of the finished glue. Ordinary dialysis does not lend itself to industrial application. Electro-dialysis, however, which utilizes electrical energy to hasten the process has industrial possibilities. To investigate fully these possibilities an electro-dialysis apparatus of twenty gallons capacity was built. Four gallons of glue liquor were electro- dialyzed until the ash content had fallen to .05%, calculated on the basis of dry glue present. 78

This electro-dialyzed glue was found to have excellent drying and moisture- resistant properties whèn compared directly with the original glue and a popular commercial glue—Le Page's. It was found equal to these glues in strength by the jointed strength test. Through the courtesy of the Forest Products Labor- atory, Vancouver, which provided the facilities for testing the specimens, an opportunity was afforded for a thorough study of this test. It was found that the conditions under which the glue joints were made seriously affected their strength. Conditions of gluing which produced satisfactory joints with one glue did not suit another glue of different physical properties. The natural variation in the strength of the wood itself made it difficult to obtain uniform results throughout a series of similar test blocks. Over the range of conditions employed the electro-dialyzed glue displayed an average strength of over 2,000 pounds to the square inch when tested on hard maple. This value nearly equals the strength in shear of the wood itself. Work has recently been commenced on the dialysis and electro-dialysis of fish waste liquors at a reduction plant in the vicinity. The electro-dialysis will be carried out with the apparatus previously used. The ordinary dialysis is being effected by the use of a form of cellulose membrane which has recently appeared on the market and which offers unique advantages as a dialyzer. In both these projects the aim is to produce a glue capable of competing with the present commercial glues in both quality and price. The period of practical testing will bring to a close the investigation on fish glue. There is good reason to believe that the methods which have been de- veloped in the course of this investigation will be adopted by reduction plant operators and that fish glue recovered from waste liquors will become an addi- tional by-product of the fishing industry.

UTILIZATION OF WASTE LIQUOR AS FERTILIZER Time commenced: January, 1931. Investigator: Anticipated completion: 1932. R. H. Bedford. In the process of extracting oil from fish there is wasted the soluble nitro- genous material when the expressed liquor is dumped into the sea. This liquor is rich in nutrients suitable for bacterial growth. Bactean are the connecting link between the nitrogenous material in the soi l and its preparation for , plant growth. The problem is to establish whether this liquor can be utilized as a soil fer- tilizer or as an adjunct to straw in the production of artificial manure. A complete chemical analysis will be made of representative samples'. The production of nitrate nitrogen by soil bacteria in different Canadian soils will be measured. The utilization of this source of nitrogen will be made in the bacterial decom- position of straw. Certain products of decomposition will be measured and correlated with soil fertility and plant growth. The economics of the problem will be studied : Transportation and concen- tration of the liquor. It is thought that if this liquor can be used as a fertilizer there is a probable solution to the continual wastage of the straw produced on the farms of Western Canada.

TIIE EFFECT OF INGESTED FISII OIL ON THE NATURE OF TIIE BODY FAT Investigators: D. B. Finn and O. F. Denstedt. Certain investigators have .found that a considerable proportion of the highly unsaturated fatty acids of fish oils fed to animals is ingested and deposited 79 in the adipose tissue of the body practically unchanged. This fact may account in some measure for the fishy taste said to be imparted to pork and eggs by fish meals and oils used in feeding. At the conclusion of a number of experiments carried on about a year ago for the purpose of determining the biological values of various diets containing fish meals and oils, it was found of interest to examine the adipose fat of the white rats used in the experiments. Analyses were therefore carried out to deter- mine the characteristics of the fat and especially to ascertain the amount of fatty lcids present with more than two ethenoid linkages in the molecule. While pot of all the samples analysed, it was generally found 'that the percentage of true highly unsaturated glycerides varie-d directly with the amount of meal or oil used in the diet. The results, although generally confirming the finding of other workers, are not submitted as being conclusive since the diets used in the original experiments were not designed to establish these facts. Further experiments will be carried out at a later date for this purpose. During the year 1930, the following publications have been prepared by the investigators in this field :— PAPERS "Vitamin D Content of Commercial Pilchard Oil." By H. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt, Canadian Chemistry and Metallurgy, January, 1930. "Apparatus for Drying Oil Research." By II. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt. (In press).

PROGRESS REPORTS Report No. 4—"The Drying Properties of Pilchard Oil." By 0. F. Denstedt. Report No. 7—"Progress in Fish Glue Research." By L. F. Smith. ' Report No. 8—"The Properties and Industrial Uses of Fish Oils." (In preparation). By H. N. Brocklesby and 0. F. Denstedt

MISCELLANEOUS INVESTIGATIONS Naas River Pollution During the summers of 1929 and 1930, complaints were received by the Department of Fisheries and the Experimental Station that a peculiar silt formation was doing a great deal of damage to the nets in the Naas river. It appeared that this silt deposits on the nets to such an extent that they sink, and it was impossible to pull them up again without destroying them. Mr. Finn made a preliminary examination of the situation in the late fall of 1929 and, during the month of July and August, the Experimental Station sent two investi- gators to the Naas river to make further investigations. It is thought that the smelter, which turns a tremendous quantity of effluent into an arm which joins the Naas river near the location where the phenomenon occurred, might be the cause of the trouble. Samples of the effluent from the smelter, sludge from the river bottom, the deposit from the nets, and the samples from above the smelter, have been anal- ysed. Results at the present time do not permit drawing definite conclusions as to the cause. Present indications show, however, that the problem is one in colloidal chemistry and it has been recommended that a qualified man be ob- tained to carry on the investigation during the summer of 1931. The situation is a serious one as many companies have lost large sums of money through the loss of these nets.

- PUBLICATIONS

Determinations of vitamin A content in the liver oil of the dogfish (Sçualus sucklii). H. N. Brocklesby, Can. Chem and Met. XI, 23S; 1927. itarnin D content of-the liver oil of the dogfish (Squalls sucklii). H. N. Brocklesby, Can. Chem. and Met. XIII, 74, 1929. Fish Meals I. The effect, of the high temperatures ernploycd fcr dryirg upcn the nitrcun Far- . tition in fish meals. T. Ingvaldsen, Can. Chein. and -Met. XIII, 97, 1929. Fish Meals II. Comparative analysis of meals from non-putrid and putrid materials. T. Ingvaldsen, Can. Chem. and Met. XIII, 129, 1929. 80

Studies in Fish Oil. Some properties of commercial pilchard oil. H. N. Brocklesby, Can. Chem. and Met. XIII, 212, 1929. Discolouration of Halibut. F. C. Harrison, Can. Journal of Research I, 201, 1929. Discolouration of Halibut. F. C. Harrison and W. Sadler, Biological Board of Canada, Bulletin XII. The nutritive value of marine products, vitamin D content of commercial pilchard oil. H. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt. Can. Chem. and Met. XIV, 13, 1930. Sea water sampling bottle. R. H. Bedford, O. C. Young and D. B. Finn. Contributions to Canadian Biology and Fisheries. (In press.) The Bactericidal effect of the "Prince Rupert' sea water bottle. R. H. Bedford. Contributions to Canadian Biolog-y and Fisheries. (In press.) The control of discolouration of halibut. R. H. Bedford. Contributions to Canadian Biology and Fisheries. (In press.) Apparatus for drying oil research. N. H. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt. Contributions to Canadian Biology and Fisheries, Industrial Section. (In press.)

M.S.S. Reports'. The determination of the vitamin A content of the liver oil of the dogfish (Spahis - H. N. Brocklesby, 1927. The determination of the vitamin D content of the liver oil of the dogfish (Sçualus H. N. Brocklesby, 1928. An investigation of the circulation induced by high velocity jets in rectangular tanks of water. I. M. Fraser, 1928. • A chemical study of the oil in salmon during cold storage. H. N. Brocklesby, 1929. The bacterial spoilage of salmon with reference to the source of the organism responsible for putrefaction. D. C. B. Duff, 1929. Preliminary investigation into the hydroxylation of dogfish liver oil. H. N. Brocklesby and R. S. Tipson, 1930. The seasonal variation of commercial pilchard oil. H. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt 1930. Unsaponifiable constituents of dogfish oil. E. G. V. Percival. 1930. ANNUAL REPORT

ON THE WORK OF THE

Biological Board of Canada

FOR THE YEAR 1931

OPERATING UNDER THE CONTROL OF THE HON. THE MINISTER OF FISHERIES

OTTAWA 1932 eh

the Der con. rep] of

disc nier the . Con the A.] Con Pac by Mir

Ail( witl and the wor foul inte Elle REPORT OF TI1E WORK OF THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA FOR 1931

The Biological Board of Canada, which serves as the scientific division of the Department of Fisheries and is under the control of the Minister of that Department, was established by Act of Parliament in 1912. As at present constituted it consists of two representatives of the Department of Fisheries, two representing the fishing industry-, and fourteen scientists. selected, from the staffs of various Canadian universities. The present membership is as follows:— ' Professor J. P. McMurrich, Toronto, Chairman.

J. J. Cowie, Ottawa, Secretary - Treasurer. Professor R. S. Bean, Dalhousie University, Halifax. Professor A. T. Cameron, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg. Professor A. F. Chaisson, St. Francis Xavier University, Antigonish. Professor Philip Cox, University of New Brunswick, Fredericton. John: Dybhavn, Prince Rupert. Professor A. H. Hutchinson, University of British Columbia, Vancouver. Professor W. T. MacClement. Oueen's University, Kingston. Professor Marie-Victorin, University of Montreal, Montreal. Professor H. G. Perry-, Acadia University, Wolf ville. Professor E. E. Pritice, Ottawa. J. A. Rodd, Ottawa. Professor W. P. Thompson, University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon. President R. C. Wallace, University of Alberta, Edmonton. A. Handfield Whitman, Halifax. Professor A. Willey, McGill University, Montreal. Professor A. Vachon, Laval University, Quebec. This Board meets annually for a review of the work of the year, the discussion of future undertakings and the election of officers, its various enact- ments being subject to the approval of the Minister. In the interval between the meetings of the Board its business is carried on by a Central Executive • Committee consisting at present of the Chairman and Secretary-Treasurer of the Board ex officio, Professors Cameron, MacClement, Marie-Victorin and Mr. A. H. Whitman, and to facilitate the work of this Committee, two Sub-Executive Committees have been established, one for the Atlantic coast and one for the Pacific. Recommendations from the Sub-Executive Committees must be approved bv the Central Executive and its decisions are subject to the approval of the - To carry on its work- the Board has control of four Stations—two, at St. Andrews, N.B.. and . Nanaimo, B.C., for the investigation of problems connected with the culture, conservation, and capture of fish; and two, at Halifax, N.S. and Prince Rupert, B.C., for the investigation of problems in connection with the handling, preservation, and marketing of fish. With the extension of the work of the Board to special lines of investigation, two substations have been found necessarv,—one‘ at Cultus lake, B.C.; in connection with extensive and intensive studies on the life history of the Sockeye sahnon, and another at Ellerslie, P.E.I., for the study of the oysters of Richmond bay. Further a 4 biological laboratory situated on the Eastern passage into Halifax harbour and plans intended to supply opportunities for the training of men for the fisheries service the p 'has been placed under the control of the Board. have Application having been made for a permit to erect a dam across the mouth value of Passamaquoddy bay with the object of utilizing the tidal waters as a source comp of power, the question arose as to what effect such •a dam would have upon the valuable fisheries of the region. The governments of the United States of America and Canada appointed a Joint Commission to investigate the matter; the representatives of the United States beine Mr. 0'.Malley, U.S. Commissioner of Fisheries, and Mr. Sette of the U.S. Fishery Service ; those for Canada being Fisheries, and Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Dr. W. A. Found, Deputy Minister of inves• Biological Station. The services of experts were Director of the St. Andrews educa and accommodation was found for them at the St. engaged by the Commission inves1 work being Dr. C. J. Fish of the Buffalo Andrews Station, those engaged in the P.E.1 Museum -of Science, Mr. Michael Graham of the British Fisheries Service, Lowestof t, Dr-. H. H. Gran of the University of Oslo, and Dr. E. E. Watson of Queens University. A record of the work clone, under the auspices of the Board at its various Stations during the y-ear 1931 will be found in the reports of the Directors and the summary reports of the members of the staffs and voluntary workers which follow, but it seems desirable to emphasize some of the more important investigations that have been in progress. A noteworthy accomplishment of the year has been the completion of a sievey of the fisheries of the bay of Fundy, f rom which much important information has been obtained, and may be made the basis for future observations. The variation in the periodicity of the salmon in different areas may be mentioned as of special interest, introducing as it does f resh complexities into the already complex life-history of the Atlantic salmon. On the west coast important experiments were begun with both Sockeye and Pink salmon, looking to a testing of the parent stream theory and the possibility of materially improving the runs of poor years. In co-operation with the provincial government an intensive study- of the pilchard fishery has been begun. Oceanographic studies have been continued on both coasts to ascertain the. source and distribution of the silica and phosphate contents of the waters as Un ive influencing the growth and distribution of the plankton. On the west coast 1 work has begun on the oceanography of the fiords with a promise of important P. M results, and on the east coast the study of the physical conditions in Malpeque Mr. bay have revealed the air temperature as a most important factor influencing the J. W. development of oyster spat. • (We: The standardization of the lobster canneries lias been completed and as the G. V result of the experience gained a new programme of standardization has been M. E drawn up and forms prepared. Explanation of the fatal effect of "drip" on W. L lobsters has been obtained and attention has been given to their rate of growth Mr. and their migration. A successful spatting of oysters has been obtained in Savi4 Richmond bay and the growth of the youne oysters is being studied. On the west coast the rate of growth of plantings of Eastern and Japanese oysters bas been compared with that of the native form, the Japanese oyster seeming to sPEct show the greatest hardiness. An ecological study of the soft shelled clam bas been carried out with the view of determinine the optimum conditions for its saint( growth and reproduction and an investigation of bthe life-histOry of the commercial that 1 crab of the west coast has been made. migh Much attention has been given to the effects of refrigeration on.fish muscle, N.B., and to improvements in the methods of smoking fish, and these improved methbds the c are ,being tried out on a commercial scale in a plant installed at Lunenburg on of th plans worked out at the Halifax Station. Investigations of methods for improving the preparation of fish-meals and of the purification of fish-oils by hy-drogenation have been continued. A beginning of investigations to determine the nutritional value of fish as food has been made and a bibliography of the subject has been compiled.

ATLANTIC BIOLOGICAL STATION te ST. ANDREWS, N.B., 1931 The work particularly associated with this Station consists of the general investigations of the fisheries of the Atlantic coast, and investigations and educational work in connection with fish culture. A substation for oyster investigation, the Prince Edward Island Marine Station, is situated near Ellerslie, P.E.I. The following constituted the staff of the Station during 1931: Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Director. Dr. R. H. M'Gonigle, Assistant Director and Assistant -Pathologist. Mr. H. B. Hachey, Assistant Hydrographer. Dr. A. \V. H. Needler, Assistant Zoologist. Mr. A. A. Blair, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). Mr. R. A. McKenzie, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). Mr. M. W. Smith, Scientific .Assistant (Limnobiology). Mr. -W. Templeman, Scientific Assistant (Zoolog,y). Dr. V. D. Vladykov, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). Mr. H. C. White, Scientific Assistant (Zoolog,y). Mr. E. G. Rigby-, _Curator. SEASONAL Mr. J. M. Morton, Scientific Assistant (Technical Processes). Mr. C. L. Newcombe, Scientific Assistant (Zoology). - Mr. E. S. Pentland, Scientific Assistant (Limnobiolog,y). Mr. J. A. Stevenson, Museum Assistant. There were the following- volunteer investigators during the year with university associations as shown: Prof. B. P. Babkin (McGill), Dr. H. I. Battle (Western Ontario), Prof. P. M. Bayne (Acadia), Prof. H. P. Bell (Dalhousie), Dr. D. J. Bowie (McGill), Mr. J. Campbell (Toronto), Prof. A. F. Chaisson (St. Francis Xavier), Mr. J. W. B. Cox (Dalhousie), Miss V. M. Davidson (Toronto), Mr. M. H. Friedman (Western Ontario), Mrs. A. M. Jeffers (State Teachers College, Viro -inia), Dr. G. W. Jeffers (State . Teachers 'College), Dr. E. J. King (Toronto),b Mrs. H. M. King, Prof. A. B. Klugh . (Queens), Dr. S. A. Komarov (McGill), Mr. H. W. Lemon (Toronto), Miss I. McCracken (Western Ontario), Dr. A. B. Needler, Mr. J. V. V. Nicholls (McGill), Mr. R. V. V. .Nicholls (McGill), Dr. M. E. Sawyer (Harvard), Dr. W. R. Sawyer (McGill), and Miss H. Tait ( -McGill).

INVESTIGATIONS • SPECIAL FISIIERIES . 1. Salmon. Mr. Blair continued his study of the life history of the Atlantic salmon in certain rivers of New Brunswick and Nova Scotia. It was decided that work should be concentrated for a time on the Miramichi river system, which might serve for the elucidation of certain general problems. From Loggieville, N.B., as a base, operations were carried on throughout the season, these involving the collection of data and material from (1) the open gulf, (2) the tidal portion of the river, and (3) certain of the fresh-water branches. The regular fishing 6 provided the material, for the most part, as only for a limited period was it necessary to resort to special fishing. Miss McCracken investigated the life history of salmon obtained in 1930 for spawning purposes by the Fish Cultural branch from a mackerel trap at Port Maitland, N.S. It is desired to extend this work to include all the principal groups of salmon of the Fundy area, and for this purpose officers of the Department have assisted by collecting samples of scales and data f rom salmon of the Annapolis, Petitcodiac, and other rivers. The Fish Cultural branch has planted fry- f rom Matapedia salmon in the Maccan river at the head of the bay of Fundy, as an experimental measure at the request of the Atlantic Biological Station. Mr. White followed up this planting, and at the same time carried through a field study of the salmon in certain other rivers_ (Apple, Eatonville, and Advocate) in the same region in order to establish knowledge of the local fish, with which the introduced fish could.be compared. Dr. Huntsman analyzed the statistics of the commercial catches of salmon in the Maritime region for the last sixty years in an attempt to determine the possible factors causing fluctuations in the salmon in the various districts. 2. Lobster. Mr. Templeman, with the assistance of Mr. R. V. V. Nicholls, carried through the season's investigations principally in the Magdalen shallows, the warm southern half of the gulfof St. Lawrence, where the breeding- of the lobster is so uniformly successful. During the early part of the season (May and June), 32,000 lobsters taken by the fishermen in various districts of Nova Scotia and Prince Edward Island, were examined and measured in continuance of the work begun the previous y-ear in determining differences between the various local stocks. During July and the first half of August attention was conditions for the lobster as found in the Magdalen island waters, and given to in Malpeque bay, P.E.I. 4,400 individuals were examined and measured in the former locality, of which 2,400 were from fishermen's catches. The balance, as well as 1,500 in Malpeque bay, were secured by special fishing. Over 1,400 lobsters were tagged before liberation in the two localities. The conditions in House Harbour lagoon were compared with those in Pleasant bar, outside, and the former place was particularly studied from the standpoint of the importance of lagoons as sanctuaries for breeding lobsters. During the latter part of August and September operations were conducted in the western part of Northumberland strait, where there is a fall fishing season, the chief places visited being Point du Chene, Summerside, and Cape Tormentine. About 800 lobsters were tagged, and 12,000 were examined and measured. During the present year special attention was given to measurements of berried lobsters in order to ascertain the minimum size at spawning on various parts of the coast. 3. Oyster. The oyster investigations are largely confined to the region of Malpeque bay, on the west side of which on the Bideford river is situated the Prince Edward Island Marine Station, in charge of Dr. A. W. H. Needier. The latter was assisted by Dr. A. B. Needier and Mr. J. \V. B. Cox, volunteer invèstigators. In addition to the scientific investigations Dr. A. W. H. Needier has had charge of various cultural operations for the Department of Fisheries. The oyster being in our waters at the northern limit of its range, the matter of suitably high temperature for reproduction is of particular -importance. Consideration was given to this as well as to other conditions needed for successful spawning and spat-fall, so important for the oyster farmer to know as a basis for settino- out his spat collectors at the proper time. The use of brush as such collectors isbeingb tried, and the conditions under which it is most effective determined. The growth of the spat after setting lias been studied • as of importance in determining survival through the first winter. ; also material for 7

following the later growth of the oyster for different localities and seasons was obtained. Cultural operations have consisted in (1) an attempt to grow as many oysters as possible on experimental beds in the Bideford river as a basis for r ' commercial operations, (2) experiments with the transplantation of small and apparently stunted oysters from deep water near Charlottetown to shallower water where they might make beds of commercial value, and (3) a preliminary examination of Shediac bay- with a view to future operations. . Dr. A. B. Needler has paid particular attention to the change in sex of the -)yster during its life, and the conditions that may determine it. Oysters have been collected regularly at different places in Bideford river for a study of the comparative rate of growth in different situations, of the season of most rapid growth, and of the comparative amount of growth in successive years. She has also done preliminary work in a disease found to kill off in two years' time all of a certain lot of oysters transplanted f rom the south side of the Island to Malpeque bay. Dr. A. \V. H. Needier has studied the oyster disease that wiped out the fishery in Malpeque bay subsequent to 1914, so that such a catastrophe may be avoided in the future. 4. Clam. The conditions surrounding the occurrence and growth of clams have been the subject of intensive study by Mr. C. L. Newcombe. Various beds in the Passamaquoddy region have been under survey and experimental plantings in different situations have been made not only in this region, but, for comparative purposes, also near the head of the bay of Fundy. Growth studies form a prominent part of the work, and with particular relation to the question of depletion of the beds by overdigging. On request from the Department an investigation was made of certain beds in St. Mary bay from this same standpoint. 5. Fisheries of the Fundy area. On request an attempt has been made to complete a survey of the fishery resources of the bay of Fundy in a y-ear's time. To accomplish this it has been necessary- to make use of all the available personnel of the Station, and the response of the volunteers to an appeal for assistance in this work- was all that could be desired. The assignment of parts of the work was as follows,—hydrography—Mr. Hachey; processes of handling fish—Mr. Morton; shad and general study of statistics—Mrs. Jeffers; herring—Dr. Huntsman; cod, smelt, tunny, and swordfish—Dr. Jeffers; haddock and gaspereau—Mr. McKenzie ; pollock, halibut, skates, and flounders—Dr. Vladykov; hake, cusk, and mackerel—Dr. Battle; salmon—Miss McCracken; lobster—Mr. Templeman; clam—Mr. Newcombe; scallop--Mr. Stevenson; mussel, periwinkle, sea urchin, squid, eel, trout, and bass—Prof. Bay-ne; and sea weeds—Prof. Klugh and Prof. Bell. The area included in the surN.-ey has been taken to extend from the inter- national boundary at the St. Croix river to cape Sable, including the bay of Fundy proper with its tributary waters, and the north-east portion of the gulf of Maine stretching from the mouth of the bay to Browns bank along the north side of the deep Fundian channel. There have been available from the historical side the account of the fisheries of the bay of Fundy by M. H. Perley, which appeared in 1850, and the fishery 'reports of the Dominion Government for the more than sixty years since Confederation. The supervisers and inspectors of fisheries for the various districts in the area have been brought into frequent consultation, both in groups and individually, and have given great assistance with their expert knowledge of conditions. Public meetings for information and discussion were held at Saint John, Yarmouth, and Woodwards Cove, Grand Manan. A very large number of men in the industry at place after place along the whole coast have been interviewed as to their experiences in the fishery, and an exceptionally large amount of information has been obtained in this way.

The Department of Fisheries operated the M.S. "Nova IV" during the ager season in scallop-dragging experiments and co-operated with the survey in Kin covering the whole area in very comprehensive fashion. The new M.S. "Zoarces" rive proved of great service in enabling investigators to visit outlying points vert expeditiously, and was also employ-ed in certain systematic fishing experiments and designed to show the comparative distribution of bottom fish throughout the bay. quo( The background for an understanding of the rationale of the various of d fisheries has been provided to a considerable extent by the hy-drographical and biological investigations of past years throughout the area. It has been thought Dr. necessary to supplement this by a series of quarterly cruises, covering the area exte at crucial times in the year in as adequate a manner as proves feasible for in il showing the changes in hydrographic and planktonic conditions with the seasons. corr The M.S. "Zoarces" is carrying these through, the times being (1) the latter Kin; part of August (midsummer in the water), (2) November, (3) the latter part dete of February (midwinter), and (4) May. In addition an attempt is being made fresl to ascertain the location of any schools of winter-spawning gadids (cod, haddock, intet and pollock) in the area, making systematic plankton tows to locate the floating Dav eggs. grea silict

GENERAL SEA FISHERIES AND OCEANOLOGY . and • 1. Hydrograpky. The weekly and monthly observations at standard stations new in the Passamaquoddy area have been continued and the number of stations Nati extended to six, of which four are outside the bay proper. The Fundy area is built being given special attention in the quarterly cruises already mentioned, and Mr. Que Hachey is bringing together the results of the investigations of recent years. at th The waters in the vicinity of the Prince Edward Island Marine Station are duri being studied by Dr. A. W. H. Needier, an attempt Lein.- made to determine the dete play of the factors governing temperature and salinity. Data for a study of the and seasonal changes in conditions in Bedford basin and Halifax harbour continue to be collected by the Fisheries Experimental Station there. near Daily observations of temperatures are being continued at the series of delic stations established at lightships and lighthouses along the coast from Grand vibr; Manan to the north shore of the gulf of St. Lawrence. One at Gaspé has had such to be discontinued, the work being abandoned by the observer. The thermo- for I graphs of the Meteorological Service, which the Station operates on vessels of Res( the Canadian National Steamships on lines running to Bermuda and the- West and Indies, have suffered some interruption in service owing to changes in the inve routing of vessels, but it is hoped to have shortly a resumption of the series of .wor1 observations crossing the "Gulf Stream" from Montreal and Halifax. Temporarily a line from Boston to Bermuda has been utilized. Mr. Hachey has reqt subjected past records to analysis and furnished a report upon the same. The Mr. results have been made available to the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, ban whiçh is making a particular and extended attempt to investigate thoroughly the waters of the Atlantic off the coasts of Canada and the northern states of the mar Union. of ( The hydrographic material obtained on the expedition sent by the Depart- appt ment of Fisheries to Hudson bay in 1930 has been worked up by Mr. Hachey as f and a report published. , Smi 2. Chemistry of the water. Mr. Morton and Mr. Hachey have continued fror to make regular determinations of the phosphate content of samples of water imp taken at selected stations in the vicinity of the Biological and Experimental of 1% Stations. During the summer season weekly samples from. two places at the Thi; head of the bay of Fundy were examined, one series being secured through the the 9 agency of Prof. Bayne, by the steamer "Kipawo" in Minas basin halfway between Kingsport and Parrsboro, and the other by Mr. White off the mouth of Apple river. Additional observations were made for working out the order in the vertical and horizontal distribution of phosphates in the Passamaquoddy region, and this was extended by analysis of a series of samples obtained by the Passama- quoddy Commission for the work of Dr. H. H. Gran in relation to the growth of diatoms.

' The work on silicates in the waters of the region, begun in 1930 by the late Dr. 'A. Cameron of the University of New Brunswick, has been continued and extended by Dr. and Mrs. King. Imperfections in storage of the samples and in method of estimation, which largely vitiated the first season's work, have been corrected, and what appears to be a very satisfactory procedure developed. Dr. King reports upon a more accurate "compensating" method of making the determinations, which has been used by Mrs. King in surveying the region, both fresh water and salt, as to the horizontal and vertical distribution of silica. Very interesting experiments have been carried through by Dr. King and Miss Davidson, showing that large amounts of silica added to the local sea water greatly increase the growth of diatoms, and that on death of the diatoms the silica goes back into solution rather rapidly. 3. Light. The important experimental work on light in relation to water and its contained life by Prof. Klugh and Dr. Sawyer has been continued. A new quartz spectrograph, purchased by funds f urnished to Prof. Klugh by the National Research Council, was designed by these two investigators and was built by- the Gaertner Scientific Corporation and the Research Workshop of Queen's University. Apparatus for its under-water operation is under construction at the latter place. In its present state it was brought into successful operation during the summer and was calibrated so as to be used by Dr. Sawyer in determinino- the degree of penetration of light into various waters of the region and the effect of certain kinds of plankton on such penetration. The facilities for light investigation were greatly improved by the construction near the laboratory on a solid ledge of rock of a cement platform, so that the delicate galvanometers, which must at times be used, may be quite free from vibration. Over part of the platform a small building was constructed to house such instruments as might be used in thé work. The cost of the interior fittings for the present set-ups was met with fu› nds provided f rom a grant by the National Research Council. The site was selected with a view to the best light exposure and the installation designed to make the best possible use of limited space. The investigators consider that the results are entirely- satisfactory,- and much better .work is made possible. Experiments were conducted by Prof. Klugh as to the nature of the light required for the growth of the commercial sea-weed, dulse. Prof. Klugh and Mr. Newcombe collaborated in studying the effect of light on the growth of barnacles. Prof. Klugh tried out the Bell-Howell photometer, recently placed on the market, with a view to its utilization in light work in shallow water. The results of careful tests made were satisfactory enough to warrant devising a portable apparatus for the usé of this instrument in obtaining light values in such waters as fish ponds and trout streams, and the same lias been made available to Mr. Smith for his investigations. Prof. Klugh was able to construct, with filters from the Corning Glass Company superior to those previously available, an improved type of "moonlight" lamp similar to that made previously for the work of Miss Odell in studyiàg the reactions of copepods to lights of various intensities. This was calibrated and made available to Dr. C. J. Fish, who desired to extend the work of Miss Odell in his investigations for the Passamaquoddy Commission.

10 Also Prof. Klugh has arranged with Dr. H. H. Gran, who is associated with that Commission, for some cooperative experiments on the relation of light to the growth of diatoms, which it is hoped to carry out during another season. 4. Temperature and salinity. In our climate clams and oysters may be exposed to freezing temperatures in nature, and as well refrigeration is at times used for holding both these shellfish. In this connection Mr. Friedman has studied the abilities of both of these animals to withstand sudden or prolonged 1 lowering of the temperature below the f reezing point. Prof. Chaisson, who had investigated the reaction of the skate to low salinities for the water in which it lives, turned his attention to the lobster for this sanle feature. This is of importance owing to fresh water f rom.ice used in shipping not infrequently dripping upon or running over the lobsters. An extension of the work to cover the conditions generally met with by the Depart- ment of Fisheries in transporting lobsters to market is being planned. 5. -Fauna. The material collected by the Department's expedition to Hudson bay in 1930 was distributed to a number of specialists in Canada and the United States for identification and report. 'Dr. A. Willey of McGill University handled the copepods and Dr. C. McLean Fraser of the University of British Columbia the hydroids. Through the courtesy of the United States National Museum a members of its staff have identified a variety of materials, namely, the molluslcs, and among the crustacea, the crabs (Dr. Mary J. Rathbun), other decapods (Dr. Waldo L. Schmitt), and amphipods (Mr. Clarence R. Shoemaker). Miss I. Gordon of the British Museum of Natural History has identified the Cumacea and Nebaliacea. Dr. Vladykov of the staff of the Station has prepared a very full account of the fishes of the expedition. Other groups of animals fi are also being handled by specialists. 6. Flora. The diatoms of the Hudson Bay Expedition have been studied and reported upon by Miss Davidson, and Prof. Bell has the seaweeds in hand. The regular collections of microplankton throughout the year at selected Stations in the waters in the vicinity of the Biological and Experimental Stations a have furnished material for determining the fluctuations in the abundance of the plant life of the waters from season to season and from year to year. Miss Davidson has paid particular attention to the diatoms in these collections from I I a the Passamaquoddy area ar two principal stations and is completing work covering seven years of collections. In addition in connection with the work of the Fundy survey she is studying the differences throughout the bay of Fundy in the various seasons. Prof. Bell has continued his survey of the seaweeds of the Canadian Atlantic d coast, and during the past season with assistance in transportation provided by the National Research Council he travelled nearly ten thousand miles in visiting 77 points from Grand Manan to the Gaspé peninsula, collecting material at all points. C: 7. Bait. The North American Council on Fishery Investigations at a meeting in November, 1930 put on record its belief in the importance of conducting F experiments with preserved bait for cod and other demersal fish. This Station initiated simple experiments at the end of that year, and these were continued with amplifications during part of the season of 1931. The crew of the M.S. is "Zoarces" has carried these out whenever opportunity was afforded.

GENERAL FRESH WATER FISIIERIES AND LIMNOLOGY Principal attention is being given to the Chamcook series of lakes, situated h near the Station and showing very considerable diversity in .character, in the h belief that these may be taken as sufficiently typical of the lakes generally in the 11

at Maritime provinces to serve for fundamental and preliminary study. Mr. Smith be has for another year followed up the conditions in three of these lakes throughout the season and finds Welch lake (the uppermost in the series) to be markedly be different from Gibson and Second lakes, which are very similar in character. es Chanicook lake proper, the largest and lowest, is again a distinct type. A study as has also been made of the changes in the distribution of the plankton in Gibson lake as shown by tows taken at two specially selected stations with the object of determining the adequacy of limited tows properly revealing the plankton wealt11 of any given lake. • , X Dr. M'Gonigle during the winter of 1929-30 assisted the International Fact- in finding Commision for Lake Champlain in an investigation of that lake. He LII has continued with a study of material then obtained and now reports fully upon .t- it. During the past season, with the assistance of Mr. Smith, he investigated the Chiputneticook lakes in the St. Croix system, primarily in connection with fish mortality, but conditions in general were surveyed. Mr. Smith has had in hand a series of .experiments in water fertilization. The original series of three cement pools, protected from surface drainage, were ia heavily fertilized in 1928, one with sea mussels, another with barnyard manure, and the third merely by overflow from the two former. They are still showing rather marked changes from year to year as well as from season to season, and er study continues to be made of the striking differences in conditions of all kinds ). that have resulted from such fertilization. ie Proposals for the fertilization of a lake in Jasper National Park, Alberta, called attention to the desirability of ascertaining the value of small amounts of ls fish meal in . fertilizing fresh waters. A second year's trial of the effect of adding one pound of herring meal to 10,000 gallons of water in one of a pair of cement pools has shown definitely that such an amount very greatly increases the quantity d. of life in the water as well as altering conditions otherwise. Two ponds of the sam.e size each holding approXimately 3,300 gallons of water were excavated in is a marshy spot, with heavy clay subsoil, and these were protected from loss of water through their walls and bottoms by ditches on the outside, kept filled with ss water. One of the two was fertilized with one-third of a pound of herring méal and the conditions in both followed throughout the season. There was a much .1; greater production of plankton and of various aquatic plants in the fertilized )f pond. Opportunity was taken in 1930 of the visits for investigation made to the Chamcook lakes to fertilize Gibson lake with fifteen tons of sea mussels. The ic duration and extension of the fertilizing effect has been followed during the IV current year. Mr. Pentland has continued his study of the conditions required by certain .11 fresh-water amphipods, suitable for fish food. The work for the season was carried out under controlled laboratory conditions. tOE

FISH CULTURE d 1. Water conditions in hatchet-res. The experimental hatchery of the Station 3. is located on a hillside 'on the grounds of the Station far f rom any stream that might provide a full supply of water. It had been expected to use the system, which brings water from the Chamcook lakes a distance of four or five miles to the town of St. Andrews, and upon which the Station depends for its supply of fresh water during the s'anitner. Available funds were, however, insufficient d lo put the entire pipe liné belonging to the Station below frost, and this left the hatchery without a supply of running water during the winter, the season for which trout and sahnon eobb-or s must beo carried. Advantae- was taken of this 12 situation to work- out a method of providing proper conditions both in character o of the water and in temperature, without reliance upon a natural flow of suitable cl water. The marsh at the top of the hill, used for the construction of the clay ir ponds, .was utilized as a source of water, which was stored in a cement tank used h during the summer as a salt-water reservoir. This water was run into a cement tank built on the rock below the hatchery. The space between the tank and the d floor of the hatchery was enclosed with wooden walls, and insulated with eel- o grass ; and a jacket--heater designed to provide hot water for bungalows was used ta \vith a water system consisting principally of two series of pipes, which acted as radiators to keep the temperature f rom dropping too low. A small electric motor and a centrifugal pump kept the water in circulation f rom the tank through filters and the egg-containers, and back to the tank. This system gave complete o: success without rene\val of the original supply of water. In this way suitable ci conditions were provided for the experiments conducted by- Dr. M'Gonigle as to d, the imp.ortance of any given temperature, salinity or water-flow in the development tc

. of trout eggs. Dr. M'Gonigle has further tested the water f rom Chamcook lake as - delivered at the Station through the long metal pipe line, by placing trout fingerlings in it at the end of the season when it was believed to be in the best condition. The St initially heavy death rate observed is attributed to the weeding out of individuals f5 not fitted for the new habitat into which they were introduced. He has also o studied the course of events in each of the various hatcheries in the Maritime provinces f rom the time of stocking \vith eggs in the autumn to distribution of al the fry the next spring or summer, with a view to ascertaining causes for losses St and formulating procedure for their avoidance. P' 2. Water conditions in retaining ponds. At times considerable difficulty is experienced in carrying salmon from the time of capture till they are ready for o stripping. There are ponds for holding the salmon at different points along the coast. That at Saint John was investigated in 1930 by Dr. M'Gonigle and was si found to undergo very great changes with the tide. During the present year he has extended this study to include the pond at South Esk on the Miramichi, which is also tidal. 3. Food of Toung fish. Experiments on the relative effectiveness of various kinds of food for small brook trout were begun bv Dr. M'Gonigle in 1930, utilizing a spring-fed stream situated near the Station to supply water to a battery of wooden troughs in which the 'fish were kept. Under his direction Miss Tait continued the experiments in 1931 with an improved installation of trôughs. Mr. White has studied the stomach contents of artificially hatched trout fry that had been held a long time before planting. In a few hours' time after cl planting these secured an abundance of food, quite comparable with that taken by Cs the native trout fry of the stream. He has also compared the food of brook trout fingerlings and sticklebacks occurring together in Forbes creek, P.E.I., and ■ has found that the latter fish secure classes of food organisms not readily available c to the former, and at the same time serve as food for large trout. t( 4. Artificial spawning beds for trout. Mr. White has constructed and d operated a spawning box for brook trout to be placed in a stream. He has followed the result and finds not only that trout enter the box and -spawn, but also that the eggs hatch out satisfactorily and y This provide health fingerlings. a method provides a means of supplyino- spawning beds to streams, which are deficient in bottom suitable for trout spawning. tl

FISH MORTALITY AND DISEASE td d 1. Herring disease. During 1929 and certair 1930 it was known that It tl percentage of the herring of all sizes in the bay of Fundy and neighbouring pan 13 er of the gulf of Maine showed more or less definite eVidence of the presence of le certain microscopic parasites, which were to be found in considerable numbers in the dark muscle of the side of the body just beneath the skin. Miss A. Alley had studied the condition in previous years, but was not an investigator at the nt Station in 1931. It was decided that it was of importance to continue collecting he data as to the prevalence of the condition, and the services of Ir. N. A. McNairn fl- of McMaster University were secured for the examination of lots of herring ed taken at various places and times. ed 2. 1 Fish mortality in freeh water. An extensive mortality, of the fish in the iic Chiputneticook lakes of the St. Croix system was investigated by Di. M'Gonigle, gh but its cause was not certainly determined, apparently being no longer in operation. Acting for Dr. M'Gonigle, Dr. A. W. H. Needier investigated the circumstances surrounding the death of brook trout in Campbell's pond, extensive decomposition of finely shredded potato pulp from a starch factory being found to be responsible. Remedial measures were proposed.

ed I I FISH PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY I 1. The digestive system. Dr. Babkin and his associates have continued their I, studies of the digestive system of the fish, the skate being used as most convenient ais .i for experimental purposes. Dr. Babkin himself studied the effect of distension Is° ' of the oesophagus and stomach on muscle action and gland activity and with me' "Dr. M. E. Sawyer traced the distribution of the sympathetic nerves to the °11 'alimentary canal and the effects of their stimulation in comparison with vagus SeS 'stimulation: Dr. Sawyer investigated the relationship and functioning of a peculiar muscle attached to the large intestine and apparently related to the spiral IS 1 valve. Mr. J. V. V. Nicholls carried out experiments to determine the effect for l of temperature and drugs when acting directly upon the muscle of the stomach the I I wall. Dr. Bowie has continued his work on the histology of the pancreas of the cas I 'skate and has prepared to determine the nature of the peculiar muscle attached he l to the large intestine. :hi I I 2. The respiratory system. Dr. M'Gonigle has investigated the effect of varying temperature upon the rate of respiration in the brook trout in order to )us obtain evidence of unfavourable behaviour at high and low temperatures and so 30, to establish the limits of the range of most suitable temperature for this fish. ■ a

:THE HANDLING OF FISII FOR FOOD put 1. The surface slime. The slime on the surface of the fish is frequently ter considered of particular value during handling or curing. Mr. Lemon has by continued his study of the nature of this slime, this year confining lais attention oob to that f ound on the skin of the haddock. aid 2. Autolysis of the muscle of fish. Mr. Campbell has determined the .ble Comparative rate of automatic decomposition of haddock muscle at different temperatures from ,the freezin,g point to that of the warmest weather and has nd done the sanie for beef muscle, revealing a distinct difference between the two. has 3. Extractives of skin and muscle. Following up his discovery of. the but effectiveness of fish skin in particular in causing a marked secretion of the his gastric juice, Dr. Komarov has prepared extracts from the skin of the haddock are and the skate and f rom the muscle of the haddock, and is attempting to determine the nature of the extractives and their action in the living °monism. 4. The histology of frozen fish. The problem of the afteration of the fish flesh by freezin,g and cold` storag-e is being attacked bv an extension of the work air done by Jackson at this Station and by \Veld at Halifax. A clearer picture of the state of the tissue is being obtained by fixation without change in temperature,

14 which Dr. Bowie has demonstrated. Experiments are in progress to determine the extent to which . the tissue can on thawing return to its original condition after certain freezing and storage procedure. 5. Handling and curing methods in the Fundy area. As part of the survey of the Fundy area Mr. Morton has extended the work of Mr. E. E. Daggett, who reported upon the methods used in handling fish at Beaver Harbour, Wilson's 1 Beach, and Grand Manan, and is preparing to report upon the differences to be found throughout the area. 6. The sales of fish. in Ontario. Mr. McKenzie has analyzed the sales data of a leading wholesale firm in order to determine the nature of the varying demand (or supply) and the possible reasons therefor. MISCELLANEOUS ACTIVITIES a TECHNI-CAL SERVICES a d A considerable variety of technical services is rendered by members of the of Fisheries and to the public. Material of varied tl staff" to the Department tl character, principally fishes, is' received for identification, and Dr. Vladykov in particular is called upon frequently for expert report. Dr., M'Gonigle answers personally or arranges otherwise to handle all calls from the Maritime hatcheries. Mr. Smith has assisted in this work, and Dr. Leim of the Fisheries Experimental Station kindly visited hatcheries that were readily reached from Halifax. Si o EXHIBITIONS 0 A museum with aquaria is maintained at the Station and this attracts a al considerable number of visitors. A request came for an exhibit at the Charlotte County Fish- Fair, an institution started over eighty y-ears ago and recently t( revivid. A varied and successful exhibit was arranged. This included still water la aquaria cooled with ice, in which various kinds of fishes and other marine animals el remained in excellent condition in spite of the crowding and lack- of moving water to which they were subjected.

EDUCATIONAL WORK Plans have been made by Dr. M'Gonigle for a resumption of the courses tt to hatchery officers, one of four weeks' duration to be given early in 1931 at the Fisheries Experimental Station, Halifax, where class room facilitief are le available. GENERAL FACILITIES h Improvements in the general facilities of the Station, that have been in b progress, have been carried to a further stage. 1. Salt-water system.. The difficulty involved in providing at all times a h full supply- of fresh salt water in the face of a tidal rise and fall of over twenty feet was met by the construction of a pool just below high water level, for which the rock ledges in front of the Station afforded very- suitable conditions. For f supplying water at low pressure and in considerable volume for the many tanks I . and aquaria, in which fishes are held by experimental purposes, a -centrifue pump driven by an electric motor has been installed, and the motor equipped fos the automatic 'filling of the storage tank. The pipe line has been placed below frost so that experimental animals can be held throughout the year. This low , pressure system is used for cooling in the light experiments and for the condensing coils of the refrigerating machinery. The water in this system suffers little change in temperature after removal from the sea but, when ill f the tidal pool, is considerably heated even at the bottom on clear days during the 15

summer. Steps are being taken to prevent this, which makes the water fatally warm for many of the local forms during the summer season. The capacity of the cernent storage tank, used for the salt - water delivered at high pressure in the laboratory and hatchery, has been very considerablv increased and a cover provided for protection from the heating effects of the sun, but the pumping equipment is not yet in satisfactory state. 2. Fresh-water system. Winter use of the laboratory and hatchery have rendded it necessary either to put the pipe-line below frost or to provide a supply a of fresh water in some other fashion. It has been possible to put only, a small a part of the line below frost as yet, so that temporary measures have been adopted, which provide a limited supply of fresh water for winter laboratory use. As has been described under hatchery experiments, water accumulatino- in a pool in a marshy spot situated at the top of the hill behind the Station, and draining an area of woodland of moderate size has been piped into the reservoir that is used during the summer for storing salt water for high pressure delivery. In addition Le fresh water main has been put below frost as far as a d the small stream (crossing the Station's road), which had been dammed to furnish an additional amount of water. rS s. 3. Refrigeration. During the course of the year the available supply of al electric current from the local power company has been so improved as to meet sudden demands. Not until this took place was it possible to operate the jacketed cold storage automatically and maintain the desired constant temperature of 0°F. for experimental work on cold storage. Automatic electric incubators are placed in the anteroom of the cold storage to provide any desired temperature a above 0°F. and below the freezing point. te A one-ton ammonia refrigerating machine, no longer needed for freezing ly temperatures, has been put into service to maintain a cold room under the er laboratory at a constant temperature of 32°F. (the freezing point). As automatic equipment has not yet been available, this has been accomplished by placing,: in the room many metal vessels filled with water, which freezes and thaws alternately, preventing significant lowering or raising of the temperature from the desired point. Incubators in the room provide any desired temperatures from the freezing point up to the hig,hest summer atmospheric temperature. Still higher tempera- es tures are provided by incubators placed in the laboratory. In this way there are at now available for experimental purposes constant temperatures for any desired re levels from 0°F. upward. 4. Heating. A hot-water system - for heating the laboratory- was in part installed late in 1930, and gave satisfactory- service during the following winter. During the autumn of 1931 the installation was completed, the remaining rooms in being provided with radiation, use being made of certain steam radiators in the possession of the Station, which were made suitable for hot water use by a horizontal installation. Satisfactory conditions are now provided for the winter [ty work, which is increasing in extent. ch 'or 5. Rearing ponds for fry. Under Dr. M'Gonigle's direction a rearing pond for ,ks fish fry, subdivided for the grdwth of food organisms, is being constructed in a suitable spot at th top of the hill for ready supply with Chamcook water, water from the woodland drainage area, and salt water from the high level '01 reservoir.

31"; 6. Tidal control ponds. The dam across Tidal cove at the head of Passama- ,he quoddy bay lias been tightened with earth filling, and caulking on the inside. nI It will now be feasible to 'construct with a minimum of expense a series of ponds in with variable tidal exchange, in which can be worked out the conditions suitable for he oysters and other estuarial forms. 16

7. MS. "Zoarces." The new ninety-foot motor. ship "Zoarces," which replaces the "Edward E. Prince" for open water investigations, has been fitted up and put into commission. She has . been found very sea-worthy, and eminently serviceable for the work. She is not y-et fully equipped for dragging, nor has the refrigerating equipment been installed in the commodious centrally-placed hold, which is to be used for the experimental carrying of fish. 8. Road. In recent y-ears road transportation has become increasingly , more important in the work of the Station. The handicap in this connection of the very steep hill, which must be surmounted in leaving and reaching the Station by land, has been in part overcome by an alteration in the road, 0-iving a very much easier grade. The new part has been brought into use, and 'sduring the autumn of 1931 widened so that vehicles may pass each other, and ditched so that the surface may be kept from guttering. Some further widening and improvement in grade of parts of the road will need to be made. 1 INTERNATIONAL PASSAMAQUODDY COMMISSION This Commission, appointèd by the Governments of Canada and the United States to arrange an investigation which might furnish a basis for predicting the effects of the Passamaquoddy, dams on the fisheries of the region, chose St. Andrews as a base for the investigation. The Biological Board decided to afford the Commission every possible facility not involving an outlay of money-. The upper part of the hatchery building, not being required for the time being, was made available for the use of the employees of the Commission during the summer season as office and laboratory.% For the same season insofar as available living and boarding facilities in the residences were furnished to these employ-ees as to supernumeraries. They were lik-ewise given the use of the library and of laboratory equipment. As the motor boat "Edward E. Prince" was not at once required by the Fisheries Experimental Station, it was turned over for the use of the Commission in its investigations. PUBLICATIONS During the year there have appeared the f ollowing publications on work connected with the Station. Babkin, B. P.—Further studies on the pancreatic secretion in the skate. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (1) 1-10. • Effect of haddock flesh and skin on gastric juice. Prog. Rept. Atl. 2, 3. Babkin, B. P. and S. A. Komarov.—Note on the urea content of the gastric juice in the skate. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (2) 11-15. Babkin, B. P. and R. H. M'Gonigle.—Studies on the respiratory mechanism in skates Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (11) 315-329. Chaisson, A. F.—The toxicity of fresh water on Pseudopleuronectes antericanus (Walbaum). Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish 7 (7) 67-72. – Davidson, V. M.—Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 5. The planktonic diatoms in Hudson bay. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (26) 495-510. Fraser, C. McLean.—Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 3. Hydroi(b of Hudson bay and Hudson strait. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (24) 475-481. Hachey, H. B.—Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 2. Report on the Hudson Bay Fisheries Expedition of 1930. A. Open water investigations with the S.S. "Loubyrne." Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (23) 463-471. Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 6. The general hydrographY and hydrodynamics of the waters of the Hudson bay region. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (9) 91-125. Huntsman, A. G.—The processing and •handling of frozen fish, as exemplified by ice fillets. Bull. 20, 1-58. The maritime salmon of Canada. Bull. 21, 1-99. Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson. bav.. I. Hudson bay and the 17

determination of fisheries. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6 (22) .455-462. Preserving scallops. Prog-. Rept. Atl. 1, 5. Canning brine-frozen -mackerel. Prog. Rept. Atl. 1, 6. Metal in water kills fishes. Prog. Rèpt. Ad, 1, 12. Fillet skinner. Prog. Rept. Atl. l 13-14. , Fish hatching investigations. Prog. Rept. At!. 1, 15-16, Brine freezer, using ice and salt. Prog. Rept. Ad. 2, 4-6. Temperature and the Passamaquoddy fishery. Prog. Rept. Atl. 2, 14-15. Periodical scarcity in salmon. Prog. Rept. Atl. 2, 16-17. Big catch of Miramichi salmon every three years. Prog. Rept. Atl. 2, 18-19. Huntsman, M. E.—The effect of certain hormone-like substances on, the isolated heart of h the skate. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (4) 31-43. LI Jeffers, G. \V.—Observations on the cod fishery in the strait of Belle Isle. Bull. 18, 1-9. King, E. J.—On the colorimetric estimation of silica. Contr. Canad. BioL Fish. 7 (10) 119-125. King, H. M.—On the occurrence of silica in the waters of the Passamaquoddy bay region. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (11) - 127-137. Komarov, S. A.—Comparative study of gastric secretion in the dog after ingestion of haddock flesh and skin and of beef meat. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (6) 57-65. - MacKay-, M. E.—The action of some hormones and hormone-like substances on the circulation in the skate. Contr..Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (3) 17-29. McKenzie, R. A.—The fish trade of southern Ontario. Bull. 23, 1-37. M'Gonigle, R. H.—Brook trout and temperature. Prog. Rept. At!. 2, 20-21. Needier, A. B.—The haddock. Bull. 25, 1-28. Needier, A. W. H.—The oysters of Malpeque bay. Bull. 22, 1-35. d Three haddock populations in North American waters. Prog. Rept. Atl. 1, 10-11. ' s, Disappearance and return of Malpeque oysters. Prog. Rept. At!. 2, 9-1L N:cholls, J. V. V.—The influence of temporature in Fundulus hacroclitus. Contr. - Canad. Le Biol. Fish. 7 (5) 45-55. Sawyer, W. R.—The spectral absorption of light by pure water and bay of Fundy water. tS Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (8) 73-89. e Walker, S. J.—Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 2. Report on the Hudson Bay Fisheries Expedition of 1930. B. Investigations at Churchill, Manitoba. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (23) 472-474. \Villey, A.—Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 4. Hudson bay copepod Le plankton. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (25) 483-493.

INVESTIGATORS' SUMMARIES B. P. BABKIN Investigation of gastric secretion in Raja. The investigation of the structure and physiological activity of the gastro-intestinal tract and its appendages in fishes is important because nutrition in marine forms is a fundamental function. A thorough knowledge of the physiology of the alimentary canal will be a key to the interpretation of the nutritional habits of different fish and will also help us in understanding such complicated processes as seasonal migration of marine he animals. The science of nutrition will form a scientific basis: for the breeding of fish under artificial conditions. (1) With a spinal preparation (spinal cord cut below the medulla) the influence of distension with food masses (pieces of herring and pieces of skate muscle) and the effect of pilochrpin on the gastric secretion were studied. The uc distension of the stomach did not activate any marked secretion of the gastric injection of ds juice. A somewhat better result was obtained with intravascular large doses of pilocarpin. Under the influence of this drug the neutral reaction he of the gastric mucous membrane turned acid. However, in this case also, no he maiked gastric secretion ensued. Whether the absence of secretion was due to the inability of pilocarpin to stimulate the endings of the secretory nerves in hv skate or whether the effect of operation was not favourable for the functioning of the gastric glands, further investigations will show. gastric secretion in skate by ts (2) An attempt N9s made to activate the distension of the oesophagus with a balloon: The distension activated swal- lowing movements. In one case repeated distension of the oesophagus provoked a scanty secretion of gastric juice. 2 18

B. P. BABKIN AND M. E. SAWYER tr The vagus and sympathetic nerves in the skate. An anatomical study was made of the course and distribution of the sympathetic nervous system in sup- th plying nerves to the alimentary tract and related glands. ix. Different nerves—vagus and sympathetic—were stimulated and the motility ar of the stomach observed. It could be demonstrated that both nerves activated yE movements especially of the pyloric part of the stomach. The cardiac part was Ai less affected by the stimulation of these nerves. pr tli PE H. I. BATTLE I. The Fundy hake and cusk fishery. Hake and cusk have been classed 1 1 p. together since 1911 in the Canadian Fisheries Statistics. Within the period from 1920 to 1929 inclusive, the Fundy area has contributed 75.6 per cent. of the total Atlantic catch. The hake fishing season for the most part lasts from April or th May to October, and most of the catch is dried for export. It is sold only to a al, limited extent as fresh fillets in the home market, although practically undis- or tinguishable from haddock, and this trade might be increased, in which case a m constant supply will be required. d( Two species of hake, Urophycis tenuis (Mitchill), the White hake, and Urophycis chuss (Walbaum), the Squirrel hake, are taken. Most seem to be th referrable to the former species and indeed very few fishermen recognize the existence of moré than one kind. Hake are found to be concentrated near the mouth of the bay of Fundy Ir about the fifty fathom line. On the New Brunswick shore they inhabit a muddy sa bottom north of Grand Manan, about the Wolves and Campobello, extending in fair quantities to point Lepreau. The catches diminish rapidly passing north- T ward along the St. John county shore line and are practically negligible at the head of the bay, although occasional specimens are taken in weirs off Albert, ar Westmorland, Cumberland and Colchester counties. On the Nova Scotian side in of the bay, the hake inhabit a fine gravel bottom and for that reason are con- sidered superior in quality to those taken on the New Brunswick muddy bottom. ar Very few are caught off the coast of Yarmouth, but the catch is large off Digby ce county, and diminishes gradually along the Annapolis and Kings county shore bE line. of The history of the fishery from 1870-1929 as outlined in the statistical and fisheries reports shows wide periodic fluctuations with 1899 as a peak year. Some ar of the depressions are attributable to ravages of dogfish ; others to a diminution of fishing activities consequent upon low market values, depletion of number of ar men engaged in the industry, unfavorable weather conditions, or scarcity of bait. ti( Some fishermen are of the opinion that hake migrate to the offshore banks in bt the winter, while others are inclined to hold that they merely go out to deeper sh water in the bay. In either case more seaworthy craft will be necessary to pro- a vide for a winter catch. I The cusk is a deep-water form occasionally taken on rocky lecfges about I 1 fl Grand 'Manan (less than 1 per cent. of hake and cusk recorded in statistics), but it constitutes the greater part of the "hake and cusk" catch of Yarmouth county and about 2 per cent. of that for Digby county. The Yarmouth county landings di (amounting to 4 per cent. of the total Fundy area hake and cusk for 1929) are ut taken by hand-line and trawl off Lurcher shoal and the northern limit of Seal Ix Island ground. sp 2. The Fundy mackerel fishery. Many years ago it seemed questionable tt whether the fish that are found schooling along the United States coast travel northward and are those found in Canadian waters or whether the latter belong to schools which migrate in from the deeper coastal waters to spawn. The laiter view is now held in the light of evidence from tagging operations and since trawlers have taken adult mackerel on Georges banks in February. The mackerel catch of the Fundy area represents only about 5 per cent. of the Canadian Atlantic total for the period from 1920 to 1929 inclusive. For the past decade the catch has been negligible or lacking on the New Brunswick shore, and at the head of the bay. With the exception of 1912 and 1913, for about forty years no great quantities have been taken in these localities, and indeed the whole Atlantic catch has shown a definite depletion since 1893. This year, however, as predicted by Mr. Sette of the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries, the catch has been excep- tionalljr large all over the bay. Mackerel strike Yarmouth usually in May; the peak of the catch comes in June and diminishes gradually until October.

P. M. BAYNE 1. The Fundy sea mussel fishery. There is little or no attempt made to use the sea mussel as food or for bait in the Fundy area. Digby and Kings county alone are reported in the statistics as using the sea mussel commercially and then only from 1915 to 1924. Only one attempt has been reported of canning the sea mussel. It yet remains to be seen whether prejudices can be overcome and a demand created that will make a market worth while. 2. The Fundy periwinkle fishery. There are suggestions from the fishermen that the periwinkles have not recovered from the two large catches of 1922 and 1924. As a side line the marketing of periwinkles would be quite profitable for many fishermen if the supply and a suitable market price could be maintained. In addition to developing the trade by opening up markets there should at the same time be steps taken against the possible depletion of the beds. 3. The Fundy sea urchin fishery. The supply of sea urchins seems unlimited. The annual shipment seems to be determined by the demand on the Boston and New York markets and by the trans-shipment charges. Unless the fishermen are so close to steamships that they can ship by freight their profits are used up in the payment of trans-shipment charges. 4. The Fundy squid fishery. Squid are used as a fertilizer to a limited extent, and as bait in Charlotte, Digby and Yarmouth counties. Since 1863 the per- centage of the Canadian Atlantic catch caught in the Fundy area has only been between 25 and 30 on three occasions. There is an opening for the development of a dried squid market in China and amongst the Orientais of British Columbia, which would last as long as the present strained relations exist between China and Japan. 5. The Fundy eel fishery. The catch is limited more by the fact that eels are not much in demand as a food than by the available stock. With the excep- tion of four years the maximum catch has been from Yarmouth county and has been uniformly high. This is probably correlated with better facilities for the shipment of eels to the Boston and New York markets. Canadian live eels find a ready market in Holland and Germany.

H. P. BELL • 1. Algae of the Canadian Atlantic coast. Collections were made at 77 different points along ,the coast from the Gaspé peninsula along the North- umberland straits, around the Atlantic coast of Nova Scotia to the head of the bay of Fundy and west to the island of Grand Manan. At present the list of species includes 30 greens, 38 browns and 47 reds, making a total of 115 iden- tified species, and, in addition, 7 species regarding which there is doubt. A large part of the information collected is absolutely new for the region. 2. Observations on Itudson bay algae. Material from expeditions of 1927 1928, 1929 and 1930 included 40 species, of which 2 were blue greens, 7 greens, 18 browns, and 13 reds. 20

The only greens found inside the bay were estuarial forms. The typical J. ocean forms were found outside in the strait only. The browns showed the same tendency but not to such a marked degree. Practically all the browns found ni inside were deep-water forms, and the few typical marine browns found inside bi were stunted specimens. The only healthy intertidal browns from the inside in were estuarial or tide pool forms. With the reds, typical marine forms were clE found both inside and outside and showed normal growth in both places. This suggested that the surface water and environment inside was decidedly ar different in some way from that of typical marine or ocean conditions; that the al deep water inside was more like the ocean and the intermediate zone graded between these two. In addition to the above the assemblage of species was not like that found fr, on the Atlantic coasf of North America, but more like the north Atlantic, or northern Europe. There was at least one species which has never been reported in Europe. for North America, but is quite common tF Cl. A. A. BLAIR tl • Miramichi salnion investigation, 1931. Anglers, set - net fishermen, and drift- net fishermen have been in dispute as to the proper regulations for conserving in the salmon fishery of the Miramichi system. Also it has been claimed that the 0. hatching of eggs from fish taken in the fall does not help the stock of fish that g, supplies the commercial catch that is confined to the early part of the season. g, An intensive study of the salmon at all stages seemed necessary as a means of •throwing light on the matter. 1 1 A Out of 1,533 scale samples from salmon caught in the river by set-nets and in the bay by means of drift-nets, 579, that have been examined to determine the ol life-history, show that in June and July the 32 group (3 winters in river and 2 in tc sea) forms bulk of catch. The 22 group is poorly represented although showing tl some signs of increase in July. Other groups found in smaller numbers are 23, 33, 42, 43, and 52. Most of the scales with spawning mark are from salmon which al have spawned previously as grilse. Erosion, which accompanies development oi of scale material at periphery begins about middle of July; it of sexual organs, P is more common and more extensive in males. b Grilse were secured, examined as to sex, and found to be 95 per cent. males. o As also most of the adult salmon are females, it seems definite that the males tl mature earlier. (` D. J. BOWIE • a. The histology of frozen fish muscle. It was believed, as a result of the finding tl of \Veld that frozen fish muscle on thawing rapidly reabsorbs water from the ice is crystals, that a truer picture of the condition of the tissue at any stage could be obtained by cutting and fixing it, or merely fixing it, without alteration in tem- o perature, i.e. by treating the material with a fixative with the same temperature a as the material. It was also believed that such a method would permit of a SI direct study of the ability of the tissue to reabsorb water after different procedures in freezing and storage, such ability being of prime importance in making frozen fish the equal of unfrozen fish in consistency. Sections were cut in the refrigeration room ( —12°C.) so that they remained frozen after being cut. Some sections of rapidly frozen tissue were -placed in cold ( —12°C.) alcoholic fixatives, so that the sections were not thawed before fixing took place. Sections so treated showed a shredded appearance of the rapidly frozen muscle fibres. This condition was not observed in sections of the same tissue, which were allowed to thaw in aqueous solutions before fixation could take place, so the spaces in the tissue left by the ice crystals are larger when the section, or the material before sectioning, has been fixed without change in temperature. 21

1 J. CAMPBELL Control of autolysis of haddock and beef muscle by cooling. Autolysis of fish muscle is of great importance in itself, and also because it accelerates subsequent bacterial decomposition. Lowering the temperature is the chief means used in industry to control autolysis and bacterial decomposition, and therefore deserves accurate investigation. In this regard haddock muscle has been com- pared with beef muscle for the reason that the haddock is a cold-blooded animal and !ives at low temperatures, so that its body processes must act at temperatures about 28° C. lower than those of warm-blooded animals suchas the cow. Haddock muscle autolyses with decreased rapidity from 35°C. to 0°C., there being a decrease of nearly half in the rate at the lower temperatures (Q5 ranging from 1.42 to 1.88). Beef muscle shows a similar condition but the decrease is not so great (Q5 ranging from 1.39 to 1.60 within the range 40°C. to 15°C.). At the same temperature beef muscle was found to autolyse more rapidly than haddock muscle (at 25°C. in 48 hours, calculated from tangents to the curves, beef muscle gave an increase in non-protein nitrogen of 1.1 per cent, of the total nitrogen as compared with an average of 0.7 per cent, for haddock). Different specimens of haddock muscle had different activities, e.g., at 25°C. in 48 hours an increase in non-protein nitrogen of 0.2 per cent., 0.7 per cent., and 0.9 per cent. was found in three different specimens. In an experiment where ground haddock muscle was incubated at 0°C. for 60 days the average autolysis gave an increase of 17 mg. non-protein per 100 g. wet weiglit muscle.

A. F. CIIAISSON The effect of low salin ities on the lobster. In connection with the exposure of the lobster to drip from melting ice during shipment, it was considered desirable to iscertain the extent and mechanism of any resistance to low salinities that this animal might possess. In the lobster as in the skate, death in fresh water does not seem to be brought about by a lowering in concentration of the general blood volume, but by failure of the respiratory mechanism, which results in asphyxiation after very short periods of immersion, which lower the blood concentration very little. Similarly both animals are able to withstand a very considerable lowering in concentration of the general blood volume without ill effect, provided that the water to which they are exposed is in part sea water. In various dilutions of sea water and within the time limits of the experiments (24 hours) no new balance between the blood concentration and the water, such as occurs in the skate, was noted; for there was a steady, uninterrupted drop in the blood concentration with time. Also, unlik-e the skate, the lobster's mechan- ism for maintaining the concentration of the blood above that of the water in which it is living, is not destroyed by lowering the blood concentration to A1.212°C. or even lower, and the normal blood concentration level is restored if the animals are then returned to full sea water. In fact, it would appear that this mechanism survives the death of the animal through asphyxiation. In experiments to determine the effect of drip from melting ice on lobsters under shipping conditions, the drip was found to affect the lobsters in the same way as immersion in fresh water though the time required was greater. It pro- duced failure of respil-ation and decrease in the concentration of the blood. Death occurred in all cases of drip.

V. M. DAVIDSON , 1 1. Seasonal variation in diatonz abundance in the Passamaquoddy region. . Diatoms, as the chief cômponent of the phytoplankton, play an important rôle i in the nutrition of the sea, being the food of copepods, which in their turn are eaten by the fishes. Physical and chemical factors favorable to the production 22 of an abundance of diatoms are, therefore, indirectly responsible for a good supply of economic food fishes. The diatoms begin to multiply in March, or even in February, reach their maximum in May or June, and then decline with, in some years, a tendency to recover in the autumn, usually September or October. The total production in the estuary of the St. Croix river (Station 6) exceeds that just outside the mouth of the bay (Station 5), the two places that have been steadily investigated since July, 1924. Phosphate and silica values in the sea-water reach their minimum towards the close of the spring flowering, but it is not thought that they ever fall to the minimal quantity required for plant propagation as shown by cultural ex- periments. Production begins -before the water warms up appreciably, and is complete before the sun reaches its maximum heating and lighting effect. The curve of light intensity follows more closely than any other the curve of plant abundance, at both stations. 2. Dia,tom production in the Fundy area. Seasonal variation in diatom pro- duction is important for correlation with the hydrographical studies and the results of the fishery investigations to give a more detailed picture of the condi- tions of the Fundy area. It was found that neritic species of diatoms are characteristic of all regions except the southern part of the bay which feels the influence of Atlantic water, and that species such as Biddulphia regia dominate the warmer waters at the head of the bay in summer while the genus Chaetoceras, especially C. debile and C. sociale, hold sway in the colder waters at the mouth.

M. H. FRIEDMAN Resistance of clams and oysters to freezing temperatures. The clam and the oyster are often exposed at low tide to the very low temperatures of winter, and also it is at times of advantage to keep them in cold storage prior to marketing. Therefore it is important to determine their ."cold-hardiness,' the ability of an organism either to withstand extreme low temperature (intensity factor) or to withstand long periods of loW temperature (time factor). It was found that the lethal temperature of each kind can be correlated with the environmental temperature of each, and that the lethal temperature is lower the more rapid the cooling. With regard to the problem of storage for varying lengths of time, the rate of cooling probably is also a determining factor. The oyster will keep much longer at —6° C. than will the clam. At —4° to —5°C. both survive exposure for weeks. The author confirmed the phenomenon first viewed by Mr. J. Richard Nelson of Bivalve, N.J.; whereas the animal might recover after being frozen if it is treated gently during the defrosting process, it will not recover if it is subjected to mechanical shock.

H. B. HACHEY 1. 'The general hydrography of the waters of the Fundy region. The Grand Manan region is seemingly the receiver of waters from various sources, and as a dispenser of these same waters it enters as the prime factor in determining the conditions in the bay of Fundy. The water in one or another of the other regions may, by a definite change in character (either from one season to the next or from one year to another), bring about a considerable change in the relative conditions in the Grand Manan region. As an example, the great variation from season to season in the volume of drainage water from the St. John river region results in marked difference in the character of the waters proceeding to and from the Grand Manan region. Waters are carried into the bay of Fundy between Nova Scotia and the

Li 23 region of Grand Manan bank. Between the Grand Manan bank and the coast of Maine the outflowing waters are to be found. The inflowing waters are of oceanic origin and as they proceed up the bay they undergo progressive changes as they mix with other waters. The waters at the head of the bay of Fundy are fairly well mixed. The waters from the head of the bay, from the St. John region, and from the Passamaquody region reach the Grand Manan region, proceeding there at depths determined by the respective densities. These waters are carried along ,the eastern coast of Grand Manan and there divide to supply a body of surface water which is carried to the Nova Scotia shore and another which rounds . the southern point of Grand 1%ilanan to proceed along the coast of Maine. The southern region of Grand Manan is productive of much tidal mixing and up- welling which is productive of heavy surface water which must sink as it proceeds from the region. Movements of comparatively heavy water from the Passamaquoddy region result in an indraft of lighter surface waters from the St. John area. The rough and rugged coast of eastern Nova Scotia is productive of much upwelling. 2. Analysis of sub-surface temperatures between Halifax and Bermuda. A knowledge of the surface temperatures of the waters off our coast is of importance both to problems in hydrography and meteorology. Analysis of the thermograph records for the past three years taken between Halifax and Bermuda has revealed that the physical character of the waters along this route varies from year to year and from season to season. Three different bodies of water are determinable from the records: (1) coastal water, (2) inter- mediate water, and (3) Gulf stream. The variations that occur are accom- panied by a displacement of the boundaries of the various bodies of water. These variations may be said to be cyclic in character. Extreme conditions are to be found in the late summer and late winter. 3. The general hydrography and hydrodynamics of the Hudson bay region. The hydrographie investigation in connection with the Hudson Bay Fisheries Expedition of 1930 was of particular importance in explaining the results of the fishing operations. The waters of Hudson bay differ markedly from the waters of Hudson strait and the waters of the open ocean. Intense stratification in the upper twenty- five metres, decreasing as the waters of the open ocean are approached, gives Hudson bay the character of a large estuary. Below fifty metres the waters are for all purposes dynamically dead, thus resulting in a cold saline body of water which probably undergoes very little change from season to season. The deduced movements of the waters at various levels show that the inflow of waters from Fox channel and the many fresh-water drainage areas control the hydrographic conditions as found. The main water movement is from the James bay area to Hudson strait and thence to the open ocean.

A. G. HUNTSMAN 1. The maritime salizzon of Canada (Bulletin 21). The 'various fishing inter- ests concerned with salmon have been much exercised from time to time over decreased fisheries, and various restrictions have been urged as necessary for conservation . It has seemed advisable to determine any order that might exist in the fluctuations in the quantities of salmon taken from year to year, so as to be able to suggest possible factors responsible for the changes. A study of the statistics of the salmon catches of the various districts for the period since Confederation, during which statistics have been collected, has reyealed a complex order jn fluctuations in abundance of the salmon. There are eytdences of (1) depletion, (2) conservation, (3) general competition between different ages giving a periodicity of the length of the life of the average spawning fish, (4) competition in fresh-water giving a periodicity of the length of the life in

24

fresh-water, (5) a periodical scarcity on the average every 9.6 years, and (6) a the 48-year complex fluctuation. re\ 2. Fishery resources of the Fundy area,. Information has been desired as to Co the possibilities of increasing any or all of the fisheries of the waters extending rivl from the international boundary at the St. Croix river to cape Sable. The very cre greatest diversity is to be found in the nature and extent of the various fisheries ba3 throughout the area, and it was questioned whether the small quantities obtained in certain localities were in reality due to a dearth of fish. on It is found definitely that the same fishing effort is not equally productive sui in all parts of the area, and that in fact very great differences exist, which are I1L.: correlated with the physical conditions in the water. These differences involve nei (1) the kinds of fish, (2) the abundance of particular kinds, (3) the sizes of par- difi ticular kinds, (4) the lengths of the seasons for particular fisheries, (5) the thr elaborateness of the fishing gear employed, (6) the efficiency of the boats em- ployed, and (7) the amount of time devoted by the individual to fishing as com- am pared with other occupations. In general all these tend to.decrease going from the the mouth to the head in the whole bay of Fundy, as also in St. Mary bay, and loc the lesser bays and estuaries. Possibilities of considerable increase in the catch hig are largely confined to forms for which there is at present either (1) no market, (2) only a limited market, or (3) only a low-priced market. Instances of these thE three classes are (1) dog-fish and silver hake, (2) sea urchins, periwinkles, and Fu mussels, and (3) hake and herring. . ba: The area as a whole is divided more or less definitely into a series of parts pre showing a steady gradation in physical conditions and in fishery from ocean to SUT river,—(1) Yarmouth shore with swordfish, albacore, cusk, and abundant mackerel and lobster fisheries; (2) mouth of bay with pollock and large summer 1 ab herring fisheries; (3) lower bay with hake, scallop, and sardine fisheries; (4) inc upper bay with many sea fisheries of definite value but reduced, such as lobster, dei mackerel, pollock, cod, haddock, and spring herring; (5) Minas basin with most rei- sea forms few, and very limited fishing of a general nature; (6) Cobequid bay in with sea forms rare, and fishing virtually confined to anadromous fish; (7) tidal SOL portion of Shubenacadie river with sea forms very occasional and dying owing pel to reduced salinity; and (8) non-tidal portion of Shubenacadie river without in sea forms, but fishing for the anadromous salmon, shad, and gaspereaux of definite value. wa 3. The Fundy herring fishery. Herring are by far the most abundant fish du in the whole area and are very generally distributed throughout, failing only in tel the river à above points where the salinity is greatly reduced. The catch is largely th( • concentrated at the mouth of the bay on the New Brunswick side, where they go, are utilized for canning purposes, chiefly the young as sardines. It has been eth claimed by some that the comparatively small catches elsewhere are due to lack dei of proper facilities for making use of them and not to any lack of the fish them- selves. Are the herring at other points than in the Passamaquoddy region in be sufficient abundance, of the proper size, and available throughout a sufficently to long season to warrant the establishment of canning factories and curing es- tablishments? to On the New Brunswick side there are weirs from Grand Manan at the mouth mi of the bay of Fundy to Hopewell cape in Shepody bay at the very head. There \\ e was a failure to find evidence of the weirs in the upper part of the bay ever taking th( the quantities of either small or large fish that fill the weirs at the mouth of the frc bay where the herring strike. Above Saint John they speak of bushels of herring Tt rather than hogsheads, and finally at Hopewell cape a half-bushel is a good catch. frc Herring and other fish for mink food and sardines for lobster bait are in some ha cases regularly procured from Saint John or points farther to the west. On sul the Nova Scotian shore the evidence shows a somewhat similar difference betwein wi the outer and inner parts of the bay of ,Fundy, though less pronounced than on A 25 the New Brunswick side. There is a decrease in the availability of herring (as • revealed by weir catches) from the outer bay to the inner bay, Minas basin, and aloomon".

26

outside fishing and poor inside fishing during the following season. In the du channel the salmon are considered to very closely, hug the south shore so that yeo drifting is unnecessary, and in fact useless offshore. It would appear that the abc salmon are driven in large numbers from Minas basin in severe winters and that the hook formed by cape Split coupled with their shore-keeping habits effectually I I her prevent their return, thus explaining the markedly isolated character of this fishery unrelated to any salmon rivers. mo No basis is found for the belief that there are elsewhere in the area quantities l‘h: of salmon comparable with those taken in the Saint John drift-net fishery, al- the though less lucrative drift-net fishing of varying value can be found elsewhere. In the main the sea fishery for the salmon is definitely related to the rivers, which ve2 they ascend. 6. Bait experiments: On certain sections of the coast fresh bait may be ffa°cri unavailable at times when fish are comparatively plentiful. Nearly everywhere wit preserved bait is, or may be, of very considerable value for the fishermen. of c Herring and clams were used in the experiments. Compari'son was made between fresh (or recently frozen), salted, and formaldehyde-treated bait. In I I pro addition to differences depending upon (1) the condition of the bait at time of dm preservation, (2) the nature of the preservative, (3) the strength of the preserva- tive, (4) the time of storage, and (5) the temperature of storage, there were Ya evident also differences depending upon (1) the kinds of fish, (2) the numbers is r of the fish, and (3) the season of the year. abl In certain cases bait treated with formaldehyde gave the best catches, par- ticularly with hake. In other cases salt bait gave the best results, reaching its I I riN' - I extreme for certain flatfish, which were caught on no other kind. At the end of no the season certain fish, e.g. the haddock, would not take any bait offered, though present in quantity as shown by the otter trawl. I I Mil the A. M. JEFFERS wel The Fundy shad industry. Of the shad taken in Canada, the average per cent, caught in the bay of Fundy and its tributaries for the years from 1921 hisi through 1929 was 59. sea: Compared with the total commercial fisheries of the Fundy area the shad the fishery is relatively unimportant. In sections where it is abundant enough to is f support a fishery it has considerable local value. The majority of the shad taken Scc in this area are taken in the Saint John river and harbour. They are also caught bay in the Petitcodiac river, in Shepody bay, in Cumberland basin, in Cobequid bay, Di in Minas basin, in the Shubenacadie river, and a few in the Annapolis river and basin. cat, When the shad catch -was at its peak, from 1874 through 1886, this industry tha was of sufficient importance to compare favourably with other commercial fishes. In the year 1879, for example, shad made up 4.5 per cent. of the total value of the bel( fisheries of this region. The story of the shad fishery in the Fundy area since in 1872 is one of general decline. Previous to 1904 this fish was plentiful enough to of be of considerable commercial importance. Since that date the size of the catch con has been so small as to be practically negligible. This decline is evidently due to depletion as a result of overfishing and lack of protection during the spawning fish season. It is gratifying to report that the shad seemed more plentiful during the 6,3: season of 1931 than it has been for rnany years. Drift nets, set nets, and weirs are the three principal means of taking shad. bey Due to the extreme scarcity of these fish during late years they are not fished for sho to any great extent in many sections, but are taken only incidentally with salmon. E. G. W. JEFFERS 1. The Fundy coeshery. This, the most prominent commercial fish on the tint Atlantic coast of Canada, was surpassed in importance only by the herring (in. ma eluding sardines) and the hake (including cusk) in the Fundy area for the ten years 1920 to 1929 inclusive. At that, the Fundy catch of cod represents only about 6 per cent, of the catch of this fish for the whole Atlantic coast. Long-line trawls and hand-lines are the principal methods of capture, and herring constitute the staple bait. By far the greatest proportion of the commercial catch is taken toward the mouth of the bay, particularly on the Nova Scotian Side and out toward Grand Manani at the mouth. This fishery is practically negligible toward the head of the bay although there is no sustained effort to capture cod in this region. The cod fishery has shown a pretty definite decline during the last forty years both in the Fundy area and along the Atlantic coast of Canada. In the former this is perhaps due to the almost extinction of schooner-fishing and to the fact that haddock has to some extent supplanted cod in the fresh-fish market, with the consequent lower prices for salt cod and hence a decline in the number of cod fishermen. 2. The Fundy smelt fishery. Of the total Canadian catch the Fundy area produces only about one per cent. in quantity but considerably more in value due to the proximity to the American markets. Smelt are practically absent about the islands at the mouth of the bay. Yarmouth is the leading smelt county with Charlotte a poor second. The fish is rare toward the head of the bay, doubtless due to the absence of streams suit- able for spawning and the general turbidity of the water. There is no noticeable decline in the fishery and the lack of suitable spawning rivers precludes the possibility of greatly increasing the catch although there is no good reason why it could not be rather noticeably increased. Fishing is done mainly during the fall and winter months, gill nets being the principal method of capture. In Yarmouth county the fishermen have restricted themselves to hook and line fishing only, and we find that the method works so well that there is little likelihood of its being abandoned. 3. The Fundy tunny (albacore) fishery. Very little is known of the life- history of the tunny or albacore beyond the fact that it is a resident of the high seas and a summer visitor to our coasts. Where it winters or breeds is not known; the smaller fish—less than 20 pounds—do not appear in our waters. The tunny is found off the outer coast of Nova Scotia and, less frequently, on the Nova Scotia side of the bay of Fundy. On rare occasions it is seen in Passamaquoddy bay but the commercial catches are restricted to the counties of Yarmouth and Digby. Since 1926, Digby county has not reported any. For the last ten years the Fundy catch has averaged over 6 per cent, of the catch for the Atlantic coast of Canada although this percentage varies from less than 2 to over 11. 4. The Fundy swordfish fishery. Lik-e the tunny the sword fish is a species belonging to the open seas. It is essentially a southern fish that wanders north in spring. In summer it is fairly abundant sporadically along the outer shores of Nova Scotia and rarely enters the bay of Fundy. Consequently it, too, is confined to the counties of Yarmouth and Digby. In 1929, Yarmouth was the only county in the Fundy area reporting sword- fish. Twenty-three hundredweight were reported for the Fundy area, whereas 6,336 hundredweight were taken in all Canada. Possibilities of increasing this fishery in the Fundy area are therefore slight beyond the fitting out of boats suitable to hunt them off the outer Nova Scotia shores.

E. J. KING On the colorinzetric estimation of silica. Many natural waters possess a yellow tint which must be allowed for in the silica estimations. This is usually done by making a "blank" reading on a 100 cc. sample of the water, without the addition 28

of the reagents, against the picric acid standard. The value found in this way A. may be subtracted from the value obtained with the sample plus reagents, the difference representing the true soluble silica content of the water. As the taking of "blank" readings is always a bothersome proceeding due to alg the uncertainty and difficulty of matching, an apparatus was designed for over- Fu coming this difficulty by means of "compensating" tubes of water mounted below sid the ordinary Hehner tubes used in the estimation. coi A series of determinations using th:s apparatus was made on waters trom sot several different localities. In most cases there was excellent agreement between lac the compensated value and the corrected value obtained by subtracting the yei blank reading from the non-compensated. on blt E. J. KING AND V. M. DAVIDSON ani at, Relatio" n of silica to the growth of phytoplankton. With the purpose of obtain- ing more information on the part played by silica in the production of diatoms, A. the diatom population was followed in different concentrations of silica in sea coated with bakelite to prevent solution of silica from the water held in glass jars dif contained sea water treated with modified Miguel solu- glass. Jars A, B, and C dif tions and with concentrations of 0.92, 4.92, and 10.92 mg. of silica per litre, du respectively. J ui During a week of cloudy weather there appeared to be no increase in the sh< diatoms, but with the advent of much sunshine, growth became very luxuriant. 22■ This was especially marked in C, with B also showing a fair amount, and A a mc little as well. The gradation in opacity of the contents of the jars became very to marked during the next week. The soluble silica content of the jars fell rapidly Th with this burst of growth and after several days had fallen nearly to the vanishing point in all the jars. inc There was a steady decrease of the silica in solution which ran parallel with the growth of diatoms, and after the cultures were dead and re-solution of S. the forms had commenced, there was a steady increase of soluble silica until the original values had almost been reached. pai fro It i H. M. KING of

The occurrence of silica, in the waters of the Passamaquoddy region. A study me of the occurrence of silica in the waters of the Passamaquody bay- region has ext been undertaken with a view to determining the distribution of this chemical fou constituent, its variation in amount with depth and location, its seasonal varia- het- tions with their possible relation to the growth of phytoplankton, and the pos- am . e sible relation of its regional concentration to the movements of the waters of ab< the bay. al s In localities where the turning over of the water was very marked there was sug little difference in the silica values from top to bottom, but in other localities ski where the water movement was not so marked the values varied considerably ski with depth. During July the values found were fairly high, but with the August profusion of diatom life there was a marked falling off of the silica values of the me top layers at the stations least subject to overturning of the water. Thé water thc of the bottom oozes in these places was very high in silica. his Waters tributary to Passamaquoddy bay had a 'Mich higher silica content no than the waters of the bay itself. A possible relation between the silica content of i and the movement and origin of the waters at stations 5 and 3 (in the bay of Fundy) has been noted. In one of the fresh water lakes tributary to Passama- cru quoddy bay a marked difference in silica content of the water, corresponding to car a sharp thermocline, was observed. Sot 29

A. B. KLUGII 1. The utilization of algae in the Fundy area. The dulse industry is the only algal industry of any importance in Canada, and it is confined to the bay of Fundy. It is practically confined to the island of Grand Manan, and to its north side, though there is a small and somewhat sporadic development in Annapolis county. There is at present only a limited market for it. In addition to dulse, some of the larger algae—the rockweeds, are used, namely as fertilizer for farm lands; .but the seaweeds of the bay of Fundy form a potential resource, which as yet has scarcely been tapped. 2. Photosynthetic rates of dulse in light of different wavelengths. Experiments on the photosynthetic activity of dulse (Rhodymenia palmata) in red, green and blue light showed that it had its greatest photosynthetic activity in green light, and this fact seems to account for its distribution, which, in the bay of Fundy is at, and below, low-tide level.

A. B. KLUGII AND C. L. NEWCOMBE - Light as a controlling factor in the growth of Balanus balanoides. Areas on different sides of the wharf block, denuded in the spring, were selected with of illumination, and the growth of barnacles thereon followed different degrees during the course of the season. There was no appreciable set of young after June 6. On August 4 the area exposed to sunlight from 8.00 a.m. to 8.00 p.m. showed 1,100 barnacles from less than 1 mm. to 4 mm. diameter each way, and 220 from 7 mm. diameter, while the area exposed only for about one hour in early morning showed 700 from 5 to 6 mm. high and 2 to 3 mm. wide, and 600 from 8 to 13 mm. high and 4 to 7 mm. wide. Other exposures were intermediate. There is thus shown an inverse relation between light intensity and growth, indicating an adverse effect of the former on the latter.

S. A. KOMAROV 1. The extractive substances of fish skin. Haddock skin and extracts pre- pared from it are strong stimulants of gastric secretion. Also substances isolated from the skin of the skate greatly influence the blood circulation in that fish. It is important to determine the nature of these extractive substances and details of their action. Extracts of skate and haddock skin were submitted to fractionation by the method of Kossel and Kutscher. The protein and inorganic matter in the free extract of skate skin injected intravenously in cats under ether anaesthesia was found to be quite effective in causing a fall of blood pressure and inhibition of the heart beat. Atropine (1 mg.) abolished the inhibitory action on the heart beat and to some extent diminished the depressor action of the extract, but did not abolish the latter altogether. Thus, a choline-like effect on the circulation and also a histamine-like action could be demonstrated in cats. These observations suggest the idea that histamine-like and choline-like substances present in fish skin may be responsible to some extent for the high secretagogue effect of fish skin on the gastric secretion. 2. Extractive substances of haddock muscle. The high secretagogue effect of meat extracts, especially in the case of gastric and intestinal secretion, was thought to be attributable to their content of carnosine, methylguanidine and histamine, all of which greatly influence the blood circulation. As to fish muscle, no adequate study of this has been made, and in connection with the evaluation of fish as a food such an investigation is considered very desirable. Two adequate samples of muscle were taken from freshly-killed haddock and crude extracts prepared. The process of purification of the extracts is being carried out with a view to obtaining their constituents in a pure chemical state. Some crystalline organic substances have been isolated but not yet identified. 30

3. Deep aseptic autolysis of haddock muscle. The autolysis of fish muscle infe is of great importance commercially because it evidently takes place in many of s industrial processes such as smoking, salting and freezing. Nothing is known this regarding the fate of such substances as carnosine, carnitine, guanidine, choline, affe histamine and urea when the tissue is autolysed. It is a very interesting question also how the autolysis of fish muscle would be reflected in the secretagogue pro- it p perties of the tissue. lak( Extracts from haddock muscle autolysed in the presence of thymol and que toluene at room temperature for four weeks were purified and fractionated gat( according to the method of Kossel and Kutscher. As compared with extracts the from fresh muscle, there was found by analysis to be very considerable increase in ammonia, amino nitrogen, and non-protein nitrogen, and decrease in urea. the Thus with the formation of ammonia decomposition of urea evidently takes oth( place during autolysis. Probably urease, which was found recently to be present a v( in some tissues of warm-blooded animals, is present also in haddock muscle and regi plays its part during aùtolysis. • and

H. \V. LEM ON I I in c The mucus secretion of the skin of the haddock. Many fish have a covering qua: of slime on their skins. It is believed by some that this slime or mucus should aboi not be removed from the fish during the process of handling. They say that the whi fish has a better appearance when marketed if the slime is intact. Also its pres- per( ence may be of importance in the preserving of the fish. havi - The solubility of the mucus in distilled water, sea-water, dilute solutions of regu sodium hydroxide, and dilute solutions of acetic acid was found by determining Hex the amount of nitrogen dissolved from one gram of mucus by 100 cc. of the ably solvent. In 100 cc. of distilled water or of sea-water the nitrogen content was 4.5 mg. In dilute alkali the nitrogen content rose from 4.5 mg. at zero concen- exte tration to 11.3 mg. at 0.1 per cent. concentration of sodium hydroxide at which a ve concentration solution was complete. In dilute acid the nitrogen content rose sud( from 4.5 mg. at zero concentration to 7.4 mg. at 3.0 per cent. concentration of the acetic acid, beyond which no further solution was obtained. dea( In order to get some idea of the composition of the mucus , . the following extE determinations were made. The water content was found to be about 90 per whc cent. of the total weight. The inorganic material, largely from the sea-water held to I: by the mucus, was 13.0 per cent. of the dry weight. Total nitrogen was 10.9 per cent. of the dry weight. The amount of material extracted by ether and alcohol, som largely lipoid material, was about 27.6 per cent. of the dry weight. Thus tlié be organic material remaining is about 59.4 per cent. of the dry weight. This is wou largely protein. The mucus gives all of the usual protein colour reactions. disc the

spet I. MCCRACKEN fl I I extE Salmon of the Fundy area. Microscopic examination of the scales of salmon from Allens lake retaining pond (1930) showed that the majority, boih males expi and females, remained three years in the river before descending as smolts; the so t majority of males returned as grilse; and more than half the females returned witl after two years in sait water. These data concerning male fish are based on a wat relatively small number of specimens. det( vari R. H. M'GONIGLE andd\‘ 1. The herring disease of Passamaquoddy bay. On the whole, the disease was not nearly so acute this season as in either of the two preceding. From the per limited number of lots examined, one would conclude that the most severely circ affected fish appeared in the St. Andrews and western shore region: Such results as have been secured tend to indicate that the percentage Of the 31 « infected fish decreases with the advance of the season, although the percentage of severely infected fish apparently increases. The explanation suggested for this phenomenon is that the mortality of infected fish is greater, and only un- affected, or relatively unaffected fish, survive the summer. 2. Lake Champlain investigation. Facts were desired, which might make it possible to settle the international controversy concerning the fisheries of the lake, particularly of Missisquoi bay. The pike-perch is the species chiefly in questiol. The winter and spring fisheries for various fishes were both investi- gated and material from each secured. In the subsequent studies, the food of the yellow perch has been the main assignment for Canada. In the region which we investigated during the winter portion of the study, the value of the smelt fishery (minimal) was estimated. How it compared with other regions is not known. However, as far as yellow perch are concerned, it is a very poor region, for the stomach contents were much smaller than all other regions (except one). Perch from the shallow regions of the south of the lake and of Missisquoi bay had much greater content. During the last few days of April, the stomachs of almost every perch taken in certain parts of Missisquoi bay were very full of pike-perch eggs. Three- quarters of the yellow perch diet proved to be made up of insects and of fish, in about equal proportions. During the period of egg diet, it was the fish portion which was mostly replaced, insects being affected to a less degree. Younger perch have a slightly greater proportion of insects than the older ones, which have a considerably greater fish proportion. Crustacea and molluscs form ir- regular proportions of the diet. Hybognathus regius and Boleosoma nigrum (fish), Hexagenia and Sialis (insects) and Asellus and Canibarus (crustacea) were prob- ably the more frequently occurring organisms identified. 3. Fish mortality in the Chiputneticook lakes, St. Croix river system. The extensive nature of the mortality indicated the cause to be a poison. There was a very definite possibility for such poison, for the water-level of the lake had been suddenly raised by about six feet in the early summer, over an area which all the previous summer, fall and winter had been exposed, so that there was much dead vegetation, and so forth. It is probable that the sudden flooding of this extensive area would dissolve ample deleterious materials to account for the wholesale death of the fish, of which the white perch (Morone americana) seemed to be the chief victim. The absence of any land-locked salmon among the dead fish seemed to cast some doubt on this theory, and seemed to suggest that some other factor might be operating, possibly a wholesale poaching for salmon. Dynamite, or set-lines would be the implements employed for •this purpose, and the "cull" fish being discarded, would account for the dead specimens found. Against this idea was the fact that there was no evidence of torn mouths indicating set-lines in the dead specimens examined though dynamite was not ruled out. The apparently extensive nature of the mortality rendered the poison theory the more probable. 4. Factors affecting successful development of trout eggs. As a result of certain experiments in which trays of eggs were placed in the outflow of springs in nature, so that the water had to pass through the trays .(and eggs) instead of over them, with almost perfect results, experimedis were devised to ascertain the amount of water required for such type of hatchery outfit, the results of which might be determined by the comparative success of such trials. In addition, as controls, various other types of apparatus veere employed, still water of varying depths, and surfaces, water agitated by rocking, and so on. The water supply for flowing water experiments was secured by means of recirculation; and a tem- perature, of about 5°C. maintained by a small heating system with water circulation. "Ey-ed" brook trout were used, and they received no care or attention from the time that they were set up until the experiments were discontinued. Occa- 32

sionally they had to be examined to see when hatching occurred. colle The effect of salinity, and temperature, erriploying incubators with still anal water, was determined, and showed 121°C. and 15°C. to be unfavourable, and watg that about 71°C. was the optimum. A salinity of 3 per cent was unfavour- the able, 2 per cent. not good, and one-half per cent. only fair. One per cent. was witI good. time An experiment in which surface -varied, and also the depth (for the total high amount of water was constant), was unfavourable in the smaller surfaces, and bett greater depths. It required a surface of 18 sq. in. (112 sq. cm .) for 67 eggs as a low( minimum. Since there were 600 cc. of water used, the depth was 5 1/3 cm., or part about two inches. An experiment in which the water was passed downwards through the eggs hatc gave just as good a yield-of sac-fry as a similar trial, in which the water, with the feed same rate of flow, passed upwards through the eggs. was Water-flow varying from rates of 11 gallons per minute per square foot cross- coil( section, up to 105 gallons per minute per square foot cross-section seemed to all was yield equally good results. In five different rates, the maximum dead eggs out of gees 250 was seven, or about 2.8 per cent. mad 5. Lethal temperature, and respiratory rhythm of brook trout. Further investi- gations during this past year have been made concerning the causes of mortalitv to d in salmonoid fishes. The brook trout was employed as the experimental animai, initi as observation has shown that it is the least resistant in the majority of cases of whig the hatchery fishes. Fingerling trout parr were taken, three or more, in a flat, shallow pan with in e water enough for them to swim in easily. By heating slowly, at a standard rate fact, of 1°C. for every five minutes, and keeping the water constantly stirred, it was serie found that the lethal temperature was 28° to 29°C. part By plotting the logarithm of the respiratory rate, which was measured bi or Ig taking the interval (by means of a stop-watch) required for fifteen respiratory movements of the operculum, or mouth (mandible), against the reciprocal of the Fish absolute temperature for the range of temperatures studied, three straight-line beer curves were secured, intersecting at about 90 to 10°C., and about 23°C. popi The uppermost curve had a slope of negative value. It was assumed that (the the curves indicate physiological ranges, of varying degrees of favourableness yea] the uppermost being a temperature region of unfavourable physiological influence. wou The middle one appears for various reasons (chiefly the rate of growth) to be the yet optimum. The significance of the lower range is not apparent, and while not unfavourable, seems to be of quite a different character. • to b the 6. Salmon retaining- pond investigation. The study, begun last year at the Saint John salmon retaining pond, was extended this year to include two other atur ponds. One of the new ponds, at Nictaux Falls, NS., was entirely fresh-water, .wha and the fish entered the same without netting, by a fish-way. The Saint John seve pônd is one subject to extreme changes in salinity, depending on the phase of the tide, and also, the fish have to be trapped, and transported to the pond:. Inter- the mediate between these is a new pond, being constructed on the 1‘,Iiramichi. It has Thi cliff( been suggested that a study of these ponds, and the fish in them, may throw gge3u some light upon the causes for occasional severe losses which are experienced in them. tica At Saint John, the water in the pond is practically fresh for the g- reater part of each day at all times, but when the tide is tion more than 23 feet above low- egg; water datum, the salinity reaches that of Courtenay bay (25 parts per mille, Of higher, depending upon wind, etc.), for about three hours. The water in the pan pond is very thoroughly mixed, and is the same in temperature, salinity and The oxygen content throughout. The salinity then falls at a rate varying with the concentration of salt water (cooling curve). and and On the Miramichi, the pond had not been constructed, so samples were 33 collected from the river. All of the samples have not yet been received, and analysed, but from so many as have .been handled, it is evident that the surface water varies considerably in salinity, depending upon the phase of the tide and the amount of the rainfall. At neap tides, the water was about 1 part per mille, with moderate precipitation, and about 4 parts with dry weather. At the same time, neaps, there was remarkable stratification, the bottom salinity being much higher. As the tidal cycle approached the spring tides, mixing became better and better„and the salinity of the surface water became higher, and the bottom lower, until at spring tides the surface and the bottom were _equal, about six parts. 7. Is the nature of the water a factor in mortality of fingerlings distributed from hatcheries? A large number of trout fingerlings left after the conclusion of certain feeding experiments, were transferred into certain troughs, fed by water which it was known was contaminated in the first part of the season by metallic salts (or colloidal solution of the metal itself) from the pipe-line through which the water was conducted. It has been thought that this contamination decreased pro- gressively with the advance of the season, and in October, when this transfer was made, that the water was free of pollution. However, within twenty-four hours the trout began to die, and continued to do so for five or six days, the number of deaths decreasing daily, from an initial rate of 86. The survivors, which did not appear different from those which died, were active and splendid-looking specimens. It is suggested that this type of factor operates, to a greater or less degree, in every transfer of fish from one environment to another. Some unfavourable factor, no matter how diluted, seems to affect certain of the new inhabitants so seriously that they succumb, but those that survive are "the fittest" for that particular environment, and this "weeding-out" may be an inevitable, and more or less desirable, process. 8. Analysis of hatchery reports. Weekly reports have been supplied by the Fish Cultural branch of the Department of Fisheries. From these there have been plotted the maximum and minimum weekly temperatures, the residual population weekly, of each group, or race of each kind of fish in each institution (the investigation has been confined to the eggs, and resultant fry of the current year as yet); and the percent mortality of the residual weekly population. It would be premature to make very definite conclusions from one season's study-, yet the following points may warrant attention. (1) Sudden increases in the mortality of young fry, and fingerlings, appear to be associated in practically every case with an increase in the temperature of the water. It appears to be the rate of increase, rather than the actual temper- atures, or even range of temperature. Enough data are not yet to hand to state what this rate may be, but it appears to vary also with the species, and probably several other factors affect it. (2) One of the most striking points evident quite early was a difference in the population curves of eggs, secured locally, and of eggs sent in from elsewhere. This was true for every case, and for every institution. It is thought that this difference in behaviour of these eggs is due to the shipping, for all eggs shipped "eyed", both brook trout and Atlantic salmon, showed this very characteris- tically. This does not appear to hold, however, for eggs shipped "green". (3) The rate of mortality for each species tends to be different—the popula- tion curves fall at characteristically different rates. This holds only for local eggs, or for eggs shipped green. There were some interesting exceptions, ap- parently associated with differences in temperatures. (4) The hatching perigd does not cause any change in the rate of mortality. The population curve continues without any break, or change of slope through, and beyond this period. This seems to apply to all species, salmon, and eastern and western trout. . 3 -34

(5) Atlantic salmon, with interesting exceptions, hatch "explosively". With brook trout, this period may be spread over a very considerable period. (6) Two groups of the same strain of "native" Atlantic salmon taken from different ponds, but by the same personnel, showed a very interesting difference in rate of mortality. This appeared to be associated with the slight difference in salinity.

R. A. MCKENZIE 1. The Fundy alewife fishery. There are apparently two species (Pomolobus pseudoharengus Wilson and P. aestivalis Mitchill) included under the name of alewife or gaspereau. Since they are usually considered to be the same by most people, it has been found necessary to treat them together until such a time as samples can be obtained from all about the region throughout the whole spring and summer fishery. The alewife fishery is restricted to the Atlantic coast and the principal supply comes from the Maritime provinces. Of this, about fifty-five per cent. comes from the Fundy area, where the St. John river and harbour fishery pro- duces about five times as much as any other county bordering the bay. Yar- mouth county stands second with about one-fifth as much landed per year. Al! the other counties about the bay produce much smaller quantities of alewives. The Gaspereau river, and the Shubenacadie and St. Croix rivers (Hants county) are probably the most important centres in these other counties. This fishery depends on the fish running up the rivers at a certain time of year. • In St. John county the height of this run occurs in March or April, in Yarmouth county it is in April, in Hants, Colchester and Annapolis it is usually in April, in Kings and Digby it is in May, as a rule, and in Cumberland it is almost always in June. The greater proportion of them are taken in weirs built in the lower stretches of the St. John river. However, some drift-net fishing is done in and about the mouth of the river, as well as in the Shubenacadie, Gaspereau and Avon rivers. Set nets, square nets and dip nets are also used at various places in this fishery. It appears from a rough survey of the statistics that the landings since 1869 have been very irregular, but have held up on the whole. 2. The Fundy haddock fishery. The entire Canadian haddock catch is made in the Atlantic, and of this about one-fifth is taken in the Fundy area. Within this area it ranks fourth in point of quantity landed. About twenty per cent. of the catch in this area is made on the New Brunswick side and eighty per cent. on the Nova Scotia side. A brief survey of the landings since 1869 reveals the fact that very few haddock were landed or reported so at the beginning of the period. Following this two very high peaks in the landings are found, one in 1883 and the other in 1897, but after the latter the reported landings decreased to a very low level by 1921. However, there has been considerable increase in the landings since then. On the New Brunswick side almost all of the haddock fishing is donè between cape Spencer and the mouth of the bay, with most of it being done about the islands at the mouth of Passamaquoddy bay. The fishery on the other side of the bay extends from cape Sable as far in as Scotsman bay with most of it being concentrated about the mouth of St. Mary bay and Digby neck. By far the greater proportion of the haddock is caught on ground trawls while fishing On hard bottom, and herring seems to be the most generally used bait. Generally speaking, there are two haddock fishing seasons at the mouth of the bay, spring and fall. This is more pronounced on the New Brunswick side. The farther into the bay one goes the less distinct these become, the change being towards a short summer season with the haddock being taken more or less incidental to other fisheries. This seems to be correlated to so'rne extent with the temperature of the water. 35

3. The fish trade of southern Ontario (Bulletin 23). The investigation con- sisted of working up the sales statistics, for a period of two years, of one of the leading wholesale fish dealers in the district, which is bordered by large fresh- water lakes, which afford a supply of fresh-water fish. A consideration of these statistics revealed the fact that only thirty-five per cent. of the fish sold were of fresh-water origin, while forty-one per cent. came from the Atlantic and twenty-four from the Pacific. A great variation was found in the Sales of each species from year to year, but the total quantity sold remained fairly constant for the two years. It was found that about sixty per cent. of the year's business was done from November to April inclusive—January, February and March being the best. The maximum sales were found to occur about the end of April or the first of May. During the latter part of May, and June, July, August and September , the sales of fresh-water fish were about twice as great as either those from the Atlantic or Pacific. The rest of the year the sales of Atlantic fish predominate with the fresh-water fish following a close second. Throughout the year these two groups vary tremendously, whereas the Pacific fish sales are more regular, but not so great. It was found that twenty per cent, of the fish were sold in the cured condition, chiefly smoked, while the other eighty was divided between frozen and unfrozen. Only about six per cent, of the unfrozen was found to be sold as fresh fillets while the remainder of the uncured fish was sold either in the round or dressed. Some eighteen of the more important fish were discussed in detail as to origin, form and seasonal variation in sales.

J. M. MoRTON 1. Plant fertilization in sea water. In the sea, the abundance of plant forms is often determined bY the amounts of phosphate and nitrate present. The amounts of nitrate follow the phosphate values closely and hence the phosphate values have been taken as an index of the fertility of a water sample. The source of phosphate in the sea is found to be the decaying material on the bottom, large quantities being found in proximity to such. The results of determining samples from places where the water is well mixed show that the values are the same at the top and at the bottom. 2. Fish processing methods of the Fundy region. In connection with the general survey of the fishery resources of the bay of Fundy, about forty fish- processing plants were visited and the methods in use observed. Large quantities of hake, cod and haddock are salted and dried chiefly for markets in southern countries. Herring and alewives are the principal species which are pick-led. Herring are smoked as bloaters and kippers and finnan haddies and smoked fillets are prepared at many places. Brine freezing is carried on at Yarmouth and St. Andrews while large cold-storage plants are located at both Saint John and Yarmouth. Canneries for clams, kippered herring, sar- dines, lobsters, haddock and finnan haddies are found around the mouth of the bay, some on the Nova Scotia side and some on the New Brunswick side. In fact, the distribution of plants for all the operations mentioned shows that all of these are concentrated between Saint John and the United States border on the New Brunswick side of the bay and between Digby and Cape Sable island on the Nova Scotia side. *

A. B. NEEDLER 1. A disease found in the oysters of ..ilalpeque bay. In 1929 a number of oysters from the south side of Prince Edward Island were brought over and planted in two beds in Malpeque bay near the Biological Station. During 1929 these oysters seemed to be fairly healthy but throughout the summer of 1930 diseased specimens- were found on the beds, by the autumn they were dying in considerable numbers and by the spring of 1931 it was impossible to find a live oyster on either of the beds. The diseased oysters were thin and generally containing pus-like matter somewhere about the body. had yellow spots It tF seemed probable that these oysters were infected with the same disease which destroy-ed most of the oyster population in the bay some years ago and that they al had caught it from the native Malpeque oysters which are now immune but are th. still carrying the disease. With the idea of throwing some light on the organism responsible for the of disease, several of the sick oysters were preserved and sectioned. Cells that appeared to belong to the infecting organism were found in various parts of the clE body but particularly, in the liver and muscle. It is suggested that the organism to may be a mycetozoan but much more work will be necessary before its exact th nature can be determined. T1 2. Sex reversal in Ostrea virginica. Oysters were examined from several wl beds in Bideford river, P.E.I., from Long island, N.Y., and from Bivalve, N.J. at Some of the beds in all three places had been planted with spat so that the age ar of the oysters was definitely known while other beds had oysters of various ages. In the latter case the age of each oyster was determined by counting the annual gr zones on the shell. As a result of these investigations the following conclusions in' were reached. The majority of oysters in any one population mature as males tic and later change to females. The bigger an oyster is by the first winter of its gr life the more likely is it to be mature and the more likely is it to be a female in of the next spawning season. The females tend to be larger than the males of the be same age until they reach their fourth summer after which the advantage is some- The change from male environment what lost. to female may be hastened by an loi favourable to growth or retarded by the proximity of older females. A few oysters in may mature as females without first passing through a male phase. Of the oysters of known sex marked in 1930, only five remained to be exam- sil In ined in 1931, but amongst these was one that produced sperms in 1930 and eggs in 1931. th

A. W. H. NEEDLER in I. Hydrographical investigations in the Malpeque bay area. Hydrographical investigations have been continued in Bideford river and 11,Ialrieque bay in an attempt to study the changes in conditions (especially in temperature, which seems to be of the greatest importance) and the factors producing these changes, with the end in view of knowing what to expect as general conditions in different places and of predicting the conditions in particular cases. The results to date have shown the relatively very great importance of weather conditions in the air (air temperatures, sunshine and rainfall) as com- pared with the importance of tidal changes and the conditions in the open gulf . e outside. The latter do, of course, play an important part in the production of the conditions in the inlets where there is, as it were, an equilibrium ,between these forces, but in the shallow inlets of this region, where the depths are less than fifteen feet on the average, the atmospheric conditions can produce veil- great fluctuations which are often of very great importance. For example, changes of over 10°C. in the prevailing temperatures in the inlet may occur in less than a week when the air temperatures change suddenly. It is found that the temperature changes due to the rise and setting of the sun are much greater than those due to the rise and fall of the tide. Tidal changes, on the other hand, are of greater importance in relation to salinity, and the rapidity with which the normal salinities reappear after a spell of heavy- rains. 2. The use of brush for the collection of oyster spat. The possible importance of brush for the collection of spat is very great, as it is available in very large quantities, can be used on bottoms too soft for any other material as yet found practical, and as materials for cultch will probably be in great demand in the 37 near future. Although green alder and birch brush planted in 1929 failed to catch spat that year, it was well covered with spat next year after being left in the water. White birch and alder brush, of which half was green and half had been cut and exposed to the weather for two years, collected very few spat in 1931, although nearby shells planted at the same time were well covered, suggesting that soaking in the water is necessary before the brush will catch spat. 3. Growth of oyster spat. It was found that there was a greater survival of spa t,which were well grown before winter than of those which were still small. Those which were less than 0.5 cm. in length showed a very high proportion of ' deaths in their first winter. The very late catches of spat are therefore likely to be quite unprofitable. It is important from a practical standpoint to know the probability of a sufficient growth being obtained before winter by late spat. This is of particular importance here at the northern limit of the oyster's range, where late spawning is probable. It would be quite inadvisable to plant cultch at all in the late years except in particularly well-sheltered places, as the expenses are considerable and the supplies of good material for cultch far from unlimited. The results to date have shown that there is a considerable variation in the growth attained in different places (faster growth towards the heads of the inlets), in different years (faster growth in the warm years) and in different situa- tions (effects of crowding, current, etc.). These differences have been sufficiently great to keep the growth near the minimum for a profitable survival in the case of certain lots of cultch even in the last three years (1929 to 1931) which have been warm and in the sheltered waters where the observations were made.

4. The oyster situation in the Charlottetown region. In the vicinity of Char - . lottetown the presence of large quantities of small and apparently stunted oysters in deep water cut of reach of the present tong fishing has been considered a pos- sible source of stock for the establishment of oyster farming in the near-by waters. Investigations there have been designed to determine the best method of using this body of oysters of which no use is now made. The investigations have yielded a preliminary picture of the oyster situation in the area. The points of greatest interest are as follows: (a) Exploration of the deep water has shown that the bottom of the channel in the lower reaches of the Charlottetown "rivers" supports no oysters and little of anything else, the bottom being hard, clean and rocky. In limited areas towards the head of the deep water abundance of oysters obtains and they are slow-growing and at present, at least, small. (b) When transplanted to shallower water in the sanie inlet these oysters survived well and grew much more rapidly than those left in their original situation. (c) The topography of the Charlottetown rivers, with deep channels separ- ated by a steep slope from large tidal flats, is such that very little level hard bottom suitable for oyster culture is avaiiable. The neighboring bays on the north shore of the island have smaller tides and more gently sloping shores and level hard ground is present. There is, moreover, little fishing now carried on in them. (d) The hydrographie conditions in the north shcire inlets are comparable to those in the Malpeque area and present no apparent great difference in temperature or salinity from the areas of the channel where the small oysters occur. (e) Oysters transplanted from the channel of Hillsborough river to Savage harbour on the north shore survived for some time after the trans- plantation but it remains to be seen whether they survive the winter and grow well in the following summer. (f) It is considered probable that the small oysters could be successfully used to establish oyster farming in the bays of the north shore. 38

5. The disease among the oysters of Malpeque bay in the years 1914 to 1916. A preliminary picture of the oyster disease of 1914-1916 has been based in part Fi on observations by the writer and in part on the history of the disease as obtained of from local sources. Evidence is given for the following conception of the disease. fr( It appears that the disease was brought to the bay from areas in the United tei States with oysters brought in for planting. The disease was new to the oyster co community of Malpeque bay and a very high death rate resulted. The mortality appeared first in one part of the bay and in the course of two years spread to the co rest and then was carried to neighboring inlets. The mortality was very high— WE undoubtedly well over 90 per cent.—but although successive crops of spat were 19 decimated enough survived to re-establish the oyster community at the heads du of the inlets where the temperature conditions were most favourable and even in( in 1929-1931 a -very few- old oysters could be found on the beds in the open bav pe where, however, the reproduction was very slight. In the last few years several mi transplantations of oysters were made from bays on the south shore of Prince th Edward Island where the disease did not occur, in an effort to quicken the re- in( establishment of the oyster population. These all survived for a year after planting and then died with symptoms similar to those of the oysters which died be in 1914-1916. Also about one in one thousand of the present native oysters of wi the area show similar symptoms. It is concluded, therefore, that a population 111( resistant to the disease has been developed. As a result of a recommendation based upon the above facts, the transfer of oysters from Malpeque bay to other sul areas has been prohibited. foi

C. L. NEWCOMBE J. 1. An ecological study of the soft-shell clam, Mya arenaria. In this investi- gation there have been considered the physical conditions operating on the clam during all seasons of the year, factors most significant in determining distribution, of the rate of growth throughout each season at different levels on the beach, and a eni comparison of the rate of growth on the various commercial clam-beaches of the ca.; bay of Fundy. The results so far obtained are as follows : wa (a) The growth and abundance of clams is very largely dependent on the rai time of exposure. 20' (b) Clams submerged constantly at a depth of one metre below the surface exhibited a growth of 5.88 mm. per clam during a period of 44 days. This amount exceeded that which took place at any level in the intertidal belt, so that col we can conclude that the clam is not dependent on bottom detritus for food. be (c) The maximum growth of clams in the intertidal belt under experimental ab conditions took place near the extreme low-tide mark in a region submerged practically all the time. sat (d) Clams placed at a level of about 21 feet above datum level exhibited a lin growth of 1.44 mm. per clam during a period of 44 days. 5. (e) In general, clams are found in greatest abundance at a level halfway between the mean high and the mean low-water mark. pa (f), Clams kept at a constant temperature of 30°C. were not found to survive for a period of over three days. Those kept at temperature around 2°C., 5°C., fui 10°C., 15°C., and 25°C. for 29 days all survived although the amount of growth an was very slight, never exceeding 0.1 mm. per clam. (g) Specimens planted in an area where the salinity is known to range from mi 8.51 to 17.22 per mille during exposure all survived with the exception of two and exhibited a growth of 1.8 mm. per clam. Those subjected to a salinity of ne about 1.0 per mille did not grow to any appreciable extent although the lethal inl effect was not particularly high, eleven having survived. tet (h) The maximum amount of growth of clams takes place during the spring and early summer in the St. Andrews region. Growth in this season practically St( ceases after the first or second week in October. 39

2. The Fundy clam fishery. The yearly average quantity of clams dug in the Fundy area during the six-year period, 1925-1930, constitutes nearly 50 per cent. of the total number for Canada, and is nearly two-thirds of the number reported from the entire Canadian Atlantic coast. The Fundy area clam fishery is cen- tered at the mouth of the bay, principally Charlotte, Digby, and Annapolis counties. During the period 1900-1905, no clams were canned in Digby and Annapolis counties, whereas in the year 1927 about 89 per cent, of the total number dug were danned. Of all the clams taken in the Fundy area during the period 1900-1905, only 14 per cent. were canned as compared with about 70 per cent. during the recent period, 1925-1930. In general there has been a considerable increase in the percentage canned throughout the entire Fundy area during the period 1922-1929. However, since 1930, when the U.S. tariff regulations came into effect, the output of canned clams has been materially reduced to the extent that many factories have closed and others are operating only during certain months of the year. In Charlotte county, N.B., there are about 800 acres of commercial clam beaches. On certain beaches excessive digging has resulted in partial depletion, whereas other beaches possess potentialities for the development of a large com- mercial fishery as yet not appreciated. In Digby and Annapolis counties approximately 1,000 acres of flats are suitable for commercial digging. In these counties, conditions are favourable for digging and marketing fresh clams.

J. V. V. NictroLLs The effect of temperature variations and of certain drugs upon the gastric motility of elasmobranch fishes. Excised strips of the stomach of Raja diaphanes and Raja erinacea alone were used. Spontaneous contractions appeared in almost every case within an hour or two. As soon as they were established the temperature was lowered slowly until they ceased, and then the temperature was very slowly raised, until they ceased at the upper limit. The temperature was raised about 20°C. in from six to seven hours. It was found that:— (1) A rise in temperature causes an increase in the rate of spontaneous contractions of all parts of the stomach, the rate at the lower temperature limit being about 0.7 contractions per minute, and at the upper temperature limit about 2.1. (2) The upper temperature limit •at which contractions exist is about the same for all parts of the stomach, viz., about 24.5°C. The lower temperature limit varies for different parts, being for the cardia 7-8°C., for the fundus 3.0- 5.5°C., for the antrum 1.5-4.0°C., and for the pyloric sphincter 1.5-3.0°C. (3) The rate of contractions at any one temperature is different in different parts of the stomach. The parts, named in the order of the descending rates, are, —the pyloric sphincter, the antral and fundic regions of the lesser curvature, fundic region of the greater curvature, antral region of the greater curvature, and the cardia. The actions of adronaline, atropine, pilocarpine, and acetylcholine were also investigated. It was found that :— (1) Adrenaline stimulates all parts of the stomach except the antral region near the pyloric canal, where it sttmulates in concentrations of 1:2,000,000, but inhibits in concentrations of or greater than 1:1,000,000. Adrenaline adminis- tered after pilocarpine has, an additive effect. (2) Atropine has no effect upon the normal contractions of any part of the stomach, but antagonizes the effect of pilocarpine and acetylcholine. (3) Pilocarpine and acetylcholine stimulate all parts of the stomach. '

40

E. S. PENTLAND The basis of successful culture of Gammarus. In a study of Gammarus under laboratory conditions, at the University of Toronto, various experiments to determine their reaction to temperature, pH, food, and rate of flow of the water were carried out, and a number of attempts were made to secure definite data on the rate of reproduction. Of the various factors studied, temperature is by far the most important. It was found to be practically impossible to keep Gammarus alive for any length of time in standing water at laboratory temperatures, but no difficulty was experienced when the temperature was kept between ten and fifteen degrees centigrade. Within the range of_ natural waters, the pH appeared to be of only slight importance. Various types of food were tried, including several kinds of aquatic plants, and organic detritus. The most satisfactory food tried was dead elm leaves, which, when well soaked, were readily taken. At laboratory temperatures the use of standing water appeared detrimental, although better results were obtained if it was changed frequently. The use of running tap water was tried, but was found to introduce several serious diffi- culties, and did not prove satisfactory.

M. E. SAWYER A mechanisni controlling the movements of the large intestine in elasmobranchs. A sheet of muscle in the mesentery attached to the large intestine of the dogfish, first discovered by Cannon, appeared to be related to the spiral valve and its contraction caused the rotation of the intestine. Experiments on this muscle were carried out on dogfish and skates (spinal preparation). In both of these animals the muscle takes origin in the oesophagus just above the cardiac sphincter and passes posteriorly, spreading out fan-like in a very thin sheet to be inserted on the right lateral margin of the large intestine. Contraction of the muscle causes, in addition to a rotation of the intestine, a pulling of the pylorus, duodenum and large intestine anteriorly toward the cardia. Frequently contraction of the muscle was followed by an, active peris- talsis-like movement in the large intestine. The muscle responded with maximal contraction to mechanical or electrical stimulation. It also responded to sudden stretching and to a slow increasing tension when the latter reached a certain degree. In both dogfish and skates this degree of tension was found to be that produced by a weight of 5 to 7 grams. The response to this form of stimulus was frequently a series of rhythmic contractions. Sympathetic and parasympathetic drugs also produced a positive effect on this muscle, in the intact animal as well as in the isolated state. On the other • hand, no evidence of an extrinsic nerve supply could be demonstrated. Electrical stimulation of the various nerves and plexuses in the abdomen while producing good contractions of the stomach, pylorus and duodenum had no effect on the muscles: Histological investigations for the presence of nerves are being carried out.

W. R. SAWYER The spectral absorption of light by natural waters. The work of the previous summer on the penetration of light into natural waters was continued with a number of improvements in equipment and technique. (1) A laboratory study was made of the spectral absorption of light by the water from various habitats at or near the Atlantic Biological Station. • (2) The spectral absorption of light by sea-water containing .known concen- trations of plankton was determined and the relationship between the number of 41 planktonts and the absorption obtained. (3) The vertical distribution of the plankton in a given habitat was deter- mined from the absorption curves of water samples taken at various depths down to 20 metres (obtained just after sunset), the maximum concentration being found at 10 m. The method used was to pass a parallel beam of light from an incandescent lamp horizontally through a sample of water contained in a pyrex tube. The transmitted light was picked up by a quartz spectrograph. The standard plates were Made by means of a new screen method.

M. W. SMITH 1. A comparative study of the conditions in the Chamcook lakes. A study of the physical factors shows that the conditions in Welch lake were quite different from those in either Gibson or Second Chamcook. Whereas the water in Welch lake became strongly stratified in the summer, a strong wind circulated the water of the other two at this season. Since the bottom of Welch lake is composed of a richer organic ooze than is found in the others, and also since the water is much more definitely stratified, the lower strata of this lake became depleted of oxygen, and the acidity, expressed as pH, reached a comparatively low value. On the whole, the same plankton species occurred in all three lakes, but in varying abundance, as exemplified by the very large production of Holopedium gibberum in Welch lake during the early summer. All the lakes showed a sudden increase of plankton in spring, but the quantity vas maintained at a higher level during the summer months in Gibson and Second lakes than in Welch. This is likely due, in part at least, to the continued mixing in the former bodies of water. 2. The distribution of plankton in Gibson lake. When a comparison is made in the quantities from station to station on the same day, and from week to week, a great irregularity is noted. (1) The horizontal distribution was very uneven. Surface tows show that generally, when the amount was high in shallow water, it was high in the deeper. (2) The plankton taken at 3-4 metres at station 2 exhibited a fluctuation in amount similar to the surface on many occasions. This substantiates the idea of a general irregular horizontal distribution. (3) However, in some instances, the quantity for the deeper water was high, when that for the surface was low. A vertical movement in that area is indicated. (4) A periodicity in the plankton was demonstrated. The cycle was approx- imately monthly. However, as noted above, when a maximum occurred in shallow water, a minimum was found at the deeper station. A demonstration of this irregular distribution is important, since it illustrates the inadequacy of a few tows in order to draw conclusions as to the plankton pro- ductivity of a lake. Also it indicates that a study of the shallow water is essen- tial to ascertain what amount of plankton is available for plankton-feeding organisms which, on the whole, are found in those areas. 3. The effects of small aniounts of fertilizer upon the plankton growth in experi- mental ponds. One pound of herring meal was added to one of two similar experimental concrete ponds (B series), and also a comparative amount to one of two similar earthen ponds (N seriés). The water supply for all was the same. An equal number of plankton organisms was added to each of the B series. The members of the .N series also received a comparative number. In the B series, the beneficial effects of fertilization were evident. A larger amount of plankton and a greater variation in the physical factors occurred in the fertilized pond. A scarcity in the number of species of plants and animals indicates that certain factor, or factors, were limiting. The pH value; since it was consistently high, may have been the most restrictive. In the N series, the effect of the fertilizer was very pronounced, as shown by both a greater plankton production and variation in the range of the physical • et..1.,247.

42

factors in the fertilized pond. Although numbers of entomostracans were taken b( in the unfertilized pond, their rate of increase was much slower. Plant growth, especially filamentous Algae, was notably larger in the fertilized pond. 4 5 4. The effects of large amounts of fertilizer upon the plankton growth in experi- mental concrete ponds. This investigation was carried out in the A series of H concrete ponds, Al, A2, and A3. Ponds Al and A2 were heavily fertilized during the summer of 1928, the former with 1,000 pounds of salt-water mussels, the latter with 1,000 pounds of cow manure. Pond A3 has received overflows from these a two ponds on various occasions, but no fertilizer has been added directly. The cc effects of this procedure are still very marked, but as might be expected, are least in pronounced in pond A3. The conditions during 1931, as a result of this fertil- ization, may be summarized as follows. se (1) There was an -immense production of both plant and animal growth. This production was irregular, one or two forms producing a maximum growth tr at any one time. er (2) Great variations occurred in the physical factors, depending, aside from fri various outside meteorological influences, upon the plankton growth and the ar stage and rate of decomposition. (3) The number of species in the fauna was quite limited. This indicates gt that, although the forms that were present gave large quantities, the conditions ca were unfavourable for the production of many species of plankton organisms that is might be expected to occur. fc It is concluded that such a heavy fertilization was beneficial for producing large numbers of any species which might occur, but, that this production was \V very irregular and subject to marked fluctuations. 5. The effect of fertilizing Gibson lake. During the season of 1930, Gibson lake was fertilized with about 15 tons of salt-water mussels (ilytilus edolis). al: This material was confined to a restricted area at the shore and in shallow water. A comparison of the quantity of plankton taken during the two seasons, 1930 and 1931, in Welch, Gibson and Second Chamcook lakes shows: (1) that re Welch lake, which lies above Gibson in the series, gave approximately the same results in both seasons, (2) that Gibson lake exhibited a greater production in 1931, especially during the late spring and the summer, (3) that Second Chamcook as lake, which receives the drainage from Gibson, produced a marked increase in lo quantity, also especially during the late spring and the summer. a.% Since the amount found in Welch lake remained nearly the same, while the other two lakes showed increases, it is inferred that the fertilization was effective. ta ra J. A. STEVENSON ce The Fundy scallop fishery. The Giant scallop (Placopecten grandis Solander) ci. is the subject of an important fishery, the economic value of which is high to the al Fundy area, up to 84 per cent. of the total Atlantic Canadian scallop catch being le yearly taken there. tit The capture of scallops is effected by specially constructed scallop-drags ar drawn along the sea bottom by a powerfully-engined boat, which at Digby is in many cases also specially designed for the work. la The main areas of distribution are from southwest of Brier island to Parkers Si cove, in Nova Scotia ; and south and southeast of Grand Manan island in New ti: Brunswick. Less extensive areas exist off Lurcher shoal and along the northern ur shore of the bay from Campobello island to point Lepreau, including the Wolves. ar The history of the Fundy scallop fishery dates from 1895, and from 1895 to tu 1920 scallops were landed in small quantities solely from the northern shore of the bay. In 1920, the Digby fishery began. and very large quantities were landed fo in Digby and Annapolis counties, increasing till 1927, but since then, due to the Ei state of the market, decreasing considerably. la The future possibilities of the scallop fishery lie chiefly in the creation of a 43 better market, by advertisement and wider distribution of products. The waste portion of the flesh should be utilised for food, possibly by the manufacture of "scallop-paste."

H. TAIT Food for brook trout. Fish hatcheries are faced with the problem of finding a cheap adequate diet for brook trout which can be conveniently fed. Fifteen comllnations of foods were fed to trout kept in separate troughs with fifty fish in each, and a comparison- made upon the basis of weight increase and mortality. Each ration was incorporated in a jelly made from either animal gelatine or the seaweed Irish moss. Provisional results are as follows. Feeding the food in jell form kept the troughs cleaner and ensured that the food did not immediately separate on entering the water. The inert bulk provided by the Irish moss when added to fresh beef liver or lung appeared .to be beneficial. The fish had a better appear- ance and were more active than those fed only upon beef liver. Dried butter- milk or dry lactalbumin with either Irish moss or gelatine is inadequate. Animal gelatine shows no evidence of providing any valuable food material. Dry lung can largely replace fresh meat with no bad effect. Variety of foods in one ration is beneficial. Dry lung, dry buttermilk and gelatine appear to be an adequate fcod. This will require confirmation in future work.

W. TEMPLEMAN 1. Growth rate of lobsters. Theoretically the best time to catch lobsters would be at the end of the rapid growth period. In imposition of size limits it is also necessary to know how many years it will take the smallest lobsters that can be caught, to reach the size limit. If it takes too many years the decrease due to natural causes may counterbalance the increase in size and weight and no good result from the size limit except to allow more lobsters to mature. ' The percentage increase in length on moulting was determined from carapace measurements for four lobsters in the Magdalen islands (first moult for the year) as from 10.1 to 18.4 per cent. and for 19 lobsters at Point du Chene, N.B. (small lobsters at least second moult for the year) as from 4.5 to 14.5 per cent. The average increase was slightly less than 10 per cent. In five cases where both carapace and total length measurements were taken, the increase as determined by carapace measurement was always greater, ranging from 2-6 per cent. greater than that as determined by total length. A certain amount of growth in length thus probably occurs between moults, espe- cially during the weeks previous to moulting, by stretching of the joints of the abdomen, thus the existing growth tables based on individual moults and total length measurements before and after moulting may need revision. In North- umberland strait during the past summer the lobsters over 9 inches moulted once and those under 9 inches at least twice. 2. Lagoons of the _Magdalen islands as lobster sanctuaries. Since 1894 the lagoons of the Magdalen islands have been reserved by law as lobster sanctuaries. Since fall fishing was prohibited there has been no fishing in these lagoons. Sta- tistics show that the catch of lobsters in the Magdalen island waters has kept up as well as, or better than, on any other part of the coast. If these sanctuaries are directly responsible for preventing depletion in this area, the idea of sanc- tuaries may be applied on other parts of the coast. The temperature over the whole of Pleasant bay was found to be suitable for successful lobster breeding and the temperature of House Harbour, Grand Entry and of Harbour Basque lagoons even more suitable. Salinities inside the lagoons were apparently similar to those outside. Lobsters were plentiful over a large part of House Harbour lagoon, a catch

1, • 44 of 13 to 14 lobsters in a trap was not uncommon. Of the 1,500 lobsters caught in House Harbour lagoon, July 11 to August 10, below 23 cms., there were about three times as many males as females, and above 23 cms. over ten times as many males as females (23 cms. is about the general size at first egg extrusion in this region). This occurred to a lesser extent in the catches of new shelled lobsters in Malpeque bay and in Northumberland strait. A small percentage of females with eggs hatched or hatching were found in the lagoon and one with new eggs. No definite evidences were discovered of movement of lobsters to and from the lagoon, and if those in the lagoon had entered it, they must have done so early in the year. This was also indicated by the condition of the shell. From the time v.'e started fishing in the lagoon on July 11, all the lobsters except an occasional large male or a berried female had new shells of such character as to indicate that moulting must have occurred in the majority of cases at least a week previously and probably two weeks. In Pleasant bay outside the entrance to the lagoon moulting was just beginning by July 11 and it was only by July 25 that any large percentage of lobsters had moulted, moulting being practically over by August 5. 3. Shell condition of lobster during fall fishing season. There has been much argument regarding the suitability of the period, August 16 to October 15, for fishing in the western Northumberland strait region. Neighbouring districts are asking for a similar season, claiming that they will catch more lobsters, more easily, and that an addition to the fall district will relieve the pressure in the live lobster markets during the spring. Shell conditions were noted in 12,000 lobsters, August 20 to September 22. (1) When the first measurements were taken on August 20, from 50 to 70 per cent. of the market lobsters (over 9 inches) were buckle or rubber-shelled and totally unfit for shipment. The small lobsters were new shelled and hard shelled. About the end of August all the lobsters under nine inches moulted a second time in the Point du Chene - Summerside area, while only from 50 to 70 per cent. of the small lobsters had moulted a second time in the West point and Port Howe waters, by September 12 and 22. Those new shelled lobsters had little meat in their claws and were thus not very remunerative to the canner. (2) The exact weights of 500 lobsters in the period August 27 to Septem. ber 1 and of 500 in the period September 15 to 19, together with other information, indicate that at least 30 per cent. more lobsters of the same size were required to pack a case of lobsters this year at Point du Chene from, say, August 27 to Sep- tember 15, than during the first week of the fall season, August 16 to 23, or than in almost any locality during the spring season. (3) Also, in a district where the smaller lobsters moult twice during the year, the fall season results in the capture of a large number of small lobsters after the first moult, whereas in the case of a spring season they would have increased 10 per cent. in length by the second moult, in the fall. 4. Lobster measurements. To determine the best lobster-breeding areas by the comparative abundance of small lobsters. An area with little successful breeding would need a high size limit, while in areas with very successful breeding the lobsters may be overcrcewded with regard to food supply and a lower size limit would be necessary. The measurements also show what percentage of the total catch would be affected in various localities by the application of any particular size limit, and afford a statistical basis for future work on decreases in size due to more intensive fishing. About 50,000 lobsters were measured. These measurements were spread over 60 localities, the average sizes calculated in the different localities having a probable error of about 0.1 ems. Measurements were divided into male and female. Measurements of 231 berried lobsters indicate that in southern Nova Scotia, from Clarkes harbour west, the smallest size at egg extrusion is in geneial at least 11 inches, while the comparative smallest size in the gulf region would be about 8 inches. , 45

5. Lobster tagging. In all lobster conservation programmes it is most diffi- cult to persuade the fisherman that by illegal actions he is injuring his own fishery and not some fishery hundreds of miles away. The tagging should give an idea of the extent of the lobster's movements. Other problems which last summer's tagging is expected to help to solve are (1) movement of lobsters from the lagoons in the Magdalen islands, (2) relative activity of male, non-berried female, and berried lobsters, (3) movement of lobsters into deep water in late fall, and (4) size attained when moulting occurs only once a year. About 2,200 new shelled lobsters were tagged, 950 in the Magdalen islands, 450 in Malpeque bay, P.E.I., 450 in Northumberland strait, 140 off North cape, P.E.I., and 140 six miles east of Pugwash, N.S. Most of these lobsters were placed so as to be captured during the spring season of 1932. About 70 to 80 t tags already returned fail to show migrations greater than 6 to 8 miles, although t . • individual lobsters have travelled from two to four miles in a single night. V. D. VLADYKOV 1. Fishes fronz the Hudson bay region. This investigation was based on a study of six collections of fish (about 4,000 specimens) made from 1919 to 1930 by Messrs. W. G. Walton (1919), Frits Johansen (1920, 1927, 1929), B. W. Taylor (1928), H. B. Hachey and S. J. Walker (1930). This material is composed of 42 different forms, 39 species, 33 genera, and 16 families of fishes. It was found that the most important commercial fish for this region are principally anadromous and rarely marine: (a) whitefish, tullibee, and sturgeon all around James bay, (b) brook trout chiefly on the east coast of James bay, (c) arctic trout and Greenland cod in Hudson strait and Hudson bay. 2. Pollock fishery in the Fundy area. Pollock in this region stand in the ninth place as regards market value, but in the sixth position with regard to f quantity "caught and landed." During the ten 3-ears, 1920-1929, the average yearly pollock catch was 5,513,400 pounds which represents 63.2 per cent. of the whole Canadian catch, or 35 per cent. of the total pollock catch in Canada and United States. The best catches were taken on the east coast of Grand Manan and between Campobello and Deer island on the New Brunswick side, and near Brier island on the Nova Scotia coast. It is suggested that pollock in the Fundy area are divided into two inde- pendent groiips:—(a) New Brunswick side, and (b) Nova Scotia side. For the first group, the chief month of capturè is September, while for the second, July and August. The New Brunswick fish probably spawn near the entrance to Massa- chusetts bay. However, the Nova Scotia pollock seem to have other spawging grounds which are south and southwest on, or near, Georges bank. During the five years, the pollock catch in New Brunswick waters has greatly decreased, but on the Nova Scotia side the decrease has not been ap- preciable. 3. Halibut fishery in the Fundy area. The halibut taken in this region during the last ten years, 19201 1929, represent only 2.5 per cent. of the total Canadian catch of this fish. Ninety-two per cent. were taken on the Pacific coast. The fishery in the Fundy area during 1928 occupied the seventh position as regards market value, but the eighth with regard to the quantity "caught and landed." The average catch of halibut in the Fundy area for the ten-year period, 1920-1929 inclusive, vas ■816,700 pounds, which represent 32 per cent. of the average catch for the whole Atlantic coast of Canada. The halibut in the Fundy area possess different sizes, indicating that this region represents à virgin condition. 46

The chief catch of halibut in the Fundy area is made on the banks at the the entrance of the bay (Browns and Cape Sable island). Pubnico, Yarmouth and foot. Digby are the principal landing ports for halibut. " sinc( H. C. WHITE I I that • I trou 1. Is there danger of artificially hatched trout fry starring after planting? The fish cultural operations. It fate of fry- after planting is an important phase of in tf has often been stated that trout fry starve after planting. of fo Several small lots of fry were retained until the yolk sacs were completely These fry were then planted in th absorbed as well as the fat reserves in the body. the in streams where it was known that suitable food was available. Some hours different streams, and pre- Sino after the fry were planted they were seined from the salm served for stomach analyses. When these were later examined it was found that the food organisms taken part that the fry had secured an abundance of food and mea.5 were comparable with those taken by naturally hatched fry in various streams. This experiment shows that there is no danger of trout" fry starving when been retained the properly planted in a suitable stream, even though they have storm without food for a long period before being planted. or sl 2. Artificial spawning beds for brook trout. In a previous summary it was stated that an artificial gravel redd in a box had been supplied with spring water and and that trout had entered the box and spawned in the gravel in the fall of 1930. in the box. The the This past spring it was found that the eggs had hatched deve first free-swimming fry were removed on March 22 and a further lot was seined When we on a from the box on April 1. After this no further removals were made. late visited the box on June 19 we found 27 healthy fingerlings in the box. This experiment demonstrates the possibility of supplying spawning beds spawning beds appa along streams or ponds which have no spawning beds or have esttn which are subject to silting or other unfavourable factors. ing r 3. Food of brook trout fingerlings and sticklebacks in Forbes creek, 1930. Fish food in a body of water may be abundant and yet a large part of it may not be different feeding 18, available to a particular species of fish. Different fish have Augt habits and secure different food organisms. The At the conclusion of the Forbes creek experiment, trout fingerlings and : Having previously deter- Tagg sticklebacks were removed for stomach analyses. in th mined the abundance of the various food organisms in the stream it was desired a fem to know to what extent the fishes were feeding upon these organisms. The analyses of the stomach contents of these fish indicate that many of the most wate had abundant organisms were not available to the trout. However, the trout spaw a considerable number of terrestrial insects which had fallen into the secured water. The sticklebacks seem to be better foragers for most aquatic food and had secured plankton organisms, none of which had been taken by the trout fingerlings. Since other analyses have shown that adult trout may feed to a large extent upon sticklebacks and since the sticklebacks are able to secure classes bf food organisms- not readily available to the trout, it would seem that the stickleback (G. aculeatus) is not an undesirable fish in trout waters. in th 4. Fish food in Forbes creek, P.E.I. The amount of fish food in a body of tiona water is an important factor in determining the number of fish which the _body stud( of water can support. In the Forbes creek planting experiments it was desirable to know to what extent the fish in the experimental section had depleted the food. At the conclusion of the planting experiment in 1930, quantitative samples of the food organisms of the stream were collected. The organisms from these samples were identified, sorted and weighed. This analysis showed that the gravel rapids were exceedingly rich in food, yielding over five thousand organins- per square foot with a weight of 26.31 gms. The pool bottoms, among algae, yielded a somewhat smaller number of different organisms but with approximately 47 the same weight. Large stone surfaces yielded over one thousand per square foot. This analysis, although it does not represent the entire food of the stream since it does not take into account terrestrial forms falling into the water, shows that there was abundance of food in the stream after it had supported the planted trout throughout the summer. 5. The salmon of certain streanis of Cumberland county, N.S. Salmon fishing in the bay of Fundy is one of the important industries. There is an abundance of food suitable for adult salmon and therefore many more salmon could mature in the bay than at present. Plantings of salmon fry and natural reproduction in the streams have not been sufficient to increase the numbers of adult salmon. Since the young salmon spends a number of years in the stream and the adult salmon ascends the stream to spawn it is necessary to have a knowledge of this part of their life-history before logical recommendations can be made concerning measures to increase the numbers of salmon going to the sea. Observations indicate that during the first summer salmon fry remain near the places where they were hatched. They were found most frequently among stones in the shallow parts of the rapids. They were not found in the deep pools or sluggish parts of the stream. Salmon parr one year or older frequent both the swift parts of the streams and the deeper pools and apparently migrate considerable distances up or down the stream. By the middle of August the spermaries of the male parr have developed to a stage where they distend the abdomen and the parr begin to take on a spawning coloration. Parr may be found milting from mid-September to late November. The smolt stage was not found in any of the streams examined but large parr apparently approaching the smolt stage were taken in the channel pools of the estuary. Silvery male parr from the estuary ascended the river with the spawn- ing run of adult male and female salmon from the sea. Adult salmon were taken in a weir near the mouth of Apple river from July 18, when the weir began to operate, to August 30, when operations ceased. By August 4, salmon were following the tides in and out of the estuary of Apple river. The first adult salmon in the river, above tide water, were observed on August 14. Tagged salmon which were retaken gave information regarding their migrations in the stream. Many of the female salmon did not ascend the river until ripe and a few days after depositing their eggs, dropped down stream to the head of tide water. Although salmon entered the estuaries of streams which appear suitable for spawning they do not ascend above tide water in many of the streams.

FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (ATLANTIC) HALIFAX, N.S., 1931

The work of the Station in the main consists of investigations of problems in the preparation of fish and other marine products for market, and of educa- tional work in conducting classes for 1shermen, fishery officers and university students. The staff during 1931 consisted of the following: Dr. A. H. Leim, Director. Dr. S. A. Beatty, Associate Biochemist. Mr. Ernest Hess, Assistant Bacteriologist. Dr. H. R. Chipman, Scientific Assistant (Chemistry). Miss A. M. Wilson, Technical Assistant (Chemistry). Mr. A. S. McFarlane, Curator. 48

SEASONAL to Mr. D. B. Finn, Scientific Assistant. pot Mr. N. E. Gibbons, " De Mr. W. \V. Johnston, " 44 Pri Mr. W. \V. Stewart, " cer INVESTIGATIONS sea hig During recent years, while it has been impossible to concentrate completely the on one subject of investigation, the tendency has been to stress refrigeration wit problems. During 1931, smoking problems were given more attention, and the year has seen a gradual transfer of major attention from refrigeration to smoking. so At a meeting of the Advisory Committee in August, it was recommended that wh( considerable attention be given to problems in connection with salt fish. Up to of t the present it has not been possible to go far in this direction. dry 1. Refrigeration. Dr. Beatty elaborated on the work of Mr. Johnston in 1930, which had to do with the changes. in solubility of the protein of frozen fish con muscle under different conditions of storage. This was in an attempt to throw sevi further light on the increase in "drip" or liquid exudate on thawing, which is Mc noted for longer periods of holding frozen fish. The problem was attacked by air, determining the amount of dissolved protein in inuscle press juice removed from the frozen fish after various periods of storage. The period of time of storage ranged the from a few days to two years. Ope A further attack on this problem of the changes which occur when frozen fish are stored was made by investigating the bound water in fish muscle, anj witl attempting to find whether it changed in quantity during storage. This work lion was undertaken by Mr. Finn, who used the dilatometric method of estimating stea bound water, and by Mr. Stewart with calorimetric methods. Mr. Finn's method involved measurements of volume change when the muscle froze and calculation the therefrom of the quantity of water frozen as compared with the total quantity of but water known to be present from moisture determinations. Mr. Stewart used sim measurements of heat changes which occurred when the fish muscle passed from igni a temperature below its freezing point to one above as a means of calculating the SaW quantity of water frozen. Using these methods he investigated the stability of dea: this bound water during storage. srnc Frozen brines are often of value for refrigerating small compartments such dev as may be desired for holding frozen fish. It was desired to know something will more about the heat capacity of such brines, and the temperature range where the change in heat capacity was most marked in order that these brines could the be utilized to the best advantage in holding frozen fish. To this end Dr. Chipman at t made some determinations of the heat capacity of a eutectic mixture of sodium tion chloride, using calorimetric methods. curi Mr. Gibbons continued the investigations which he started in 1930, on the 20,C growth of spoilage bacteria in frozen fish stored at —5°C. and other temperatures. wor This work is being continued over a long storage period. In addition to deter- the mining changes in the bacterial content of the frozen fish, the chemical changes are also being followed by determinations of non-protein nitrogen, volatile base the and ammonia nitrogen. still Mr. Hess has compiled a bibliography of papers concerning the effects- of low obti temperatures on bacteria, having in mind the effects of cold storage temperatures on bacteria which cause spoilage of frozen fish. A survey of the literature is being made pending the witl completion of suitable constant temperature incubators for by use in carrying out investigations on the viability and activity of type organisms the under these conditions. vidi Although not an investigation, it may be mentioned here that ice fillets of haddock and cod were shipped to Toronto during January and February in order hun e.

49 to provide a retail firm with a standard product. Slightly over a thousand pounds were put up and shipped. Later in the year, in co-operation with the Department's officers, small introductory shipments of ice fillets were made to Prince Edward Island. 2. Smoking. The smoking of fish by the industry has been attended with certain difficulties in securing uniformity of product from day to day. At certain season smoking by the old methods was virtually impossible. This was due to high humidity and temperature of the atmosphere. These conditions required the heating of the air to a point beyond temperatures that the'fish would stand without losing tensile strength, if drying was to be accomplished. The solution of these difficulties seemed to lie in the conditioning of the air so as to produce uniform drying from day to day. The question arose as to whether the sheen which the trade demanded could be produced on the surfaces of the fish in the absence of the radiant heat and possibly the smoke which the drying fires ordinarily used produce. An air conditioner, steam heater and fan were connected in series with a compartment which was built in the demonstration building, and in which se \ eral hundred pounds of fillets could be hung. Tests were carried out by Mr. McFarlane, Mr. Hess and Dr. Leim in the drying of the fish by using warm dry air, such as could be produced at any time by the equipment. The effects on the rate of drying and the sheen were studied. Various methods of introducing

the air into the drying compartment were tried, and the effect on the economy of t • operation and uniformity of drying studied. à It was soon evident that there was no difficulty in producing a suitable sheen with steam-heated air. This is of some importance, even apart from air condi- tioning, because of the difference in cost of heating the air by wood fires and by steam. Following this result, experiments were carried out by Mr. McFarlane on the production of smoke outside the smoke house, and its injection and distri- bution in the house. Three types of smoke producers have been tried, the simplest being a large metal box open at the top, containing sawdust, which is ignited and kept burning by means of an air stream blown down on top of the sawdust. While this box worked well in the initial stages, eventually a great deal of heatwas produced, and combustion became too complete to produce much smoke. The construction of a larger model, somewhat modified from one devised by Dr. LeB. Cooper, has been commenced. In this machine the sawdust will be continuously fed and ignited. In an effort to demonstrate the practical application of air conditioning to the drying of fish for smoking, the Depa'rtment of Fisheries undertook to install at the plant of the Lunenburg Sea Products, Ltd., Lunenburg, N.S., air condi- tioning equipment connected to one of the smoke houses. The equipment pro- cured consisted of an air washer, aerofin heater and fan capable of handling 20,000 cubic feet of air per minute. In addition, there was the necessary duct work to make connections to and in the smoke house. Mr. McFarlane supervised the installation of the equipment and also its operation in the initial stages, making such changes as were necessary to produce uniform results throughout the smoke house. The general result was satisfactory, but some problems are still presented in the dffing of large haddies where there is more difficulty in obtaining uniform drying than with fillets. 3. Salting and drying. Several experimental lots of split cod fish were salted with representative fishery salts, including the newest Lucas vein salt produced by the Malagash Salt Company. The progress of the curing was followed, and the appearance of the resultant fish compared. These experimental lots pro- vided material for the experiments mentioned in the next paragraph. Dr. Chipman devised two laboratory boxes in which the temperature and humidity could be Controlled. Information was obtained from the meteorolog-

4 50 ical offices of Porto Rico and Brazil as to the average temperature and humidity conditions prevailing in these countries where dried fish are marketed. Similar bibi conditions were produced in the boxes, and samples of fish and salt were exposed enc( to them. It was thought that some of the salts might produce a product which mac would not take up moisture as readily as others. No significant differences IN ere of tl found between the behaviour of the fish which had been cured by means of the different salts available. The result is not considered to be conclusive and pos- sibly a better type of experiment would show different results. 4. Canning. Mr. Hess examined from time to time experimental cans of I I cam lobster which he had packed in 1930 for the purpose of determining: (1) the cedi resistance of the different types of enamelled cans to plain and acid pickle; (2) the development of magnesium-ammonium-phosphate crystals; and (3) the dre development of pink sediment and slime in the cans. He also investigated the fora effects of freezing on canned lobster during storage. Mr. Johnston continued the investigation of the effect of canning dying held lobsters on the blackening of the product. He studied the amount of volatile the sulphur present in the muscle both before and after cooking and at different grad stages of the process of dying of the animal. He investigated the pH changes which go on in the lobster muscle during the dying process, and the effect of offic differences in pH on the blackening of the cans. lobs Mr. Hess investigated the condition, after 13 months' storage, of cans of took lobster put up by Mn Cook and himself during the summer of 1930 in a study lecti of blackening and the effect of canning weak or dying lobsters. It w. 5. Fish meal. Dr. Chipman gave some attention to the production of meal of tl from oily fishes such as the herring and dogfish. Previous attempts to remove tion oil from these meals by mechanical means had failed to reduce the oil content as much as seemed necessary. Dr. Chipman attempted to remove the oil from meal Jose made from both of the above fishes by solvents. In this connection he used oper acetone and naphtha as oil solvents, combining their use with various periods of this cooking the raw material. 1 He also investigated the removal of water by acetone. oper Dr. Beatty has collected information from the federal and provincial Depart- prop ments of Agriculture dealing with the value of fish meal in the feeding of animais, to fc with a view to assisting firms in advertising and selling their product in Canada at the present time when the foreign market situation is so difficult. As it seemed exhil desirable to be able to determine the calcium content of fish meals with some Lung rapidity, methods were looked into by which this might be accomplished. A of th satisfactory method was found. The iodine content should also be known, and frozE a suitable method of determination is being sought. the , Routine analysis of numerous samples of fish meal submitted by the trade Stati has been made by Miss Wilson and Dr. Beatty. 6. Other laboratory investigations. Mr. Gibbons has continued his investi- El Mid( gations of organisms present in the digestive tracts of marine fishes and has made g I Stati a bacteriological study of some 115 samples. Experiments are being undertaken to ascertain the most economrcal and I I on ti satisfactdry methods of sterilizing premises where salt fish are handled. The RI Biol( "red" organism has been increasingly important in causing bosses in recent years and information should be available as to how it may best be eradicated from 11 thre( infected buildings and equipment. - On a request from the Atlantic Biological Station, Mr. Hess made cultures from affected fish during an outbreak of "fin rot" at the Bedford hatchery. The various organisms found were isolated and are being cultured pending their use by Dr. M'Gonigle. for f On a similar request Dr. Beatty studied the isoelectric point of salmon egg This proteins. It had been suggested that the death of fish eggs in some of the acid' Twe waters found in the Maritime Provinces was due to the pH of the water causing New precipitation of the protein. The work done was only of a preliminary nature. cour: 51

7. Bulletin on the nutritive value of fish as food. Dr. Beatty collected a bibliography of papers dealing with the value of fish as food. Some 175 refer- ences have been included in this bibliography. Following this, an effort was made to consult as many as possible of these papers. A bulletin giving a resumé of the subject as presented in these references has been prepared.

FIELD WORK 1. Lobster cannery inspection. Mr. Hess inspected and graded 20 lobster canneries in western Nova Scotia which had not been covered during the pre- ceding year. On the completion of this first uniform grading of the canneries, Mr. Hess drew up a new grading form in which inspection of canning operations would form a part. The previous form only took equipment into account. The new form was discussed by the Maritime lobster canners at a meeting held in Charlottetown in early December and some amendments were made on the basis of this discussion. The form as it now stands will be used for further grading of the canneries by the Fishery Inspectors. 2. Investigation of lobster collecting boat. At the request of Departmental officers, arrangements were made to have Mr. McFarlane accompany one of the lobster collecting boats on a trip in June from Canso to Boston. On this trip he took temperatures of the live lobsters in different parts of the hold of the col- lecting boat and followed the condition of the animais from loading to unloading. It was found that, under the conditions of icing which were in use, the temperature of the lobsters was between 40 and 50°F. and that there was considerable varia- tion in different parts of the hold. 3. Fishermen's bail freezer, Marie Joseph, N.S. Dr. Leim visited Marie Joseph in late July at the request of the Department to aid in correcting the operation of an ice and salt cold storage which had been erected there. Following this visit, Mr. McFarlane spent over a week at Marie Joseph following up the operation of the storage and of the brine freezing tank. He succeeded in getting proper storage temperatures and instructed the local men in the proper procedure to follow in using the freezing tank. 4. Exhibitions. The Station took part in the Department of Fisheries ' exhibit at the exhibition held in Halifax from August 29 to September 5, and at Lunenburg from September 15 to 19. At Halifax the exhibit featured the origin of the vitamin content of cod liver oil, "red" bacteria of salt fish, canned brine- frozen mackerel and fish meal. At Lunenburg fish meal and the life-history of the oyster were featured. Dr. Needier, of the Prince Edward Island Marine Station provided the material for the oyster exhibit. 5. Miscellaneous. Dr. Leim carried out a few minor examinations at the Middleton and Bedford hatcheries at the request of the Atlantic Biological Station. Dr. Chipman has followed the installation and operation of thermographs on two passenger boats operating out of Halifax. This work is for the Atlantic Biological Station. Hydrographic observations have been continued at the King's wharf and at three nearby stations. At two of these regular plankton tows have been made.

EDUCATIONAL WORK I. Course for fishermen. Following the custom of several years past, a course for fishermen was offered at the Station from January 28 to March 10, 1931. This course was open to bona fide fishermen between the ages of 17 and 35. T1,venty-three fishermen attended the course. In addition four men sent by the Newfoundland Department of Marine and Fisheries were in attendance. The courses and instructors were as follows:— • . _ .

52

(a) Preparation of dried and boneless fish—Mr. George R. Earl and Mr. James Coolen (part time). Anon: (b) Preparation of pickled fish—Mr. Robert Gray. (c) Motor engines—Mr. C. Johnson. Beatt O'Hara. Hess, (d) Navigation—Capt. H. M. Langs (e) Science—Messrs. Beatty, Chipman, Hess, Leim and McFarlane. Lem, (f) Natural resources—Professor A. S. Walker, Professor W. V. Longley and Dr. M. Cumming. The services of Messrs. Earl and Gray were given by the Fisheries Depart- ment, and those of Dr. Cumming and Professor Longley by the Provincial Department of Agriculture. The others mentioned and not on the regular staff of the Station, were employed for the requisite time. Nineteen men passed An examination was held at the end of the course. S. A. the examination, four of them obtaining honors. 2. Dalhousie course for B.Sc. in fisheries. During the spring academic term, the following classes in this course were given at the Station; there being three stud: students:— and ■ Bacteriology of fish curing—Mr. Hess (seven hours per week). the s Biochemistry of fish curing—Dr. Beatty (eight hours per week). sepal No courses were given in the fall term as there were no fourth year students the in fisheries. hand 3. Course for Departmental officers. A course of four weeks, from November of "d 17 to Deecember 14, was held at the Station for new officers of the Department of Fisheries, and certain others who failed to pass the examinations at the earlier musc courses. Eighteen officers were in attendance. In this course instruction in the years preparation of pickled fish and inspection methods were particularly stressed in the p view of the application of these subjects to the work of the officers. vidw The courses and instructors were as follows:— vario (a) Preparation of pickled fish—Mr. R. Gray. was c (b) Preparation of dried and boneless fish—Mr. G. R. Earl. chan (c) Biology—Dr. A. H. Leim. of so (d) Physics and chemistry—Dr. H. R. Chipman. satur (e) Bacteriology—Mr. E. Hess. (f) Principles of canning—Mr. E. Hess. gatio (g) Principles of smoking—Mr. E. Hess. impo (h) Refrigeration—Dr. A. H. Leim. gressi An examination in these subjects was held at the completion of the course. are fr a ma: DEVELOPMENT OF THE STATION bumi During the early part of the year, all but one of the laboratories in the new the fi building were fitted up for use with the usual equipment of cupboards, tables, fume cupboards and plumbing. uncle] An air compressor was installed and compressed air was made available to the C the laboratories. tratic A gas-fired steam boiler with automatic control has been installed in the and ( demonstration building, and steam made available for the cannery and smoking mainl experiments. in cal for ti The large brine freezing tank, which was constructed in 1927, was not built to withstand corrosion for long. It began to leak so badly this year that repairs absen were out of the question. It was therefore dismantled and a smaller steel tank foods has been installed to serve as a brine cooler. The ammonia coils from the former tank were utilized in the new one. The new tank is heavily insulated and pro- consu vides a ready source of cold brine at all times. Arrangements are being made doubi to conduct brine from this tank to an insulated constant temperature room in the of fisl boxes possil main building. Mr. Hess has developed a series of constant temperature cheni in this room for operation at sub-zero temperatures. 53

PUBLICATIONS

Anonymous—Methods of handling fish. II. Instruction in curing and packing pickled mackerel Bull. 19, 1-17. Beatty, S. A.—The cause and prevention of drip in frozen fish. Prog. Rept. Atl. 2, 12. Hess, Ernest—The canning of brine-frozen mackerel. Bull. 24, 1-13. Langstroth, G. 0.—Thermal investigations on fish muscle. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6, 375-389. Leirn, A. II.—Prevention of drying m cold storage. Prog. Rept. Atl. 1, 7-8. Preparation of cod liver oil by freezing. Prog. Rept. At!., I, 9. ', Cold storage changes in frozen fish. Prog. Rept. At!. 2, 7-8. Course for fishermen. Prog. Rept. Atl. 2, 13. Preventing freezer burn during storage. Fishing Gazette 48, 23 and 26.

INVESTIGATORS' SUMMARIES S. A. BEATTY 1. Water exchange in fish muscle. The following is a continuation of the study of the "drip" or exudation of water from fish after freezing and thawing, and deals with the solubility changes that go on in the muscle proteins during the storage period. When the fish are frozen, the water and the proteins are separated. If the proteins are soluble when the ice crystals melt, a great deal of the water will be taken up as the proteins pass into solution. If, on the other hand, the proteins are rendered insoluble during the storage period, the amount of "drip" will be materially increased. The first material examined for changes in solubility of the proteins was the muscle press juice. Stored fillets, the storage period of which ranged from two years to a week, were minced and pressed, after which the protein in solution in the press juice was determined. It was found that the differences among indi- vidual fillets of the same lot were greater than the average of the lots stored at various intervals. The protein in the press juice from fillets stored two years was only slightly less than that from the freshly-frozen fillets. Either there is no change in the solubility of the proteins in fish during storage, or there is a store of soluble, undissolved protein that enables the press juice to remain always saturated in protein. The solubility of the proteins in stored fillets was the subject of an investi- gation by Mr. W. W. Johnston during the summer of 1930. Because of the importance of this data, the work was repeated and enlarged. There is a pro- gressive lessening in the solubility of the myoalbumin, starting as soon as the fish are frozen and measurable after two or three days. This drop reaches practically a maximum after about four months. The drop in the solubility of the myoal- bumin agrees with the data we have on the increase in drip, on the falling off of the flavour of the stored fish, and of the toughening of the tissues. 2. The salis in fish meals. The investigation of the salts in fish meals was undertaken because of the slump in the sales of fish meals due to the collapse of the German market. The value of a meal is usually determined by the concen- tration of protein and that of phosphate as well as by the low value of salt (NaCl) and of oil. This seems inadequate for: at least two reasons. Stock foods are mainly of plant origin, and are usually about ten times as high in phosphate as in calcium. It has been shown that a r:1 ratio of calcium to phosphate provides for the best bone development, and acts as a deterrent of rickets, even in the absence of vitamin D. It is clear, therefore, that the calcium content of stock foods is of more importance than the phosphate content. Calcium is ordinarily determined gravimetrically, a very tedious and time- consuming process. The phosphate determination is also slow, tedious, and of doubtful accuracy. No dependable figures are available as to the iodine content of fish meal, as all have been obtained by ashing the meal in the air. This has possibly resulted in the volatilization of the greater part of the iodine. The chemists should supply to the industry: 54

(1) An accurate rapid method for the determination of calcium. (2) An accurate rapid method for the determination of phosphate. (3) Data as to the calcium to phosphate ratio to be expected in fish meals. (4) Data as to the iodine content of fish meals. The first and third of these requirements have been fulfilled. A titrirnetric method has been adapted to fish-meal analysis that fits in well with the general procedure and that permits an accuracy of within about 1 per cent. The calcium to phosphate ratio in fish meal is the nearest to the ideal of that of any stock food, with the possible exception of milk. There is a considerable variation in different batches, and while neither the farmers nor the food blenders at the present time realize its importance, the calcium content should be stated on all guaranteed analyses. 3. The proteins of salmon eggs. The appearance of the eggs killed by the uncommonly highly acid water of the Windsor hatchery strongly suggested an isoelectric precipitation of the proteins of the egg yolk. The deaths of eggs at the Bedford hatchery have been somewhat higher than the average of the other ,hatcheries, and here, too, an acid water is encountered. The dead eggs were invariably white and the proteins of the yolk were precipitated. It was thought probable that the immediate cause of the death of the eggs was the isoelectric precipitation of the yolk proteins. An attempt was made to determine the isoelectric points of the proteins of the yolk. The yolks of a large number of eggs were separated from the embryos, and added to approximately an equal volume of 5%NaC1 solution. This solu- tion was dialysed in a collodion sac until salt free. The whole of the proteins were precipitated showing the absence of albumin. The precipitated protein was brought into solution with the aid of salt and the solubility was measured at various concentrations of pH. A minimum value was found in the neighbour- hood of pH 5.4, but the results were very inconclusive because of the effect of the salt used to keep the protein in solution. Undiluted egg yolk does not precipi- tate over a range between pH 4 and pH 8. The ease with which the proteins are precipitated in the presence of pure water shows that the white colour of freshly- killed eggs is due to the loss of salts resulting from an increase in the permeability of the egg membranes.

H. RITCHIE CHIPMAN 1. The heat capa,city of a eutectic mixture of sodium chloride. Some thermal data for a eutectic mixture of sodium chloride were required, and as no values were available, it was decided to determine them experimentally. • The adiabatic calorimeter which had been used for the determinations of thermal data of fish muscle was used. The eutectic mixture was made by dis- solving 23.6 gms. C.P. sodium chloride in 76.4 gms. distilled water. The method used was similar to that used in finding the heat capacity of fish muscle. The following values were obtained :— Temperature (°C.) 20 0 —10 —20 —23 —24 —25 —30 —40 Heat cap. (cals./gm./C.°) 0 15.9 24.1 41.5 42.6 70.3 83.3 92.9 97.1 2. The preparation of meal from oily fish by naphtha extraction. Some experi- ments were carried out to test a process for making meal from dogfish by naphtha 1 extraction. A frozen dogfish was cut up and cooked in a steam-jacketted kettle. Portions were removed after 30 minutes and 45 minutes 'extracted 0 cooking, and with naphtha of boiling point below 90 • The solvent was decanted off and the meal dned. Three extractions were used. The meal, which had been cooked for 30 minutes, gave a final oil content of 14.5 per cent. The meal, which had been cooked 45 minutes, had the solvent filtered off instead of decanted and the final oil content was about 4 per cent. This was repeated with herring and the final meal had an oil content of about 3 per cent. The meal was of good appearance, though slightly dark-. Experiments were carried out to determine the rapidity with which the oil was removed. A frozen herring was ground by a meat chopper, and cooked on a water bath for 30 minutes. 100 gms. were extracted by 200 gms. solvent with mechanical stirring-. Six extractions were made and each lasted for ten minutes. The filtrate from each extraction was analysed for oil content. The six extrac- tions removed about 92 per cent. of the oil, the' first extraction removing about 72 per cent. To see if the absence of water made a difference, some of the original ground fish was dried in an oven at 105° over night, and the water-free matérial extracted by naphtha as before. It was found that four extractions removed about 92 per cent., and the first extraction about 76 per cent. These results showed that a very satisfactory meal could be made with naphtha extraction from oily fish. The extractions were only of ten minutes duration, and no doubt fewer extractions of longer duration would remove the oil with the use of a smaller amount of solvent. This was found to be the case with another solvent. 3. The preparation of nzeal from oily fish by acetone extraction. Meal was prepared from herring which had an oil content of 18 per cent., and after acetone extraction the final meal showed an oil content of about 4 per cent., or, in some cases, less than 1 per cent. It was found that it was not necessary to cook the fish prior to the extraction, as the acetone coagulated the protein, as well as removed the water and oil. By drying the meal at 70°C., a meal was prepared which was almost white. The uncooked meal seems to be more flaky than the cooked material. The rapidity with which acetone removed the water and oil was determined. Frozen herring was either extracted after being ground or was cooked on a water bath for 30 minutes. Some experiments were made with cod fillets so as to extract water without oil; and some were made with dehydrated ground herring to extract oil without water. The analyses could not account for all of the water or oil present, but there were several sources of error and the results gave a suffi- ciently good approximation. Working with 100 gms. fish and 10-minute extractions of 200 gms. acetone, it was found that when water was present alone, 90 per cent, was removed in 3 extractions: water and oil present and fish cooked, 94 per cent. of the water after 2 extractions: water and oil present and fish raw, 80 per cent. after 4, and 90 per cent. after 6 extractions. Oil removal was as follows:—oil alone, 80 per cent. after 8 extractions; oil and water, fish cooked, 91 per cent. after 4 extractions; oil and water, fish raw, 93 per cent. after 4 extractions. An experiment under similar conditions but with extractions lasting 30 minutes, both water and oil present and fish cooked, gave 94 per cent. water and 73 per cent. oil removed after 2 extractions, and 98 per cent, oil removed after 3 extractions.

N. E. GIBBONS 1. A bacteriological study of frozen fillets. The drip from frozen fillets (muscle juice) was used as a medium. This was passed through a Seitz filter to sterilize, then incubated at temperatures of 5°, 0° and —5°C., either with or without inocu- lation with bacteria. Determinations were made at intervals of non-protein, volatile base and ammonia nitrogen. With sterile muscle juice there is no increase in any of these constituents after 6 to 8 weeks at 0° or —5°C. Nor is there any change in contaminated juice at —5°C. up to nine weeks (limit of experiment). However, at 0°C. there is a decided change in three weeks, all giving a putrid odour at this time. Some organisms will give a very bad odour in a week. In nine weeks the amount of N. .P.N. almost doubles. At the same time the volatile base N. increases 4 to 15 times, the ammonia N. from 6 to 16 times, depending on the organism present. At 5°C., the increase is much greater, being in the same length of time over twice 56

for N.P.N., about 30 times for volatile base N., and 40 times for ammonia. Counts made on fillets frozen in July, 1930, and stored at —5°C., show a decided increase (three to nine times as numerous in a year) in the number of organisms present. After one year colonies of red, yellow and white bacteria could be seen scattered over the surfaces. Actinomyces are present in large numbers, giving the fillets a characteristic earthy smell. 2. Lactose fermenting organisms in the feces of marine fishes. While of little significance either from a practical or sanitary point of view, it is of interest to determine whether fish in the sea harbour organisms in their intestinal canals similar to man and warm-blooded animals. The presence of B. cou i and related organisms in the intestinal contents of fresh-water fish has always been a factor complicating the sanitary examination of water. There were examined the feces of 31 haddock, 36 cod, 2 pollock, 2 sculpin I I and 1 catfish, all taken on hand lines or trawls two and a half to three miles off shore; and of 24 cunner and 17 mackerel that had been netted but handled as carefully as possible in their removal to prevent contamination. The cunner were obtained just inside Herring cove, which is lined with human habitations on either side. The mackerel were talen about two miles south of this point. • These were fall mackerel, and according to the fishermen, had probably "been playing along near the shore most of the summer." The fèces were inoculated ; into lactose broth and incubated at 37°C. Those showing gas were streaked on Endo agar. In the original cultures gas was obtained from 23 haddock, 13 cod, 2 sculpin, 16 cunner and 12 mackerel. However, pure cultures of organisms fermenting i lactose were obtained from 1 haddock, 4 cod, 10 cunner and 13 mackerel. Five strains were obtained from the 2 sculpin. Two cultures were obtained from two flounder taken off City Point, New Haven, Conn., at the opening of the city 1 sewer, a favourite fishing ground. From the data it seems that marine fishes will harbour coli-like forms if living in contaminated waters. E. HESS 1. Magnesium-ammonium-phosphate crystals in canned lobster. These crys- tals occur very frequently in enamel cans, the pickle of which is between pH 8.0 to 6.6, and occasionally in pickle with pH as low as 6.4, especially after prolonged storage. Although these crystals are formed in cans, which upon cultivation show absence of viable bacteria, it is interesting to note in this connection that similar crystals are formed during the growth of certain bacteria in media con- taining beef-heart hormone, or lobster meat infusion with 0.5 per cent. aga, 1 per cent. peptone, pH 7.0 to 7.2; e.g. Ps. fluorescens: B. alcaligenes. 2. Pink sediment and yellowish-pink discoloration of white meat. Occurs often in cans with acid pickle. Experiments with the dried (100°C.) and pow- dered pigmented tissues connecting the muscles with the lobster shell (claws and tail) showed no relation between the colour of an emulsion of the powder in different buffer solutions, and the pH of the buffers, before and af ter autoclaving the emulsions (pH 8.0 to 5.2). Similarly no relation between emulsion in different NaCl solutions (0.0 to 6.0 per cent.), and the colour of the emulsion, seemed to exist. The pigment in this powder is slightly soluble in distilled water and n/5 NaOH ; very soluble .in 95 per cent. alcohol, in acetone and ether (at least a yellowish-orange fraction of the pigment); and extremely soluble in chloroform, turning the latter to a bright red colour, while the remaining powder becomes creamy-white. If chloroform is added to different powder-buffer mix- tures (autoclaved), shaken and centrifuged, the colour of the chloroform in buffers pH 8.0 to 6.8 appears as a yellowish-red shade, while in buffers with pH 6.6 to 5.4 the colour is bright red. Experiments on raw pigmentèd muscle juice showed certain relationships both between pH and salinity of mixtures and their cokiur, 1 after autoclaving and centrifuging. In mixtures of pigment-muscle juice with 57 buf:cr o 8.0 to 7.0, no coagulation of proteins took place, but the wholernixture was turbid and had a pink colour; at pH 6.8 the muscle proteins were coagulated and included the pigment (the coagulum had a pink colour), with clear superna- tant liquid; at pH 6.7 and lower, coagulation had also taken place, but the coagulum remained white, and the pigment was fully thrown to the bottom of the tubes by the centrifuging. Similarly, pigment-muscle juice, when autoclaved with distilled water and in 0.5 and 1.0 per cent. saline will yield a white coagulum, with red sediment; if autoelaved in 1.5 to 6.0 per cent. saline (NaC1) the whole coagulum of muscle proteins will assume a pink colour, and there is only a very 'small red sediment, the same results being obtained also when the saline is buffered to pH 6.5. If the different saline solutions are buffered at 7.0, the coagulum will become pink even in the 0.5 per cent. solution. Considering that in the canning of lobsters two processes have to be dealt with,—first, the initial boiling of the live lobsters in water of different salinities and pH, or the steaming of the lobsters in live steam, and second, the processing of the boiled lobster meat in the cans in presence of pickle of different salinities and pH; further investigation of the effects of both salinity and pH of the media in which both the live and the boiled lobster meat are cooked, upon the red pigment of the lobster meat seems necessary. 3. Effect of acid pickle on the enamel in "C-enamel" cans. As the C-enamel cans are produced especially for the canning of non-acid products such as fish, shell-fish, lobster, etc., the effect of acid pickle (2.0 per cent. acetic acid), as used in many lobster canneries, was investigated by canning lobsters in three different commercial makes of C-enamel cans, both with acid and non-acid pickle. Exam- ination of the cans after storage up to 14 months showed that the effect of acid pickle upon the enamel as compared with non-acid pickle is negligible, the effect, pw.1 if any, being very small in either case. 4. Effect of freezing on canned lobster during storage. Several lots of oné batch of canned lobster were frozen in different ways and kept in cold storage or at room temperature for various lengths of time. After three months the pigment in all cans was practically the same, except for the brine-frozen lot, where the pigment was a slightly brighter red. The only• difference between frozen and unfrozen samples, so far, is that the meat in the former cans is quite soft to the touch, while in the latter ones it is firm (especially noticeable in the body of the claws). 5. "Smut" (iron sulphide) formation in canned lobsters. Black discoloration was never observed in cans with pickle, the pH of which was 6.60 or less, examina- tion covering a large number of cans over several years and of different origin. In test tube experiments, when 5 cc. of saturated aqueous solution of hy- drogen sulphide was added to 5 cc. of different buffer solutions, precipitation of iron sulphide upon addition of a few (3-5) drops of ferrichloride solution was always definite and immediate at pH 6.65 and higher, and always absent or ap- pearing only on standing at pH of 6.0 and lower. There is no doubt that the iron sulphide formation is closely related to the reaction of the medium, although, in experiments where ground up, boiled lobster meat was autoclave d (after different periods of storage) in buffers andin the presence of ferrichloride solution, the border line of the reaction was not as sharp. However, the meat in buffers from PH 7.0 to 6.8 was alwa'ys darker (grey) after autoclaving, than the meat in buffers of pH 6.6. to 6.4. The changes became evident only after the ground meat had been standing (in 1.5 per cent. saline) for 24 to 48 hours at room temperature. Experiments made in collaboration with Mr. Cook on the influence of the vitality of live lobsters on the smut formation in the canned product, showed, on examining the experimehtal pack after 13 months' storage, that the longer the live lobsters had been kept out of water (in dark, cool room) before canning them, the higher was the pH of the pickle in the can (ranging from 6.9 when canned 77-

58

immediately to 7.7 when canned after 36 hours out of water), and the black discoloration of can (non-enamel) and meat was evident to an increasing degree. Lobsters that were dead after 24 hours, on the other hand, when canned, were found to have a pickle of pH 6.3 only, after 13 months' storage. This is no doubt due to the formation of lactic acid in the dead lobster, previous to the proteolytic changes therein.

W. W. JoHNsroN The discoloration of canned lobster muscle. Reed and co-workers reached the conclusion that the sulphur (which unites with iron from the container to form the black iron sulphide) was liberated from the muscle by bacterial action at some time intermediate between shelling and sterilization and accordingly recom- mended to the packers' that not longer than four hours should elapse between these processes. The canners claim that they have followed these instructions carefully -but have occasionally found discoloured packs. This led to the sug- gestion that some change might have occurred in the muscle during the gradual loss of vitality of the lobster, which resulted in an increase in volatile sulphur and hence in an increased proportion of discoloured cans. The lobster's condition was not found to result in any significant differences in the amount of volatile sulphur present in the muscle both before and after cooking. As a general rule it was found that the more highly discoloured cans had higher pH values. They also contained about twice as much volatile base as the former, but it is doubtful if this correlation is of great significance. - An experiment designed to determine the effect of increasing the pH of muscle prior to sterilization was not decisive, but indicated an injurious effect. The effect of prolonged sterilization was found to be definitely injurious to the appearance of the muscle, and, in addition, to its flavour. The pH of these cans on opening was considerably higher than the controls. The results from a lim- ited number of lobsters in a statistical experiment suggest that the pH of muscle increases when the lobster is held on ice and becomes inactive. This could not be correlated with any increase in volatile bases present in the meat. Accordingly, the tentative conclusion is drawn that the discoloration of canned lobster will be increased by a higher pH. Under factory conditions this increased pH may result from holding the lobsters for long periods before boiling and processing. Increases in pH may also result from unnecessarily long periods of sterilization.

A. S. McFARLANE Experiment on drying fish for smoking, using air conditioning apparatus. The object of this experiment, conducted at the plant of the Lunenburg Sea Products, Ltd., Lunenburg, N.S., was to prove:—(1) that fish could be dried uniformly in a commercial smoke house using heated conditioned air; (2) that a quantity equal to almost twice the quantity ordinarily put in could be dried in the same time as was necessary for drying by wood fires under favourable conditions; (3) that drying tould be done under unfavourable weather conditions; (4) that conditions known as burned tails and cooked fish, which are sometimes obtained under un- favourable conditions with wood fires, could be eliminated; (5) that the appear- ance of the fish as to sheen would be equal to the appearance of the fish when wood- drying fires were used. o For this work, an air-conditioner capable of cooling and conditioning 20,000 cubic feet of air per minute was installed. Water was used as a cooling agent, which, with an adequate supply, and low temperature, was sufficient. Connected d to the air-conditioner was an aero-fin steam heater which heated the air to the desired temperature. A fan attached to the aero-fin drew the air,through the air- conditioner and the aero-fin, and forced it into the drying chamber through a 34- inch duct, which duct was connected to a header. The header, so made as to distribute the air uniformly in the drying chamber, extended along one side of this drying chamber, and had sixteen 71-inch openings. This header was placed near the top of the house. The air was returned to the air-conditioner by a duct which opened into the bottom of the drying chamber. Thus a closed circuit of air could be obtained if desirable. The inside diameter of the drying chamber was 17' 0" deep, 13' 0" wide and 12' 0" high. In one test with an entering air temperature of 85°F. Dry Bulb and 65°F. Wet Bulb,' giving a relative humidity of 33 per cent., 4,300 lbs. of large cod fillets were dried satisfactorily in 2 hours and 30 minutes. With wood-drying fires, 2,400 lbs. of large cod fillets were dried in 3 hours. The temperature of the outside air was W.B. 31, D.B. 33, which would be considered a good drying day. In another test of medium cod fillets, with an average entering air temperature of 65 W.B., 84 D.B. giving a relative humidity of 35 per cent., the time taken to complete drying was 1 hour and 30 minutes, and with wood drying fires small cod fillets took 2 hours. On this evening the outside air was 53 W.B., 55 D.B., a day when drying conditions were not good. Provided the temperature of the fish was kept below 65° or 70°., depending on the variety of the fish, no indication was noticed of cooking or of burned tails. The sheen in all cases was equal to the sheen pro- duced by wood-drying fires, and in some cases superior to it.

W. W. STEWART The estimation of bound water in cod muscle. Lyophilic colloids play a large part in the make-up of biological tissue. This group of colloids, which includes the proteins, have a strong attraction for water. This is evident from the fact that a certain part of the total water in the colloid is bound up with the colloid particle. The mechanism of the forces which cause this binding is not exactly understood. To determine the state of water in cod muscle, the amount of water present in the muscle as ice is determined by measuring the heat necessary to melt this ice. Knowing the total amount of water, the bound water is given by the difference between these two quantities. The heat measurements were carried out in a Richard's adiabatic calorimeter. By using this method from 92 per cent. to 94 per cent. of the total water in fresh cod muscle could be accounted for as ice at —20°C. Therefore, 8 per cent. to 6 per cent. of the water in the cod muscle can be considered as bound water. This is in agreement with Moran (Proc. Roy. Soc. B, Vol. 107, No. B749, p. 182), who found by a dilatometric method that not more than 6 per cent. of water in beef tissue could be considered as bound water. No change in the amount of bound water in cod muscle could be detected by this method after storage at —20°C. for six weeks. Also it was found that the rate of freezing did not influence the aMount of bound water.

PACIFIC BIOLOGICAL STATION • NANAIMO, B.C., 1931 The general programme of irrvestigation has been carried forward at the Station during the vea'r. There have been curtailments such as the elimination of salmon tagging, and certain projects have had to be postponed. However, sorne lorty more or less distinct problems have been attacked, grouped about a number of major investigations. Reports on certain results have been publishul during the year and many others are in the course of preparation. The scientific staff during the year was as follows : Dr. \V. A. Clemens, Director. Dr. R. E. Foerster, Assistant Director and Chief Biologist. 60

Dr. J. L. Hart, Assistant Biologist. 1 Dr. A. L. Pritchard, Scientific Assistant. Mr. C. R. Elsey, Scientific Assistant. Dr. N. M. Carter, Associate Chemist. a Mr. C. M. Ilottley, Scientific Assistant. a Mr. R. \V. Whittaker, Scientific Assistant. Il .Mr. A. L. Tester, Scientific Assistant. Mr.. J. P. Tully, Scientific Assistant. Mr. W. E. Ricker, Scientific Assistant.

SEASONAL Dr. D. S. Rawson. Dr. D. C. B. Difff. Mr. D. C. G. MacKay. Mr. G. C. Carl. Mr. D. Beall. Mr. E. C. Black.

PROPERTY AND ACCOMMODATION Arrangements have been completed for the purchase of the land upon which the Station buildings are located and some additional land including that surrounding the source of the fresh water supply. The Board will own outright tWenty-four acres on Departure bay. Some additional laboratory accommodation for the staff has been provided in an old building on the premises through some alterations and repairs, including the installation of a heating system. The residence building was filled to capacity during the summer and additional accommodation was provided in a near-by cottage.

INVESTIGATIONS PROPAGATION OF SOCKEYE SALMON I. Relative efficiencies of natural and artificial propagation. A considerable number of researches centred about the propagation of Sockeye salmon are being carried out by Dr. R. E. Foerster at Cultus lake. The main investigation has for its object the determination of the efficiency of artificial propagation as compared with natural propagation. The experiment is being carried out by using the three methods, namely, (a) natural, (b) artificial with fry planting, and (c) artificial with egg planting, in successive years over a considerable period Of years, using the number of yearling seaward migrants as the measure of productivity. With the data of this year, the results of five experiments are now available for comparison. An investigation of the factors involved in the high mortality of the young fish during the year in fresh water has been commenced by Mr. Ricker. 2. Pond retention. The value of pond retention in the propagation of the young of Sockeye and Coho salmon has been investigated by holding the,young for certain periods and then marking and liberating- into Cultus lake. .The survival in terms of seaward migrants was determined by enumeration at the o counting weir in the outlet of the lake. '1 3. ,Transplantation. The experiment in the transplantation of Sockeye ' salmon from the lower portion of the Fraser river to the upper portion has been continued. In alternate years eggs have been transferred from Cultus lal:e .t1 to Taft on Eagle river, a tributary of Shuswap lake, where they have been a 61 hatched, the young retained in ponds until the fall, when they have been marked and liberated in Eagle river. In the intervening y-ears, eggs have been collected in Adams river, a tributary of Shuswap lake, and handled in the same manner as those from Cultus lake. In the first case, the transfer has been from a locality approximately eight hundred miles distant, and in the second, approximately ninety miles. The returns of adults will be determined by the installation of a counting fence in Eagle river. iL Feeding _experiments. In many fish-hatching establishments, the practice of liberating the fry as soon as they have reached a free-swimming and f ree- feeding stage has been superseded by the procedure of retaining the young fish in ponds until they have reached a size where they are more able to fend for themselves. In any such system the feeding in quantity of foods not natural to the fish is necessary. Raw beef liver has been found universally to be the best food. However, with increase in price has come a search for a cheaper fish food, but as yet there has been no agreement among fish culturists as to the Lest substitute food. It seemed desirable to test out various foods and combinations at the ponds at Cffltus lake. Beef liver, frozen salmon offal, canned salmon and halibut meal were used separately and in various combinations. Halibut meal alone proved to be the poorest food, producing, the smallest growth and the heaviest mortality. Canned salmon and frozen offal were but little better. Beef liver gave excellent results. In the various combinations, liver was essential. A reasonably good combination was found to be one-third liver, one- third canned salmon and one-third halibut meal. A report on the first season's results has been given in progress report No. 9. Further experiments are being carried out. 5. Hybridization of salmon. Four years ago successful crosses were made among the various species of Pacific salmon. The fertility of these when crossed with normal Sockeye salmon is being determined. 6. Spawning experiments. At the request of the Department of Fisheries, there are being conducted certain experiments in which three methods of spawning, namely, expression, expression followed by incision, and full incision, are being tested. The eggs taken by each method of spawning were washed in each of three ways,—rinsing, steeping and congealing. The eg-gs so obtained are now in the hatchery-. 7. Trough capacity experiments. To provide the Department of Fisheries with definite information regarding the optimum capacity of a standard hatchery trough, experiments are being carried out in which troug-hs with riffles are loadeil with from three quarts of Sockeye eggs per basket to nine quarts, and troughs without riffles from three and a half quarts per basket to seven quarts. 8. Tests of the period of fecundity of Sockeye salmon eggs and nuit. Experiments are being carried out to determine the periods over which eggs and milt may be held 1;efore mixing- and still remain perfectly fertile.

PILCHARD AND IIERRING INVESTIGATÇONS These investigatio ns have been continued under the joint auspices of the Provincial Fisheries Department and the Biological Board, and under the direction of Dr. J. L. Hart with Mr. W. R. Whittaker and Mr. A. L. Tester as assistants. The catches throughoUt the pilchard fishing- season have been sampled and analyzed as to lengths, %eights and sex, thus, among other thing-s, providing data for the discrimination of age classes. Mr. 'Whittaker has successfull y used .the otoliths of the pilchard for the determination of age. The food of the pilchard has been carefully studied and a report has been completed for publication by

62

Dr. Hart and Mr. G. H. Wailes. An investigation of the waste liquors from the reduction plants has also been completed by Mr. D. geall. The investigations of the herring have been designed largely to determine the causes of fluctuation in abundance. Statistical analyses of the catch records and regular analyses of the catches as to length, weight, age and sex are being made. Studies of the spawning and subsequent mortality during incubation and early life-history have been carried out. d In order to provide definite information as to the biological and chemical g condition of herring in relation to the methods of curing, an investigation in co-operation with the Fisheries Experimental Station has been commenced. Samplings are being made at variouslocalities during the season, and it is hoped C that definite information will be obtained which will lead to improvements in s( curing methods. tr Certain phases of the study of the alleged pollution of herring; spawning areas by effluents from reduction plants have been completed and a complete fc report is in preparation. al

PINK AND CIIUM INVESTIGATION' Dr. A. L. Pritchard has continued this investigation, devoting practically all "' ' r attention to the Pink salmon of Massett inlet and in particular to a study of his propagation. In the spring the seaward migrating fry from the spawning of in 66,000 adults in McClinton creek were enumerated. The migration took place Ix between February 8 and May 8 and consisted of 4,855,000 fry-, of which la approximately 185,000 were marked by the removal of the adipose fin in order th to obtain information in regard to returns. lx During the summer, the Fish Cultural branch established an eyeiiig station n( on McClinton creek and transferred to it approximately 978,000 Pink salmon T eggs taken in the Tlell river on the east coast of Graham island. Dr. Pritchard ce then took charge of the material. Most of the fry will be liberated immediately th upon the absorption of the yolk sac. but sonie 300,000 will be retained until they d( are large enough to be marked so that definite information concerning the hi returning fish may be obtained. This experiment is designed to determinë the ag possibility of establishing a run to McClinton creek in the "off" year. Xo.adult h2 Pink salmon appeared in McClinton creek in 1931. sti _ . a SALMON TAGGING While no tagging of salmon was carried out in 1931, returns from operations in of previous years have continued to come in and the final reports of the results fo of the six years' operations are being assembled. th co IDENTIFICATION OF YOUNG SALMON co Certain anatomical characters such as number of gill rakers, inunber of Cu scales in the lateral line, number of rays in fins and number of branchiostegals de are used for the distinction of the five species of Pacific salmon. Drs. Foerster of and Pritchard are examining young fish at short age intervals' with respect to va the above characters to determine what changes take place in the early lif e- history in other words, to determine to what extent adult specifications may be I I sc applied to young. From this, exact information will be available for the separation of the five species at all stages in the life-histories.

SIIELLFISII INVESTIGATION an Fr Mr. C. R. Elsey, with the assistance of Mr. G. C. Carl, studied intensively St the spawning, spatting and growth of the native and eastern oysters in the Pa f

63

Boundary bay area, particularly in the Serpentine and Nicomeld rivers. Considerable attention was given to the problem of establishing a method of measuring accurately the actual amount of growth. The problem of dyking has received some consideration. Conditions were followed in Ladysmith harbour where native, eastern and Japanese oysters are propagated. Japanese oysters have been distributed to new localities and continue to demonstrate their ability to grow under conditions more or less unsuited for the growth of the native and eastern oysters. A bulletin on the oyster situation in British Columbia is 'almost completed. A study of the crabs in the Boundary bay area was carried out bv Mr. D. C. G. MacKay. Data concerning abundance, distribution, food, proportion of sexes, sizes, growth:etc., were obtained. A large number of individuals were tagged. Dr. Edith Stevens commenced a study of the importance of diatoms in the food of oysters, identifying over one hundred species from the mantle cavity and the digestive tract.

TROUT INVESTIGATION This investigation lias been concerned in large part with the biological factors underlying the propagation and conservation of trout, and intensive studies have been carried out on Kamloops trout at Paul lake by Mr. C. McC. Mottlev. This lake was chosen in part as a type where the natural balance has been upset by the spawning streams drying up and by a heavy- fishing drain. The problem in part is to determine how inany young fish should be planted in the lake in order not to overtax its nutritive capacity and yet to "farm" it to its fullest extent. The causes of depletion have been largely determined and recommendations for certain remedial measures made. An attempt is being made to determine accurately the population of the lake through accurate enumeration of all spawning fish, determination of fry production and out-take by anglers. A study of the lif e- history of the trout has also been made with special reference to growth, food, a

SOCKEYE SALMON STATISTICS Drs. W. A. and LI S. Clemens continued their analyses of the data collected annually by the Provincial Fisheries Department on the Sockeye runs to the Fraser, Skeena and Nass rivers and to Rivers inlet. During leave of absence at 'Stan ford university, tiler commenced a summary review of the reports of the past twelve -ears and considered certain refinements in statistical presentation. ilieworam

. 64

FISH SYSTEMATICri Professor J. R. Dy-mond has described two new races of trout in British Columbia. He has also prepared a popular account of the trout of the province with coloured illustrations. Arrangements are being- made for publication as a bulletin. He is now preparing check lists of the fresh and marine fishes of British Columbia. Dr. C. L. Hubbs has discovered, among some fish sent him for examination, a new genus and species of blenny. This is being described under the name Alloiumpen us hypoc-hrom us.

TIIE FOOD OF THE FUR SEAL There has been considerable conjecture as to the nature of the food of the fur seal during its northward migration off the coast of British Columbia. In the summer of 1931, the Department of Fisheries collected the stomachs of twenty-five fur seals taken by the Indians of the west coast of Vancouver island. The material is being carefully examined by Dr. Clemens and Mr. Wilby and will be reported upon at a later date.

NUTRITIONAL VALUE OF CANNED SALMON Under instructions from the Executive Committee, Dr. W. A. Clemens org-anized an investigation of the nutritional value of canned salmon. The first phase of the work has been limited to Sockeye and Pink salmon and to repre- sentative samples of early-, middle and late packs. Studies of the oil and vitamin contents are being carried out by Mr. H. N. Brocklesby at the Fisheries Experimental Station. The (Teneral chemical investigation is being conducted by Dr. N. M. Carter at the Pacificb Biological Station.

OCEANOGRAPHY The general study of the oceanographical conditions in the strait of Georgia has been continued. The investigation has been planned with the object of obtaining data concerning the effect of tidal, meteorological and topographical conditions upon the source, concentration, distribution and utilization of the chemical substances, their relationship to the seasonal fluctuations in growth and availability of plankton and consequently their effects on growth and movements of fish and other marine products. In addition, a special study has been made of several of the fiords that open off the strait of Georgia in order to provide information as to the extent to which they contribute to the general productivity of the coastal waters. . Dr. N. M. Carter, assisted by Mr. É. C. Black and Mr. J. P. Tully, has carried out extensive physico-chemical analyses involving the determination of temperature, density, transparency, salinity, hydrogen-ion concentration, nitrate. nitrite, Phosphate, silicate and oxygen values'. Considerable research has been expended on improving methods, technique, graphical calculation. and represen- tation of analysis. Over 1,200 samples have been examined during the year. Experiments have been carried out On the use of various types of drags on drift bottles. In the study of the fiords several very interesting results have been obtained. In some of the fiords extensive stagnant areas occur at the bottom where there is entire absence of oxygen. Strata of very high nitrite values have also been found. Dr. A. H. Hutchinson has continued the study of the phyto-plankton and the relation of the physico-chemical factors to its production. Particular stndy is being given to the relation of the phosphate cycle to. the plankton production. 65

Results of an investigation of the layer of water in the strait of Georgia from the surface to a depth of fifty yards has been recently published by Dr. Hutchinson and Mr. C. C. Lucas. Miss M. H. Campbell has made detailed studies of the life histories of the common copepods of the plankton of the strait of Georgia. These are the forms which constitute the bulk of the food supply of young fishes and such large fish as the herring, etc. Studies have also been made of the vertical and horizontal distribution in quantity of these animals. Mr. H. Fasmer carrica out a study to determine the efficiency of the closing plankton net as used at the Station, and of the centrifuge used in the concentration of the plankton. pATHOLOGY 1. Cultus lake. In the late summer of 1930, a severe epidemic appeared among the Socke'ye fry in the retaining ponds at the Smith Falls hatchery. Costia necatrix was isolated, and while it was suspected as being a causative agent, direct proof was lacking. The disease did not appear in 1931, but Dr. D. C. B. Duff carried out an investigation of halibut meal as .a possible carrier, of pathogenic organisms and as a possible source of poisonous decomposition products. Micro-organisms isolated could not be shown to be pathogenic, and, while the meal gave rise to a diffusable poison, observations indicated that effective concentrations were not possible in the retaining ponds. 2. Elk river. In the summer of 1930, the deaths of considerable numbers of trout and whitefish were reported in the Elk river near Fernie. Mr. Mottley made a preliminary survey of the situation and made certain recommendations. In 1931, reportsrts of further deaths of fish were received and Dr. Duff was detailed to make an investigation. Ile found that the epidemic was caused by the bacterium, Bacterium salmonicida. The source of the infection should be sought and steps taken to prevent transference into other areas.

INVESTIGATIONS . Bl' VOLUNTARY WORKERS ' Thirteen voluntary- investigators have been at the Station during the year carrying out a variety of important studies. A number of the researches have already been referred to and the following additional are recorded: 1. Symbiosis between certain marine organisms. Mr. C. Berkeley. A stuély has been commenced of the symbiotic algae occurring in Ascidia with the possibility of tracing a connection between the presence of the alga and the cellulose constituent of the test. 2. Systematic study of marine wo‘ rms. Mrs. C. Berkeley. An extensive collection of polychaet worms from the Friday Harbour recr ion, Washington, and another collection of littoral forms from the west coast of bVancouver island have been studied and two papers describing several new species have been completed. 3. The early life histories of crabs. Miss J. F. L. Hart.. Little of the early life history of Pacific coast Crabs lias been studied. The free-swimming larvae are exceedingly abundant in the waters throughout many months of the year and serve as food for many larger animals, especially fish. The larvae are so unnke the adults and in sonie cases so like one another that it is necessary- to rear the stages in the laboratory in order to establish identities. The complete life history stages of some half dozen species have been obtained and some of the stages of the commercial crab. 'Oyster larvae have been found to be a very satisfactory food material for the crab larvae. . 4. Diatoms as the food of copepods and phyllopods. Professor C. W. Lowe. Diatoms constitute the first link- in the food chain in the waters and this study was carried out to determine the significance of these plants in the food of 66

copepods and.phyllopods which in turn constitute an important food for fish. In order to obtain data on the food chain, the stomach contents of a number of species of fish were studied. 5. The algal flora of Spider lake, Vancouver island. Professor C. W. Lowe. Small-mouthed black bass have been introduced into Spider lake and have successfully established thembelves. This study is a commencement of an a investigation of the food supply of the lake. li 6. Reactions of fish to noise. Professor V. H. K. Moorhouse. Complaints have been received that the noise of outboard motors was driving fish away from their usual haunts. It was necessary to carry out the investigations with fish in aquaria and the surf perch was found most satisfactory for experimentation because it adapted itself . so readily to aquarium conditions. The results of the experiments were interesting in demonstrating definitely the establishment of conditioned reflexes. 7. An investigation of the life histories of waterfowl. Mr. J. A. Munro. o The presence of many waterfowl on the sea coast has given rise to the general belief that such congregations are detrimental to man's interests in that these birds are serious competitors of the fishing industry. Observations of the habits

of these birds has been undertaken and examinations of stomach material. IT 8. The food of the American merganser. Mr. J. A. Munro and Dr. \V. A. P' Clemens. This study was undertaken because fishermen, especially anglers, have demanded the destruction of the merganser on the grounds that it is responsible a( for serious losses of important fishes. Material for study has been supplied o: chiefly by the Department of Fiheries. 13( 9. The Protozoa of British Columbia waters. Mr. G. H. Wailes. A study in of the Ciliata has been completed and a report submitted for publication. A complete review of the marine Protozoa of British Columbia waters is being as prepared with keys and numerous illustrations. This will provide a ver- useful reference. A collection of algae, invertebrates and plankton made in Sproat lake in connection with a survey of conditions following some mortality among salmon is being examined and reported upon. Cl 10. The life history of the Ling cod. Mr. G. Van Wilby. During the year this investigation has been advanced particularly by the study of specimens in Cl the first year, by the examination of stomach contents of specimens obtained by a commercial trawler, by obtaining much additional length-weight-age data and D: by a study of the catch records of the past thirteen years.

ANNUAL CONFERENCE Fc The fifth annual conference of the staffs of the Fisheries Experimental Station and the Biological Station was held at the latter station on August 27 Fr and 28. Professors C. M. Fraser, A. H. Hutchinson and W. Sadler' of the University of British Columbia, and Dr. W. F. Thompson and staff of the Hi International Fisheries Commission were present, taking part in the programme Ht and discussions. Twenty-five investigators were in attendance and over twenty Lu reports were given of investigations carried out during the year. Mi EDUCATIONAL

,COURSE FOR HATCIIERY OFFICERS Mc From JUly 13 to 25 a course of instruction was given to the superintendentî of hatcheries in British Columbia. It was decided that instruction should be .M1 given in the field, and Sorrento on Shuswap lake was made the headquarters. K.

67

The Inspector of Hatcheries for British Columbia and nine superintendents took the course. The instructors were Dr. Clemens, Dr. Foerster and Dr. Carter. Courses were given in the following subjects : mapping, physics, chemistry, meteorology, limnobiology and hydrography, vegetation, invertebrates of lake shore, lake bottom, and stream, plank-ton, and fish. There were also lectures and informal discussions in the evenings on a variety of subjects and a special lecture by Dr. D. S. Rawson on the productivity of lakes.

INSTRUCTION IN -THE SALTING OF HERRING In October, Dr. N. M. Carter gave a lecture on the physical and chemical principles underlying the process of salting of fish to certain officers of the Department of Fisheries. Arrangements are being made by the Pacific Biological Station and the Fisheries Experimental Station for giving a two weeks' course of instruction to Departmental inspectors at the former station.

PUBLICITY The series of quarterly progress reports were issued during the year. By means of these, popular accounts of investigations have been presented to the persons in the fishing industry and to others interested in the progress of fishery research. A number of short newspaper articles have appeared. Lectures and addresses have been given at various points in the Province by various members of the staff. In addition, reviews of the work of the Board on the coast have been given by the Director at the Universities of British Columbia and Wash- ington, and at Leland Stanford Junior University. The Station and its museum have been visited by a large number of persons, including various groups such as the Boy Scouts of Vancouver island and members of the Cowichan and Burrard Field Naturalists Clubs.

PUBLICATIONS Clemens, W. A.—The problem of the conservation of the Sockeye salmon in British Columbia. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc., 60. The Pacific Biological Station in Nanaimo, B.C. Collecting Net, 6. Clemens, W. A. and L. S. Clemens—Contributions to the life history of the Sockeye salmon. Rept. B.C. Comm. Fish. 1931. Dymond, J. R.—Description of two new forms of British Columbia trout. .Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6. A possible critical factor affecting the production of trout in some British Columbia lakes. Trans. Amer. Fish. Sdc., 60. Foerster, R. E.—Sockeye salmon feeding experiments, Smith Falls retaining ponds. Prog. Rept. Pac., 9. The experiment on pond retention of Sockeye salmon. Prog. Rept. Pac., 10. Salmon do come home. B.C. Fisherman, March, 1931. Fraser, C.M.—Notes on the ecology of the cockle, Cardium corbis Martyn. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 25. Hart, J. L.—The food of pilchards. Prog. Rept. Pac., 11. Hutchinson, A. H. and C. C. Lucas—The Epithalassa of the strait of Georgia. Canad. J. Res. 5. Lucas, Verna Z.—Some Oetracoda of the Vancouver island region. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6. àfacKay, D. C. G.—Notes on the Brachyuran crabs of northern British Columbia. Canad. Field Nat., 45. The Skeena river investigation. Frog. Rept. Pac., 8. The edible crab of the Pacific coast. Prog. Rept. Pac., 11. Mottley, C. of temperature on the number of scales on trout. Science, 74. r • M.—The effect • Temperature and propagation of trout. Prog. Rept. Pac., 8. The propagation of trout—food supply and grow-th. Prog. Rept. Pac., 11. Munro. J. A. and W. A. Clemens.—Water fowl in relation to the spawning of herring in British Columbia: Bull. 17.

1. 68 • Needler, A. B.—Mating and oviposition in Pandalus danae. Canad. Field Nat., 45. Pritchard, A. L.—Summary of the tagging of Spring salmon in 1929 and 1930. Prog. Rept. Pac., 8. The tagging of Coho salmon in British Columbia in 1929 and 1930. Prog. Rept. Pac.,9. The tagging of Pink and Chum salmon in British Columbia in 1929. Prog. Rept. Pac., 9. A report on the Pink salmon investigations in British Columbia. Prog. Rept. 10. Wailes, G. H.—Amphipoda from British Columbia. Vanc. Mus. Art Notes. 6. White, F. D.—The occurrence of creatine in the muscle, blood and urine of the dogfish, Squalus sucklii. C,ontr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 6. Williamson, H. C.—The white Spring salmon. Canad. Fisherman, 18. t:

INVESTIGATORS' SUMMARIES D. BEALL. Waste _liquors from pilchard reduction plants. Due to existing methods large losses of oil and meal are incurred in the separation of the meal from the liquid portion of the cooked fish and subsequently the oil from water fraction. From the study of the waste liquors from the oil separation tanks it was found that these liquors contain, on the average, 1.1 per cent. oil, 1.9 per cent. meal (dry oil free), and 3.6 per cent. dissolved protein by weight. However, there is a great variation in their composition according to the conditions of the fish processed. A meal recovery machine manufactured by the California Press Company was found, on the average, to recover forty-seven per cent. of the meal and eight per cent. of the dissolved 'protein. It was also found that the fi meal losses were halved when the perforations in the press were reduced from one-sixteenth of an inch to one-thirty-second of an inch in diameter. The oil losses in the fish storage tanks (containing f resh fi sh) were found to be negligible. C. BERKELEY Symbiosis in marine organisms. In an investigation of algal symbionts in ascidians cells. which, appear to be of an algal nature are frequently folind in quantity both in the test and in the ectoderm of Ascidiopsis paratropa, but not in any other tissues, except possibly in the circulatory fluid, and only in young tl individuals. In mature specimens a very remarkable condition was found in the egg cells, the nuclei of some of these being heavily pigmented with brown granules. These granules are a more or less regular spherical or oval shape and it seems possible that they are infective bodies connected with the supposed algae in the young animais. C. AND E. BERKELEY a Polychaeta. A large collection of dredged Polychaeta from Friday harbour, d Washington, consists chiefly of species already- recorded f rom the Nanaimo a region, but a few interesting types have been found amongst the Material, including-some fragmentary specimens of a Capitellid of which only one example had been known previously and had not been recorded. This, with some other interesting and undescribed Capitellid material at hand, forms the subject matter cl of a paper being submitted for publication. A collection of littoral Polychaeta from the west coast of Vancouver island has proved interesting from the distributional standpoint, and a paper in press giving an account of it includes the description of a new species of Sabellid. a fi MILDRED H. CAMPBELL • 11 n Life histories of copepods. The life cycle of Calanus tonsnsjs economically important as this species constitutes the predominant constant element of the 69

zooplankton in the strait of Georgia, and forms the bulk of the food supply of young fishes and herring. Euchaeta japonica, one of the largest species of the entire copepod group, is a deep cold water species. During the summer of 1930 some of the developmental stages were obtained by artificial rearing in the laboratory and the remainder have been isolated f rom plankton hauls collected throughout the y-ear. During the summer of 1931 the examination of plankton was continued and the complete series for both species obtained, consisting of six nauplius stages and six copepodid stages. It is found that when compared with Calanus finmarchicus Gunnerus, Cd/ames tonsits has a very similar life history. It appears to have a definite spawning time in the early spring months. All the nauplius and early copepodid stages are passed through rather rapidly. The great part of the year is spent in the fifth copepodid stage and the species probably only exists in the adult stage over a short period- January and February. Euchaeta japonica seems to breed more or less all the year round and all stages may be found in the same plank-ton sample. "re'

N. M. CARTER • An oceanographical investigation of certain types of fiords. The coast of British Columbia is intersected by many long inlets or fiords which greatly add to its effective length, but these have been so little investigated from an oceanographical viewpoint that it is impossible to state at present whether the fishing and other marine industries do benefit, or could benefit, to an extent proportional to this increased area of coastal water. An extensive and comparative study of fiords, with the object of ascertaining their scientific and economic potentialities, was therefore considered advisable. Of three fiords, chosen to represent three distinct, representative types, and observed monthly over a ten- month period, one () was f ound to have a large basin of stagnant water underlying the normal, tidal water back of a comparatively shallow bar which stretches across the mouth of the inlet. The physical and most chemical properties of the water in this basin seem to remain fairly constant throughout the year, independent of tide or seasonal effects. Two other fiords with similar stagnant basins have been found, and this condition should be described in view of the fact that certain chemical constituents are present having concentrations two to ten times those recorded for normal sea water.

GLADYS CLANDININ • On the development of scales in Cutthroat and Steclhectd trout. Since scales are used extensively in the determination of the age of many fish, it seemed desirable to obtain definite information concerning the appearance, distribution and development of the scales in these species. The first appearance of scale papillae seemed with few exceptions to depend upon length rather than age of the fry. The first papillae make their appearance when Steelhead f ry are about 2.6 centimetres in length, and Cutthroat 2.8 to 3 centimetres in length. . The papillae appear as a single row of circular plates along the lateral line extending almost from the pectoral fin to the adipose fin (Steelhead 2.6 cm.). On larger specimens (Steelhead 3 cm.), there are two to three rows of papillae along the lateral line from just behind the operculum to the caudal no-ion and five to seven rows in th q region of the dorsal fin. Development proceeds more rapidly in the ventral direction. When the scale papillae begin to develop in the Steelhead (2.6 cm.) an aggregate of deeply staining cells appears in the dermis, which spreads itself out 70 horizontally, the cells becoming arranged in two circular plates (Steelhead 2.8-3 cm.). Between these two layers, a layer of highly ref ractive substance appears, the scale substance, which starts at the centre. In further development it spreads throughout the entire length and width of the papillae. At first the scales lie entirely in the dermis and in a plane parallel with the surface of the body. They pass into an oblique position (Steelhead 3.7 cm.) before they are large enough to crowd each other. This change in position of the scale appears to come about through a proliferation of epidermal cells beneath the posterior end of the scale and development of connective tissue between the epidermis and the anterior end of the scale. W. A. AND L. S. CLEMENS Statistical study of Sockeye salmon runs. The examination of the collection of scales and data of Sockeye salmon running to the Fraser, Skeena and Nass rivers and to Rivers inlet in 1930 made by the Provincial Fisheries Department has been carried out. The almost phenomenal run to the Fraser river was very largely composed of four-year-old fish (seventy-six per cent.). The run to Rivers inlet was composed of equal numbers of four-year-old and five-year-old fish and together these age groups comprised ninety-six per cent, of the run. The Skeena river fish were also almost entirely comprised of four- and five-year-old, the latter forming fifty-two per cent. and the former thirty-nine per cent, of the run. The run to the Nass river is always interesting because of the number of age-groups represented. In 1930, there were eight age-groups with the five-year-old group (two y-ears in fresh water) forming fifty-four per cent, of the run. The runs to these rivers were large, providing excellent catches and satisfactory escapements.

D. C. B. DUFF 1. Investigations on causes of disease in Salmonida. In the late summer of 1930 a severe epizootic appeared among Sockeye fry in the retaining ponds of the Smith Falls hatchery, Cultus lake. Microscopic examination of scrapings from side and gills of affected fish showed the presence in nearly.all cases of Costia necatrix, but it was possible that the epizootic was due to some other and primary cause, and that the Costiasis was a secondary condition, or that other factors, such as physical conditions, improper food or a concurrent infection, may have aggravated the course of the disease. Halibut meal is used as part of the feed in the ponds, and was suggested by Dr. Foerster as a possible factor. When mixed with water, with or without previous ether extraction, and held at room temperature for twenty-four hours or longer, it gives rise to a diffusible poison which kills Sockeye f ry. An.amount of forty-çight-hour meal filtrate equivalent to 0.08 gm. meal, added to each litre of water in the experimental jars, consistently kills Sockeye f ry in twelve to eighteen hours, but infusions held at the temperature of the hatchery water supply require one week or over to produce a poison comparable in strength to the room temperature preparations. Liver and canned salmon produced poisons slightly less potent than those f rom halibut meal. A consideration of capacity and rate of flow in the retaining ponds, together with the amount of food given daily and the cleaning routine, makes it clear that a concentration of decomposition products immediately harmful to f ry could ha never be attained. Exposure for three weeks to continuous doses just below the an level required to produce definite symptoms, failed to give a cumulative injurious • a effect, such as might conceivably come from the film coating the sides and bottom at 71

of the ponds, and a direct test of this possibility on a small scale showed nothing un favourable. Of twelve species of micro-organisms isolated from samples o'f halibut meal, none produced any evidence of disease in Sockeye fry when added in large quantities to experimental jars. 2. Elk river investigation. Following a request for an investigation of an epidelnic among the game fish of the Elk river, this stream was inspected, on August 12, over a stretch of about f orty miles, from below Elko to about fifteen miles above Fernie. The stretch of stream in question does u'ot appear to differ from other portions of the stream, except in receiving sewage, etc., at and near Fernie, and in the location of a power dam at Elko, twenty miles below Fernie. Even at low water the river is of a good size, swift of current, and is quite deep in many places. There are few, if any, places between Fernie and Elko where stagnant water or sewage could collect. From these considerations it is my opinion that even in midsummer the possibility of damage to fish f rom sewage or from the weekly pumping out of the comparatively small chlorinated swimming pool is exceedingly small. All the dead fish found were grayling, and with the exception of two which had obviously died from wounds, all bore characteristic "marks," consisting of a hemorrhagic, roughly circular area, about one square centimetre or more in diameter, nearly always situated directly between the pelvic fins, and often involving the bases of the fins. Examination of the body cavity showed the peritoneum and omentum heavily infiltrated with blood, and in most cases the kidney had become a fluid mass. Cultures from the muscle, the dorsal blood vessel, and the kidney, gave in nearly every case a bacterium with characteristics like those of Bacterium salmonicida, which causes the well-known infectious disease of salmonids, f urunculosis. As this disease is also characterized by exterior sores or "boils," and also intestinal inflammation and peritonitis, it would seem almost certain that the Elk river fish are attacked by furunculosis. Complete proof would, of course, depend upon the final identification of the bacterium obtained, together with evidence of its infectivity.

C. R. ELSEY The oyster investigation of British Columbia. British Columbia, though boasting an important fishery-, imports most of the oysters which are consumed. The price at which they are sold places them beyond the reach of the average citizen. This condition suggests either that the coastal waters are unsuited to oyster culture or that the industry has been neglected. Observations which have led..up to the making of this investigation have indicated that the latter supposition is the correct one. The high water-temperatures which prevailed throughout the winter and early spring caused the bulk of native oysters to spawn three weeks earlier than in the average season, in the period between May 10 and June 1. All cultch was by June 5 thickly set with young oysters and continued to catch them until June 13, but the remainder of June was characterized by wet weather with a general lowering of water-temperatures and densities, and on July 1 all of the spat was dead and the plankton contained no larvae. A small proportion of oysters developed spawn in July and Aug,ust, but no set of commercial importance accumulated on the materials of the natural beds. Similar material, however, which at reg,ular intervals throughout the season had been placed in experituental dykes (previously without oysters) at Ladysmith and suspended in wire sacks, f Tom floats, both at Ladysmith and Crescent, collected •a satisfactory set, evidently because the very young set which became attached at the time when the lowest daylight tides of the year were•accompanied by hot • 72

weather, was protected in the dykes and on the suspended cultch from subjection and for any long periods to the direct heat of the sun. In Eastern oysters in the rivers and on the beds at Crescent spawned in the wet May 25 and June 15. Presumably as a result of the rain which interval between pas followed, the larvae did not develop and no spatting occurred. A survey of the rivers showed that they contain more than two million eastern oysters, all of of vit' which have set there, during the past fifteen years. A study of the material indicates that the heaviest set occurred in 1926 and that the present year is the of in which no setting occurred. 192 only one of the past five of ( Japanese oysters have been disti-ibuted to new localities and continue to conditions entirely unsuited to the growth in demonstrate their ability to grow under pro of the other two species. There is evidently no limit to the quantity of this species which can be matured on the coast. Spawning occurred in the latter part pre of of August .but no larvae were taken. A half-dozen species of marine organisms have been introduced f rom Japan with the seed, but there is no evidence yet tra[ that any of them can be classed as oyster pests. The ability of the above organisms to survive, however, indicates that there is a potential danger of pro; introducing drills, sponges or mud-worms which might prove injurious to the and native oyster. The advisability of seed inspection is being considered. aftE spa' H. FASMER of Experiments on plankton methods. The main object of the experiments was rete thé determination of the filtration coefficient for the plankton net in use at the Soc Biological Station. Comparison of the volume of plankton in one cubic metre of water obtained by the Bolton plankton bucket and f rom samples obtained by bun the net showed the efficiency of the net to be between eighteen and fifteen per libc cent. The filtration coefficient for the same net calculated according to the tables rem of Hensen is approximately 0.31. This result indicates what already several infE investigators suspected and, in the case of fresh water plankton, already has ThE been proved ; namely, that the efficiency of the plankton net requires to be libe determined for quantitative investigations and that the net collections should be of t supplemented by collections with self-closing plankton buckets. Experiments on the influence of different fixing agents on the plankton libe volume of the sanie sample, determined immediately after the fixing agent had fem been added and again later when the sample had remained standing for mot approximately three weeks, showed that there was sometimes a very considerable* libe shrinkage, somewhat different for the different agents. reto frol con , R. E. FOERSTER but 1. The relative efficiencies of the natural and artificial propagation of libc Sockeye salmon at Cuhits lake, B.C. To test out thoroughly the relative efficiencies of natural propagation and the two standard methods of artificial propagatio fl. app a twelve year programme was drawn up and work commenced in 1925. In each and subsequent year one particular method of propagation has been investigated circ and the success of the method determined on the basis of the number of seaward plm migrating individuals produced. of 1 The general programme of the investigation called for natural propagation in 1930 and accordingly all Sockeyes were allowed to pass to the lake. During wit the migration 10,395 adults were counted of which 4,856 were males and 5,553 fen were females. The sexes were thus fairly evenly represented. Conditions on. sub the spawning grounds during the spawning season were considered very good. egg The natural spawning of 1930 represents the third test of this type of propagation to 1 73 and should form a good example of what might be called moderate spawning. In 1925 only 5,426 Sockeye spawned naturally and in 1927, 81,228 individuals were released into the lake. In the sprino- of 1931 there were counted 355,149 young Sockeye migrants passing out of eultus lake. An analysis of the migration disclosed that 349,993 of the migrants were yearlings, thus providing, for the artificial propagation with liberation of fry test of 1929, a return of 2.24 per cent, of the total number of eggs contained in all the female Sockeye arriving at the counting weir in 1929. Of two-year-old individuals there were 5,156 which represented a return of 0.19 per cent. of the total number of eggs contained in all females enumerated in 1928, thus increasing the efficiency of the egg-planting method of artificial propagation conducted in 1928 to 1.64 per cent. Aside from the 3,526 individuals preserved as a sample of the migration, all migrants were marked by removal of both pelvic fins and the adipose fin prior to liberation from the counting traps. While a second test of artificial propagation with planting of eggs was proposed for 1931, the possibility of a large run necessitated a change in plans and artificial propagation was conducted to the limit of hatchery accommodation after which the remaining Sockeye were to be allowed into Cultus lake for natural spawning. 2. Pond retention of Sockeye salmon. At the request of the Department of Fisheries an experiment was undertaken to determine the value of pond retention of Sockeye salmon in comparison with the standard system of liberating Sockeye f rom the hatchery as free-swimming fry. In ponds constructed at Smith Falls hatchery in the spring of 1930 five hundred thousand Sockeye fry were placed and one-half of this number were liberated in the fall as five-month-old fingerlings. It was intended that the remaining half should be held for one year, but toward fall a very disastrous infection swept the ponds and wiped out ninety per cent. of the retained fish. The survivors were used, however, in the manner previously planned, some being liberated at the end of September and the remainder carried through to the end of twelve months. The retained individuals were given a distinguishing mark at the time of liberation into the lake and these marked. fish were enumerated at the counting fence as they endeavoured to migrate from Cultus lake to the sea. For the five- month-old fingerlings the data show a return of 10.6 per cent, of the total number liberated or 1.7 per cent. of the total number of fry in the ponds. For individuals retained for a year the returns are 63.1' per cent, of the total number liberated from the ponds or 3.8 per cent. of the total number of fry held originally. It is conceded that the returns are too high on the one hand and too low on the other but in cmparison with the 3.6 per cent. return that has been found for fry liberation, the value of retention is quite evident. 3. Cross breeding of Pacific salin on. The possibility of hybrid salmon appearing among salmon catches has been a debatable point among fishermen and canners and certain reports of the appearance of such fish have beeri circulated. In order to test out the possibility, of such cross-breeding taking place, breeding tests wer.e made at Cultus lake in 1927 when the appearance of the five species of Pacific salmon made such an effort possible. In the fall of 1930 the males of the Fi generation ripened and were crossed with normal Sockeye females, and gave fertile eggs. This fall, 1931, the hybrid females, FI generation, ripened and the eggs obtained from them have been subjected to mut from normal Sockeye males. It 'would appear that some of the eggs were fertilized but whether the embryos will hatch satisfactorily remains to be seen. 74

J. L. HART right 1. Pilchard investigation. The pilchard fishing has in recent years experienced direc a very rapid growth and in consequence sorne doubt has been felt as to whether Anor the supplv of fish is sufficient to withstand the drain placed upon it by the fishing. th The races of the pilchard have been investigated by making a study of in mega certain body proportions and meristic characters of pilchards taken at and Barkley sound in 1930 and 1931, and at Monterey, California, in oregc La pi 1930. The results have been positive. The ages of pilchards have been studied by making length measurements of a representative sample of the pilchard catch crab for the last three seasons. Certain changes have been found to have taken place be fot in the size of pilchards which appear to be related to fluctuations in the fishing. zoeat were For pilchards of the size range taken in British Columbia waters the weight crab appears to be proportional to the length. 2. Investigation of the food of pilchards. The food and food supply of A. H pilchards are of economic interest, since (1) fish are more often caught in localities where food is abundant, (2)* when food organisms are absent, the water is clear and the fish are wild with the result that they are difficult to catch of th in a purse seine, and (3) the oil for which the pilchard is reduced is dependent strait upon the fat of the fish and that in turn is dependent upon the extent and quality recei , of the pilchards' food supply. river Pilchards were found to eat one hundred and forty-nine different kinds of epith; plants and animals of which fifty-one different kinds were plants and ninety-eight flcre; animals. The diatoms, usually referred to as green feed, constituted about f orty- 18°F five per cent, of the food. The second most important group in the pilchards' whicl food is the copepods which together with the other Crustacea constitutes the red the I-. feed. In 1930, red feed was more abundant in the digestive tracts of pilchards evide than in the three previous years and this may be related to the high oil content river, •of the pilchards during that season. the f 3. Herring investigation. The herring fishery in British Columbia is a very the rr. important one but it has been made less profitable by uncertainty as to its location, each • and magnitude. The object of the present investigation is to determine season grow whether the fluctuations are due to natural causes or the effect of the fishing. in va First of all, an attempt is being made to find out what fluctuations are occurring sourc in the abundance of the herring and what changes in the herring stock are accompanying these fluctuations. relati Scale readings for herring from Barkley sound, Nootka sound and the east' durin coast have been made and the age composition of the catch calculated from the NW results. For purposes of a general statement the different districts resemble one consi another sufficiently to justify the results from all the samples about Vancouver clept1-. island being grouped together in one average. Forty per cent. were third year, accon thirty-nine per cent, fourth year, five per cent, fifth year and ten per cent. an", unreadable. In general, these results ,resemble those obtained for the previous depth year. The differences between these results and those obtained in Alaska and value ' Europe emphasize the necessity for a complete investigation of the British early Columbia herring fishery. plank

C. \V JOSEPHINE F. L. HART Early life histories of crabs. Little of the early life history of Pacific 'coast diato. Decapods has been studied. The larvae are common in plankton at all times of sumn the year and serve as food for certain of the macro-plankton as well as fish. The. the l larvae are so unlike the adults and in some cases so like one another that it is a Lir necessary to rear the stages in the laboratory to be sure of assignment to the to co i•

75

right species. This work- of identification is necessary before problems of a more direct economic bearing can be attempted. Complete series of the larval stages of three species of Brachy-ura and two Anomura, as well as several incomplete series, were obtained from eggs hatched in the laboratory. Hemigrapsus nudus was reared through five zoeal stages, one rnegalopal and killed in the sixth young crab stage, age four months. Hemigrapsus oregonensis was kept through similar stages until the fourth young crab stage. Lophotenzopcus be/ins went through four zoeal stages, a megalopal 'and two young crab stages. The one megalopa of Pugettia producta obtained from the egg died before reaching the crab stage, after passing through two zoeal stages. Four zoeae of Pinnixa faba and some post larval stages of different species of Cancer were obtained. Series of four larval stages and one glaucothoé before the young crab stages were reared of Pa gurus granosimanus and P. hirsutiusculus. A. H. HurcluNsoN Oceanography of the strait of Georgic. (1) Some of results of the study of the oceanography of the strait of Georgia may be summarized as follows. The strait of Georgia is a great basin, connected with the sea by narrow passes, which receives water from a number of large rivers, notably the Fraser river. The river water is conserved during the summer and forms a marked upper layer, epithalassa, which is characterized by- low salinity and high temperature. The ;ncrease in temperature as compared with sea water may amount to 10°C. or 18°F. Throughout the greater part of the region this epithalassa has a stability which is sufficient to resist tidal and wave movements. Since time is a factor, the heating effect of the sun, insolation, upon the epithalassa becomes most F evident at regions some distance from the river mouth. In the case of a large river, as the Fraser, this distance may exceed ten miles. Abundant fish food in the form of plankton is present and the amount is greatest at the regions where the most complete mixing of the river and of the sea water takes place. Evidently each water source contributes certain conditions or factors favourable for plankton growth. Mass movements of the epithalassa accompany tidal changes, resulting in variations of salinity, temperature and plankton at any point according to the source of the translocated water and the phase of the tide. (2) The investigation of the seasonal changes in phosphate particularly in relation to plankton has been continued and coordinated with the results obtained during four previous years. In the strait of Georgia at a distance of 22 miles NM' of the Fraser river mouth (Station 1), there is a definite seasonal« cycle consistino- of the following phases :—"a general minimum" of phosphate at all depths truring May to early June; an "epithalassal minimum" of phosphate accompanied with a "depth maximum" during late June. July, and August; an "epithalassal maximum" accompanied by intermediate values at greater depth during September to January ; a uniform column of intermediate phosphate values during late January to early April ; a transition period during April to early May. The relation of these phosphate changes to the occurrence of plankton is being studied.

C. \V. LOWE 1. Diatoms as the food of copepods and phyllopods. The investigation of diatoms as the food of cop« epods, begun a year ago, was continued during the past summer and extended bv determining the food chains between the diatoms and ( , the larger fishes of economic importance. One instance of this work is as follows : 5. weighing nearly eight pounds, was found a Ling cod twenty--eight inches long, j. to contain a number of young herrings in its stomach. These herrings in turn

.• 76 were found to be filled with numerous copepods and from these were obtained over twenty species of diatoms. Other fishes examined in this manner were the Rock cod, Sebastodes caurinus; the Starry flounder, Platichthys stellatus; the Yellow perch, Damalichthys argyrosomus; the Dogfish, Squalus sucklii; Dog salmon, Oncorhvnchus keta, and herring, Chipca pallasii. From the stomach contents of these fishes no less than eighty species of diatoms have been identified. Copepods were obtained from all of them with the exception of the flounder which contained only a number of small Mollusca, chiefly young Patella, and in these some twenty-five species of diatoms were found. The greater part of these diatoms were littoral forms and not plankton forms as in the other examinations. Another observation concernino- diatoms as food for the copepods was one in which two living species of the Harpacticideae, Harpacticus uniremis and Diosaccus spinatus were seen to devour large numbers of Melosira nummuloides, M. rûperiana, Biddulphia aurita, and Licmophora lyngbei. 2. The algal flora of Spider lake, Vancouver island, B.C. Spider lake near Van Horne lake is of particular interest because of the fact that the introduction of small-mouthed, black bass some years ago has been very successful. Large numbers of fry can be seen around the shores in June of each year and the bass fishing is improving year by year. It seemed advisable to make a study of the plant life forming the basis of the food supply of the lake. The algae identified f rom this lake total one hundred and sixty-four species (an increase of one hundred and fifty per cent. •ver the number found last year), with the following- groups represented by the number of species indicated : Myxophycéae, 19; Peridineae, 5; Flagellata, 3; Bacillarieae, 27; Desmidiaceae, 76; other Chlorophyceae, 34. In addition to these there are a few unidentified species which are either rare or new. One of these is a desmid with the zygospore which probably has never been observed before. The large number of desmids in proportion to the other algae shows the purity of the water. The lake is interesting in the fact that it is the only lake known to the investigator to contain the three fresh-wafer species of Ceratium, C. Hirundinella, C. cornutum, and C. curvirostre.

D. C. G. MAcKAy A study of the commercial crab, Cancer magister. Inasmuch as existing knowledge concerning the life-history, growth and migrations of the •Pacific coast edible crab is surprisingly limited in consideration of the importance of the fishery, the study commenced in the spring of 1930 was continued throughout the past summer. The capture of apparently healthy, edible crabs at, and adjacent to, the docks of the Anyox Copper Smelter at Granby, where concen- tration of waste materials would be relatively high, was considered indicative of a lack of serious effects on the crabs of the region from this source. , In Boundary and Semiahrrioo bays, adjacent to the town of Crescent in southern British Columbia, of 6,155 crabs caught in the commercial traps, 6,043 or 98.2 per cent, were males and but 112 or 1.8 per cent. were females, while at Prince Rupert, as found in 1930, 76.3 per cent, were females and 23.7 Per cent, males, and at Nass harbour to the north, 65.4 per cent. males and 34.6 per cent. females. No definite explanation of this unusual condition can at present be offered. Egg-bearing females were not encountered at Crescent f rom the middle of [une to the latter part of September but, due to the appearance of large numbers of the zoea and megalops stages it would appear that hatching of the eggs probably occurred during May or June. Samples of these crabs were taken 77 ned whenever possible and their volumes as groups ascertained for• the study of the rrowth. The average volume in cubic centimeters per hundred crabs increased the f rom 6.8 on July 16 to 13.0 on August 7, and to 22.9 on September 21. Dog Catch per trap in Boundary and Semiahmoo bays where, strangely enough, ach bait is not employed, was found to be 19.8, both sexes included, on June 17, ied. with a more or less steady decline, possibly due to migrations, until August 6 der when only 4.6 were taken. This • may be compared with six to seven crabs per and trap as taken at Nass harbour and Prince Rupert with the aid of bait during oi 1930-Iincluding.a larger praportion of females, as already observed. • her During the season approximately eight hundred crabs (as far as possible, ,iewly-moulted) were tagged with a view to the study of migratory movements. one Preliminary returns show migrations of as much as three miles in as many- weeks. and les, V. H. K. MommousE Reactions of fish to noise. Complaints had been received that the noise of tear ()inboard motors was driving fish away from their usual haunts, and it was lion planned to study the response of available species of fish to noise. As noise trge producers, a tapper, bell, buzzer and motor horn were used. )ass Flounders (mostly small, a few large specimens), rock cod (mostly small, a few large specimens), and dogfish embryos (twenty cm. with yolk sac three ; of cm.) and adults (ranging from forty to eighty cm. in length) gave little or no One sign of being affected in any particular fashion by noise. ent. Small perch, up to ten cm., for a short period of time after being caught, the were repelled by noise and grouped at the opposite end of the tank, but rapidly 3; became accustomed to the noise, so that in about two weeks very little sign of to t repulsion by the noise could be detected. of It was found that the perch, while becoming accustomed to noise in the ved sense that they showed none of the - repulsioh first-evidenced, were still markedly the responsive, because a conditioned reaction was built up. On combining the lake stimulus of noise with feeding, it was found that after about eight repetitions, um, fai rly strong surface reaction could be elicited by the noise acting alone, i.e., a conditioned reflex had been formed. This response increased in intensity- on reinforcement, until after about fifty-seven repetitions practically all the perch would rise at the sound,•break Water at the surface and produce an effect which in photographs cannot be disting,uished from the actual feedino- response. ting Some effort was made toward the end of the time availalle, to develop a zific protective response to certain noises. Darkness or shadow causes these fish to , of dive and remain near the bottom. Bir combining darkness with the noise it was tout found possible to. a short-lived protective response after a series of and develop quick repetitions, but time and material were too deficient to test the matter very :en- thoroughly. of An outboard motor produces quite a surface disturbance as well as noise and a imitating this characteristic. in small machine was tried for the purpose of : A water to rotate and splash the 043 mill fitted with paddles was adjusted so as surface group 1, i.e., fish accustomed to hile water. On trying this with any fish of f eeding, The perch would collect per the result was a strong surface response. directly below the water mill and would constantly be struck by the paddles. Per This conditioned one—the fish evidently, associating any surface ;ent response is also a agitation with food poured on the surface from the tip-bucket. , of ers C. McC. Morn.nv ggs Investigation of trout in British Columbia in 1931. Owing to (1) the ken economic value of angling, (2) the fact that regulations governing angling require 78

specific biological bases, and (3) the fact that fish cultural operations present many, problems for investigation, it was decided to extend the investigation to the biological factors underlying the propagation and conservation of trout. Depletion has occurred in Paul lake, as shown by the fact that anglers' catches are reduced, consisting largely of yearlings and two-year-olds, and that the egg- collections since 1928 have been below average, although the effort to obtain eggs has been doubled. One cause of the depletion is that the fishing effort has been gradually increasing since 1921. This year, although the leo-al limit was fifteen fish per day, not a single angler using legal methods caught more than eight fish per day. The depletion has allowed food organisms to increase and the condition of the trout is improving. Another factor is that Paul creek goes dry in August, and water is diverted for irrigation, so that plantings of eggs in riffles may go dry or pools may dry up and the fry die. Owing to the creek drying up each summer, salvaging operations in Paul creek have been necessary and have been carried out since 1916, with the exception of 1928. Observations on f ry plantings made this year in the lake would point to the fact that the fry method is more successful for Paul lake.

J. A. MuNRo An investigation of the food habits of the American merganser. This study, commenced in 1930 in association with Dr. W. A. Clemens, was undertaken because fishermen and anglers have demanded the destruction of the merganser on the grounds that it is responsible for serious losses of important food fishes. In the extensive literature of economic ornithology no information of value on this subject is to be found, therefore an attempt to remedy the deficiency seemed desirable. The American merganser is a duck and is protected by the Migratory Bird Treaty to the same extent as other species of ducks. The Dominion Govern- ment having- the responsibility for the protection of this species, it is of 5 considerable importance that full information as to its economic status should be made available. Through the co-operation of the Department of Fisheries, 36 specimens were available for study. These were collected at the following ,localities, viz : Little , 2; Babine lake, 26; Sooke river, 3; Cowichan river, 1; Tlell river. 2; Seymour creek, 1; Quamichan lake, 1. The following items of food were identified in the stomachs of specimens taken in the interior of British Columbia, viz : Cottus asper, Ptychocheilus oregonensis, Leuciscus balteatus, Oncorhynchus nerka kennerleyi, Mylocheilus caurinus, salmon ova, stone fly larva, lepidopterous larva, crane fly, carabid beetles, dipterous insects and miscellaneous vegetable matter. Specimens taken on Vancouver island contained salmon ova, Coitus aster and miscellaneous vegetable matter. The two specimens from Tlell river, Queen Charlotte islands, contained salmonoid fry.

ANDREW L. PRITCHARD Report on investigation of the natural run of the Pink salmon (Oncorhynclua gorbuscha (Walbaum)) during the year 1931. By the • use of counting fences installed in McClinton creek, Massett inlet, during the spring of 1930 it was planned to determine for the Pink salmon (1) the efficiency of natural propagation, (2) the age at maturity, and (3) the validity of the parent stream theory. In beginning the programme which was calculated to yield definite data 011 79

the first problem, the mature Pink salmon migrating upstream in 1930 were accurately counted and an estimate was made of the total number of eggs deposited. In the spring of 1931, it was necessary in continuation of the plan, to count the fry, which were the progeny of this run and which were migrating downstream to sea. This run of fry was similar to the adult run in that it consisted of three species, Coho, Pink and Chum. It was possible to separate these accurately and obtain.counts for all. The first Pink salmon fry arrived at the fence on February 8 but the run did not really begin until February 14. Gradual increase followed to a daily total of approximately 10,000 on April 6. The main migration occurred between April 21 and May 8 when over 71 per cent, of the total or 3,460,000 fish were handled. The total number migrating between February 8 and June 10, the end of the run, was 4,855,000. 66,155 mature male and female Pink salmon ascended the creek in 1930, and it is estimated that 50,900,000 eggs were deposited. The number of fry migrants amounts to only 9.5% of the number of eggs, which gives a loss during spawning, incubation and early fry period of 90.5%.

D. S. RAWSON The productivity of lakes in the Kamloops . region, B.C., as related to the production of Kamloops trout. A study has been begun of the ecology, and especially the food producing capacity, of Paul lake (chosen as particularly favourable for population studies) and of other lakes in the region for comparison in deciding to what degree, if any, the estimate of fish productivity in Paul lake, as determined by Mr. Mottley, might be applicable to other lakes. Paul lake is a small (2 square miles), deep (maximum 55 m., average about 30 m.) lake situated near Kamloops at an altitude of 2,500 feet. It is fed by two small streams, one of which collies from Pinantan lake and is used for irrigation purposes. The lake is now several feet lower than in former years and has little or no outflow. The shallow shore area is small, heavily covered with Chara down to a depth of 11 metres. From .this point depth increases rapidly to 25 or 30 metres. The surface temperature rose as high as 20°C. in August but the bottom (50 m.) temperature was always less than 5°. While a marked stratification existed the large volume of cold water 'retained its oxygen (4.5 p.p.m.) throughout the summer. This condition is quite unlike that in shallow lakes of the vicinity (e.g. Pinantan, where summer stagnation is complete and bottom organisms are almost absent below the lower limit of the thermocline, 12 ni.). The bottom fauna contained an abundance of Amphipods (Gam inarus limnaelts was f ound at the unusual depth of 50 m.), insects (Odonata and Trichoptera in shallow, Chironomidae in deep water), molluscs (Physa and Lyinnaea in shallow, Sphaeriidae iu deep water), and many leeches in shallow water. The plankton was not rich, quite variable, and the'phytoforms seemed unduly us scanty. Daphnie was most abundant. es pules variable, including chiefly, as The food of the Kamloops trout was quite Gainnzarus, insects (damsel and dragonfly nymphs, caddis and chironomid larvae, ni as well as the adult insécts when they were emerging), the larger gastropods, Daphnie and leeches. It was surprising to find many trout up to 1 pound in weight (13 inches) gorged with Daphnie. 80

EDITH STEVENS Role of diatoms in the food of oysters. In this investigation it was hoped to find whether diatoms are used for food as much as is usually thought—and if they are used, what relationship this might have to the fattening of the oyster. It is known that certain localities are more desirable for this fattening process, but the reasons are not definitely known. The diatoms were, with a few exceptions, the same in all three species of oysters (Ostrea lurida, 0. gigas, and 0. Virginica). Besides the ninety determined species found in the digestive tract, there were many smaller species not determined. It was found by actual count of the unbroken specimens that about eighty per cent. of them had protoplasm within the cells before entry. It seems that too much empha'sis may be placed upon the use of diatom's as food for the greater part of the content is detritus of some form. A large amount is composed of particles of multicellular plants and sand. By- actual count of the per cent. of the diatoms .found in the digestive unbroken specimens over fifty canal contained protoplasm. These 'results need to be checked very carefully. The fact that many of these .plants might become crushed in the process of digestion makes for a possible error in the connt.

G. H. WAILES . The Protozoa of British Columbia waters. The following new species have .been discovered and described,— Order Amoebaea; Vexillifera vacillans „ Radiolaria; Challengeron depaupe ratunt „ Chromomonadina; Distephanus octangulatus . Distephanus pentagonus . . „ Peritricha; Zoothamniunt candelabrum . 'Subclass Acinetaria ; Trichophrya columbiae Podophrya elongata. '

\V. R. WHITTAKER • Age composition of the pilchard catch as shown by the otoliths. The age composition of the catch is necessary for conclusions concerning depletion, races or racial distribution of the species. In 1929 it was found that determination from the scales was not satisfactory, and otoliths (or ear bones) have since been collected for this purpose. Otolith material collected during the season of 1930 gave the following results. In Barkley sound the bulk of the pilchard catch was found to be comprised of fish in their fifth, sixth, and seventh y-ears, with approxitnate average standard lengths of 9.7, 9.8 and 9.9 inches respectively. Fish in their fourth and eighth •y-ears were not plentiful. At Nootka the majority.of the fish examined f or age appeared fo be in their fifth and sixth vears.

FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (PACIFIC) PRINCE RUPERT, B.C., 1931 INVESTIGATIONS FRESH FISH INDUSTRY Further work has been done regardinOE the characteristics of marine bacteria and their relation to the decomposition of fish by Dr. Bedford. It has .1)een found that some which are active in decomposing fish muscle • mav grow at temperatures as low as — 5°C. Among these are a number of chromogenic r% 81 bacteria. The activity of these bacteria at lower temperatures is now being investigated. The practical application of the sodium chloride treatment for the control of the bacterial discolouration of halibut at sea was not carried out, since no satisfactory arrangement could be made with any member of the halibut fleet. The small boat possessed by the Station is wholly inadequate for such experiments. Further laboratory work indicates that when the temperature of the brine is lowered the penetration of the salt into the skin of the fish is reduced. It is',the intention to try this modification on a large scale during the next season. The relative numbers of bacteria existing in various concentrations of salt water such as occur at the mouth of a river flowing into the sea are important from theoretical and practical considerations. Such data are necessary as a basis upon which to elaborate any future work. Investigations carried out at the month of the Skéena river and out at sea indicate that the numbers of bacteria decrease rapidly with the increasing salinity. In order to investigate the change in temperature of f resh fish when stowed in the holds of vessels, special resistance thermometers have been constructed in these laboratories by Mr. Young. A preliminary experiment has been carried out with these instruments . on salmon kept under conditions similar to those which obtain in actual practice. Both iced and un-iced samples were used. The above system was found to be satisfactory for this type of work, much of which has to be done at sea under trying conditions.

FROZEN FISH INDUSTRY Investigations relative to the improvement of cold storage rooms have been continued by Mr. Young with encouraging results. By increasing the cooling coil area the total efficiency of the refrigeration plant is increased whilst the dehydrating effect decreases. These important results are now being checked and extended to include the storage of fishery products. The "jacketed cold storage room" has been found to be very efficient in that it permits of almost constant temperature within the room but at the same time it was found that the ordinary vertical door cannot be made sufficiently air-tight to eliminate exchange of air and hence desiccation still proceeds. Experiments are being made with a horizontal oil-sealed hatch which, at least in experimental work, shows great improvement over the standard refrigerator door. In connection with the engineering aspects of the preservation of fish by cold storage it was desirable to obtain more data on the thermal properties of fish muscle and insulating material at freèzing temperatures. A modified "hot plate" of original design has been constructed. By this device the thermal conductivities of commercial fishes of this coast and a variety of common insulating materials are being determined. As a result of the study of the growth of marine bacteria at low temperatures by Dr. Bedford it was decided to find the ef'fect of the sodium chloride treatment found so efficient in the treatment of f resit fish. Halibut treated with a 20 per cent, brine solution and kept in cold storage in the usual manner for eighteen months, proved to be,in good condition at the end of that time. The oxidative type of rusting which occurs around the napes and cut surfaces is not prevented by this method and further investigations are being made concerning this. The susceptibility of fish oils to rancidity is of importance in the preservation' of fish. This is emphasized in a further study of the chemical changes taking place in the oil of frozerl salmon by- Messrs. Brocklesby and Denstedt. It appears that oxidation and also a reaction with a nitiogenous substance are involved in the Production of "rust." Ammonia hastens the onset of "rusting" and also turns the red pigment of salmon oil to a rusty brown colour. Studies of the 82

biological and chemical rancidity of salmon oil are in progress. The activity of ammonia-producing bacteria at low temperatures is also being investigated.

SALMON CANNING INDUSTRY At the request of the industry preliminary experiments have been commenced on the nutritive value of canned salmon, pending the approval of a more extended programme. The preliminary work by Messrs. Brocklesby and Bailey involves the vitamin A and D potency of canned Sockeye and Pinks each from three producing areas. This work is being done on the extracted oils. The physical and chemical properties of the oils are also being f ound. Since the work may be extended to include a larger number of samples some study is being given to the colorimetric test for vitamin A as applied to salmon oils.

FISH OIL INDUSTRY The refining of fish oils is a prerequisite to their industrial use. Decolorization is an important process in such refining. At the present time plans are being made for the establishment of a refinery on the Pacific Coast. Information was desired concerning the process as applied to Canadian fish oils. As a result of an investigation carried out this last summer by Messrs. Brocklesby and Moore it has been f ound that several B.C. deposits of diatomites and bentonites can be used economically to decolorize fish oils. Furthermore, the poorer grades can be cheaply activated by a simple acid treatment. To form a basis for the industrial investigations concerning the utilization of fish oils the composition of pilchard oil . has been determined. The work is completed and will soon be ready for publication. Industrial applications of fish oils are still beinc, investigated. The investigation by- Messrs. Brocklesby and Denstedt regarding theb use of pilchard oil in the protective coating industry is almost complete and many valuable data have been accumulated. It is possible that a fish-oil, edible-shortening plant may be erected on the Pacific coast in the near future. Apart from the general economic depression, there are two reasons why the plans for this new industry have been delayed. First, the Government regulation necessitating the labelling of fish oil products with the words "Made f rom fish oils," and secondly, the fact that no reliable data were available concerning the hydrogenation of pilchard oil. Through the efforts of the Fisheries Department, the regulation has been amended and the necessary information regarding the hydrogenation of pilchard oil is being furnished by a comprehensive series of studies by Messrs. Brocklesby and Charnley. The rate of reaction and the effect of catalytic poisons which may be met with in fish oils has been determined. Information regarding the correlation of analytical constants has also been accumulated. The research is now concerned with the change in composition Of the oil as hydrogenation proceeds.

BY-PRODUCTS INDUSTRY The investigation by Mr. Smith concerning the possibility of the manufacture of fish glue on this coast has been completed. A simple method of making fish glue from fish waste liquors has been f ound. Samples of liquid glue have been prepared from the waste liquor of reduction plants and subjected to chemical analysis and joint strength tests. Glues as strong as the best commercial liquid glues can be produced. Three papers have been submitted for publication• and a popular bulletin is in preparation. Several oils from commercial fishes of this coast give high values for vitamin A when tested colorimetrically. These tests are being checked by biological 83

assays and if confirmed, such oils should constitute a valuable source of vitamin A. A bacteriological investigation is in progress regarding the utilization of the waste liquors from pilchard reduction plants as a fertilizer. A chemical analysis has been made of the liquor and the action of the material on various types of earths is now being investigated. d M ISCELLANEOUS '1. Nass river investigation. The factors involved in the depositing of Nass river mud on the nets of salmon fishermen in the Nass river area have been found by Dr. Martin. Silt pa rticles from the river, precipitated by the sea water, are held together and on the nets by marine organisms killed by the fresh water. The smelter at Anyox (originally suspected of being the cause of the trouble) has been proven to be free of any responsibility, in the matter. 2. The phenol co-efficient of sonie commercial disinfectants. Enquiries are being received conCerning the efficiency of commercial disinfectants. Eleven such substances are being tested for the information of the industry by Dr. r■v"," Bedford. STAFF The following comprised the staff of the Station during the year 1931: Assistant Bacteriologist—R. H. Bedford. Assistant Chemist (and Acting Director)—H. N. BrockIesby. Assistant Chemist—L. F. Smith. Assistant Chemist—O. F. Denstedt. Assistant Chemist—F. Charnley. Mechanical Engineer—O. C. Young. Scientific Assistant (Biochemistry)—B. E. Bailey. Laboratory Assistant (Chemistry)—P. A. Sunderland. Laboratory Assistant (Bacteriology)—J. A. Potts. Laboratory Assistant (Engineering)—D. A. Ross.

SEASONAL Special Investigator Nass River Problein—W. H. Martin. Scientific Assistant in Bacteriology—P. T. Black. Scientific Assistant in Chemistry—L. P. Moore. Scientific Assistant in Engineering—J. E. Dyck.

BUILDINGS AND ACCOMMODATION The Station now possesses two well-equipped buildings which should provide sufficient accommodation for some years. The second storey of the new building was completed this spring.

EQUIPMENT •

The transfer of' the bacteriological laboratories to the new building has t necessitated the purchase of considerable new equipment. These laboratories are now well established in the new quarters. All laboratories are now well equipped. In connection with the canned salmon experiments it has been found necessary to obtain a large autoclave and small steam boiler. These were purchased locally and` are proving satisfactory. Several new pieces of microscopical apparatus have also been acquired for the above investigation_ Other equipment purchased has been largely to replace broken or worn stock.

fa 84

LIBRARY • About 60 new volumes have been added to the Station library during the past year, bringing the total up to about 500 volumes. In addition, new journals have been subscribed for, 52 now being received by the Station. A subdivision of the library has been made between the two buildings thus relieving to a considerable extent the congestion in the library of the old building.

CONSULTATION The Station has been consulted by many firms on a variety of fisheries technological subjects. This is becoming a very important part of the duties of the Station and seems to be very much appreciated by the industry. When in Vancouver, -members of the staff spend a great deal of their time on this sort of work. The Experimental Station does not undertake commercial analysis.

PUBLICITY Addresses have been given by various members of the staff before organizations both in Prince Rupert and in Vancouver. The Acting-Director has had several conferences with the Canadian Manufacturers Association, officials and technologists of various fishing companies and brokers handling fisheries products. He has also conferred with technologists and fisheries research workers of the south Pacific coast. The quarterly Progress Reports, (now published at Prince Rupert) have been issued regularly. The mailing list for this publication is steadily growing, it now being necessary to print 1,000 copies of each issue.

PUBLICATIONS PROGRESS REPORTS No. 7. The control of discolouration or yellowing or halibut. By R. H. Bedford. The large scale production of fi sh glue. By L. F. Smith. No. 8. The new low temperature research laboratory and projected refrigeration research. By O. C. Young. No. 9. Fish oils as foods. By H. N. Brocklesby. - Marine bacteria. By R. H. Bedford. Fish glue from fish waste. By L. F. Smith. No. 10. The Fifth Annual Conference. The hydrogenation of pilchard oil. By F. Charnley. The use of pilchard oil in protective coatings. By O. F. Denstedt. The study of the mud deposits on the gill nets in the Nass river district, British •Columbia. • No. 11. The decolorization of fish oils. By H. N. Brocklesby. Investigations in refrigeration. By O. C. Young. The growth of some marine and ,other bacteria at low temperatures. lày R. H. Bedford. Composition and vitamin potency of oils from canned salmon. By B. E. Bailey.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN BIOLOGX AND FISHERIES (SERIES INDUSTRIAL)

NC). 1. The nutritive value of marine products. IV. A note on the vitamin A content of commercial pilchard oil. By D. B. Finn. No. 2. Apparatus for drying oil research. By H. N. Brocklesby and O. F. Denstedt. .• (SERIES A GENERAL) No., 18. A deep sea bacteriologiCal water bottle. By O. C. Young, D. B; Finn, and R. Bedford. • • No. 19. The bactericidal effect of the Prince Rupert water bottle: By R. H. Bedford. 85

INVESTIGATORS' , SUMMARIES R. H. BEDFORD 1. The control of bacterial discolouration of halibut. In continuing this 'experiment from the previous y-ear it was intended to ascertain whether the concentration of the NaC1 and time of immersion may be reduced and also what would be the effect of lowering the temperature of the solution. The laboratory work indicated that when halibut was treated with either 15 ors 20 per cent. NaC1 at 0°C., the quantity of NaC1 in or on the skin was about the same, and slightly less in the 1 cm. layer, than when the temperature of the solution was maintained at that of the room.. The next stepits practical application—was not carried out for the reason that no satisfactory agreement could be made with any member of the fleet. Since it was found that NaC1 could be used for controlling discolouration and for its partial sterilizing properties, a modification of the method is being used in a practical manner in Great Britain_ This is 'called the "Sterilac" process ; the halibut are dipped .in brine and then immediately frozen. An examination of 500 lbs.—about 150 fish—of frozen halibut first treated by our method for controlling discolouration has just been made after the fish had been in cold storage for 16 months. This examination was made in the presence of the general manager, comptroller, superintendent, and a grader of the Canadian Fish and Cold Storage Company, Prince Rupert. There was no discolouration; the white side had remained white, while those that had not been treated were distinctly yellow. Around the poke, where the glaze luld disappeared, there was slight rusting. It was the unanimous opinion that this method of controlling the bacterial discolouration of halibut was a success. 2. Marine bacteria and their relation to decomposition of fish. The part played by marine bacteria in the decomposition of fish is not known. This information is desired as a foundation upon which to elaborate any bacteriological investigation regarding the decomposition of fresh fish, and the changes that take place in fish in cold storage. The problem involves a complete classification of the morphological, cultural, and physiological characteristics of individual bacteria, and a tentative classification has been made. It has been established that numerous marine forms grow at as low as — 5°C. (23°F.). This is of practical importance in regard to iced f resh and cold stored fish. It has also been established that certain marine bacteria can grow over quite a wide range of temperature, as for example — 5 0 to 37°C. with an optimum of 20° to 25°. Some qualitative work indicates that they are active in decomposing fish muscle. These two factors together indicate that marine bacteria must be considered in any scheme of preservation and shows the necessity for proper stowage and insulation of vessels' holds both for fish intended for fresh and frozen markets. 3. Effect of fresh and salt water npon ba. cterial numbers and nitrate rcduction. In this oceanographical problem the information desired is as to what effect the mixing of fresh and salt water has upon bacterial numbers, whether the reduction of nitrate takes place under any of the conditions presented, and whether the numbers of bacteria in the sea rise and fall with season. In six months' work it has been found that the mixing of fresh and salt water causes a decided decrease in the number of bacteria. No seasonal fluctuation is at present discernible, and denitrification has not yet taken place. 4. Pilchard effluent, as a nitrogenous fertilizer. A preliminary investigation indicated that chemically, the effluent from pilchard reduction plants is rich in nitrogen (10 per cent.) and phosphorus (1.5 per cent.), both calculated on 86 moisture-free sample, two important constituents for plant growth; and an bacteriologically, it is a suitable medium for the production of nitrate nitrogen. the This fact has been established by treating a number of different soils with the effluent and measuring a plant food (nitrate nitrogen which may be used as an sim index of the value of nitrogenous fertilizers), which is made available for the abs( plant by certain groups of bacteria. valt It is now intended to measure its effect upon peat soil and other cellulosic eacl material and see whether an artificial manure can be made. (2) indc n 60 H. N. BROCKLESBY • D The properties of some miscellaneous fish oils. Tests have been made of and samples of oil from one -or more of the head, body and liver in each of the commercial fishes, halibut, Ling cod, Black cod, Red cod, Grey cod, herring and org (gl: ratfish. Considerable variation was found in (1) colour in Lovibond units (Y, 0.6-29.9; R, 0.1-9.9), (2) iodine value (86.3-171.5) (3) saponification fatt value (145.5-195.2), (4) unsaponifiable matter (0.20-22.2) • and (5) vitamin the A in Lovibond blue units with 10 per cent, solution of oil (0-294). The outstanding features were the high vitamin A potencies of halibut, Ling cod, and H. Grey cod liver oils, such not having been reported for the latter two fishes, though known for the halibut. OXic H. N. BROCKLESBY AND B. E. BAILEY stot wet Determination of the vitamin potency and the chemical properties of oils Knowledge of the vitamin potency of B.C. canned from B.C. canned salmon. tom salmon is important both to the producer and consumer. Few data are available general, and none whatever relative to the vitamin potency of canned salmon in con concerning B.C. products. Samples of oils of canned Sockeye and Pink salmon have been obtained f rom the Fraser river, Rivers inlet and Skeena river areas. both species The results of preliminary tests show that vitamin D is present in to I to that found in vitainin A potencies, in an amount comparable cod liver oil. The alsc however, are low. In administering doses for the latter test it has been found necessary to feed the unsaponifiable matter since the low vitamin A potency do necessitated feeding of very large doses of oil. Th( The most interesting facts so far produced by the chemical analyses have by to do with the free fatty acid content of the oil. Oils recovered by cold pressing canned salmon always give lower acid values than those prepared by solvent extraction. Furthermore, the acid values of solvent extracted oils vary to a far greater extent than do those of pressed oils. Oils f rom Sockeye salmon have oxi lower acid numbers than those from Pink salmon, irrespective of the method of extraction. Pink salmon oils are more highly unsaturated than Sockeye salmon oils and preliminary experiments would seem to indicate that the fish of both to species caught in the more northerly ,waters are more highly unsaturated than use those caught in the south. the prii

H. N. BROCKLESBY AND F. CIIARNLEY linc Hydrogenation of Pilchard oil. A promising field for the pilchard oil pig industry of the Pacific Coast is in the manufacture of fats for edible and other suli purposes. No hydrogenating plants, however, have yet been erected in British and Columbia, but there are prospects of one being built in the very near future. the Successful hydrogenation depends very largely upon the conditions under which bee the reaction is carried out, and, since oils vary considerably in composition ana bee properties, the optimum conditions for each oil will be different. Consequently dio 87 an accurate knowledge of the effects of all the different factors which influence the reaction must be obtained. The velocity of hydrogenation of refined pilchard oil in the presence of simple nickel catalyst has been studied by determining: (1) the hydrogen absorption, (2) the change in refractive index, and (3) the change in iodine value during hydrogenation. From these data curves showing the relation between each of the following were drawn: (1) hydrogen absorption and iodine value, (2) hydrogen absorption and refractive index and (3) iodine value and refractive index. ' The relation in (3) has been expressed in the form of an equation, .= 1.4474 + 9.6158 x 10-5 7.7998 x 10-812 where n = thé refractive index and I = iodine value. It was found that very small quantities of organic sulphur (cystine), or organic phosphorus (lecithin), organic phosphorus (lecithin), organic nitrogen (glycine and also the ether extract f rom decayed cod-fish), fatty acids (total fatty acids from pilchard oil) exercised a very pronounced retarding effect on the velocity of hydrogenation.

H. N. BROCKLESBY AND O. F. DENSTEDT 1. A chemical study of the rusting of frozen fish and a study of the oxidative rancidity of fish. oil. Investigation of the "rusting" of salmon in cold storage, commenced in 1927, but postponed until suitable cold storage rooms were available, has now been resumed, and the f ollowing information obtained. (a) The free fatty acid content of the oil of frozen salmon is greater towards the centre of the fish. (b) The acid value (free fatty acid content) is no criterion of the "rusted" condition. (c) Oils from fresh fish are neutral. (d) "Rusted" fish, when extracted with ethyl ether, give oils which appear to be oxidized. Such oils give positive results when tested for rancidity. They also contain large amounts of nitrogen. (e) Oils extracted from "rusted" fish by cooking with water and pressing do not appear to be oxidized. They do not react towards peroxide indicators. They have normal iodine values. It is supposed that the oxidized oil is absorbed by the tissues of the fish and is therefore not extracted by this method. (f) An atmospSere of ammonia hastens the onset of "rusting." (g) Salmon oils stored in ammonia also give a rusty coloured product. (h) From analysis of the "rust"' it appears that it is not composed of oxidized oil alone but that nitrogen is present in some form or other. 2. The drying properties of Canadian pilchard oil. It has been desirable to improve certain qualities of pilchard oil films with a view to extending the usefulness of this oil in the paint industry. It has also been desirable to determine the utility of pilchard oil in the waterproofing, patent leather, leather, linoleum, printing ink and other industries, as well as to investigate new fields of usefulness. The hardness of films has been-improved considerably (a) by using cobalt linoleate drier alone in concentration of 0.05 to 0.1 per cent., depending on thé Pigment (cerium preferable to lead) ; (b) by- treating the raw pilchard oil with sulphur dioxide (ras ; (c) by incorporation of pigments and fillers such as calcium and barium carbonate; .(d) bv the incorporation of synthetic gums; and (e) by the admixture of linseed or -China wood oils. Impermeability of moisture has been improved by the incorporation of gums and pigments. Adhesiveness has been improved bv decreasing permeabilitv to moisture, and treatment with sulphur dioxide. Yellowing of white pigments in the dark has been overcome by sulphur 88 dioxide treatment and slight polymerization of oil. Gloss has been improved by (a) proper refrigeration of the oil ; (b) use of poly-merized oils ; and (c) use of cobalt drier alone. Permanence of gloss has been improved by increasing the hardness of the film.

H. N. BROCKLESBY AND L. P. MooRE The decolourization of fish oils. Before they are suitable for industrial use, fish oils must be refined by such processes as alkali treatment, wintering, decolourizing and deodorizing. Little work has been published regarding decolourization, and it has therefore been thought desirable to ascertain the efficiency of standard decolourizing earths and carbons when used with a fish oil (i.e. Canadian pilchard oil), and also to investigate the decolourizing power of certain British Columbia earths. Using a commercial sample of pilchard oil, about 150 experiments were made on a semi-commercial scale. The results may be summarized as follows: (1) None of the domestic earths (such as B.C. diatomite, Bentonite, and volcanic ash) were as efficient as imported activated earths ; (2) domestic earths are cheaper and can therefore be used in larger quantities; (3) by a simple acid treatment domestic earths were made as active as imported earths.

W. H. MARTIN - Study of the mud deposits of the gill nets in the Nass river district, British Columbia. The sinking of gill nets by depositing mud near the mouth of the Nass river was a serious loss to fishermen" and cannery operators during the 1929 and 1930 seasons. During- those two seasons preliminary studies were made by the Experimental Station but no definite conclusions were made as to the cause of the phenomenon. During 1931 a microscopical analysis of the silt from the Nass, and deposits f rom the nets were made. It was found that they were identical in character but entirely different from the material discharged by the Any-ox smelter, which had previously been suspected of being the cause of the trouble. The mud on the nets was found to be attached by means of gelatinous strands of jellyfish and other marine organisms. The trouble occurred when the marine life in the sea was most abundant. Furthermore the phenomenon was always preceded by exceptionally high tides which caused rapid mixing of large amounts of silt containing Nass water with sea water containing abundant sea life. The sea water precipitated the river silt which deposited on the marine organisms which were killed by the fresh water.

L. F. SMITH I. The joint strength of fish gle. A study was made of the adhesive strength of liquid fish glue in wood joints. Commercial samples and samples prepared in the laboratory from fish waste were tested. The procedure developed by the U.S. Forest Products Laboratory was employed. Strips of maple wood were glued together and then broken in shear in a testing machine, the load at failure being calculated in kilograms per square centimetre of glued area. The majority of the glues were stronger than the wood, strength values up to 200 kg. Per sq. cm. being recorded. High viscosity, and concentration of the glue solution and lengthened assembly time were effective in producing strong joints when. joining presSures of 3-14 kg. per sq. cm . were employed. The effect of atmospheric humidity 89

was slight below 75 per cent, relative humidity; at higher humidities joints were seriously weakened by softening of the glue. 2. The. examination of fish glue. A study has been made of the methods of evaluating liquid fish glue. The joint-streng,th test is considered the one thoroughly reliable test by which the value of a glue as an adhesive may be determined. The viscosity of a glue measured under standard conditions bears little or no relation to the strength of joints the glue is capable of producing. Low hygroscopicity indicates a glue *hich is faster drying and more resistant to atmospheric conditions. The determination of the gel-point giyes no information of assistance in judging the adhesive properties of a glue. A test fOr the speed of set is shown to lack sound theoretical foundation. The ash, chloride and solid contents are the most important chemical data. The hydrogen-ion concentration is of little value in practical glue testing. Result of protein precipitation analyses by use of magnesium sulphate cannot be correlated with the behaviour of glues in actual service. 3. Preparation of liquid fish glue by the dialysis and electro-dialysis of fish uuste liquors. The waste effluent liquors of plants enffaged in the manufacture of fish meal from fish waste contain glue. The purification of these liquors to make glue involves the separation of salt and diffusible substances from the glue colloid. Simple dialysis using viscose tubing and electro-dialysis using membranes of parchment paper are effective in removing impurities and producing glue of good quality from waste liquors. Both methods can be used on an industrial scale, the dialysis process being the simpler and more efficient.

O. F. YOUNG 1. Cooling coils. It seemed desirable to determine interrelationships between (1) area of cooling coils in refrigeration of a cold storage room, (2) temperature of the cooling medium, (3) outside temperature, and (4) dehydration. One to three "banks" of cooling coils have been used, and outside temperatures of 60°, 70°, and 80°F., with a temperature inside of 10°F. For example it was found that with an outside temperature of 60°F., and with one, two, and three "banks" of coils, the temperature difference between the circulating brine and the inside air was 16.4°, 10.0° and 8.0° respectively, and the dehydration 0.050, 0,036, and 0.030 lbs. per square foot per day- respectively. 2. Improved cold storage rooms. To obtain a non-dehydrating cold storage room, for the storage of f rozen fish, a jacketed cold storage room was constructed hai-ing a metal-covered inner compartment, surrounded by- a 2-inch air space in the form of a continuous duct which commences at the discharffe of a circulatin fan, spirals about the room, passes under the floor and endsendsb at cooling coils situated in a "bunker" overhead. An anteroom adjoins one side and is so arranged that the fan may be made to circulate the air in the anteroom as well as about the room itself before the door into the inner compartment is opened. The main insulation encompasses both the raom and the anteroom but only the jacket separates the two chambers. It has been found: (I) that the temperatures at the top and the bottom of the room do not differ from each other more than half a degree Fahrenheit ; (2) that small fluctuations in the temperature of the cooling brine do not perceptibly affect the temperature in the room ; (3) that opening and closing the doors between anteroom and jacketed room have no perceptible effect upon the s ri temperature of the jacketed room; (4) that slight dehy-dration still proceeds due partly to leakage about the door (verified by taping with rubberized tape), 90 and partly to leakages in the metal covering elsewhere than the door ; (5) that with an a1solutely air tight inner compartment dehydration does not take place (verified by constructing a small metal airtight box having oil seals for all openings) ; and (6) that a horizontal hatchway lends itself well to the employment of an oil seal, and presents a rneans of access that facilitates securing absolute air-tightness when closed. ANNUAL REPORT

ON THE WORK OF THE

Biological Board of Canada

FOR THE YEAR 1932

OPERATING UNDER THE CONTROL OF THE HON. THE MINISTER OF FISHERIES

OTTAWA 1933 THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA Professor J. P. McMuizatcx, University of Toronto, Chairman. J. J. COWIE, Esq., Department of Fisheries, Secretary-Treasurer. Professor R. J. BEAN, Dalhousie University. Professor A. T. CAMERON, University of Manitoba. Professor A. F. CHAISSON, SI. Francis Xavier University. Professor PHILIP COX, University of New Brunswick. JOHN DYBHAVN, Esq., Prince Rupert. - Professor A. H. HurcnixsoN, University of British Columbia. Professor W. T. MAcCrumENT, Queen's University. Professor MAà:-ifICT. oRilsr,- bniv'eisity- Professor-H. G.-PERRY, Acadia University. • .r- - Professor E. E. PRINCE, Ottawa. J. A. RODD, Esq., Department of Fisheries. Professor W. P. THOMPSON, University of Saskatchewan. Professor A. VAcnoN, Laval University. President R. C. WALLACE, University of Alberta. A. H. 'WHITMAN, Esq., Halifax. Professor A. WILLEY, McGill University. SUMMARY REPORT ON THE WORK OF THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA FOR 1932 • BY THE CHAIRMAN, PROFESSOR J. PLAYFAIR MCMURRICH The y-ear 1932 was the twentieth anniversary of the establishment of the Biological Board of Canada. During the score of years of its existence there has been a constantly increasing expansion of the Board's activities and a constantly increasing importance of the results obtained in or in connection with its labora- tories, nor does this statement need modification in its application to 1932, not- withstanding the unfavourable conditions under which it carried on. The constitution of the Board, as outlined in • the Report of 1931, has remained unchanged. - During the year the four Stations operated by the Board, the Biological Station at St. Andrews, with the accessory station at Ellerslie, the Biological Station at Nanaime, B.C., with its accessory station at Cultus Lake, B.C., and the Fisheries Experimental Stations at Halifax, N.S., and Prince Rupert, B.C., have shown their usual activity, indeed have surpassed it in the multiplicity of the problems investigated and, the importance of the results obtained. The Board conoTatulates itself on the reappointment of Mr. D. B. Finn to the directorship of the Prince Rupert Station, he bringing with him a renewed enthusiasm and valuable experience. There is to be recorded in this report the first serious untoward event in the history of the Stations, namely, the destruction by fire of the laboratory building at St. Andrews on March 9, the result of an explosion cf furnace gas. Fortunately the rire did not extend to the other buildings of the Station, but the loss was a severe one, involving the valuable library, important records and the plankton and other collections of many years. Prompt and efficient action by the director and his staff made possible the partial reconstruction of the building in fire proof materials in time for the summer work of the Station to be carried on. Much, however, yet rernains to be done in providing necessary equipment and in reestablishing the library. It is a pleasant duty to record the generous offers froin F,everal quarters of gifts of books and pamphlets as a nucleus for the restoration of the library. During the year the work of the International Passamaquoddy Fisheries Commission vas continued with the St. Andrews Station as the summer base, its headquarters later being transferred to the Oceanographic Institution at WoOds Hole, Mass. Summaries of the results obtained by the workers at the various Stations will be found appended to the reports of the Directors. Among so many items of interest it is invidious to select a few for special mention and yet the very number and variety of the investigations' make some selections advisable. In connection with the St. Andrews Station attention may be drawn to-the continued investigation of the complex problem of the natural history of the Atl tntic" salmon. A survey of the• herring fishery of the bay of Fundy gave evidence of a close relationship of the "catch" to physical conditions, especially temperature and salinity. Experiments on the "fertilization" of fresh water lakes and ponds have been' continued, partly in the experiMental tanks at the Station and partly, on a làrger cale, in the Cha"mcook lakes. The value of the results obtained from the survey of the baY of Fundy - fisheries, brought to a Conclusion last year, suggested'that a 'similar survey should be Made. of the "fisheries of the southern coast of Neva Scotia and work was begun in the Halifax area, the 4

Eastern Passage laboratory affording a convenient base from which the investiga- tion might be carried on. Data on the occurrence and distribution in the area of fish were obtained and hydrographic observations revealed an interest_ tl certain food tl ing layering of the waters both inshore and offshore, which requires further study. At Richmond bay, P.E.I., the study of oyster culture has been vigorously a prosecuted. The effects of temperature and salinity on the spat and on the germ il cells have been determined, a method has been discovered for rendering objection- able muddy bottoms suitable for oyster culture and evidence has been obtained of the occurrence of sex-reversal in both directions in the native oyster. A survey of Shediac bay as to its suitability for oyster culture was made. Il In British Columbia the failure of the Provincial Government to continue its co-operation in the study of the pilchard and its fishery handicapped somewhat that investigation, but neyertheless not a little was accomplished toward working out the natural history of the fish. At Cultus lake continuation of the experi- ment as to the relative efficiency of natural and artificial spawning of the sockeye 1 salmen was interrupted, the run of fish being so great that the hatchery could not accommodate the available eggs. However, a further attempt was made to DI (

-from the geological and oceanographic standpoints, as well as from the biological. Much attention has been given to the problems of oyster culture on the Pacific RI i coa.st, where the eastern and the Japanese oysters have been introduced. A study RI of the spatting and g-rowth of these forms and of the native oyster indicate a greater hardiness of the Japanese form and the advisability of its more extensive culture. At the Atlantic Fisheries Experimental Station at Halifax, further attention has been given to the problems of refrigeration and smoke curing. A study of the chemical changes proeluced by the various methods of freezing has been begun and the composition of the smoke used in smoking fish has been investigated. Improvements have been made in the smoke producing apparatus. The apparatus - for smoking with conditioned air installed last year at Lunenburg has been in •satisfactory operation during the year, with some modifications that experience has shown to be advisable. Attention has also been given to the conditions under which transportation of frozen fish products and of lobsters is carried on. An outstanding investigation at the Pacific Fisheries Experimental Station, Prince Rupert, B.C., has been that on the composition and utilization of fish oils. It has been found that by mixing certain fish oils, an oil may be produçed that equals, indeed surpasses, cod liver oil in its vitamin content. Such a mixture has been standardized under the name marinol, and is now being used by the Public Health Board of British Columbia. An examination of the body oils of the west coast salmon has shown that the y differ sufficiently in their saturation in the different species to Make possible the identification of the species from which they come arjd, furthermore, since the formation of free fatty acids proceeds at a definite rate after death of the fish, it is possible to determine from the oils the approximate elapsed time since the fish was caught. Further results from the studies on fish oils and summaries of investigations on refrigeration and fish • spoilage will be found in the Director's report and its appendices. • The educational activities of the staffs of the laboratories have been even greater than in past years. The fifth course for Fishermen was given at the 5

Halifax Station January 27 to March 8, twenty-eight being in attendance. The thanks of the Board are due for assistance to Mr. G. R. Earl and Mr. R. Gray of the Department of Fisheries in the courses in Fish Processing, to Dr. M. Cumming and Professor W. V. Longley of the Department of Agriculture of Nova Scotia in lectures on Natural Resources, to Professor A. S. Walker in lectures on Natural Resources, to Mr. R. H. Davison in a course on Motor Engines and to Captain H. M. O'Hara in a course on Navigation. From March 10 to March 16 a "refresher" course was given at the Halifax Statidn for the fishery supervisors and inspectors of the Maritime Provinces and numbers of the Halifax Station have as usual co-operated in'the Fishery course of ered by Dalhousie University. On the Pacific coast the staffs of the Stations conducted a course for the fishery inspectors of British Columbia at the Nanaimo Station from February 15 to February 27, twenty-seven inspectors being in attendance. In the summer, Tt,ly 4 to July 16, a course was given by members of the staff of the Nanaimo -Station to seventeen hatchery 'assistants of British Columbia hatcheries. The course was given at Sorrento on Shuswap lake.

ATLANTIC BIOLOGICAL STATION ST. ANDREWS, N.B., 1932 The work of the Station is carried on at St. Andrews, N.B., at the Prince Edward Island Marine Station on the Bideford river, Ellerslie, P.E.I., and at st ch points along the Canadian Atlantic c-oast as particular investigations in hand m-ty at any time make necessary. The particular field of work for which the Station is responsible is that including investigations related to fish culture, fish conservation, and fish exploita- ti, n, and certain associated educational matters. The staff of the Station during 1932 included the following: Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Director. Dr. R. H. M'Gonigle, Assistant Director and Assistant Pathologist. Mr. H. B. Hachey, Assistant Hydrographer. Dr. A. W. H. Needler, Assistant Zoologist. Mr. A. A. Blair, Scientific Assistant. Mr. R. A. McKenzie, Scientific Assistant. Mr. M. \V. Smith, Scientific Assistant. Mr. W. Templeman, Scientific Assistant. Dr. V. D. Vladykov, Scientific Assistant. Mr. H. C. White, Scientific'.Assistant. Mr. E. G. Rigby, Curator. SEASONAL ! Mr. J. M. Morton, Scientific Assistant. For part of the year Dr. R. H. Bedford of the Fisheries Experimental Station (Pacific) was a member of the staff of the Station. The volunteer investigators during the year and their university associations were as follows: Miss A. Alley (McGill), Prof. B. P. Babkin (McGill), Miss M. C. Baker ((?ueens), Dr. H. I. Battle (Western Ontario), Dr. D. J. Bowie (McGill), Prof. A. F. Chaisson (St. Francis Xavier), Miss A. E. Clark ( (McGill), Miss V. M. Davidson (Toronto), Mr. J. Wallwin Fisher (Toronto), Mr. M. H. Friedman (Western Ontario), Mr. C. E. Kearney (Dalhousie), Miss M. A. Langstroth (Dalhousie), Mr. N. g McNairn (McMaster), Dr. A. B. Needler, Mr. C. L. Xewsombe (Toronto), Mr. J. V. V. Nicholls (McGill), Mr. R. V. V. Nicholls (McGill), Mr. E. S. Pentland (Queens), Dr. W. R. Sawyer (Harvard), Mr. J. A'. Stevenson (Queens), Miss H. Tait (McGill). 6

INVESTIGATIONS SPECIAL FISHERIES , 11 aat 5 1. Salmon. The work of Mr. Blair for the year on the life history of the salmon in certain important rivers has been largely confined to the salmon of the I at St. John river system, principally as caught at sea, 1,158 fish having been exam- at ined. Material was also obtained from the Miramichi from 300 salmon so as in to follow conditions for comparison with previous years there and with the St, a Johh conditions. Annapolis river fish taken by the Fish Cultural branch in 1931 l'c for spawning purposes have been studied by Miss I. McCracken of the Univer- sity of Western Ontario, and also material has been available from the Petit- N codiac river, obtained by Inspector B. Barnes in 1931. A limited amount of ix salmon material has been collected bY Mr. Forrest Watson of Halls Harbour ai for a study of the interesting salmon condition that has been found to exist P aloncr the Fundy shore of Kings county, N.S. P 'As the result of requests for permission to fish a run of salmon to the (` St. John river, - which occurs after the spawning is over, an Order-in-Council tl was passed permitting fishing in St. John'harbour during November and December CC in order to determine the nature and extent of this post spawning run. Mr. Ia McKenzie has had charge of the collection of data and material provided by this tf special fishery. 7 Restigouche salmon fry, provided by the Fish Cultural branch, were planted by Mr. White in the east branch of the Apple river, at the head of the bay of P Fundy, to follow their behaviour and success in such -very different conditions ci from those to which they are native, as well as to determine whether a stock r( of salmon can be built up in that branch, which has been without such fish. Mr. White continued his observations of the behaviour of the salmon in the Apple Si river and neighbouring streams, following the parr and smolt as well as the C1 adult spawning fish. He has attempted to correlate the character of the parr w ith Si the physical conditions (temperature and hydrogen-ion concentration) in the al streams. ir h) Dr. David L. Belding of Boston University began in 1931 under the Resti- I gouche Riparian Association, an investigation of the natural histery of the salmon à parr in the Restigouche river. In 1932 he continued this under the Biological RI Board, extending it to include other rivers emptying into Chaleur bay. Approxi- al P mately 2,300 parr were collected from the Restigouche, Kedgwick, Upsalquitch, Matapedia, York, Dartmouth, St. John (Gaspé), Bonaventure, and Grand Cas- tl capedia rivers, the collections being made in October at the end of the season,s . growth. and the fish seined at night, the only time when accurate sampling is h possible. This material is being studied together with hatchery specimens cf salmon fry and d fingerlings provided by the Department of Fisheries of Canada, and by the Quebec Maritime Fisheries Branch. S An attempt has been made to follow the results of runs of salmon into the it Digdeguash and Magaguadavic rivers of Charlotte county, N.B., which have ti had such in the fall of 1932 for the first time in years. The effect on the salmon of h three dams on the Liverpool river, N.S., is being followed by the Department si of Fisheries, and Inspector J. P. Buchanan has provided material for a study of the unusual conditions that have resulted. The operations of the Fish Cultural branch on the land locked salmon of the Chamcook lakes has given an -oppor- o tunity to study the stock there as to character and movements. 2. Herring. Mr. McNairn has begun a study of the varieties of her' ing occurring in the bay of Fundy., particularly of the spring spawning fish on the tl Nova Scotian side, which show some agreement in character with the spring 11 spawners in the gulf of St. Lawrence. The director has continued the collection F of information from fishermen as to the herring fishery of the bay, and has ti analysed the monthly and annual statistics collected by the fishery officers, as well 7 as the daily records of vveir catches made available by individual fishermen, in an attempt to elucidate the factors governing, catches of herring. 3. Hake. Dr. Battle has extended her study of the hake of the Fundy area to include the whole coast and has made special collections of material both at St. Andrews and at Halifax, as well as enlisting the help of various inspectors in providing data and material from outlyino- points. There has thus been possible a study not only of the fishery as shown 1; the official statistics, but also of th,>. `ood„ growth and spawning of this fish. 4! Lobster., Field investigations were carried out by Mr. Templeman in Northumberland strait, which has a late summer or fall fishery, in the western part of the bay of Fundy, and on the eastern coast of Nova Scotia between Canso and Liscomb. Special experimental fishing was done during the close season at Pt. du Chene from July 1 to 20, and at Grand Manan from August 1 to 17. Pa7ticular attention was paid to (1) spawning, (2) hatching, (3) moulting, (4) size at maturity, and (5) weight in relation to proportions of the body, and the relation of moulting to the fall fishery in Northumberland strait has been considered. Examinations were made of about 5,000 lobsters from Northumber- land strait, 4,780 from the waters between Canso and Jeddore, and 1,950 from the bay of Fundy from St. John to Grand Manan. For a study of migrations 71 lobsters were tagged at Pt. du Chene and 65 at Grand Manan. 5. Oyster. Investigations of this form are carried out at and from the Prince Edward Island Marine Station under Dr. A. W. H. Needier. The prin- cipal part of the work is the determination of the factors that affect successful reproduction and growth in local waters. The conditions under which (1) the oy-ter spaWns, (2) the larvae develop, (3) the spat settles, and (4) the adults survive and grow satisfactorily, all require to be determined for successful cu:ture. The leasing by the Department of Fisheries for private culture of con- siderable areas of Malpeqtie bay and its tributary waters renders rapid progress along these lines particularly important. It is being found possible to devise improvements in current procedure for (a) the collection of the spat, (b) the haAling of the young during the first winter, (c) the separation of the young (d the preparation of bottom suitable for beds, and (e) the subsequent care of th( ,:e beds (e.g. protection from starfish). The proper procedure for trans- pliv'tation from successful spatting areas to successful growing areas is also being wo:ked out. Dr. A. B. Needler has followed further the course of the reversal in sex thist the oyster undergoes, as well as the conditions that control it. Miss Clark investigated the effects of various temperatures and salinities on the sperms and larvae, with a view to determining the .importance of local variations in these. A &nand having been made for work towards the rehabilitation of oyster beds in Sh■- diao bay, N.B., the services of Mr. Fisher were secured to assist in obtaining knowledge concerning such conditions there as might be of importance in initiat- 1. ing- successful oyster culture. Dr. A. W. H. Needler has also been in charge of the oyster work carried on by the Department of Fisheries, which has involved his making examinations with a view to suitability for oyster culture of a con- siderable number of areas in Malpeque b'a3, and also in other parts of Prince Edward Island, applications for the lease of these areas having been made. in the collection There bave also been rather large scale operations to superintend t cf spat, transplantation of oysters, and improvement of beds. 6. Scallop. Mr. Stevenson began a study of growth in the scallop, which might serve as a basis for proper regulation of the fishery. Material for this has been obtained, largely through fishery -officials, from L'Etang, Grand Digby, Mahone ■bav, Gaspé and Mutton bay. The Quebec Maritime Fisiicries Branch lias very kindly assisted in providing material from the last two places named, 'which are on the Ouebec coast. This should serve to reveal sonic of the principal variations in growth that are dependent upon the rather 8 different conditions to which the scallop is subjected in different parts of our waters. 7. Clam. Mr. Newcombe has continued his work on the growth of this important shellfish, and on the comparative abundance of individuals born in different years. A particular attempt is being made to compare conditions in such different waters as the Passamaquoddy region of southern New Brunswick and Malpeque bay, P.E.I., the former being quite unsuitable, and the latter quite suitable, for oysters. Attention has also been given to the productivity of repre- sentative beds, or those of special interest, for example, those on the Sissiboo flats in St. Mary bay, that have been very intensively dug over. 8. Fisheries of the Halifax area. A general investigation of the fisheries of the Atlantic coast of Nova Scotia was begun, taking as the first part for study the Halifax area, considered as extending roughly from Ship harbour in the east to Lunenburg in the west, and offshore to include those of the outer banks most accessible from Halifax. Facilities made available there by the Fisheries Experi- mental Station, as well as its central position on the coast made this place parti- cularly suitable as a base for the survey. The Eastern 'Passage Laboratory afforded very suitable quarters for shore work, including a study of the behaviour of cod and haddock in tanks, and the motor boat "Clione" assisted in inshore work. The regular periodical plankton and hydrographic work that has been carried on in the harbour and in Bedford basin for a number of years by the Experimental Station has furnished a start in an understanding of the seasonal and annual changes in the local conditions. - Work for the season was begun in the latter part of June and continued to the middle of October. The M.S. "Zoarces" carried through the greater part cf the work at sea, and until near the end of the season the weather permitted the regular collection of material and making of observations, that is so necessary if there is to be an understanding of the conditions in the water, which are aim ays changing, that is, are dynamic and not static. Four hydrographic and planktonic cruises were made at approximately monthly intervals taking in a series of stations, from Ship harbour to Sambro bank and thence to Lunenburg. On the August cruise the work was extended to include a series of stations from Sambro bank to Emerald bank. In so far as possible a series cf stations from Bedford basin out to the 100 fathom line off Halifax harbour was worked weekly. In addition special cruises were made both to the east and to the west. A limited amount of experimental fishing with "line trawl" was accomplished in order to determine the relationship of the distribution of the fish to the very diverse types of water occurring at the different depths. The local fishery officers and the fishermen along the coast were consulted concerning details in the character and conduct of the fisheries, so as to utilize all existing sources of information, which would permit of forming a general preliminary picture to serve as a basis for particular investigations. Mr. Mc- Kenzie Was responsible for work on the cod, which included study of variable abundance from place to place, from month to month, and from year to* year. as well as of the migrations of the fish. Dr. Vladykov studied the haddock fishery, particularly the methods of capture, the seasonal distribution of the catches, the local spcwning, and the distribution and food of the younger fish. Mr. Mc- Kenzie also obtained information concerning the character of the herring and other fisheries. Mr. Hachey investigated the general hydrography of the area, with particular reference to the nature, movements, changes, and relationships of the different types of water both inshore and offshore. Mr. McKenzie studied the local fog conditions as being possibly related to definite areas of cold surface water. Mr. Morton followed the changes in phosphate (and also oxygen to. some extent) content of the waters, so closely related to the activities of the organisms living therein. Miss Davidson was able to make quantitative determinations of the 9 plants in the plankton samples, particularly as obtained by centrifuging preserved samples of water from various depths, a method exceptionally important for water as strongly stratified as that of the Halifax area. These plants serve as food for the planktonic animals, the more abundant of which form the food of pelagic fishes, such as the herring and mackerel. Mr. Kearney made a quantitative study of the plankton and of some of the principal animals in it. The waters of the Halifax area have been known to be markedly affected by incursions from the gulf of St. Lawrence and from the "cold wall" outside the banks,'which is of northern origin. It was found that there is also at times a pro- nounced movement from the tropic' water or "Gulf Stream," which is to be found a considerable distance outside the Banks. An extremely complex picture is presented, which will be difficult to develop in detail, and then only by study of adjacent areas east, west and offshore. The Fisheries Experimental Station is attempting to continue certain of the observations and collections of material thniughout the winter season.

CEXERAL SEA FISIIERIES AND OCEANOLOGY 1. Hydrography. The results of quarterly cruises in the bay of Fundy during the year ending in the spring of 1932 were almost wholly lost in the lab0ratory fire, and the same applies to a considerable part of the material ob- tained weekly or monthly at standard stations. The latter work is being con- firmed, although the more difficult conditions have made it necessary to limit the stations to three, in the St. Croix river, Passamaquoddy bay, and the bay of Fundy. These include not only the usual temperature and salinity observations, but also determinations of silica content through the courtesy of Dr. E. J. King of the Banting Institute, University of Toronto. Mr. Hachey nearly completed an account of the hydrography of the Passa- ma iuoddy region, but the manuscript was lost in the laboratory fire. As an ad(lition to his work on the hydrography of the bay of Fundy, he has studied the problem of the extent of replacement of the waters of that bay from the gulf of Maine. The regular daily observations of cionditions in the water and air ina,le at selected points along the coast by officers of the Lighthouse service have been continued. In addition there has been organized during the last two years under the Maritime Fisheries Branch of Quebec the taking of similar observations at Blanc Sablon, Mutton bay, and Natashquan on the north shore of the gulf of St. Lawrence in relation to the summer fishery. Also obser- vations of this character were started in the summer of 1932 at Halls harbour on the south side of Minas channel, where exists a peculiar salmon fishery. Mr. liachey has analysed the available data on the surface temperature of the coastal waters in order to determine the nature of the more marked local, seasonal and yea rly di fferences. Hydrographie observations are being made from the Prince Edward Island M2rine Station for the determination of the characteristics of the shallow inland waters suitable for oyster culture, chiefly in the Malpeque bay area, but also during the summer of 1932 in Shediac bay, N.B. The thermograph ' records obtained by vessels of the Canadian National Steamships in crossing to Bermuda and back auain have been continued in order to ascertain the variations in the character andr extent of the northward moving tropic water, the so-called "Gulf Stream". Arrangements are being made with th( Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution for the regular working up of the data obtained. 2. Light. The very regrettable death of Prof. A. B. Klugh, who developed a considerable field of work in relation to light, has left the burden- of its continuance ‘Vith Dr. SawYer. The latter has tested out one of the new

10

\Veston photronic cells as to its suitability for measuring light in field work, a the satisfactory instrument for which has not been available. The cell was tried both va: on land and under water and was found to have distinct advantages. Investi- pot gations on the penetration of light into natural waters, the relation of the photo- col synthesis of various aquatic plants to different kinds and intensities of light, and ear the effect of light on the growth of the barnacle were continued. via 3. Temperature. Prof. Chaisson experimented with the effect of various temperatures on the vigour of lobsters under conditions comparable with those th under which these animals may be transported to market. Mr. Friedman has ex- poi tended his experiments on the ability of clams and oysters to withstand low tem- for peratures, such as those to which they may at times be exposed in nature, possibly see with unfavourable results. rdl as 4. Tidewater cultural experiments. The shortacre of -funds made it imprac- 9. l ticable to proceed with the projected next stage in the construction of tidal pools a at Tidal ccrve. Some work was done in tightening the dam, which has to function pli both for holding water out from, and holding water in, the cove, and in experi- lac menting to ascertain the best type of opening to have through the dam for proper control of the water level inside. tag 5. Experimental weir fishing. A simple comma-shaped inter-tidal brush wh weir was constructed beside the Station in Brandy cove in relation to ledges situ- de ated where the water leaves the cove. A pool was constructed at the bottom of sta the weir to hold the fish when the tide receded. This fishing engine provided a foi ready means of sampling the local intertidal fish population from early in the foi season until late. Herrine, niackerel, and squid were the principal species taken, sol- but a very great variety of fish were entrapped including small larvae. 6. Flora. Dr. H. P. Bell of Dalhousie University has, with the assistance agi of Miss Constance MacFarlane, completed accounts on the marine algae, including their occurrence in Hudson bay, their distribution in the Maritime Provinces, and Itk their seasonal changes in Halifax harbour. 7. Bait and food. Prof. Chaisson has investigated the reported bad effects me of mackerel gibs as bait for lobsters in weakening or killincr the latter. Mr. Steven- N. son lias studied the nature of the local population of "rong-tailed" squid of the Sai Passamaquoddy region from catches in the weir operated by the Station. an .111r. Pentland attempted the rearing of various marine amphipods and deter- ani mined their comparative resistance to various salinities, with a view to their utiliza- te tion in estuarial culture. sec

FRESH WATER FISH CULTURAL INVESTIGATIONS RI exi I. Lake surveys. Conditions in the Chamcook lakes, a series which is most a accessible from the Station, were followed by Mr. Smith in so far as circumstances aff permitted, particularly with a view to an assessment of the effect on the amount me of life (as shown by the plankton) of the fertilization of Gibson lake with sea rec mussels in 1930. Opportunity was taken of an investigation trip to the Var- sat mouth hatchery for a preliminary survey by Dr. M'Gonigle and Mr. Smith of on lake George, which furnishes the water supply of that hatchery. dif A survey was requested of the important Loch Lomond series of lakes to the fin east of Saint John. Circumstances permitted only a preliminary survey on August flu: 30 by a party of investigators from the Station.- The lakes proved to be of of excellent character for high fish production, and plans are being formulated for dit continuing the survey and for developing means of best utilizing the possibilities for producing in quantity the desired sport fish. I I poi 2. Standing water experiments. The greater possibilities of the standing 'sn water of lakes and ponds as compared with the flowing water of stream% for high ccc fish production have made it desirable to investigate thoroughly the varied con- ditions that may exist in such standing water, particularly from the standpoint of g rai 11 the insurance of high fertility. Mr. Smith hàs continued his study of the effects of varifius fertilizing materials on the water and contained life of concrete and earthen ponds. He has extended his work to e.xperiments in which there could be greater control as well as a greater number of differing conditions, using on the one hand earthenware Pots holding several quarts of water, and on the other hand glass vials of 4--dram capacity. - 3. Periodic tvater culture. The impracticability of adequate control of both the life and the physical conditions in the permanent bodies of water, whose fish populations the public wishes increased, has forced us to explore all possibilities for bodies of water that could be drained at will. . The most promising course seen-ed to be to search for flat areas that could be inundated by the construction of relatively inexpensive dams. In response to local requests for better trout fishing a survey was made of the environs of the Chamcook lakes in the late summer of 1931, and an extensive area (Meadow brook) apparently verY suitable for such a purpose was found on the west side of the main lake, and was recommended. Plans for its use as a public experiment in fish production have been held up by lack of agreement of all the persons concerned. - - Apart from the control that periodic inundation permits, there is the advan- tage of being able to provide fertilizer in the form of plants grown on the land when not under water. There is a considerable amount of scattered experience clearly demonstrating the value of such procedure. Experiments have been started to test in ponds the suitability of different types of "land plant" growth for f ertilizing water. The limited surveys so far made indicate that areas suitable for both rich plant growth and inundation at small expense are by no means rare in sout:tern New Brunswick, assuring g-ood opportunity for the application of this metl-od of water culture, which has certain points of similarity with irrigation in agriculture. - -1. General hatchery conditions. Study of the conditions generally in thé Maritime hatcheries has been continued by Dr. M'Gonigle in order to assist the superintendents in keeping the eggs and fry in the best condition. He or other men-bers of the staffs of the two Atlantic Stations, in particular Dr. N. E. Gibbons of the Fisheries Experimental Station, made special trips to the Saint John, Florenceville, Miramichi, Yarmouth, Middleton, Bedford, Antigonish, and Margaree hatcheries in order to investigate troubles with eggs or f ry. An - anal \ sis has been made of the hatchery reports from the standpoint of the courses taken by particular batches of eggs, and the matter of transportation of the eggs seems to require special attention, if rather serious losses are to be avoided. 5. Water conditions in hatcheries. The use of recirculated water- in the exp( rimental hatchery has been continued. Although necessitated by the lack of a supply of running water during , the winter, it is preferable to the latter as affording more control of the character of the water. Dr. M'Gonigle has experi- mented to determine the advantages of brackish water and of filtering in the recirculation method, using three separate systems. Only the filtered system was satisfactory after the hatching of the eggs, and the two systems without filters, one tvith fresh and the other with brackish (1% salt) water, showed no particular difference up to the time of hatching, when both proved unfavourable. For the first time an attempt was made to carry f ry in the recirculated water, and that that had been filtered gave reasonably satisfactory results, although the bad effects of crowding were evident. There were also experiments to test the efficiency of - different rates of water flow. 0. Rearing experiments. Funds were not sufficient to complete the circular pond system designed by Dr. M'Gonigle for testing the use by fry of food organ- isms grown in fertilized water, so that experiments planned could not be pro- ceeded with. The food experiments being carried out by Miss Tait were con- tinued in an attempt to ascertain the nature of the most important materials for rapid growth. Use was again.made of a neighbouring spring-fed brook to supply 12 the necessary water. The arrangements for troughs for the brook trout fry and ni for a steady and similar supply of water to all the troughs were considerably or improved. The upper part of the reservoir dam was reconstructed so as to be of wet and dry weather; the flume was enlarged so as unaffected by alternation In Tl to adequately handle floods, and prevent these adversely affecting either darn or rearing troughs; and the entrance to the flume from the reservoir was carried well ni below the surface of the water to prevent the entrance of floating debris and to procure the cooler (as much as 6°C.) deep water. in 7. Planting experinzents. Mr. White followed the results of planting of to salmon f ry in such localities along the east branch of the Apple river, N.S., as observation had indicated were principally occupied by naturally-hatched fry, and re reports a good survival. He studied the behaviour of fry transferred from running to still water, and concludes that they require time to become capable of D looking after themselves properly under the altered conditions. fc DISEASE AND MORTALITY Po 1. Herring. The "tail" disease that was first observed in 1913 and 1914 in CC the herring of the southern part of the gulf of St. Lawence, appeared in the herring of the bay of Fundy and gulf of Maine in 1929, affecting a considerable qt part of the stock in 1930. In 1931 the condition was improved, there being no nt trouble with it on the Nova Scotian shore, although occasional individuals showed fi5 evidence of having had the disease. During 1932 no difficulty was experienced pc with it in any place, even where there had been the worst conditions previcrtsly, st although occasional fish would be seen with evidence in the form of slightly bc marked spots on the sides, or of some distortion of the body, or tail, of having in been previously affected. It is not clear that the less abundance of smaller her- al ring during the last year or two has been the result of the diseale, although the latte- may have contributed. It would seem that this disease affects the herring in a more or less pronounced manner every so often, but that it rarely shows the W; severity, that characterized the two outbreaks to which reference has been n.ade. st, It would seem also that it is the sea or summer and fall spawning herring( as dis- ce tinct from the coast or spring spawning) that is affected, and principally those schools that get close inshore. 2. Eelgrass. Alarming reports were made to the Atlantic Stations of the cc disappearence of the eelgrass, particularly in certain Nova Scotian waters, where tic its collection for industrial purposes constitutes a not inconsiderable source of livelihood for quite a number of people. Dr. Leim, director of the Fisheries Ex- perimental Station, secured special reports on the matter f rom fishery officers and others, and the director of the Biological Station investigated the local condition rc of the eelgrass at as many points along the coast of the Maritime Provinces as oppatunity permitted. Dr. Needler followed up the conditions in Malpeque bay. Mr. Friedman conducted low temperature experiments with the eelgrass in order to ascertain whether f reezing may have contributed to the condition. Definite SI evidençes of disease appeared late in the season. This matter has called attention tc to the very definite need for knowledge concerning the general phy-siolog-y of this plant. IH si PISTE PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY 1. The circulatory system. Dr. Babkin, Dr. Bowie, and Mr. Nicholls col- laborated in an investigation of the wall of the artery in fish, in regard ti structure; and its reaction to distension, temperature, and various organic sub- al stances in solution. its r( The digestive System.. Mr. Nicholls continued his similar studies on the wall of the intestine, and. has also determined the survival times at different tem- ti peratures of the wall of the stomach as an example of fish tissue. • C 3. The muscular system. Miss Langstroth has begun à thorough study of the microscopic structure of fish muscle both in the adult and during develQP- 13 - ment. This is to provide needed- knowledge of this part of the fish,-the principal one ti sed for food.

THE HANDLING OF FISil FOR FOOD - 1. EXPCriDientS in freezing and storage. The long term storage e#eri-. mentb bqgun in the summer of 1931 were abruptly terminated (with the loss -of. material already obtained for study) by.the destruction of- the laboratory by fire in rch, 1932. Dr. Bowie began a new series during- the summer, the aim being to ascertain what. conditions of freezing and storage affect the ability of the muscle to approximate, on thawing, its original condition of Water-protein relation. 2. Digestion of s. ea foods. Miss Alley continued "under the direction Of Dr. tabkin the investigations of the effect on mammalian.digestion of various fish foods, which were started bÿ Dr. S. A. Komarov. She was able to make a com- parison of the comparative effect on various phases of gastric digestion of haddock, cod, mackerel, lobster, and clams. _ . • Condition and first handling of ground. fish. An investigation was re- quested of the factors affecting the keeping qualities of ground fish taken in the neighbouring region: Dr. Bedford enquired into the conditions iurrounding the fish both in the sea and aboard the boats in which they are brotight to the shipping • port. Attention _ vas given - to the pdssibilities of influence from the water, th& surface of the fish, the food, the bottom, and the walls of fish-containers on the boats, as well as temperature. Definite evidence was procured of the very great importance of adequate icing and of avoidance of heavy bacterial contamination aboard the boats. Kinds of sea bacteria. Miss Baker, under the direction of Dr. G. B. Red of Queens University, investigated the possibility .of there .being in sea water certain primitive forms of bacteria, hitherto not recognized, and.- also stttdied the effect of various salt concentrations on form and reproduction in certain salt watér bacteria. .5. Yellozu condition in clams. Trouble had been experienced with a some- what pronounced Yellowness appearing on the surface of canned clams, such being considered undesirable. Miss Davidson failed to find any relation of this yellow ness to the presence of diatoms. .Cursory. examination indicated that the Yellow- ness came from. particular granules in thé epithelical cells, and Miss Lingstroth. was asked to investigate the matter from the histological standpoint and deter- mine, if possible, the nature and occurrence of any materials that might be respunsible for the yellow colour. .

EXTR \ TERRITORIAL INVESTIGATIONS ' Several outside institutions very kindly offered to help by giving laboratory space and other assistance to certain investigators, whom we might not be able ' to accommodate in view of the destruction of the Station laboratory. Miss M. H. Campbell, of the University of Toronto, was accepted on the staff of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, and was thus able to study in Atlantic waters, as she Lad already done in the Pacific, certain copepods ("red feed" of the fisher- men), work which had been proposed to be done at this Station. 'Similarly Dr. F. R. Hayes of Dalhousie University, who has been engaged in investigations of the ntetabolism of eggs, was given assistance to enable him to continue such work at the Tortugas Labofatory of the Carnegie Institution, where he studied the role of nitrogen echinoid ontogeny. Miss Davidson was accommodated at the Woods Hole Oceanograhpic Insti- tution for a portion of the summer to enable her to work with Dr. H. H. Gran.of Oslo University- and obtain benefits from his long experience in the study of diatoms. 'Ye

14

il INTERNATIONAL PASSAMAQUODDY FISHERIES COMMISSION under this Commission of possi- The second and final year of investigation n. bilities of effects upon the fisheries of the Passamaquoddy region of dams pro- that name, has been in progress, with head- posed at the mouths of the bay of al the field stage of the work. The quarters at the Biological Station during upper ir part of the hatchery building was again made available for the investigators, who were,—Dr. C. J. Fish, Zooplanktologist and Executive Secretary; Mr. Michael Graham, Ichthyologist ; Dr. H. H. Gran, Phytoplanktolooist; Dr. E. E. Watson, Hydrographer ; Mr. T. Braarud, Assistant Phytoplanktdogist; Dr. M. W. John- son, Assistant Zooplanktologist ; Mr. Jas. Bates, Fisheries Assistant; and Mr. C. J. A Hughes, Hydrographical Assistant. Their presence was a very decided advantage for the work of the Station, permitting as it did frequent discussions of problems of common interest, as well as providing first hand information of new findings concerning conditions in the neighbouring waters. The M. S. "Edward E. Prince" was loaned to the Commission for the use of its investigators up to the conclusion of the field work in October, 1932.

EDUCATIONAL WORK A six weeks' course of instruction was given in January and February, 1932, at Halifax to the superintendents of Maritime hatcheries. The course was in charge of Dr. M'Gonigle, and covered the fields of physics, chemistry, general biology, anatomy, physiolog-y, and pathology. Laboratory facilities were made available at the F'isheries Experimental Station and at Dalhouise University, and for assisting in the work of instruction the services were secured of Drs. S. A. Beatty and H. R. Chipman of the former, and Drs. H. P. Bell and F. R. Hayes of the latter institution. GENERAL FACILITIES The laboratory was completely destroyed by fire on March 9, but, fortunately, the strenuous efforts of a large number of persons from the town of St. Andrews and such of the staff of the Station as were not away at the time, coupled with favourable weather conditions, prevented the fire reaching any of the other build- ings. The library and extensive study collections of marine material were in- cluded in the loss, but it proved possible to remove the contents of the offices, where were most of the records. Several of the investig. ators lost records, notes and manuscripts, with which they had been working. Connors Bros. of Blacks Harbour immediately offered the facilities of their laboratory, of which Dr. Bedford took advantage. Plans that had been formu- lated Sormakino- simple summer laboratory- accommodation in the tank tower were carried through,b and other plans were formulated and executed, providing tem- porary working places in portions of the fish handling building. On the site of the formçr laboratory were the connections for es and salt water, and, owing to the necessity- for these services and other laboratorY facili- ties of a somewhat permanent nature, it was decided by the Board to use all avail- able funds in beginning the erection of a new fireproof laboratory. As there seemed to be tio.possibility of securing; any special grant, this reconstruction was proceeded with, owing to the urgency, largely from funds intended for investi- gations.. Salt water tanks for keeping fish alive and gas for laboratory heating were provided before the summer season was very far advanced, but offices and labora- tory rooins. were not available till the autumn.. It finally proved possible to re- construct on the old foundations the part corresponding to the small,. original laboratory as built in 1907. In appearance, as well as in general Plan, the new' is very like the original, but the materials have been brick, tile, steel and concrete 15 in place of wood. The front or east part contains the offices—gene.ral office, records' room, director's, assistant director's and curator's offices—and the re- mainder consists of seven individual laboratories, one laboratory for three investi- gators, and a general one (open to the hall), which has six working spaces. The attic, as formerly, is being fitted up for storage. The building has been brought into shape, though somewhat late, for the winter work of the staff. Advantage was taken of the razing of the site by fire to excavate down to the solid rock under the eastern end of the reconstructed part, thus providing more room in the basement. The tile walls of the latter were made better insulators by placing eelgrass in the cavities,—this in order to ensure unifortn . temperature conditions. The basement is to be used in part for the storage of preserved material, but principally for keeping forms at low temperatures. The brick reservoir in the north-east corner of the basement 'vas little affected by the fire, and two of the fish tanks also came through in fair condition. New pump and motor have been installed to keep the reservoir automatically supplied with salt water from the tidal pools, mentioned below. Salt water of uniform temperature for use on the main floor of the laboratory is now furnished auto- matcally with motor, pump, and pressure tank connected with the reservoir, a great improvement over the former system of gravity flow from an elevated out- side tank, in which the water became warm in summer and cold in winter. It is planned to use a large part of the basement for constant temperature rooms of 15' C. and below, which are so necessary for investigating temperature require- meots of fish.. The local sea water is comparatively uniforni in temperattire, giving suitable conditions for a great variety of forms. To keep such wate r relatively unaltered in passage to reservoir and tanks so as to permit of all these forms being- held in good condition has proved somewhat difficult. A tidal pool situated back of a ledge and at a Jevel just below high tide of neaps has its water renewed twice daily, and permits of easY centrifugal pumping to the reservoir at any stage of the tide. The water in the pool has been found to have its temperature altered rathcr quickly by radiation, during clear weather, warming from the sun's rays during the day and .cooling during.the night. .To obviate this a cover has been constructed over the tidal pool, and this has been found fairly effective so far. Improvements that may be made in ensuring proper replacement of water at high tide and in preventing change in - temperature through radiation will be reve:ded by experiment. The library must be built tip anew, as only a .feW volumes, which .rt-ere out on Pan, remain. It seemed inadvisable, to make a particular effort to build it up again, until a. fireproof building should be available for storing the books. The recbnstructed part of the laboratory now provides safe storage space. Some institutions, with which we exchange, have already been so kind as to furnish available back numbers of their publications,—namely Carnegie institution of Washington, Museum of 'Comparative Zoolog,y of Harvard University, Ontario risbPries Research Laboratorv, Portland Society of Natural History, Provincial Fisheries Department of British Columbia, •Spanish-Arnerican Oceanographical Council, United States Bureau of. Fisheries, Commission of Inland Fisheries of Rhode Island, and University of Toronto. There have also been donations of litruYdtiplicates by Dr. H. B. Bigelow, Fisheries EXperimental Station (Atlantic), Museum of Comparative Zoology. of Harvard. University, and University of Toronto. 16

PUBLICATIONS The Fisheries Experimental Station (Atlantic) and this Station have col- laborated in bringing out Nos. 3, 4, and 5 of Progress Reports and it is planned to have an issue of sixteen pages appear quarterly. The following articles on work connected with the Station have been pub- lished during the year. d Battle, H. I. Rhythmic sexual maturity and spawning of certain bivalve mollusks. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish 7. (20) 255-276. The moon and when to eat mussels. Prog. Rep. Atl. 3, 5-6. . Chaisson, A. F. The use of mackerel gibs for lobster bait. Prog. Rep. At!. 5, 5-6. Factors in the shipment of live losters from eastern Nova Scotia. Bull. Biol. Bd. Can. 33. Huntsman, A. G. Bait preservation.. Prog. Rep. At!. 3, 13-14. Disease in eel grass. Prog. Rep. Atl. 5, 11-14. Progress in fisheries research in Canada. In "Fifty Years' Retrosp‘ct." Roy. Soc. Can. Jubilee vol. Relation of biology to oceanography. In "Physics of the earth. V. Oceanography." Bull. U.S. Nat. Res. Coun. 85. Jeffers, G. W. Fishes observed in the strait of Belle Isle. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (16).203-211. McKenzie, R. A. Water temperature and the haddock fishery of the Fundy area. Prog. Rep. At!. 4, 10-13. Needier, A. B. Sex reversal in Ostrea virginica. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (22) 283-294. American oysters change their sex. Prog. Rep. Atl. 5, 3-4. l■ Needier, A. W. H. Oyster farming on the Atlantic coast of Canada. Dept. of Fisheries, Ottawa. Mud bottoms hardened with sand for oyster farming. Prog. Rep. At!. 5, 7-8. Newcombe, C. L. The soft shelled clam, a Fundy fishery resource. Prog. Atl. 3, 10-12. o Osburn, R. C. Biological and oceanographic conditions in Hudson bay. 6. I3ry-ozoa from Hudson bay and strait. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (29) 361-376. Rigby, M. S. List of publications in connection with the work of the Biological Board of Canada, 1922-1930.. Bull. Biol. Bd. Can. 28. Smith2M. W. Fertilizing water with herring meal. Prog. Rep. At!. 3, 7-9. o Oxygen in water affected by fertilizing. Prog. Rep. At!. 4, 14-15. Stevenson, J. A. Scallops; a bay of Fundy resource. Prog. Rep. At!. 4, 8-10. o Treadwell, A. L. Haplobranchus atlanticus, a new species of polYchaetous annelid from St. Andrews, N.B. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (21) 277-281. 1

o 17

INVESTIGATORS' SUMMARIES AR MINE ALLEY THE EFFECT OF DIFFERENT SEA-FOODS ON THE GASTRIC SECRETION Various sea-foods were fed to a dog which had a gastric fistula and Armour pouch, and the effects upon the nature of the resulting gastric secretion were studied. These were compared with the effects of feeding meat, used as a stan- d, with the following results and conclusions: • • Mucin Peptic Output concen- Relation Foodstuff values of tration Mucin of mucin Total Total (Metes pepsin % output to volume acidity tubes) glucose pepsin Per fistula Haddock . . . 1915 9000 61.4 314 28.6 20.8 146 Cod 1729 8861 39.5 156 54.2 20.5 146 (1 exp.) (1 exp.) Beef heart . . 1590 7780 44.9 250 31.1 21.2 148 Lobster . . . . 1843 12782 60.6 366 34.9 28.1 150 Mackerel . . . 1302 8255 43.8 234 35.2 23.5 153 Clams (Dog vomited food) Per nzouth Meat 1490 11980 50.6 441 27.2 30.7 153

(1) Fish (cod, haddock, or mackere ) is as strong a stimulant of pepsin, mucin, acidity and fluid of the gastric juice as meat. Lobster is a much stronger stimulus than meat. (2) Fish remains in the stomach as long as meat and in some instances longer, e.g. mackerel. (3) Haddock is not only a good stimulus for the digestive enzyme, pepsin, but also for mucin, which affords protection to the mucous membrane. (4) The effect of fat in fish, as shown in the case of mackerel, is to decrease the peptic value, depress the volume of secretion in the first hour and prolong the retention of the fish in the stomach. (5) After fish feeding there was always a rise in the fluid volume at the end of the experiment. _ B. P. BABRIN, D. J. BOWIE AND J. V. V. NICIIOLLS THE REACTION OF THE ARTERIES OF ELASMOBRANCHS TO DISTENSION, TEM- PERATURE AND DRUGS The aim of this investigation was to estimate the properties of the arterial wall in the skate in relation to tension, temperature, and sympathomimetic and par asympathomimetic drugs, and to compare them with the analogous properties of the arteries of warm-blooded animals. This problem is important in con- e. tributing to the proper understanding of the position of elasmobranch fishes in the animal scale. Moreover, the peculiarities of the arrangement and funçtioning of the nervous system in elasmobranchs provide an opportunity for study of the fundamental properties of the blood-vessels and their reaction to different agents. This may lead to a better knowledge of the more complicated relations existing in warm-blooded animals. The structure of different arteries in various species of ,kate was studied microscopically, and the-innervation of these arteries and their reaction to tension, changes in temperature, adrenaline, acetyl-choline, barium chloride and atropine were investigated. It was demonstrated that some of the arteries, such as the ventral aorta, are practically devoid of muscular 2 18

sheath, but are rich in elastic tissue, whereas others (e.g. the coeliac and superior mesenteric arteries) possess two layers of smooth muscles. The reaction to tension was different in these two types of arteries. The circular layer of arterial muscles reacted to temperature change differently from the longitudinal.- Adrenaline, barium chloride and acetyl choline contracted the arteries; atropine paralyzed the effect of the last-named drug.

M. C. BAKER PRIMITIVE BACTERIA IN SEA WATER Sherman (Science, Dec. 11, 1931; Journal of Infectious Diseases, Vol. 51, Jan. 16, 1932) discovered "primitive forms" of bacteria, obtaining these from such sources as soil, hay, milk and faeces. In an attempt to demonstrate the presence of these "primitive forms" of bacteria in sea water, Sherman's methods were followed with a few modifications to adapt them to these conditions. No indicatioriof the presence of these forms in sea water was found. A study of the morphological and physiological changes induced in bacteria by growth on solid media, containing various concentrations of salt (NaCI), also was undertaken. Morphological variations and a decrease in the tendencies to sporulate were observed.

H. I. BATTLE DISTRIBUTION AND FLUCTUATIONS OF THE IIAKE FISIIERY OF THE ATLANTIC . COAST • The so-called hake or ling is one of our abundant Atlantic food fishes. The object of this investigation is a twofold one: first, to correlate, if possible, the present distribution of the hake with existing hydrographical factors; and, sec- ondly, to put on record an historical account of the fluctuations in the hake fishery for the past sixty years which may be used as a basis for judging future changes in the conduct of the industry. About seventy-five per cent. of the total annual commercial catch of hake is made near the mouth of the bay of Fundy and that in a large part off Digby and Charlotte counties, around the fifty fathom line. Smaller quantities are taken along the south shore of the gulf of St. Lawrence from Gaspé to cape Breton and off the southeastern coast of Nova Scotia. Along the latter area the fishery is conducted partially on the offshore banks but for the remainder of the coast it is purely inshore. • Young hake up to ten centimetres in length have been recorded as occurring in shallow brackish water up to 16.5°C. These are found in coves along the coast directly inshore from the commercial fishing grounds. The adults seem to prefer considerably lower temperatures, but have been recorded in experimental fishing in water as high as 11.1°C. and as low as 2.5°C. in the Fundy area. From October to April hake are present in Kennebecasis bay, a fact which indicates that these fish are capable of withstanding a fairly wide salinity range from the open bay to slightly brackish water. Over the period from 1870 to 1930 the Atlantic coast landings of hake show many fluctuations. Among these the catch of 1,329,489 cwt: for 1904 stands out 1 as the maximum peak year. The first two-thirds of the sixty-year period shows on an average much larger landings than the past twenty years. For example, within recent years the notable catch of 339,212 cwt. (hake and cusk) in 1929 is only one-quarter of that for 1904. • Depressions can be largely attributed to negligent fishing activities conse- quent upon low market prices, depletion of the number of individuals engaged i•n the fishery, ravages of dogfish during the prime summer season, inclement weather conditions and scarcity of bait. 19

THE LIFE-HISTORY OF THE HAKE The present investigation was undertaken with the purpose of enlarging our knowledge of the life-history and habits of the hake in Canadian waters. It has generally been conceded that there are two closely related species of hake, Urophycis tenuis (Mitchill 1815) and Urophycis chuss (Walbaum 1792). Owing to the fact that most specimens appear to intergrade, it seems preferable to tem- porarily classify them by priority as U. chuss or as U. chuss (tenuis). 5pawning. In the summer of 1932 adult fish in the vicinity of Prince Ednard Island spawned in midsummer. Specimens taken in July were either. . full, with large yolk-laden ova (0.5 to 0.7 mm.) filling the lumen of the ovary, or spent. Off the coast of Halifax county spawning is said to take place in Sep- tember or October. In late July the ovaries of most fish of a commercial size contain a large number of eggs (0.2 to 0.3 mm. in diameter) in which yolk is ac- cumulating. Fish taken off Digby and Charlotte counties at this time possess ova of 0.1 to 0.15 mm. diameter only. Summer appears to be a growth period for the ova in the Charlotte county area; by late August they have attained a diameter of 0.2 to 0.27 mm., but are probably not ready for spawning until the winter. There is apparently no one spawning period for the Atlantic coast hake. According to popular belief hake migrations are limited. Spawning then would seem to depend largely on the heating of the waters in a particular region, with the result that summer spawners are found off Prince Edward Island, autumn spawners off southeastern Nova Scotia, and winter spawners in the Fundy area. Age growth determinations. Hake scales do not always prove entirely satis- factory for age and growth studies because of the indefinite nature of the annuli, but the irregularly shaped otoliths were found to be quite unsuitable for this purpose. The combined scale and gonad studies would seem to indicate that spawning occasionally takes place at the end of the third year, but usually not before the end of the fourth year off both Charlotte and Halifax counties. FOOD OF THE HAKE Adult fish taken during the summers of 1931 or 1932 off Prince county, P.E.I., Halifax, Yarmouth and Digby counties, N.S., and St. John and Charlotte counties, N.B., had stomach and intestinal contents consisting largely of crus- tacea, occasional fish (herring, sculpin, rose-fish, etc.), and squid. The crus- tacean diet was made up largely of euphausiid shrimps (Meganyctiphanes, etc.), prawns (Pandalus), occasional crabs (Cancer, etc.), and amphipods. Hake are captured largely on line-trawls which might indicate that they are in general bottom feeders. Aside from squid, molluscan food appears to be generally shunned. Off Halifax county hake tend to be more piscivorous than in the Fundy area, although Crustacea still form a large percentage of the food. Young hake up to four inches long were found to feed on smaller Crustacea (shrimps, copepods, amphipods) than adults. At the mouth of the bay of Fundy the abundance of hake would seem to be related in some degree with the unusual quantities of euphausiid shrimps to be found there. R. H. BEDFORD PRESERVATION OF FRESH FISH AT SEA An attempt was made to record the number of bacteria on the fish as soon as they were caught, the increase in the number under practical conditions at the time they were landed at the warehouse at the port of unloading, and to observe the effect of ice, a cleantreceptacle for stowage, and cleanliness in handling the fish themselves after eviscerating them, in reducing the rate of bacterial growth. The result indicated that (1) the number of bacteria on the live fish and shortly after death is low, averaging for 16 fish, 450 organisms; (2) the method - handling is responsible for abnormal contamination—after five hours there was of tF an average of 1,310,000 bacteria on 4 fish; (3) under clean handling and conditions the increase in the number of bacteria was greatly reduced- ia stowage se in one case there was an increase of only 1240 in 15 hours, and in another an increase of only 125 in 9 hours; and (4) when stowed in ice and the fish thoroughly washed before doing so, the increase in numbers was as follows: in 13: 29 hours there were 810, and on 2 fish in 30 hours there were 1040 and 1820 bacteria respectively. fr The experiment shows the decided advantages of (1) a clean hold for stowage Jt A. that is, one that is consistently treated with a disinfectant, and the thorough washing of fish after eviscerating them prior to stowage, and (2) the effect of low temperature conveyed to the fish through the medium of ice. THE QUALITY OF PASSAMAQUODDY HADDOCK There are certain haddock fishing areas (principally in the vicinity of the Western banks adjacent to Sable island) where the fish are "soft and flabby" as D soon as they are taken from the water. This is a condition recognized by both fishermen and buyers. Most of these fish are marketed at Boston, but occasionally some are landed at St. Andrews. This "soft" condition is said by fishermen to be found always where the d( ocean bottom is muddy, and where the bottom is gravelly or sandy the finest of quality haddock are always caught. The object of the investigation was to see whether any differences could be determined between the firm-textured haddock caught in the vicinity of gravelly areas and those taken from the areas where the sea floor was muddy in the district of Passamaquoddy bay. The stations selected for the experiment were "Prince" fi3 Nos. 6 and 848, gravelly and muddy areas respectively. The indices used for measuring the conditions of "soft" and "firm" muscle sh were (1) the soluble nitrogen of the muscle after precipitating the proteins with 10 per cent. trichloracetic acid, and (2) the bacteriological flora of the fish, water, fit and sea floor. The result indicates that there is no difference in the fish from the two areas, in fish from the muddy areas of Passamaquoddy bay being similar to those of the gravelly area in the St. Croix river estuary. In support of this there are the facts that the nitrogen content of the fish muscle, and the bacteriological condi- A tion of the two environments, as well as of the fish themselves, are practically identical. The food of the fish would appear to be similar, too, judging from the bacteriology of the stomach, duodenum, and ileum. In the light of this experimental evidence as well as from visual observation VI of the fish themselves the conclusion is reached that haddock caught in the a "Quoddy" bay area are similar in quality—firm-textured muscle. 13, A. A. BLAIR THE ST. JOIIN SALMON FISIIERY , a. As the salmon fishery of the St. John is next in importance to that of the Miramichi and yet presents such different 6' conditions (e.g. fall run, if any, much it later and not so marked), it seemed that many important questions in the life- history of the salmon might •e solved by a comparison of the salmon in the-two regions. d It has been possible to analyze some records of salmon catches in this dis- d trict (procured from Mr. Sidney Evans) giving the daily catch (with total weight) in the bay of Fundy of the h - each fisherman at Lorneville since 1919, and with following results. o (1) Range in average weight with season is from 0.6 (12.4 to 13 lb. in 19255 to 1.8 lb. (11.8 to 13.6 lb. for e in 1929). Range in average weight with season a all the years together is from 11.7 to 12.7 lb. 21

(2) The average weight decreases usually from the period ending June 7 to the period ending June 20 (for all y-ears together from 12.3 to 12.1 lb.), and invar- iably increases (for all years to 12.7 lb. in the period ending July 18) to a peak somewhere from the end of June to the beginning of August. Except in 1919 and 1931, there was a decrease to the end of the fishing season (for all years to 11.7 lb. by August 9). (3) The average daily catch for all years per fisherman gradually increases from 6.9 salmon in the period ending June 7 to 12 salmon in the period ending July /1, after which there is a gradual decrease to 6.7 salmon in the period ending Au.,,ust 9. The peak of the catch each year is practically always during the middle part of July. (4) For any one year there is a tendency for the average catch and average weight to increase and decrease together. Also for different years, the average weight and average catch vary together (e.g. low weight going with low catch).

D. J. BOWIE THE BLOOD VESSELS OF FISII Histological investigation of various organs of fishes has been continued. It has been found that the blood vessels of skates have in the arteries a well- de■ eloped muscular wall, and in the case of the mesenteric arteries a rich network of nerves. The latter has apparently not been previously recorded. IIISTOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION OF FROZEN AND STORED HAKE MUSCLE Microscopic study of tissue stored only two days before fixing. (1) Brine-frozen tissue fixed in the frozen state by means of cold alcoholic fixatives showed an abundance of small ice-crystal spaces. (2) Similar tissue allowed to thaw and fixed in warm - alcoholic fixatives shewed very little evidence of crystal spaces. The conclusion is that the tissue fibers, when thawed, reimbibe much of the fluid which, during freezing, had separated out to form the ice crystals. (3) In brine-frozen tissue the crystal spaces are comparat,ively small. They inci ease in size directly as the distance from the freezing surface increases. (4) In air-frozen tissue the crystal spaces are comparatively large.

A. F. CIIAISSON THE USE OF MACKEREL GIBS FOR LOBSTER BAIT • Mackerel gibs (the gills and soft parts r. emoved in gibbing mackerel) are a very effective bait for lobsters but areS commonly believed by fishermen to have a m eakening effect upon lobsters subsequently kept in air. This effect is said to be readily observed in fishing boats soon after lobsters are taken from the traps. Feeding experiments showed no diminution of vigour, that could be attri- buted to nature of bait, in the case of lobsters fed on mackerel gibs (both fresh and putrid) as compared with others fed on fresh clam or starved. All com- parative groups were held under the same conditions in sea water at 57.2° to 62.6°F., and in air at 50° to 59°F. and 62.6° to 66.2°F.. Since the lobsters used in t he experiments were fed mackerel gibs, both fresh and putrid, in much larger quantities than they wduld be likely to obtain in baited traps, any loss of vigour due entirely to the gibs should have demonstrated itself. The lobsters used in the experiments differed from those in which weakness due to nature of bait was said to result in that they were not freshly caught but had been kept in a pound for several days. For that reason the change to air was probably not as extreffie as if they had been changed quickly from the bottom of the sea to air as occurs on the fishing boats. It may be this sudden change of environment, particularly if it is accompanied by extremes of light and temper- atui-e, evaporation of water from the gills and rough handling, that is responsible 22

for much of the weakness of lobsters occurring on fishing boats and not the nature of the bait used. CONSTANT TEMPERATURE EXPERIMENTS ON THE LOBSTER Observations on favourable temperatures for shipping live lobsters had previously been made on a large scale on the boats carrying them between eastern Nova Scotia and Massachusetts ports. Small scale experiments were performed with the object of verifying the conclusions reached in the field. Vigorous lobsters were selcted and stored in damp air in incubators which maintained temperatures in the range 32° to 66.2°F. No difficulty was encoun- s, tered in keeping such lobsters in good condition for six days,—a period of time considerably longer than that required for the average shipment, at temperatures between 32°F. and 50°F, This, then, may be regarded as a safe range for ship- a ment in air if ordinary precautions are taken to supply moisture. Within the same time limits, 50° to 55°F. appeared equally favourable. Temperatures above 60°F. should be definitely avoided. Although the lobster will live in well aerated sea water at a temperature as , high as 77°F., the Li roblem of supplying adequate moisture becomes increasingly difficult, in air shipments, with increase in temperature, and is probably the factor which sets the 1 mit referred to above.

A. ELIZABETH CLARK THE EFFECTS OF TEMPERATURE AND SALINITY ON SPERMS AND LARVAE OF OSTREA VIRGINICA

- It was desired to determine to what extent the oyster might be limited in abundance and distribution through extreme temperatures affecting it during spawning and subsequently. The life of the sperm is prolonged at lower temperatures, the active period being 9 hours at 40°C., and 148 hours at 5°C. The same temperature range, viz., 40°C. to 5°C., was tried on the developing larvae. 40°C., 35°C., 10°C. and 5°C. did not allow development to reach the swimming stage, but temperatures between 35° and 100 did. 30°C. proved to be the temperature at which the swimming stage was reached most quickly, i.e., in about three hours after eggs and sperms were mixed. Experiments showed that the life of the egg under normal environmental conditions for Bideford river was between 4 and 6 hours. Also eggs heated to 40°C. were all killed; eggs heated to 33°C. to 39°C. did not produce swimming larvae; eggs heated to 36°C. to 37°C. produced swimming larvae unless heated for 60 minutes; eggs heated to 35°C. for 60 minutes produced swimming larvaé. The life of the sperm was 22 hours at a salinity of 40.680/00, and increased to 42 hours at 23.2°/00, then decreased to 21 hours at 4.6 0/00. Also swimming larvae Were produced at all salinities between 38.8 0/0, and 14.5°/00 . The results of these experiments show that the variations in salinity and temperature, as found under normal conditions in Bideford river, would not have very great effects on the sperm, once it had been released in the water, or on the development as far as the first swimming stage.

V. M. DAVIDSON THE SUMMER PHYTOPLANKTON IN THE REGION OF IIALIFAX Heretofore, collections have been made with No. 18 net, hauled either horizontally near the surface or vertically from the bottom upward. For the sake of studying the distribution according to depth and obtaining the nanno- plankton known to be escaping through the nets, the centrifuging of water samples from various stations at different depths was begun under the direction of Professor Gran of Oslo, Nonvay, who perfected the method. Material was obtained from stations as follows: 23

(a) Bedford basin, Halifax harbour, and two stations directly seaward from the mouth of the harbour, sampled bi-weekly; (b) Six stations forming two sides of a triangle from Ship harbour and Lunenburg, to the 100-fathom line, visited monthly. Study of the material permits the following conclusions: ■ (1) The amount of phytoplankton during July and August is small. (2) The content was oceanic in character, being chiefly dinoflagellates aug- mented by neritic diatoms at the inshore stations and the coccolithihea, Ponto- sphaera Huxleyi, at the outer stations. (3) On August 1, the centre of Bedford basin showed definite stratification with a maximum of diatoms at 10 metres; at the same time, Halifax harbour, although showing more even distribution from top to bottom, had a noticeable maximum at 10 metres. (4) The deeper stations beyond the harbour were very poor at all depths except for P. Huxleyi, which had its maximum near the surface.

J. W. FISHER HYDROGRAPHY AND OYSTERS IN THE SHEDIAC AREA To provide a proper basis for development of oyster culture in Shediac bay, a study was made of the hydrography and the oyster population. The prevalence of small depths and the two considerable streams tributary to the bay make both temperature and salinity variable. Bottom temperatures pa,sed 20°C. (warm enough for oysters to spawn) at all observation stations- at the end of June or early in July in the bay and rivers, later at the mouth of the bay, and in August at the "Farewell buoy" off the entrance. Diurnal temper- ature changes were more pronounced than tidal. Bottom salinities of 27 to 29 per mille prevailed in the bay but decreased sharply in the rivers, becoming very variable and falling very low some distance below the head of tide. Experimental tonging showed three centres of abundance—in order of impor- tance, between Shediac island and the mainland to the west, the lower part of Sliediac river, and the lower part of the Schoudouc river. Occasional oysters were present around the entire bay and barren silted beds occur towards the mouth. In the rivers the abundance decreased towards the head apparently limited by salinity. Where salinities were high the oysters were well "cupped", but in the L • rivers long and narrow. Spawning occurred in all oysters observed, commencing when the temper- ature reached approximately 20°C. and increasing during the warm spells. Two weeks after such warm spells cultch was put out, in the form of oyster and quahaug shells in wire baskets, at representative stations; but no spat was caught or found naturally produced during the season.

M. H. FRIEDMAN THE FREEZING AND COLD STORAGE OF LIVE CLAMS AND OYSTERS The natural habitat of the soft-shelled clam and of the oyster is such that it is often exposed during winter to very low temperatures. To culture them it is therefore important to know the lowest temperatures which they can survive. Al,o, it is often desirable to keep these animals alive in storage for some time prior to marketing and the most economic means of doing so is that of cold storage. Experiments were performed with the following results. (1) Animals which are brine-frozen survived longer exposure at any given temperature than animals air-frozen at the sanie temperature. (2) At temperatures below —4°C. the oyster is more resistant than the clam. Above —4°C. both are equally resistant. I 24

(3) In the clam (and prbbably in the oyster, too) there is a definite grad- ation of death for each organ. Thus the anterior adductor muscle is less resistant than is the posterior adductor muscle to the same temperature. (4) In the clam the smaller animal, within certain size limits, is more resis- tant than the larger. (5) Mechanical shock to the frozen clam and oyster is injurious; the saine degree of shock to the unfrozen is not. (6) In the frozen clam each organ (adductor muscles, syphon, mantle) has its own point of susceptibility to injury by mechanical shock. (7) Oysters survive brine freezing and storage in air at —4°C. for more than seven weeks, even when unglazed. (8) Brine-frozen clams kept in air at —4°C. showed signs of desiccation at the end of about five weeks but survived such exposure for about seven weeks. (9) Brine-frozen clams, glazed and stored in air at —4°C., did not show signs of desiccation at the end of seven weeks. (10) After seven weeks such animals (par. 9 above) showed, however, other unmistakable signs of injury. Gas bubbles had formed in the mantle cavity, the tissues were shrunken, and not many survived on thawing. It is" possible that respiration continues at even —4°C. and that these aninals died from tissue starvation.

H. B. HACHEY HYDROGRAPHY OF THE WATERS OF THE HALIFAX AREA The general hydrographie conditions both off-shore and in-shore are of prime importance to an understanding of the fishery problems of the area. The data obtained form another link in the chain of Our knowledge of conditions along the Atlantic coast. In the area three distinct bodies of water are to be noted. The upper layers (to a depth of 30 m. off-shore and 60 m. in-shore) consisting of water of a tem- perature greater than 5°C. have a salinity less than 32.00 0 /00. The intermediate layers (between 25 and 120 m. off-shore and between 60 and 150 m. in-shore) consisted of water of a temperature less than 5°C.and a salinity between 32.00 Voo and 33.50 0/00. The deep waters (off-shore only, at depths between 70 and 200 m.) consisted of water of a temperature between 5°C. and 7.7°C. and a salinity between 33.50 °/00 and 34.72 The upward trend in temperature of the surface or upper layers through the summer was the result of both the absorption of heat and the movement of warmer waters to the area, and was accompanied by the thickening of the upper layers. There was very little change in the salinity. The greatest change in the sub-surface waters took place in the intermediate layer. The coldest waters of this layer gradually disappeared from the area in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of their having mixed with warmer waters, thus indicating con- siderable movement. As a result of the marked stratification, bottom and surface temperatures in the in-shore area fluctuated from week to week within fairly large ranges. In September a southwest gale resulted in the piling of surface waters in the vicinity of the coast, causing the bottom waters to recede outwards from the co 1st. The surface layer thus caused a rise in bottom temperatures from 2.0°C. to 14.0°C. within a week. Later, however, outside bottom eaters moved in to displace the lighter surface waters and conditions returned to normal. COMPARATIVE SURFACE WATER TEMPERATURES A number of stations were established for the observation of the sur -ace water temperatures at representative points along the Atlantic coast. The monthly means for August and February of 1931 for various points will illustrate the differences observed in general throughout the period of observation, 1929 to 1932. 25

August February Bay of Fundy, mouth 11.6°C. 2.2°C. head 14.1°C. —0.3°C. , South coast of N.S., Sambro - 16.3°C. 0.5°C. Scatari 17.3°C. —1.3°C. (Ice) Sable island 19.2°C. 1.5°C. Southern gulf of St. Lawrence: Entry island 17.5°C. North point, P.E.I. 20.0°C. (Ice) North shore, gulf of St. Lawrence: Cape St. Mary 13.8°C. (Ice) In general, the monthly mean is the highest for the month of August at all points although there is a tendency for the waters to be warmest in the early part of September in the bay of Fundy region. The waters are coldest in February at all points although where winter ice sets in it is usually hard and fast for the months of January, February and March. Stable conditions are seemingly to be found in the bay of Fundy region, for the plotting of the daily temperatures results in a fairly smooth sine curve. The plotting of the daily temperatures for the south coast of Nova Scotia points out the occurrence of some very abrupt changes. Such changes are to be noted also in plotting the daily temperatures for the north shore of the gulf of St. Lawrence. It is to be noted that the waters at the mouth of the bay of Fundy have the smallest range of monthly means and a1 so the lowest mean for August and the highest mean for February. The main waters of the gulf of St. Lawrence have the greatest range of monthly means though not necessarily the highest monthly mean for August. A. G. HUNTSMAN FACTORS DETERMINING HERRING FISHERY Analysis of the official monthly fishery statistics, of daily sales of fish from weirs, and of information furnished by fishermen leads to the following con- clusions for the herring fishery of the bay of Fundy, and in particular of Passa- maquoddy bay. As a whole the weir catches go up with rising temperature and down with falling, and are practically nil during the coldest months—January, February, and March. This rule holds for individual years, taking the temperatures of the upper twenty metres of the water in the inner and outer parts of the Quoddy rei,ion. The extent of a definite spring fishery, most evident in eastern and western districts of Charlotte county, depends upon a rapid rise in temperature during April and May. From growth studies the principal feeding season is believed to be from May to September. Corresponding with this there is evident a low period in the catch, most pronounced in July. Low salinity of surface water interferes with capture, and absence of spring catches in St. John county is apparently to be attributed to low general salinity resulting from high spring outflow from the St. John river, reinforced by fresh wp ter from coastal streams affected by spring rains. . Winds bring or remove the heriing, depending upon the location of the weir, the ease with which thè wind can determine movement of the mass of water, and the time of year. Particular sites are greatly dependent upon wind, which may even determine whether the fishery be in spring or in summer.

DISEASE IN EEL *GRASS Reports of a failure\ of eel grass, as food for certain game birds and as a material of considerable importance for insulation and for upholstering purposes, w(re made to the Atlantic stations, and a co-operative investigation resulted, in eich the fishery inspectors assisted. 26

Extensive destruction of the root stocks antedating the current year's growth was found generally, except north of a line through Cabot strait, through Prince

• Edward Island from east to west and thence through New Brunswick. In water of the lowest salinity there was little or no damage anywhere. Winter killing was , at first considered as possibly responsible for the destruction, but the facts of distribution failed to fit such an assumption, and experiments by Mr. Friedman designed to test it, were negative. Late in the season, the growth of the year became affected and there was extensive death of the leaves not only in the localities where damage had occurred previously, but also in the northern parts of . Prince Edward Island and New Brunswick. Although no causative organism has been discovered, the indications are that a disease, previously existing in the south, and requiring high salinity and summer temperatures, has been spreading north. C. E. KEARNEY THE ANIMAL PLANKTON OF THE HALIFAX AREA The macro-plankton furnishes a direct source of food for mackerel and herring. As the latter are eaten , by the large commercial fishes, the plankton occupies an important position in the metabolism of the sea. A comparison of tows taken monthly off the southeast coast of Nova Scotia, between Ship harbour and Lunenburg, during June, July, August, and the latter part of September and first week in October, showed that the waters of this region contained more plankton in June and less in August than during any other months of the summer, while a greater volume was taken in the September- October tows than in July. Both vertical and horizontal hauls showed the quantity of plankton to be greater in the Sambro bank region than elsewhere; and a greater quantity was found in the deep waters (upwards of 100 metres) than near the shore. At a series of stations in the entrance to Halifax harbour, the greatest volume was taken in October while the least was taken in August. Calanus finmarchicus, the dominant species in the plankton, was found to be present at all stations, and formed the bulk of the tows tak-en in the Sambro bank region. Anomalocercz patersoni appeared on July 4, and was present along the whole coast from Ship harbour to Lunenburg and in Halifax harbour. Meganyc- tiphanes was found, during July only, north-west of Sambro bank. Sagitta elegans was present at all stations, while Sagitta serratodentata was found only around Sambro bank and in the deep water (200 metres) northeast of the bank.

M. A. LANGSTROTH A YELLOW COLORATION IN THE SOFT CLAM, MYA ARENARIA Connors Bros., a large sea-food packing plant on the bay of Fundy, reported that the clams used were affected by a yellow coloration. Boiling increased the colour, which was alcohol soluble. The canning process also increased the colour, probably due to a chlorine oxidation. The pigment was found chiefly in the epithelial cells of the mantle of the clam as aggregations of brownish yellow spherical deposits. The valve mantle, the siphons, and the groove between the valves ventrally were heavily affected. The gill filaments containing heavy deposits, the foot, labial palps, surface of the gonad and the heart were also affected. All pigment was found in ciliated cells as the parts affected were those exposed to the mantle cavity. Clams with only a few hours' exposure each day were pigmented, while clams of approximately the same age from high up the beach with only a few hours' submersion would be free from coloration. It was therefore assumed that the time of exposure was a definite factor in the coloration of Mya. As the time of exposure regulated the size of the clams, those which were larger than the average 1 : 27 were all pigmented. No clams under four years of age were found pigmented, while Seven and eight-year-old specimens were 100 per cent. coloured. All coloured specimens examined had the mantle cells pigmented, then in decreasing percentages alSo the gills, foot, labial palps, heart and gonad. Para- sites were found in nearly all affected specimens, but were considered commensal and an effect rather than a cause of coloration.

R. A, MCKENZIE SET HOOK EXPERIMENTS IN THE INTERTIDAL ZONE These experiments were designed to test out at the mouth of the bay of Fundy (Passamaquoddy region) fishing methods found in use at the head. Hooks attached with lines to stakes driven into the beach near low-tide mark were baited with clams and herring from February to June in Brandy cove and at St. Andrews point. • Until March 8, no fish were caught. Afterwards some were taken but only in Brandy cove and of the species Pseudopleuronectes americanus, Myoxocephalus oc/odecimspinosus, and M. scorpius groenlandicus, although at the time small pollock, small herring, eelpout, skate, red perch, cod and haddock were known to be in the vicinity in and about the cove as well as in thirty metres of water outside.

COD EGGS IN THE BAY OF FUNDY This investigation to determine the time and localities of cod spawning, as well as the rate of development of the eggs, was carried on in conjunction with Mr. Michael Graham, who collected the material with another purpose in view. It seems evident that little cod spawning took place before the middle of March. From that time on until the end of April considerable quantities of cod eggs were picked up in the tows made at certain stations. By that time, there is some evidence that the spawning was falling off slightly, for there were not quite so many eggs, in the earliest stage of development, collected. The first eggs were collected about the mouth of St. Mary bay and up the outside of Digby neck about as far as Petit passage. Three days later a larger number of eggs was obtained in the Saint John to point Lepreau region where there had been none about a week previous. From then on until the end of April, as large or larger quantities were collected in these two areas every time each recion was covered. A certain amount of spreading out occurred as the time progressed. The area inside of the line from the Lurcher to point Lepreau was fairly well covered, but little done close to Grand Manan.

• THE IIOLDING OF COD IN TANKS These cod were taken by the investigators off the Eastern Passage Labor- atory during the summer of 1932 and were kept in a cement tank about one and a half feet deep in a well-lighted room, east, north and west exposures. The fish were small, ranging in size from twenty-two to thirty-one centimetres in length and it is believed that they were in their second year. During the two and one-half months (August to the middle of October) th,-2y were kept thus, the water température ranged from about thirteen to twenty degrees Centigrade. This latter temperature lasted for a day without apparently causing the fish any discomfort. Readings of eighteen were a quite frequent occurrence. The fish ate well even at these high temperatures: However, the temperature at which they seemed to feed best was fifteen. Clams were used as a continuous diet with no apparent bad effects. The normal fish fed by sight (al] feeding done in daylight) while the totally blind fish became aware of its food by touch. These fish were finally transferred successfully from Halifax to St. Andrews on board the "Zoarces". They were fed just before going aboard and they became 28

seasick within half an hour after. This might possibly have been due to the excitement caused in handling after being fed, but such had been done before dr without producing sickness. co THE INSHORE COD FISHERY OF THE HALIFAX AREA Most of the fish are taken by hand-lines since the fishermen seem to find eg difficulty in finding grounds large and suitable enough for line trawling. This is ac a very different situation to that in the bay of Fundy. This inshore cod fishery seems to be confined to the late spring, summer and fall seasons and reaches its height usually in the summer, A large part of the be reduction in landings- in the winter and early spring may be accounted for through bad weather curtailing the operations of the small boats, but it is also thought an that the cod are scarcer in these inshore waters at this time. Certain evidence and reports point to an eastward migration in May and th June and a westw.u.rd one in the fall, while the so-called "native" fish, which Tt probably niake up most of the catch in the early spring, late August, September dr and early October, as well as the small winter inshore catches, seem to merely move on and off-shore at certain seasbns of the year. - East of Halifax cod with ripe and running spawn are exceptionally rare in (possibly due to the early cessation of operations in the fall). Some cod with running mut and spawn are taken in November in Halifax harbour, and in St. Margaret bay there seems to be a definite, but not very large, run of spawning th fish in late October or November. is WATER TEMPERATURE AND THE HADDOCK FISHERY (PROG. REPTS. ATL. Comparison of landings of the commercial fishermen and the experimental cla fishing with water temperatures as recorded for the bottom at intervals in the an Passamaquoddy region shows no haddock experimentally and very very few com- 1\1( mercially, being caught in water below 2.2°C. during the period 1925-1930 in- clusive, irrespective of whether such cold water lasted one or six weeks or whether it occurred in January, February, March, or April. Other possibilities have been fin considered, but the water temperature relation seems to be the only one to fit ea,: all years. fis] The best catches per unit of experimental gear were made in water having a co' temperature of 7.3°C. to 10°C. while the biggest commercial monthly landings sm were made in months when the bottom temperatures varied from 4.5°C. to 8.8°C., frc or even to 10°C., considering some of the second best months. is While generally the catches decreased above 8°C., no definite upper limit to can be set. At high temperatures, besides a general falling off in the catch, there wl" was a tendency towards irregular -high catches, although drag trawling revealed the fact that the haddock were still present and eating heartily, but not taking wa the variety of baits offered on the hook. • "n THE SALMON RUN DURING NOVEMBER AND DECEMBER IN SAINT JOHN HARBOUR to These fish prove to be Atlantic silmon (Salmo salar), possessing 9-11 anal to rays, about 120 scales along the median lateral line, and vomerine teeth. They were reported off point Lepreau, Dipper, Chance and Musquash harbours before scl arriving in Saint John harbour, where the fishing took place (chie fl y in the. inner Tt part). Up to December 1 there was apparently only one school of fish, taken o\ er N. a period of about three weeks (November 8 to 26) with the peak occurring in the second week (highest daily catch November 18). These fish were taken during a very high freshet and from the beginning of a set of moderately high spring tides of until almost the maximum tides of the succeeding high spring tides. During the nu three weeks of fishing, the surface temperatures a short distance below the fills varied from about 4°C. to 7°C. • nu co - 29

The fish averaged about 9.3 lb. (6.25 to 18 lb.) with the daily average weight dropping towards the last of the run. About eighty per cent. pf these fish were females; no males at first but latterly constituting about forty per cent. The gonads were in an early stage of develop- ment and the ovaries were about ten centimetres long with distinguishable yellow eggs tinged slightly with orange. The fish were very fat, and with empty stom- achs (with three exceptions). THE SWORDFISH FISHERY OF. THE HALIFAX AREA According t 6 averages for a recent series of nine'years, the season begins about July and reaches its peak in August. In Lunenburg the last fish are landed in September, but in Halifax county it lasts into October and even November. This season corresponds with the idea that they "strike" in towards the gulf of Maine in May or June and work up along the Scotian coast after that. These fish range in size from about sixty pounds up to four hundred pounds dressed. All reports agreed that spawn had never been seen in a swordfish, except one man reported having taken a female with spawn in it off Ingonish, Cape Breton, in 1932. THE TUNA (TUNNY) OR ALBACORE FISHERY OF THE HALIFAX AREA In Lunenburg county west the first fish during the season are landed in July, the peak is reached in August and the last are landed in September. In Halifax county west and Lunenburg county east, the first fish are landed in June, the peak is reached in July and the fishery drops off rapidly to zero by November. Fish smaller than fifty pounds are rarely if ever taken. There are two classes, "jumpers", weighing from fifty to one hundred or a little better, which are quite numerous, and large tuna (four hundred to seven hundred pounds). None are reported as having spawn. THE HERRING FISHERY OF THE IIALIFAX AREA In many ports the cod fishery begins in the spring with the arrival of the first run of herring. A run of spawning occurs as a rule in May from Halifax eastward, increasing in magnitude somewhat as one goes towards the east. These fish, about nine to eleven inches in length, run well up into the strearn mouths, coi. es and bays to spawn over soft bottom in shallow water. A similar but very small run occurs at certain points in the head of St. Margaret bay. Westward from Halifax around the Sambro peninsula and up into St. Margaret bay, there is a spring run of small "bait" herring which seems to decrease in size from six to nine inches about Chebucto head, to three to five inches at French Village, where they are said to be too small for bait. A run of large "bank" herring, which stay off shore about six miles or farther, wa,- reported from Halifax westward. Throughout July, August and into September as a rule there is a run of fat "number ones" reported from almost all over the area. These fish are thought to ;.pawn in the eastern part the latter part of September and somewhat earlier tom ard the westward. • From the summer, on late into Ihe fall as a rule,. they report numerous schools of small herring to be seen inshore at various places from Halifax west. Th(se fish are just too sniall for the usual size mesh of net.

N. A. MCNAIRN HERRING RACES OF THE BAY OF FUNDY Fundy herring for the, most part spawn in summer or fall and at the mouth of the bay or on the Nova Scotian side. Spring spawning herring occur in small numbers at the head of the bay, and at the head of St. Mary bay. Work on racial characteristics shows that there is a slight difference in the numbers of dorsal fin rays and of keeled scales of spring herring from King 's county' as compared with those from St. Mary bay. 30

R. H. M'GONIGLE the a cl] DISEASES OF TROUT AND SALMON EGGS AND FRY • of the of f Outbreaks of mortality in the early spring of 1932 at several hatcheries bed were associated with (1) imported or shipped eggs; (2) pond or native parents. amc The first of these comprised the most important outbreaks, and included cau: both Atlantic salmon, brook and lake trout. These outbreaks occurred only in ratc eggs shipped "eyed" never in eggs shipped "green". This did not occur only in eggs imported from other countries, but also in "eyed" eggs transferred from one cou hatchery to the other. It as interesting that those transferred groups which did and badly came from apparently healthy stock, which continued to do well in the ma parent hatchery. Furtber, all groups so transferred did not do badly. It seems con indicated that some unfavourable influence is imposed upon these eggs in the beir shipping—either chilling; or drying, or both. These outbreaks are nearly all associated with a population curve falling very slowly week by week, but grad- A. ' ually gettitig steeper (slowly increasing mortality) until finally an almost explo- sive mortality occurs—always after hatching. • Those of the second group form a quite different type of case. The mor- tality begins early and is very heavy, gradually decreasing to approximately none. Prii This, it is suggested, is associated with poor parent stock, or with (possibly, not 193 probably) some failure in securing the eggs. aut It would appear, for both types, however, that there is no possibility of either Th( of these sorts of eggs ever successfully producing a large proportion of normal tish, mil no matter how good their later treatment may be. the tin! J. M. MORTON fort aril IN THE HALIFAX AREA CHEMICAL INVESTIGATIONS OF SEA WATER mil Phosphate investigations are of importance (1) in connection with the quan- vat titative study of phytoplankton, since the amount of available phosphate may ten become one of the limiting factors for plant growth ; and (2) in the study of water bel( movements and mixing of water. in t Owing to the presence of Mr. T. Braarud, of Norway, at St. Andrews, it poil has been possible through interchange of samples to tie up this work, within the hea experimental error, with that done on the other side of the Atlantic. In general there is a decrease in the amount of phosphate in the top layers as the summer advances. This decrease is due, either to depletion brought about by consumption by phytoplankton or to an inward movement of water, poorer in phosphate, from the open sea. This summer the weather conditions were in 1 rather uniform throughout the summer and no violent storms were experienced whi until early in September, at which time there were several very strong gales from bru a general off-shore direction. The effect of these gales is shown strikingly by the tim piling up of a large body of characteristic surface water particularly at near-shore rett stations. Also the water formerly at the bottom (high in phosphate) has been "se pushed offshore and downwards by this inward surface movement. Two weeks spa later, on September 26, water low in phosphate was still present at the near-shore gro stations.' At the off-shore stations at the lower Jevels conditions had begun to revert to normal, i.e. the water rich in phosphate was returning. sum Some preliminary work has been done on the amount of dissolved oxygen. loci The results are in agreement with the phosphate determinations, namely, that anc wherever phosphate was depleted, or nearly so, the oxygen was high, but in places levi where the phosphate values were highest the oxygen was lowest. the the A. B. NEEDLER sep SEX REVERSAL IN OSTREA VIRGINICA SUS Samples of the oysters from a bed near the Prince Edward Island Marine yea Station, planted with spat in 1929 have been examined each year and it is found that the proportion of females to males has been increasing. Spat settled on twc 31 these oysters in 1930 and the proximity of older females seems to have retarded a change of sex in the two-year-old oysters since they have a very small proportion of females. This supposition was supported by examining oysters from other beds planted in 1930 and finding a ratio comparable with that found in 1931 among the oysters planted in 1929. That the difference in sex ratios is not caused by under-nourishment due to overcrowding was shown by comparing the rates of growth on the various beds. In 1931 some 200 oysters of known sex were marked, 58 survived and the sex could 13e determined in about 30. Of these, four had changed from male to female and five from female to male. That more changed in the female to male direction may be explained by the oysters having been kept under somewhat unfavourable conditions. Finally, the sex was determined in about 250 oysters which are being kept in various relative positions for examination in 1933.

A. W. H. NEEDLER HYDROGRAPHY OF MALPEQUE BAY AREA; WINT.ER CONDITIONS A consideration of data throughout the winter from a station close to the Prince Edward Island Marine Station in Bideford river in the years 1930-31 and 1931-32 has shown the following conditions: when the water is cooling in the autumn the salinity and temperature are nearly uniform from surface to bottom. The water cools to the freezing point for the existing salinity (close to 30 per mille), although ice may be formed on cold nights when the temperature is above the freezing point at the bottom and may be maintained, if cold weather con- tinues, when the surface water is above the freezing point. After the ice is formed stratification occurs to a degree never approached (except very tempor- arily after heavy rains) in the summer, the surface water being often below 5 per mine and the bottom water close to 30 per mille at a depth of 15 feet. The surface water now warms to the freezing point of this lower salinity and the bottom water tends to become warmer—being above its freezing point (though, of course, below 0°C.) sometimes as much as 1°C. for most of the winte. The ice may last in the spring for many days after the surface temperature is above the freezing point, the surface water apparently being warmed in the open spaces towards the heads of the creeks where‘ the ice disappears first. COLLECTION OF OYSTER SPAT; IMPROVEMENTS OF METHODS OF EXPOSING CULTCII BrUSit—In previous trials brush (a plentiful, cheap material) newly placed in the water failed to catch a significant "set", while brush (birch and alder) which had been in the water for a year collected an abundance of spat. This year brush (both green and dry) placed in the water several weeks before the setting time, part of it left in place and part removed for a week just before the time and returned to the water at the same time as near-by shells which obtained a good "set", gave practically no "set". Brush in the water since 1931 collected more spat, but still far from a commercially valuable catch. The unusually luxuriant growth of slime this year probably influenced the results adversel y. Cardboard collectors—developed in United States oyster areas, somewhat similar to egg-crate partitions and consisting of eight pieces 43'2 in. square inter- locking with three pieces 43/ in. by in., dipped in a mixture of lime cement and sand, were tried. When placed along sheltered shores just below low-tide level, good "sets" were obtained, but surface was lost by partial burying and there were losses through starfish. When floated below copper-painted boards these losses were avoided. About 1,000 spat from 0.5 to 3 cm. long could be separated from each collector at the end of the season. Cheaper methods of suspending the collectors from floats have been, devised and will be used next year. Floats for shells in wire bags—constructed by fitting a wooden frame over two puncheons, were made to support 65 bushels of shells each. The same bushel 32 -

bags of galvanized netting were used as have been regularly in use stooked along the shore just below low-tide level. It was found that a much .more abundant "set" was obtained -on the bags on the floats. Other advantages include: com- plete protection from starfish which cause serious damage to spat on the stooked bags; less labour in placing bags on the floats than in stooking and possibility of doing so at any tide; no loss of shells through resting on the bottom; no loss by sanding up in storms; somewhat faster growth leading to better winter survival. These advantages, together with the better "set", combine to make the floats a great practical improvement, if confirmed by a repetition of the comparison. The advantages of freedom from starfish, from sinking in the bottom, and probably of greater abundance of spat and better growth would apply equally to any floating cultch as compared with the same material put out along the shore. The above floats, which have a buoyancy of about 1800 lb. and cost about $10.00 with a probable life of several seasons, can be adapted to a variety of cultch materials. .

IMPROVEMENT OF MUD BOTTOMS WITII SAND FOR' OYSTER CULTURE (PROG. REPTS. ATL. à) Most of the bottom in those areas in our waters where suitable hydrographic conditions for oyster culture are to be found consists of very soft mud. In the course of early trials it was found that coarse materials, such as shells, sink into the mud which oozes up between them. Sand was tried in the hope that a con- tinuous layer of tough muddy-sand (such as is found in the transition from sand to mud on shores) would be formed. A plot of mud, soft to a depth of five feet, about 25 feet square was covered with six inches of sand in 1930. Though at first loose, the surface thus formed became firmer until in a few months it was difficult to push a pole through into the soft mud beneath. The bottom remained firm in the summer of 1932 when a layer of clean shells about four inches thick was spread on it. The bottom now felt definitely hard and would compare favourably with average oyster beds. A good "set" of spat was obtained on the shells and showed a normal survival. Three plots of similar size and of similar soft mud were coated with 3, 6 and 9 inches of sand in 1932. Present indications suggest that the 9-inch layer is not sufficiently better than the 6-inch to pay, and that the 3-inch layer is almost sufficient. Trials of the survival of spat on shells, and of oysters, planted directly on the sand, are in progress.

ELIMINATING STARFISII AND OVERCROWDING IN OYSTER BEDS It has become apparent that serious losses (up to 100 per cent.) are to 1:k expected in the first year and a half if starfish are not removed before planting spat. A modification of the method of mopping for starfish used in the United States has been used with success, but is expensive. The use of a trough of water heated by the exhaust of the boat's engine has doubled the efficiency by killing the starfish and greatly reducing the time othenvise u%ed in removing them from the mops. Whe'n losses from starfish are eliminated and spat have been planted on firm bottoms late in the season a good survival has been obtained, as in rapid transfer of spat and small oysters from.the head of the "river" to beds closer to the open. However, when several spat occur on a shell or on a piece of a cardboard collector, those on the lower side smother usually when planted and those on the upper side grow together into a cluster producing in the oysters a shape of low value. When a good "set", then, is obtained on shells it is necessary to lift and separate the oysters when one (preferably), two or three years old. When several spat are present on a square inch' of cultch surface there is only room for one to grow for a year or more, and without separation all the rest are lost. Unless shells (used as cultch) are in an advanced state of 'disintegration, such separation is a practical impossibility but it is easy with the cardboard col- 33 lectors. Trials are in progress in which separated spat from the colleetors are to be reared on trays on floats to the end of the second season, thus avoiding loss from overcrowding, or smothering in silt, and from starfish. THE OYSTER SITUATION IN THE CHARLOTTETOWN REGION Further exploration of the channels in the Charlottetown "rivers" failed to discover more supplies of small oysters and confirmed the previous findings of almost barren, hard, rocky bottom in the lower reaches and only limited areas towards the head of the deep water with an abundance of small oysters. Oysters transplanted in the autumn of 1931 from the deep water of Hills- borough river to Savage harbour showed a very good survival'and growth to the autumn of 1932. They spawned, although the area where they were planted is in the open bay of Savage harbour; and there is every indication of the efficacy of these oysters for establishing oyster farming in the north shore inlets. The limited quantities, however, will probably eventually force reliance on local pro- duction of spat in the north shore inlets. An attempt was made to collect spat in Hillsborough river for transplan- tation to Savage harbour, to test the value of this method of obtaining stock for the north shore inlets. But, although temperatures were favourable and the .41 o■ sters spawned and the cultch (shells in wire bags) was apparently placed in the water at the correct time, only small catches of spat were made and the growth was small. What was obtained was planted in Savage harbour.

C. L. NEWCOMBE GROWTH OF TIIE SOFT-SIIELLED CLAM, MYA ARENARIA A Bay of Fundy (1) The population of the commercial clams beaches is characterized by (al paucity of small clams representing set of 1928, 1929 and 1930, (b) an abun- domce of small clams (1931 set) commonly numbering 200 to 400 per metre square area and, on some flats (e.g. Sissiboo river, N.S.) as high as 6000, (c) dominant le Igth classes ranging from 40 to 65 mm. (age range about four to eight years). (2) The fluctuations in number of clams (above 20 mm. in length) observed on normal beaches are from about 100 to 400 per metre square area. (3) Study of the annual rings shows that growth activity per unit of length eNbibits a marked decline with increase in age from a very early period on. Aver- ages obtained from measurements of rings of four samples from widely separated kaches are: ring no. 2, 19.5; no. 3, 31.3; no. 4,41.7; no. 5, 49.8; no. 6,56.9; no. 7, 63.0 mm. (4) During 1931, approximately 90 per cent. of the total growth obtained in planting experiments took place from about May 1 until September 1. The amount of growth during the "spring" seasons of 1931 and 1932 was essentially the same, whereas in the case of the "summer" periods a slight decline was shown during 1932. (5) Of the plankton constituents of the stomach contents of Illya arenaria, di itoms have been found to be most abundant, zooplanktonts, chiefly tintinnids, pl tying a less important food rôle. The diatoms taken in by the clam are in the main bottom forms which also occur frequently in the plankton, and neritic species. B Bideford river, P.E:I. (1) The clam population (apart from the set of 1931) numbers between 200 and 300 per metre square area, thus corresponding with the population of normal bay of Fundy. clam beaches of the of 1932 (2) The amount of growth during the "summer" and "fall" seasons of Fundy, where, was approximately the same in contradistinction to the bay during 1931, "summer" growth clearly predominated. During the ' summer" Clam cove, period the amount of growth was nearly double that occurring at 3

■.• 34

N.B., where the average daily water temperature was about nine degrees less than in the P.E.I. area, namely, 11 degrees centigrade. J. V. V. NICHOLLS THE EFFECT OF TEI■IPERATURE VARIATIONS AND OF CERTAIN DRUGS UPON THE INTESTINAL MOTILITY OF ELASMOBRANCH FISHES Raja diaphanes and erinacea alone were used, circularly cut strips being taken from the upper and lower ends of the spiral intestine and valve, and from the colon and rectum. The contractions which appeared within an hour or two were recorded on a slowly moving drum. As soon as they were well established, the temperature was lowered slowly until they ceased at the lower limit, and then raised about 20°C. in from six to seven hours. (1) A rise of temperature causes an increase in the rate of contraction of all parts of the intestinal tract. (2) The upper temperature limit at which all contractions cease is about 24°C. for all parts and the lower limit is about 2°C. for all parts. (3) The upper end of the spiral intestine has the same rate of contraction as the lower end, whereas the upper end of the spiral valve has a more rapid rate than the lower end. The colon and rectum only give spontaneous spasmodic contractions at intervals of about half an hour. (4) Alvarez's theory of gradients in the gastro-intestinal tract is supported by the results of these experiments. • (5) Adrenaline stimulates all parts of the intestine, though on two occasions inhibition occurred in the spiral intestine. (6) Pilocarpine stimulates all parts except the spiral valve, where the effect is very doubtful. •(7) Acetylcholine stimulates all parts of the intestine. (8) Atropine has no effect by itself on any part of the intestine, but counter- acts the effect of pilocarpine and acetyl-choline. (9) It is concluded that the intestinal tract of the skate has a well-developed sympathetic and parasympathetic nerve supply. THE SURVIVAL TIME OF TISSUE KEPT AT VARIOUS TEMPERATURES In determining physiologically the survival time of fish tissue at different temperatures, skates of the species Raja diaphanes and erinacea were used be- cause of their hardiness, strips of musculature being excised from the central region of the stomach. Three series of experiments were carried out. (1) One set of strips of gastric musculature was kept in nutrient saline at 0°C., and others at 5°C., 10°C., 15°C., and 20°C. respectively. (2) Four sets of starved fish were killed, one set being kept at 5°C. and the others at 10°C., 15°C. and 20°C. respectively. (3) Four sets of freshly caught fish were killed and kept at 5°C., 10°C., 15°C., and 20°C. respectively. The survival time of strips taken from the antrum of the stomach in the›e three series of experiments was the same for each temperature, viz., at_0°C. 321 hours, at 5°C. 132 hours, at 10°C. 50 hours, at 15°C. 38 hours, at 30°C. 30 hours. Theie results were interpreted according to the R.G.T. rule. Thus Q10 be- tween 293°, and 283° absolute =1.66,1 between 288° and 278° absolute =3.47, and between 283° and 273° = 6.48. It was concluded that the autolytic process is more important than the bacterial in the causation of tissue death. There seems to be a very definite critical point in the processes leading to tissue death, after which they become much more rapid.

E. S. PENTLAND ' EXPERIMENTS1WITH SALT-WATER AMPHIPODS Solutions of-varying salinity were prepared by diluting sea water with fresh water. Tap water was first used for these dilutions but proved toxic, and was 35

replaced by spring water in later series. In solutions containing tap water it was worthy of note that death of the females occurred considerably sooner than of the males. In solutions prepared with soft spring water, G. annulatus showed • the greatest resistance to low , salinity, G. marinus next, and G. locusta least. A single experiment carried out with Calliopius /cteviuscu/us, a form found in the more open waters, showed it to have much less resistance to low salinity than any of the three species of Gammarus studied. At laboratory temperatures, eggs of G. rnarinus hatched in from thirteen to fifteen days after fertilization, the young remaining in the brood pouch for from seven to twelve days after hatching. At six to eight degrees centigrade the time of hatching was extended to thirty-three and thirty-four days. In the laboratory the time of hatching of the eggs of G. annulatus was nine days, and the young remained in the brood pouch for only one or two days. Three G. annulatus at forty-three days measured 2.9; 2.9; and 3.3 mm. re- spectively. Young of G. marinus varied in length from 2.6 mm. at seven days to 4.1 mm. at fifty-seven days. Sufficient measurements were not -obtained to give a smooth curve, but such data as were obtained indicated a fairly uniform growth for the first three weeks, after which greater variation in the size at the same age occurs, although the general trend is still upward. In two cases the period between moults was determined, for a female G. annulatus ten days, and for a female G. nzarinus twenty-eight days.

W. R. SAWYER - LIGHT IN RELATION TO WATER Light penetration into natural waters. A comparison was made of the absorp- tion coefficients of bay of Fundy water obtained by lowering a photronic cell into the sea and those obtained by measuring the transmission of light passing through tLe same water contained in a tube in the laboratory. Heating of natural pool by solar radiant energy. The daily water tempera- tures obtained by Dr. M'Gonigle with a thermograph placed in McCullough's brook have been studied in relation to total solar radiant energy received, daily measured by means of an integrating solarimeter and the data examined to date show an approximate straight line relationship. EFFECTS OF LIGHT ON AQUATIC ORGANISMS Effect on growth in Balanus balanoides. The work of Klugh and Newcombe 01 the previous summer vas repeated in cooperation with Mr. Newcombe, using a more satisfactory method for measuring the light intensities (the \Veston pho- tronic cell was employed in place of the Bell-Howell photometer). The previous results were confirmed, namely, that light has an adverse effect on the growth of Balanus balanoides. Photosynthesis of diatoms. With the exception of the light factor most of the rtquirements for abundant growth of diatoms in the bay of Fundy have been studied and found adequate. In experiments carried out to study the light re- q iirements for photosynthesis, an optimum intensity of light was observed and - b'ue and red light were found more efficient photosynthetically than green. Photosynthesis of Cosnzarium. The rate of photosynthesis (measured by ygen output) was studied in light of different intensities and different colours. The maximum rate of photosynthesis was observed to take place in a light inten- sity of about five per cent. of that of June sunlight. The photosynthetic activity was greatest in the red and least in the green.

M. \\T SMITH A BIOLOGICAL SURVEY OF LAKE GEORGE, YARMOUTH CO., NOVA SCOTIA In cooperation with Dr. R. H. 1\ l'Gonigle, a survey was made of lake George on September 10 and 11, 1932. The water of the lake supplies the nearby

• 36

hatchery. It has been considered that a reputed richness' of plankton in the lake water, and probably its higher temperature, are responsible to a considerable ar degree for a more rapid growth of fish fry, as compared with other hatcheries of tii the maritimes. In addition, one or two of the islands in the lake are used by gulls early in the season for nesting sites, and their excreta, etc., are presumed to I th have a fertilizing effect upon thé water. (1) The water was found to be unstratified with temperatures of 17.00 and ar 16.8°C. at surface and bottom respectively. The shallowness (12.5 metres m as ar the Maximum depth found) and the exposure to wind action give warm water M throughout. fn (2) The zooplankton was not rich, being below the average found in other ai maritime lakes, but the phytoplankton was well above the average and was sr unique, for, upon examination, it was found to consist almost entirely of a desmid, Xanthidium sp. - I & 3. The littoral fauna was quite poor. Killifish, sticklebacks, eels (very .. abundant) and sunfish, but practically no game fish, make up the fish population. ii ni de PLANKTON IN THE CHAMCOOg SERIES OF LAKES a A comparison was made in the amount of plankton secured in the early parts e-\ of June, July and October for the three years, 1930, 1931 and 1932, and consider- able fluctuation was apparent. Welch lake, which is the highest in the series, II co showed a similar seasonal fluctuation for the three years, the amount of plankton of being high in the spring, low in mid-summer, and then increasing somewhat in the fall. In Gibson and Second Chamcook lakes this seasonal fluctuation was 11 J. more irregular. In contrast to Welch lake, the amount of plankton in these two lakes in mid-summer was more eqtial to that found in the spring. This may be due to the more or less continual circulation of the water in these two lakes throughout the summer, and possibly to the fertilization of Gibson lake in 1930 M (Second Chamcook lake receives the drainage from Gibson lake). There were gr indications that the marked yearly fluctuations in these two lakes might also be m a result of this fertilization. wi

THE FERTILIZATION OF WATER IN EARTHEN PONDS 13 at One of two earthen ponds, each containing approximately 12 cubic metres of water, was fertilized with one-third of a pound of herring meal on June 27, 1931. in It was shown by both qualitative and quantitative observations that this a` degree of fertilization was effective in increasing both the plant and animal pro- to duction in the fertilized pond, as compared to that in the unfertilized in the second season (1932) as well as in the first season, as already reported. ra

THE FERTILIZATION OF WATER WITH INORGANIC SALTS IN SMALL CONTAINERS Sc I. Experiments were carried out to determine the effect of various nitrogen II cc H

(2) There was in general a decided increase in the production in the unshaded pots from the lowest to the highest concentrations of salts. This was especially J1 apparent with the growth of Scenedesmus. tc (3) It wa's not demonstrated in any of the pots whether nitrates or phos- ti phates were more efficacious in equal concentrations. Neither could a regular m difference be shown between their potassium and sodium salts. . ai (4) There was a decided difference between comparable pots in the open tl and in the shade in their production. For instance, the unshaded pots produced ri approximately 75 times the number of Scenedesmus and also approximately four times the number of diatoms found in the shaded pots. (5) In the shaded pots, also, there was a general increase in production from the lowest to the highest concentrations of salts, but decidedly less in degree. II. Experiments to determine minimal requirements of algae for phosphates and nitrates in fresh water were conducted in vials containing 10 cc. of solution, and suspended just below the surface of the sea to obtain uniform temperature. Molisch nutrient solution was used, increasing either the phosphates or nitrates from 0 to 500,000 milligrams per cubic metre of these as phosphate phosphorus and nitrate nitrogen in series of 20 vials each. They were inoculated with a species of Cosmarium. (1) The inoculation proved not only to consist of Cosmarium but also of .Senedesmus, Ankistrodesmus and pamelloid forms. (2) There was considerable production in the lowest concentrations of nitrate used (0.5, 1, 2, etc., milligrams of nitrate nitrogen per cubic metre). This demonstrates perhaps that, in such a nutrient solution, algae are able to utilize a nutrient salt, even when present in very small concentrations, to complete exhaustion. (3) -The highest production of plants was in the vials containing the greatest concentration of salts. The increase in production with increasing concentration of nitrate was not regular.

J. A. STEVENSON - GROWTH IN THE GIANT SCALLOP During the summer of 1932 samples of scallop shells from L'Etang, Grand Manan, Digby and Chester were examined with a view to determining the growth-rate under the different conditions obtaining in these districts, use being mode of the "rings of growth", which, on the basis of the evidence accumulated, would seem to be annually deposited in mid-winter. (1) On this basis the maximum age reached by the scallop is at Chester 15, at Digby 12, at Grand Manan 12, and at L'Etang 13 years. Generally, scallops with more than eleven rings were rare. (2) The age at which scallops in different areas attain the legal size of four inrles, as shown by the number of rings between the umbo and a point four inches am ay on the median line of the shell, was found to vary from 6 (L'Etang scallops) to 3.6 (Grand Manan scallaps), but averaged 4.5 years for all areas considered. (3) The distances between the rings indicate that on the average the growth- ra te increased until the third ring was formed, and decreased rapidly afterwards. L'Etang scallops showed the slowest, yet the most sustained growth-rate. Chester scallops apparently grew very fast at first, but later their growth-rate decreased considerably, though not as much as in Digby and Grand Manan specimens. Higher temperature seems to be associated with slower growth. SQUID (LOLIGO PEALII) AT ST. ANDREWS, N.B. Advantage was taken of the fact that squid in large numbers were being ca ight almost daily during the summer in the newly erected station weir to make a , tudy of their occurre,nce and condition. The squid first came close enough inshore to be caught in the weir about July 11. The numbers caught daily increased until August 15, then diminished to September 6, after which none was taken. During the whole of this period thy were engaged in spawning, a fact indicated by the presence of fully matured o\ a and spermatophores within the specimens at all times during July, August, and early September. Io periodicity in spawning activities, corresponding to the phases of the moon, was observed. During the summer, 922 squid were opened for sex determination. The raio of all the males to all the females was found to be 3.13: 1.00. 38

An attempt was made to determine the growth-rate throughout the summer; but it was found that the length-frequency curve of any one sample showed only e one peak, with no definite length-groups. However, it was noted that the peak Cr in a large sample taken on August 26 was approximately 5 cm. ahead of that of nit another large sample obtained on July 30. The stomachs of 723 squid were examined for food content. The vast as majority were empty; but some contained the remains of.fish, particularly her- do ring, and one was crammed with pieces of squid flesh. A larval cestode parasite, identified by Dr. Baylis of the British Museum as fer Plzyllobothriunz loliginis (Leidy 1887) was found to be present in the digestive an tracts of 18.38 per cent. of 544 males, and of 17.49 per cent. of 223 females that Bic

were examined. The infested squids showed no apparent symptoms of distress. M Linton (1922) considered that this cestode was the same as one described by him fer as P. tumidunz, which occurred in the adult form in certain sharks. t! 1( as TAIT EXPERIMENTS IN FEEDING LIVER EXTRACTS TO BROOK TROUT Since fresh meats are the best single food for feeding trout artifically, they obviously contain the essential elements of a complete food, so preliminary frac- a t tionations of beef liver, one of the best of these meats, were performed to attempt fro an isolation of these elements. inc Eight diets, as follows, were fed in duplicate to separate groups (30 each) of brook trout (Salvelinus fontinalis) for ninety-five days: (1) acetone extract of liver ± 75% dry buttermilk, (2) alcohol extract of the acetone residue + 75% ma dry buttermilk, (3) residue of acetone and alcohol extractions 75% dry butter- ret milk, (4) .9% saline extract + 75% dry buttermilk, (5) residue of saline extract cut + 75% dry buttermilk, (6) untreated liver 25% (estimated dry) ± 75% dry of buttermilk (control), (7) 40% dried lung, 20% gelatine ± 40% dry buttermilk, (8) 80% dried lung + 20% gelatine. CP The amounts used in the first five diets correspond to that derived from amount of liver equal to the 25% liver used in the control. acc No diet was so successful as the untreated liver control, which suggests that it i the essential elements are either of entirely different nature and widely distil> m,. uted, or else extremely labile and intolerant of manipulation. Three distinct phases, which appear in all curves, have been named prelim- (A inary increment, maintenance and terminal decline. An analysis of each diet Ion curve follows in order of favourability of diet, using for the various diets the off numbers already given. • cat (6) Slow increment; rapid maintained incline; slight terminal flattening. of (Temperature (?)). On (5) Poor increment; steady increase; slight terminal decline. 10 (1) Good increment; fair maintenance; slight terminal decline. (4) Poor increment; slow steady increase; no decline. len (3) Best increment; no maintenance; rapid decline and early death._ in' (2) Poor increment; bare maintenance; slow decline. (7) Pôor increment; early decline; further. increment and second decline. w11 (8) Almost no increment; bare maintenance; rapid decline and early death. to cite W. TEMPLEMAN les SIZE AT MATURITY, BODY PROPORTIONS AND WEIGHT IN THE LOBSTER de/ Departmental regulations for lobster protection are frequently based upon ba size, and are aimed to ensure maintenance of the stock through protection of at least a proportion of the breeding individuals. mci Size at maturity. Maturity is most easily recognized in the females by their carrying eggs, but mating experiments at Pt. du Chene indicated that the sees are approximately equal in size at first maturity. First female maturity given 111 the following. th( 39

In Northumberland strait (Pt. du Chene) 7.2 in. long (3 to 4 years old, eighing 7 oz.); eastern Nova Scotia (Canso to Liscombe) between 7.5 and 9 in.; Grand Manan (colder water), mouth of bay of Fundy, 14 in. (probably at least nine years old, and weighing 44 oz.). Body proportions. In mature males the claws are disproportionately large as compared with females and the immature, while in mature females the ab- domen is relatively quite wide and deep, and the carapace is relatively short. As a consequence, large claws make mature males heavier than mature females of same length, and heavier than both immature males of the same length and also mature males that have attained maturity later (e.g. 11-5 in. Pt. du Chene male 20 oz. heavier than 14.5 in. Grand Manan male) similarly the Grand Manan female has a considerably narrower abdomen than the Pt. du Chene female ; also the shorter carapace in females means that proportionately more of them are returned to the sea than of males, where a carapace size limit is in force as in Charlotte county.

MOULTING AND GROWTH IN THE LOBSTER The weakness, and the watery condition of the meat in lobsters at, and for a time after, moulting makes the study of this process of particular importance from both fishermen's and canners' standpoints. Also it is the time at which increase in size or growth occurs. Time of nzoulting. In Northumberland strait (Medea rock, Shediac bay) immature males and females began to moult on July 5, and a week or two later the mature males, but no mature females even by July 20, when fishing ceased. In retaining floats mature males moult much earlier than mature females and shell cunditions at start of fall season indicate several weeks later moulting in the case of mature females compared with males of equal size. A second general moult of in. to in. males and 53 in. to 8% in. females occurred in late August and earl y S .13tember. At Grand Manan moulting was found only by August 15, and by fishermen's ac counts of softness of shells of some lobsters on November 15 (opening of season), it is probably not over before at least September 30, which is too late for a second moult among smaller lobsters of commercial size. Moulting and the fall season (Northumberland strait): At beginning of season (August 16), 95 per cent. of the females and 50 per cent. of the males over 9 in. lo ig had shells not well hardened, and the percentages were particularly high in of:shore, deep water. The second moult of the smaller lobsters caused decreased catches in early September, and increased catches by middle of September and of soft-shelled lobsters. Catches in offshore and deep waters, with few small or es, are relatively , unaffected by this second moult, and the shell condition of the lobsters over nine inches improves as the season advances. Growth. Determined by carapace measurements before and after (constant length after three hours) shedding the old shell, and considered as percentage in( rease in carapace length. At Pt. du Chene 110 lobsters showed growth varying from 9 to 17 per cent. wh en of the same size. Males showed growth decreasing from 13.5% at 5.6 in. to about 11% at 11 in., while female; after maturity at .8 in. showed growth de- creasing more rapidly to 7% at 9.6 in. Lobsters held in retaining floats shoived les, growth than the abo've, since receiving little or no food. At Grand Manan about 70 lobsters from pounds showed similarly a greater decrease in growth with increase in size in females as compared with males, but bz:;inning at a larger size than at Pt. du Chene, owing to delayed attainment of mdturity. •

MATING IN THE LOBSTER Previous work-ers have argued that mating in the lobster may take place in the hard-shelled condition, although no definite records of mating when the female 40

lobster was hard-shelled and only four when the female was soft-shelled are on record. Ma Mating experiments were carried on at Pt. du Chene in July, August and anc September, 1932. The mating process was observed 24 times and definite at- abc tempts at mating for an additional 29 times. Successful mating was only accom- ss el plished by fairly hard-shelled males and very soft-shelled females. Seventy- mfl seven per cent, of the hard-shelled male lobsters placed with females 0 to 3 hours to 1 out of the old shell mated with these females. This percentage decreased until rep with females 11 to 20 hours since moulting only 29 per cent. of the males mated. mii The latest mating was with a female which had moulted 16 hours previously. Twenty-four hard-shelled males placed with females which had moulted from 1 8 II V. - to 85 hours previously spent an average of 54 minutes in the presence of the females without mating, although in 23 cases of mating of hard-shelled males with females from 0 to 16 hours since moulting, the average time between the placing of the male with the female and mating was 13 minutes. Apt The greatest percentage of successful matings took place when hard-shelled 35 males slightly larger than the soft-shelled female were used. Males very much der smaller than the female were unable to roll the female over while males very much not larger than the female rarely attempted to mate. Hy( EGG EXTRUSION AND HATCHING IN THE LOBSTER Jur The problems connected with the berried lobster and the larval lobster are laq among the greatest that confront us in the task of increasing or conserving the trie lobster supply. A general idea of the variations in numbers of berried lobsters tra and in the time of laying and hatching of eggs on different parts of the coast is a sea necessary preliminary to more intensive work on the larvae. bot Proportion carrying eggs. During 20 days' special fishing at Pt. du Chene, anc N.B., in July, 1932, among 600 lobsters caught 32 were berried, while during 20 the days' special fishing at Grand Manan, August 1 to 20, a catch of about 500 lobsters ins' gave not a single one berried. Fishermen's catches at Grand Manan in early June showed an average of about one berried lobster to every two or three hundred P st e lobsters caught. 1 of. , Time of hatching. At Pt. du Chene (representing the western and warmer hac part of Northumberland strait), among 15 berried lobsters taken between Juls- 1 ‘ 19:i

and 14, four had eggs hatching or hatched; among 15 berried lobsters taken be- , ins tween July 17 and 20, 11 had eggs hatching or hatched; on and after August 24 grc none found with old eggs. At Cape Tormentine in eastern Northumberland pa strait from deep water, a berried lobster with old eggs ready to hatch was taken . or as late as September 22. grc Time of extrusion. At Pt. du Chene, first lobsters with new eggs were taken on July 17 and July 20. In retaining floats at Pt. du Chene extrusion occurred ; cal a month earlier than in pounds at Grand Manan. 1)/

Interval_ between moulting and egg extrusion. At Pt. du Chene both old - q a shelled and new-shelled (recently moulted) lobsters were found bearing new eggs, hei while at Grand Manan only those that apparently had not moulted for one or two col years were so found. , n lc to • MIGRATIONS OF THE LOBSTER Sixty-five returns from the 950 new-shell lobsters tagged in 1931 at_ the Magdalen islands show that lobsters tagged in House harbour, Grand Entry and Basque harbour lagoons, a mile or more from the entrance to the lagoon, appal-- ac' ently left the lagoons in the fall and were caught on grounds outside of the lagoons 19 in May and June. None of the lobsters tagged in the Magdalen island area were 11 fr, - reported caught in any other region of the gulf. Most of the lobsters liberated re t other than . in the lagoons were caught either near their libèration point or within we a mile or two of it. In the Magdalen islands group themselves the furthest dis- r tances travelled in 9 to 11 months by recaptured tagged lobsters were only five or of six miles. 41

Sixty-seven returns were obtained from 450 lobsters tagged in 1931 in Malpeque bay. Of these, one lobster was recaptured 20 miles in a straight line and 30 miles following the shore line, away from its liberation point, and another about 20 miles, following the shore line, away from its liberation point. Eight m ere found outside the bay six to twelve miles east, and eight from five to ten miles west of the liberation points. Nine were caught near the eastern entrance to the bay five to six miles from the liberation points, and the remainder were reported -from various points within the bay. The returns show no definite migration but rather a wandering with resulting scattering. ,

V. D. VLADYKOV SEASONAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE HADDOCK OF THE HALIFAX AREA (1) Spring (spawning) run. Haddock weighing from 3 to 4 lb. spawn in April and May in the entrance to St. Margaret bay, on gravelly bottom in 25 to 35 fathoms, and are taken with gill nets. Subsequently this school has a ten- dency to move eastward and then is caught near Pennant bay and Ketch harbour not farther than five miles offshore. These fish are as a rule spent, have small livers, and are in poor condition. (2) Summer run. Haddock belonging to another school, and taken from June to September, constitute the second or summer run of this fish. These are larger, weighing on an average from 5 to 7 pounds, and distinguished easily from trie spring school by larger size and "good shape". They appear near the en- trance to Halifax harbour, from Portuguese cove to Devils island, and, as the season progresses, they penetrate farther into the harbour and are caught also both east and west of Halifax. These large haddock are found on inshore grounds and seem to follow the schools of fall-spawning herring, on whose eggs they gorge themselves. By the end of September, as a rule, they have disappeared from the inshore grounds. The best catches of haddock, averaging 5 to 7 lbs., are regularly made by st eam trawlers on offshore grounds from the second half of February to the end of April. The poorest catches are taken from July to September when the large haddock frequent the inshore grounds. On the other hand, during September of 1932, when an exceptionally strong storm drove away the haddock from the inshore grounds, unusually good catches of large fish were made on offshore grounds by steam trawlers. This suggests that the large summer shore haddock probably belong to the "Bank school" (race), and frequent alternately offshore or inshore grounds. Furthermore, the catches of summer haddock on inshore grounds are more sporadic than those obtained in the spring months. (3) Fall-winter run. During October, as a rule, practically no commercial catches of haddock are taken in the Halifax area on inshore grounds. From the beginning of November until the end of January haddock are caught in large quantities by schooners from 10 to 20 miles offshore (no consideration is given here to catches made by steam trawlers). The fragmentary information available concerning these is not conclusive, but suggests that this run does not represent movement of a separate school, rather the return of spring and summer schools to the vicinity of their respective spawning grounds. •

YOUNG HADDOCK I1Nt THE HALIFAX AREA Occurrence. The Halifax area, in contrast to the bay of Fundy, is char- acterized at the present time by an abundance of young haddock (2 to 3 years old), 19 to 18 inches in length. These fish usually school over a muddy bottom in depths from 2 to 10 fathoms. They appear near the shore about the middle of May and remain there usually until the end of September. Exceptionally large numbers were present during the summer of 1932 in St. Margaret bay, where the mackerel tr aps were often filled with these fish. Their abundance indicates good catches of commercial haddock in the near future. 42

Food. Several hundred stomachs of young haddock (10 to 20 inches in hod; length) from Eastern passage and Bedford basin, near Halifax, were found to susp contain principally bivalve mollusks (Cardium, etc.) of small size. - Worms hori; (Polychaeta) were next in abundance. Small crustaceans (amphipods and schi- had zopods) evidently play a minor rôle. Fish were found in stomachs only occa- zont sionally. Echinoderms (brittle stars, sea-urchins, etc.) were practically absent. adar All of the above enumerated animals occur on muddy bottom. On the other enen hand, examination of the stomach contents of adult haddock from the Halifax p1an area showed the principal food to be brittle-stars, sea-urchins, herring eggs, etc., in sc quite clearly indicating a difference in diet from that of the young. Ten yo-ung haddock (11 to 14 inches in length), caught with hook and line in Eastern passage on July 20, were placed in an experimental tank provided with running sea-water. Four haddock died in September, whereas the remaining six th es lived until the end of the experiment (October 14, 1932). Temperatures of the cuns tank water varied from 14 to 20°C., and the fish, in spite of the relatively high temperature, a" ppeared to be in good condition. fur s The haddock were fed, as a rule, with shelled soft-clam (1Ifya arenaria) each tiq-o second or third day. The fish found their food both by sight and scent. Besides beca clam, the haddock ate greedily shrimps (Crangon), small crabs (Cancer), grass- tact hoppers and potato-beetles (Leptinotarsa). On the other hand, the haddock did norr not take any vegetable food (bread, sea-weed, etc.), nor small mussels (Mytilus), thou periwinkles (Littorina) and star-fish. It is interesting to note that haddock iatel would not eat hard-boiled eggs, but would eat eggs fried with butter. expe er H. C. WHITE tl .e OBSERVATIONS ON ATLANTIC SALMON IN APPLE RIVER, N.S. Apple river is a salmon stream which has depended entirely on natural spawning for the maintenance of its stock of salmon, hence it is a good stream salrr in which to observe native stock under natural conditions. st on (1) Smo/ts. In 1932 smolts were found in all stages of transformation from en6 the parr stage, both far up the streams as well as in the brackish water of the irnp estuary, and collections of these were made. cons Great numbers of smolts are taken annually by anglers, since in this stage in sel the salmon takes a baited hook very readily. None of the anglers questioned knew fhat they were killing the young of the salmon, calling them "salmon trout" ston and "silver trout". An educational campaign is required. frt.'s1 (2) Spawning. In the late summer and fall of 1931 many salmon ascended salrr this stream, and spawning occurred during a period of high water the last of idcn October and the first of November. Practically every suitable area for a distance the of seven miles on the stream had been well utilized by the salmon. High water during the winter and spring in some places, especially in the lower region, cc ni changed the course of the stream bed, and in late May neither remains of the 1!`.3`. redds, eggs nor fry could be found. However, by the middle of June numbers of up salmon fry were observed on all the rapids and it was estimated that there were two hundred and eighty thousand fry in the area where the salmon had spawned, lock giving good àtocking by natural reproduction. • CGIT1 (3) Tagging. Salmon were tagged in various sections in 1931 and again in 1932: Among the few adult fish taken in the river in 1932 (investigations dis- continued rather early) was a salmon tagged in 1931. This fish, a male, was taken before spawning in October, 1931, after spawning in November and again " Iat in October, 1932. It was seined from the same pool on all these occasions. It it a had more than doubled its weight since going to sea as a kelt. guu st:e SALMON FRY IN STILL WATER - nat A number of salmon fry which were being retained in running water were th transferred to a still pool of stream water. • The fry, which had completely ab- to 1 sorbed the yolk sac, were unable at first to maintain themselves in the water in a 43

horizontal position. By expending considerable energy they kept themselves - suspended in the water with the head upviard and the body at an angle to the horizontal. This condition gradually improved until at the end of ten days they had apparently become adapted to the still water and they maintained a hori- zontal position with little effort. During the period when they are becoming • adapted to a still-water habitat they would appear to be easy prey for their enemies. Thus these observations suggest that when salmon fry are to be planted in still water they should first become adapted to water in this condition in some place where they are secure from their enemies. SEVERING A GILL ARCH IN BROOK TROUT 1 1 Small brook trout are often injured when hooked by anglers and many of these are retained because when injured, especially about the gills, it is generally considered that such injuries are fatal. A number of trout were taken on hook and line, transported in a pail of water for several miles and placed in a trough of spring water. A fish hook was inserted through the mouth and a gill arch torn from a number of individuals. The fish bpcame sluggish immediately after this operation and did not respond readily to tactile stimuli for several hours and after twenty-four hours they appeared normal. Eight per cent, of the fish died from the results of the operation. Al- though the number of respirations dropped to fifty per cent, of normal immed- iately after the operation, in a few days the number was back to normal. The experiment indicates that a high percentage of hooked trout which are injured, even to the extent of severing a gill arch, may be expected to live if returned to the water when released from the hook. FOOD OF SALMONIDS (1) Atlantic salnzon in fresh-water stage. During 1931, a collection of young sdmon of various ages was made and analyses completed of some two hundred stomachs. These analyses indicated that the food of the fry consists almost entirely of immature stages of aquatic insects, Chironomid larvae being the most important. The parr feed chiefly upon immature aquatic insects, but also eat a considerable amount of surface food consisting of mature aquatic and terrestrial insects. (2) Land-locked salnzon in the Chanzcook lakes. Analyses of contents of stomachs of fish taken by anglers during April and May, 1932, indicate that the fresh-water smelt, abundant in these lakes, constitutes the main food of the adult salmOn, identifiable -smelt remains making up an average bulk of 82% and un- identifiable fish remains (probably smelt) 13%. Aquatic insects were eaten to the extent of 5%. (3) The togue (C. namaycush) in Chanzcook lake. Analyses of the stomach contents of twelve fish (43 to 54 cm. long) taken by anglers during April and May, 1932, showed that fish constituted 95% of the food. Fresh-water smelts made up 83.17%, sticklebacks 11.83%, and insects 5%. These results are very similar to analyses of the stomach contents of land- locked salmon taken during the same period and indicate that the togue is a competitor of the land-locked salmon.

A PLANTING OF SALMON FRY IN EAST APPLE RIVER, N.S. The salmon of Apple river and vicinity at the head of the bay of Fundy are late-running" salmon and no salmon ascend East Apple river to spawn, although it appears suitable for salmon. On July 15, approximately 25,000 fry of Resti- gouche "early running" salmon were distributed on the rapids of one mile of this ›tream by placing them in small lots in places such as would be selected by naturally-hatched fry. Observations made on these fry up to October 20 showed that the stream was suitable for the growth of fry, as they made a growth superior to that of the naturally-hatched fry in West Apple river. There was a good -,tirvival and the part of the stream utilized was well stocked. 44

FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (ATLANTIC) HALIFAX, N.S., 1932 It wa of the Station during 1932 has consisted of the investigations been The work kind: the preparation of fish and other marine products for market, dealing chiefly with same educational work in conducting classes for fishermen, fishery officers, and and of the b university students. of th The scientific staff during 1932 has consisted of the following persons: cornr and , Dr. A. H. Leim, Director. . Dr. S. A. Beatty, Associate Biochemist. atten Mr. Ernest Hess, Assistant Bacteriologist. n-ieth Dr. H. R. Chipman, Scientific Assistant in Chemistry. the Mr. A. S. McFarlane, Curator. varia SEASONAL smok Mr. J. Campbell, Scientific Assistant for Nutritionaï Investigation. rend( Dr. D. LeB. Cooper, Scientific Assistant in Chemistry. in dil Dr. N. E. Gibbons, 14 di " Bacteriology. 415 Dr. W. W. Johnston, gi " Biochemistry. labor 44 Mr. W. \V. Stewart, ti " Chemistry. they p!anr During the summer three volunteer investigators were attached to the condi Station: oa fi; Mr. J. W. B. Cox, graduate of the Dalhousie University Fisheries /V Course. tars Mr. T. Thorbjarnarson, Dalhousie University. redu( Mr. G. Thorsteinsson, Dalhousie University. duct: at us beaC INVESTIGATIONS • REFRIGERATION sinok Dr. Gibbons continued the examination of frozen fillets stored at various such temperatures. After lengthy storage, the bacterial count had increased contt markedly in those stored at —5°C. No changes could be measured chemically in muscle juice stored for 18 weeks at —5°C. and inoculated with Actinohzyces on th or Kurthia. A beginning was made on the investigation of temperature conditions in the s freight refrigerator cars used by the railways for transporting frozen fish. A rte suspension system for a recording thermograph was worked out so as to overcome in th car jolting effects, ànd records were obtained in early September on a car moving amot from Halifax to Fort William. The results demonstrated a considerable temper- no e: ature gradient between the top and bottom of the load in the car, but with.fair ducf uniformity at a given point. The top temperatures were close to the defrosting depo temperature Of the fish. Further improvements on the suspension of the ther- drvit mograph were required, and before any further cars were available colder weather and had come, when records are less valuable. pera, Two small trial shipments of ice fillets of haddock, halibut, and scallops, ard remc of lobster and clams frozen in cans, were made in June to hotels in Brockville and dens, St. Catharines, Ontario. These shipments were received in very satisfactory screE condition. stud, SMOKING a ve was The investigations in this field may be divided into three parts: over (1) Laboratory work on the chemistry of wood smoke, and on the separa- tide; tion of certain constituents, such as the tars. "

45

(2) Semi-commercial development of smoke producers, and the improvement of the process of fish-smoking as far as present knowledge will permit. (3) Commercial application at Lunenburg, N.S. It was very evident when the construction of apparatus for producing smoke had been completed, that the different types of smoke producers gave a variety of kinds of smoke, and the same producer under different conditions offered the same difficulty. Two types of producers which Mr. McFarlane built involved the burning of sawdust by forced draft. Variations in the air rate, the thickness of the sawdust layer, and the temperature of the producer all influenced the composition of the smoke. This could be detected by the colour of the smoke, and, to some extent, by its odour. In order to obtain more definite information on the variation in the smoke, attention was given to methods of chemical analysis. Dr.-Chipman tested out niethods of analysis for carbon dioxide, phenols, and tar, and Dr. Cooper applied the Romijin method for the estimation of aldehydes. Analysis of the smoke produced as uniformly as possible indicated wide variation in its constituents. From a laboratory point of view, the most uniform smoke these pieces of apparatus would provide left much to be desired, and rendered it difficult to test out the effect on flavour of the fish of smoke produced in different ways. Following these findings, Dr. Cooper and Dr. Chipman have set up in the Liboratory a small drying system, and a small smoke-producing system, in which they hope to be able to reproduce a given set of conditions more readily. It is p'anned to test the chemical constancy of the smoke produced under different conditions, and then to proceed to ascertain the effects of different types of smoke 0 1 fish. Some work has been accomplished in this direction. Mr. Stewart investigated mechanical means of removing part of the heavy tiirs from wood smoke, with the two-fold object of improving fish flavour, and rt ducing mechanical difficulties attendant on passing the smoke through fans, d acts, etc. The use of three types of mechanical tar removers, based on appar- atus used in coal gas works for a similar purpose, indicated that one of these could b adapted to the present problem with satisfactory results. Some attempts were made by Mr. Stewart and Dr. Chipman to produce a smoke solution which might be applied to the fish as a spray or a dip. Could such a solution be satisfactorily developed, it would open the way to much greater control of fish smoking than can be assured at present. Mr. McFarlane has worked on conditions necessary to produce a good sheen on the surface of the fish, and on its permanence after freezing and defrosting. Mr. McFarlane built several pieces of apparatus for producing smoke outside the smoke-house. The first type involved the feeding of sawdust at a definite rite Oh to a plate, which was externally heated. The amount of smoke produced in this way was small commensurate with the size of the equipment, and the amount of heat energy provided. Three producers of the forced draft type, with no external soufce of heat were built, and were capable of adequate smoke pro- duction. The smoke produced had a high moisture content, and on cooling deposited a part of this on the fish, making them damp, and necessitating re- drying. Consequently the smoke was passed through a water-cooled condenser, and the temperature reduced to 60 to 65°F. or slightly lower than the fish tem- perature. This removed , much water and' tar, etc. from the smoke. Fine, removable screens were interposed between the smoke' producer and the con- denser to eliminate violent explosions which occasionally occurred before these screens were inserted. It was found that under these conditions fish could be smoked satisfactorily in the smoke-house in five to six hours, and that they had a very mild flavour. One Q-oublesome feature, particularly with un-dyed fish, was the occurrence on the upper horizontal portion of the fish, where they hung 0\ er the rods, of a dark band, apparently due to the settling out of smoke par- ticles. This is a difficulty which is found in certain smoke-houses, and not in 46

others. Probably it is related to the vertical draft just being sufficient to over- wa come this settling. At the Station smoke-house, a strong vertical movement of of the smoke-induced by a fan did not remedy the trouble entirely. Recently, trials have been made of another type of smoke producer, in which ha' several trays of burning sawdust, one above the other, contribute the smoke to a common duct, through which the smoke is drawn by a fan. The smoke produced FIS in this way seems to more closely approximate that produced by fires in the old

» type smoke-house. The smoke is cool enough not to require cooling in a con- fis' denser, and is dry enough so that the fish do not become moist when the smoke rat is applied: Also there is less banding of the fish. Considerable tar is removed in the fan. . . , At Lunenburg, the commercial installation has been considerably developed est during the year. Some changes in the drying arrangements were carried out at of the suggestion of the Station, and the drying of the fish seems now to be very col satisfactory, and, uniform throughout the smoke-house. An excellent sheen is iod produced. Also under the direction of Mr. McFarlane a smoke producer was wo installed. at SALTING The control of the reddening produced by a bacterial organism on ME salt fish is a problem- of considerable importance to the fishing industry. An Sh( attempt to gauge its importance was made by sending questionnaires to the an - fishery officers, and by correspondence with dealers handling salt fish, particularly ha in Gloucester, Mass. Dr. Gibbons carried out laboratory scale investigations on 'the control of the organism by the use of various disinfectants, including of smoke. While it seems possible in some instances to clean up premises which are SCT infected, there is always the danger of re-infection. Investigation was made on' the feasibility of adding substances to the salt which would inhibit the growth of pre the organism, and which would be non-injurious to health. Several substances ha were found to be effective. Because of easier application, passing the green salt to fish through a dip after they were removed from pickle was investigated. A dip in three per cent. solution of sodium benzoate was effective, but in most countries ou the use of this substance is not permissible. Ac A study is being made by Dr. Gibbons of the morphology and physiology an of the causative organism. SU

• An account is being prepared giving a résumé of présent knowledge with regard to the salting of fish.

CANNING At a meeting of the Canned Fish Section of the Canadian Manufacturers' Association in 1931, the problem was submitted of determining what processing 'time was required to properly sterilize cans of re-packed lobster. In the be inspection of canneries by authorized officers a certain number of cans are opened. These are re-packed. Mr. Hess duplicated this procedure at the Station, and processed the re-packed cans for various times in the retort and open TU bath. The cans are being, held for examination when the minimum time should be apparent. Results so far show that proce.s.sing for 15 minutes at 240°F., and two hours at 212°F., was insufficient. us; Further comparison of frozen and unfrozen canned lobster after ten months' of storage showed that the frozen meat was considerably softer on thawing than th, was that in the unfrozen cans (Mr. Hess). Di Changes in the pH of the body fluids of lobsters veere measured during the sy, period when the vitality vas becoming lowered in the animals. fol During the past season prices for fresh tuna on the market have been ex- ha tremely low, and this, coupled with the fact that canned California tuna is regu- an larly imported into Canada, made it seem advisable to work otit methods of canning the Canadian species. Mr. Hess canned a quantity of this fish in various an 47 ways, and produced an appetizing article. The importance of proper bleeding of the fish to produce a light-coloured product was emphasized. A plan of a model lobster cannery was prepared by Mr. Hess, and requests have come in for a fair number of copies of this plan.

FISH MEAL Dr. Beatty has developed a method of determining the pho- sphate in fish meal more readily than that used in the past. The calcium and phosphate ratio -was determined in about 20 white fish meals put up by the various Maritime producérs. Dr. Beatty and Mr. Thorbjarnarson have partially developed a method of estimating iodine in fish meal. The process has been developed along the lines of complete combustion of the meal in an atmosphere of oxygen, followed by collection of the products of combustion, and the recovery and estimation of the iodine in the ash and gases produced. The method is not complete, but further work is being carried out on it. Early in the year a meeting of the Maritime fish meal producers was held at the Station, and they recommended that the Station should circularize poultry- men's organizations and other bodies likely to be interested in purchasing fish meal, pointing out the value of fish meal as food, and that in general an attempt should be made to introduce fish meal to Canadian farmers. This has been done, and some local sales have developed. It is questionable whether they would . have without some urging by the Station. A short Bulletin has been prepared by Dr. Beatty setting out the advantages of white fish meal as a food for poultry. This has been made available in manu- script form to the meal producers, and it is being published. It may be considered that the education of farmers in the use of fishery products does not lie within the purview of the Biological Board. On the other hand, it seems at present that no other public body is likely to ,contribute much to this work, which it is believed will be a real benefit to the fish meal producers. Representations have been made to the Department of Agriculture pointing out that changes in the definitions of fish meal as contained in the Feeding Stuffs Act are desirable. The oil content should be expressed as a maximum value, and not a minimum, and a classification of fish meals into the following groups is suggested. • (1) White fish meal. (2) Dark fish meal. (?) (3) Solvent extracted meal. (4) Fish residue meal. • Routine analysis of 32 samples of fish meal submitted by the industry has been carried out gratis by the Station. Analysis is for protein, oil, ash, and water, and occasionally for sodium' chloride and phosphate in addition.

TUE NUTRITIVE VALUE OF FISII • Thé literatuée has recorded comparatively little, on the chemical com- position of our various commercial fishes, and where figures are available they usually refer to only a few individuals of a species, and .to one particular season of the year. It is desirable to know in greater detail what the food value of the muscle of the commercial fishes is, and how it varies from season to season. Dr. Beatty and Mi-. Thorsteinsson have carried on since the early summer a sy,tematic analysis of the 'muscle for'. protein, fat, ash, and water in the following species: cod, haddock, hake, cusk, herring, mackerel, Atlantic salmon, halibut, and. Canadian plaice. Attention is being paid to seasonal variation, and variation with size of fish. It is proposeeto continue this work through- out a complete year. Dried samples are being retained for possible further analysis in the future. . 48

In view of the preceding paragraph, it is not surprising that little is known of the extractives found in the muscle of the commercial Atlantic fishes. Many processes of fish-curing involve little understood changes of flavour in which the extractives are probably involved, as they are with mammalian muscle. The - quantity of these nitrogenous extractives present also has a bearing on the cal- = culation of protein content from "total nitrogen". Dr. Johnston was assigned to the problem of determining the amounts of ammonia, urea, creatinine, and uric acid which were present in the muscle, and has determined these for the suinmer condition in cod, haddock, hake, mackerel, and herring. In all these species creatinine was present in the largest amount, and uric acid in the least. Mr. Campbell collected extracts of muscle of cod; haddock, salmon, and herring, and of haddock skins during the summer. Extracts were made from both fresh and autolyzed muscle. A study is being made under the direction of Dr. B. P. Babkin of McGill University of these extracts. A partial examination of the nitrogenous constituents of the extracts has been made. This is to be extended; and a study is to be made of the action of these extracts on the digestive secretory processes in dogs. • - OTHER LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS 1. Bacteriological. Mr. Hess has continued the investigation of the growth and activity of representative strains of bacteria from fish slime at low tem- peratures, covering the range from —16 to +20°C. There has been evidence of growth at temperatures as low. as .— 6°C. Organisms belonging to three genera (Pseudomonas, Flavobacterium,, and Achromobacter) have been chosen for this work. The effect of freezing and thawing on bacterial cultures is also being studied. Two halibut which exhibited yellow' discoloration of the white side wer-e sent to the Station during the summer, and there were reports that this appear •ance was not uncommon among halibut which had been iced aboard the boats for periods of over a week.- Mr. Hess isolated an organism, which was capable of reproducing the discoloration on inoculated fish which appeared to be iden- tical with that producing yellow discoloration of halibut on the Pacific coast. Several other organisms capable of producing yellow pigments were also found. Dr. Gibbons continued his study of the classification of bacteria associated With the decomposition of fish; and belonging to the genera Achromobacter and Flavobacterium. He also studied the amounts of trimethylamine produced in fish muscle juice which was decomposing at temperatures of 0, 5, and 10°C. 2. Biochemical. Casein has been extensively used as a source of protein for the manufacture of various hardened plastics, and Dr. Beatty has suggested the possibility of utilizing -fish protein, which can be obtained more cheaply, instead of casein. An investigation into the feasibility of such utilization has been undertaken by Dr. Johnston, and preliminary results are promising. 3. Fish cultural. Mr-. Hess, in conjunction with Dr. M'Gonigle, inoculated healthy salmon fingerlings with cultures of bacteria which had been isolated in 1931 from salmon fry showing "fin-rot" at the Bedford hatchery. Apparently the organism, if one is responsible, causing the disease had not been isolated, as no recurrence of the disease took place in the inoculated fish. - - Bacterial cultures were obtained from trout fry at the Yarmouth hatchery, and salmon fry at the Bedford hatchery. These were from fish which were dying, and which exhibited symptoms of furunculosis. No organism resembling the causative bacterium of furunculosis, or capable of inducing the disease in healthy, fry, was isolated in either case. Examination of water samples from the water supply of the Windsor hatchery has been taken up again, as there is evidence of a partial return, to a normarre- action in the water. . 49

FIELD WORK 1. Lobster collection boats. During the period from the middle of May to the middle of July, Professor A. F. Chaisson accompanied lobster-collecting boats on six trips from eastern Nova Scotia to Boston. These boats were operating under subsidy from the Department of Fisheries. Records were obtained of the hold temperatures, and of the condition of the lobsters when placed aboard the boats, and again when unloaded at Boston. The conditions under which the lobsters arg held awaiting shipment were investigated also. The results indicated that conditions aboard the collection boats are quite favourable, and that the treat- ment accorded the lobsters by the fishermen in their boat § and while awaiting shipment is much more important in determining the condition of the animals on arrival at the market. A Bulletin has been issued by the Board covering this investigation and subsequent experimental studies at the Atlantic Biological Station. 2. Lobster cannery grading. While the regular officers of the Department of Fisheries carried out the grading of lobster canneries this year, Mr. Hess visited five new cànneries which were being operated by local branches of the United Maritime Fishermen in Guysborough, Richmond, and Antigonish counties, Nova Scotia. In addition to grading these canneries, suggestions were offered to the managers as to how they might produce a more uniform pack. Mr. Hess attended the annual meeting of the Maritime Canned Fish Section of the Canadian Manufacturers' Association at Amherst in November, and pre- sented a summarized report on the grading of the lobster canneries in the Mari- time Provinces by the Fishery Officers in 1932. 3. Exhibitions. At the Provincial Exhibition at Halifax, October 17-22, a sinall exhibit was included in the booth of the Departrnent of Fisheries. No attempt was made this year to include the work of the Fisheries Experimental Station itself, but a series of specimens illustrating the life-history an el rate of growth of the oyster was shown. Material for this exhibit was provided by Dr. Needier. An aquarium containing some common invertebrate marine animals was also shown. Owing to the duration of the exhibition, and the lack of any facilities, only very hardy forms could be used. 4. Miscellaneous. Dr. Leim visited a new bait freezer erected at Tignish, P.E.I., by the Fishermen's Federation, and demonstrated the proper use of a brine tank in freezing bait. Members of the staff gave assistance at various points as required. In this connection may be mentioned work by Mr. McFarlane at Lunenburg in connec- tion with the smoking installation; by Mr. Hess at Lower Wedgeport, N.S., where a cannery began to pack tuna in cans; Dr. Gibbons to the Yarmouth hatchery, and Dr. Beatty to attend a meeting•of agriculturists in Sackville, N.B., to discuss the use of fish meal. Dr. Chipman has followed the operation of thermographs on two of the Canadian National Steamships operating out of Halifax. These records are obtained for the Atlantic Biological Station. Regular hydrographic observations have been continued at the King's wharf, and at three stations in Halifax harbour and Bedford basin. Plankton is taken at two of these stations. Data have been collected during the different seàsons on the relation between round and gutted weights for cod, haddock, pollock, and some other commercial species. While generally useful, these data are primarily for the Department of Fisheries to use in converting statistics from one form to another. EDUCATIONAL WORK 1. CoUrse for fishàmen. The fifth in the.series of Courses for Fishermen was held at the Station from January 27 to March 8, 1932. Twenty-eight fishermen from the Maritime Provinces attended this course. The .courses and instructors were as follows. 50

(1) Preparation of dried and boneless fish----Mr. G. R. Earl. 35 hours. - (2) Preparation of pickled fish—Mr. R. Gray. 35 hours. (3) Motor engines—Mr. R. H. Davison. 34 hours. - (4) Navigation—Capt. H: M. O'Hara. 34 hours. (5) Science—Messrs. Beatty, Chipman, Hess and Leim. 55 hours. (6) Natural resources—Professor A. S. Walker, Professor W. V. Longley, and Dr. M. Cumming. 29 hours. . The Department of Fisheries supplied the services of Messrs. Gray and Earl. The Department of Agriculture, Province of Nova Scotia, supplied those of Dr. Cumming and Professor Longley. Messrs. Davison, O'Hara, and Walker were engaged for thé times indicated above. At the close of the course six examinations were held, and 22 of the men passed these, seven with honours. 2. Short course for fishery officers. Following their annual conference, a short "refresher" course was held from March 10 to 16, 1932, which was attended by the Fishery Supervisors and Inspectors from the Maritime Provinces. Two

- chief subjects were stressed: (1) The inspection of pickled fish:—Mr. Gray. (2) The use of the lobster cannery grading sheets—Mr: Hess. Other lectures dealt with the prevention of "red" in salt fish, the migrations of commercial fish, the value of fish meal, lobster cannery procedure, and new developments in fish smoking. Demonstrations were held in ,. the last ta o subjects. 3. Dalhousie fisheries courses. Four students who are enrolled in the- fourth Year at Dalhousie University are taking the Courses in Fisheries 1-4, 'Which are offered at the Station. Classes have been in progress during the fall term as follows. General fisheries—Dr. A. H. Leim. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Physics and chemistry of fish curing—Dr. D. LeB, Cooper. Three lec- tures and two laboratory periods per week. Biochemistry of fish curing—Dr. S. A. Beatty. Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week. - - Bacteriology of fish curing—Mr. E. Hess. Two lectures and two labora- , tory periods per week. 4. Hatchery officers' course. Dr. Chipman gave the major part of the in- struction in physics and chemistry in the four weeks' course for hatchery officers which was held at the Station in January and February, 1932. Dr. Beatty • - assisted with a part of these courses. This course was under the direction of the Atlantic Biological Station. -

- DEVELOPMENT OF THE STATION The constant temperature room (0°C.) was completed, and has been oper- ated most of the year. In the same 'room, five compartments provide lower con- stant temperatures down to —16°C. Cold brine to accomplish this cooling is pumped from the new brine cooling tank in the demonstration building. The Eastern Fisheries DiviMon of the Department of Fisheries has taken over the original laboratory building at the King's wharf. The laboratory tables and fittings were removed and used in part in fitting up the one 'unfinished labor- atory on the third floor of the new building. Some of this equipment was sent to the Atlantic Biological Station to be used in outfitting temporary laboratory quarters there. The Sta`tion retains control of two rooms in the basement of the old building.' - At present these are being used as storerooms. FollOwing the remOval of thé piles of the southern half of the King's wharf, a protecting plank wall was erected to protect the stone wall at the end of the 51 -

earth fill. Because of a mattress work under the stone wall, the piles for this breakwater had to be driven about 10 feet out from the stone wall. The upper part of the wall was broken away, and has been replaced by concrete. The earth fill has been graded. . The shed covering the boat slip has been torn down and concrete walls placed to hold the earth fill from falling in on the slip. One wooden shed on the premises has been torn down. The connecting 'bridge" between the new and old building has been removed, and the opening in tile wall of the new building bricked up. The removal of these sheds has solved the problem of the upkeep of almost useless old buildings, and removed a certain element of fire risk. • Shelving has been built in the attic of the new building to accommodate collections and equipment. LIBRARY Accessions to the library for the year amount to 163 entries, in addition to periodicals regularly received. Some binding has been done.

EASTERN PASSAGE LABORATORY For use by investigators from the Atlantic Biological Station, the Eastern Passage Laboratory was put into running order early in June and was operated until the middle of October. A proper syStem of hose and pipe connections was iastalled'to carry running se.a water to two sets of concrete aquarium tanks.

PUBLICATIONS Beatty, S. A. Fish meal in relation to maritime farming. PrOg. Rept. Atl. 5, 14-16. Chaisson, A. F. Factors in the shipment of live lobsters from eastern Nova Scotia. Bulletin 33, 1-29. (Partly made up of results of investigations at the Atlantic Biological Station). Chip.man, H. Ritchie The preparation of fish meal from oily fish. Prog. Rept. Atl. 3, 3-4. Gibbons, N. E. The reddening of salt fish. Prog. Rept. Atl. 4, 5-6. Hess, Ernest The influence of low temperatures above freezing upon the rate of autol3itic and bacierial decomposition of haddock muscle. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7, 147-163. The canning of Nova Scotian tuna. Prog. Rept. Atl. 5, 9-10. Leim, A. H. Recent short courses at the Fisheries Experimental Station. Prog. Rept. At!. 4, 3-4. - Successful shipment of frozen fish. Prog. Rept. Atl. 5, 10-11. Leim, A. H. and A. S. McFarlane The smoking of fillets and haddies. Prog. Rept. Atl. 4, 6-8. ' SUMMARIES OF INVESTIGATIONS S. A.' BEATTY • FISH MEAL • At the present time, when the fish trade has such small margin of profit, the utilization of by-products is of even more importance than in the past. Fish meal is, at the present time, the most important by-product of the fresh-fish industry. The manufacture of fish meal has been carried out in the Maritimes for approximately ten years. Eight plants of any appreciable capacity are in- stalled, but only five re in operation, a result of the partial collapse of the German market. This Station has determined the calcium to phosphate ratios of a large number of meals, showing the excellent balance between the two bone-building 52

inorganic elements, a balance equalled only in milk. Because of the importance of iodine in the feeds of farm stock in the endemic goitre regions of Canada, some attention has been paid to the iodine analysis of fish meals; The variations in - the results of the various workers who have analyzed fish meal and fish foods for iodine would indicate that a good method has yet to be devised. This work was undertaken by Thorbjarnarson and the author, but we have been unable as yet to trap the iodine completely. The Station has made an effort to develop the home market for the product. The producers, knowing little of animal feeding, are not in a position to guide the farmers in the economical use of the meals, while the farmers cannot afford to experiment at present. Approximately eight months ago, the producers were persuaded to make a determined effort to market fish meal locally, and although accurate figures are difficult to obtain, it would appear that before the year is up, about 10 per cent. of the total output will have been marketed in the Maritime Provinces. ' Through the efforts of the Station, the Dominion Department of Agriculture is carrying on further feeding tests on its maritime farms.

S. A. BEATTY AND G. THORSTEINSSON THE DETERMINATION OF THE FOOD VALUE OF COMMON SEA FISH OF THE ATLANTIC COAST The food values of the fish of the Atlantic coast have not been_determined with sufficient accuracy to be of much value, especially in the case of fat fishes, because a very few fish of each species were analyzed, and little attention paid to the seasonal variations that may occur. • Cod varying in weight from 2 to 50 lbs. show a very low oil content, but there is a progressive increase throughout the summer from approximately 0.35% to 0.50%. The other constituents are very regular, with the exception of water content, which in two large fish was 91% and 83.5%, othenvise ranging from 80.8 to 81.7%. - A large number of haddock showed considerable variation, especially in respect to protein and water, the protein content varying from 13.3 to 18:2%, and the water from 80 to 86%. The fat is low, and there seems to be a slight tendency to increase durinithe summer. Hake, and also cusk, show little variation among individuals, and little seasonal variation so far as determined. Herring show a very large variation in the fat content of individuals. While they do get fatter as the summer proceeds, the variations among individuals ts always very pronounced. The fattest as well as the leanest fish were taken in June. The oil content and the water content vary inversely, the sum of the two always approximating 80 per cent. of the total weight of the fish. Mackerel are not so variable as herring in respect to fat content. • Halibut show such large variations in fat content in respect to the size of the fish that, with the number of fish done, seasonal changes would not be shown. Small halibut of about 2 lbs. are almost as low in fat as are haddock, while those of 100 lbs. may contain as much as 5.7% fat. The increase in fat seems to be closely proportional to the increase in the size ed the fish. The Canadian plaice has an oil content about twice that of the haddock. The water content varies between 80 and 85%, the protein between 13.2 and 18.7%, and the fat between 0.3 and 1.1%. While the fat is very variable, the averages show approximately 100 per cent. increase during the summer.

S. -A. BEATTY AND T. THORBJARNARSON THE DETERMINATION OF IODINE IN FISII MUSCLE, • The lack of iodine in the food of the inhabitants of the endemicioitre regions of this continent has resulted in the addition to various foods of inorganic iodine 53 calculated to supply this deficiency. The addition of inorganic iodine, whether because of its inferiority, or because of the tendency to overdosage, is generally conceded to be not as successful in the treatment of endemic goitre as the use of the natural iodine-containing foods. The general lack of agreement in the results of analyses of the same f 'orms for iodine throws considerable doubt on the accuracy of the methods now in vogue, and it seems necessary to revise at least all values obtained before 1924. The method being developed by the authors consists of three procedures. 7s (1) Complete ashing of the material in an atmosphere of oxygen in a closed system. (2) The trapping of all gases of combustion in a collection train, consisting of alkali washers and a Cottrell precipitator. (3) The recovery of the iodine from the ash and the collection train, and its quantitative determination. The complete ashing of the muscle has proved a very difficult task. but has been overco- me. The apparatuses ordinarily used were not found applicable to fish muscle. In some cases the combustion was not complete, while in others the combustion of the dry muscle resulted in the production of tars that "froze" the apparatus and extinguished the flame. This difficulty has been overcome by use of an apparatus' which can be built at almost negligible cost, and which produces a non-smoky flame, and a white ash. The amount of oxygen used is reduced considerably, and the iodine should be trapped with greater ease than is the case with apparatuses previously employed. The analytical procedure has been tried with known amounts of iodine with excellent results. The combined washings of the ash and the collection train are treated in turn with arsenious acid and nitrose, converting in the process all iodine compounds into free iodine. . This iodine is extracted with carbon tetra- chloride, and the resulting extract is treated with freshly prepared chlorine water. After the removal of the chlorine and carbon tetrachloride by boiling, the solution of iodine, now in the form of iodate, is titrated after the addition of an acid and. an excess of iodide, with thiosulphate. The part of the work still incomplete is the trapping of the products of combustion. • j. CAMPBELL • THE NUTRITIVE VALUE OF FISH A knowledge of the value of fish as a foodstuff is of importance to physiology, medicine, and the industry. For this it is necessary to investigate the com- position of different tissues of various species of fishes, especially for the partition of nitrogeneous substances in the muscles, and also to examine the properties of these preparations as to their action on the digestive secretory processes and their nutritional value. This should show, in these respects, the relative suit- ability of these tissues as foodstuffs. A preliminary examination df the partition of the nitrogenous constituents in the extracts from fresh tissues has been made. - values of non-protein nitrogen are higher in salmon and herring than in hddock and cod. In herring a much higher value.for volatile bases other than ammonia was obtained as com- pared with the other tissues. The values for ammonia are of the same order. in all cases. The urea nitrogen values are fairly uniform. The amino-nitrogen of herring vas very high, that of salmon, cod, and haddock following in order. The values of creatine and creatinine are in the neighbourhood of 500 mg. per cent. and are highest in haddock, while salmon, herring, and cod followed. The or- ganic solids vary from 2.1 to 2.9 per cent. Of all the extracts, that of herring seems to have quite a different composition as compared with the others owing to its high values for volatile base and amino-nitrogen. 54

■.■ A. F. CHAISSON , HOLD TEMPERATURES ON SUBSIDIZED LOBSTER COLLECTION .BOATS There are three main groups of conditions that must be controlled if live lobsters are to be marketed in vigorous condition. These are involved in (1) care of lobsters prior to shipment, (2) care of lobsters on collection boats, and (3) care of lobsters after being landed in Massachusetts ports. Care of lobsters prior to shipment is entirely under thte control of individual shippers. _ Care of lobsters after being landed depends on the facilities that dealers in Massachusetts have for handling lobsters landed there in very un- favourable air temperatures. Care of lobsters on the collection boats requires provision of suitable refrigeration and moisture, and it was the object of this investigation to determine the efficiency of the subsidized collection service in this respect. Six trips to Massachusetts were made on the collection boats between May 13 and July. 18, 1932. Hold temperatures were registered with thermographs and maximum and minimum thermometers with the following results: (1) The temperature of the bottom half of the cargo ranged approximately from 32 to 40°F. . (g) The temperature of the top of the cargo was, in genaral, 50°F. or less during the greater part of each voyage, but increased in June and July with increase in air temperature to between 50 and 60°F. as the Massachusetts coast was approached. (3) Examination of crates of lobsters carried at different levels in the hold, and consequently at different temperatures for approximately three days, failed to reveal any general weakness that could be attributed to too high a tem- perature in the case of crates carried on the top of the hold, as compared with those carried half-way down, or on the bottom,- at lower temperàtures. (4) The temperature conditions found on the boats were duplicated in the laboratory on a small scale by holding lobsters at constant temperatures within the range found in the holds of the collection boats, and for a period of time con- ' siderably longer than thatrequired for the average shipment. - (5)- These observations warrant the conclusion that in the case of the collec- , tion boats investigated, the hold temperatures were satisfactory, in general, for maintaining the vigour of live lobsters for the period of time required for shipment to Massachusetts. Facilities for providing moisture and protection from fresh- water drip were found to be satisfactory. (6) Great differences were noted in the condition of lobsters shipped bv individual fishermen. This appears to be the most variable factor prior to land.- mg of cargoes. Suggestions on the proper care of lobsters prior to shipment and on preparàtion for shipment are contained in Bulletin No. XXXIII, 1932. (7) Condition of lobsters on fanding in Massachusetts is not necessarily a criterion of condition when finally culled. Lobsters were frequently landed at air temperatures in the vicinity of 80°F., and several hours may elapse between the time crates are landed and culled, the time depending on the size of the ship- ment and the facilities of dealers for handling it (8) If satisfactory temperatures are to be maintained on the collection boats, the amount of vertical icing must not be decreased, and if increased, it will con- stitute a factor of safety.

11.-R. CHIPMAN THE PREPARATION OF SMOKE SOLUTIONS FROM WOOD DISTILLATE Wood distillate was obtained from sawdust and was fractionated. Various oxidising agents as hydrogen peroxide, sodium peroxide, and potassium per- manganate were added to the different fractions, but no solution having a smoke odour was obtained. These experiments were repeated with fractions which had been adjusted to a definite pH, but no results were obtained. 55

It was found that if the residual tar from the fractionating of the distillate were dissolved in alkali, and then made neutral by the addition of acid, precipi- tation occurred, and the supernatant liquid possessed a smoky 'odour. Attempts were made to concentrate this liquid, but a change in the odour resulted, and attempts to duplicate the solution were not satisfactory. ANALYSES OF SMOKE SOLUTIONS It was thought desirable to work out some system of analysis which could be applied to smoke solutions to enable experiments to be carried out on the controlling of the characteristics of wood smoke, and which would permit a quan- • titative expression of the aldehydes, phenols, carbon dioxide, and tar present in dilute alkali through which smoke had been passed. For the determination of aldehydes as a group, several methods were tested. Considerable attention was paid to the development of a colorimetric method, but it was finally decided to use the Romijn method as used by Cooper at this _ Station for the determination of formaldehyde. A colorimetric method for the estimation of phenols expressed in terms of tyrosine, based on the phenol determination of Folin and Looney was worked cut. This method could be used to show the variation of phenols in smoke solutions with changing conditions. Attempts made to determine carbon dioxide by precipitation methods were rot successful, and it was found that carbon dioxide could be satisfactorily determined by the Van Slyke method. A method for the determination of tar by extraction with chloroform was worked out, and• could be used to express the amount of tar dissolved in the alkali. I). LE B. COOPER FURTHER INVESTIGATIONS ON SMOKING The problem of fish-smoking is one that requires a definite generalized solu- tion. This demands particularized investigations covering the chemical nature and physical characteristics of wood smokes of all types, a long and difficult task. The industrial need for an immediate improvement in the present process being recognized, a semi-technical type of experiment was undertaken as likely to yield results of more immediate benefit. The preliminary work was done in the large semi-commercial smoke-house, previously described by McFarlane and Leim, using a smoke producer triangular in shape (McFarlane). Results of previous investigations (Dauphinee and Cooper) were applied to determine the constancy of the characteristics of smokes produced in this type of apparatus, but such variability was found in Romijin number, acid number, and tyrosine number as to indicate that the triangular smoke producer is not satisfactory, for experimental investigations. Attention was of necessity turned to the development and trial of other types of producers, açd one form appeared to be satisfactory, the theory being that hot partially exhausted combustion gases passing through a layer of sawdust main- tained at a constant thickness would result in a smoke, the characteristics of a hich would be invariant and duplication of results possible. It was soon recognized that the semi-commercial type of experiment left much to be desired in ease of manipulation. For instance, it was impossible to secure sufficiently accurate analytical samples from the producer already men- tioned. The experiments w •re transferred to the laboratory on a much smaller scale, but a suitable system of analysis has not yet been obtained. N. E. GIBBONS TRIMETHYLAMINE IN DECOMPOSING FISH The volatile basic nitrogen in decomposing fish is composed mainly of nitrogen may be deter- trimethylamine and ammonia. The trimethylamine_

I. 56 mined by difference from total volatile basic nitrogen and ammonia nitrogen. wi On plotting the trimethylamine nitrogen in a series of fish muscle juice samples, or contaminated with various bacteria, and decomposing at temperatures of 0°, 5° wl and 10°C. it was noticed that there was an early rapid production of trimethy- sa lamine, then a stationary phase, followed by a slight secondary increase. The chief source of trimethylamine in fish is trimethylamine oxide.' Cook in has determined the amount of trimethylamine oxide in a number of fish, and in sic decomposing cod muscle found that this substance disappeared in 18 days in pr muscle kept at 0°C. The increase in volatile base was proportional to the de- of crease in trimethylamine oxide. to The trimethylamine oxide in muscle juice (haddock) was determined by Si( Cook's method, and in a series of seven samples values of 0.75 to 0.90 mg. of trimethylamine oxide nitrogen per cc. were obtained. The average value was mi this point that the stationary phase occurred. 0.79 mg. per cc. It was at about all It would appear that the trimethylamine is produced very, rapidly from the oxide until this source is exhausted. The secondary increase is more puzzling. sh Lecithin, choline and possibly betaine are potential sources of trimethylamine, sh but the lipoids of fish muscle can hardly account for the secondary increase, whose in source and cause are still unknown. mi INVESTIGATION OF FISH DISEASES CO During an epidemic among trout fry in May; 1932, the fish began swimming th with a corkscrew, or end-over-end motion, soon turned over, sinking to the lai bottom and dying in a short time with the gills distended. On examination, there va were no external lesions, and no changes were visiblè internally. Cultures were sit taken from the slime, peritoneum, spleen, and blood. A number of strains were foi isolated. The disease could not be reproduced in other fry, when inoculated ce with the various organisms. Furunculosis was suspected from the symptoms of Fc the sick fish, bin no organism' resembling Bad. salmonicida was isolated. CO An outbreak occurred among salmon fry, the fish dying off rapidly, with 50 per cent. mortality and over. The gills began to open, the fish swam rapidly in a circular path, then turned over and sank to the bottom. Only a few minutes isr elapsed between the onset of visible symptoms and death. The only pathological an finding was that the gills were white and solid in apPearance i and mucoid to the W( needle. On microscopical examination,they did not show the divided appearance or colour of the normal gills. The ends were ragged, as if eaten away, and the El filaments were indistinct. There were numerous small, round, transparent bodies, but whether these were cells or parasites was not determined. On cul- • turing, no bacteria were found which would reproduce the condition. It is be- ex lieved the disease was protozoal. It was controlled, to a certain extent, by Dr. sh Dreyer using a brilliant green bath. fri RED DISCOLORATION OF SALTED FISH sic 'o, Reddening of salted products is due to the growth of bacteria found in sea fn salts and capable of living in saturated salt media, and not infrequently repders St fish unsaleable. To the author's knowledge, no very practical means of control have been offered. of To obtain some idea of the prevalence of the condition in the Maritimes, 1)3 questionnaires were sent to the Fisheries Inspectors. Forty-eight inspectors, out at of a total of fifty-nine, have replied. Twenty-three report that red fish -has se caused some loss in their districts. Of the twenty-five reporting no red, ten al state that no fish is salted in their districts, in several the fish is shipped green fn salted, and one makes the significant remark, "no producers admit losses". The at districts reporting red include Charlotte county, New Brunswick, practically the 9 whole coast of Nova Scotia, and most of Prince Edward Island. Of one hundred of and nineteen producers listed, fifty have had red fish. The number of fishermen 22 salting fish is not known, but it is estimated that 20 to 100 per cent. are troubled CE .57 with red. No definite information was given regarding the actual loss of fish, or the monetary loss, as no records have been kept. Reddening has occurred when Turks island, Torrevieja, Trapani, Malagash, German mined, and Liverpool salts were used. Information regarding the occurrence of red in Canadian salt fish imported into their territories was requested from a number of Canadian Trade Commis- sioners. Their replies contained little real information. Only one had any practical experience with the condition, and his estimate was that 5 to 10 per cent. of the imported fish turned red. However, various fish importers, and men in touch with the industry, inform us that it is a real problem and one causing con- siderable trouble. The first measure of control is a thorough cleaning of the salting establish- ments.' The simplest method seems to be" the use of soap and water, or some alkali as washing soda or weak lye. This, with the use of red-organism-free salt should be effective, if subsequent contamination is guarded against. The method should be tried on a practical scale, as it is difficult to simulate actual Conditions in the laboratory. As, at the present time, sterilization of the salt is costly and hardly- practical, means of preventing growth of the organisms seem to be the simplest means of control. Sodium benzoate, boric acid, and chloride of lime have been added to the salt, and the first two are effective in low concentrations. As considerable labour is involved in mixing, the simpler method of a dip containing the preser- vative was tried. Dips of sodium benzoate, boracic acid, sodium nitrate, potas- sium nitrate, 1 per cent. formaldehyde and water have been used. Benzoate and formaldehyde were the only 'effective agents, benzoate being effective at a con- centration of 3 per cent. Both of these substances are prohibited by the Pure Food Laws for use on fish, but none of the preservatives allowed will control the condition. - The study of the organism is considerably complicated by the necessity of working with practically aturated salt solutions. Attempts to stain the organ- ism have not been successful. The pH range of the organisms lies between 5.5 and 8, and the salt range is from 16 per cent. to saturated, as found by earlier workers.

ERNEST HESS INVESTIGATIONS ON THE CANNING OF LOBSTER Effect of free;ing on canned lobster. Final examination of cans of lobster exposed to freezing temperatures under various conditions (up to 103/ months), showed no further changes from earlier examinations (1 to 5 months). Cans frozen in brine or air at 0°F., andizept in cold storage at 0°F., all showed con- siderable softening of the meat after thawing, as compared with unfrozen canned lobster meat of the same storage period (40°F.). No definite inferiority of meat, frozen and thawed several times, as compared with meat frozen only once and stored at freezing temperature for a long time, cc:Mid be observed. Processing of "re-packed." lobster ca. ns. As in the industry a certain number of cans are always opened for inspection, their disposal is a problem usually solved by re-packing and re-processing theel. The question Of the length and temper- ature of processing necessary to sterilize such cans has been brought up, and several tests have been carried out. A series of sterile lobster cans were opened, allowed to remain open for various lengths of time, re-packed into new cans and fresh pickle added. After closing, the cans were processed at various temper- atures for different lerigths of time. After storage at room temperature, and at 98°F. in an incubator, from 65 to 77 days, none of the cans showed external signs of spoilage. Upon bacteriological examination,' two cans (3 oz.) processed at 240°F. for 15 minutes were found to be non-sterile, as were also two cans pro- cessed in boiling water for one and two hours respectively. Pending examination 58 •

of the remainder of the cans still in storage, no definite minimum processing re- quirements can be given. that wat( "FINROT" IN SALMON FRY ator Strains of pure cultures of bacteria isolated from infected salmon fry (June resu 1931) were used for inoculation experiments .(in collaboration with Dr. M'Gon- thar igle) on salmon fingerlings in February, 1932, using 18 fish and 5 controls. Six of the inoculated fish died within 2 to 5 days, without showing any symptoms of (lest "finrot" ; the others survived many days (i.e. until the experiment was concluded). terni In July, the test was repeated with young salmon and young trout fry. Of 27 inoculated trout fry, 14 died within one week without any definite symptoms of "finrot"; most of the remaining ones succumbed within the second week, as did also—most of the controls. Of 17 salmon fry, 10, died within 3 hours (shock year of handling?); 3 more died within 9 days without symptoms of "finrot". to b • The causative agent of "finrot" had apparently not been isolated, or, if wort, isolated, must have lost its virulence during prolonged culture on artificial media. able DISCOLORATION OF HALIBUT • I lengl Discoloration of the white skin 'Of halibut, which is so evident in halibut the ; caught and landed on the Canadian Pacific coast, has occasionally been observed adde on Atlantic halibut, especially on fish that have been held in ice for some time. Following the work of Harrison, Sadler, and Bedford at the Fisheries Experi- whol mental Station at Prince Rupert, B.C., bacteriological examinations of two dis- dry coloured Atlantic halibut were made, and the same type of organisms found to in a be present that were considered to be responsible for the discoloration by the side' above investigators (Ps. fluorescens, as well as a number of chromogenic types, and produdng yellowish pigments). Inoculations of the skin of fresh halibut with on tl such cultures produced typical discoloration. No investigations as to the origin cessi of the organisms were made. Rapid landing of_halibut catches and quick dis will posai seem most essential, and are perhaps more easily possible, at the Atlantic were coast, where most, if not all, halibut are marketed fresh. not ' • to Ix meal Representative strains bacteria (genera Pseudomonas, Flavobacter-ium, of salt Achromobacter) from fish slime have been chosen for a series of tests regarding ; the effects of low temperatures on their growth and their activity. Their cul- in th tural reactions were tested at the following temperatures: +20°, +5°, 0°, —3°, meal —6°, —10°, and —16°C. during period 120 days. The results an incubation of of tl indicate that on the one hand the test organisms vary in general in their sensi- • tivity to low temperatures, while on the other hand, different cultural reactions This are affected very differently by low temperatures, being the the .1 e.g. indol formation vein: most sensitive of the tests made, while nitrate reduction was the least sensitive one. With the exception of indol formation all reactions took place at a temper- throi . ature as low as —3°C., growth on nutrient agar being observed even at —6°C. brow meat The question of adaptation to low temperatures was studied by subculturing strains of the test-organisms at respectively, 3 to +20°, +5°,0°, and —3°C. for 4 W. VA months, when the cultural reactions again were tested at the four temper- tures for each respective temperature strain. Only the Pseudomonas strain, adapted to —5° and 0°C., showed adaptation features. Growth curves for the Flavobacterium strain have been established for the uncle --. different temperatures; they show an increasing "lag" period with decreasing tl:e temperature, but also more rapid exhaustion at the higher temperatures, ex- Gern • hibiting the Tammann principle very clearly. whet. In morphological studies of cultures on agar slants and in broth, both as bi to regards temperature and length of time of incubation, definite variation in size, indu shape, and staining qualities has been observed in all cases, but no definite - sequence has been arrived at, nor any definite correlation of these variations with with time and temperature of incubation. tein : 59

From studies on the effects of freezing on bacterial cultures, it is apparent that the medium in which the bacteria are suspended is of prime importance, sea- water providing a decided protective action, as compared with ordinary labor- atory media. Regarding the influence of the rate of freezing and thawing, the results seem to indicate that rapid freezing and slow thawing are more destructive than the opposite processes. • Prolonged exposure of cultures to freezhig temperatures shows an increasing destruction of bacteria both with increase in time and with decrease in storage tempetature ( —6°, —10°, —16°C.).

THE CANNING OF NOVA SCOTIAN TUNA . Low prices and frequent glutting of the market for fresh tuna during the } ear, opened up the question of the possibility of canning the Nova Scotian tuna, to bring better returns to the fishermen, and increased employment to cannery workers. A tuna which had been frozen in cold storage for about two weeks was avail- able for experiments. Various methods were tried, especially regarding the length of steaming of the fresh fish (to remove the fish oil), length of cooling of the steamed meat, amount of meat to be packed, amount of salt and oil to be added to each can, and the time and temperature of processing of the cans. It was found best to steam the fish in large pieces (15 to 20 lb.) rather than hole, to reduce the time of steaming to 3 to 4 hours, as prolonged steaming will dry out the meat too much. The steamed meat was allowed to cool overnight in a cool room, when it was firm and easy to handle. As the meat shrinks con- s:derably in the preliminary steaming, depending mainly on the size of the piece and the kind of meat, i.e. the location of the cut from the fish, and secondarily, on the length of steaming, the meat will shrink very little in the can during pro- cessing, if at all. A slight gain of net weight may even be observed, as the meat will absorb some of the oil from the can. So-called "half-pound" lobster tins m ere used for packing the meat, holding VA oz. of tuna meat. The addition of not more than Yt oz. of dry salt and 1 oz. of cottonseed oil (or olive oil) was found to be most suitable. For commercial purposes, the use of a tin holding 6 oz. of meat would be more advisable, with corresponding reductions in the amounts of salt and oil added to the can, i.e. cans of the same size as the California pack sold in this market. Apart from flavour, the main problem is that of the appearance of the canned meat, the arrangement of the pieces of meat in the can, and, esPecially, the colour of the meat: This should be as light as possible, of a pinlcish-creamy shade. This can only be obtained if proper attention is paid to the complete bleeding of the fish before they are steamed. Not .only should the blood from the larger veins . along the backbone be drained, but from all the smaller blood vessels throughout the carcass, otherwise the canned meat will be of a dark greyish- brown appearance with reddish-brown spots of clotted blood throughout the meat. t

W. W. JOHNSTON FISII MUSCLE PLASTICS The first protein plastic materials' were manufactured about the year 1900 ulder a patent held by Krische and Spitteler. Less than 30 years later (1925) de casein plastic industry consumed approximately 3,000 tons of casein in - Germany alone. The highest price recorded for casein was obtained in 1919, when it sold in New York for 63 cents per pound; an average price would seem to be about 20 cents per pound, but with the further development of the industry this figure will almost certainly rise. At present large quantities of numerous specie's of fish (dog-fish, skate, etc.) with little commercial value are obtainable. In addition large amounts of pro- tein matter in the form of fish scrap which are now turned into fish meal, and for •

which the present market is limited, are available. At present, this fish scrap in the form of fish meal is retailed at from two to three cents a pound. A priori there would seem to be no reason therefore why casein could not be largely re- placed by the cheaper and more readilycibtainable proteins of fish muscle. Hence if some means could be devised for converting the fish trimmings and protein of non-commercial fish into a hardened plastic material similar to galalith, an im- portant outlet for the supplies of fish protein now available at_ very low prices _ would be provided. In an investigation into the feasibility of thus utilizing fish protein for the manufacture of protein plastics, only preliminary experiments have as yet been completed. However, treatment of dried fish muscle in a manner similar to that _ used in the manufacture of casein plastics yielded a -product which, while some- what inferior to the latter, has shown signs of great promise. The greatest diffi- culty met with in this Work lies in overcoming the tendency to brittleness of the finished muscle cake, which may possibly be accomplished by treatment of the raw material prior to plastification by some chemical agent, or by its incorpor- ation into the plastified product.

THE NITROGENOUS EXTRACTIVES FROM FISII MUSCLE Under the term nitrogenous extractive is classed a numbér of non-protein nitrogen constituents which occur to a small per cent. in tissue, and are extracted by water, alcohol, or ether. Among other substances, this group contains ammonia methylamine, creatine and creatinine, urea and several purine bases including xanthine hypoxanthine, and uric acid. It is a matter of common knowledge that if muscle is boiled in water the greatest portion of the flavour of fish or meat is extracted; it would appear likely, therefore, that the group of substances known as the non-protein nitrogen extrac- tives were intimately concerned with the characteristic flavour of fish. Hence, since the flavour of musde largely determines its marketability, knowledge of thc , factors concerned is highly desirable. When the nitrogen content of fish muscle is multiplied by what may be termed the "protein factor", and the moisture, fat, and ash content added, the total in certain species of fish adds to less than, in other species to greater than, 100 per cent. This discrepancy must arise from the fact that different species of fish contain different amounts of non-protein nitrogen and herice the "protein • factor" must vary from one species to another. Since only the protein and fat of fish muscle have any feeding value, it is imperative that one should know the quantity of non-protein nitrogen and hence the correct "protein factor" for the muscle of each species, in order to properly appraise and compare the biological values of different fish products. - In a study of the total non-protein nitrogen present in fish muscle, the pre- liminary investigation consisted of a comparison of the quantity of ammonia, urea, creatinine and uric acid pres-ent in different varieties of commercial fish. The average values found on analysis of about six fish of each species 3.vere as follows. •-■ . Ammonia Urea Creatmine Uric acid Species mmg/g. mnig/g. mmg/g. mmg/g. Cod .169 .180 4.80 .0074 Haddock ' .154 r , .036 5.18 .0048 Hake .130 .083 3.27 .0031 Mackerel .203 .169 4.44 .0092 Herring .198 :133 5.40 • .0108 , — In all species examined the quàntity of ammonia per gram of muscle was of the same order of magnitude; on the other hand, the -quantity of °thee extrac- .. 61 tives studied showed wide variation from one species to the next. There ap- peared - to be no correlation between the quantity of any extractive present and the size or sex of the fish, nor was any relationship observed between different species in the same family. A. H. LEM •TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS IN REFRIGERATOR CARS A beginning was made on the investigation of the conditions under which frozen fish are transported by the railways. An attempt was made to utilize a. Cambridge, two pen, seven day recording thermometer, spécially- suspended by springs, and with a heavy weight attached to increase the inertia. After pre- liminary trial of the instrument, it was placed in a refrigerator car which was cooled with ice and salt bunkers. One bulb of the thermometer was placed on top of the boxes of frozen fish, and one on the car floor. The car was shipped from Halifax on September 7, and reached Fort William on September 14, when the thermograph was removed. Examination of the record showed that the suspension of the thermograph had not been adequate to prevent car jolting from moving, the pen. Fortunately, periods when the car was not moving were frequent enough to give a fairly clear picture of the tem- perature conditions in the car. The temperature at the top of the load varied from 18 to 28°F., while that at the bottom of the car was from 13 to 18°F. On the return of the thermograph, improvements were made in the suspen- sion system, and trials between Halifax and Truro on freight trains indicated that much better records could be obtained, particularly when the pen arms were at right angles to the long axis of the freight car. - The preliminary records obtained previous to the onset of cool weather show that the temperature conditions under which shipments of frozen fish are made in Canada leave much to be desired. While the temperature was not high • enough to permit defrosting to occur, it was considerably higher in the upper portion of the car than would be considered good. Probably 15 to 20°F. should be the upper limit for high quality frozen fish. Lower would be better. A. S. MCFARLANE FACTORS INFLUENCING THE PRODUCTION OF SHEEN IN SMOKED FISII The production of a good sheen on the surface of smoked fish adds greatly to its appearance, and thus to its salability. This necessitates experiments to determine how best to produce a good sheen. •Brining fillets in a brine with a temperature of between 45° and 50°F. showed a distinct improvement in the sheen produced over brining fillets in a brine with a temperature betveeen 60° and 65°F, but the brining of fillets for times varying from 10 to 30 minutes in salinities varying from 60 to 90 per cent. showed little, if any, apparent difference in the sheen produced in market cod fillets. TIIE SMOKING OF GROUND FISH AFTER DRYING WITH CONDITIONED AIR The drying of fish with heated conditioned air necessitates the production of smoke outside of the smoke-house, and its subsequent injection and distri- bution. The production should not be dependent on 'weather conditions, so that such conditions as good and poor senoking days will not exist. The smoke should be such that it will impart to the fish the characteristic smoke colour and flavour. The results indicate that fish can be smoked successfully with smoke from a smoke producer mechanically fed and stirred, and placed outside of the smoke- house. Results also indicate that an ordinary smoking fire placed in a hood and the smoke drawn from the hood and forced into the house will give satisfactory results. ' The following are some of the days in which smoking was carried on, and show the date, the air temperature wet bulb and dry bulb, and the time necessary to impart to the fish the necessary smoke flavour.

62

Outside air Hours necessary Date to impart smoke Kind of fish 1932 _ W.B. D.B. flavour • to fish -

July 29 67 72 53/ - (Market cod fillets) August 12 62.5 64.6 6 41 id August 24 59 71 63/i October 20 58 68 6

W. \V. STEWART THE REMOVAL OF TARS FROM WOOD SMOKE In using wood smoke- to produce a uniform smoked fish, it may be desirable to remove tars from the smoke for two reasons. The first reason is that the ducts . carrying thé smoke from the producer become foul with these tars, which drip from the pipes: causing a nuisance about the plant. Also the smoke-house becomes extremely dirty from these tars, which in turn may be the cause of a spotted and unattractive food product. The second reason is that these tarry constituents in smoke may be objectionable to the flavour and the colour of the smoked fish. The first objection is quite evident to those who have been associated with the production of wood smoke. It will be only possible to determine to what d extent the tarry matters affect the product, when suitable methods are developed to cOntrol the amount of these tars present in the smoke which is introduced into the smoke house. - Hardwood sawdust was used to produce the smoke for the laboratory experi- ments. A smoke producer, suitable for this problem, was developed, which was (I assembled from ordinary cast-iron pipe fittings. A qualitative colour test was developed which gave a comparison of the tar content of samples of smoke. This test depended on the colour produced on a piece of linen after drawing a definite volume of smoke through the linen. By this method a difference in the smoke production and operation of the furnace - could be detected. With further study this test may yield a method of control- ling the uniformity of the smoke production. The efficiencies of three tar extractors, based on the design of the. P. and A. d extractor used in the coal gas industry, were compared by means of the colour si test. From this it was found that an extractor consisting of six plates, which- had narrow slots cut in them, was more efficient than one with plates which were perforated with small holes, or had openings in them coveredwith wire gauze. ir It was observed during experiments that the heavy tars which were de- cl posited as a heavy black viscous material, separated out in the smoke duct fi directly attached to the producer. The temperature of this section was between 55 and 65°C. From this observation it seems possible to separate the heavy o tars from the smoke by an air condenser. d a PACIFIC BIOLOGICAL STATION NANAIMO, B.C., 1932 - The personnel of the scientific staff has remained unchanged. Dr. Foerster o has taken on his duties as assistant director, with residence in Nanimo, but con- tinues in charge of the work of the Pacific Salmon Research Station at Cultus lake. Mr. Ricker remains in residence at Cultus lake to carry out and supervise. investigations in progress there. - The following constituted the staff of various s the Station in 1932: 63

Dr. W. A. Clemens, Director. - Dr. R. E. Foerster, Assistant Director and Chief Biologist. Dr. N. M. Carter, Associate Chemist. Dr. J. L. Hart, Assistant Biologist. Dr. A. L. Pilchard, Scientific Assistant in Biology. Mr. C. R. Elsey, Scientific Assistant in Biology. Mr. C. McC. Mottley, Scientific Assistant in Biology. Mr. R. W. Whittaker, Scientific Assistant in Biology. Mr. A. L. Tester, Scientific Assistant in Biology. NIr. J. P. Tully, Scientific Assistant in Chemistry. ' - Mr. W. E. Ricker, -Scientific Assistant in Biology. Dr. D. C. B. Duff, Consulting Pathologist (Department of Bacteriology, University of British Columbia). SEASONAL Mr. D C. G. MacKay, Assistant (Shellfish). Mr. E. C. Black, Assistant (Shellfish). Mr. G. C. Carl, Assistant (Trout). Mr. L. McHugh, Assistant (Salmon).

Fourteen volunteer investigators were provided with accommodation at the Station during the year. The problems of -these researchers have direct or in- direct economic bearings and are in practically all cases linked with the major problems of the Station. Mr. D. Beall (University of British Columbia), Mr. C. Berkeley (Nanaimo), Mrs. E. Berkeley (Nanaimo), Mr. H. Fasmer (Pacific Biological Station), Dr. W. Freudenberg (University of Iowa), Mrs. E. Kuitunen-Ekbaum (University of Manitoba), Mr. S. H. MacFarlane (University of Illinois), Mrs. J. C. Mottley (Pàcific Biological Station), Mr. J. A. Munro (Okanagan Landing), Dr. W. A. Riddell (Regina College), Mr. G. H. Wailes (Vancouver), Prof. R. A..Wardle (University of Manitoba), Dr. F. D. White (University of Manitoba), Mr. G. V. Wilby (University of Toronto).

INVESTIGATIONS - While the program of research has been curtailed this year in certain directions, the main lines of investigation have been carried forward and sub- stantial progress has been made in the various fields. FISH CULTURE The development of principles, MethOds and procedures in the care of fish in all possible stages of the life-history must always occupy a large place in a conservational research program. In the case of certain ocean fishes, general fish cultural methods do not appear applicable at the present time, but in the case of those fish which spend a part or all of their lives in fresh water, there is owortunity for bringing into play various fish cultural measures which, if soundly based, should be of great value. In British Columbia investigations have had to do largely with sockeye salmon, pie salmon and Kamloops trout and have had as their chief objectives: (1) the determination of the relative efficiencies of various so-called "artificial" measures; (2) the determination of the relation of production to catch, whether commercial or angling. This brief statement may serve to indicate the connections among the investigations outlined below which otherwise might appear as isolated and unrelated endeavours. PROPAGATION OF SOCKEY,E SALMON A considerable number of investigations are being carried out at the Pacific Salmon Research Station at Cultus lake by Dr. R. E. Foerster, assisted by Mr. - \V. E. Ricker. The work is reviewed u-nder the following nine headings:

1. 64

1. Relative efficiencies of natural and artificial propagation. There are in the rele province of British Columbia, nine hatcheries devoted in whole or in part to the wei: handling of sockeye salmon eggs, 91,490,000 eggs having been taken in 1931. fish streams The hatchery product is distributed either as fry in the lakes and or as thei "eyed" eggs in the gravel beds of streams tributary to lakes. The present investi- .gre: of these two gation has been designed to determine the relative efficiencies types 193 of artificial propagation as compared with natural propagation. The methods has are applied at Cultus lake in successive years and the efficiency measured by the grai percentage of yearling seaward migrants produced from the number of eggs po5 involved. For example, in the spring of 1932, 788,000 seaward migrants were counted at the screen fence at the outlet of the lake. These were the product of a natural spawning in the fall of 1930 when it was calculated that 24,939,000 eggs abli were deposited on the spawning beds. The production in this test of natural yea propagation is therefore approximately three per cent. This is the sixth experi- con ment of the series in which the three methods, natural spawning, fry planting, pen and eyed-egg iblanting will each be tested four times. The results of the previous tutt five tests were as follows: natural, 1.13 and 1.06 per cent.; fry planting, 3.96 and 2.24 per cent.; egg planting, 1.64 per cent. effic 2. Factors involved in the high mortality of young sockeye in Cultus lake. It tise has been disclosed that a mortality of 90 per cent. or more ocCurs among the cari young sockeye during their period of life in the lake. An attempt is being made the to determine the factors involved by an investigation of the part played by enemy nar fish and by studies of the physico-chemical conditions and the food supply. In f oll connection with the latter, it has been necessary to make a critical study of ark plankton sampling methods. ' inv 3. The return of a. dult sockeye salmon from a known- escapement. For the development of an adequate conservational program with respect to Pacific No. salmon, it is necessary to have information concerning the return from the sea of adult salmon from a known yearling escapement. The return of Cultus lake troz sockeye has been difficult to determine because of the extensive commercial lak fishery. For several years large numbers of yearling migrants were marked by fish ' the removal of various fins but the reports of captures of marked fish in the fishing in areas were not satisfactory. In the spring of 1930, all of the yearling migrants of E from Cultus lake were marked and a special effort was made to obtain complete me: returns in 1932, with gratifying results. The enumeration of the return to Cultus the lake is not complete but it would seem that the completeieturn from the escape- ment of 1930 will be approximately three per cent., of which 70 per cent. will exr represent the capture by fishermen and 30 per cent. the escapement to Cultus • est lake. hyl 4. Transplantation. In order to determine the possibility of establishing cro sockeye runs in depleted areas of the upper Fraser river by the transference of Th eggs and fry from the lower Fraser area, 17,000,000 Cultus lake eyed eggs were ma planted by the Department of Fisheries in the spring of 1929 in Eagle river, a stu tributary to Shuswap lake, approximately 800 miles distant from Cultus lake. In addition, marked fingerlings were liberated in the river in the fall of the same year from the retaining ponds of the Bioloàical Board at Taft. Since Cultus lake fish mature at four years of age for the most part, a return was to be expected in 1932.- A picket fence was constructed in the river ve11 below the planting area Ch and all fish proceeding upstream were counted. While the return of only seven- as teen fish to December 1 and the recapture of only fifteen marked fish in the fishing kn area indicates a failure in the experiment, the possibility 6f some fish returning as as five-year-olds next season should be kept in mind. rur 5. Retention of young sockeye in ponds.' Since it has been found that there • thE is a very heavy mortality among young sockeye in Cultus lake, the possibility A ■ of reducing the ordinary losses by the retention of the young fish in ponds has • f en - been considered. The first experiment was carried out in 1930 by holding the for fish for five- and twelve-month periods. The two lots of ,fish were marked at by to 65

release and the surviving yearling seaward migrants enumerated at the screen weir in the outlet of the lake. A severe epidemic killed off a large number of the fish in the ponds and rather vitiated the results of the experiment. However, there was evidence that retention in the absence of the epidemic would have greatly increased survival. It vas decided to carry out another experiment in 1932 with retention periods of 10, 14, 18, 22 and 50 weeks. Again, an epidemic has interfered. It is evident that in the development of any fish cultural pro- gram,•involving retention of large numbers of sockeye salmon in ponds, the possibility of severe losses through epidemics must not be overlooked. 6. Feeding experiments. Experiments designed to determine the most suit- able rations for young sockeye retained in ponds, have been continued during the } ear. Briefly, the results indicate that of all foods fed singly, beef liver clearly constituted the best food as measured by increase in size of fry and by mortality percentages. However, excellent rations may be prepared with certain substi- tutes provided the beef-liver content is not less than thirty-three per cent. 7. Spawning experiments. In order to obtain data as to the comparative , efficiencies and relative merits of the spawning and fertilization methods prac- ■•■ tised in the salmon hatcheries of British Columbia, an experimental test was carried out at Cultus lake at the request of the Department of Fisheries and with the assistance of a corps of fish cultural officers. The three methods of spawning, namely, expression, expression followed by incision, and full incision were used, followed in each case by the three methods of washing, namely, rinsing, steeping and congealing. In each experimeni, twenty-five ripe female sockeye were used, involving over 100,000 eggs. The total number of eggs used was approximately 1,000,000. The detailed results have been published in Progress Report (Pacific) No. 14. 8. Experimental tests of the safe-carrying capacity of a standard hatchery trough for sockeye salmon eggs and fry. This experiment was carried out at Cultus lake at the request of the Department of Fisheries and with the assistance of the fish cultural staff. Fifteen troughs, nine with and six without riffles, were used in the investigation. Ninety baskets, each containing from three to nine quarts of eggs, were ernployed, and over 3,760,000 eggs were thus involved in the experi- ment. It was found that riffles greatly increased the safe-carrying capacity of the troughs and the maximum capacity for each type was determined. • 9. Hybridization of Pacific salmon. As a result of extensive cross-breeding experiments with Pacific salmon in 1927 and 1928 at Cultus lake, it was definitely established that hybridization was possible among the five species. As the hybrids from several of the original crosses have come to maturity, they have been crossed nmong themselves, with normal wild sockeye and with various hybrids. The'results so far appear to show complete fertility. An extensive collection of material is being accumulated which, in due time, will be subjected to critical study. 01 -

PROPAGATION OF PINK SALMON 1. Natural propagation. • In view of the importance of Massett inlet, Queen Charlotte islands, as a pink salmon p,,roducing area, it seemed desirable to make a study of the life-history of this species and to investigate the production from known escapements to the spawning beds in order that data might be obtained as to what should constitute an adequate escapement for the maintenance of a run at a high level of abundance. Dr. A. L. Pritchard has been in charge of the pink salmon investigations. McClinton creek was chosen for the type study. A counting weir was installed and in the fall of 1930, 32,955 males and 33,196 females were counted as t'hey passed upstream to the spawning beds. In the following spring the 4,855,000 fry went to sea, of which 185,000 were marked by the removal of the adipose fin. In the fall of 1932, 15,600 adults returned to the creek, of which 95 were marked individuals. Fifty records of fish lacking

1. the adipose fins were received from areas from Alaska to Johnstone strait, evidently indicating that wandering to some extent had taken place. 2. Transplantation. In Massett inlet, runs of pink salmon occur only in every other year. In order to determine the possibility of establishing a run in the so-called "off" year, approximately a million eggs were collected at the Tlell river on the east coast of the Queen Charlotte islands and transferred to a tem- porary hatchery. on McClinton creek. Fry to the number of 877,650 were liber- ' ated, of which 124,000 were marked by the removal of the adipose fin. Infor- mation concerning the return will be obtained in 1933.

TROUT PROPAGATION 1. The determination of a fish cultural policy for Kamloops trout. In the • area about the city of Kamloops there is a large number of lakes containing Kamloops trout and constituting a valuable economic resource. These lakes are subject to a heavy fishing drain and fundamental information concerning production is necessary for the development of an adequate fish cultural policy. Paul lake near the city of Kamloops was chosen for study. This body of water contains but one species of fish, namely, the Kamloops trout. There is a single inlet stream to the lake and into this the trout run to spawn. A hatchery is maintained on the upper portion of the stream and a trap is operated in the lower portion whereby fish entering the creek may be captured and stripped. The number of spawning fish and their ages can thus be determined in each y-ear. The number of trout caught by the anglers can be obtained with a reasonable degree of accuracy as well as the ages of the majority of the specimens. Finally, quantitative determinations of the natural food supply can be made. The Fish Cultural Branch has agreed to the liberatiOn of a fixed number of fry over a period of years. All the data necessary for the determination of the relation between productivity and fishing drain are here available, and Air. C.- McC. Aiottley is carrying out the investigation along the three lines given above, namely, (a) a detailed study of the spawning run; (b) an examination of the anglers' catch; (c) a quantitative study of the food supply at regular intervals. 2. The natural food of trout. During the past few years approximately 1,200 trout stomachs have been collected and Mrs. Jean C. Mottley has made the bulk of the examinations. Special attention is being given to the food consumed by tfie trout in Paul lake throughout the year. This investigation is preliminary to one of the nutritional values of various types of natural foods. - Numerous requests have been received by the Department of Fisheries for the removal of so-called "coarse" fish from many lakes. It is realized that the relation of "coarse" fish to trout and salmon is a complex one and in order to obtain preliminary data, an extensive collection of stomachs of squaw-fish, chub, carp and other minnows, suckers, sculpins, etc., is being made, and Airs. Mottley has commenced the examination of the material. - 3. Introduction of brown trout. Early in the year the Department of Fish- eries placed 300,000 brown trout eggs in the hatçhery for the purpose of stocking two streams on Vancouver island. This introduction is intehded as an experiment to determine if this species will remain in the streams " and provide angling during the summer months when native trout are either in the lakes or have gone to sea. The Biological Board was requested to assist in the experiment. Mr. Mottley has made a study of those anatomical characters used in identification of the species and has followed the growth of those retained in ponds. Pond facilities were not available for the retention of all the young fish to a size suitable for marking so that large numbers of fry were liberated in the Cowichan river. Five thousand of the larger fry were marked by the removal of the adipose fin and 60,000 are being retained in ponds until the yearling stage when they will be marked and liberated. Eight thousand fingerlings which had been retained in a pond at Qualicum beach were marked and liberated in the , Little Qualicum river. 67 rait, 4. 'A study of Lost lagoon. In 1929, the anglers of Vancouver city decided to attempt to develop Lost lagoon into a trout pond. This body of water had y in originally been a portion of Vancouver harbour and later a salt-water pond n in through being cut off by a fill. Arrangements were made to turn a supply of Tle11 fresh water into the lagoon. At the request of the angling association, an exam- ination was made of the conditions existing in the lagoon and since then more or ber- less periodic examinations have• been carried out. From October, 1931, to 'for- , lAugust, 1932, Mr. G. C. Carl has made a more intensive study. His report indi- - fates that conditions are not yet suitable for trout although considerable im- provement has taken place. 5. Survey of the Nanaimo river system. The Board of Trade of the city of- the Nanaimo requested the Department of Fisheries to undertake the introduction zing of sockeye salmon into the Nanaimo river system in the attempt to establish a does commercial fishery for this species on the east coast of Vancouver island. Coupled iing with this was a request for a biological survey of the river system for the purpose . f icy. of developing a fish cultural policy. Mr. Mottley, assisted by Mr. Carl, carried ater out a brief preliminary survey during August. The Nanaimo river is over thirty ngle miles in length and has four lakes in the system. Eximinations showed the y is existence of extensive and suitable spawning areas for sockeye salmon. The wer Lod supply as judged by the plankton appeared to be limited in amount. Koka- e. The nees (landlocked sockeye) were found to bs... present in the lakes. As far as sock- ear. eye salmon are concerned, three factors appear to be involved : (1) food supply; ible (2) the possibility of the introduced sockeye becoming landlocked; (3) the possibility of non-return from the sea. The first factor requires a further ;Ish study of the conditions in the lakes in order to determine to some extent the pos- sible productive capacity of the system. The other two points can only be een determined by experimental introductions. y is 6. The trout and other game fishes of British Columbia.. At the commencement z) a of the investigation of the trout of British Columbia, the determination of the :ch; status of the various species, varieties and races of trout occurring in the province was considered of fundamental importance. Professor J. W. Dymond undertook 200 this phase and prepared a popular account which has been issued during this year ■ulk in booklet form by the Department of Fisheries.' The booklet consists of fifty- . by one pages and contains seven excellent coloured plates prepared from paintings to by Mr. S. Logier of the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology. Mr. Mottley has carried out a critical study of the various characters gener- for ally used for distinguishing species, sub-species and races. the to PATIIOLOGY ub, • :ley 1. Toxicity of fish meals to salmon fry. In 1930, a heavy mortality occurred among sockeye fry in retaining ponds at Cultus lake. In the following year, it a toxic ish- was shown that halibut meal kept under certain conditions produced material but it was considered that effective concentrations were not possible in the was continued by Dr. D. C. B. I is the retaining ponds. In 1932, the investigation Duff as to the effect of the oil content of certain diet combinations. Refined and trns results indicate that increasing - n oxidized herring and halibut oils were used. The t in the oil content of a herring mal ration produceS a mortality much heavier than that due to whole herring meal alone but that such a mortality is reduced to the :ers in the diet. led level of the control when fifty ber cent. liver is incorporated fish 2. Furunculosis. Dr. Duff has continued his studies of furunculosis with the special reference to the conditions under which the bacillus thrives. He dis- val covered that numerous deaths among hybrid salmon in a retaining pond at Cultus lake were due to furunculosis. Two areas of infection in British Columbia age other lad have therefore been discoveçed, one in thé Elk river, near Fernie, and the the at Cultus lake. Eggs of speckled and brown trout were examined to determine if they carried the bacillus but negative results were obtained. 68

- 3. Some marine bacteria. A number of years ago Dr. H. C. Williamson discovered a herring spawning bed in Barkley sound on which practically all of the eggs were dead. A sample was fonvarded to the Department of Bacteriology of the University of British Columbia, where Miss Helen D. Mathews undertook the cultivation of the flora associated with the eggs. A number of new species and many new varieties have been obtained in the cultures and an account of these has been prepared for publication. The results of experiments in 1929 and

.44 • 1930 to determine the possibility of infecting freshly-spawned herring eggs from i ' Departure bay were not conclusive and it has not been established that any on the bacteria were responsible for the death of the spawn in the first instance.

OCEAN FISHERIgS A study of an ocean fishery must of necessity be statistical in character as well as biological. A measure of the abundance of the stock from year to year is one of the essential requirements and since enumeration is impossible, resort must be had to measures of relative abundance. In a set line fishery, where a definite number of hooks is used on definite banks, the catch per given number of hooks provides a very accurate measure, if adequate and accurate data are critically scrutinized and proper statistical procedures applied. In a gill net fishery, the length or area of gill net, or in a hand line or troll fishery, the number of hooks may be used as the "yard-stick". In the case of the pilchard and herring fisheries of the Pacific coast, the catch per seine boat per day is being used with apparently reasonably satisfactory results. - The characteristics of the stock and the nature of any changes or fluctuations are determined by the study of random samplings of the commercial catch. The sampling must be statistically adequate and all numerical data subjected to statistical analyses. In this way a rigid set of measures is applied and the results 1-7 from year to year are readily comparable. Lastly, but not of least importance, the biology of the species must be thor- oughly studied, not only for the value of the information in itself in relation to the problem of conservation but to provide a basis for the interpretation of the statistical data.

PILCHARD INVESTIGATIONS . 1. Statistical analyses. The study of the pilchard fishery on the west coast of Vancouver island has been continued by Dr. J. L. Hart, assisted by Mr^. W. R. - Whittaker. Calculations have been made of the catch per boat per day as in other years to afford an indication of the abundance of the stock in 1932 as corn- pared with the previous six years. The catches at Nootka and Ecoole were again sampled throughout the fishing season and the usual statistical analyses made. Mr. Whittaker has continued his investigation of the use of the otoliths for the determination of age. , 2. Biological. In the early. part of the season, Dr. Hart made two trips - off the coast in a search for pilchard eggs but none were dikovered. It is hoped that a more extensive search may be made next year. Mr. Whittaker has com- pleted an anatomical study of the pilchard, bringing to light a number of inter- esting features which have bearings on the matter of relationships. 3. Pilchard plant effluent. Dr. Hart, with the assistance of Mr. FL B. Marshall and Mr. D. Beall, has brought to conclusion the investigation of the alleged pollution of herring spawning areas by the effluents of pilchard reduction pla,nts. The results show that the effluent material is soon dissipated and that there is no evidence that herring spawning.grounds are contaminated. Mr.. Beall has continued his chemical analyses of the pilchard plant effluent in order to determine the nature of the proteins in the waste effluent. • 69 rnson HERRING INVESTIGATIONS all of 1. Statistical analyses. Mr. A. L. Tester has continued the statistical )logy analyses of random samplings of the commercial catches of herring in various •took localities on the east and west coast of Vancouver island and in the Prince Rupert ecies district. Length and age compositions of the catches have been determined and at of the existence of local populations indicated. Through the kindness of Dr. C. and MacLean Fraser, scale samples and length measurements of samples of herring from • for about 12 years extending back to the year 1917 have been made available ty of fln- study. ,• A picture of the changes which have occuq•ed in the stock over a e. conSïderable period of time is being developed. 2. Population studies among herring. By a study of the average number of vertebrae of young herring in various localities, Dr. Hart has demonstrated that definite differences exist among the herring produced in the various regions. er as This information provides fundamental data for the identification of these groups year in the commercial catch in later years and thereby the extent of migration and esort mixture. ere a 3. An investigation of the changes in chemical composition of herring in relation nber to curing. Dr. Hart and Mr. D. Beall have commenced an investigation of the L are changes in chemical composition of herring taken in various localities and at net different times during the seasons, with particular attention to the fat content nber in its relation to the salting and reducing of herring. and ■eing SOCKEYE SALMON In each year, the Provincial Fisheries Department obtains random samplings :ions of the sockeye salmon runs to the Fraser, Skeena and Nass rivers and to Rivers The inlet, in respect to scales, lengths, weights and sexes. The material for 1931 was d to studied by Drs. W. A. and L. S. Clemens. sults LING COD hor- Mr. Wilby gave special study to the spawning and early life history of the n to ling cod. Spawning takes place from late December to early March .in the the Nanaimo area. The eggs are deposited in masses around rocky reefs and shores below low-tide level, and the male remains on g-uard. As many as 500,000 eggs may be deposited by a large female. The eggs hatch in about three weeks. Growth is rapid and a length of 10 cm. is attained in three months, and of 20 cm. by the end of the first summer. Expeditions on a trawler provided information oast concerning distribution and food. '. R. L in • SALMON TAGGIi■IG >0111- No tagging of salmon was carried out in 1932 but a number of returns from pin the tagging of spring salmon in previous years was received. Dr. Pritchard has ade. completed the final reports and is bringing to completion the studies of scales the taken from'tagged fish. rips FOOD OF SEA-FOWL . - ■ped The study of the food and feeding habits of .merganser ducks has been con- om- tinued by Mr. J. A. Munro and Dr. Clemens and arrangements have been made ter- for the study of the food of the loon. Mr. Munro has continued his investigation of the foods of various sea-fowl in relation to the fisheries. B. the FOOD OF TIIE FUR SEAL tion In order to obtain preliminary information as to the nature of the food of :hat the fur seal durineits northward migration along the west coast of Vancouver Mr., island, twenty-five stomachs were obtained by the Department of Fisheries and -der forwarded to the Station where Dr. Clemens -and Mr. _Wilby examined _the material. 70

PARASITES OF FISH 1. Cestodes. Dr. R. A. Wardle continued his investigations of the cestodes of Pacific fish with special reference to the physiological conditions under which certain species exist in the alimentary tracts of the fishes. 2. Nematodes. Mrs. E. Kuitunen-Ekbaum made a, general survey of the nematode fauna of Pacific fish and discovered a new genus and species of dracun- culoid nematode in the sockeye salmon. A study was made of the life-history of the blood-red nematode, Philometra, infecting the common flounder. - 3. Trematodes. Mr. S. H. MacFarlane carried out a survey of the trematode fauna of Pacific fish and has apparently found a rich field. Preliminary identi- fication indicates that twelve familes are represented in the material obtained from seventeen species of fish. A study was commenced of the unique cestodarian parasite, Gyrocotyle urna, occurring in the rat fish.

SHELLFISH In this field, oyster problems have received major attention partly because of the possibilities of expansion of the industry through the improvement and development of cultural methods based upon detailed biological data. Thrce species are now under cultivation in the waters of British Columbia, namely, the small, though well-flavoured native (Olympic), which serves the "cocktail" demand; the introduced Eastern oyster (Bluepoint), which serves the half-shell trade; and the introduced Japanese oyster (Pacific), which is served in soups and to some extent on the half-shell. It has been necessary to study in detail the life-histories of all three species, determining particularly the optimum conditions for spawning, spatting and growth. Cultural methods have been investigated, Such as spat collection, cultching, dyking, etc.

OYSTER INVESTIGATIONS Mi. C. R. Elsey, assisted by Mr. E. C. Black, continued the studies during 1932. Particular attention was given to the breeding of the Japanese oyster in Ladysmith harbour and the failure of the spatting of the Eastern oyster in the Nicomekl river at Boundary bay. In the first case, an excellent spawning and spatting occurred during the season, apparently largely as a result of certain combinations of hydrographical and climatological conditions. Possibly the now large population of mature oysters, totalling nearly five million, was a factor. In the case of the Eastern oyster, while there was an extensive spawning, there was a complete absence of set. It is evident that an annual crop of spat cannot be relied upon. An important series of experiments was commenced to determine more exactly the optimum conditions of temperature, salinity and hydrogen-ion con- centration for the spawning of the Japanese oyster. These are continuations of various preliminary experiments carried out during the past six years in which it was found that spawning might be induced by the introduction of eggs or sperms, - by temperature changes, etc. It was also found that the Japanese oyster could be crossed with the native and eastern oysters but up to the present time it has been impossible to induce the hybrid larvae to set. The recent introduction of the Japanese oyster to a bed at «Pender harbour has been followed closely. Growth there has been good and excellent meats produced. Experimental plantings in Nanoose and Departure bays have shown satisfactory results. , With the native oyster, special attention has been given to the use of efficient methods in the collection of spat and to studies of growth. The "pests", im the beds at Boundary bay have been studied and some determination made of the extent of their injury. 71

CRAB INVESTIGATIONS odes Mi-. D. C. G. MacKay carried out extensive studies of the growth and hich moulting of the commercial crab which in some degree occupies a place in the market on the Pacific'coast that the lobster occupies in the market of the Atlantic. the Over three thousand crabs and eight thousand exo-skeletons have been measured :un- and the moulting of nearly three hundred crabs in captivity has been studied. tory Observations have also been made on the relation of moulting to mating. A • preliminary experiment was carried out to determine if baited traps are more tode efficient in catch than unbaited. fltj- Miss J. F. L. Hart has continued her studies of the early life-histories of Med various species of crabs.

RAZOR CLAM ma, • Dr. A. L. Pritchard made an examination of razor clams collected period- ically by Fishery Inspector E. S. Richardson from the extensive clam beach on the north shore of the Queen Charlotte islands in order to obtain further infor- mation concerning spawning and general condition of the clams. Spawning tuse commenced late in May in 1932 and as far as could be determined, all individuals and ..qver three inches in length were in spawning condition. The commencement of iree spawning was evidently at least a the month earlier than in 1928. ail" hell THE BREEDING PERIOD OF TnE PILE-BORER tips It has been known that the breeding period of the pile-borer, Bankia setacea, the varies in the regions along the coast. It is obviously of importance to determine ons these periods in various areas, particularly in its bearing upon the case of boats. ted, Mr. Elsey and Mr. Black have carried forveard the investigation by the distri- bution of wooden blocks. Temperature and salinity records have been obtained in the various localities and an attempt is being made to correlate the breeding with the physico-chemical conditions. •ng r in the OCEANOGRAPHY Ind The aim of the oceanographical program has been to determine the airi physico-chemical conditions of our coastal waters and the relation of these to the Low growth and productivity of the organisms of these waters. These conditions not In only determine the character and quantity of the life but their changes and vas fluctuations from season to season and year to year cause corresponding modifi be and cycles in the biological conditions. For example, a summer season-cations • of low ternperature may cause repression of spawning among clams and oysters. ore Not only will this result in an economic loss directly bat the absence of the larvae D11- from the water reduces the food supply of all the organisms which feed on minute of plants and'animals. Again, it is generally known that the spawning and survival it of herring- are good in certain years and poor in others. These differences are in ns, large part traceable. to the differences in physico-chemical conditions in the iId various years. It is important, therefore, to _have extensive information con- las cerning the oceanographical t onditions along the coast and a continuous record of the conditioes. The fishery biologist must then interpret the effects of the mar physico-chemical conditions on the abundance and character of the stock as Its distinct from the effects of the commercial fishery. Arn In studies of general productivity of various areas, the quantity of micro- scopic plants and animals (plankton) in a unit volume of water is used as a com- Lnt parative measure> he Up to the present time, the oceanographical investigations have been largely he confined to the strait of Georgia but there is urgent need for the collection of data along the whole coast-line of British Columbia. 72

PHYSICO-CHEMICAL CONDITIONS 1. Strait of Georgia. As a result of the investigations of the past several years, it was evident that in order to arrive at a reasonably complete interpreta- tion of conditions it was necessary to secure three comprehensive series of obser- vations, one early in the spring, one in summer when the Fraser river was in flood, and one in late fall. In 1932, three circuits of the strait have been made. Four vertical series of samplings have been taken at each of sixteen "key" stations on each voyage. The data are now being analyzed by Dr. N. M. Carter and Mr. J. P. Tully. 2. Fiords. The investigation of the fiords so characteristic of the coast of British Columbia has been advanced by Dr. Carter by an extension of observa- tions to Jervis and - Toba inlets. Depths of over two thousand feet have been obtained and the physico-chemical conditions studied. A comprehensive report ' describing the origin and characteristics of the fiords of the southern portion of the British Columbia mainland coast is almost complete. 3. 'Analysis of sea-water temperatures. Records of surface water tempera- tures for Departure bay and the strait of Juan de Fuca are available over periods of seventeen and twelve years respectively. Dr. Carter has undertaken to , analyze this data. A seven-day moving average has been computed and plotted for each day of_the available records and the results have shown certain definite trends as, for example, that the annual summer temperature in the strait of Juan de Fuca has increased by several degrees centigrade since 1921, attaining decided maxima in the summers of 1926 and 1931. _ 4. Nitrates. Because of the exceptionally high concentrations of dissolved • nitrates and phosphates in the strait of Georgia, an investigation of the appli- _ cability of the 'standard methods of determining these constituents became , necessary. The study has been carried out by Dr. W. A. Riddell, and as a result certain modifications of methods have been adopted. 5. Methods. As the oceanographical investigations ha-ve proceeded, many improvements in apparatus and methods have been developed by Dr. Carter and Mr. Tully, who have now , prepared an account of these for publication in - the hope that other investigators may find them of value..

PLANKTON 1. Quantitative investigation of the phytoplankton of the strait of Georgia. The relation of the physico-chemical conditions to the general productivity of the strait of Georgia is being investigated by a 'quantitative determination of the phytoplankton. Vertical series of water samples for the determination of the phytoplankton content have been taken at each station and at the same depths as the samples of water for chemical analyses. The number of phytoplanktonts have been counted in a certain part of each sample and calculations made on the basis of a litre of sea-water. The work of correlating the quantity and distri- bution of the various phytoplanktonts with the oceanographical data is being carried out by Mr. H. Fasmer. 2. Life-histories of copepods. While Miss M. H. Campbell has not been at the Station during the year, she has continued her study of the copepods of the strait of Georgia at the University of Toronto and has completed an . extensive report.

THE ANALYSES AND FOOD VALUES OF BRITISH COLUMBIAN FISIIES The investigations in this field have been considered as a logical extension of the oceanographical program. In the latter, determinations are made of the constituents of the sea-water, such as phosphates, silicates, nitrates which provide the chemical elements that ultimately go to make up the living b6dies of the plants and animais of the ocean. Man obtains a considerable portion of . his food from the sea (particularly in the form of fish) and thus eventually some 73

of the chemical constituents of the ocean water become a part of his body sub- stance and provide materials for growth and for development of energy. There is thus a connection between the chemical composition of the ocean water and the well-being of man.

CANNED SOCKEYE AND PINK SALMON This study has been carried out by Dr. Carter as part of a program . arranged with the Fisheries Experimental Station. It was desired to know "something of the comparative food values of sockeye and pink salmon, canned at intervals during the season. Four samples of sockeye Were chosen repre- senting early, medium, late and river runs and three of pinks on a similar basis. Determinations of protein, oil and ash have been made and calorific values computed. LING COD Dr. F. D. White determined the average percentage amounts of protein found in the flesh and skin of fresh ling cod taken during the summer and cal- culated the calorific values. The amount of fat was found to be negligible. The ling cod has becxxne a very important fresh market fish, there having been almost .50,000 pounds marketed in 1929 with a value of 383,000. CANNED PILCHARDS It has been generally recognized that the fat content of pilchards taken early in the season is much lower than of those taken late in the season. Dr. White determined the percentage composition with respect to protein, fat, water and ash of the canned product of these two classes and calculated the food values. A PRELIMINARY STUDY OF THE FOOD VALUE OF THREE SPECIES OF OYSTERS Dr. W. Freudenberg carried out comparative chemical analyses of the three species of oysters occurring in the waters of British Columbia. Special interest centred in the glycogen content, particularly as related to "fattening" and spawning. The investigation is now being continued by Dr. Carter and Mr. Tully in order to determine the extent of the variation of the chemical constit- uents throughout the year.

THE PHYSICAL PROCESSES INVOLVED IN THE SALTING OF HERRING THE SALTING OF ROUND HERRING For the purpose of providing some very definite information for the use of the Fishery Inspectors of British Columbia, Dr. Carter carried out two series of experiments. The first determined the changes in weights of herring over a period of eleven days in various strengths of pickle. The results have been made available int Progress Report No. 13. The second experiment was designed to determine the separate effects of exosmosis and inward diffusion. A complete account of the investigation will be published in the near future.

THE PRESERVATION OF FISH NETS PREPARATION or A BULLETIN, ON FISH NET PRESERVATION A great many investigations of the problem of the preservation of fish nets have been carried out in many countries of the world. It seemed advisable for the benefit of the industry of the coast and as a preliminary step in any inves- tigative program that might be undertaken, that the literature of the subject be synopsized. This latter work has been done by Dr. Carter and some one hundred and forty-five references have been reviewed. The information will form the basis of a bulletin which will be prepared in association with the Fisheries Experimenial Station.

." 74

FAUNISTIC It is recognized that the identification of the plants and animals of our coastal waters and the thorough study of their life-histories must constitute one of the foundations for all phases of biological investigation. The recognition of the various species of fish, clams, crabs, etc., is essential to the successful carrying out of investigations in fishery biology and not only of the adult stages but of all the immature forms. Furthermore, when questions of food, food supply, pro- ductivity of areas are taken into consideration, it is evident that the identification of species in all groups from the microscopic to the largest is necessary. From the establishment of the Station twenty-five years ago up to the present time, a great deal of attention has been given to the systematic study of the fauna which is rich and varied. Specialists in various groups have described and classified the species so that there is now available an extensive body of information. It is planned to bring together this information, with descriptions, illustrations and • tkeys', in the form of a series of publications to be known as "The Canadian Pacific Faunal and Floral Series". The progress in this.field has been as follows:

PROTOZOA Mr. G. H. Wailes has examined various fresh-water and marine collections and has prepared an illustrated systematic account of the marine Protozoa of the Canadian Pacific coast.

POLYCHAETA Mr. and Airs. C. Berkeley have continued their studies of the Polychaeta of the coast and during the year published twa papers containing descriptions of new species and new records. Additional material has c-ome to hand for study from Puget sound and from a number of deep dredgings in the fiords opening off from the strait of Georgia.

AMPHIPODA . A rather large collection of Amphipoda has been collected largely by Mr. Wailes and forwarded to -Mr. Charles Shoemaker, who has kindly undertaken to • work over the material. Some of the commoner , forms have already been re- ported upon and a list published in Vancouver Art and Museum Notes. The remainder of the material, which contains several species, will be studied as time permits.

MOLLUSCA - - • Mrs. I. S. Oldroyd kindly identified a small collection of Mollusca from the Nanaimo area and there appear to be four new records for British Columbia waters among the material. FISH Professor J. R. Dymond has con tinued the preparation of check lists of the fresh-water and marine fish of British Columbia. Dr. Clemens and Mr. Wilby have commenced an illustrated account of the marine fish of the Canadian Pacific. coast.

GENERAL CHECK LIST , The need has been felt for some time on the part of all the investigators at the Station, of a reference check list of the fauna and flora of the Canadian Pacific coast. Dr. Clemens, with the assistance of a number of workers, has now com- pleted such a list, which, while possibly incomplete in some respects, will serve as a basis to which additions may be made as other records come to light. 75

EDUCATIONAL - ür COURSE OF INSTRUCTION le TO FISHERY INSPECTORS of From February 15 to 27, 1932, a course of instruction was given to twenty- tg two coastal fishery inspectors of British Columbia at the Pacific Biological L11 Station. The three district supervisors of fisheries were in attendance also. The )-- course was arranged and carried out jointly as between the two coast Stations. n1 * t Instruction was given in elementary chemistry, physics and biology, the salting of herring, canning, bacteriology in relation to the preparation of fishery pro- a ducts and the identification of fish. The instructors were Dr. W. A. Clemens, h Mr. O. F. Denstedt, Dr. N. M. Carter, Dr. D. C. B. Duff, and various members le of the staff gave special lectures. After the conclusion of the session at Nanaimo, is visits were made to the factory of the American Can Company and the plant and d research laboratory of the Canadian Fishing Company in Vancouver.

COURSE OF INSTRUCTION FOR IIATCHERY OFFICERS From July 4 to 16, 1932, a field course of instruction was given to seventeen hatchery assistants of British Columbia at Sorrento on Shuswap lake. The course was practically identical with that given to the superintendents of hatch- -.eries in the previous summer. The subjects of instruction were mapping, ele- mentary physics, chemistry and biology, meteorology, limnobiology, hydro- graphy, vegetation, plankton, invertebrates of lake bottom, and fish. There -were informal lectures and discussions in the evenings. The instructors were Dr. W. A. Clemens, Dr. R. E. Foerster and Dr. N. M. Carter.

3IUSEUM AND EXHIBITS The Station museum has continued to attract a large number of visitors. A special exhibit of shellfish was arranged for convention of business women held in Vancouver.

LECTURES Members of the staff have given lectures before various organizations in the province.

PUBLICATIONS The series of quarterly progress reports was issued during the year under the editorship of Mr. D. B. Finn and Mr. H. N. Brocklesby of the Fisheries Experimental Station. Nine reports on the progress of various investigations have appeared. A number of articles have been contributed to fishery journals and newspapers. The following publications, based in whole or in part on work carried out at this Station, have appeared during the year. Berkeley, 1. and C. Berkeley. On a collection of littoral Polychaeta from the west coast of Vancouver island. Contr. 7 (24). Some Capitellidae (Polychaeta) from the N.E. Pacific with a descrip- tion of a new genus. , Proc. Zool. Soc. London, part 3, September. Carter, N. M. The oceanography of the fiords of southern British Columbia. Prog. Rep. Pac. 12. The salting of herring. Prog. Rep. Pac. 13. Clemens, W. A. Pacific salmon migration. The tagging of the spring salmon on. the east coast of Vancouver island in 1927 and 1928. Bull. 27. A Course of scientific instruction for fish cultural officers. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 61. Clem ens,. W. A. and N. M. Carter. Sea as nature's laboratory. Western Fish. 4(2). 76

Duff, D. C. B. - Furunculosis or "fish boils" in game fish. Vanc. Mus. Art Notes • 7(1). Furunculosis in British Columbia. Prog. Rept. Pac. 15. Dymond, J. R. The trout and other game fishes. of British Columbia. Dept. of Fish. Elsey, C. R. Japanese oysters breed in Ladysmith harbour, B.C. Prog. Rep. • Pac. 15. Foerster, R. E. A comparison of the natural and artificial propagation of salmon. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 61. Experimental tests of the methods used in the artificial spawning and fertilization of sockeye salmon eggs. Prog. Rep. Pac. 14. Hart, J. L., L. P. Shultz and F. G. Greenberg. New records of marine west coast fishes. Copeia 2. Hart, J.. L. and G. H. Wailes. The food of the pilchard, Sardinops caerula _ (Girard) off the coast of British Columbia. • Contr:.7(19). The food of the pilchard, Sardinops caerula (Girard), off the coast of British Columbia. Rept. Comm. Fish. B.C. 1931. Hubbs, C. L. and L. P. Shultz. A new blenny from British Columbia with records of two other fishes new to the region. Contr. 7(25). MacKay, D. C. G. The story of the Pacific crab. Western Fish. 3(6). An additional Brachyuran crab from northern British Columbia. _ Can. Field-Nat. 46(7). Description of a new species of crab of the genus Paralithodes. Contr. 7 (27). Moorhouse, V. H. K. Do fish react to noise? Prog. Rep. Pac. 13. - Mottley, C. McC. and Jean C. Mottley. The food of the Kamloops_ trout. Prog. Rep. Pac. 13. Munro, J. A. and W. A. Clemens. The food of the American merganser, Mergus merganser americanus, in British Columbia. Can. Field-Nat. 46(7). Pritchard, A: L. Pacific salmon migration. The tagging of the pink salmon and the chum salmon in British Columbia in 1929 and 1930. Bull. 31. The return of marked pink salmon in 1932., Prog. Rep. Pac. 15. Simpson, W. W. and Eric Ogden. The physiological significance of urea. 1. The elasmobranch heart. Jour. Exp. Biol. 9. •Spencer, G. J. The commercial crab, Cancer magister Dana, in , Vancouver island. Bull. 30. Tester, A. L. Local population of herring. Prog. Rep. Pac. 12. - Wailes, G. H. Description of new species of Protozoa from British Columbia.- Contr. 7(14): Ecology of Sproat lake, B.C. Vanc. Mus. Art Notes 6(4). Protozoa and 'algae from lake Tenquille, B.C. Vanc. Mus„. Art Notes 7(1). Wardlè, R. A. The cestoda of Canadian fishes. 1. The Pacific coast region. Cohtr. 7(15). On the technique of Cestode study. Parasit. 24(2). Whittaker, W. R. Finding the age of fish by their ear-stones. Western Fish. 3(1). • Williamson, H. C. and W. A. Clemens. Pacific salmon migration. The tagging operations at Quatsino and Kyuquot in 1927 with additional returns from the operations of 1925 and 1926. Bull. 26. , 77

INVESTIGATORS' SUMMARIES DESMOND BEALL WAS= LIQUORS FROM A BRITISH COLUMBIA PILCHARD REDÙCTION PLANT Attention has been concentrated on the nature of the dissolved "protein" in order to discover whether part or all of the dissolved material can be recovered profitably. Five samples of effluent were collected from fish which had been stored from - •é six to thirty-six hours before processing and analyses were made for total nitrogen, protein nitrogen, proteose nitrogen, peptone nitrogen, and sub-peptone nitrogen, with the following results. Time of storage Total N Protein —1\1 Proieose N Peptone N Sub-peptone N hours g. per I. g. per 1. g. per I. g. per 1. g. per 1. 10 9.32 0.59 3.58 2.26 2.89 8.31 0. 27 3.15 2. 35 2.54 6 8.62 0.69 3.08 2.31 2.54 12 9.39 ' 1.05 3.38 2.21 2.75 30 36 ' , 9.58 0. 88 3.01 2. 68 3.01

E. BERKELEY AND C. BERKELEY POLYCHAETA OF THE PACIFIC COAST Specimens of Polychaeta collected by workers at the Station and elsewhere have been identified from time to time. Exceptionally large individuals of Heteromastus filobranchus with enormous gill development have been examined from a depth of eighty fathoms in Saanich inlet where the oxygen content is only approximately 3.5 per cent. of saturation. G. C. CARL LOST LAGOON, VANCOUVER, AS A TROUT LAKE The area was originally a part of Coal harbour, but in 1916 was Cut off by a seawall and became a salt-water lake. In 1929, an association of anglers decided to convert the lagoon into a fresh-water area and to attempt to make it a trout lake for fly-fishing. The Pacific Biological Station was requested to advise and since July 13, 1929, has followed the development. A more extensive study was, made of the lagoon from October 14, 1931, to August 20, 1932, by the writer. On July 13, 1929, examination showed: surface water temperature 23.5°C., ox'ygen 70 per cent. saturation, salinity 3.4 gr. per litre, pH 7.7 and plankton extremely scarce. Conditions generally improved from this time on although there were several set‘backs as a result of lowering of the water level and the influx of large quantities of salt-water. On August 20, 1932, the surface temperature was 20.0°C., salinity .68 gr. per kilogram, pH 7.8 to 8.4, and the plankton while still not abundant had increased considerably in quantity and contained a greater variety of species. Aquatic plants, insects and fresh-water shrimps were introduced by the anglers and these havecontributed to some extent to the general improvement of conditions.' During the summer of 1932, there was an "epidemic" of the alga Lyngbya bergei, which probably may be taken as an indication of improvement of conditions, although a condition of stability has not been reached and may not be attained for some years. A number of marine forms continue to exist in the lagoon, as, for example, Entomorpha and Neomysis mercedis. One huridred full-grown cutthroat trout were introduced in May, 1929, but apparently survived but a short time:and 200 yearlings of the same species also failed to survive. ApproxiMately 100,000 Kamloops trout fingerlings were intro- duced in July and August of 1929 and they apparently soon perished. In spite 78

of other introductions, only a very few specimens have been taken by angling. The stickleback, Gasterosteus cataphractus, is present in rather large numbers and probably has congtituted a food supply for the trout. The bullhead, Cottus as per, is also present in some numbers. Lost lagoon is not yet considered as suitable for trout production, in large part because of lack of abundance of food organisms. It has been suggested that some form of fertilizer be introduced to hasten the developmental process but this has not yet been attempted. SALT BATH TREATMENT FOLLOWING MARKING OF BROWN TROUT For the purpose of learning something of the life-history of the brown trout being introduced into the Cowichan river, 5,000 fry were marked from July 7 to 13, 1932, by the remoiral of the adipose fin. During the first few days of marking, some mortality occurred and it was suggested that the fish be given a salt bath immediately following the removal of the fin. The treatment was instituted as an experiment with the following results: July 7—No. of fry marked; 850. Mortality, July 8-14 (7 days) - 111 July 8—No. of fry marked, 1000. Mortality, July 9-14 (6 days) 99 July 9—No. of fry marked, 750. Mortality, July 10-14 (5 days) ' 45 July 10—No. of fry marked, 1000. Mortality, July 11-14 (4 days) 38 July 11—No. of fry marked, 1000. All fish given 10-minute salt bath after • marking (2 ounces sodium chloride per gallon water). . Mortality, July 12-14 (3 days) 10 July 13—No. of . fry marked, 400. All fish given 30-minute salt bath imme- diately after marking and again after 24 hours. Mortality, 2 daYs. 0 July 8--7A lot of 100 fry were handled but not marked or given a salt bath. Mortality, July 9-14 (6 days) 16 ' From September 7 to 15, brown trout to the number of 8,700 were -marked at Qualicum beach. Immediately after marking all fish were given a fifteen- to thirty-minute salt bath of the same strength as used at Cowichan. The mor- tality'was leSs than two per cent. The mortality among 3,600 untreated fish at Cowichan was eight per cent. There appears to be definite evidence that the i salt treatment - reduces mortality. - -

NEAL M. CARTER FIORDS AND FIORD FORMATION • Jervis inlet, a true fiord, having a length of 55 miles and an average width of 1 3/ miles, was systematically sounded in order to investigate further the "no bottom" soundings given on the latest charts. A threshold at a depth of 900 feet was located at the mouth, behind which the depth increased rapidly to 2,000 feet, then more gradually until a maximum of 2,175 feet was recorded in a reach ap- proximately half-way up the inlet. A cross-section taken at this point revealed that the precipitous walls of the surrounding 7,000 to 8,000-foot mountàins are pro- duced below sea-level at an angle of over 50° until they meet the almost level, - silted-in floor of the submerged gorge. ' Toba inlet, 32 miles long and the next fiord north of Jervis inlet, was also _ sounded. At the entrance of the main channel a threshold was located at a depth of 1,000 feet, behind which a maximum depth of 1,690 feet was attained before the inlet gradually shallows towards its head. The tributary , however, deepens rapidly from each end toward its centre, where the available sounding wire (2,340 feet) failed to reach bottom over a longitudinal Stretch of eight miles. Such a depth within one-half mile of shore is the greatest depth yet recorded on the inland coast of the province and is seldom exceedtd in any inland waters. Oceanic depths of such magnitude are first encountered at ' a minimum distance of thirty miles off the open coast of Vancouver island. 79

No evidence of stagnation comparable with that found in the smaller, shal- lower inlet (Princess Louisa) which opens off Jervis inlet has been discovered in these three depressions which lie some thousand feet below the bounding thresh- « olds. Dissolved oxygen and other chemical ccenstituents exist in concentrations which Would be expected from extrapolation of the values found in the open water of the strait of Georgia. Sever—al very small Maldanids usually found only in corresponding oceanic depths were dredged, together with a single specimen of 111yriochele heed, from 1,800 feet in Toba inlet. Distinct evidence of almost corrosive glaciation has been seen at low tide on the Cretaceous granito-diorite threshold at the mouth of Princess Louisa' inlet and the slate mountains bordering both Jervis and Toba inlets are strongly glaciated to elevations of 4,700 feet. Deep glacial furrows have been observed on the summits of 8,000-foot peaks lying on the practically unexplored watershed which feeds both inlets. The trend and age of these furrows corroborates the glacial origin of Princess Louisa and Jervis inlets in particular.

VARIATIONS IN ANNUAL SEA-WATER TEMPERATURES A seven-day moving average was found to be satisfactory for picturization of the temperature changes minus the effect of sudden diurnal variations and personal errors of observation. Such an average has been computed and plotted for eaCh day of twelve years' records at William head near Victoria, obtained by Mr. Ira E. Cornwall of the Quarantine Station, and for those years in which the data taken at this Station are sufficiently complete. By means of mechanical integration an approximation to a quantity representing the annual duration of a temperature above and below the 12-year average temperature has been com- puted, the resulting figures showing that although the upward trend is not so regular as first supposed, it is nevertheless quite definite. The annual summer temperature of the oceanic water in the strait of Juan de Fuca as represented at William head, appears to have increased by several degrees centigrade since 1921, attaining decided maxima in the summers of 1926 and 1931. An interesting point brought out is that corresponding winter maxima occurred during the winters preceding these two summer maxima. Personal observations and measurements made by the investigator have shown two cor- responding maxima in the retreat of coastal glaciers, indicating some truth in the saying: "The winters are getting warmer". A very pronounced feature of the plotted results is the recurrence of warm cycles during each year. These are most noticeable from May to September inclusive and occur approximately every lunar month. These cycles simul- taneously occur on an exaggerated scale at Departure bay, as shown by records of the Station. This exaggeration of temperatures in the strait of Georgia waters as com- pared with those of the more oceanic water is characterized in several ways. Whereas Cis average summer-to-winter - variation at William head is approx- imately 5°C., that at Departure bay is nearer 15°C.• high summer temperatures at Departure bay occur earlier than at William head' and often exceed those of the latter locality by as much as 8°C., while winter minima are lower at Departure bay. The times of annual equal temperatures at the two localities fall in March and close to the beginning ot November.

TIIE ANALYSIS AND FOOD VALUEOF CANNED SOCKEYE AND PINK SALMON The four grades of sockeye were chosen from localities which would yield representative early, medium, late and river runs of fish, the last two types being gill-netted from near the mouth and at some distance above the mouth of the Fraser river quite late in -the season. The three grades of pink were similarly chosen. Six or more tins from each of the seven grades were selected for analysis. Results show that the average protein Content per tin is practically uniform (19.3 to 19.8 per cent.) for all the sockeye and the early pink packs, but falls to 17.7 1 I. 80

per cent. in the later run pink. The average oil content per tin varies with the lateness of the run from 10.3 per cent. to 8.2 per cent. in the sockeye packs, and from 7.3 per cent. to 6.9 per cent. in the pink packs. _ The moisture content bears a similar, inverse relation. No significant variation in ash content is apparent. The average food value of the different packs is better indicated by the calorific value calculated from the protein and oil analyses, the carbohydrate content of salmon being negligible. This calorific value shows a variation with lateness of 'season from 833 to 740 calories per pound of total tin content in the case of sockeye as compared with a range from 706 to 652 calories in the pink. The 1 intermediate packs give intermediate values, all analyses comparing favourably . with American analyses of canned salmon. Individual variations, particularly in the oil content of different tins of the same grade, frequently far exceed the differences between the averages for early and late packs. Consequently, any conclusions derived from averages based on a sample of six tins must be accepted with caution. The physical characteristics of the contents of the tin are a more reliable guide to the season and locality in which the pack took place than are the chemical analyses.

THE SALTING OF "ROUND" HERRING The efficiencies of moist salt and concentrated brines ("pickle") as used in the commercial salting of whole ("round") herring have been compared by a study of the rate of dehydration and penetration of salt when whole herring are packed in moist salt or immersed in salt solutions of different concentrations. • At the end of the legal pickling period (five or six days, de.pending on the season), herring which have been continuously in contact with moist salt lose 30 per cent. of their original weight through dehydration and gain 8 to 9 per cent. by acquisition of salt. _On the other hand, herring immersed in saturated brine lose only 24 per cent. of their original weight through dehydration but take up 13 to 14 per cent. in salt. The latter fish have a less shrivelled appearance and a greater internal salt reserve with which to combat access of moisture during shipnient than have those fish which were in contact with moist salt. This advantage is partially offset by a slightly greater net moisture content and con- sequent weight. Fish in contact with moist salt cease to lose moisture after the fifth day but continue to take up salt at 'a uniform rate for some days longer. The loss of water and gain of salt practically ceases after the sixth day in the case of those immersed in saturated brine. In commercial practice, tanks of herring, pickle and salt accumulate an iipper layer of brine having a concentration of from 90 to 80 per cent. saturation if left , undisturbed for two or three days as frequently happens. The salt content of fish after immersion in experimental brines maintained .at 97, 89 and 81 per cent. saturation indicated the lessened efficacy of such 90 to 80 per cent..brines in the commercial tanks. The rate of salt uptake and final content of salt after six days were very similar' to those occasioned by the stronger brine,,but the de- hydration effect was quite dissimilar. The per cent. weight of wahr removed increased up to the end of a certain period (53x2 days in 89, 43/i days in 81 per cent. brine), after which the total moisture content increased fairly rapidly, causing the net weight of the fish to increase quite rapidly. The fallacy of allowing fish to remain in a weak brine for a long period of time in an effort to achieve the cure effected by a stronger brine vas demon- strated by the fact that herring left in 80 per.cent. saturated brine for nine days had regained their original weight and all but 10 per cent. of their original mois- ture content. Large or fat herring lose w'ater and take up salt more slowly than the smaller herring up to the end of five days. Plotted results have shown several inter- esting "halts" in the dehydration curve, which indicate this process is of a more complex nature than might be supposed. • 81

W. A. CLEMENS AND L. S. CLEMENS STATISTICAL STUDY OF SOCKEYE SALMON RUNS Through the courtesy of the Provincial Fisheries Department, the annual collection of scales and data from random samplings of the runs of sockeye salmon . to the Fraser, Skeena and Nass rivers and to Rivers inlet in 1931 was made avail- able for study. In th:.! Fraser river the four-year-old fish constituted seventy-nine per cent. of the run. In Rivers inlet, the four-year-old fish were slightly in excess over the five-year-old groups and were characterized by their small size, the average length being the smallest on record. Of special note in the, two northern rivers were the exceptionally large number of individuals of the five-year-old, three-years-in- the-lake group in the Skeena river and the striking decrease in the four-year-old age group in the Nass river. -

W. A. CLEMENS AND G. V. WILBY THE FOOD OF THE FUR SEAL OFF THE COAST OF BRITISH COLUMBIA There has been considerable speculation concerning the nature of the food of the fur seal, Callorhinus alascanus, during its northward migration each year along the west coast of Vancouver island. Through arrangements made by the Department of Fisheries in 1931, twenty-five full stomachs were obtained from Indians sealing off Clayoquot sound. The results of an examination of their contents show that herring occurred in 17 individuals (68 per cent.), salmon in 9 (36 per cent.), squid in 8 (32 per cent.), pilchards in 6 (24 per cent.), hake in 1 (4 per cent.), -cottids in 1 (4 per cent.), and osmerids in 1 (4 per cent.). It is evident that the schooling species form the bulk of the food of these seals, no doubt because of abundance and ease of capture. The sample is too small to infer from it that the various species listed always occur in the relative abundance shown above but it can reasonably be concluded that herring un- doubtedly form the most important food material and that salmon constitute a very appreciable portion of the food although not forming the sole or even the main item.

D. C. B. DUFF TOXIC PROPERTIES OF HERRING MEAL AND OIL WHEN USED AS A FOOD FOR SALMON FRY Work has been continued on the examination of fish meals for the possible presence of a factor toxic to salmon fry,—investigating the effect of the oil content of certain diet combinations.. The refined and oxidized herring oil was prepared by Mr. H. N. Brocklesby at the Fisheries Experimental Station, Prince Rupert. . Feedings were arranged containing an added 10 per cent. of refined or of oxidized oil combined with: (1) liver only, (2) meal only, (3) meal and liver. Where rations contained oxidized oil, the oxidation products were added in pro- portion. All rations—control or experimental—contained in addition a small percentage of starch. Each diet was fed to an experimental batch of 1,500 sockeye salmon fry for a period of 55 days. Batches fed on rations composed of liver, or of liver and meal in equal parts by weight, suffered no appreciable losses. This was ink regardless of whether oil was not added, or was present in the refined or in the oxidized state. In the case of rations not containing liver, the proportions of the initial population lost by the end of the experimental period were as follows :—(1) whole meal ration, 27.7 per cent.; (2) meal with 10 per . cent, added refined oil,56.7 per cent.; (3) meal with 10 per cent. added oxidized oil, 55.3 per cent. While the temperature factor requires further analysis, it does not seem on inspection to have côntributed significantly to the losses. Such temperature fluctuations as 'occurred did not register as extra losses in control batcheà. Results indicate that increasing the oil content of a herring meal ration 8 " produces a mortality much heavier than that due to whole herring meal alone, but that such mortality is reduced to the level of the control minimum when 50 per cent. liver is incorporated in the diet. The effect of added refined oil is significantly the same as that of added oxidized oil. FURUNCULOSIS (1) Studies have been continued at the University of British Columbia on - the bacterium isolated in August, 1931, from the victims of the Elk river epizootic, Rocky Mountain whitefish, known locally as "grayling". The organism has been found to conform in all cultural and biochemical characteristics with Bacillus salmonicida Emmerich and Weibel. Inoculation of the Elk river strains of the organism into goldfish and chub gave rise to typical symptoms, death, and to the postmortem findings characteristic of furunculosis. B. salmonicida was re- covered, in the majority of cases in pure culture, from the lesions, kidney, and blood of such fish. Kidney lesions containing large numbers of the organism have tieen demonstrated histologically, and conform in character with the lesions reported by- previous workers. It is concluded that thé Elk river epizootic was actually due to furunculosis. (2) During the summer of 1932, numerous deaths occurred among hybrid Pacific salmon kept in a retaining pond at Cultus lake. Postmorten examination of 103 fish showed a high incidence of typical furunculosis lesions; e.g. muscle lesions in 66 cases, liquefactive necrosis of kidney in 62 cases, liquefactive necrosis of spleen in 57 cases. Other typical lesions were present in lesser frequency. An organism corresponding culturally and biochemically to B. salmonicida was re- - covered in 94 cases, in 80 of which it was obtained in pure culture from one or more of the typical lesions. Tests on the pathogenicity of these strains are still under way. (3) In order to obtain information as to the possibility of furunculosis bacillus being transferred on trout eggs, two lots of random samplings were examined. The first consisted of 32 brown trout eggs taken on January 20, 1932, from the Cowichan Hatchery; the second of 58 speckled trout eggs on February 10, 1932, from the Nelson Hatchery. Only one type of brown pigmented colony, composed of gram negative rods was found on these eggs. The brown appeared • only in the colony itself and did not diffuse into the surrounding medium. After seven days the brown colonies became bright golden. In both respects the organism in question did not correspond with Bacillus salmonicida, and, further- more, its fermentation reactions were different. In May, brown trout fry at the Cowichan Lake Hatchery. were examined but no evidence could be found of the presence of the furunculosis bacillus.

C. R. ELSEY • BREEDING OF JAPANESE OYSTERS IN LADYSMITH HARBOUR Although seed oysters can be introduced economically from Japan, it is evident that propagation in British Columbia would offer certain advantages. Observations with a view to determining what is the likelihood of propaga- tion on a commercial scale in Ladysmith harbour have been made each year since 1926. The results prior to 1932 were disappointing since in three of the six years there was no natural spawning and in the other years although partial spawning occurred late in the season there was only a very light set of oysters resulting from it. In 1932, all of the oysters in the harbour (from three to five million) spawned completely in the first week of August, three weeks earlier than in 1930 or 1931. Larvae of regularly increasing size were taken in plankton samples and approx- imately one month after spawning a set occurred on experimental collectors. These consisted of chicken-wire bags of oyster shells of half bushel capacity which 83

e, were suspended from floats close to the beds. The average number of spat on a bag was twelve hundred. There vas no appreciable mortality at the last is examination on October twentieth and the young oysters had increased roughly ten times in length. It appears from a consideration of climatological and hydrographical condi- tions, that breeding was the result of an unusually warm June which favoured ri the development of the sexual products, and a week of hot weather coincident with low daylight tides in early August which provided the spawning stimulus. ri Apparently the early occurrence of spawning was necessary for the normal development of the larvae. Had it taken place at the end of August or in early September, as was the case in the two previous years, the fall drop in temperature would probably have prevented their development. BREEDING OF EASTERN OYSTERS IN THE BOUNDARY BAY AREA 1 Continued investigations of the breeding of eastern oysters in the Boundary bay area, particularly the Nicomekl and Serpentine rivers, further emphasize the fact that the occurrence of a set of commercial importance cannot be depended upon from year to year. As was the case in 1931 there was a complete absence of set in 1932 although extensive spawning of both imported and locally bred oysters took place early in the season, June 20 to August 5. (River oysters tend to spawn about one month earlier than those in the bay.) An apparent reason for the failure of the larvae in the rivers to develop to the setting stage is afforded by the hydrographical conditions which prevailed after the occurrence of spawning. Salinities, under the influence of rainfall in early July of almost unprecedented amount, dropped below the values which are considered fatal to oyster larvae. - In addition, the water was coloured a dirty brown and made abnormally acid by peat which was washed in from the neigh- bouring farm lands. The deadly effects were exercised not only on Eastern oyster larvae but on those of native oysters, clams, barnacles, etc. An extensive cultching programme which had been organized to determine first, whether the intensity of set could be materially increased by supplying suitable collectors for the spat at the right time, and second, whether the spat could be successfully transplanted in the fall to the beds in the bay, had to be abandoned because of the death of the larvae. An analysis of the ages of oysters in the rivers, which vt?as undertaken in 1931 and continued in 1932, chiefly with the object of determining what have been the fluctuations in breeding intensity for previous seasons, indicated that sets of commercial importance have been fairly rare. They appear to have been limited to seasons in which the early summer temperatures were slightly higher than average and the precipitation in June and July was low. It indicated further that the sets in the good yeais have been greatly restricted by the lack of cultch. It is concluded that any program which might have as its aim the develop- ment of the rivers for seed production should be planned with the fact in mind that the addition of cultch from year to year without regard to climatic condi- tions and without examination of the plankton for larvae would be impracticable. It is reasonably certain, however, that the judicious placing of cultch in years having climatic conditions favourable and larvae consequently present in the plankton, would result in Ihe production of at least a very valuable supplement to the imported oyster supply. THE PROPAGATION OF THE NATIVE OYSTER Continued studies of native oysters in Boundary bay and Ladysmith harbour support the tentative conclusion which was reached in 1931, namely, that the production Of oysters cannot be materially increased until improved methods of spat collection êre adopted. It is evident that even in years which might be classed as "poor ' from the standpoint of seed production under natural conditions, good sets can be obtained on shells which are retained in dykes or in wire bags, piled in-tiers in deep water or suspended from floats. 84

The first heavy spawning of the 1932 season occurred in the third week of May. Plankton studies showed that there was relatively little mortality of the larvae resulting from this early spawning. A heavy spatting, amounting in some cases to forty thousand oysters per bushel of shells, occurred in the period from June 15 to June 30. Shortly after attachment, more than ninety-five per cent. of the spat died and practically all larvae disappeared from the plankton. The heavy mortality was experienced by the spat in the dykes and wire bags as well as by that on the n'atural beds and both Boundary bay and Ladysmith harbour

were affected. A somewhat similar , occurrence in 1931 was tentatively suggested to be the result of abnormally great precipitation at the time of and following ' spatting. Such an explanation can hardly account for the mortality in the pre- sent case since there was no excessive rainfall during the period. In spite of the heavy mortality there was an adequate set in experimental dykes and on sus- pended or otherwise continuously immersed shells. - On .the other hand, although setting occurred regularly on the natural exposed beds, nearly all of the spat died in the early stages presumably as a result of exposure to the sun. The exceptions were the survivors of the June set which were large enough to withstand exposure, and the September set which, owing to ' changes in the tidal cycle, was 'not exposed for long periods during the daytime. EXPERIMENTS ON THE SPAWNING OF JAPANESE OYSTERS - With the purpose of obtaining additional inforMation concerning the relation . between spawning and certain physical conditions, experiments were conducted at Boundary bay with oysters retained in wire cages and in heated aquaria.. The following facts have been established. (1) Natural spawning can occur in the sea in water of which the temperature is consistently below 23 degrees centigrade. (2),Oysters taken from high ground late in July and placed where they will be continuously submerged can spawn in August under conditions which do not cause the spawning of oysters which have remained submerged at the same place for the entire season. (3) Female oysters can be induced to spawn by the addi- tion of eggs or sperms, in suitable quantity, at temperatures as low as 22.5 degrees centigrade. Males under the same conditions can be made to spawn at con- siderably lower temperatures. (4) When spawning has commenced it can con- tinue even after temperatures have been reduced to 19 degrees centigrade. THE DEVELOPMENT OF NEW AREAS FOR OYSTER CULTURE There are many bodies of water, on the coast of British Columbia which, although they have never been utilized for oyster culture, appear to be suitable for the growing of Japanese oysters. - Observations are being made of experi- mental plantings of Japanese oyster seed in three different places, namely, Pender harbour, Nanoose bay and Departure bay, the last named because records of temperature and salinity are available for it. - - In r'ender harbour, where approximately .eighty aères have recently been leased for oyster culture, plantings of seed oysters were made in both 1931 and 1932. In the former year, relatively high ground (five-foot tide level) ,was used. In the latter the oysters were planted at several different elevations, the lowest being ai the level of a zero tide and the highest, at the seven-foot tide level. The oysters of the 1931 planting, after being on the beds from April, 1931, to November, 1932, have attained the minimum size suitable for marketing, namely, 250 to 280 meats per imperial gallon. Of the oysters planted in 1932, those at the zero-tide level have grown fastest. The growth rate of the others has varied inversely as the elevation. Present indications are that the fastest-growing oysters will attain the standard market- able size, namely, 200 to 225 per gallon, by November, 1933, and that the slowest growing lot will require an additional season to attain the minimum marketable size. The relatively slow growth of the oysters on high ground is compensated for by their superior shape. They tend to be, short and deeply cupped whereas the fastest growing oysters are long and shallow. • 85.

In Nanoose bay, where they are roughly two hundred acres of ground which offer possibilities for oyster culture, the growth rate of oysters planted at the five- foot tide level in April, 1932, has been slower than that at the same level in Pender harbour. The minimum marketable size will probably not be attained until the spring of 1934. It is a reasonable assumption that the rate of growth would be considerably faster at lower levels. The oysters are of good shape. Partial spawning occurred in 1932 but there is no record of spawning for 1931. In Departure bay the growth rate at the five-foot tide level closely parallels .4 that of oysters at the same level in Nanoose bay. The oysters are of good shape. Partial spawning occurred in both 1931 and 1932.

INFECTION PERIODS OF THE WOOD-BORERS, BANKIA SETACEA AND LIMNORIA LIGNORUM To determine at what time of the year protection of boats and other wooden structures is most necessary, in the different harbours of British Columbia, blocks of Douglas fir, which are changed at monthly intervals, are being used to indicate when and to what extent infection occurs. To date, blocks have be.en exchanged for twelve months in Departure bay, Vancouver harbour, Boundary bay and Massett inlet, and for five months at Prince Rupert, with th 'e following results: (1) Definite proof has been obtained for what was only suspected before, namely, that dangerous infection by Bankia can occur at all times of the year. This fact was strikingly illustrated by blocks from Massett inlet. (2) The periods of heaviest infection of Bankia are in the spring and fall. Contrary to what has generally been believed, the fall infection may be much heavier than that which occurs in the spring. (3) The activity of Limnoria may be greatest in the spring and early summer but wood is attacked by it at all times of the year. (4) Temperatures and salinities do not seem to be the most important factors influencing the breeding of Bankia. (5) The dates of occurrence of heavy infection in different bodies of water may differ by several months.

H. FASMER THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE PHYTOPLANKTON IN THE STRAIT OF GEORGIA Due to the fact that the phytoplankton forms the first link in the food chain for the greater number of the marine organisms, the knowledge of its biology is a matter of fundamental importance for all marine biological studies. Samples of water taken with the usual form of water bottle were centrifuged and the phytoplanktonts counted. ' In view of the fact that counting and tabulating of all samples has not been completed, definite conclusions are not yet warranted. However, it can be stated with certainty that the plankton population at different depths varies not only in number but also very mach in composition. For instance, a station having a population of àbout 250,000 phytoplanktonts per liter at 1 meter, 95 per cent, of which are Chaetoceros, has, at 10 meters, only 61,000, and there Chaetoceros repre- sents only 27 per cent., while Rhizosolenia amounts to 40 per cent. Again, at 30 meters, the total number has decreased to 3,000 and now Skeletonema dominates with 52 per cent. while Chaetoceros and Rhizosolenia represent respectively 17 and 13 per cent. The fact that the protoplasmic part in Rhizosolenia is relatively . . much larger than in Chaetoceros and the food value correspondingly also larger makes this information of impoi-tance in the estimation of the producing power of these waters.

R. E. FOERSTER THE RELATIVE EFFICIENCIES OF NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL PROPAGATION OF SOCKEYE SALMON AT CULTUS LAKE, B.C. During the spring of 1-932 the regular annual count of down-stream migrating sockeye from Cultus lake was made. The total count was 788,637 individuals, of which 779,019 were released to proceekl to sea, 3,709 were preserved for exam- ination. and 5,909 were recovered dead on the fence. The examination of the preserved specimens is now being completed but it would appear that practically the entire migration consisted of one-year individuals. As these fish were the product of the natural spawning in 1930 of 4,856 males and 5,542 females, with a possible egg deposition of 24,939,000 eggs, the returns would indicate an effi- ciency of roughly three per cent. for natural propagation, calculated on the basis - of down-stream migrants. TRANSPLANTATION OF SOCKEYE SALMON FOR RESTOCKING PURPOSES The experiments in• transplanting sockeye salmon•from the lower Fraser river areas to the upper has been continued, and has now completed one four-year , cycle. During 1929, the Department of Fisheries transferred approximately 17,000,000 eyed eggs from Cultus lake to Eagle river, a tributary of the Shuswap system, and planted them in the gravel beds of the river. Fry to the number of 123,550 were reared in ponds at Taft, B.C., marked by removal of the adipose and left pelvic fins, and liberated during the latter part of October in Eagle river. . These eyed eggs and fingerlings being from the brood year of 1928, a return was expected this fall, 1932, and in order to. enumerate the return to Eagle river, a picket-counting fence was erected in the lower part of the river below the planting beds. To December first the returns have been meagre, only one marked (three-year male) and 17 unmarked sockeye having been recovered. Such count would indicate that as far as a return to Eagle river is concerned, the transplantation was a failure. Anticipating the possibility that the transplanted fish might return to Cultus lake, a close watch was kept for such marked indi- viduals. Only one assertedly genuine Eagle river marked individual has been taken to date at Cultus lake. No records of Eagle river marked sockeye have been received from other spawning areas. From the fishing areas, a number of marked individuals have been recovered, distributed as follows :—Fraser river, 11; Puget sound, 2; strait of Juan de Fuca, 2. THE RETURN OF ADULT SOCKEYE SALMON FROM A KNOWN ESCAPEMENI The marking of seaward migrating sockeye by removal of certain fins has been carried on at Cultus lake for a number of years, with but indifferent success. However, by reason of a small migration, 104,061 individuals, in the spring of 1930 an opportunity of marking the entire migration was' offered. All migrants were marked by removal of both pelvics. In the. year of their expected return from the sea, 1932, efforts were made to procure as high a degree of recovery from the fishing areas as possible. The unsettled condition of the industry, by reduc- ing the number of operating canneries, greatly aided the work and with the very efficient co-operation of the State of Washington Division of Fisheries, whereby. an assistant was placed in each of the four operating canneries on Puget sound, and a supervisor on the Fraser river, exceptionally good recoveries were -obtained. The recoveries were: . Sex District - •Type Male Female unknown Total Puget sound • C4 393 s 618 ... 1011 C3 7 . 7 4 E • .. 2 'Strait of Juan de Fuca C4 852. 117 202 • E4 1 •1 ... 2 87

Sex District Type Male Female unknown Total Bellingham C4 9 10 . 19 Fraser river - C4 - 475 329 32 836 C3 4 2 . 6 E4 6 5 11 refers to Cultus lake; "E" to Eagle river. The number following the 4 letter indicates the age.) Thus, with a total recovery from the fishing areas of 2,068 C4 or four-year Cultus lake sockeye, the return, based on the 104,061 migrants, amounted to two per cent. To this total from the fishing areas must be added the number of marked individuals returning to Cultus lake. In 1931, these numbered 28, 18 males and 10 females. For 1932, the returns are not complete but to date 652 marked sockeye have been recovered. The data to date, therefore, would show a return of at least 2,748 marked sockeye from a total escapement of 104,061 migrants, or 2.64 per cent. This percentage will be increased as further recoveries at Cultus lake are made. -

- CROSS-BREEDING OF PACIFIC SALMON In continuance of the investigation into the fertility of hybrid salmon, which commenced with the crossing of all species of salmon in 1927, the following oper- ations have been carried out and the following results obtained. In the fall of 1931, the surviving three-year males of the F1 generation rip- ened. They were then crossed with normal sockeye females and produced fer- tilized eggs which subsequently hatched. The hybrids used were sockeye-chum, chum-sockeye, spring-pink, sockeyè-spring, pink-chum, pink-sockeye, spring- coho. In the fall of 1932, the four-year females of the F1 generation ripened, were crossed with normal sockeye males and produced fertilized eggs which subse- quently hatched. The hybrids used were sockeye-spring, sockeye-chum, pink- chum, chum-spring, pink-sockeye. A number of the original F1 individuals from the spawning of 1927 matured in the fall of 1932 in their fifth year and the following indiscriminate crosses to test fertilization were made: male sockeye-spring to female chum-spring; male chum-spring to female pink-sockeye; male sockeye-spring to female pink-chum; male chum-spring to female sockeye-chum. Eyed eggs from the above crosses were obtained, thus indicating that some fertility dos exist. In the fall of 1929, reciprocal crosses of sockeye and chum salmon were made. The fry w,ere hatched and reared in a retaining pond at Cultus lake. On June 23, 1931, the hybrids were counted and it was found that there were in the pond 1,263 individuals of the chum female-sockeye male cross and 1,888 of the sockeye female-chum male cross. In the fall of 1932, some of the three-year males of bbth crosses ripened and these were further crossed as follows: sockeye female- chum male to chum male-spring female; sockeye female-chum male to pink male- chum female..

SOCKEYE SALMON FEEDING EXPERIMENTS Further tests of experimental rations for retained sockeye salmon fry were made during 1932. Sixteen experimental lots of fry were fed for three months and the results, based on increases in length and mortality figures, indicate that while beef liver fed alone continued to produce excellent growth, substitutes may be used, provided that the beef liver content is not less than 33 per cent. Such substitutes used were frozen salmon offal, canned salmon, fresh salmon eggs, dried salmon eggs, dried skim milk and halibut meal. • t 88

Rations in which beef liver was lacking did not prove generally satisfactory and it was noted, by plotting coefficients of variation, that high percentages of variation in length occurred for rations lacking beef liver whereas low percentages of variation occurred where beef liver was present. The best non-beef liver rations were in percentages: canned salmon 50 + dried salmon eggs 50; canned salmon 75 + dried salmon eggs 25; halibut meal 50 dried salmon eggs 50; halibut meal 33 ± dried salmon eggs 33 + dried

skim milk 33. • TROUGH CAPACITY EXPERIMENTS In order to obtain data concerning the safe carrying capacity of a standard hatchery trough, 16' X16" X8", for sockeye salmon eggs and fry, experimental tests were conducted_ at Cultus lake whereby varying capacities of eggs were carried in hatchery troughs during the season. The experiment was divided to cover troughs equipped with riffles and troughs not equipped with riffles. Water flow wa's 10 gallons per minute. The egg-carrying capacity was calculated on the basis of the number of healthy eyed eggs obtained. For troughs equipped with riffles, a capacity of 9 quarts per basket or 411,000 eggs per trough was successfully carried. For troughs without rifles, as high as 7 quarts per basket of 318,000 eggs per trough were safely carried to the eyed stage, but subsequent returns after hatch indicated that heavy losses occurred in troughs where the capacity exceeded 4 quarts per basket of 185,500 eggs per trough. The character of the losses tended to show that such loss was to a great extent caused by subnormal development during the -earlier stages, in ,other words to overcrowding prior to the eyed-egg stage. Fry capacity was calculated on the basis of the number of healthy fry pro- duced. The fry capacity for troughs equipped with riffles was found to be 7 quarts pér basket or 159,600 eggs per trough and for troughs not equipped with riffles, 3M quarts per basket or 100,000 eggs per trough. EXPERIMENTAL TESTS OF SOCKEYE SALMON ARTIFICIAL SPAWNING AND FERTILIZATION METHODS To obtain data concerning the comparative efficiencies and relative merits of the spawning and fertilization methods practised in the hatcheries of British Columbia, tests were conducted during the season 1031-32 at Cultus lake. Three methods of spawning were used, expression or hand pressure, expression followed by incision, and full incision. Three methods of fertilization and treatment of eggs were adopted with each spawning method, namely, rinsing, steeping • and Fon- gealing. The 'results obtained indicate that expression spawning produced a ,loss of 13 per cent. through eggs being left in the gonads of the female. Total expression of all eggs is nt achieved. The other two methods of spawning show a much* smaller loss, approx- imately three per cent., for incomplete spawning. No other appreciable differ- ence between the three methods of spawning was noted, except that-expression followed by incision required the assistance of an extra spawner during the operation. . No conclusive difference in production of fry was noted between the three methods of fertilizing and washing the eggs. Steeping involved less time and labour than the other two methods but requires running water.

WERNER FREUDENBERG THE FOOD VALUE OF THREE SPECIES OF OYSTERS s Comparative chemical analyses of the three species of oyster (Ostrea or native oyster; 0. virginica, or eastern oyster; 0. gigas, or Japanese oyster) which are of commercial importance in British Columbia, have not as yet been available for food value studies. Through the kind 'co-operation of Mr. CI R. 89

Elsey of the Pacific Biological Station, samples of the various species were ob- tained from Crescent, Victoria, Ladysmith, Departure bay and Nanoose bay during July and August. In all, four separate samples of O. lurida, six of O. virginica and five of O. gigas were analyzed. The moisture content of all three spedes was approxim- ately uniform during the two-month period. Of the remaining constituents (calculated on a moisture-free basis) the protein showed the least variation. The glycogen -content of O. lurida varied from 10.4 per cent. to 26.5 per cent. as the season advanced; O. virginica showed a variation from 11.7 per cent. to 31.1 per cent. with a similar seasonal increase; in O. gigas the values were more irregular, varying from 12 per cent. early in July through 5 per cent. on July 14 (Departure bay) to 24 per cent. On August 18 at Crescent. The fat content of O. gigas was triple that of the other two species and in- creased noticeably as the season advanced. The ash content of O. lurida fell from 11 per cent. to 6 per cent. during the two .months. O. virginica behaved similarly, while the change in ash content of O. gigas was very slight. These values compare favourably with those of other investigators and appear to show, for examlile, that O. virginica has a higher glycogen and fat content when grow'n on this coast than when grown in the east, and that O. gigas from Ladysmith is as rich in food material as the Japanese product. The increase in glycogen content during August supports the hypothesis that this constituent is generated and stored during the autumnal and winter months to act as a reserve material during the spawning season. The high calorific value of carbohydrates causes this increase of glycogen to assume significant proportions from the stand- point of food values of the oyster during the winter.

J. L. HART PILCHARD SAMPLING (1) For length. This investigation was undertaken to discover the way in which the pilchard population reacts to the strain placed upon it by the fishery. Since, at present, specific age determinations can be made only with considerable uncertaint3i, the investigation has concentrated attention upon the length com- position of a representative portion of the pilchard catch. The most noticeable observation made to date is that of the reduction- in the size of pilchards taken during the season of 1931 as compared with the two pre- vious years. In 1932 the size of pilchards increased again but not sufficiently to bring the average length as high as in 1929 and 1930. It was found that each season females are more numerous than males, ah though the sex ratio varies considerably. As females are also larger it was con- sidered adVisable to treat the two sexes separately. (2) For race. This phase of the pilchard investigation has concentrated on the vertebra...counts for pilchards captured in various localities in an attempt to determine the extent of the migrations of the species. The results of several thousand counts demonstrate significant differences, not only between California ,and British Columbia localities, but between the same British Columbia localities in 'different years. It is evident that vertebra numbers as a racial character in pilchards must be applied with extreme caution. • J. L. HART AND H. BORDEN MARSHALL INTENSITY AND EXTENT OF THE POLLUTION CAUSED BY PILCHARD REDUCTION PLANTS ON THE WEST COAST OF VANCOUVER ISLAND This investigation was undertaken as a result of complaints that the effluent from pilchard rèduction plants has caused the herring to abandon certain spawn- ing grounds on the west co-ast of Vancouver island. The extent and permanence of the contamination resulting from the effluent was studied by examining samples of sea-water and sea-bottom taken at different times and places near two repre- 90 1

sentative Barkley sound reduction plants; Water samples were examined for pH, organic nitrogen, dissolved oxygen and poisonous decomposition products; bottom samples were analyzed for nitrogen content and oil content. The results of all analyses agree with general observations in indicating that the area affected was at all times limited to a radius of 200 m. from the effluent outlet pipe and that even in most of this limited area all signs of contamination rapidly disappeared on the cessation of operation- . It is concluded that serious deleterious effects to hen ing spawning or marine life cannot result from the oper- ation of pilchard reduction plants.

J. L. HART AND D. BEALL - CHANGES IN CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF BRITISH COLUMBIA HERRING The investigation to date has shown the oil content to be at a minimum about spawning time and has shown it to bear a reciprocal relationship to the w,a,ter content. Protein and ash content are subject to comparatively , slight alterations. -

JOSEPHINE F. L. HART _ EARLY LIFE-HISTORIES OF CRABS • Following the successful rearing of several species of crabs, attention has been given to the accurate differentiation of the young stages so that means - may be found for identifying the species in the plankton. For example, in the first zoea stage a downward-pointing knob on the third segment of the abdomen of Hemigrapsus nudus distinguishes this species from II. oregonensis. The megalopal stages of four species of Cancer may be distinguished by size, hooked spines on the endopodites of thè first four pairs of pleopods, plumose hairs on the exopodites and plumose setae on the exopodite of the uropod.

E. KUITUNEN-EKBAUM ' _ THE OCCURRENCE OF DRACONTIASIS IN» PACIFIC COASTAL FISHES (1) In the summer of 1932 a case of dracontiasis was e_xamined in Platichthys stellatus from Departure bay, infected by Philometra sanguinea. The same species of nematode has been reported from LepidoPsetta bilineatct, 'Rhodymen- iclithys dolichogaster and Caularchus maeandricus. This blood-red nematode in flounders is chiefly located under the skin at the base of the fins or between the fin-rays, while in Rhodymenichthys the parasite was found mostly in the muscles of the head. In all cases the nematode appeared to be a mature female, with live embryos in the uterus, except in two cases, when young females were found together with males. In no case was the male found in fish which harboured a mature female. Several experiments were made with direct infection and at- tempts made to rear the larvae directly, but with negative results. The mi- gration of the parasite through the muscles of the fish takes place probably in a very early stage of develOpment, and, after reaching a particular location, fertil- ization takes place, and then probably the male atrophies and the female con- tinues the life cycle. , - The stomach contents of the fish and the plankton from infected localities were examined to find the intermediate host. A species of Cydops was artifically infected with the larva'e, but no infected cyclops was found in nature. - (2) The second case of dracontiasis was in sockeye salmon caught from English bay infected with a new species of a dracunculoid nematode, Philonema oncorhynchi, nov. gen. et sp. The white, mature females up to 360 mm. long, and the males, 35 mm. long, were found freely in the body cavity or tangled ainbng the pyloric caeca, having migrated from the intestine into the body cavity where they had reached their maturity. No case was found where the parasite had migrated into the muscles of the fish, and therefore the commercial value of sockeye salmon is considered not to have been diminiàhed by that infection., 91

D. C. G. MACKAY GROWTH OF THE EDIBLE CRAB In the interests of conservation of the crab fishery it is particularly desirable to ascertain the time required by an individual to reach sexual maturity, com- mercial size and old age. From observations made in Boundary bay during 1931, it appears that the hatching of the eggs occurs in the spring, that the zoeal stage is reached by about - el July and that crabs in the megalops stage may be found from July until early September-. The examination and measurement of, 1,030 post-larval crabs of the same brood during 1931-32 have shown that there is apparently no sig- nificant difference in size or numbers on the ba,sis of sex. The approximate sizes of the first four post-larval stages were ascertained from the data. Observations made during the spring of 1932 indicated a retardation of growth during the winter months for the brood of the previous spring. For the most part these appear to have wintered in the fourth and fifth post-larval stages. MOULTING AND MATING OF THE EDIBLE CRAB From May onwards large numbers of live crabs were found buried in the sand near low-tide level. Inasmuch as most of these had either just moulted or were on the point of doing so, this was taken to be a related phenomenon. It is also possible that this behaviour may explain -the annual decrease in commercial catch at this time of year which is ordinarily considered to be due to migration. Observations on 298 crabs which moulted in captivity during 1932 indicated that the increase in greatest width ranged from about 10 to 25 per cent. at à single moulting, and that the active sloughing of the old exoskeleton occupied about ten minutes. Only during this short period would the crab be in a state of almost complete helplessnéss. Mating is considered to be related to moulting, the male apparently mating before moulting and the female soon after moulting. Six pairs of crabs in the mating embrace were found on the tide flats near Crescent between May 19 and July 5. These observations taken in conjunction with the extensive moulting now known to take place at this time of year make it seem extremely . probable that the mating of the edible crab is a vernal event. THE NEED FOR BAIT IN CRAB FISHING " Crab fishing in Boundary bay is ordinarily carried on with traps which, oddly enough, are not baited. The following experiment was tried in order to see whether the use of bait would influence the catch per trap. Nineteen traps were baited with clams and oysters placed in punctured tin cans within the traps and nineteen were left unbaited, the baited and unbaited traps being arranged alternately. One crab was left in each trap, according to the custom of the region, and the traps were put out in the ordinary fishing grounds. Two days later, on hauling the traps, the following results were obtained. With bait 325 crabs were taken, of which 134 were females and 191 were males; 124 were males of commercial size.: Without bait 303 crabs were taken, of which 100 were females and 203 were males; 130 males were of commercial size. Elsewhere on the coast fresh bait is regularly employed and is considered essential in order to procure, even a moderate catch. Why the Boundary bay crabs should congregate in large numbers in the commercial traps without the use of bait has ye to be satisfactorily explained.

C. MCC. MOTTLEY RACIAL INVESTIGATION OF TROUT • The exact identification of the different forrns of trout by means of morpho- logical characters is necessary in the development of a program in fish culture and for the formulation and enforcement of regulatory measures. ; 92

In order to test the reliability of various characters, approximately thirty thousand fry and six thousand adults of trout from all parts of the province have been examined. Thirty-five characters have been analyzed in greater or less detail as follows: (A) measurements: (1) total and standard lengths and weights; (2) proportions of head and related structures; (3) proportions of body (trunk and tail); (4) proportions of fins. (B) counts: (1) scales; (2) gill- rakers; (3) branchiostegals; (4) fin rays; (5) vertebrae; (6) pyloric caecae. (C) attributes: (1) coloration; (2) colour of flesh; (3) hyoid teeth; (4) ma- turity; (5) condition; (6) food; (7) age. The results show that there is little evidence on the morphological side to indicate the existence of races. A few examples may be given. The scale count once considered to be the most useful criterion for the identification of species and subspecies has been shown to be modifiable by temperature 'and therefore can have no racial ignificance. The vertebral count has likewise been found to be modifiable by temperature. The proportions of the heaçl and related structures are so inodified by condition of size, age, state of maturity and by nutritional factors that - they would appear to be of little value for distinguishing races al- though they may be of prime importance in differentiating species. .Colour of flesh is sometimes referred to as of racial value but it has been shown by experi- ments at the Nelson hatchery that the offspring of red-fleshed trout when reared on a liver diet, had white flesh. Condition is a character determined by food and spawning. It has been demonstrated that a so-called "dwarfed race" de- veloped into a "large race" when supplied with abundant food. -

THE SPAWNING RUN OF KAMLOOPS TROUT AT PAUL CREEK, B.C. The spawning run at Paul creek was counted and scale samples were taken from eighty-three per cent. of the fish. Certain findings of a biological nature are herein reported, the understanding of which seems necessary for the scientific management of trout cultural operations. ' (1) Time and duration of the run. The run began about April 27 and con- tinued until June 1. The duration of the run was longer than usual, probably due to the unusually backward season. (2) Size of the run. Owing to a heavy freshet on the night of May 1 and the lack of assistance, the fence did not operate for tveenty-four hours. While four hundred and seventy-six fish were actually counted, the run may be est:mated at 500±25 fish. (3) Proportions of the sexes in the run. - A. Females made up fiffy-three per cent. of the run; males, forty-seven per cent. , B. The males tend to run earlier than the females. (4) Age composition of the run (percentage for each age of total number of each sex,-195 males and 220 females). Age 11 III IV V - VI VII Males 38 18 18 15 8 2 Females . 0 35 .. 41. 16 7 1

THE ANGLING FISHERY FOR KAMLOOPS TROUT AT PAUL LAKE An understanding of the biological factors underlying the cycle of depletion and restoration of a fishery is essential for its conservation and management. The present report deals with the continuation of the investigation at Paul lake, Kamloops, in 1932, with special reference to the catch and the fry planted in 1931. (1) The total catch was about 2,800 fish. The average catch per person for the season was 2.16 fish; the average catch per boat for the season was 4.10 fi sh. - . . 93

The maximum catch approached the legal limit (15 fish) and was obtained only three or four times during the season. The maximum catch per boat was 20 fish, obtained by a party of three fishing in one boat. The average catch per person increased as the season advanced: May, 2.0 fish per person; June, 1.2; July, 2.0; August, 2.4; September, 3.1; October, 4.5. The increase is directly correlated with the influx of yearling trout (1931 planting) in the catch. The catch of yearlings rose from 0 per cent. in May to 83 - • per cent. of the total catch at the end of the season. (2) The numbers and weight of trout of each age-group caught are estimated as follows:

Average Total weight Age Number Percentage weight (pounds) I 1200 43 0.6 720 II 1300 46 1 . 9 2483 • III 220 8 3 . 4 748 - IV 50 2 , 3 . 9 195 V 35 1 2 . 9 102 4248 The production of trout at Paul lake for the year may be estimated at four to five pounds per acre, or 2.8 fish per acre. The analysis of the age composition of the catch per month is shown by the percentages in the following table:

• May June July August September No. of fish sampled 138 77 138 233 211 , Age % I 0 0 28 75 83 II 83 84 57 20 11 • III 13 7 13 3 4 IV 1 6 2 1 1 V 2 3 0 1 1 (3) The catch was analyzed for the numbers of immature, maturing and mature fish in order to obtain data for forecasting the size of spawning runs. These three categories were present in the sample of 797 fish, as follows. 1. Immature_fish (would probably not have spawned in 1933). . 72 per cent. 2. Maturing fish (would probably have spawned in 1933) 22 " " 3. Mature fish (have already spawned and would have spawned 6 14 ti again) It is probable, judgingfrom the trend of the fishery that the 1933 spawning run will have an increased proportion of II males and III females, and that the numbers of sicdwners and the egg-collection will be greater than this year (1932).

THE NANAIMO RIVER SYSTEM The Nanaimo river system has been proposed by the Nanaimo Board of Trade as a possible area for the introduction of sockeye salmon. There is no run of sockeye to an)› stream on the east coast of Vancouver island south of Seymour narrows. If such an introduction-did prove successful there are five other similar systems on the east coast besides the Nanaimo river, provkling, in all, about 2,700 acres of lake-water for the production of young sockeye. Consequently, it is 94

possible that the present valuable fishery for sockeye might be extended into a rather large area hitherto non-productive for this species. A preliminary biological survey was carried out in August, 1932, of the Nanaimo river system, which consists of the main river joining successively three lakes, each about 500 acres in extent. There are numerous gravelly tributaries and beaches and the lakes are comparatively deep. The system seems to present the physical requirements for a sockeye run. . There is a considerable change in the volume of the river from summer to winter. The lowest period is during August and September. This fact might necessitate the introduction of a late-running variety of sockeye. The pH of the water ranged from 6.6 to 7.2. There was a marked thermocline in the First Nanaimo lake. The plankton and bottom fauna appeared to be present in only moderate amounts. The fish fauna of the river system was investigated above the Nanaimo river fails. Five species were observed and three others were re- ported to be present: sticklebacks, Gasterosteus sp.; spring salmon, Oncorhynchus tschawylscha; kokanee, O. nerka kemmerlyi; coho, O. kisutch (reported); chum, O. keta (reported); rainbow-steelhead, Salmo gaerdnere; cutthroat, S. clarkii; Dolly Varden, S'alvelinus malma (reported).

JEAN C. MOTTLEY THE FOOD OF TROUT A study is being made of the food of trout since the nature and amount of food affects the rate of growth, reproduction and feeding habits of fish. The competition for food between trout and less valuable species is also an important consideration. • Kamloops trout is the only species of fish in Paul lake. ' In 1931, a study was made of the food of four groups, namely, stream type fry, lake type fry, yearlings and adult trout. The samples were collected from April 15 to October 5. The food of the stream type fry was exclusively aquatic insects, Diptera forming 90 per cent. of the total volume of the stomach contents and Plecoptera and Coleoptera making up the remaining 10 per cent. The lake type fny had a more varied diet, Cladocera and Copepoda constituting 68 per cent. of the volume of their stomach contents, while aquatic and terrestrial insects formed the re- maining 32 per cent. The average length of the lake fry was twice the average length of the stream fry and the average volume of the stomach contents Was 27 times that of the stream type. The lake apparently offers more food for the fry

• and this condition appears to promote more rapid growth. The variety of food may also be a factor in the increased growth rate. The food of the yearling trout consisted of terrestrial insects 40 per cent., aquatic insects 30 per cent., and amphipods 30 per cent. The yearlings were ten inches to twelve incheS long by the end of the summer, at which stage they are readily caught by anglers. -The percentage volume of amphipods increased in the diet of older trout and aquatic insects, terrestrial insects, Cladocera, Gastropoda and Hirudinea (in order of importance) made up the rest of the diet. Of the aquatic insects, -the Trich- optera, Odonata and Diptera were •the most important. Ants were the most importânt of the terrestrial- insects. No small trout were found in any of these stomachs, but in the 1932 season, trout fry were found in the stomachs of four yearling trout. Fly fishing varied directly with the occurrence of insects. Trolling became effective as the number of insects decreased and as the fish fed more extensively on Amphipoda. _ ,

J. A. MUNRO THE FOOD OF WATER-FOWL The results of field studies at Departure bay, Nanoose bay and Comox har- bour and of examination stomach contents at the present time appear to indi- of .

95

cate that the golden-eyes and scoters take few or no fish. The red-breasted merganser, the murrelet and the guillemot take fish to some extent. The mallard takes salmon eggs and salmon flesh during the salmon spawning period and an occasional small fish during the remaining part of the year.

J. A. MUNRO AND W. A. CLEMENS THE FOOD OF THE AMERICAN MERGANSER An investigation of the food habits of the American merganser, commenced in 1930, was continued and the results were used in the preparation of a pre- liminary paper (see under "Publications"). The specimens available for study, supplied largely through the courtesy of the Department of Fisheries, were collected at various localities in British Col- umbia where the American merganser is reported to feed largely on trout and on salmon fry. The results up to the present time indicate that in the coast region sculpins constitute approximately 54 per cent. of the food of the merganser, sticklebacks 16 per cent., salm- onoids, including portions of dead spawned-out salmon, 17 per cent; other fishes 13 per cent. In the interior of the province, sculpins and chub each 'form 24 per cent. of the food, shiners 14 per cent., squawfish 12 per cent., suckers 10 per cent., trout and salmon 12 per cent.

A. L. PRITCHARD THE TAGGING OF SPRING SALMON IN BRITISH COLUMBIA IN 1929 AND 1930 Spring salmon tagged with a view to establishing their principal routes of migration have given the following returns.

Percentage of returns - • . • No. Per. Fraser Col- Cana- U.S. Area of tagging Year tagged cent. R. umbia - dian waters return R. waters (exc. - Alaska)

North coast • - Queen Charlotte I. 1929 402 _ 14.9 31.6 21.6 50.0 48.3 .. id 1930 660 15.0 16.2 27.3 40.4 58.6 Hecate st. 1930 182 7.2 7.7 30.8 46.1 46.2 - West coast - Queen Charlotte I. 1925 274 13.5 10.8 • 27.0 27.0 70.3 id .. 1929 375 10.9 17.1 14.6 43.9 56.1 11 .....-11 1930 179 13.4 _16.7 41.7 25.0 70.8

Millbank, etc. sound 1930 302 5.0 26.7 1:13.3 86.7 13.3

Vancouver island Hardy bay 1930 436 6.2 16.7 33.3 66.7 1927 517 14.1 1.4 64.4 12.3 , 87.7 Kyuquot 82.8 Ucluelet 1925 1,125 10.8 4.1 60.7 17.2 11 1926 1,353 13.1 6.2 60.0 17.5 . 82.5 showed a The spring salmon from the areas in northern British Columbia for the same southerly and easterly migration similar to that reported previously recoveries species in - the southern portion of the province. The distribution of

I. • 96

indicates that the movement through southern British Columbia was chiefly along the west coast of Vancouver island. It appears that in general the returns from the United States waters became - fewer as the tagging has moved farther northward, those - from the west coast of Vancouver island averaging approximately 80 per cent., from the west coast of the Queen Charlotte islands, 65 per cent., and from the north coast of the Queen - Charlotte group and- Hecate straits, 51 per cent. The spring salmon taken in Millbank sound were evidently bound chiefly for Canadian spawning areas. Recaptures in Alaska were reported only for springs tagged in the Queen Charlotte island districts and Hecate straits. In each case, however, there was only one or two fish.

THE RAZOR CLAM (SILIQUA PATULA) FROM NORTH BEACH, GRAIIAM ISLAND, QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS, B.C. IN 1932 For some years, those in charge of the clam cannery on North beach, Queen Charlotte islands, have observed that at times many of the clams lose their fatty white appearance and become very thin and dark=colotired. The reduction in weight greatly increases the number required per case, and hence raises the cost of production, while the darkened colour reduces the quality of the pack. . During the spring of 1932, Mr. E. S. Richardson, the fishery inspector for the district, procured samples of live clams from the commercial digs for exam- ination, as follows: April 21, 20; May 5, 12; May 7, 26; May 14, 19; May 19, 14; May 24, 24; and May 27, 23. In only two of the smallest clams was it im- possible to discover the gonads and distinguish sex. The lengths of the shells of these individuals were 2 "/, 6 and 29 inches. All over three inches were ripe and apparently ready to spawn. It is noteworthy that eggs and sperms were being generally liberated as early as May 27, since Fraser reported that the razor clams in this region were only partially spawned early in July, 1928.. There is no doubt that physical factors, the chief of which is probably temperature, greatly influence the time of spawning. ç _

• These clams taken on April 21 and May 5 were all classed as fat since they contained well-developed ovaries and testes which were quite compact and hard. Thin and darker clams appeared as follows: May 7, 4; May 19, 1; May 24, - 10; and May 27, 21. All of the latter had commenced to spawn and some had almost completed the deposition of the sex products, thereby leaving the intestine and other darkly coloured organs exposed. This condition, which is normal and associated with spawning, could account for the change in appearance of the clams as reported by the cannery officials. - .

THE NATURAL RUN OF PINK SALMON (ONCORHYNCHUS GORBUSCHA (WALBAUM)) IN MASSETT INLET DURING 1932, WITH SUMMARY SHOWING THE EFFI- CIENCY OF NATURAL PROPAGATION The experiment dis'cussed herein was begun with the installation of counting fences in McClinton creek, Massett inlet, Queen Charlotte islands, during the spring of 1930. In the fall, enumeration of the spawning adults was rèarried out and the count of the down-stream fry migrants in the spring of 1931. Since all data at present on hand indicate that the'pink salmon matures at the end of the second year, the examination of the adult run in the fall of 1932 was considered as completing the cycle. The results given below include chiefly à discussion of this year's work, but give also for the first time, so far as is known, a fairly ac- curate résumé of losses suffered by this species during the various stages of its life-history. In many ways the run of 1932 was similar to that of 1930. At the outset, . up-stream migration was confined to the hours of darkness, immediately after high-water slack tide. Later, as more fish became mature, largest numbers reached the fence on the freshets regardless of light. When the water rose to a height of more than four feet, however, the Current was apparently too strong " • 97

for the pinks to stem, so that they were forced to seek the back eddies and deep pools below the weir. Males predominated from the beginning, August 4, until September 14, after which time the females were more plentiful. The final disposition of the sexes on the spawning grounds was almost equal as in 1930, viz., 8,003 (51.3 per cent.) males and 7,597 (48.7 per cent.) females. - It is interesting to note the dissimilarity in the time of the two runs. The first individual was taken this year on August 4, but the main migration'took 4 place between August 27 and September 16, as opposed, to September 8 to Sep- tember 28 in 1930. It is felt that the chief reason for this early movement lay in the phenomenally heavy rainfall which occurred when the fish began to appear in the inlet. From August 25 to August 31, the measured fall was 2.7 inches, and from September 1 to September 15, 14.0 inches. Thus the salmon which show a very definite tendency to ascend the rivers after a heavy influx of fresh cold water, obtained sufficient incentive to go up immediately and did not "school" off the mouths of the streams. That those of 1932 were not as ripe as those of 1930 was evident from the examination made at the fence. Throughout the run random samples were inspected in detail to obtain lengths, weights and egg counts. The average lengths of each sex were almost two inches greater than those of the previous year. Probably correlated with this, the average number of eggs per female, determined from the actual count of 73 individuals, was 1,758, i.e. 223 greater. There was thus a slight compen- sation for the smaller number of fish. The results for the cycle are tabulated below. The percentages recorded therein have been calculated without attempting to allow for the effect of "wan- dering" described in another report. 1930 1931 1932 Male Female Male Female No. adult migrants: 32,955 33,196 8,003 7,597 Av. nô. eggs per female 1,535 1,758 No. eggs deposited 50,950,000 13,360,000 No. fry migrants 5,026,000 Percentage ratio fry migrants to eggs deposited in 1930 ' 9.9 Percentage ratio returning adults to eggs deposited in 1930 0.03 Losses egg to fry migrant stage 90.1 Losses marine phase . 9.87 . Total loss 99 . 97

THE RETURN IN 1932 FROM THE MARKING OF PINK SALMON FRY MIGRANTS IN 1931 The object of removing the adipose fins from 185,000 salraon fry during the down-stream migration at McClinton creek, Massett inlet, in the spring of 1931, was to establish definitely at what age the fish would reach maturity and whether they would return when mature to spawn in the same area. From the examination of scales, it has been generally believed that thef ry of this species go down to the sea almost as soon as they are hatched and that the adults return to spawn in,the autumn of their second year. The recovery, in 1932, at McClinton creek, of fish lacking the adipose fins which were removed from the fry migrants in 1931 has proven that the age as determined from the scales was accurate. Recoveries in 1932 for pinks. marked at McClin ton creek in 1931 have been as follows. From Alaska there have been 19, consisting of,—Karluk beach, 8; Olive cove, 10; Anp creek, 1 (for these last two places reported by Dr. F. A. _ Davidson, United States Bureau of Fisheries, but scars not forwarded with infor- mation). From Northern British Columbia (exclusive of Queen Charlotte islands) there have been 7, consisting of,—Wales island, 1; Nass river area, 1; Skeena river, 4; , 1. From southern British Columbia there 7 98

have been 24, all from Johnstone strait. , From Queen Charlotte island area there have been 133, consisting of,—Otard bay, 2; Naden harbour, 14; Massett inlet, 22; McClinton creek,_95. The recapture of 95 marked fish (52 per cent. of the recoveries) in McClinton creek definitely shows that there is a strong tendency on the part of the pink salmon in this locality to return to their native spawning area. It is not unlikely that the 22 fish taken in Massett inlet and the 16. in Otard bay and Naden harbour would ultimately have reached the "parent" stream if they had not been taken in the commercial nets. In such an event, the return to McClinton creek would have amounted to 133 or 73 per cent, of the recoveries. - The recapture in other localities of 50 fish lacking the adipose fins (27 per cent. of the recoveries) seems to indicate a certain'degree of wandering. Although no fin abnorrnalities were discovered among 310,000 pink salmon fry and 1,500 adults from McClinton creek and Tlell river, reports from other areas point out that stich abnormalities may exist to a very small extent. It is felt, however, that the indications shown by these returns should not be entirely ignored on this account.

W. E. RICKER •FACTORS IN CULTUS LAKE AFFECTING THE DEVELOPMENT AND SURVIVAL OF YOUNG SOCKEYE SALMON Studies of the factors in Cultus lake which have an effect on the development - and survival of young sockeye have been carried on from the inception of the Cultus lake investigation proper but only since the fall of 1931 have they been intensively prosecuted. (1) General limnology of Cultus lake. Cultus lake is about three miles by one-half a mile in extent. Its shores slope steeply down, so that more than four- fifth's of the bottom is a flat plain of ooze„ lying thirty-five to forty-two metres below the surface. Because of this uniform configuration, , a single station has been selected for bimonthly limnological observations, which should be repre- sentative of the whole open-water region. , • From January 1 to the middle of March, the water of the lake was of uniform temperature from top to bottom, reaching a minimum of 3.6°C. At no time was the surface ice-bound. As the water warmed up throughout the spring and summer, a thermocline developed in the 5 to 10 metre stratum and in autumn fell to 15 to 20 metres. During this summer period of stratification, the supply of oxygen at the bottom was reduced to 4.5 cc. per litre; at other times it was 'abun- dant at all depths. The water was at all times fairly hard (65 mg: per I. of bi- carbonate, expressed as CaCO3) and alkaline in reaction (pH 7.0 to 7.8). Its silica • content increas'ed throughout the summer, particularly in the lower strata; nitrates, phosphates and bicarbonates showed little variation with depth or 'seasonally; nitrites could not be detected. • Enumeration of net plankton organisms gave evidence of an abundant but not particularly varied pelagic biota. • The only phytoplanktonts of consequence were the diatoms Melosira and Asterione. lla, which attained to a maximum in the middle of March, but were very scarce throughout the summer. The protozoans Ceratium and Dinobryon were present in good numbers in summer and early fall; the several kinds of rotifeis seem to have been most common in winter. Crust- aceans of four genera: Epischura, .Cyclops, Daphnia and Bosmina, show varia- tions in numbers which may be to some extent correlated with the growth and migration of their enemies, the young sockeye. Dredgings of the bottom fauna in deep water reveal a fauna very restricted as to species, but not unusually so in numbers of individuals. Only four: large organisms were found: one tanypine and two chironomid midges, and an oli- gochaete. • 99

Collections of larger aquatic plants in the few sheltered bays which harbour them reveal Chara, Itryriophyllum, Ceratophyllum, Ranunculus, and several species of Potamogeton. (2) Natural food of young sockeye salmon. Specimens of young sockeye have been obtained from the lake by means of three fine gill nets, which were respectively, 5/8, 7/8, and 1 1/16 inches stretched mesh. All have been regula,rly set at the bottom of the lake in various depths of water and the two smaller ones have been suspended at various levels from the surface. On the whole, they are not particularly successful in taking young salmon, so for food studies specimens _ found in the stomachs of Dolly Varden, charr and sqizawfish have been chiefly used. The stomach analyses confirm previous observations by showing that finger- ling sockeye eat plankton crustacea almost exclusively. They take all four species but more of the larger forms, Daphnia and Epischura. (3) Food of predaceous fishes of Cultus lake in relation to survival of young sockeye. Larger gill-nets have collected many specimens of the more abundant fishes of the lake. The squawfish (Ptychocheilus oregonensis) greatly exceeds all others in the catches. Its principal foods are sticklebacks (Gasterosteus aculeatus) and young sockeye. The charr (Salvelinus spectabilis) is much less common, but individually is more destructive of young sockeye; as many as seventy-five have been taken from one stomach. It also eats large numbers of sculpins (Coitus f,r as per and C. aleuticus), sticklebacks, and the decaying carcasses of adult salmon. 'e•-• The few specimens of trout (Salmo sp.) examined had eaten sockeye, sticklebacks and midges. 'A. L. TESTER

- THE IIERRING OF THE COMMERCIAL CATCH OF BRITISH COLUMBIA The purpose of this investigation is to examine the variation in age and length composition of the commercial catch of herring in the coastal waters of British Columbia from year to year to detect any decline of the fishery; and to examine statistically herring from the Narious fishing areas to determine the degree of intermingling or migration which takes place between them. The ultimate object is to explain fluctuations in the fishery and to determine whether or not these fluctuations are related to the intensity of the fishing. During the -past season the sampling program included herring from eight important fishing areas: and Nanoose bay on the east coast, and Barkley sotind,.Sydney inlet, NOotka so- 11nd and Kyuquot sound on the west °Oast of Vancouver island; and jap inlet and Pearl harbour in the Prince Rupert district. (1) Herring from Sydney inlet had the largest average length of the eight districts examined (200.4 mm.). The average lengths of herring from the other three districts on the west coast of the island, while smaller than that for Sydney inlet fish, werelarger than those from the east coast. The lengths of fish from the Prince Rupert district averaged about the same as those from the east coast of Vancouver island (about 188 mm.). Scale examinations showed that samples of herring from Sydney inlet were characterized by the large pçoportion of fish in their fourth and fifth years with a small proportion in their third and sixth years. All other districts about Van- couver island were characterized by fish in their third, fourth, and fifth years in order of importance with small percentages of older fish. Although the average length of herring from the Prince Rupert district was relatively small, scale read- ings showed that the predominating ages were fourth, fifth, and third years in the sample from Jap inlet, and fifth, fourth, third, and sixth years, in order of impor- tance, in the samPle from Pearl harbour. These two samples contained a rela- tively large proportion of fish in their _seventh to tenth years of age. (2) In investigating so-called "racial problems", the following characters were considered: age Composition, rate of groWth, sex ratio, head length, length 7a . 100

to the insertion of the dorsal fin, numbers of total and abdominal vertebrae, and number of keeled scales. _ Herring from the Prince Rupert district were found to differ from herring in the vicinity of Vancouver island in several of these char- acters to such an extent as to be classed as a population distinct from the latter. Several diher interesting results were obtained which suggested that herring in several of the fishing areas tended to form local populations, but these results are subject to verification in future work. Among these might be mentioned a gradation in vertebral numbers frorn south to north-west along the coast, a con- dition which conforms to the general increase from California to Alaska noted by other workers. - G. H. WAILES " PLANKTON STUDIES (1) Fresh-water plankton. In connection with certain investigations, col- lections of plankton were made in the series of Nanaimo lakes, Sproat lake, Lost lagoon, etc. The plankton of the Nanaimo lakes as obtained in August, 1932, was not abundant. Zooplanktonts, especially Crustacea, were few in number while Desmids were represented by many species. Sproat lake plankton, as Collected largely in early August, was rather rich in forms. Lost lagoon in Vancouver city is a body of water which at one time was salt but which is being changed into a fresh-water area for the rearing of trout. The lagoon has been under observation since the summer of 1929 and it has been of interest to follow the appearance of the fresh-water planktonts. Myxophyceae and Chlorophyceae appeared in some quantity during the summer of 1932 and Lyngbya bergei ap- peared in July in the form of a thick scum. Crustacea are still rare. • (2) Plankton of alpine regions. In 1931; collections of plankton were made from lake Tenquille, 5,300 feet above sea level. Desmids were partictilarly abundant. A number of new records of both plant and animal planktonts were obtained.

R. A. WARDLE '‘ CESTODE INVESTIGATIONS ON THE PACIFIC COAST (1) The viability of tapeworms in artificial media. The aim of the investi- gation was to test the favourability of a range of artificial media toward tape- worms removed from their host habitat, in order to establish a technique for the of such animals indefinitely in vitro. The cestode selected for experi- maintenace ment was a larval tetrarhynchoid, Nybelinict surmenicola, sufficiently common to permit of several thousand individuals being utilised. The media tested com- prised a series of salines, of antiseptics, and of nutrient media. The most favour- able saline media were Ringer-Locke and saline-citrate, survival time values,up to 456 hours being obtained in sterilised Ringer-Locke. The most promising antiseptics were thymol, resorcinol and formol. The most promising nutrient media were Locke-glucose, serum-saline gel, and Lockefish bouillon, survival time values up to 40$ hours in Locke-glucose, to 192 hours in serum-saline gel; and up to 200 hours in Locke bouillon, being obtained. No increase in growth or de- -velopment of the cestode larva was observed. .. (2) Additions to the recorded cestodes of Pacific Coast fishes. A collection of material made by members of the Station staff, and by the investigator, com- prised : Clestrobothrium crassiceps (1Iferluccius productus), Eubothriunt sp. (Ptychocheilus), Schistocephalus solidus (shores of Upper Nanaimo lake), larval S. solidus (Coitus, Shuswap L.), larval Ligula intestinalis (Chub, Shuswap L.), Proteocephalus sp. (fingerling Salmo clarkii, Departure bay, and Oncorhynchus nerka, Cultus L.), and an unidentified tetrarhynchoid from Hexanchus caurinus with a presumed plerocercoid in Theragra. In addition, material was obtained of the previously recorded Gilquinia squali (Squalus), Phyllobothrium salmonis (O. gorbuscha), Nybelinia surmenicola (Ophiodon), and Bothriocephalus scorpii (Hexa- grammos, Myoxocephalus, Apodichthys).

101 F. D. WHITE THE ANALYSIS AND FOOD VALUE OF THE LING COD (OPHIODON ELONGATUS) Three freshly caught fish were analyzed. In each case the head, viscera, and bones were removed and discarded as "waste" (this amounted to 45 per cent. by weight of the whole fish); the skin was separated from the flesh and analyzed separately. The average percentage amounts of protein found in the flesh and skin were 16.1 and 26.6 respectively, the remainder being mainly water with a . small amount of inorganic material (ash): the amounts of fat were negligible. ▪ The calculated food values are as follows: Flesh Skin Food values (49% of whole fish) (6% of whole fish) Whole fish Calories per 100 gm.. . . 79.8 114.7 46.0 Calories per lb 362 . 0 520.3 208.6 The high calorific value of the skin is due to its high protein content, but as , this is mainly scleroprotein, a class of protein which is highly resistant to the action of the digestive enzymes, in one sense the true "food value" is substantially less than is indicated by the calorific value. The calorific value of the whole fish compares favourably with European non-fatty fishes, although the percentage amount of "waste" is somewhat higher: the calorific value of the flesh alone is rather higher than that of European fish of this category (Plimmer). •

THE ANALYSIS AND FOOD 'V'ALUE OF THE PILCHARD (SARDINIA CAERULA) Two cases of canned pilchards, representing early and late runs respectively, were obtained from a canning factory on Vancouver island. Each case con- tained eight dozen cans with an average content of 250 gm. of fish per can. Analyses were carried out on the total contents of three. cans taken at random , from one case (early run) and of five cans from the other case (late run). The contents of each can were separated into flesh, bone, and skin, which were analyzed separately. The two classes of pilchards showed marked differences in their percentage composition: the fat content of the late run was almost double that of the early run, while the protein content of the former was slightly, and the water content considerably, lower than those of the latter. Average comparative results and calculated food values are as follows: Percentage composition per can Early run pilchards Late run pilchards Protein _ 16.9 15.7 Fat 9.8 18.1 . 68.0 - 60.0 Water . . Ash 1 . 9 1 . 5 Calculated food values _ Calories per 100 gm 160.5 . 233 . 5 Calories per llr. 728 1,059 Calories per can (250 gm.) 401 , . 584 These results indicate (1) that weight for weight, late run pilchards have almost 50 per cent. greater food value than the early run; (2) that the contents of one can (about 9 oz.) of early run pilchards and one can of late run are equiv- alent in food valu,e to rather more than 1 lb. and 1 3/i lbs. respectively of ling cod flesh; (3) that compared with European fatty fish, early run pilchards have a somewhat greater food value than the corresponding weight of fresh herring, while the food value of late run pilchards is greater than that of the corresponding weight of salmon section, and almost twice that of sturgeon section. W. R. WHITTAKER . AGE COMPOSITION OF PILCHARD CATCH -AS SHOWN BY THE OTOLITHS The examination of the otoliths of a representative portion of the pilchard catch each year lias been undertaken in order to elucidate the causes of such 102

fluctuations in the abundance of pilchards as may be indicated by changes in the tonnage captured by the fishery. The results of such an examination for the two years 1930 and 1931 are fairly comparable. In the two fishing areas investigated, namely, Nootka sound and Barkley sound, the bulk of the pilchard catch was found to be comprised of fish in their fifth and sixth years. Fish in their fourth and eighth years were not plentiful while those in their seventh year were fairly well represented. In the catch for 1931 there was a slightly greater percentage of fish in their fourth year than was found in the preceding year. G. V. WILBY THE LIFE-HISTORY OF THE LING COD, OPHIODON ELONGATUS GIRARD During 1932 an intensive investigation wis made of life-history phases of the ling cod, particularly those which heretofore had been impossible due to lack of material and opportunity for study. A number of speciniens under one year were taken in seine hauls during the summer. Th.se young forms grow quite rapidly, attaining a length of 10 to 15 cm. in three months and about 20 cm. at the end of the year. Scale gtudy shows that thère is a close parallel between the growth-rate of both sexes until the males mature, about the fourth or fifth year. There is then a pronounced divergence in the growth rates, that of the males becomes decidedly slower while that of the females continues to increase until the females mature, about the eighth or ninth year, at which tire the growth:rate also decelerates. • Corresponding to the greater pirecocity of the males in the matter of maturity, there is a difference in the age to which the two sexes attain, the males seldom reaching the twelfth year whereas the females frequently reach fifteen years or -more. - EVidence has been found of a diversity in the distribution of the sexes during the summer months as the largest males are taken in the deepest waters and the largest females in shallower waters. From a length of 6.5 cm. the ling cod is a fish-eater, although in the first year a large part of the diet consists of Crustacea, chiefly mysids and shrimps. The food has been found to consist of herring, various flounders, gadids, hake, dogfish and sand lances, although small ling cod, black cod, grey cod, squids, ratfish, skates, etc., are frequently taken. The results are based upon the examination of 248 stomachs containing food remains. The habits of these fish were studied under natural conditions, in live-boxes and aquaria. The Manner éf resting on the ventral fins while awaiting their prey, the sudden darting forth, the protective coloration and marking, as well as anatomical observations made, point to a close relationship to thè cottiform fishes. Guarding the eggs by the male is also a cottoid habit. In one small area, one male ling cod and two males of cottids, Aspicottus bison and Hemilepidotus hemilepidotus, were observed guarding their eggs, the behaviours in the three cases being very similar. Spawning was studied at various places during the winter. This took place only in 'strong tidal currents with a temperature range of from 5° to 8°C., where there was an oxygen saturation of between 75 Per cent. and 80 per cent. The large glutinous egg-masses are laid on rocks below the lowest low-tide levels and are seen only when the surface of the water is smooth and when the sunlight is very bright. 103

FISHERIES EXPERIMENTAL STATION (PACIFIC) PRINCE RITPERT, B.C. 1932

The work of the Station during 1932 has been adjusted to meet the reduced • budget without seriously affecting the researches of major importance. The temporary staff has been reduced and the usual special assistance during the summer dispensed with. The work in certain respects has suffered through the • absence of the Bacteriologist, whose services were required in the east, but who has now returned. • The staff is as follows: Mr. D. B. Finn, Director and Biochemist. Mr. H. N. Brocklesby, Associate Chemist. Dr. R. H. Bedford, Associate Bacteriologist. Mr. O. C. Young, Assistant Mechanical Engineer. Mr. O. F. Denstedt (on leave), Scientific Assistant (Chemistry). Mr. F. Charnley, Scientific Assistant (Chemistry). Mi-. B. E. Bailey, Scientific Assistant (Biochemistry). Mr. P. A. Sunderland, Laboratory Assistant (Chemistry). INVESTIGATIONS Stringent ecônomic conditions have greatly diminished the activity of the fishing industry on the western coast of Canada. The stress of rigid economy in manufacture necessitated by reduced financial returns has re-emphasized the necessity for utmost efficiency in processing operations, while diminished demand for existing products, in spite of low prices, has forcefully turned the attention of the industry towards the manufacture of new products and to securing new uses for old products. These ends have guided the activity of the Prince Rupert Station since its establishMent. In the following paragraphs the more important features of the investigations are briefly set forth. More detailed statements may be found under "Investi- gators' Summaries", which have been written by the workers concerned. -

VITAMIN ASSAYS - Particularly valuable have been the vitamin assays of marine products which have been proceeding during the 'past five years. These efforts have assisted in establishing a demand for halibut livers, a product formerly wasted, which has increased the earnings of fishermen in the port of Prince Rupert to the extent of $25,500 during 1932. It is expected that this new demand will spread quickly to other products since it has been shown that the liver oils of the ling cod and salmon have exceptional vitamin potencies. Following the investigations made by this Station, pilchard oil is finding new use in supplementing diets of poultry and cattle with—respect to vitamin D, some thousands of gallons being used for this purpose during 1932. It has been shown that dog-fish liver oil is potent in vitamin A; recently samples of this oil have been found to contain 15,000 units of vitamin A per gram. Shark liver oils have also been found to be very potent in this vitamin. By blendiu pilchard oil' with dogfish liver oil or shark liver oil, a product has been made which is equal in vitamin potency to high-grade medicinal cod- liver oil. The name "Marinol" was invented for it in order to overcome the prejudice which might attach to these oils in the public mind. A co-operative experiment between the British Columbia Department of Public Health and the Fisheries Experimental Station has been arranged in which "Marinol" will be tested for human t onsumption. Under .this arrangement the Station prepares oils which are then fed to the pupils of, the Indian Schools under competent medical supervision. Since the Indian institutions in question cannot afford cod- liver oil it is hoped that the high incidence of tuberculosis amongst the children

I. 104

may be combatted by using the less costly "Marinol". Other institutions are -using "Marinol" experimentally and the indications are- that the demand for pilchard and dogfish liver oil for this purpose Will increase rapidly.

FISH OIL RESEARCH - The chemical investigations have also brought to light other uses for un- saturated fish oils. Thus the studies in hydrogenation are making possible the production of frying oils and shortening fats from pilchard oil. The product is odourless and tasteless and can readily supplant some of the imported cottonseed oil now used for these purposes.. Other investigations have shown that pilchard oil can, by proper 'treatment, be utilized in the manufacture of such protective • coatings as paints, varnishes, waterproof fabrics and japans. Such extensions in the utility of marine products must necessarily be pre- ceded by fundamental studies. Without quantitative data as to the extent, rate and character of reactions, commercial production cannot be carried on with proper ecônomy, neither can a full insight into the possible uses of substances be obtained until their chemical properties and characteristic's are known.. Many of the obscure problems arising from various methods of preparation and pre- servation, for instance, the appearance of "rust" on fish in cold storage and oxidative rancidity in medicinal fish oils can only be solved after the chemical constitution and behaviour of the oils have been determined. Such studies, amongst which may be placed the work on the composition of pilchard oil, the studies in oxidation and the rate of the hydrogenation reaction, have proven to be of great value in the solution of practical problems. Their importance to the work of the Station cannot be over-emphasized. Besides the exploration of potential uses for marine products, the Station has been actively engaged in the improvement of existing methods of production and preservation.

FREEZING -AND COLD STORAGE Most fishing companies who have considerable capital investment in cold- storage plants find it impossible to undertake extensive alterations in design and therefore cannot avail themselves of certain improvements that have been de- veloped by the Board and others. Such improvements involving, as they some- times do, radical departures from standard practice, are of great value to the engineer in the design of new plants. - In order to help those who already have cold-storage plants, a series of studies have been made with a view to improving the stored product and at the same time keeping the requisite structural changes

. in the cold store at a minimum. Thus it has been found that it is better—with respect to dehydration or "shrinkage"—to cool a room to the desired temperature by means of a large area of cooling coil maintained at a temperature near that of the room rather than by a smaller area of coil at a much lower temperature than the room: In this way by increasing the area of a coil four times, "shrinkage" has been reduced by nearly 50 per cent. The same effect is brought about by increasing wall irlsulàtion, since in ti-xis way the temperature difference betw'een the air and the pipes may be decreased. It has also been shown that temperature fluctuations in the stored fish may be minimized by using a specially designed storage bin with an air lock. Various methods of glazing and wrapping have been tested and improvements have been made in the method of stowing frozen fish in cold-storage rooms: Refrigerated railway transport is receiving attention. The work is being undertaken in cooperation with the Experimental Station at Halifax. -At Prince Rupert the engineering laboratories have built a small experimental refrigerator car,. The bunkers in this car are movable so that their efficiency in various posi- tions can be determined under controlled conditions. The aim of the experime'nt is, by means of various improvements, to make possible the shiliment of frozen fish products by freight during the warmer months, without unduly increasing the -105

cost. This is particularly desirable since when the fishing industry becomes ready to market properly frozen fish in preference to iced unfrozen fish a cheap ' and reliable means of transportation will be essential. Attention has also been paid to the biophysics and biochemistry of freezing. It has been shown that amongst the most important changes which accompany freezing is the denaturation of proteins. This is brought about by change in hydrogen ion and salt concentration accompanying the removal of water as ice. The effect is most marked between —2°C. and —3°C. and diminishes as the tem- 4 perature is lowered. Data are being collected concerning the constitution of fish muscle at temperatures below its freezing point so that Individual reactions may be studied in vitro rather than in the complex system of the muscle itself. By studying these reactions not only will the optimum conditions of freezing and storage be found, but information will be obtained regarding control of de- naturation by means of buffers. This is important since "drip" or the escape of nitrogenous liquids from muscle which has been frozen and thawed is due to the - combined effect of denaturation and the rending of tissues by the formation of large ice crystals. FISH SPOILAGE _ The general problem àf fish spoilage includes examination of any undesirable deterioration before or after the death of the animal. So far, work has been con- fined to a study of some of the chemical changes which are accelerated after death. Refined chemical technique has been developed by which it is possible - to detect hydrolysis of the oils within minutes after the death of the fish. The influence of temperature on this change as well as various means of preservation have been studied. An examination is now being made of the relation between protein decomposition and oil hydrolysis in the hope that under certain conditions a determination of the degree of oil hydrolysis may be an index of "freshness". The changes in hydrogen ion concentration of fish in life and death is being reinvestigated by means of a new technique with the glass electrode. An attempt is being made to relate these changes with those occurring in other substances of the muscle. The temperature range of growth in marine bacteria has been studied and it was found that some grew at as low a temperature as —7.5°C., while all of them studied grew at 0°C. It has been found also that chromogenic organisms other than Pseudomonas fluorescens may play a part in the discolouration of halibut. NUTRITIVE VALUE OF CANNED SALMON The biological assay of vitamins A and D in canned sockeye and pink salmon from British Columbia rivers has been completed. It has been found that the oil (which is not to be confused with salmon-liver oil) of both varieties is as potent in vitamin D as is high-grade cod-liver oil, but that the content of vitamin A is very low. The., physical and chemical constants of the oil have been studied. The problem has not been investigated from the statistical point of view. Such work would involve seasonal as well as geographic variations in the varieties and would be beyond the present facilities of the Station. It has been sought to _ place the industry, at whose request the investigation was undertaken, in pos- session of general facts regarding the two varieties, in order that they may better able to market the canned product. - _ ANNUAL CONFERENCE Owing to reduced budgets it was found impossible to hold the annual con- ' ference of Pacific Coast workers of the Biological Board for the current year.

j. PUBLICITY ' During the year there has been a quarterly issue of Progress Reports which has served - to keep the industry informed of the work undertaken by the Board I 106 on this coast. Members of the staff have given addresses to the general public, service clubs and schools. Articles have been written for industrial journals and the Station has had numerous visitors from many parts of Canada and the United States. CONSULTATION - The Station has been consulted by many individuals and companies during the year in matters concerning nearly all branches of the fishing industry. Special assistance was given towards the establishment of halibut-liver reduction plants and to firms producing medicinal pilchard oil.

PUBLICATIONS Bailey, B. E. The vitamin D potency of oil from B.C. canned salmon. Prog. ' Rep. Pac. 13, 13. Bedford, R. H. The viability of the bacterium Pseudomonas fluorescens in aqueous solutions of formaldehyde. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7(12) (Series C, 4). Salt as a control of bacterial decomposition of halibut. Bulletin 29. Brocklesby, H. N. Vitamin A in Pacific coast fish-liver oils. Prog. Rep. Pac. 12, 3. The hydrolysis of the body oil of the salmon. Prog. Rep. Pac. 15, 5. Firm, D. B. Advances in knowledge of freezing. I. Prog. Rep. Pac. 14, 3. Smith, L. F. Fish glue from fish waste. I. Preparation by dialysis. Contr. Canad. Biol. Fish. 7 (14) (Series C, 6). Sùnderland, P. A. Analysis of Pacific coast porpoise oils. Prog. Rep. Pac. 14 14. Young, O. C. Dehydration of fish in cold storage. Prog. Rep. Pac. 14, 12. Relation between coil area, temperature of cooling medium and dehydration in cold storage. Prog. Rep. Pac. 15, 11.

INVESTIGATORS' SUMMARIES BAILEY, B. E. - - THE VITAMIN POTENCY OF OILS FROM B.C. CANNED SALMON • The preliminary program of the canned salmon investigation included, in addition to determinations of physical and chemical constants, a study of the potency in vitamins A and D of the oils from canned B.C. sockeye and pink salmon. The work on vitamin D has been completed. The oils from all six samples were of a slightly lower potency than that of medicinal cod liver oil. - The samples of pink salmon oil showed as high a potency as the sockeye. However, - since the canned pink salmon,has a somewhat lower oil content than canned sockeye, the total amount of vitamin D per can is less in the former than the latter. Considerable difficulty has been experienced in testing the oils for Vitamin A by the colorimetric method. Their Potency in this vitamin is so low that a com- paratively large amount of oil must be used for the test, and other colours are developed which interfere with the measurement of the blue. However, a tech- nique has been worked out which appears to give consistent results. As indicated by this test the canned pink salmon oils contained no vitamin A and the sockeye oils very little. It has been shown by biological assays that the pink salmon oil contained no appreciable quantity of vitamin A, but that in the Skeena sockeye oil there was present a very small amount. Fraser river sockeye oil is now being assayed biologically for this vitamin. The sockeye oils from Skeena and Fraser rivtrs were selected for the biological determinations since they showed the greatest divergence by the colorimetric test. 107

THE VITAMIN A POTENCY OF LING COD LIVER OIL The importance of fish liver oils of high vitamin A potency is now well recognized. Several prominent pharmaceutical houses have been purchasing halibut livers at all the Pacific coast ports where appreciable quantities of halibut are landed. The oil finds a ready market and greater quantities could be used if they were available. Preliminary tests showed that the liver oil of the ling cod was as rich in . vitamin A as the average halibut liver oil. A biological assay of one sample of 4 link cod liver oil and colorimetric tests of several others have confirmed this result. A paper embodying some of these data is nôw in the Press. THE VITAMIN A POTENCY OF SALMON LIVER OIL . As a by-product of the salmon canning industry in British Columbia, large quantities of salmon livers are available. If it could be shown that they contained an oil of high vitamin A potency in appreciable amounts, their potential value would be great. Preliminary colorimetric and biological tests have shown that some samples of salmon liver oil are relatively rich in vitamin A. Although not as potent as halibut or ling cod liver oils, they contain from ten to twenty times as much vitamin A as cod liver oil. COMPARISON OF DIFFERENT METHODS OF PREPARING HALIBUT LIVER OIL The importance of halibut liver oil as a source of vitamin A has already been pointed out. A number of methods of separating the oil from the livers are pos- sible. Experiments have been carried out in order to- find the yield and relative vitamin A potencies of oil separated by 'different methods. It was considered particularly desirable to compare the effect of various solvents on these factors. The solvents used were petroleum ether, carbon tetrachloride, ethyl acetate, ethyl ether, acetone, and ethyl alcohol. The efficiency of the solvents judged by vitamin potency of the product in most cases decreased in the order named above. Where variation from this order was found, acetone and ethyl alcohol were always least efficient.

BEDFORD, R. H. DISCOLOURATION OF FRESH HALIBUT The cfiscolouration of halibut was at first thought to be due to the greenish yellow Pigment characteristic of the bacterium Pseudomonas fluorescens. But later it was noticed that the discolouration consisted of other colours, yellow and orange, and not infrequently a Ted colour was also discernible. Bacteria that produced these colours were isolated from fresh halibut and sea water. Pure cultures of these bacteria were seeded onto halibut and stored at 32°F. (to simulate temperature conditions somewhat comparable to that in the vessel's hold) for seven days, where they produced their characteristic colours—yellow, orange and red. There are then two sources from which discolouration may be caused: (1) the greenish-yellow pigmenrproducink organisins in the ice, and (2) a number of chromogenic %organisms in the sea. THE TEMPERATURE RANGE OF GROWTH OF MARINE BACTERIA The temperature range of growth of some marine bacteria was established in order to place their position of growth in applied bacteriology in the preserva- tion of fish, more 'particularly that of low temperature preservation. Just over 70 organisms were studied: Some grew at —7.5°C.; many others at —5°, and all of them at 0°. The best temperature of growth (optimum) for the majority was from 20° to 25°. 1 11 ■.■ 108 ' - Growth at the low temperatures is important in relation to fish stored in ice, and also it is a factor that must always be considered in an'y scheme for the storage of frozen fish.

BROCKLESBY, H. N. HYDROLYSIS OF THE BODY OIL'OF THE SALMON Postmortem changes taking place in fish are very important from the stand- point of preserVation of this material as food. Having regard to the very active enzymes present in fish tissues one would expect that among such postmortem changes would be the more or less rapid hydrolysis of the oil. Up to the present no data have been put forward showing that these changes do actually occur. The matter has been thoroughly investigated and it has been found that the negative results obtained by previous investigators in this field were due to in- 1- - adequate methods. After a careful study of methods for the isolation of the oil and methods of analysis had been made, the hydrolysis of the oil of salmon under the following conditions was studied: (i) incipient hydrolysis of freshly-caught fish, (ii) during canning, (iii) during cold storage. The following is a summary of the results. (1) Among the postmortem Changes in salmon is the rapid hydrolysis of the oil. (2) The rate of this hydrolysis is greatly affected by temperature. (3) The oil from the absolutely fres- h fish may contain a small but measurable amount of free fatty acids. (4) The commercial exhaust treatment to which canned salmon is subjected does not completely destroy the fat-splitting enzymes present in the tissue. (5) The process of rttorting increases the acid value of the oil of canned salmon. The effect is proportional to the time. (6) Temperatures now used in commercial cold-storage plants do not sufficiently retard the hydrolysis of the oil of stored salmon, acid values of from 6 _to 14 being obtained in specimens stored for periods of from 6 to 12 months. (7) The oil from the outer portions of the fish always shows a lower acid value than that from the inner portion. It is shown that this may be caused by the neutralization -of the free fatty acids by the ammonia present in the cold-storage room. - . - A paper giving the results of the above investigation is in press.

BROCKLESBY, H. N. AND B. E. BAILEY THE PHYSICAL AND 'CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF CANNED SALMON oll..s' Recent studies have indicated that some information regarding the species and quality of fish may be gathered by an analysis of the oil. A preliminary -investigation into the application of this method as a means of examining canned salmon has recently been completed. This included the analysis of a number of cans of sockeye and pink salmon each from three localities. Although other data have been accumulated, the acidity and unsaturation of the oil has yielded the most information. Briefly, the results are as follows: 1. The acidity of the oil of canned salmon. Solvent extraction of the oil from canned salmon yielded oils of high and varying aciditjr. By the use of the improved method of extraction, however, constant values could be obtained. In general, the acidities of the oil from pink salmôn were much higher than those of the sockeye salmon. This is'in keeping with the previous work where it was found that salmon with the smaller amount of oil gave the higher acidities. It was also found that the oil from river-caught fish gave higher acidities than sea- caught fish. 2. The unsaturation of the oil of canned salmon. In 1918, Bailey and Johnson (J. Ind. Eng. Chem. 10, 599, 1918) proposed a method for the identifi- cation of the species of canned salmon based on the determination of the unsatura don of the oil. They found that the oils from each species varied' in unsaturation within certain definite limits which was more or less characteristic of the spedes. The conclusions of these authors were based on very few data • 109

and in view of the importance of the matter, further data have been gathered during this investigation. For pink and sockeye oils it has been found that the iodine value, refractive index and octobromide values fall within definite limits and that the ranges do not overlap. Thus for sockeye oil the iodine values ranged from 135.7 to 151.4 and the pink oil from 157.4 to 161.3. The other values were of a similar order. It appears, for these two oils, that this method can be used for differentiating between species. Within the range of unsaturation of each oil it was found that there was a uniform increase in unsaturation with locality, those fish caught in the more southerly areas showing lower degrees of unsaturation than those caught further north. This corroborates the findings of invkstigators working on other species ' of fish.

BROCKLESBY, H. N. AND F. CHARNLEY - RATE OF HYDROGENATION OF PILCHARD OIL • Further experiments with a closed type of apparatus show that under the conditions of experiments the a'mount of gaseous impurities accumulating in the reaction flask is too small to have any marked effect on the characteristic nature of the rate curve. ,These results, together with other chemical data, have been reported in the paper (now in press) entitled, "Some observations on the hydro- genation of pilchard oil". COMPOSITION OF HYDROGENATED PILCHARD OIL 'Additional insight into the mechanism of the hydrogenation process has - been gained by an analysis of samples of the oil hydrogenated to varying degrees of hardness. By means of these analyses an approximate idea of the kinds of unsaturated glycerides undergoing hydi-ogenation at different stages of the pro- cess has been obtained. During the initial stages of the reaction the greater part of the hydrogen is used up in changing highly unsaturated glycerides into compounds containing only one or two ethenoid bonds in the fatty acids residue and it is not until most of these have been so transformed that solid fatty acids begin to be formed in quantity.

BROCKLESBY, H. N. AND O. F. DENSTEDT POLYMERIZATION AND OXIDATION OF PILCHARD OIL The study of the utilization of oils in the protective coating industries involves at least three major phases of oil chemistry, namely, polymerization, oxidation and a study of film properties. A comprehensive study of pilchard oil has been made from these standpoints, with the following results. Pilchard oil may be polymerized by heating in the presence or absence of air, by heating with isulphur or sulphur chloride, stannous chloride and a variety of other reagents. Polymerization by heat treatment, however, is the only feasible one, for preparation of oils for paint and varnish purposes. When pilchard oil is heated in the absence of air practically no polymerization takes place until a temperature of about 175°C. has been reached. . Up to 200°C. the rate of poly- merization is slow, but at 256°C. the rate accelerates and at 300°C. polymeriza- tion is very rapid and considerable decomposition takes place. Up to 250°C. the free acidity of the oil decreases with time, all values passing through a single point at about the ninth hour of heating. At 300°C., however, the acidity in- creases almost immediately and at a very rapid rate. Decomposition at this temperature is extensive. Viscosity increases_ very rapidly at temperatures above 250°C. aneat 300 all samples after the second hour set to a gel when cooled. Heating pilchard oil in a vacuum, produces a pale oil of low acidity, and when carried out at 275°C. is probably the best method of bodying pilchard oil for paint and varnish purposes. -

110

A polymerization method of considerable merit has been developed in these laboratories which consists in heating the oil while blowing with superheated steam. Decomposition takes place and the non-polymerizable portion distils over. After a certain time the residue polymerizes to a tough rubbery gel. If the process is stopped just before polymerization takes place, the residue is soluble in ordinary organic solvents and this solution, with the addition of a small quan- tity of drier, constitutes a quick-drying varnish with several valuable properties. The effect of catalysts, pigments, and polymerization on the rate of oxygen absorption has also been studied extensively. Pilchard oil oxidizes much more rapidly than does linseed oil. The speed of oxidation is much accelerated by the addition of catalysts. A large number of these have been studied and cobalt linoleate in concentrations of 0.05 per cent. (oxide) has been found to give the best results. The influence of various pigments on the oxidation process shows that certain pigments retard oxidation both in the presence and absence of catalysts.. Those pigments with the greater adsorptive capacity show the greater retarding effect. Considerable data have been accumulated regarding the more common pigments. Oxidation is retarded by polymerization although it is likely that the amount of oxygen eventually taken up is the same in the two cases. The retarding effect is proportional to the amount of polymerization. PROPERTIES OF PILCHARD OIL FILMS A study of the properties of pilchard oil films shows that this oil has many important qualities. The best film is produced by cobalt linoleate. Small 'amounts of lead or cerium driers in conjunction with cobalt' promote uniform drying but detract from the hardness of the films. In general, all fish-oil films are soft, flexible, and when made from the raw-oil are more permeable to moisture than linseed oil films. The softness is due to the large proportion of non-drying glycerides present wh,ich are only partly removed by refrigeration. Hardness of pilchard oil films may, how- ever, be improved by (1) treating the oil with sulphur dioxide, (2) by the combined polymerization and steam distillation method. The films made by the latter process are hard, flexible, non-blooming and impermeable to moisture. The losses entailed in its manufacture are, however, quite high. Pilchard oil films may also be improved by the use of gums, certain salts and by stoving.

FINN, D. B. THE DENATURATION OF FISH PROTEINS BY FREEZING - . . . By using the technique employed in a study of mammalian proteins and described elsewhere (Proc. Roy. Soc. B. 3, 356) it has been found that fish-muscle proteins are rapidly denatured by certain conditions in the frozen state. The effect is most marked between —2°C. and —4°C., and diminishes as the temper- ature is lowered. The phenomenon is being related to changes in hydrogen-ion and salt concentrations and to certain fractions of the niubele protein. , FINN, D B. AND B. E: BAILEY • • THE ICE PHASE IN FROZEN MUSCLE TISSUE One of the principal effects of freezing is a concentration of solutions originally present in a tissue, by the withdrawal of water as ice. This concentration has a marked influence upon the protein system. In order to study this effect, the amount of water frozen out of fish muscle has been determined by a method which we consider to be more trustworthy in certain respects than the calori- metric or dilatometric technique which are usually employed. A large quantity of muscle juice is frozen to equilibrium at a temperaturè a little below its freezing point and the remaining aqueous phase drained away from the ice so formed. The freezing point and water content of this fluid are • 111 accurately determined. These operations are repeated at progressively lower temperatures and further fractions of ice removed. In this way curves of the freezing point and water content are constructed. Halibut muscle juice—the aqueous -phase of the fish muscle—has been studied and it is found that its water content varies with temperature approx- imately as follows : —2°C., 52.5 per cent. water frozen; —3°C., 68 per cent. frozen; —4°C., 75.5 per cent. frozen; —5°C., 80 per cent. frozen; —6°C., 82.7 per cent. frozen.

YOUNG, O. C. COOLING COILS An outline of this investigation was given in the Report of 1931. Work along the lines then indicated has been completed. The results show: (1) that, for a constant cold-storage room temperature, the difference between brine and room temperature, plotted against thermal transmittance U of the walls, is a straight line function; and the effect of increasing the number of coil banks from 1 to 4 is to decrease the difference between brine and room temperatures from 23°F: to 7.2°F., or roughly in those proportions, depending upon• the thickness of wall insulation; (2) the dehydrating effect depends upon the coil area and insulating value of the walls, and is decreased from say 100 per cent. with 1 bank of coils to 73 per cent. with 2 banks of coils, to 58 per cent. with 3 banks and to 47 per cent. with 4 banks; or in these proportions, depending again_ upon the insulation thickness of .the walls; (3) that the dehydrating effect per unit area decreases, as the total evaporating area increases, in the following way. The evaporation from 1 sq. ft. =0.16 lb./week, while that from 4 sq. ft. of surface= 0.11 lb./sq. ft./week; (4) that lowering the temperature level in the room de- creases the dehydrating effect by an amount which can be closely eeimated by calculating the air capacity for holding moisture at the various temperatures involved (brine and room), providing the change in temperature is compensated by increased wall insulation. The results have been made as general as possible by referring them to the thermal conductivity of the walls. Consequently they may be fairly accurately applied to any room for which the wall conductivity is known.

ON THE JACKETED COLD-STORAGE ROOM With the object of placing at the disposal of refrigerating engineers certain information concerning an improved cold-storage room, a jacketed room much like the one originated by Doctor Huntsman, was built at this Station. A de- scription of this room and some of the results obtained with it are given in the Report of 1931. This year the work on the jacketed room was completed and a paper has been prepared embodying the work of bdth years. - Summarizing the results of the entire investigation, the experiments show: (1) that the temperature distribution in the jacketed system of cooling is uniform throughout the rooin and though the brine temperature may fluctuate 4°F., the room temperature remains coustant due to the insulating effect of the wood used in the constructiqn of the inner room; (2) that dehydration depends largely upon the rate of exchange between the inside and outside air; and (3) that dehydration (in the room investigated) expressed as a function of exposed area follows the curve Y=549Vx--, where Y =dehydration in grams per week, and X =exposed area in square Metres. , Other factors of importance which evolved from these experiments were: (1) the advantages resulting from the usé of hatchways instead of the ordinary type of door, as discussed in the 1931 Repàrt; and (2) the use of boxes equipped with air locks for the storage of fish in ordinary cold-storage rooms. 16 112

DEHYDRATION OF FISH IN COLD STORAGE As a i-esult of recent researches, by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries, in the reducing of "shrinkage" of frozen fish in cold storage, by the use of coatings of edible oils, some experiments were conducted at the Canadian Fish and Cold Storage plant here, -to compare the loss in weight of salmon and halibut treated with crisco, mazola, cottonseed oil, pilchard oil, and ice-glaze. - Using the criterion of the loss in overall weight, the oil treatrnents gave the best results, since in no case did the loss, in 12 weeks, exceed 1.9 per cént. of the weight of the treated fish, whereas the ice-glazed fish lost 2.5 per cent. On the other hand, the loss in the latter case was due to evaporation of the ice coating, so the fish were unaltered in weight. With the oil-treated fish, however, the loss was due to dehydration of the fish. This being so, the ice glaze would seem to be the best method of protection tried.

• Another factor in favour of the ice-glazed fish was their appearance, which was quite normal and glossy, after thawing. Those treated with crisco had dried out in places where the coating F?ad cracked or chieped off, which rendered the specimens decidedly unsightly. The mazola, cottonseed and pilchard oil-treated fish were all discoloured. Oxidation of the oils or a dissolving out of certain pigments from the skin had imparted a brownish hue to the coating which made the fish appear stale and sour. This impression was accentuated in the case of halibut by the noticeable brown colour of the blood around the pokes and napes. On the whole, then, the experiments show that the new oil treatment methods as recommended by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries are inferior to ice-glazing, both from the viewpoint of effects on dehydration and appearance. CELLOPHANE AS A MEANS OF PREVENTING DEHYDRATION The increasing importance of packaged fish such as ice fillets, where de- hydration is promoted by the large proportion of exposed cut surface to volume, lead to some determinations of the loss in weight of fish stored as follows: (1) in plain transparent cellophane envelopes; (2) in moisture-proof cellophane envel- opes; (3) heavily glazed with ice; (4) untreated. The experiments were con- ducted with halibut "chickens", some of which were treated as above before being frozen, others being treatéd after. The fish were hung in the Station's 0°F. room for 20 weeks with the following results. (1) Those placed in plain cellophane envelopes before freezing lost 10.2 per cent. of their_ weight, while those enveloped after freezing lost only 8.7 per cent. (2) Those placed in moisture-proof cellophane envelopes lost nothing in total weight, but it was noticed that ice crystals had collected on the inside of the envelope. Upon removal from the envelopes it was found that the fish }fad lost 0.8 per cent. of their weight in the 20 weeks. (3) Those heavily ice-glazed lost 18.2 pér cent, of their weight. (4) Those left untreated lost about 11 per cent. The appearance of the fish, at the end of the test period, was dry, scaly and unattractive, with the exception of the glazed fish which appeared unaltered. Even those in the moisture-proof envelopes appeared dried.in the frozen state, though they.had lost less than 1 per cent. of their weight. These experiments show that where packaging is necessary with frozen fish, moisture-pioof cellophane is v'ery effective in decreasing dehydration, and that the plain cellophane is comparatively useless from that standpoint.

THE EFFECT OF BAFFLE BOARDS UPON DEHYDRATION OF FISH IN COLD STORAGE _ The commercial rnethod of storing frozen fish in piles in the cold-storage rooms results in a certain decrease in evaporation from the glaze, due to the increased resistance offered to air circulation. It was reasoned that by placing baffle-boards spaced throughout the pile, and thus offering still greater resistance to the air, that dehydration would be further decreased. The difficulty of making a test with baffle-boards on a large scale was appreciated, so the following labor- 113

atory experiment was made. Three halibut of approximately the same weight were heavily glazed and suspended in the Station's 0°F. cold-storage room. One • fish was suspended resting upon a board somewhat largêr than the projected area of the fish; aUothér fish wàs suspended under a similar board, and a third halibut was suspended free of any such board. Weighings were taken weekly and the losses expressed as a percentage of the total weight of the fish. - The following results were obtained at the end of seven weeks. The fish resting upon the board lost 5.7 per cent. of its weight in that time; the fish with :ithe board above it lost 7.9 per cent.; while the third fish with no board lost 8.7 per cent. If we take the latter case as 100 per cent., the other two cases represent only 67 per cent. and 89 per cent. losses respectively. It will be recognized that • Fi one baffle-board would have the combined effect of the first two results given above, or, expressed in another way, it would offer 33 per cent. protection to the fish above and 11 per cent , to the fish below. Whether these figures apply to fish in a large pile is doubtful, but they do show that baffles of some kind would decreas'e evaporaiion somewhat. To use boàrds in practice might cause too great a reduction in storage space, but a moisture-proof paper or fabric would not have that objectionable feature, and would be just as effective as the wood in reducing evaporation. 7:A

d.

_ 114

SOMMAIRE DU RAPPORT SUR LES TRAVAUX

DU BUREAU DE BIOLOGIE DU CANADA

EN 1932

PAR LE PRÉSIDENT, M. J. PLAYF.AIR MCMURRICH

L'année 1932 marque le vingtième anniversaire de l'institution par. Acte du Parlement du Bureau de Biologie du Canada. Pendant les vingt ans de son exis- tence, cet organisme n'a cessé d'agrandir le champ de ses activités ni d'étendre la portée de ses travaux de laboratoire. Dans son application à 1932, cet énoncé conserve toute sa valeur' en dépit des conditions défavorables au milieu desquelles s'.est opéré le fonctionnement du Bureau. La cimstitution du personnel du Bureau, telle que donnée dans le rapport de 1931, n'a pas varié. Pendant la dernière année, les quatre stations dirigées par ' le Bureau, à savoir : la Station biologique de Saint-Andrews, N.B., avec poste auxiliaire à Ellerslie, I.P.E., la Station biologique de Nanaimo, C.B., avec poste auxiliaire au lac Cultus, C.B. et lès Stations d'expérimentations appliquées à la pêche de Halifax, N.E. et de Prince Rupert, C.B., ont déployé leur activité habituelle et l'ont même surpassée par la multiplicité des questions étudiées et l'importance des résultats obtenus. Le Bureau se rejouit de la rénomination de M. D.B. Finn au poste de direc- teur de la station de Prince-Rupert; il apporte avec lui un enthousiasme renou- velée jointe à une expérience de prix. Il convient de signaler en ce rapport le premier événement fâcheux survenu dans l'histoire des stations, à savoir: la destruction par le feu du laboratoire de Saint-Andrews, le 9 mars dernier, à la suite d'une explosion de gaz produit dans l'appareil de chauffage. Par bonheur, la conflagration ne s'étendit pas aux autres bâtiments de la Station mais les pertes n'en furent pas moins affligeantes car elles comportèrent la destruction de la bibliothèque, d'importantes archives et de collections de plancton et d'autres matériaux, représentant le travail de plusieurs années. L'intervention prompte et efficace du directeur et de. son personnel rendit possible la reconstruction partielle du bâtiment en matériaux à l'épreuve du feu et cela à temps pour la reprise des travaux d'été de la station. Il reste, toutefois, beaucoup à faire avant que n'en soient parachevés l'installation et l'aménagement du laboratoire ainsi que la reconstitution de la bibliothèque. C'est un agréable devoir de rappeler ici les offres généreuses de livres et de bl-o- chures qui sont venues de partout et qui forment déjà le noyau d'une nouvelle bibliothèque. Pendant l'année, les travaux de la Commission Internationale des Pêcheries de la baie de Passamaquoddy furent poursuivis, avec la Station de Saint-Andrews comme base d'opérations pendant la saison d'été, le bureau-chef de cette com- mission ayant plus tard été transféré à l'Institut océanographique de Woods Hole', Mass. - On trouvera, attachés aux rapports des directeurs, des résumés donnant les résultats obtenus par les travailleurs scientifiques aux diverses Stations. Parmi tant de questions intéressantes, il n'est pas facile de choiser pour faire de quel- ques-unes une mention spéciale; cependant il convient de faire une Certaine selection à cause du nombre et la diversité des recherches. En ce qui concerne le station de Saint-Andrews, il n'est pas hors de propos d'attirer l'attention des intéressés sur le fait qu'on a continué l'étude du prob- lème compliqué de l'histoire naturelle des saumons de l'Atlantique. Une atten- tion suivie accordée à la pêche du hareng dans la baie de Fundy servit à démontrer l'existence d'une relation étroite entre les prises de ce poisson et les conditions physiques, spécialement la température et la salinité, Les expériences sur la 115

fertilisation des lacs et des étangs d'eau douce ont été poursuivies, soit dans des réservoirs d'expérimentation .à la Station, soit, sur une plus large base dans les lacs Chamcook. La valeur des résultats obtenus par l'étude des pêcheries de la baie de Fundy; achevée l'année dernière, fit naître l'idée d'une semblable entre- prise en ce qui concerne les pêcheries de la côte au sud de la Nouvelle-Ecosse C'est pourquoi des travaux de recherches furent commencés dans la région de I Halifax, le laboratoire du Passage de l'Est constituant une base commode d'oper- • ations pour la conduite de l'investigation. Des données sur l'existence et la 1 4 11 distribution, dans la région, de certains poissons comestibles furent recueillies et des observations hydrographiques servirent à révéler l'existence de couches d'eau de densités différentes aussi bien près des côtes que plus loin au large et cette intéressante constatation exigera de nouvelles recherches. A la baie de Richmond, I.P.E., l'étude de l'élévage des huîtres a été pour- suivie avec énergie. Les effets de la température et de la salinité sur les jeunes mollusques et sur les cellules germinales ont été précisés. On a découvert un procédé susceptible de rendre propres à la pratique de l'ostréiculture certains fonds vaseux inutilisables dans leur état actuel et on a recueilli des preuves de l'inversion chez l'huître indigène des sexes mâle et femelle. Une exploration fut faite de la baie de Shédiac en vue de s'assurer si cette région convient ou non à l'élévage des huîtres. Dans la Colombie britannique, la cessation du concours, jusque là fourni par le gouvernement provincial pour l'étude du célan et de la pêche de ce poisson, eut naturellement pour effet de ralentir quelque peu la poursuite des recherches mais on a fait tout de même des progrès dans l'étude de l'histoire naturelle du célan. Au lac Cultus, les expériences sur l'efficacité relative de la fécondation naturelle et artificielle des saumons sockeye furent interrompues; le nombre de poissons qui sont montés a été si abondant que les appareils à incubation n'ont pu suffire à l'abondance des oeufs disponibles. Toutefois, une nouvelle tentative fut faite en vue de réempoissonner certaines eaux dépeuplées en transportant les oeufs à des cours d'eau appropriés dans la région supérieure du bassin du fleuve Fraser. Une autre expérience de transplantation des oeufs fut tentée par le transport d'environ un million d'oeufs de saumon rose de la rivière Tlell au ruisseau McAlpin. On attache une importance toute particulière à cette expéri- ence puisque la migration fluviale des saumons roses se produit tous les deux ans et que la montée de ces poissons dans la rivière Tlell alterne avec celle de la région de Masset. Si l'essai réussit, il servira à indiquer la possibilité de produire une montée migratrice annuelle des saumons roses. L'étude des enfoncements et. échancrures de la côte occidentale, entreprise l'année dernière, a été poursuivie; les baies Jervis et Tuba ayant été explorées avec des résultats d'une grande portée aux points de vue géologique et océano- graphique aussi bien que biologique. On a consacré beaucoup d'attention aux problèmes relatifs à l'ostréiculture sur la côte du Pacifique où les huîtres de l'est et du Japon ont•été introduites. Une étude sur la ponte, l'essaimage et la croissance de ces huîtres et de l'huître indigène a servi à témoigner de la grande vigueur de l'huître japonaise et de l'utilité qu'il y aurait à en généraliser l'élevage. A la Station expérimentale de Halifax, on s'est de nouveau livré à l'étude des problèmes relatifs à la congélation et au fumage du poisson. Une étude des transformations çhimiques provoquées par les divers procédés de congélation a été entreprise et on s'est livré- à des recherches sur la omposition des fumées utilisées dans le fumage du poisson. Des perfectionnements ont été apportées à l'appareil fumigène. L'appareil de fumage au moyen d'air traité en opération, il y a un an, à Lunenburg a été en opération dans le cours de l'année et a donné satisfaction après certaines modifications jugées nécessaires par l'expérience. On a aussi consacré qu'elque attention aux conditions dans lesquelles se pratique le transport des homards et celui du poisson gelé. • Une étude importante faite à la station expérimentale de Prince-Rupert, C.B., a été celle relative à la composition et à l'utilisation des huiles de poisson. On a 116 constaté que par le mélange de certaines huiles de poisson, il était possible de produire une huile d'une qualité non seulement égale mais même supérieure à l'huile de foie de morue en ce qui concerne sa valeur en vitamines. Ce mélange de composition déterminée, désignée sous le nom de marinol est actuellement utilisée par le Btireau Public d'Hygiene de la Colombie britannique. Un examen 'des huiles des saumons de la côte occidentale a démontré qu'elles diffèrent suffisamment en saturation chez les diverses espèces pour rendre possible l'iden- tification des espèces dont elles proviennent; de plus, comme la formation d'acides gras libres procède avec une vitésse définie après la mort des poissons, il est possible de déterminer approximativement, par l'examen des huiles, le temps qui s'est écoulé depuis la capture. Les travaux éducationels du personnel des laboratoires ont été plus impor- tants encore que par le passé. Le cinquième cours au bénéfice des pêcheurs eut lieu à la Station de Halifax du 27 janvier au 8 mars; 28 ont suivi ce cours. Le Bureau remercie vivement Monsieur G. R. Earl et Monsieur R. Gray, du Départe- ment des Pêcheries pour leur aide dans les leçons sur le traitement industriel du poisson; au docteur M. Cumming et au professeur W. V. Longley du Département de l'agriculture de la Nouvelle-Ecosse pour avoir apporté leur concours dans les leçons sur les ressources naturelles; au professeur A. S. Walker pour ses leçons sur les ressources naturelles; à Monsieur R. H. Davison pour un cours sur les-mo- teurs d'engines et au capitaine H. M. O'Hara pour un cours sur la navigation. Du 10 au 16 mars, un cours de répétition fut donné à la Station de Halifax au bénéfice des surintendants et des inspecteurs de pêche des provinces maritimes et les membres de la Station de Halifax ont, comme d'habitude, coopéré dans le cours de pêche fourni par l'Université de Dalhousie. Sur la côte occidentale, le personnel des Stations donna à la Station de Nanaimo, au profit des inspecteurs de la Colombie britannique, un cours qui s'étendit du 15 au 27 février et auquel assistèrent vingt-sept inspecteurs. Pendant l'été, du 4 juillet au 16 juillet, un cours fut donné par les membres du personnel de la Station de Nanaimo à dix-sept pisciculteurs adjoints de la Colombie britan- nique. Ce cours eut lieu à Sorrento sur le lac Shuswap.